JP2023184685A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of executing appropriate control.SOLUTION: When identification information for showing a specific determination result is displayed on display means for displaying identification information for showing a determination result by determination means, privilege advantageous to a player is imparted. A performance is executed by performance execution means on the basis of a result of prior determination executed by prior determination means on the basis of information stored in storage means before determination by the determination means, and a prohibition period of prohibiting execution of prior determination by prior determination means is set by prohibition period setting means, thus enhancing interest in a game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are bonus games that are advantageous.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-217766

However, there was a need to further improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes: an information acquisition means capable of acquiring information; a storage means in which information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored; A discriminating means capable of performing discrimination based on the information, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means, and an identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result on the display means. and a privilege awarding means capable of awarding advantageous benefits to the player when displayed, and prior discrimination is made based on the information stored in the storage means before the discrimination by the discrimination means. a pre-discrimination means capable of performing the above-mentioned pre-discrimination, a production execution means capable of executing a production based on the result of the pre-discrimination by the pre-discrimination means, and a prohibition on execution of the pre-discrimination by the pre-discrimination means. and prohibition period setting means capable of setting a prohibition period.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the prohibition period setting means is capable of setting a first prohibition period and a second prohibition period that is longer than the first prohibition period. , the prior determination means executes the prior determination if the specific condition is not met if it is not within the second prohibition period, and if the specific condition is not met, the prior determination means executes the prior determination The above-mentioned advance determination can be executed unless it is within the prohibited period.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the prohibition period setting means is configured to perform the specific effect based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. It is configured such that a prohibition period can be set corresponding to the period in which the performance is performed.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, information acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means in which information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored, and information acquired by the information acquisition means based on the information stored in the storage means. a discriminating means capable of performing discrimination; a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means; and when the display means displays identification information for indicating a particular discrimination result. a benefit granting means capable of granting benefits advantageous to the player; and a priori player capable of performing preliminary determination based on the information stored in the storage means before being determined by the determining means. a determination means, a performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means, and a prohibition period during which execution of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means is prohibited. and configurable prohibition period setting means.

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the prohibition period setting means is capable of setting a first prohibition period and a second prohibition period that is longer than the first prohibition period, and the advance determination means is capable of setting a first prohibition period and a second prohibition period that is longer than the first prohibition period. If the specified condition is not met, the preliminary determination may be executed if the second prohibited period is not within the first prohibited period. It is composed of

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, it has a specific effect execution means that can execute a specific effect based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the prohibition period setting means is configured to be able to set a prohibition period corresponding to the period in which the specific effect is executed. It is something that

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective front view of a game board. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the game board taken along the line VI-VI in FIG. 2. FIG. (a) is a front view of the ball throwing unit, and (b) is a side view of the ball throwing unit. (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball throwing unit, and (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the ball throwing unit. (a) is a front view of the distribution unit, and (b) is a side view of the distribution unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the sorting unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit. (a) is a sectional view of the distribution unit taken along line XIIa-XIIa in FIG. 9(a), and (b) is a sectional view of the distribution unit taken along line XIIb-XIIb in FIG. 12(a). (a) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the distribution unit in range XIIIa of FIG. 12(b). (a) is a front view of the passage unit, and (b) is a side view of the passage unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the passage unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passage unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of the game board and operation unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is a back view of the game board. It is a front perspective view of a game board. It is a rear perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the central component unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central component unit. 19 is an enlarged front view of the game board in range XXVI of FIG. 18. FIG. FIG. 27 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. 26. 27 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line XXVIII-XXVIII in FIG. 26. FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board. 19 is an enlarged front view of the game board in range XXXI of FIG. 18. FIG. 32 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board taken along the line XXXII-XXXII in FIG. 31. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the sorting unit. 19 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board in range XXXV of FIG. 18. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating unit. 37 is a sectional view of the operating unit taken along the line XLIV-XLIV in FIG. 36. FIG. 45 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the operating unit in range XLV in FIG. 44. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view of the operating unit taken along the line XLIV-XLIV in FIG. 36. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating unit. (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the outer member, the elevating plate member, and the resistance generator in range XLIXa in FIG. 47, and (b) is a front perspective view of the outer member in range XLIXb in FIG. 47. (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating plate member, inner member, displacement member, and rotational posture auxiliary member in range La of FIG. 47, and (b) is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement member and rotational posture auxiliary member in range Lb of FIG. 47. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the member. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting action production unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the light emitting action production unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting action production unit. (a) is a front view of the right intermediate connecting member, (b) is a side view of the intermediate connecting member as viewed in the direction of arrow LIVb in FIG. 54(a), and (c) is a front view of the intermediate connecting member on the right side. 54(d) is a sectional view of the intermediate connecting member taken along the line LIVd-LIVd in FIG. 54(a). FIG. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the operation unit along the LV-LV line in FIG. 36. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the operation unit along the LV-LV line in FIG. 36. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the operation unit along the LV-LV line in FIG. 36. (a) to (c) are schematic side views of the first elongated hole, the second elongated hole, and the curved elongated hole, schematically showing the first elongated hole, the second elongated hole, and the curved elongated hole. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. (a) to (c) are schematic front views of a fastening portion of a displacement member, a long hole of a connected hole, and a support hole. 37 is a sectional view of the operating unit taken along the line LXIV-LXIV in FIG. 36. FIG. 37 is a sectional view of the operating unit taken along the line LXIV-LXIV in FIG. 36. FIG. 37 is a sectional view of the operating unit taken along the line LXIV-LXIV in FIG. 36. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the operation unit taken along the line LXVII-LXVII in FIG. 36. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the operation unit taken along the line LXVII-LXVII in FIG. 36. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the operation unit taken along the line LXVII-LXVII in FIG. 36. FIG. (a) is a front view of a distribution unit in a third embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit. (a) is a front view of a distribution unit in a fourth embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit. It is a partially enlarged front view of a game board in a fifth embodiment. 73 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board taken along the line LXXIII-LXXIII in FIG. 72. FIG. 37 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the LV-LV line in FIG. 36. FIG. 37 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine along a line corresponding to the LV-LV line in FIG. 36. FIG. (a) to (c) are schematic side views of a guide part and an L-shaped slot in a seventh embodiment, schematically showing the guide part and the L-shaped slot. (a) to (c) schematically show the second elongated hole, the curved elongated hole, the third elongated hole, the upper part of the first elongated hole, and the lower part of the first elongated hole in the eighth embodiment; It is a schematic side view of a long hole, a 3rd long hole, the 1st long hole upper part, and the 1st long hole lower part. (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the displacement member and the light emitting operation production unit in the ninth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the LXXVIIIa-LXXVIIIa line in FIG. 37. (a) and (b) are front views of a rotating member and attitude detection means in a tenth embodiment. It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device. It is a back view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. (a) to (d) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the procedure for changing settings in the first embodiment, and (e) to (g) are diagrams for confirming settings in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the procedure for (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division settings and effective line settings of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of the pending look-ahead effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of the display mode of the pending look-ahead effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment. 81 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of a pending look-ahead effect displayed in 81. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment when the reservation upper limit is reached, and (b) is a diagram showing the third symbol display in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when there is a jackpot pending when the pending upper limit is reached, which is displayed on the device 81. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during SP time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment. 81 is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the 30th rotation during the SP time displayed at 81. FIG. It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the 30th rotation variation effect during the SP time after pressing the frame button 22 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, (b) is FIG. 2 is a diagram schematically showing the relationship between the type of prefetch effect and the prefetch prohibition period in one embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the variation performance at the end of the SP time when the remaining variation time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment is 20 seconds or more; b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode during the suggestion performance high certainty period displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of setting suggestion performance during SP time in the first embodiment. (a) to (d) are timing charts showing the passage of time from power-on and the flow of variable effects in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a high-speed variation mode in which the special symbol variation is the 81st in the probability variation state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a variation in which the 81st special symbol variation is off by 6 seconds in the probability variation state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the high-speed variation mode when the 81st special symbol variation is a variation per 12 seconds in the probability variation state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment. (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a pseudo winning variation performance (6 seconds) that is executed after the pseudo high-speed variation is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment. (a-1) to (c-2) are timing charts showing the flow of effects executed when a high-speed fluctuation period is set in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment. 81 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of obtaining a predetermined number of prize balls during a jackpot game, which is displayed in step 81. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an additional benefit display screen during a jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the promotion performance in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the benefit. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the end of the jackpot during the SP time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the jackpot ends in the SP time. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the 3-symbol display device 81 at the end of the jackpot when the SP time is missed. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an overview of various counters in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing part of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the first embodiment. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special symbol jackpot random number table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically depicting a normal symbol per random number table in the first embodiment. be. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern selection table in the first embodiment; FIG. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a time saving/probability variation table which is a part of the variation pattern selection table in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a high-speed variation variation pattern selection table that is a part of the variation pattern selection table in the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a variation pattern scenario table in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a production switching table in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a setting suggestion effect selection table in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a look-ahead prohibition period selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the hold upper limit effect selection table in the first embodiment. It is. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a table for selecting the number of performance executions in the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a mission selection table in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a promotion point selection table in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a promotion effect selection table in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the timekeeping device in the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a register table in the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device in a first embodiment. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams illustrating images when the power is turned on. (a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams illustrating images during boot processing. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface B. FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a variation execution determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol 1 variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol 2 variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the starting prize winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 2 is a flowchart showing a prefetch process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a through gate passage process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 2 is a flowchart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing initial setting processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a set value control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing jackpot control processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 2 is a flowchart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the time acquisition process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart showing standby processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 2 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 2 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the held pitch number command reception process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a pre-read effect execution determination process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing winning command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing jackpot-related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the round effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the stop processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 2 is a flowchart showing boot completion processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 2 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing production mode setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing time-saving/probability change effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the period effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the stop type performance setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/presentation processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the elapsed time confirmation process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing specialized mode setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing. 7 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing round number command processing. 7 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing a fluctuation stop command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 2 is a flowchart showing notification command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing error command processing. 7 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing. 7 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment. 81 is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the lucky effect lottery displayed in 81. FIG. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of the suspended continuous performance when there is no overlap with the SP time period displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the suspended continuous performance It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment during a pending continuous performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a shortened hold continuous performance when a part overlaps with the SP time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a look-ahead regulation period table in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the alternative production selection table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing jackpot related processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart showing round effect setting processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hold continuous effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing alternative effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a look-ahead effect screen during SP time preparation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a modified example of the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a look-ahead effect screen during SP time preparation. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode when SP time enters during the look-ahead performance displayed on the 3rd pattern display device 81 in a modification. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the display mode of the pending symbols changes to a specific display mode due to the pending change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment. (b) is an example of a display screen that is displayed when eight pending symbols are acquired in a state where pending symbols in a specific display mode are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment. (c) is an example of a display screen that is displayed when the specific display mode changes to the normal display mode due to the pending change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment. (d) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the display mode of the pending symbols changes from the specific display mode to the special display mode due to the pending change performance. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a pending change effect selection table in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the held ball number command process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hold mode setting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart showing winning command reception processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the reservation change production setting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart showing liquid crystal performance execution management processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing four variation pattern selection tables in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an end mode selection table in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the elapsed time confirmation process 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing end screen setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing standby processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of a ROM of the audio lamp control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a mimetic diagram showing typically six production switching tables in a 6th embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a prefetching prohibition period selection 6 table in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed pre-read effect execution decision processing 6 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart showing winning command reception processing 6 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the first 1.5 second pseudo-miss fluctuation in the high-speed fluctuation mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) , is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the second 1.5-second pseudo-miss variation in the high-speed variation mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. (a) to (f) are timing charts showing the display contents of pending symbols during the high-speed fluctuation mode in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flow chart showing winning command reception processing 7 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the winning effect setting process during high-speed display executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed stop processing 7 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart showing time-saving/probability change production setting processing 7 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart showing liquid crystal performance execution management processing 7 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo hold effect setting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode after boot processing during a setting change in the high-speed fluctuation mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the eighth embodiment; It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode when the volume level is raised during the setting change displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in 8th embodiment.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 16, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the front side of the page is referred to as the front (front) side, and the back side of the page is referred to as the rear (back) side of the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1. In addition, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side will be explained respectively. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (for example, see FIG. 2) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shell formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

A front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12 and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the inner frame 12 are provided on the front side of the inner frame 12. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening/closing axis for the front frame. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface on its left side for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the player's operation, and the ball is thereby hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. As described above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and a number of nails for guiding balls (shown below the center frame 86, and in the upper half of the game area). (not shown) and a windmill (not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning hole 63, first winning hole 64, second winning hole 140, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80 etc., and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and allows the player to see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are accessed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws, etc. Fixed by

Note that the base plate 60 may be formed from a wooden plate member. In this case, on the outside of the center frame 86, it becomes possible to shield various structures disposed from the front side to the back side of the base plate 60 from being visible to the player.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, there is a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is divided by the two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball has won into the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 140, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable mode mode by the lighting condition. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held in response to winnings in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 4R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "4R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after . In addition, "4R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which after the maximum number of rounds is 4 rounds, the state shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of In the high probability state (during certain variation) in this embodiment, the jackpot probability increases for a predetermined number of variations (in this embodiment, 100 variations), and the probability of winning a second symbol (described later) increases, resulting in a second This includes a game state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the winning hole 140. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) among the "low probability states" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability is the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 140 is increased. Refers to the state of the game in which it is easy to win a ball. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a state in which the game is neither changing probability nor shortening the time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol has increased).

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 of the distribution device 300, which will be described later, in the first round of the jackpot game, the game state after the end of the jackpot game changes by 100. During the number of times, it will be in a high probability state. In addition, if it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, the game state after the end of the jackpot game will be in the time saving state for a period of 100 fluctuations.

During the probability change and time saving, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 140a (electric accessory) attached to the second winning hole 140 is released is changed, compared to the normal period. It will be set for a long time. When the electric accessory 140a is in an open state (open state), the ball enters the second prize opening 140 more easily than when the electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 140, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second prize opening 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 140a is released than usual. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change, and the electric accessory 140a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the time when the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is released or the number of times the electric accessory 140a is released in one win is not determined, and the winning of the second symbol is not determined. It may be possible to change only the probability to increase it compared to normal.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 displays the third symbol in synchronization with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by a winning (starting winning) in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that displays a variable display, and an LED that displays a second symbol in a variable manner triggered by the passage of a ball through the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81 of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front.

In this embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is fastened and fixed to a back case fixed to the back of the game board 13, and the center frame 86 is arranged so as to frame the window (center opening 60b) of the base plate 60. It is arranged. That is, when viewed from the front, it appears that the center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81, but in reality, the third symbol display device 81 and the center frame 86 are arranged apart from each other in the front and back. has been done.

The third symbol display device 81 is configured with a large liquid crystal display of, for example, 9 inches in size, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower portions are displayed. Three symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device alternately lights up an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is activated for a predetermined period of time. It is configured so that it is activated (opened) only when the

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter when the gaming state is changing probability or during time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and time saving periods, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short period of time, so it is possible to perform more winning lots than during normal times.
Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given more chances to have the electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140 in the open state. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second winning opening 140.

In addition, during the probability change or time reduction, you can also enter the second prize opening 140 during the probability change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or number of openings of the electric accessory 140a per win, etc. If the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if you set the time required for the variable display of the second symbol to be shorter during the probability change or time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 140a may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right areas of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a portion of the balls fired at the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and displayed on a second symbol holding lamp (not shown). is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (for example, eight). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be located below the variable display unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first prize opening 64 through which a ball can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 140 in which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 140, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the second winning port switch. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 each serve as one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 are set to different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize opening 140 may be five.

An electric accessory 140a is attached to the second prize opening 140. This electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for balls to enter the second prize opening 140. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 140a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140.

As mentioned above, during probability change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the second symbol to fluctuate is also shorter, so in the second symbol fluctuate display, "○" ” becomes easier to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change and time saving, the time during which the electric accessory 140a is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during the probability change and time saving period, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second prize opening 140 compared to the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 140, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning hole 140 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second winning hole 140, and balls can always be won.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessories attached to the second winning hole 140 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win in the second winning hole 140, so it is difficult to enter the second winning hole 140. Then, the player shoots the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize opening 64, the user has many opportunities to win a jackpot lottery, resulting in a jackpot. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for this.

On the other hand, during probability change or time saving, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is likely to be in the open state, and the second winning hole 140 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 140 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and the ball is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability jackpot by winning a prize in the second winning hole 140.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is left-right symmetrical, it is possible to aim at the first winning hole 64 by "hitting right" or aiming at the second winning hole 140 by "hitting left". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment tells the player how to shoot the ball depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the game into "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the trouble of changing the way the ball is hit can be eliminated.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is arranged below the first winning hole 64, and a specific winning hole 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, a jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by lighting up the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position may also be the lower right side of the first winning hole 64 or the first The location is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, but may be located to the left of the variable display unit 80, for example.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a pasting space K1 is provided for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 140 are guided through the out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown).

On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various parts (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged (in FIG. 2, (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and an opening/closing plate 65b of the specific winning opening 65a (FIG. A solenoid 209 is connected to the solenoid 209, which consists of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side with the lower side as an axis, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, etc., and the MPU 201 connects to these via the input/output port 205. It sends various commands and control signals to the device.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 648, 820, solenoids 651, and the like.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

With reference to FIGS. 5 and 6, the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing ball unit 970 disposed on the base plate of the game board 13 in the first embodiment will be described. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 5 and 6, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13. In addition, in FIG. 5, illustration of units (for example, center frame 86 (refer FIG. 2), etc.) other than the winning a prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 arrange|positioned on the base board 60 is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIG. 5, the base plate 60 has a through hole 60a that penetrates in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 at the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 5) of the central opening where the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is attached. is formed by router processing.

The through hole 60a is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the front unit 940, which will be described later, when viewed from the front, and a drive unit 960 and a specific winning a prize unit 950 arranged in the front unit 940 are inserted inside.

On the base plate 60, a winning opening unit 930 is arranged from the gaming area (front) side, and a ball throwing unit 970 is arranged from the opposite (back) side from the gaming area, and each is fastened and fixed with a tapping screw or the like. In addition, the detailed structure of the prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 will be described later.

FIG. 6 is a sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line VI-VI in FIG. In FIG. 6, the arrangement of the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 in the assembled state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 6, the passages of the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 are connected in a state in which they are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 6), and the convex portion formed on the ball throwing unit 970 is It is inserted into a protrusion formed on the front unit 940.

To explain in detail, in the first ball throwing section 942g and the inflow port 982d, the second protrusion 982d1 formed at the inflow port 982d is arranged inside the first recessed notch 942g1 formed at the first ball throwing section 942g. Further, in the second ball throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b, a protrusion 981b1 formed on the side wall portion 981b is arranged inside a second recessed notch 942c1 formed on the second ball throwing portion 942c. Thereby, the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 can be easily aligned when assembled to the base plate 60.

Next, the overall configuration of the ball throwing unit 970 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8.
7(a) is a front view of the ball throwing unit 970, and FIG. 7(b) is a side view of the ball throwing unit 970. 8(a) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball throwing unit 970, and FIG. 8(b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the ball throwing unit 970.

As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the ball throwing unit 970 includes a distribution unit 980 that is disposed on the player side (game area side) and has a space inside which a game ball can be inserted, and a game area of the distribution unit 980. and a passage unit 990 disposed on the opposite side.

The sorting unit 980 includes an opening (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b) that is continuous with the first winning port 64 and second winning port 140 of the winning port unit 930 described above, and the opening (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b) ) can be received inside the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the gaming area via the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140. Note that a detailed explanation of the distribution unit 980 will be given later.

The passage unit 990 is disposed on one side of the distribution unit 980 in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). The passage unit 990 has a plurality of openings (first through hole 991a to second through hole 991d) on the surface facing the distribution unit 980, and receives game balls thrown inside the distribution unit 980 through the openings. A detailed explanation of the passage unit 990 will be given later.

Next, the configuration of the distribution unit 980 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 9 to 12. 9(a) is a front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 9(b) is a side view of the distribution unit 980. 10 is an exploded perspective front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 980. 12(a) is a sectional view of the distribution unit 980 taken along line XIIa-XIIa in FIG. 9(a), and FIG. 12(b) is a sectional view of the distribution unit 980 taken along line XIIb-XIIb in FIG. 12(a). It is.

As shown in FIGS. 9 to 12, the sorting unit 980 has a rear base 985, a front base 981 disposed on the player side of the rear base 985, and a rotating unit between the front base 981 and the rear base. It is formed mainly of a distribution section 983 disposed in a possible state, and a cover member 987 disposed on the back side of the rear base 985 at a position corresponding to the distribution section 983.

The back base 985 is made of a colored semi-transparent (in this embodiment, blue) resin material, and includes a base portion 985a formed in a plate shape, and a plurality of openings (openings) passing through the base portion 985a in the thickness direction. 985b to 985g), a recessed portion 985h recessed on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) of the plurality of openings, and a housing portion 986b and a protruding portion 986e protruding from the opposite surface of the recessed portion 985h. be prepared and formed.

The base portion 985a is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a plurality of circular fastening holes 986c and 986d penetrating the outer edge of the base portion 985a, and an inclined surface that slopes toward one side in the direction of gravity on the side opposite to the front base 981 side. 986a. The fastening hole 986c is a hole into which a screw inserted through the front base 981, which will be described later, is screwed. Thereby, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened and fixed. Further, the fastening hole 986d is a hole into which a screw passing through a passage unit 990 described later is screwed. Thereby, the back base 985 (distribution unit 980) and the passage unit 990 can be fastened and fixed.

The inclined surface 986a is formed at a position overlapping a portion of openings 985b to 985f, which will be described later, on the other side in the gravity direction. Further, the inclined surface 986a is formed at a position facing the inclined portion 982b of the front base 981 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Thereby, the downward direction of the game balls flowing down in the direction of gravity can be guided toward the openings 985b to 985f. As a result, game balls can easily flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The recessed portion 985h is recessed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 (the front side in FIG. 9(b)), and is formed at approximately the center of the base portion 985a in the lateral direction (left-right direction in FIG. 9(b)). be done. Further, the recess 985h is formed to a size that can accommodate a portion of a distribution section 983, which will be described later, inside, and is provided with a bearing section 985j that protrudes in an annular shape from the bottom surface. The bearing portion 985j is a hole into which one end of a shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than an outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

The opening 985b and the opening 985c are respectively formed at both ends in the lateral direction of the base portion 985a, and the size of the inner edge is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the openings 985b and 985c are formed such that the inner surfaces on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) are inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game balls flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985d is formed at approximately the center of the base portion 985a in the lateral direction (in the left-right direction in FIG. 9(b)), and its position in the gravity direction (in the vertical direction in FIG. 9(b)) is approximately the same as that of the openings 985b and 985c. set to the position. Further, like the openings 985b and 985c, the opening 985d is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward as it goes toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game balls flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985e is formed between the opening 985b and the opening 985d, and the opening 985f is formed between the opening 985c and the opening 985d. In addition, the openings 985e and 985f extend in the direction of gravity into inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1, which are spaces that open on the front base 981 side, and discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3, which have spaces that open on the side opposite to the front base 981 side. It is formed mainly by intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 that communicate the passages 985e1 and 985f1 and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 formed between the facing sides of a front base 981 and a rear base 985, which will be described later, and are formed in a size that allows a game ball to pass through. Ru. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage can be made to flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed to extend in the gravity direction, and the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) communicates with the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1, and is formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. . Thereby, the game balls passing through the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 can be made to flow into the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2.

Furthermore, a recessed portion 985f4 is formed in the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, which is recessed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the throwing direction (direction of gravity) of the game ball. The recessed portion 985f4 is a cutout for arranging a detection device SE3, which will be described later, inside the recessed portion 985f4, and is set to have substantially the same external shape as the detection device SE3 when viewed from the rear. Thereby, the detection device SE3 can be inserted and disposed from the back side of the base portion 985a (the side opposite to the front base 981).

The detection device SE3 is a device that detects passage of a game ball, and a detection hole SE1a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the game ball is formed in the thickness direction thereof. The detection hole SE1a is formed biased toward one or the other of the longitudinal directions of the detection device SE3 disposed in a horizontally long rectangular state when viewed from the rear, and the detection hole SE1a is formed biased toward one or the other of the longitudinal directions where the detection hole SE1a is not formed. Alternatively, a detection board SE1b that controls the detection device SE3 is disposed on one side.

In this embodiment, when the detection device SE3 detects the passage of the game ball, five prize balls are paid out and a lottery of the first symbol is executed. In response to this lottery, a variable display of the third symbol is executed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the detection device SE3, the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is set parallel to the extending direction of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, and the internal space of the detection hole SE1a and the space of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 substantially coincide with each other. placed in position. As a result, when the game ball flows down from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 to the one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), it is possible to allow the game ball to pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3. can. Thereby, game balls passing through the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can be detected.

Further, in the detection device SE3, since the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is formed parallel to the direction of gravity, the dead weight of the game ball can be easily utilized when throwing the game ball to the detection hole SE1a. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball from getting caught in the intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2 and the connecting portion with the detection hole SE1a.

The recessed portions 985e4 and 985f4 are formed in a continuous manner with the spaces of the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3. That is, the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed using the detection device SE3. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the length dimension of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 in the direction of gravity from increasing. As a result, it is possible to suppress the back base 985 from increasing in size in the direction of gravity.

The discharge passages 985e3, 985f3 are connected to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2, and are formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. In addition, the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are connected to a third insertion hole 991c and a fourth insertion hole 991d of the passage unit 990, which will be described later, when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game balls passing through the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 can flow into the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3, and the balls can be passed through the spaces and sent to the passage unit 990.

The opening 985g is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the opening 985d. Further, like the opening 985d, the opening 985g is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game balls flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 formed between the facing sides of a front base 981 and a rear base 985, which will be described later, and are formed in a size that allows a game ball to pass through. Ru. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can be made to flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The housing portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular rings. Further, the accommodating portion 986b is a portion that accommodates a magnetic body 988b, which will be described later, inside, and its inner diameter is set to be approximately the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b formed in a cylindrical body. Further, the protruding dimension of the accommodating portion 986b is set larger than the axial dimension of the magnetic body 988b. Thereby, the magnetic body 988b can be accommodated inside the accommodating portion 986b. Furthermore, since the housing portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular bodies, even if the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b is slightly increased due to manufacturing errors, the pair of semicircular bodies can be elastically deformed. A magnetic body 988b can be provided.

The protruding portion 986e is provided in a cylindrical shape from a position opposite to the above-described bearing portion 985j with the base portion 985a interposed therebetween. The protruding portion 986e also includes a circular fastening hole formed in the shaft thereof. The fastening hole is a hole into which the tip of a screw inserted through a cover member 987 (described later) is screwed. By screwing the screw while the cover member 987 is in contact with the cover member 987, the cover member 987 is fastened to the back base 985. Can be fixed.

The magnetic body 988b is made of a magnet, and by being disposed in the housing portion 986b, it is possible to generate a magnetic field toward the front base 981 via the base portion 985a. This makes it possible to repel a magnetic body 988c disposed in the distribution section 983, which will be described later, to facilitate the displacement of the distribution section 983.

The front base 981 is formed from a colored semi-transparent (in this embodiment, blue) resin material. The front base 981 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape that is larger than the back base 985 when viewed from the front, and includes a base plate 981a and a bulge that bulges out from the base plate 981a toward the player (opposite side to the back base 986). It is formed mainly with a protruding part 982.

The base plate 981a is formed as a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a plurality of insertion holes 981g extending through the plate thickness direction at its outer peripheral edge, and a first guide wall protruding toward the rear base 985 side. 981f and a second guide wall 981d, a second insertion hole 981e penetrating near the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and a plate on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the bulge 982. It is formed mainly with a through hole 981c penetrating in the thickness direction.

The insertion hole 981g is a hole through which a screw (not shown) for fastening the assembled ball throwing unit 970 to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 5) is inserted, and is set to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip of the screw. .

The first guide walls 981f are formed in a semicircular annular shape, and are formed in pairs in the lateral direction with a bulge 982, which will be described later, sandwiched therebetween. Further, the first guide wall 981f is formed with a semicircular open portion facing substantially the center in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a.

The second guide wall 981d is formed in an annular shape and is formed at two locations in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a. Further, the second guide wall 981d is formed below a bulge 982, which will be described later, in the direction of gravity, and a through hole 981c is formed between the two locations.

The first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d have an inner edge shape that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the periphery of the fastening hole 986c of the back base 985 described above. As a result, when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined, the wall around the fastening hole 986c can be inserted inside the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and the first guide wall 981f and the second The guide wall 981d can be positioned.

The second insertion hole 981e is formed at the center of the semicircle of the first guide wall 981f and at the center of the second guide wall 981d. The second insertion hole 981e is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 986c when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are assembled, and a screw is inserted from the front base 981 side and screwed into the fastening hole 986d. By doing so, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened together.

The through hole 981c is formed in a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the through hole 981c is formed with a side wall portion 981b that stands along the edge thereof on the side opposite to the rear base 985 side (on the near side in the paper of FIG. 9(a)). In addition, the through hole 981c is a part that communicates with the second winning hole 140 of the winning hole unit 930 described above, and when the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60, the second winning hole 140 It is formed at a position that overlaps with the rolling direction of the game ball flowing into the ball.

The side wall portion 981b is formed in such a size that the upright end surface contacts the second ball throwing portion 942c of the winning hole unit 930 in a state where the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60. In addition, the side wall portion 981b has a rolling surface 981c1 on the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) that is located on one side in the gravity direction than the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a, and on the rear base 985 side. It is formed so as to be sloped downward toward the center (see FIG. 6).

Further, the side wall portion 981b includes a projection 981b1 projecting from the erected tip surface. The protrusion 981b1 is formed at a position spaced apart from the rolling surface 981c1 by a radius of the game ball in the direction of gravity. Thereby, when the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling part 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c, the game ball can be made less likely to be caught between the rolling part 943a and the through hole 981c. A detailed explanation of the case where the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c will be described later.

The bulging portion 982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges out from the base plate 981a, and is set to a size that allows a game ball to be inserted into the inside thereof, and a game ball flowing into the inside from the inflow port 982d passes through the bulging portion 982. The ball-throwing path TR0 includes a first path TR1 and a second path TR2 that branch from the ball-throwing path TR0. The bulging portion 982 is formed into a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is bent toward the rear base 985 side and stands approximately halfway between the inlet 982d, which is formed by cutting out the upper end in the direction of gravity. It is formed mainly of an upright wall 982a and recesses 982e to 982j recessed at a plurality of locations on the other side in the direction of gravity.

The inlet 982d is cut out and has a substantially U-shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the inflow port 982d has an inner edge portion that corresponds to the rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into the first winning port 64 of the winning port unit 930 when the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60. Formed in overlapping positions.

The inlet 982d also includes a second protrusion 982d1 that protrudes toward the side opposite to the rear base 985 at the edge on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The second protrusion 982d1 is formed in the shape of the inner edge of the first recessed notch 942g1 of the winning opening unit 930 described above, and when the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are disposed on the base plate 60, the second protrusion 982d1 The second protrusion 982d1 is brought into contact with the inner edge of the recessed notch 942g1.

Further, the distance L14 (see FIG. 9(a)) from the second protrusion 982d1 to the end face of the inflow port 982d on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is from the inner edge of the first concave notch 942g1 to the first thrown ball. The distance L35 (see FIG. 87(b)) to the inner edge of the portion 942g on one side in the gravity direction is set larger than the distance L35 (see FIG. 87(b)). As a result, when the game ball thrown to the first ball throwing part 942g via the first winning opening 64 flows into the inflow port 982d, the inflow port 982d (bulging part 982) and the first ball throwing part 942g are connected to each other. You can avoid getting caught in between.

The erected wall 982a is formed in a rectangular shape that is separated from the outer edge shape of the bulged portion 982 by a predetermined distance when viewed from the front. Further, the standing wall 982a is formed below the inflow port 982d in the gravity direction, and includes an abutment portion 982a1 formed in a triangular shape when viewed from the standing direction above the gravity direction.

The standing wall 982a has a horizontal separation distance L16 (see FIG. 12(b)) from the inner edge of the outer circumferential portion of the bulging portion 982 that is set larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball can be placed between the opposing sides. A first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 are formed as spaces through which the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can pass.

The first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are formed on the downstream side of the distribution section 983, which will be described later, and game balls passing through the distribution section 983 are thrown to either direction. The distribution section 983 is configured to be able to alternately send game balls flowing into the inflow port 982d to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the throwing of the game balls flowing into the first prize opening 64 from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lost.

On the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the standing wall 982a, a bearing portion 982c is formed which protrudes in an annular shape from the inner surface of the bulge portion 982 toward the rear base 985 side. The bearing portion 982c is a portion that supports the other end side of a shaft member 988a that pivotally supports a distribution portion 983, which will be described later, and has an inner diameter set to be approximately the same as an outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. Therefore, by inserting the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the other end side of the shaft member 988a can be supported.

Furthermore, as described above, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j of the back base 985, so when combining the front base 981 and the back base 985, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j. By inserting the other end of the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the shaft member 988a can be supported between the front base 981 and the back base 985.

The contact portion 982a1 is formed on the rotation locus of the distribution portion 983, which will be described later, and the amount of rotational displacement of the distribution portion 983 is regulated by contacting the action portion 983a of the distribution portion 983. Note that a detailed explanation of the contact state between the contact portion 982a1 and the distribution portion 983 will be given later.

The recessed portion 982e and the recessed portion 982f are recessed from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) in a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2.
Further, inside the recess 982e and the recess 982f, a first branch passage BK1 or a second branch passage BK2, which is a space communicating with the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, is formed.

The first branch passage BK1 communicates with the opening 985b of the back base 985 when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first branch passage BK1 is formed to be able to receive game balls flowing down the first passage TR1, and the received game balls can flow into the opening 985b of the back base 985.

The second branch passage BK2 communicates with the opening 985c of the back base 985 when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the second branch passage BK2 is formed to be able to receive the game balls flowing down the second passage TR2, and the received game balls can flow into the opening 985c of the back base 985.

The recessed portion 982h and the recessed portion 982j are recessed from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) in the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. That is, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 extend on one side in the direction of gravity by the distance of the recess 982h and the recess 982j.

The first passage TR1 communicates with the opening 985e of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the game balls that have flowed into the inflow port 982d are allowed to flow into the first passage TR1, and the game balls that have flowed in can also flow into the opening 985e of the back base 985.

The second passage TR2 communicates with the opening 985f of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the game balls that have flowed into the inflow port 982d are allowed to flow into the second passage TR2, and the game balls that have flowed into the second passage TR2 can also flow into the opening 985f of the back base 985.

The recessed portion 982g is formed between the recessed portion 982h and the recessed portion 982j, and the recessed direction is set parallel to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Moreover, a third branch passage BK3, which is a space communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, is formed inside the recess 982g. Therefore, since the third branch passage BK3 communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, it is possible to downsize the distribution unit 980. .

The third branch passage BK3 communicates with the opening 985d of the back base 985 when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the third branch passage BK3 is formed to be able to receive game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, and the received game balls can flow into the opening 985d of the back base 985. .

The inclined portion 982b is formed on one side of the bulging portion 982 in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), and extends obliquely toward the back base 985 side toward the one side in the gravity direction. Further, the inclined portion 982b is formed at a position facing from the opening 985b to the opening 985f when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1, the second passage TR2, the first branch passage BK1, the second branch passage BK2, and the third branch passage BK3 are brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b. can be guided toward the openings 985b to 985f to make it easier to flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are connected to the recessed portions 982h and 982j, and the inclined portion 982b, and their erected end surfaces are inclined downward toward the rear base 985 side (the front side in FIG. 9(b)). As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are brought into contact with the upright end surfaces of the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1, guided toward the openings 985e and 985f, and are guided toward the openings 985e and 985f. It is possible to easily flow into 985f.

Further, the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed to be connected to the inclined portion 982b. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b and guided toward the rear base 985 side, and collided with the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1, thereby causing the game balls to flow through the opening 985e. and can easily flow into the opening 985f. Further, since the distance between the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 can be reduced by the slope of the slope portion 982b, the rigidity of the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 can be increased and durability can be improved.

Here, as described above, the distribution unit 980 (ball throwing unit 970) is visible to the player via the front unit 940 (winning port unit 930) arranged on the player side. Therefore, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 through the front unit 940 become difficult to visually recognize from the player side. Furthermore, when the guide parts 982h1 and 982j1 are set up on the front side of the opening 985e and the opening 985f, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are There was a problem that it became difficult for people to see it.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed in connection with the inclined portion 982b, so that the vertical dimension of the inclined portion 982b can be reduced. Therefore, the game balls thrown into the openings 985e and 985f (the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2) can be easily recognized even through the front unit 940. That is, in the present embodiment, the inclined portion 982b is inclined so as to be located on the back base 985 side as it goes in the downward direction of the game ball, thereby ensuring rigidity and guiding the game ball. Since the thickness of the portions 982h1 and 982j1 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner, visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

The distribution part 983 is set to have a thickness slightly smaller than the dimension between the facing front base 981 and the rear base 985, and is formed in a substantially T-shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the distribution part 983 penetrates through the T-shaped acting part 983a on one side, an intermediate plate 983b protruding from a substantially central position in the extending direction of the acting part 983a, and a connecting part between the acting part 983a and the intermediate plate 983b. a through hole 983c, a contact portion 983d that bulges out in a circular shape around the axis of the through hole 983c, and a wall portion 983e that is connected to the working portion 983a and the back base 985 side of the intermediate plate 983b. It is formed mainly by

The through-hole 983c is a hole into which a shaft member 988a supported between the front base 981 and the rear base 985 is inserted, and is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.
As a result, when assembling the front base 981 and the rear base 985, by inserting the shaft member 988a into the through hole 983c of the distribution part 983, the front base 981 and the rear base can be assembled while the distribution part 983 is rotatable. 985.

The intermediate plate 983b is formed to extend toward the outside in the radial direction of the through hole 983c, and when the displacement of the distribution portion 983 is regulated by rotating in one direction or the other, the intermediate plate 983b is formed from its tip. The distance L17 (see FIG. 12(b)) to the inside is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the throwing of the game ball is restricted to one or the other of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2. In addition, the intermediate plate 983b allows the distribution portion 983 to be rotated around the through hole 983c, so that the throwing of the game ball from one side of the first passage TR1 is regulated to the other side of the second passage TR2. can be switched to a state where it is regulated.

The acting portion 983a is formed to extend in a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the intermediate plate 983b when viewed from the front. Moreover, the connection position of the action part 983a with the contact part 983d is set to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) than the connection position with the contact part 983d of the intermediate plate 983b.
Thereby, the game ball thrown to the distribution part 983 via the inlet 982d is placed in a state where a load is applied to the action part 983a side. As a result, the distribution section 983 is rotationally displaced around the through hole 983c.

The wall portion 983e is connected to the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, and is formed into a substantially semicircular plate shape when viewed in the axial direction of the through hole 983c. The wall portion 983e is formed to protrude outward from the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the through hole 983c, and has a thickness larger than the recess dimension of the recess portion 985h of the back base 985. is set small. Therefore, in a state where the distribution part 983 is arranged between the rear base 985 and the front base 981 facing each other, the wall part 983e can be arranged inside the recessed part 985h. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the distribution unit 980 from the inlet 982d can be prevented from being caught inside the recess 985h, thereby preventing the game ball from flowing down.

Further, the wall portion 983e includes an accommodating portion 983e1 that is recessed toward the intermediate plate 983b side from the through hole 983c at the radially outer end portion on the back side of the intermediate plate 983b. The accommodating portion 983e1 is a portion that accommodates the magnetic body 988c formed in a cylindrical body inside, and is recessed into a circular shape having an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988c. Further, the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed from the back base 985 side toward the front base 981 side, and the magnetic body 988c is accommodated therein from the back base 985 side.

The magnetic body 988c is made of a magnet and is disposed in a state where it repels the magnetic body 988b disposed on the rear base 985. As a result, the magnetic body 988c of the distributing part 983 is rotated about the through hole 983c as an axis by the magnetic force acting on the magnetic body 988b disposed on the rear base 985, so that the magnetic body 988c rotates in one direction or the other direction in which the acting part 983a extends. It can be placed in a tilted position.

Further, since the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are arranged in a state where they are repelled, and the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed toward the front side, the magnetic body 988c inserted into the accommodating portion 983e1 is You can prevent yourself from getting out of it. That is, since a portion for locking the magnetic body 988c inserted into the housing section 983e1 is not required, the structure of the distribution section 983 can be simplified, and the arrangement of the magnetic body 988c in the distribution section 983 can be simplified.

In addition, the magnetic force of the magnetic body 988b and the magnetic body 988c is set to a magnetic force smaller than the load of the game ball. Thereby, the game balls thrown inside the distribution unit 980 can be prevented from being magnetically attracted to the magnetic bodies 988b and 988c and staying inside the distribution unit 980.

The cover member 987 is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from above, and is disposed on the side opposite to the front base 981 side of the recess 985h of the rear base 985. Further, the cover member 987 is formed with two first recesses 987a and a second recess 987b, which are circular in shape when viewed from the front and are recessed in parallel in the direction of gravity.

The first recess 987a is a portion that accommodates the above-mentioned accommodating portion 986b of the back base 985 inside, and is set to have an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the accommodating portion 986b. Therefore, by accommodating the tip of the accommodating part 986b in the first recess 987a with the magnetic body 988b accommodated inside the accommodating part 986b as described above, the magnetic substance 988b accommodated inside the accommodating part 986b is accommodated. It can be suppressed from slipping out of the portion 986b.

The second recess 987b includes a through hole 987b1 on the bottom surface thereof for fastening and fixing to the back base 985. Further, the second recessed portion 987b has an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the protruding portion 986e of the rear base 985 described above. As a result, the cover member 987 can accommodate and position the second recess 987b in the protruding part 986e of the rear base 985, and in the positioned state, screws can be inserted into the fastening hole of the protruding part 986e through the through hole 987b1. Can be concluded.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the operation of the distribution section 983 when game balls flow into the distribution unit 980 from the inlet 982d will be described. 13(a) and 13(b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the distribution unit 980 in range XIIIa of FIG. 12(b). In addition, below, the action part 983a of the distribution part 983 is displaced from the state which regulates the throwing of a game ball to one side of 1st path|passage TR1 to the state which restricts the throwing of a game ball to the other side of 2nd path|passage TR2. Only the case will be explained, and a description of the case where the throwing of the game ball from the state of regulating the throwing of the game ball to the other side of the second passage TR2 to the one side of the first passage TR1 will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 13(a) and 13(b), before the game ball is thrown to the distribution section 983 (before the game ball contacts the action section 983a), as described above, the game ball is distributed to the distribution section 983. The provided magnetic body 988c repels the magnetic body 988b (see FIG. 10), so that the intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the through hole 983c is tilted toward the second passage TR2 side. Note that the amount of rotation is regulated by the action portion 983a on the second passage TR2 side coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981 (see FIG. 13(a)).

When the game ball is thrown to the distribution section 983 in this state, the game ball is thrown between the intermediate plate 983b and the action section 983a on the first passage TR1 side. As described above, the connection position of the action part 983a with the contact part 983d is set to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) than the connection position with the contact part 983d of the intermediate plate 983b. The load of the game ball can be applied to the action portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side.

As a result, the distribution part 983 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c, and the intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the through hole 983c is tilted toward the first passage TR1 side, as shown in FIG. 13(b). It is said that Note that when the acting portion 983a on the side of the first passage TR1 comes into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981, the amount of rotation thereof is regulated. Further, in this case, the repulsion direction of the magnetic body 988c is switched from a state in which the intermediate plate 983b on the radially outer side of the through hole 983c acts on the second passage TR2 side to a state in which it acts on the first passage TR1 side.

Therefore, the distribution section 983 can be rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c by using the load of the game ball and the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c. Furthermore, since the direction of the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c is switched, the rotating state of the distribution section 983 can be maintained. Therefore, each time a game ball is thrown, the distribution section 983 can displace the inclination direction of the intermediate plate 983b and throw the game ball one ball to the first path TR1 and the second path TR2.

Next, the configuration of the passage unit 990 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16.
14(a) is a front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 14(b) is a side view of the passage unit 990. 15 is an exploded perspective front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passage unit 990.

As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the passage unit 990 includes a first passage member 991 having a plurality of openings that are opened on the sorting unit 980 side, and a first passage member 991 disposed in the first passage member 991. A second passage member 992 that throws a passing game ball; a third passage member 993 that is disposed in the second passage member 992 and that throws a game ball that has passed through the second passage member 992; The detection device SE4 is disposed between three passage members 993.

The first passage member 991 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with a predetermined width on the second passage member 992 side. The first passage member 991 also has a first insertion hole 991a formed through the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the distribution unit 980 side, and a first insertion hole 991a formed through the other side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the first insertion hole 991a. a second insertion hole 991b formed through the second insertion hole 991b, a third insertion hole 991c and a fourth insertion hole 991d formed on both sides of the second insertion hole 991b in the horizontal direction, and the outer periphery in front view. It is formed mainly by having a plurality of circular through holes 991f formed therethrough.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed into a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, game balls flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

Furthermore, an annular annular protrusion 991g, which has a fastening hole 991g1 into which a screw inserted through the second passage member 992 is screwed, is formed in the first insertion hole 991a and connected to the outer peripheral portion thereof. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the transverse direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985g can be received into the second insertion hole 991b.

Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

The third insertion hole 991c is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the transverse direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the third insertion hole 991c is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985e of the distribution unit 980 is continuous when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 (first passage TR1) and passing through the opening 985e can be received in the third insertion hole 991c.

Further, the third insertion hole 991c includes recessed portions 991c1 recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portion 991c1 is a portion that accommodates therein the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 disposed in the sorting unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991c1, and the detection device SE3 can be prevented from being tampered with from the outside in a state in which the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. can.

Furthermore, when combining the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990, the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE3 disposed in the sorting unit 980 can be received inside the recessed part 991c1 of the passage unit 990, so that the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a portion of the detection device SE3 from protruding to the outside, and to reduce the size of the ball throwing unit 970 as a whole.

The third insertion hole 991c has a protruding portion 991c2 on the inner edge on the second passage member 992 side that protrudes from the second insertion hole 991b side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction. The second insertion hole 991b is formed to be inclined downward in a direction away from the matching second insertion hole 991b. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the third insertion hole 991c can collide with the protruding portion 991c2, and can be rolled in the direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (to the left in FIG. 14(a)).

The fourth insertion hole 991d is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the transverse direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985f of the distribution unit 980 is continuous when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 (second passage TR2) and passing through the opening 985f can be received in the fourth insertion hole 991d.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d includes recessed portions 991d1 recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portion 991d1 is a portion that accommodates therein the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 disposed in the sorting unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991d1, and the detection device SE3 can be prevented from being tampered with from the outside in a state in which the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. can.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d has a protruding portion 991d2 on the inner edge on the second passage member 992 side that protrudes from the second insertion hole 991b side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is oriented horizontally. The second insertion hole 991b is formed to be inclined downward in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b adjacent to the second insertion hole 991b. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed into the fourth insertion hole 991d can collide with the protruding portion 991d2 and can be rolled in the direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (rightward in FIG. 14(a)).

The second passage member 992 is formed in a substantially T-shaped plate shape that is upside down when viewed from the front, and has a fifth insertion hole 992b penetrating to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), and the fifth insertion hole 992b. It is formed mainly of a sixth insertion hole 992c penetrating on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the fifth insertion hole 992b, and an upright wall 992a standing on the inner peripheral edge of the fifth insertion hole 992b.

The fifth insertion hole 992b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the transverse direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the fifth insertion hole 992b is formed at a position where the inner space of the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 is connected in a state where the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. Thereby, the game ball passing through the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 can be received into the fifth insertion hole 992b.

The erected wall 992a is erected from the entire edge of the fifth insertion hole 992b toward the third passage member 993 side. Further, the standing wall 992a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the third passage member 993 side. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the fifth insertion hole 992b can be rolled toward the third passage member 993 side (right side in FIG. 14(b)).

The outer peripheral surface of the standing wall 992a is formed with an engaging portion 992d that projects horizontally, and a projecting wall 992e that projects horizontally from the end on the first passage member 991 side. The engaging portion 992d is formed in an L-shape that protrudes in the horizontal direction and has a tip bent toward the third passage member 993. Wiring for a detection device SE4 and a detection device SE3 disposed in the sorting unit 980, which will be described later, are inserted between the engagement portion 992d and the vertical wall 992a. Thereby, the wiring of the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be locked, so that the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be prevented from slipping out from the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990.

The protruding wall 992e is formed to protrude from both horizontal sides of the upright wall 992a in a semicircular shape when viewed from the front, and includes a through hole 992e1 penetrating the axis of the semicircle. Further, the protruding wall 992e is formed at a position facing the annular projection 991g of the first passage member 991 when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined, and the through hole 992e1 is formed at a position facing the annular projection 991g of the first passage member 991. It is located coaxially with the fastening hole 991g1. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed by inserting a screw into the through hole 992e1 from the second passage member 992 side and screwing the screw into the fastening hole 991g1.

The sixth insertion hole 992c is formed into a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the sixth insertion hole 992c is formed at a position where its internal space is continuous with the internal space of the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. Ru. Thereby, the game ball passing through the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 can be received into the sixth insertion hole 992c.

Further, a guide wall 992c1 that stands upright toward the third passage member 993 is formed around the sixth insertion hole 992c. The guide wall 992c1 is connected to a first wall portion 992c2 that stands upright on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the sixth insertion hole 992c, and an end in the extending direction of the first wall portion 992c2, and and a second wall portion 992c3 extending in the direction.

The first wall portion 992c2 and the second wall portion 992c3 are wall surfaces for positioning the detection device SE4, and are located between the standing wall 993e formed in the third passage member 993 and the engaging portion 993d. The dimensions are set to be substantially the same as the dimensions on the opposite side of the detection device SE4.

Further, the detection device SE4 is arranged at a position where the inner space of the detection hole SE1a is continuous with the inner space of the sixth insertion hole 992c. Thereby, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c passes through the detection hole SE1a and is detected by the detection device SE4, and is also thrown toward the third passage member 993 side.

Further, the second passage member 992 includes an annular projection 992f that projects toward the third passage member 993 at a position spaced apart from the sixth insertion hole 992c in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 14(a)).
The annular projection 992f has a circular fastening hole 992f1 on its axis. The fastening hole 992f1 is a hole into which a screw inserted through the third passage member 993 is screwed, and thereby the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed into a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, game balls flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

Furthermore, an annular annular protrusion 991g, which has a fastening hole 991g1 into which a screw inserted through the second passage member 992 is screwed, is formed in the first insertion hole 991a and connected to the outer peripheral portion thereof. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the transverse direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985g can be received into the second insertion hole 991b.

Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

The third passage member 993 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front. The third passage member 993 includes a seventh insertion hole 993a formed in a substantially intermediate position in the longitudinal direction, a guide wall 993b erected from the edge of the seventh insertion hole 993a, and an edge on the other side in the gravity direction. It mainly includes an erected wall 993e erected on the second passage member 992 side, an engaging portion 993d projecting in the longitudinal direction, and a recess 993c recessed on the side surface on the second passage member 992 side. It is formed.

The seventh insertion hole 993a is formed in a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Moreover, the seventh insertion hole 993a is formed at a position continuous with the internal space of the detection device SE4 disposed in the second passage member 992 when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined. Thereby, the game ball that has passed through the seventh insertion hole 993a of the second passage member 992 and the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4 can be received in the seventh insertion hole 993a.

The guide wall 993b is erected from the edges of the seventh insertion hole 993a in three directions excluding the other side in the gravity direction (the upper side in the gravity direction) toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side. Further, the guide wall 993b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined upward toward the second passage member 992 side (inclined downward toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side). be done. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the seventh insertion hole 993a can be rolled to the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side (the right side in FIG. 14(b)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 14(b), the third passage member 993 is disposed on one side in the gravity direction of the standing wall 992a of the second passage member 992 (lower side in FIG. 14(b)). As described above, since the third passage member 993 is open on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 14(b)), the third passage member 993 can be arranged closer to the standing wall 992a. As a result, the opening 985d and the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 described above can be brought close to each other, and the external shapes of the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 in the direction of gravity can be reduced in size.

The standing wall 993e is such that when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the distance between the second passage member 992 and the first wall 992c2 is equal to the detection hole of the detection device SE4. It is set to be approximately the same as the distance dimension on the shorter side in the direction perpendicular to the axis of SE1a. This allows positioning of the detection device SE4 in the direction of gravity.

Further, a first wall portion 992c2 is formed on the upstream side (on the second passage member 992 side) where the game ball is thrown, for positioning the detection device SE4 on the lower side in the direction of gravity. Thereby, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4.

That is, the detection hole SE1a is formed to have a size slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball in order to prevent fraud by the player, so a slight positional deviation in the height of the rolling surface of the game ball may cause damage to the inside of the hole SE1a. In this embodiment, a first wall portion 992c2 for positioning the lower side of the detection device SE4 in the gravity direction is provided on the upstream side (second passage member 992 side) where the game ball is thrown. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the heights of the sixth insertion hole 992c, the detection hole SE1a, and the rolling surface from being misaligned. As a result, the game ball inserted through the sixth insertion hole 992c can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a.

The engaging portion 993d is formed to protrude in the longitudinal direction of the third passage member 993, and includes a bent portion 993d1 bent toward the second passage member 992 at the protruding tip. When the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the bent portion 993d1 has a distance dimension between the second passage member 992 and the second wall portion 992c3 that is equal to the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4. The distance dimension on the longitudinal side in the direction perpendicular to the axis of Thereby, the detection device SE4 can be positioned in the horizontal direction.

The recess 993c is formed at a position facing the annular projection 992f of the second passage member 992 when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, and is formed at a position facing the annular projection 992f. It is formed with a larger inner edge shape. Further, the recess 993c includes a through hole 993c1 formed coaxially with the fastening hole 992f1 of the annular projection 992f on the bottom surface thereof. As a result, the annular protrusion 992f of the second passage member 992 is inserted into the recess 993c, and the screw is inserted from the third passage member 993 side through the through hole 993c1 and screwed into the fastening hole 992f1. The member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

According to the ball throwing unit 970 configured as above, the ball throwing unit 970 is formed from a unit different from the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140, and the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 Since the ball throwing unit 970 (distributing unit 980) can be replaced with another unit and a different unit can be installed, the game that flows down the game area can be A different game format can be played without affecting the flow of the ball.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 69. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 of the distribution unit 980 are formed as passages that guide the ball backward without returning it, but the distribution unit 980 in the second embodiment The unit 300 is configured to allow the ball to move back and forth. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the details of the structure of the game board 13 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 17 to 35, and then the details of the structure of the operating unit 500 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 36 to 69.

FIG. 17 is a front exploded perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 17, an internal opening is formed in the center frame 86 disposed inside the game board 13, and the player can visually recognize the operating unit 500 through the internal opening of the center frame 86. .

In addition, in this embodiment, since the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, the visibility is not limited to that through the internal opening of the center frame 86; The operating unit 500 can be visually recognized through the base plate 60 located on the outside.

18 is a front view of the game board 13, FIG. 19 is a rear view of the game board 13, FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 21 is a rear perspective view of the game board 13. It is a diagram. In FIG. 18, the wind turbine FS1 and the nail KG1, which were not shown in FIG. 2, are also illustrated.

As will be described later, this embodiment includes an upper connecting member 270 that replaces the function of a nail to allocate the falling path of the ball, and the nail KG1 is not disposed in the area where the upper connecting member 270 is disposed. do not have.

This makes it possible to avoid the impermeability of the nail KG1 from acting as a drawback.
In other words, by removing the nail KG1 from the upper position of the center frame 86 where the upper connecting member 270 is arranged (the position above the center frame 86 and below the outer rail 62), the upper position of the center frame 86 can be removed. Since the light passing through can be prevented from being reflected in various directions or blocked by the nail KG1, the visibility of the light effect at a position above the center frame 86 can be improved. Note that the mode of light production at the upper position of the center frame 86 will be described later.

In FIG. 19, the shape of the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 is recessed upward at the left-right center position, and the electrical connection board 251 connected to the illumination board 251 disposed in the recessed portion is shown. A sensor cover 254 is shown that is also used to hold wiring DH1.

As shown in FIG. 19, at the lower position of the center frame 86, on the back side of the base plate 60, there is a collection gutter 480 that constitutes the flow path of the ball that entered the general winning hole 63, and an upper part of the collection gutter 480. A wide decorative member 490, which is disposed in the first prize opening 64 and is formed in a shape such that it straddles the rear side of the first prize opening 64, is fastened and fixed.

The collecting gutter 480 is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material. This can prevent the collecting gutter 480 from blocking the incidence of light from the back side. In addition, when viewed from the front, visibility of the ball that enters the general prize opening 63 and flows down the collecting gutter 480 can be improved.

The wide decorative member 490 is formed from a colored transparent (blue in this embodiment) resin material.
This allows the wide decorative member 490 to stand out to the player who views the gaming area from the front.

The wide decorative member 490 includes insertion holes 491 for fastening screws at the left and right ends. A fastening screw screwed into the collecting gutter 480 is inserted into the insertion hole 491, and the wide decorative member 490 is fastened and fixed to the collecting gutter 480 by the fastening screw. Thereby, attention to the wide decorative member 490 can be connected to attention to the balls flowing down the collecting gutter 480.

The wide decorative member 490 has a pair of left and right inclined forming parts formed at the same angle of inclination as the plate-like part behind the plate-like part (ceiling plate part 455) that rolls the ball above the general winning opening 63. 492, and a central forming portion 493 extending in the left-right direction on the left and right inner sides of the inclined forming portion 492.

The slope forming part 492 is arranged so that the upper surface of the member is along the plate-like part (ceiling plate part 455) that rolls the ball above the general winning hole 63 when viewed from the front. Therefore, even if the plate-like part on which the ball rolls is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material, the ball can appear to be rolling on the slope forming part 492 when viewed from the front, and the ball can be rolled on the slope forming part 492. This makes it easier to understand the flow path.

The center forming part 493 constitutes the ceiling part of the downward path of the ball that has entered the first prize opening 64 (the inclined extension part 315 to be described later). As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling from the falling path, and even if the falling path of the ball that has entered the first prize opening 64 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling off the flowing path. The central forming portion 493 formed from a resin material allows the flow path of the ball to be easily seen from the front.

In FIG. 20, resin members such as an upper connecting member 270 made of a light-transmissive resin material and a winning hole forming member 400 having a portion projecting into the gaming area are illustrated above and below the center frame 86. ing. These resin members can produce the effect of stably maintaining the downward flow mode of the ball, but the details will be described later. Note that in FIG. 20, illustration of the nail KG1 and the windmill FS1 is omitted.

To give an overview first, a common effect of the resin members such as the upper connecting member 270 and the winning hole forming member 400 is that they are easy to repair when cracked or chipped. This effect is not achieved when using commonly used metal nails.

In the case of nails planted in the base plate 60, there is a possibility that the nails will bend or break if a ball collides with them or if an operator accidentally overloads the nails. If it is bent, it may be possible to restore it to its original shape by bending it the same amount to the opposite side, but if it is bent, it is difficult to restore it to its original shape.

To begin with, nails are driven into the base board 60 using an automatic machine, and the general method is to drive the nails into the entire game board all at once, rather than driving them one by one. Therefore, even if only one nail is broken, it is difficult to re-drive the broken nail when other nails are already installed, and the entire base board 60 needs to be replaced. there is a possibility.

At this time, since the rails 61, 62, outer edge member 73, etc. are assembled to the base plate 60, these assembled members must be reassembled to the replacement base plate 60, or these members must be replaced. It is necessary to replace the entire unit, and in any case, repair costs tend to increase.

On the other hand, if a part of the resin member such as the upper connecting member 270 or the winning opening component member 400 is cracked or chipped, the repair can be completed by replacing it with a new member, and the base plate 60 can be replaced. There's no need to. In addition, since the resin members are independent from the rails 61, 62, the outer edge member 73, etc., there are no costs associated with the rails 61, 62, the outer edge member 73, etc. when replacing the resin members, so repair costs can be suppressed.

In FIG. 21, the illuminated board 251 and the board holding plate 252 arranged on the upper part of the center frame 86 are arranged so that the board holding plate 252 fits within the thickness dimension of the base plate 60, and the board holding plate 252 Although the illumination board 251 disposed on the front side is shown to be disposed within the thickness dimension of the base plate 60, details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 21, the base plate 60 includes a plurality of fitting portions 60c formed in a protruding cylindrical shape whose outer shape tapers from the back surface of the base plate toward the back side. The fitting portion 60c has a female thread formed on the inner diameter side, and functions as a portion into which a fastening screw is screwed when fastening and fixing the operating unit 500 to the base plate 60.

22 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60, a central unit 240 disposed inside the base plate 60 and having a center frame 86, and an upper part of the central unit 240. It includes an upper connecting member 270 that connects the base plate 60 and limits the direction of the ball flowing down the game area, and a thin plate member 290 that is disposed between the upper connecting member 270 and the central component unit 240. .

The details of the central component unit 240 will be described later, but as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 22, the central component unit 240 is formed with a fixing portion 244 used for positioning and fixing the thin plate member 290.

24 is an exploded front perspective view of the central configuration unit 240, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central configuration unit 240. The central component unit 240 is a unit that is assembled into an annular shape when disposed in the central opening 60b of the base plate 60, and has a center frame 86 to guide the flow of the ball.

The central structural unit 240 includes an upper structural member 241 that forms the upper side of the center frame 86 and a lower structural member 261 that forms the lower side of the center frame 86 . The upper component 241 and the lower component 261 are made of a light-transmissive resin material and constitute the upper and lower halves of a ring shape, respectively, so that they surround the third symbol display device when viewed from the front in the assembled state (see FIG. 18). A center frame 86 is configured.

In this way, by configuring the center frame 86 in a ring shape by combining multiple members instead of configuring it in a ring shape as a single item, it is possible to reduce the size of the resin mold required for molding the resin member. . Thereby, the manufacturing cost of the resin mold can be suppressed.

For example, the shape of the upper edge of the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 is not a shape recessed upward in the left and right center portions corresponding to the shape of the thin plate portion 242 as in the present embodiment, but a substantially arc shape. When changing the design of the base plate 60 so that the upper half (upper component member 241) is As for the component 261), a member designed in accordance with this embodiment can be used.

As a result, in order to make minor changes such as changing the design of the base plate 60 or changing the shape of the center frame 86 to change its appearance, it is necessary to manufacture a new large mold that encompasses the entire center frame 86. Since there is no mold, it is possible to reduce mold costs.

The upper component member 241 includes a thin plate portion 242 that is arranged flush with the front surface of the base plate 60 in the assembled state (see FIG. 18), and a strip-like extension extending from the front side of the thin plate portion 242, so that the glass is not exposed during the game. A band-shaped frame portion 245 is formed with dimensions that do not allow balls to pass through between it and the unit 16 (see FIG. 1) and is formed to be able to guide the flow of the ball, and a band-shaped frame portion 245 is arranged below and on the left and right inner sides of the band-shaped frame portion 245. A decorative portion 247 is provided to form a substantially arc shape.

The thin plate portion 242 is used for positioning and fixing the upper connecting member 270 (see FIGS. 22 and 23) and the extending portion 243 that extends to the back side for reinforcement at the left and right and upper edges. A fixing portion 244 is provided.

The extension portion 243 is designed so that its front-rear width is approximately the same as the thickness of the base plate 60. That is, the longitudinal thickness of the thin plate portion 242, which is shorter in longitudinal width than the extension portion 243, is designed to be thinner than the thickness of the base plate 60. Thereby, it is possible to easily secure a space on the back side of the thin plate portion 242.

The fixing part 244 includes a recessed part 244a that is recessed for positioning with the upper connecting member 270 (see FIGS. 22 and 23), and a recessed part 244a that is disposed close to the recessed part 244a and protrudes from the front side. A protruding portion 244b and a fastening portion 244c into which a fastening screw inserted into the upper connecting member 271 from the front side is screwed are provided at symmetrical positions.

The thin plate portion 242 is arranged flush with the base plate 60, and the protruding portion 244b can be formed from any position on the front side. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the positioning with respect to the upper connecting member 270 (see FIGS. 22 and 23) can be improved. The assembly of the upper connecting member 270 using the fixing part 244 will be described later.

The decorative portion 247 is formed with a plurality of three-dimensional patterns and figures, and is formed to have lower light transmittance than the thin plate portion 242. Thereby, the decorative portion 247 can be used as a portion that divides the field of view while maintaining some light transparency.

Up to this point, the configuration of the front side of the upper component member 241 has been mainly described. Next, a configuration disposed on the back side of the upper component member 241 will be described. The upper component 241 includes an illumination board 251 that is fastened and fixed to a fastening part formed on the back side of the thin plate part 242, and a board holding plate 252 that is fastened together with a fastening screw that fastens and fixes the illumination board 251. , a dish-shaped member 253 that is sandwiched between the illumination board 251 and the thin plate part 242 and is formed in a dish shape that widens toward the front side, and a decorative part on the left and right sides (in this embodiment, the right side) of the upper component member 241. The sensor cover 254 is fastened and fixed to a position on the back side of the sensor cover 247.

The substrate holding plate 252 is not laterally symmetrical, and the lower right portion is omitted compared to the left portion. This makes it possible to easily connect the electrical wiring DH1 (see FIG. 19) passed from the sensor cover 254 side. That is, the connection terminal 251a of the illumination board 251 is arranged on the back side of the board at the lower right side of the board, and the shape of the board holding plate 252 is designed so that the electrical wiring DH1 can be easily connected to this position. has been done.

Further, the substrate holding plate 252 includes a concave portion 252a formed in a curved shape convex upward at the left and right center position. The recessed portion 252a is a portion formed for the purpose of improving the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the operating unit 500, and details will be described later.

The sensor cover 254 has a capacitance sensor (for example, a sensor that can detect that a player has placed his/her hand over the front side of the glass unit 16) disposed therein, and a fixing device for fixing the capacitance sensor. It is a member. In this embodiment, it is used not only for fixing the capacitance sensor but also as a relay part for the electrical wiring DH1 connected to the illumination board 251.

That is, by fixing the electrical wiring DH1 to the hook-shaped portion formed on the illumination board 251 with a binding band or the like, the electrical wiring DH1 can be held at the rear position of the decorative portion 247. Thereby, the electric wiring DH1 can be hidden from the player's view. In this way, by using the sensor cover 254 to maintain the arrangement of the electrical wiring DH1, the number of assembly steps can be reduced compared to the case where a dedicated member for maintaining the arrangement of the electrical wiring DH1 is prepared. Material costs can be reduced.

The lower component 261 includes a thin plate portion 262 that is fastened and fixed to the front surface of the base plate 60 in the assembled state (see FIG. 18), and a strip-shaped extension portion 263 that extends in a strip shape from the thin plate portion 262 to the back side. , a back cover part 264 that is fastened and fixed to a fastening part formed at the extending end of the band-shaped extension part 263 and covers the back side of the band-shaped extension part 263; A pair of left and right channel front configuration parts 265 that are fastened and fixed to the front side of the lower end and constitute a flow path for the balls to flow to the back side between the thin plate part 262 and the back side of the left and right lower ends of the thin plate part 262. A pair of left and right flow channels that are fastened and fixed to the flow channel front structure section 265 and protrude left and right inward from the thin plate section 262 of the channel front structure section 265 to form a flow path that guides the ball to the upper surface of the band-shaped extension section 263. A rear configuration section 266 is provided.

The band-shaped extension portion 263 has an upper surface portion that slopes downward toward the left and right center portions, and functions to return the rolled ball to the front side of the base plate 60. At the left and right center portions of the strip-shaped extension portion 263, there is a center back slope portion 263a that slopes downward toward the back side so that the ball with a reduced speed in the left and right direction can easily flow to the back side, and on both left and right sides of the center back slope portion 263a. A pair of left and right front inclined parts 263b are arranged slightly below the central rear inclined part 263a and are inclined downwardly toward the front so that the ball whose speed in the left and right direction has settled can easily flow to the front side, and a rear side is formed by the central rear inclined part 263a. A ball discharge hole 263c is formed through the base plate 60 so that the ball guided to the front side of the back covering part 264 after flowing down to the side can be discharged to the front side of the base plate 60.

In relation to the band-like extending portion 263, the back covering portion 264 basically closes the ball to prevent it from falling off from the back end of the band-like extending portion 263; In this case, a gap is formed between the ball and the belt-shaped extending portion 263 to allow the ball to flow downward.
The ball guided to the front side through this gap is discharged from the ball discharge hole 263c.

Since the ball ejection hole 263c is arranged at the center position on the left and right, and the first prize opening 64 is arranged below it (see FIG. 18), the balls ejected from the ball ejection hole 263c have a high probability of being hit by a nail. The ball enters the first winning hole 64 with a higher probability than the ball approaching the first winning hole 64 while being bounced by KG1.
Therefore, when a ball is guided by the belt-shaped extension portion 263, attention to the ball can be improved.

The channel front structure section 265 forms a guide path that guides the ball flowing down the front side of the thin plate section 262 to the back side, and the channel rear structure section 266 forms the rear end surface of the guide path to guide the ball. is guided to the upper surface of the strip-shaped extension portion 263. In other words, the channel front configuration section 265 and the channel rear configuration section 266 form a tunnel-shaped section that discharges the balls that have flowed in from the front side of the base plate 60 to the upper surface of the strip-shaped extension section 263 .

The explanation will be given by returning to FIGS. 22 and 23. The upper connecting member 270 is a member formed from a light-transmissive resin material, and includes a thin plate-like portion 271 and a protruding portion extending from the back side toward the front side with the plate-like portion 271 as the base end. Projecting portions 272 to 277, a thin portion 278 that is partially formed thinly on the back side of the plate-like portion 271, and a protruding portion 279 that is formed so as to protrude toward the back side of the thin portion 278. , is provided.

The plate-like portion 271 is formed in a symmetrical arch shape that is long in the left and right directions when viewed from the front, and the shape of the lower edge portion follows the shape of the upper edge portion of the center frame 86 . In addition, the upper edge of the plate-shaped portion 271 is curved, and in detail, the tangent at a specific point on the upper edge of the plate-shaped portion 271 is the outer rail disposed close to the specific point. The shape is parallel to the tangent line of the corresponding point of 62.

The outer rail 62 and the plate-shaped portion 271 are spaced apart from each other by approximately the diameter of a ball (game ball) (see FIG. 18). This makes it easier to avoid a situation where the ball rolling along the outer rail 62 collides with the plate-shaped portion 271 and its momentum is attenuated.

That is, the ball introduced into the game area is configured to leave the outer rail 62 before it collides with the plate-like portion 271. In other words, as long as the ball is in contact with the outer rail 62, the ball will not collide with the plate-shaped portion 271, so the ball is fired with maximum firing strength (for example, the ball is fired at the outer rail 62 until it collides with the return rubber 69). This makes it possible to avoid the ball rolling in contact with the plate portion 271 from colliding with the plate portion 271 and having its momentum attenuated.

Thereby, unnecessary attenuation of the ball can be avoided, and it is also possible to avoid cracking or chipping of the plate-like part 271 due to a ball with the maximum firing strength colliding with the plate-like part 271.

Note that the distance between the outer rail 62 and the plate-like portion 271 is not limited to a distance approximately equal to the diameter of a sphere, and various forms may be exemplified. For example, in consideration of the shape of the sphere, the interval may be changed in the front-back direction (the interval becomes wider as the distance from the base plate 60 increases) so as to avoid collision between the sphere and the plate-like portion 271. In this case, since the distance between the plate-shaped portion 271 and the outer rail 62 on the side closer to the base plate 60 can be narrowed, when decoration is applied to the plate-shaped portion 271, the formation area of the decoration can be expanded. .

The overhanging parts 272 to 277 have a symmetrical shape with respect to the left-right center of the plate-like part 271 from positions that are symmetrical with respect to the left-right center of the plate-like part 271, and extend from the back side of the plate-like part 271 to the front. These are the parts that extend out to the sides, and each one replaces the function of a nail.

From the left and right center side, they will be described as a first overhang 272, a second overhang 273, a third overhang 274, a fourth overhang 275, a fifth overhang 276, and a sixth overhang 277. do.

The first projecting portion 272 and the second projecting portion 273 are arranged in front of the central component unit 240 with a thin plate member 290 interposed therebetween. The third projecting portion 274 is arranged to straddle the central component unit 240 and the base plate 60. The fourth overhang 275 , the fifth overhang 276 , and the sixth overhang 277 are arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 .

In this way, each of the protruding parts 272 to 277 differs in which member they are disposed on the front side, and therefore their functions and design concepts may differ, but the details will be described later.

The thin portion 278 is a portion that is formed thinly by shifting the back surface of the plate toward the front side by the thickness of the thin plate member 290 or an amount slightly exceeding the thickness in order to arrange the thin plate member 290. In this embodiment, instead of a mode in which the thin plate member 290 is held by applying a pressing force to the thin plate member 290 from the thin portion 278, a mode in which the thin plate member 290 is held by the fixing portion 244 (see FIG. 22) is adopted. are doing.

Note that the displacement dimension of the back surface of the plate in the thin portion 278 toward the front side is not limited to the case where it is formed to be equal to or greater than the thickness dimension of the thin plate member 290, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, the displacement of the back surface of the plate toward the front side may be designed to be smaller than the thickness of the thin plate member 290. In this case, by forming the thin plate member 290 to be expandable and contractible (compressible) in the thickness direction, the arrangement of the thin plate member 290 can be easily fixed while avoiding excessive pressure being applied to the thin plate member 290. Can be done.

Further, for example, the displacement of the thin portion 278 toward the front side of the back surface of the plate may be reduced only in a portion corresponding to the edge of the thin plate member 290. In this case, the range in which pressure is applied to the thin plate member 290 can be limited to the edge of the thin plate member 290.

The protruding portion 279 is a portion inserted into a positioning hole 291 formed in the thin plate member 290, and is a protruding portion for positioning the thin plate member 290. A recess corresponding to the shape of the overhanging parts 272 and 273 is formed on the back side of the thin part 278 at the position where the first overhanging part 272 or the second overhanging part 273 is arranged. The protruding portion 279 cannot be protruded. That is, the protruding portion 279 protrudes from a position of the thin portion 278 that avoids the arrangement of the first protruding portion 272 and the second protruding portion 273.

The thin plate member 290 is a thin plate-like (sheet-like) member made of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a plurality of positioning holes 291 drilled for positioning during assembly, and an upper connecting member 270 in the center. A plurality of insertion holes 292 are provided, which are formed as holes for inserting fastening screws to be fastened and fixed to the component unit 240.

The positioning holes 291 include a hole 291a that is drilled on the left and right outer sides and through which the protrusion 244b of the central component unit 240 is inserted, and a hole 291b that is drilled on the left and right inner side and through which the protrusion 279 of the upper connecting member 270 is inserted. , is provided. That is, the thin plate member 290 is used for positioning with both the central component unit 240 and the upper connecting member 270.

In this embodiment, the left and right outer side means the left and right edge sides of the game board 13 or the operating unit 500 when viewed from the front, and the left and right inner side means the left and right center side of the game board 13 or the operating unit 500 when viewed from the front. means.

As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the protruding portion 244b is formed at a position facing the recessed portion on the back side of the second projecting portion 273. As shown in FIGS. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the protruding portion 244b is hidden by the second protruding portion 273. Thereby, the protrusion 244b can position the thin plate member 290 (position stabilizing) while reducing the visibility of the protrusion 244b.

As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, by making the part formed in the upper connecting member 270 a protruding part 279 instead of a hole, it can be positioned easily even in the narrow range of the boundary between the protruding parts 272 and 273. can be made up of parts. In other words, when forming a through hole or a recess in a narrow area, the thickness of the member may become excessively thin and the strength may be insufficient, but this situation can be avoided.

In other words, it is possible to easily prevent the positioning portion of the thin plate member 290 from restricting the arrangement of the projecting portions 272 and 273 or reducing the strength. That is, when forming a positioning hole at the boundary position of the overhanging parts 272, 273, the width length of the boundary position of the overhanging parts 272, 273 is set to be equal to or larger than the width of the hole (if the hole is circular). If the shape is larger than the diameter), and there is a possibility that the strength of the overhanging parts 272 and 273 will decrease due to the material being removed by the hole, but according to this embodiment, these problems can be solved. This makes it easier to resolve points.

On the other hand, as described above, since the back surfaces of the projecting parts 272 and 273 are recessed, the projecting part 279 cannot be formed; however, as shown in FIG. This can be achieved by protruding the protruding parts 244b, so the positioning portions of the thin plate member 290 (protruding parts 244b, 279) can be arranged without being restricted by the arrangement of the protruding parts 272, 273. .

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by forming the protrusions 244b and 279 for positioning the thin plate member 290 on both the central unit 240 and the upper connecting member 270, the upper connecting member 270 can be designed more freely. Since it is possible to avoid restrictions on the arrangement of the positioning portion of the thin plate member 290 while maintaining high strength and strength, the position of the thin plate member 290 can be stabilized.

Furthermore, by being designed so that the protrusion 279 inserted into the thin plate member 290 can be inserted into the recessed part 244a of the central component unit 240, the thin plate member 290 is inserted into the central component unit 240 and the upper connecting member 270. The upper connecting member 270 can be positioned with respect to the central component unit 240 at the same time as the upper connecting member 270 is positioned.

The thin plate member 290 is a member that is visible to the player through the upper connecting member 270.
Although not intentionally shown, in this embodiment, patterns, figures, letters, or characters are drawn in rich colors on the front surface of the thin plate member 290, and are illuminated by LEDs arranged on the illumination board 251 of the central component unit 240. Depending on the difference in the light emitting mode (difference in color and brightness), the colors and brightness that are visually recognized through the thin plate member 290 change variously.

Unlike the case where a pattern, figure, character, or character is drawn directly on the base board 60, according to this embodiment, if the thin plate member 290 is removed, the pattern, figure, character, or character drawn on the thin plate member 290 can be removed from the game board 13. Since it can be removed, the appearance of the game board 13 can be easily changed.

For example, if you want to change the gameplay while using the same shape of the game board 13 (so-called different specs), you can change the patterns, figures, characters, characters, colors, etc. drawn on the game board 13. There are cases where it is made easier for players to understand the gameplay.

If a pattern, figure, character, or character is drawn directly on the base board 60, it will be necessary to replace the entire base board 60, so it will be easy to replace the entire game board 13, which will increase the cost of changing the gameplay. Easy to bulk up.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is sufficient to replace the thin plate member 290 with another thin plate member 290 with a different drawn pattern, figure, character, character, color, etc., so there is no need to replace the entire game board 13. None. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the cost for changing the gameplay.

26 is an enlarged front view of the game board 13 in range XXVI in FIG. 18, FIG. 27 is a partial sectional view of the game board 13 in line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. 26, and FIG. It is a partial sectional view of the game board 13 along the line -XXVIII.

As shown in FIG. 26, the projecting parts 272 to 277 are each formed in an individual shape, but when a ball introduced into the game area collides with the ball, the projecting parts 272 to 277 reduce the momentum of the ball and They have a common purpose of causing the ball to flow down to the left and right sides of the center frame 86.

The overhanging portions 272 to 277 are formed as substitutes for nails that have conventionally been implanted in a similar arrangement. That is, each of the overhanging parts 272 to 277 is designed to have a shape that surrounds a plurality of nails to be planted in a front view.

As can be seen in common among the first overhang portion 272, the second overhang portion 273, and the third overhang portion 274, the upper side surface is formed wider than the other side surfaces. This allows the ball to flow in the same direction along the slope of the upper surface, regardless of the position on the upper surface. As a result, even if the adjustment of the firing force is slightly off, the ball can be easily flowed down a similar path, and the stress of the player who wants the ball to flow down a similar path can be alleviated during the game.

Since the third projecting portion 274 and the fourth projecting portion 275 are arranged adjacent to each other, a slight deviation in the adjustment of the ball's launch force will change which direction the ball will reach. The slope of the upper surface is significantly different. That is, the upper surface of the third projecting portion 274 is a descending slope that gently slopes toward the left and right inwards, whereas the upper surface of the fourth projecting portion 275 slopes sharply toward the left and right inward. It is formed as a descending slope.

Therefore, the ball that reaches the upper surface of the fourth projecting portion 275 and flows downward will bounce upward significantly upon collision with the center frame 86, and its momentum is likely to be lost. Therefore, on the downstream side of the gaming area, it is easy to flow down toward the out opening 71 or toward the general winning opening 63 without reaching the first winning opening 64.

On the other hand, the ball that reaches the upper side of the third projecting portion 274 and flows down collides with the center frame 86 in the left and right directions, and the load in the rebound direction can also be used as the momentum of the ball to flow down, so that the ball flows down the downstream side of the gaming area. It is easy to reach the first prize opening 64.

That is, the shapes of the overhanging parts 272 to 276 are designed so that the manner in which the ball flows down the downstream side of the gaming area changes depending on which overhanging part 272 to 276 the ball reaches. Thereby, the player can be motivated to adjust the firing force of the ball.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the base plate 60 and the extension portion 243 of the central component unit 240 are spaced apart from each other with gaps CL1 and CL2 approximately equal to the thickness of the thin plate portion 242 of the central component unit 240. It is designed to be placed in

That is, the design concept is not that the central component unit 240 is positioned in the central opening 60b of the base plate 60, but rather a gap is left between the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 and the central component unit 240, and the upper connecting member 270 is It is designed based on the design concept of simultaneously aligning the central component unit 240 with respect to the base plate 60 when fastening and fixing (connecting).

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the thin plate member 290 and the central component unit 240 are arranged on the back side of the first overhang part 272, while the base plate 60 is placed on the back side of the third overhang part 274. is placed. In this way, the members arranged on the back surfaces of the overhanging parts 272 to 277 are not all the same and may be different.

As shown in FIG. 27, since the thin plate portion 242 of the central component unit 240 is formed with a thin wall, for example, when a load is applied to the first overhang portion 272, the first overhang portion 272 undergoes bending deformation. In this case, since the thin plate portion 242 of the central component unit 240 can also be flexibly deformed, the load applied to the first projecting portion 272 can be absorbed. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the first projecting portion 272 will break or chip.

Therefore, for example, when a ball collides with the first projecting portion 272, even if the force of the ball is very large, the first projecting portion 272 may be bent and deformed, and a thin plate portion caused by the bending deformation may be caused. The deflection of the ball 242 can sufficiently reduce the momentum of the ball, so that the ball can flow down after colliding with the first projecting portion 272.

As described above, the bending deformation of the thin plate portion 242 is more likely to occur due to the adoption of a configuration in which the thin plate portion 242 and the base plate 60 are provided with gaps CL1 and CL2 instead of being fitted together. . That is, in this embodiment, by providing gaps CL1 and CL2 between the thin plate portion 242 and the base plate 60, the load applied to the first projecting portion 272 is released by bending and deforming the central component unit 240. be able to.

A similar effect can be expected for the second projecting portion 273 as well. Note that the load applied to the first projecting portion 272 includes the load caused by the collision of game balls, the load applied by a clerk at a gaming machine store when clearing ball jams in the gaming area, and the load applied by a worker performing maintenance work. It is assumed that the load will be applied from

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 28, the base plate 60 is formed to be thick enough to prevent bending, so that when a load is applied to the third projecting portion 274, the base plate 60 bends Although it cannot be expected that the deformation will release the load, the third projecting portion 274 is at a lower height than the projecting portions 272 and 273, so the force of the colliding ball is relatively small. Therefore, even in a configuration in which the third projecting portion 274 is arranged in front of the base plate 60, the possibility that the third projecting portion 274 will be broken or chipped can be reduced.

Furthermore, if the momentum of the ball that collides with the third overhang 274 is excessively reduced at a location where the momentum of the colliding ball is relatively small, the ball may stop flowing down, so this book has been In the embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the third projecting portion 274 is arranged in front of the base plate 60.

In addition, since the bending of the third projecting portion 274 is suppressed and the condition is stable, the center frame 86 is divided into left and right sides of the center frame 86 and serves as a game area where nails are planted. Since the guidance of the ball can be stabilized in the arrangement close to the left and right side areas and the lower area, the correspondence between the ball launch intensity and the falling state of the ball can be stabilized.

Note that in order to reliably prevent the third projecting portion 274 from cracking or chipping, the angle of collision with the ball, the shape of the third projecting portion 274, etc. should be set to the third projecting portion 274. It is preferable to design so that the load is small (so that the load can easily escape). It is preferable to adopt a similar design concept for the fourth to sixth protruding parts 275 to 277.

The advantage of using the overhanging portions 272 to 277 as a substitute for the nail KG1 implanted in the base plate 60 will be explained. In particular, it is possible to improve the presentation effect. That is, in the case of the overhanging parts 272 to 277 made of a light-transmitting resin material, there are fewer parts that are blind to the player compared to the metal nail KG1.

For example, even if the illumination board 251 and the thin plate member 290 are arranged on the back side of the overhanging parts 272 and 273 as in this embodiment (see FIG. 27), the overhanging parts 272 and 273 do not allow light to pass through. Since the light is transmitted through the illumination board 251, it is easy for the player to visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the illumination board 251, and the patterns, figures, characters, or characters drawn on the thin plate member 290. Can be done.

The illumination board 251 includes a central light emitting means 251b composed of four LEDs arranged at the center position of the lower side, and seven LEDs arranged so as to surround the left and right sides and upper side of the central light emitting means 251b. It is equipped with a surrounding light emitting means 251c made up of LEDs and a far distance light emitting means 251d made up of LEDs arranged two near both left and right ends, and the arrangement in this embodiment is shown in hidden lines in FIG. Illustrated. The light emitting means 251b, 251c, and 251d do not necessarily irradiate light in the same direction, and each illuminates a different object.

The central light emitting means 251b emits light in the front direction (the optical axis is in the front-rear direction), and illuminates the symbol mark (shown in white in FIG. 26) at the left and right center portions of the decorative portion 247 of the central component unit 240. In order to cause the entire symbol mark to emit faint light, it is designed so that the width angle of the light emitted from the central light emitting means 251b in the irradiation direction with respect to the optical axis is large.

The surrounding light emitting means 251c irradiates light in the front direction (optical axis is in the front-back direction), and irradiates light onto parts having widths in the front-back direction, such as the band-shaped frame portion 245 and the edges of the overhanging portions 272 and 273. arranged to be introduced. The optical axis of the light emitted from the surrounding light emitting means 251c is used as a reference in order to concentrate the energy of the light on the optical axis so that the light visible to the player does not become weak after passing through a portion with a long width in the front-rear direction. The width angle in the irradiation direction is designed to be small.

As a result, the path of light (the path of light passing through the band-shaped frame portion 245 and the overhanging portions 272, 273) can be directly highlighted by changing the brightness and darkness of the light and the color, and there are differences in how to make it stand out. You can perform a performance that adds . For example, by making a difference in the brightness of the light on the left and right sides, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that implicitly suggests the direction in which the ball will be launched.

For example, the LED of the surrounding light emitting means 251c disposed behind the lower edge 272a of the first overhang 272 guides light from the lower edge 272a of the first overhang 272 to the left and right outer edges 272b. It is arranged to illuminate. This makes it easier for the player to make the ball reach the left and right outer edges 272b of the first projecting section 272 by shooting the ball using the light of the first projecting section 272 as a landmark. The optical axis of the light passes through a position where the first overhang 272 has a long front-to-back width, making it easy to completely reflect the light inside the first overhang 272.

In addition, since the internal shape of the first projecting portion 272 is curved so that the rear side projects inward, the light traveling inside the first projecting portion 272 is transmitted to the first projecting portion 272. By repeatedly reflecting the light inside, the light can be easily collected inside the first projecting portion 272. This allows the first projecting portion 272 to emit light brighter than the surroundings when viewed from the front.

As illustrated in FIG. 27, an illumination board 251 is arranged on the back side of the thin plate portion 242 of the central component unit 240. In this embodiment, on the back side of the upper connecting member 270 in the range where the ball is guided on the front side, the thickness of the thick part of the base plate 60 (thick part required for driving the nail KG1) is within the thickness dimension (in the front-back direction). The illumination board 251 is arranged within the dimensions. That is, the front and rear positions of the illumination board 251 are set closer to the front side than the front and rear positions of the back surface of the thick portion of the base plate 60.

This is an impossible board arrangement insofar as nails KG1 as parts for guiding the ball are driven into the base plate 60. In other words, in the range where the nail KG1 is driven, the base plate 60 has to be formed sufficiently thick, so that within the thickness dimension of the base plate 60 (the It is not possible to secure a space for arranging the illumination board 251 on the front side).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a thin upper connecting member 270 is used instead of the nail KG1 as a component for guiding the ball, and the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 is arranged on the back side of the upper connecting member 270. By arranging the thin plate portion 242 of the central component unit 240 instead, a space for arranging the illumination board 251 is secured on the back side of the range where the ball is guided.

As a result, compared to the case where the illumination board 251 has to be placed on the back side of the base plate 60, the degree of freedom in designing the arrangement of the illumination board 251 can be improved, and the illumination board 251 can be It can be placed closer to the front.

By shifting the arrangement of the illumination board 251 toward the front side, it is possible to easily shift the arrangement of the rotation performance device 800 (see FIG. 17) of the operation unit 500 disposed on the back side of the game board 13 toward the front side, and also Since the central light emitting means 251b and the surrounding light emitting means 251c arranged on the decorative board 251 and the light sources arranged on the rotating production device 800 are arranged on the front side, the light that is visible to the player can be made brighter. can do.

The far-field light emitting means 251d has a light irradiation direction (optical axis direction) in a direction that intersects the front-rear direction (the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. 26), and has projecting parts 274 to 276 disposed on the left and right outer sides. , are arranged so as to irradiate the band-shaped frame portion 245, the outer rail 62, etc. with light.

As a result, even with a configuration like the present embodiment in which a thick portion of the base plate 60 is formed to ensure strength and overhanging portions 274 to 276 are arranged in front of the thick portion, it is possible to achieve long-distance light emission. The overhangs 274 to 276 can be sufficiently illuminated using the light irradiation from the means 251d.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the illumination board 251 is closer to the front end side of the base board 60 than the rear end of the board thickness (disposed within the board thickness dimension), It is possible to make it easier for the light emitted in the direction intersecting the direction to reach the fifth projecting portion 276 that is distant to the left and right outside.

The shapes of the overhanging parts 274 to 276 that receive light from the far-field light emitting means 251d are devised so that the amount of light can be easily ensured. That is, for example, in the third projecting portion 274, a side surface 274a (left and right inner and upper side surfaces) on the side of the far light emitting means 251d is formed to be wide, and is formed to receive light from the far light emitting means 251d on the surface. .

In addition, on the opposite side (left and right outer sides and lower side) of the far-field light emitting means 251d, a corner 274b is formed at the connection position between the surfaces, and the cut formed in the overhang 274 is illuminated at this corner 274b. It is formed from a shape that concentrates. Thereby, the light emission intensity can be ensured even at the corner portion 274b that is far from the far-field light emitting means 251d.

Note that the light irradiation to the sixth projecting portion 277 is not from the illumination board 251, but from the thin plate portion 242 disposed on the left and right inner sides of the sixth projecting portion 277 (not at the center of the left and right, but from the left and right sides). This is done using light that passes through the outer thin plate portion 242) toward the front side.

Further, the light emitting effect of the sixth projecting portion 277 is also performed by light emitted from a rotating member 810 of a rotating effect device 800, which will be described later. The configuration and settings of its strength will be described later.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 20. As shown in FIG. 20, the winning holes 63, 64, etc. arranged below the center frame 86 are formed as part of a winning hole forming member 400 made of a light-transmissive resin material.

FIG. 29 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 30 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. In FIGS. 29 and 30, a state in which the winning a prize opening constituent member 400 is disassembled is illustrated.

The winning opening component 400 includes a central component 410 fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 at the left and right center portions of the game board 13, and a covering member 430 configured to cover the lower part of the central component 410 from the front side. a left component member 450 arranged on the left side of the central component member 410 and fastened to the base plate 60; a right component member 470 arranged on the right side of the central component member 410 and fastened to the base plate 60; Equipped with. Note that the right component 470 is formed to have a substantially bilaterally symmetrical shape with the left component 450.

The central component 410 includes a flat main body plate 411 that is fastened and fixed in surface contact with the base plate 60, a horizontally long opening 412 that is formed as an opening that constitutes the specific winning opening 65a, and the horizontally long opening. A pair of left and right distribution parts 413 are formed on the left and right side parts of 412 so as to be able to distribute the falling paths of the balls upwardly, and the upper side surface is formed in a curved plate shape above the distribution parts 413. A pair of left and right curved protrusions 414 protrude toward the front side so as to distribute the falling path of the balls, and a pair of curved protrusions 414 large enough to discharge the balls to positions spaced outward from the left and right ends of the oblong opening 412. A pair of left and right outlet ports 415 are provided.

The main body plate portion 411 includes seat placement recesses 411a that are recessed from the back side on both left and right sides so as to reduce the plate thickness. The seat arrangement recess 411a is recessed in a shape that corresponds to the outer shape of the production sheet member (thin plate member 380), and is formed with a recess depth that is approximately equal to the thickness of the sheet member.

The gap between the distribution part 413 and the curved protrusion 414 is formed to be larger than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the balls can flow down through the gap between the distribution part 413 and the curved protrusion 414, so the randomness of the balls flowing down can be increased, and the attention to the balls can be improved. Can be done.

The distribution part 413 includes a plurality of protrusions 413a that protrude from the left and right inner sides (second winning port 140 side). The protruding part 413a is a shaped part provided in order to reduce the falling speed of the ball by coming into contact with the falling ball, and due to the deceleration effect of the protruding part 413a, from the ball to the opening/closing plate 65b of the specific winning opening 65a. The applied collision force can be reduced. Thereby, damage to the opening/closing plate 65b can be prevented.

A tangent line HL1 (see FIG. 31) to the curved surface passing through the lower end of the curved surface of the curved protruding portion 414 is designed to pass through the left and right inner side surfaces (the side surfaces on the first prize opening 64 side) of the distribution portion 413. ing. Therefore, the ball that has rolled on the curved surface of the curved protruding portion 414 to the lower end is likely to reach the left and right inner side surfaces of the distribution portion 413 .

The covering member 430 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and includes a main body plate portion 431 formed in a thin plate shape, and a band-shaped back surface extending from the left and right side ends of the main body plate portion 431 toward the left and right inner portions. A pair of left and right strips 432 extending to the sides, and a pair of left and right vertical plate sections connected to the left and right inner ends of the strips 432 and extending to the back in a vertically elongated plate shape. 433, a pair of left and right inclined plate parts 434 extending to the back side in a long plate shape with an upwardly inclined position from the upper end of the vertical plate part 433 toward the left and right inner sides, and rotation of the electric accessory 140a. An upright part 435 is provided on the lower side of the electric accessory 140a and is formed upright from the main body plate part 431 on the back side so as to regulate the angle.

The strip portion 432, the vertical plate portion 433, the inclined plate portion 434, and the upright portion 435 have their tips connected to the main body plate portion 411 of the central component member 410 when the covering member 430 is fastened and fixed to the central component member 410. It is formed with a length that allows it to come into contact with. That is, the belt-shaped portion 432, the vertical plate portion 433, the inclined plate portion 434, and the upright portion 435 change the downward flow path of the ball, and also distribute the downward flow path of the ball.

The strip portion 432 is disposed along the left and right outer sides and the lower side of the out port 415, and the balls that roll onto the strip portion 432 and flow down are guided to the out port 415 and discharged from the game area.

The inclined plate part 434 is disposed closer to the specific winning opening 65a than the out port 415, but since the inclination direction of the upper surface slopes downward toward the out port 415 side, the falling water that has rolled onto the inclined plate part 434 The ball is also guided to the out port 415 and ejected from the gaming area.

The upright portions 435 are arranged on the left and right inner sides of the distribution portion 413 of the central component 410 with a gap equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere when the central component 410 and the covering member 430 are assembled (see FIG. 17). Ru. This allows the ball to flow down between the distribution section 413 and the upright section 435.

The left component 450 includes a flat main body plate 451 that is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material and is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 while being in surface contact with the main body plate 451, and a left portion of the main body plate 451 that extends from the front. It is a plate-shaped part where the left end is arranged with a gap large enough to allow a ball to pass between the overhanging part 453 that is formed overhanging on the side, and as it goes to the right side, A ceiling plate part 455 formed in a shape that slopes downward, and a plurality of ball guide parts 457, 459 formed in a shape that can guide the ball to the general winning hole 63 below the ceiling plate part 455. Be prepared.

The ceiling plate part 455 is not separated in the middle so that only the balls that have passed through the gap between the overhanging part 453 and the ceiling plate part 455 can flow down the ball guide parts 457 and 459. It is formed into a plate shape.

Seat placement recesses 451b and 471b are formed on the back side of the left component 450 and the back side of the right component 470, which are recessed so as to reduce the plate thickness from the back side. The seat arrangement recesses 451b and 471b are recessed in a shape that corresponds to the outer shape of a production sheet member (not shown), and are formed with a recess depth that is approximately equal to the thickness of the sheet member. Note that the explanation regarding the thin plate member 380 will be used instead of the example of the decoration of this sheet member.

FIG. 31 is an enlarged front view of the game board 13 in range XXXI of FIG. 18. Balls that do not pass through the gap between the overhanging part 453 and the ceiling plate part 455 and roll down the upper surface of the ceiling plate part 455 are not guided to the guide parts 457 and 459 and are not guided to the central structure. It flows down so as to be guided toward the member 410 side. The flow path of the ball from the upstream side of the left component 450 and the center component 410 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 31, the plurality of nails KG1 installed on the base plate 60 are arranged with gaps smaller than the diameter of the ball along a straight line that slopes downward as it goes inward in the left-right direction. While a path for the ball flowing down toward the center (main path FL1) is formed, by leaving gaps that exceed the diameter of the ball in some places, a falling path for the ball to pass through the gaps and deviate from the main path. FL2 and FL3 are formed.

The ceiling plate part 455 is formed so that a ball can roll on the upper surface, but the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the ceiling plate part 455 differs depending on the timing of dropping downward from the main path FL1. To explain in detail, when the path of the ball changes from the main path FL1 to the falling path FL2, the falling velocity of the ball is switched from a state in which it mainly faces in the left-right direction to a state in which it mainly faces in the vertical direction.

Then, after reaching the ceiling plate part 455, the speed is switched again to the state in which the ball faces the left and right directions, so the sooner the ball reaches the ceiling plate part 455 (the more upstream it is on the downstream path), the more The rolling speed (momentum) of the ball when flowing down the portion 455 increases, and it is easier to reach the left and right inside of the gaming area (specific winning opening 65a side).

In addition, since the left and right inner ends (lower ends) of the upper surface of the ceiling plate part 455 are arranged above the upper ends of the adjacent curved protrusions 414, the ceiling plate part 455 can be rolled left and right. It is easy to prevent the balls passing inward from being blocked by the left and right outer side surfaces of the curved protrusion 414.

If the rolling speed of the ball when flowing down the ceiling plate part 455 is increased and it reaches the specific prize opening 65a at that speed, the opening/closing plate 65b will be damaged due to the large impact force being transmitted from the ball to the opening/closing plate 65b. Although this may be a concern, in the present embodiment, a protrusion 413a is provided on the downward flow path of the ball to the opening/closing plate 65b, thereby reducing the downward speed of the ball.

In addition, upright portions 435 are disposed opposite to each other on the left and right inner sides of the protruding portion 413a to prevent the plurality of balls from flowing down side by side. This makes it possible to avoid clogging of the balls between the protrusion portion 413a and the upright portion 435 (rectification effect), and also makes it easier to avoid a situation in which the balls land on the opening/closing plate 65b at the same time. Therefore, damage to the opening/closing plate 65b can be easily prevented (improved durability).

In this way, the falling velocity of the ball is reduced and the falling path of the ball is restricted. This makes it possible to reduce the collision force generated when the ball collides with the opening/closing plate 65b, thereby suppressing the occurrence of a problem in which the opening/closing plate 65b is damaged.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the protrusions 413a are arranged at bilaterally symmetrical positions with respect to the upright part 435, in the pair of flow paths formed by the pair of left and right protrusions 413a and the upright part 435. If the balls flow down at the same time, a plurality of balls may land on the opening/closing plate 65b at the same time.

Therefore, in the special game state, by hitting the balls left and right, it is possible to easily allow a plurality of balls to enter the specific winning hole 65a at the same time. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid a situation where the progress of the special game state becomes too slow.

Since the upper surface of the ceiling plate section 455 is formed as a wide inclined surface on the left and right sides, the ceiling panel section 455 can receive multiple balls at the same time. It can be flowed to the winning a prize opening 65a side).

Then, the balls flown inwardly to the left and right pass through the right and left inwards of the distribution section 413 (the side on which the protrusions 413a are formed) in order, and reach the opening/closing plate 65b in the open state in order. In this way, according to the present embodiment, the paths of the balls that reach the opening/closing plate 65b are grouped into a path passing through the left and right inner sides of the distribution section 413, so that the balls do not collide with each other on the upstream side of the opening/closing plate 65b. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the ball deviates from the specific winning hole 65a.

Furthermore, by designing so that the left and right ends of the specific prize opening 65a and the opening/closing plate 65b are located on the left and right outer sides of the position where it flows down while contacting the protrusion 413a of the distribution part 413 and reaches the opening/closing plate 65b. Even if the balls collide with each other on the opening/closing plate 65b and bounce from side to side, the state in which the balls rest on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b can still be maintained. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the ball spills from the opening/closing plate 65b.

Note that even if a plurality of balls are densely accumulated from the left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b, in this embodiment, a space is formed below the inclined plate part 434, and the balls are located on the left and right outer sides of the opening/closing plate 65b. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation where the path of the ball passing through the left and right inner sides of the distribution section 413 is clogged.

In this embodiment, by arranging a gap larger than the diameter of the ball between the ceiling plate part 455 and the curved protrusion 414, the ball is allowed to flow down through this gap. For example, when a ball rolling down the ceiling plate part 455 collides with a ball flowing down through the inner falling path FL3, the ball rolling down the ceiling plate part 455 is slowed down in the left and right direction, and the ball rolls down the ceiling plate part 455. and the curved protrusion 414.

The frequency with which the balls flowing down the main path FL1 flow down the outer falling path FL2 and the frequency of flowing down the inner falling path FL3 may vary depending on the condition of the nail KG1 (adhesion of dirt, production lot).
Therefore, without countermeasures, gaming efficiency and gaming profits will be affected by the condition of the nail KG1, making it impossible to provide games under equal conditions.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if the balls that pass through the outer falling path FL2 and roll on the ceiling plate part 455 occur more frequently than the balls that flow down the inner falling path FL3, the ball reaches the first prize opening 64. This is disadvantageous in game states (normal state, time-saving state, high-probability state, etc.) in which the goal of receiving a lottery and aiming for a jackpot is that fewer balls will reach the target. The possibility of balls entering the gap between the section 455 and the curved protruding section 414 can be reduced, and most of the balls that have reached the ceiling plate section 455 can be guided to the specific prize opening 65a, thereby improving gaming efficiency. (For example, the time required for jackpot games can be shortened).

On the other hand, if the balls flowing down the inner falling path FL3 occur more frequently than the balls rolling on the ceiling plate part 455 through the outer falling path FL2, more balls will reach the first prize opening 64. This is advantageous in a gaming state in which you aim to win a jackpot by winning a lottery (normal state, time saving state, high probability state, etc.), but in a jackpot gaming state in which the specific prize opening 65a opens and closes, the ceiling plate part 455 is rolled. The ball that has flowed down from the inner falling path FL3 collides with the path of the falling ball, and the ball that falls into the gap between the ceiling plate part 455 and the curved protrusion 414, and the ball that falls into the gap between the distribution part 413 and the curved protrusion. Balls frequently pass through the gap between the ball and the installation portion 414 and flow toward the outlet 415 side. As a result, the number of balls that deviate from the specific winning hole 65a increases, so the gaming efficiency of the jackpot game decreases.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the frequency of occurrence of balls passing through the outer falling path FL2 and rolling on the ceiling plate portion 455 changes in magnitude with the frequency of occurrence of balls flowing down the inner falling path FL3, the game state is changed. The system switches between an advantageous state and a disadvantageous state, and is designed so that the player is neither unilaterally advantageous nor unilaterally disadvantageous.

That is, while allowing the state of the nail KG1 to differ, no matter what the state of the nail KG1 is, a relationship is maintained that is advantageous to the player in some states and disadvantageous to the player in other states. By doing so, we aim to provide gaming under equal conditions.

At the left and right inner sides of the extension plate part 455a that flows down in the outer falling path FL2 and extends upward at the left end of the ceiling plate part 455, and the overhang part 453 that is arranged opposite to the extension plate part 455a. The flow path of the ball that flows down between the side wall portions 453a that are curved downward on the left and right sides will be described.

The rate at which the balls are guided to this downstream path varies depending on the condition of the adjacent nails KG2 (the spacing at the positions where the balls flow down). The condition of the nail KG2 may change due to a collision with a ball or being touched by an employee at a gaming machine store.

Further, the rate at which the ball reaches just before the nail KG2 varies depending on whether the ball rolls on the upper surface of the side wall portion 453. Whether the ball reaches the upper surface of the side wall portion 453 varies depending on the state of the wind turbine FS1 arranged above the side wall portion 453. Since the rotating shaft of the windmill FS1 is also driven into the base plate 60 like the nail KG2, its condition may change due to a collision with a ball or being touched by an employee at a gaming machine store.

Since the first ball guide section 457 is disposed directly below the falling path between the extension plate section 455a and the side wall section 453a, the ball that flows down normally passes through the first ball guide section 457 and reaches the gaming area. is discharged from. The first ball guide section 457 constitutes the general prize winning opening 63, and when a ball is guided to the first ball guide section 457, the prize ball is paid out to the player.

In this embodiment, when a ball flows directly downward between the extension plate part 455a and the side wall part 453a, the ball will enter the first ball guide part 457 with an 80% probability, and with a 10% probability. It is configured so that it will deviate to the left with a probability of 10%, and deviate to the right with a 10% probability. Note that this ratio can be designed differently depending on the shape (inclination, interval, etc.) of the extended plate portion 455a and the side wall portion 453a, and the arrangement of the first ball guide portion 457.

On the other hand, for example, if the next ball arrives at the first ball guide part 457 while the ball that has reached the first ball guide part 457 is still staying there, the next ball reaches the first ball guide part 457. The balls tend to deviate to the left and right of the first ball guide portion 457 and flow down. Further, for example, when a plurality of balls gather together and flow toward the first ball guide section 457, some of the balls tend to deviate to the left and right of the first ball guide section 457 and flow down.

When the ball deviates from the first ball guide part 457 to the right and left sides, no winning opening is provided on the downstream side thereof, and the ball is discharged from the out opening 415. On the other hand, if the ball deviates from the first ball guide part 457 to the left and right inside, it can reach the second ball guide 459 by rolling on the inclined guide part 458 that projects from the first ball guide part 457 to the left and right inside. The second ball guide section 459 constitutes the general prize winning opening 63, and when a ball is guided to the second ball guide section 459, a prize ball is paid out to the player.

The number of prize balls paid out as the ball is guided to the first ball guide section 457 and the number of prize balls paid out as the ball is guided to the second ball guide section 459 can be set arbitrarily. Although this is possible, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out is set to be larger when the ball is guided to the downstream side.

In other words, the number of prize balls paid out as the ball is guided to the second ball guide section 459 is greater than the number of prize balls paid out as the ball is guided to the first ball guide section 457. It is set to increase.

As a result, when a ball falls to the left of the left end of the ceiling slope portion 455, the ball does not enter the first ball guide portion 457 and deviates to the right side (second ball guide portion 459 side). It is possible to create the gameplay that the player desires, and it is possible to improve attention to the left component member 450.

For example, if the setting is such that one prize ball is paid out as the ball is guided by the first ball guide section 457, the ball heading toward the first guide section 457 is placed on the left and right sides (on the left side in FIG. 31). If the ball deviates from the ball, the number of balls in the player's hand decreases, and if the ball is guided by the first guide section 457, the number of balls remains the same (one prize ball for one shot) and deviates to the left and right (right side in Figure 31). The number of balls in hand may increase as the balls are guided to the second ball guide section 459 and prize balls (more than 1 ball, generally 2 to 15 balls) are paid out. It is possible to configure the gameplay.

This makes it possible to clearly correlate the flow of the ball near the first guide section 457 with the magnitude of the profit obtained by the player, thereby improving attention to the flow of the ball near the first guide section 457. Can be done.

Since the inclined guide part 458 extending to the right of the first guide part 457 is made of a resin material, it easily breaks when bent. Therefore, unlike the nail KG1, it is easy to understand changes in condition. If the broken state can be determined, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be stopped until the part is replaced, thereby preventing the player from suffering an unexpected disadvantage.

In this embodiment, various shapes are devised so that the ball rolling on the inclined guide part 458 is guided to the second ball guide part 459 with high probability. First, a bulging portion 456 that bulges toward the lower surface of the ceiling plate portion 455 is formed at the upper left position of the second ball guide portion 459 .

The ball that starts rolling on the upper surface of the inclined guide part 458 and whose vertical bounce has not been sufficiently contained comes into contact with the bulge part 456 in the left-right direction, and the velocity direction of the ball is changed downward. This can prevent the ball that has rolled on the upper surface of the inclined guide section 458 from deviating to the right side of the second ball guide section 459 due to momentum.

Second, the inclined guide section 458 has a horizontal interval with the second ball guide section 459 that is shorter than the radius of the sphere, and a vertical interval with the second ball guide section 459 that is shorter than the radius of the sphere. (The slanted guide part 458 and the second ball guide part 459 are formed in a dimensional relationship that does not allow the passage of a ball between the inclined guide part 458 and the second ball guide part 459.) ) Therefore, the inclined guide part 458 can easily prevent the ball from deviating to the left side of the second ball guide part 459.

The prize opening component 400 is a resin molded member and is assembled to the base plate 60 by fastening and fixing with fastening screws, so replacement in the event of a defect is easier than replacing (re-hammering) the nail KG1. It is.

For example, if nail KG1 breaks, there is a high possibility that the game machine will stop operating for a long period of time, but normally, nails KG1 are driven in in large numbers rather than one by one. Since the nails KG1 are driven by an automatic machine, it is not easy to re-drive the nails KG1 even if some of the nails KG1 break.

Therefore, in order to repair it, it is often necessary to replace the entire game board, but if it is determined that the replacement cost cannot be covered, even if there is no broken part other than the nail KG1, However, there is a possibility that the equipment will be stored in a warehouse without being restarted. That is, there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of maintenance efficiency and improvement of the operating period of the gaming machine.

In this embodiment, in order to prevent defects in the nail KG1 as much as possible, balls falling in the vertical direction are caught by the overhanging part 453 of the left component 450, and the received balls are caught by the overhanging part 453. By rolling left and right on the upper surface of 453, the force in the vertical direction is reduced, and then the nail KG1 on the downstream side is brought into contact with the nail KG1. Thereby, the load applied from the ball to the nail KG1 can be reduced, and the occurrence of defects in the nail KG1 can be suppressed.

Further, when focusing on the nails KG1 arranged on the left and right sides of the outer falling path FL2, since the right and left sides are covered with the overhanging portions 453, the ball does not collide with these nails KG1 from the left and right sides. Therefore, compared to the case where the nail KG1 receives loads from random directions, it is possible to lengthen the period until the nail KG1 breaks.

The balls flowing down the front side of the left component 450 pass through the outlet 415 and are discharged to the back side of the base plate 60. At this time, since the vertical plate portion 433 restricts the passage of the ball to the left and right inner side (the side close to the opening/closing plate 65b), the ball does not flow toward the opening/closing plate 65b without passing through the outlet 415. It can be prevented.

Therefore, since the rotation axis of the opening/closing plate 65b can prevent balls from flowing in from the left component 450 side, balls can always pass between the opening/closing plate 65b and the inner rail 61 as a countermeasure against ball clogging. There is no need to leave a space between the inner rail 61 and the rotation axis (lower edge) of the opening/closing plate 65b, and the vertical distance between the inner rail 61 and the rotation axis (lower edge) of the opening/closing plate 65b can be set to be less than the diameter of the sphere.

Even with such a configuration, if the ball that was on the opening/closing plate 65b spills left or right, it can be temporarily placed between the vertical plate part 433 and the opening/closing plate 65b, and the opening/closing plate 65b When the ball is in the closed state, the opening/closing plate 65b, which has been blocking the ball's downward path, retreats from the ball's downward path, so that the temporarily placed ball flows down toward the out port 71. Therefore, the possibility of ball clogging can be reduced.

FIG. 32 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line XXXII-XXXII in FIG. 31. The main body plate portion 451 of the left component 450 has an extension portion 451a extending from the left and right inner edges along the front surface of the base plate 60 in a thin plate shape (thinner than the thickness of the main body plate portion 451). The main body plate portion 411 of the central component 410 includes covered extension portions 411b extending from the left and right outer edges along the front side surface.

In this embodiment, the extending portion 451a is held between the covered extending portion 411b and the base plate 60. As a result, the fastening screws for fixing can be removed from the left and right inner ends of the left component 450, which is the side to be held, so the presence of the fastening screws can be avoided when decorating the left component 450. This makes it easy to prevent the problem of deterioration of the performance effect due to conspicuousness. In addition, since the number of fastening screws for fastening and fixing the members can be reduced, the number of assembly steps and material costs can be reduced.

The front-rear position of the front end of the covering extension part 411b in the state where the extension part 451a is held between the base plate 60 is located closer to the back side than the front-rear position of the front end of the main body plate part 451. There is. As a result, when the ball flowing down the front side of the main body plate part 451 flows toward the front side of the main body plate part 411, the front end of the covering extension part 411b collides with the ball, and the ball is pushed outward to the right and left sides. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the object is bounced back.

33 is an exploded front perspective view of the distribution unit 300, and FIG. 34 is an exploded rear perspective view of the distribution unit 300. As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the above-mentioned distribution section 983 is rotatably arranged inside the distribution unit 300, and passes through the first prize opening 64 inside the distribution unit 300. The structure is such that the balls guided by the ball are distributed alternately to the left and right.

The sorting unit 300 is a member disposed in a rotatable manner from the rear side with a sorting section 983, and has a first configuration that constitutes a flow path that distributes the balls that have passed through the first prize opening 64 to the left and right and flows them down. The member 310, the ceiling component 330 that constitutes the ceiling of the path through which the balls that have passed through the first prize opening 64 flow downward, and the first component 310 support the shaft member 988a of the distribution section 983 with both ends. A first auxiliary member 340 that comes into contact with the distribution section 983 to prevent balls flowing from falling off to the back side, and a second component that constitutes a discharge path for balls discharged rearward from the downstream side of the first component 310. 350 and a member to which the second component 350 is fastened and fixed, which is disposed so as to cover the rear and upper part of the discharge path formed by the second component 350, and is fastened and fixed to the first component 310. A pair of left and right second auxiliary members 370 and a pair of left and right thin plate members 380 arranged on the front side of the first component 310 and between the first component 310 and the main body plate portion 411 of the central component 410. and.

The first component 310 is made of a colorless and semi-transparent resin material, and includes a plate-shaped central plate portion 311 formed along a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction, and a central plate portion 311 extending from the upper end of the central plate portion 311 toward the front side. an extended plate portion 313 provided, a pair of inclined extended portions 315 extending on the back side of the center plate portion 311 and extending in a band shape in a downwardly inclined direction toward the left and right outer sides; A pair of direction switching portions 317 connected to the left and right outer ends to switch the direction of the ball (in this embodiment, switching from the left and right direction to the front and rear direction), and a direction switching portion 317 on the front side of the center plate portion 311 large enough for the ball to pass through. A pair of left and right opening forming portions 320 are provided in which a plurality of openings are arranged on the left and right sides.

The center plate portion 311 includes a substantially cylindrical bearing portion 312 directly below the rear end portion of the extended plate portion 313 into which one end of a shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted. The bearing portion 312 is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

The extension plate part 313 has a protrusion part 313a which is formed as a protrusion whose upper end surface slopes downward toward the rear along the left and right center parts and forms a rolling path for the ball, and a protrusion part 313a which is erected from the left and right edges and which is formed as a protrusion 313a that slopes downward toward the rear. and a pair of left and right wall-shaped parts 314 that guide the rearward direction.

The ball flowing down the inclined extension part 315 is prevented from falling off to the back side by the front plate part 371 of the second auxiliary member 370, and flows down to the left and right outside. Note that the second auxiliary member 370 is also used as a member for preventing the detection device SE3 from coming off.

The direction switching portion 317 is formed as a plate surface on which a ball can roll at a position one step lower than the inclined extending portion 315 on the left and right outer sides of the left and right end portions of the inclined extending portion 315, and is inclined downward toward the front side. An inclined surface section 318 and an upright curved section 319 that is erected from the rear edge and right and left outer edges of the inclined surface section 318 and is curved toward the front side in a shape that can guide the ball toward the front side. Be prepared.

The opening forming part 320 includes a sensor placement opening 321 through which the detection device SE3 is inserted from the back side, and extends toward the front side along the left and right side surfaces of the sensor placement opening 321 to support the left and right ends of the detection sensor SE3. a pair of left and right support extensions 322, a winning opening 323 formed between the support extensions 322 so that a ball can pass therethrough, and a winning opening 323 based on the support extension 322. A pair of ejection openings 325 are formed on the left and right opposite sides of the screen so that the balls can pass therethrough, and a bottom surface with a shape that can receive the balls that have passed through the winning opening 323 and the ejection opening 325 and guide them to the back side. A bottom surface forming portion 327 whose portion is curved toward the rear, and a pair of bottom surface forming portions 327 extending from the lower edge of the support extension portion 322 toward the bottom surface forming portion 327 so as to partition the upper surface side of the bottom surface forming portion 327. A partition wall portion 328 is provided.

When inserting the detection device SE3 into the sensor placement opening 321, the detection hole SE1a is designed to be placed inside the winning opening 323. The positioning protrusion 322a protruding from the front edge of the support extension part 322 contacts the front end of the detection device SE3, so that the front and rear positions of the detection device SE3 can be easily positioned.

The ball that passes through the direction switching section 317 and reaches the opening forming section 320 passes through either the winning opening 323 or the ejection opening 325, rolls on the top surface of the bottom forming section 327, and goes to the back side. You will be guided. Since each rolling path is divided by the partition wall portion 328, the possibility that the balls will intersect or collide on the upper surface of the bottom surface forming portion 327 can be reduced. As a result, the flow of the balls can be rectified, so that clogging of the balls and stagnation of the balls can be prevented.

Among the balls rolling on the upper surface of the bottom surface forming part 327, the ball passing through the winning opening 323 is detected by the detection device SE3. On the other hand, the passage of the ball that has passed through the discharge opening 325 is not detected by the detection device SE3. In any case, the balls rolling on the upper surface of the bottom surface forming part 327 are detected by a detection device (not shown) that detects ball ejection, and then guided to a ball ejection path (not shown).

The balls roll toward the left and right inwards on the rolling surface 351 of the second component 350 while being prevented from falling off to the back side by the second auxiliary member 370 to the ball discharge path (not shown), and are arranged on the left and right respectively. The liquid is guided through a common falling channel 352 provided therein.

The second auxiliary member 370 includes a front plate portion 371 that covers a space open on the back side of the inclined extension portion 315 to prevent the ball from falling off, a rolling surface 351 of the second component member 350, and a common fall. A rear plate part 372 that blocks the upper and rear sides of the flow path of the balls flowing down along the flow path 352 to prevent the balls from falling off, and a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening part 329 of the first component 310. An insertion hole 373 formed in the front plate part 371 so that it can be inserted therethrough; and an insertion hole 374 formed in the rear plate part 372 so that a fastening screw screwed into the fastening part 353 of the second component 350 can be inserted thereinto. , is provided.

Note that the materials for forming the second component member 350 and the second auxiliary member 370 can be set arbitrarily, but in this embodiment, the second component member 350 is formed from a colored opaque resin material, and the second component member 350 is made of a colored opaque resin material. 370 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material.

As a result, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the balls flowing through the common falling channel 352 and reduce the attention paid to the ejected balls, and also it is possible to take in light from the back side of the second auxiliary member 370. Therefore, the first component 310 disposed on the front side can be brightly illuminated, and the visibility of the ball flowing down the first component 310 can be improved.

The thin plate member 380 is positioned by being accommodated in the seat placement recess 411a (see FIG. 30) of the main body plate portion 411. In this positioned state, the game board 13 is assembled, and the thin plate member 380 is sandwiched between the main body plate portion 411 and the first component member 310 in the front-rear direction.

A description will be given of the front-rear, left-right and left-right displacement (change in placement) of the ball that entered the first prize opening 64 in the course of its descent. First, the ball that entered the first winning hole 64 is displaced backward along the extension plate portion 313. Thereafter, it is distributed to the left and right by the rotational displacement of the distribution part 983 described in the first embodiment, and is displaced to the left and right outside along the inclined extension part 315.

Thereafter, the flow direction is switched to the front side by the direction switching unit 317, and the paper is displaced forward. If a guide section with a curved surface for switching the direction of the ball's flow is placed in front of the falling ball, the guide section may easily block the line of sight to the ball, reducing visibility. However, in this embodiment, since the erected curved portion 319 as a guide portion is arranged on the back side of the ball, there is a low possibility that the erected curved portion 319 will block the line of sight to the ball. Thereby, visibility of the ball can be easily ensured.

Thereafter, the ball flowing directly below the winning opening 323 is detected by the detection device SE3, and then is displaced backward along the bottom surface forming part 327. In addition, the ball that is displaced to the left or right above the winning opening 323 and reaches directly above the ejection opening 325 passes through the ejection opening 325 and is displaced backward along the bottom component 327. do.

In this way, in the present embodiment, the ball that enters the first prize opening 64 is placed toward the rear when it first enters the ball, flows to the left and right, and is brought to the front just before passing through the detection device SE3. ing.
As a result, compared to the configuration of the first embodiment, the distribution section 983 can be placed closer to the rear, and a space can be left below the extension plate section 313.

This empty space can be used as a space for arranging a drive mechanism for operating the electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140. Thereby, in this embodiment, compared to the first embodiment, the arrangement of the second winning hole 140 can be brought closer to the first winning hole 64.

In addition, when the flow paths are configured to be consistently aligned in the vertical direction by configuring the path along which the distributed balls flow down by switching the path in the front and back direction (for example, when the flow path is configured to be consistently arranged in the vertical direction (for example, as described above in the distribution unit 980). The vertical width of the flow path when viewed from the front can be shortened compared to the case of the above structure. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the relative vertical arrangement of the detection device SE3 with respect to the first winning opening 64 can be improved.

FIG. 35 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board 13 in range XXXV of FIG. 18. In FIG. 35, the central component 410 and the thin plate member 380 are shown semitransparently, so that the distribution unit 300 can be visually recognized. Further, in FIG. 35, for convenience of explanation, the external shapes of the electric accessory 140a in both the closed state and the open state are shown. In addition, in the description of FIG. 35, FIGS. 33 and 34 will be referred to as appropriate.

The thin plate member 380 is a member formed in a thin plate shape (sheet shape) from a light-transmitting resin material, and is a member that is visible to the player via the central component member 410. Although not intentionally shown in the drawings, in this embodiment, patterns, figures, letters, or characters are drawn in rich colors on the front surface of the thin plate member 380, and differences in the form of the irradiated light (color, brightness, etc.) are used. Depending on the difference), the color and brightness that are visually recognized through the thin plate member 380 change variously.

Unlike the case where patterns, figures, characters, or characters are drawn directly on the base board 60, according to the present embodiment, by removing the thin plate member 380, the patterns, figures, letters, or characters drawn on the thin plate member 380 can be removed from the game board 13. Since it can be removed, the appearance of the game board 13 can be easily changed.

For example, if you want to change the gameplay while using the same shape of the game board 13 (so-called different specs), you can change the patterns, figures, characters, characters, colors, etc. drawn on the game board 13. There are cases where it is made easier for players to understand the gameplay.

If a pattern, figure, character, or character is drawn directly on the base board 60, it will be necessary to replace the entire base board 60, so it will be easy to replace the entire game board 13, which will increase the cost of changing the gameplay. Easy to bulk up.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is sufficient to replace the thin plate member 380 with another thin plate member 380 with a different drawn pattern, figure, character, character, color, etc., so there is no need to replace the entire game board 13. None. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the cost for changing the gameplay.

The mode of decoration applied to the thin plate member 380 is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, by forming a colorless and transparent area above the detection device SE3, the visibility of the ball rolling on the inclined surface portion 318 is improved, and in other areas, figures and patterns are densely drawn to improve decorativeness. You may also let them do so. In addition, for example, marks may be drawn using numbers or the like at locations corresponding to the winning opening 323 and the ejection opening 325 when viewed from the front, and the player can obtain profits depending on which mark the ball falls close to. It may be possible to make it easier to understand.

The thin plate member 380 is designed to have a large shape so as to protrude outward from the left and right sides of the through hole 60a, and is arranged so as to be sandwiched between the base plate 60 and the main body plate portion 411 of the central component 410. Ru.

In this embodiment, the rear end surface of the thin plate member 380 and the front end portion of the first component member 310 (for example, the front end portion of the support extension portion 322) are arranged so as to be in contact with each other. That is, since the detection device SE3 is arranged close to the thin plate member 380, the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3 can be brought closer to the player side. Thereby, the visibility of the ball passing through the detection device SE3 can be improved, and it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which a ball passing through the detection device SE3 is missed.

Moreover, the detection device SE3 is arranged on the left and right outer sides of the electric accessory 140a when viewed from the front, and is not hidden by the electric accessory 140a. As a result, compared to the case where the downward path of the ball is hidden by the electric accessory 140a (see FIG. 5), the ball passes through the detection device SE3 regardless of the state of the electric accessory 140a (open state, closed state). visibility can be improved.

Further, since the detection device SE3 is disposed at the rear of the main body plate portion 411 of the central component member 410, it does not affect the manner in which the ball flows down on the front side of the main body plate portion 411. That is, the degree of freedom in designing the gaming area can be improved compared to the case where the detection device SE3 is arranged to protrude forward of the main body plate portion 411 (front of the front end surface of the base board 60).

For reasons of strength, nails are not provided on the main body plate portion 411, but in this embodiment, as a substitute for nails, a distribution portion 413 and a curved protrusion portion 414 are used to distribute the paths of the balls. ing. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a monotonous falling path of the ball on the front side of the main body plate portion 411.

The ball detected by the detection device SE3 through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3 (the ball passing through the winning opening 323) and the ball passing through the ejection opening 325 both pass through the inclined surface portion 318. It follows a path where it rolls and is displaced towards the front. Therefore, there may be a difference between the number of balls that have reached the inclined surface portion 318 and the number of balls that are detected by the detection device SE3.

Although visibility of the ball can be improved by displacing the ball toward the front side by the inclined surface portion 318, it is difficult to distinguish whether the ball has passed through the winning opening 323 or the ejection opening 325. In this case, it is not possible to determine whether the ball has not really passed through the detection device SE3 or whether the ball has passed through the detection device SE3 but has been detected incorrectly, and the player may feel dissatisfied.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the ball passing through the winning opening 323 from the inclined surface part 318 is visually recognized as flowing downward in front view along the winning flow path FL31, whereas The ball passing through the discharge opening 325 from the surface portion 318 has its flow direction switched from downward to left and right by 90 degrees in front view along the non-winning flow path FL32.

In other words, it is possible to determine whether or not the ball passes through the detection device SE3 based on whether or not there is a left-right component in the downward direction of the ball, thereby reducing the possibility of misunderstanding the passing point of the ball. can do. Thereby, it is possible to easily determine whether the ball has passed through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3.

Both the game balls that flow down along the winning flow path FL31 and the game balls that flow down along the non-win flow path FL32 flow down near the distribution section 413 and the curved protrusion section 414 when viewed from the front. , the downstream path is visually recognized to overlap with the downstream path of the game ball flowing down toward the specific winning a prize opening 65a.

Therefore, the game ball flowing down via the inclined surface portion 318 can appear to the player as if it were flowing down toward the specific winning a prize opening 65a. Of the game balls fired, the player counts the number of game balls that reached above the opening/closing plate 65b but did not enter the specific winning hole 65a (gaming balls that passed while the opening/closing plate 65b was in the closed state) as an out. The game ball rolling on the inner rail 61 toward the opening 71 is often visually confirmed and grasped. However, after the game ball flowing down via the slope part 318 flows down the winning flow path FL31 or the non-winning flow path FL32, it is flown backward along the bottom structure part 327 (see FIG. 34), so the game ball It does not appear before the outlet 71.

As a result, the game balls that enter the first winning hole 64 during the execution of the jackpot game can be added to the number of game balls that appear to be flowing down toward the specific winning hole 65a. Regardless of the number of game balls entering the opening 64, it is possible to create an illusion that most of the fired game balls are entering the specific winning opening 65a.

Furthermore, the game balls flowing down through the inclined surface portion 318 and the game balls actually flowing down towards the specific winning opening 65a are separated in front and back by the thin plate member 380, so that they do not collide with each other. None. Thereby, the above-mentioned illusion can be created without obstructing the flow of the game balls flowing down toward the specific winning hole 65a.

In this embodiment, a case has been described in which the non-winning flow path FL32 is formed as a flow path flowing in the left-right direction, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an opening is formed in the main body plate part 411 and the thin plate member 380 in the front-rear direction in the path through which the ball flows down the inclined surface part 318 toward the detection device SE3, and by passing through this opening, The winning flow downward path FL32 may be formed as a flow path through which the ball flows toward the front side.

That is, the ball flowing down the flow path FL32 during non-winning time may return to the front side of the main body plate portion 411 and flow down toward the out port 71. In this case, if the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state, the ball that has flown down the non-winning flow path FL32 can be picked up by the opening/closing plate 65b and enter the specific winning hole 65a.

That is, after the ball that entered the first winning hole 64 returns to the front side of the main body plate part 411, it is possible to create a game in which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a. 64 (particularly during a jackpot game in which the opening/closing plate 65b opens and closes), it is possible to improve the attention to the ball that entered the ball.

Next, the structure of the operating unit 500 (see FIG. 17) that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the game board 13 will be explained. The operation unit 500 is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 from the back side.

36, 37, 38, and 39 are front views of the operating unit 500. 36 shows a retracted state of the internal operating unit 600 of the operating unit 500, FIG. 37 shows an intermediate state of the internal operating unit 600, and FIG. 38 shows an extended state of the internal operating unit 600, In FIG. 39, one operation error limit state of the internal operation unit 600 is illustrated.

In this embodiment, the retracted state is a state in which the light emitting action production unit 700 of the internal operation unit 600 is placed at the upper end position of the vertical movement range, and the intermediate state is a state in which the light emitting action production unit 700 is tilted back and forth from the retracted state. In the extended state, the light-emitting action production unit 700 is placed at the lower end position of the vertical movement range and rotates. The rotation axis RJ1 of the device 800 is oriented in the front-rear direction.

In the state change from the intermediate state to the extended state, a posture change (tilting motion) of the light emitting action production unit 700 in the front and rear direction occurs. This posture change is executed as a rotational movement around a predetermined rotational axis (center axis J1 to be described later).

In the present embodiment, one operation error limit state is one of the states in which the horizontal tilt allowed by the design of the light emitting operation unit 700 has reached its limit. In FIG. 39, for convenience, the right side of the light emitting operation unit 700 is shown in the same position as in the retracted state, and the left side is shown shifted downward. In this embodiment, the operation unit 500 is configured so that the light emitting operation unit 700 can be operated in the vertical direction while maintaining the tilt angle of one operation error limit state, but the details will be described later. do.

As shown in FIG. 36, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, the rotating member 810 of the rotating performance device 800 is in a posture with the decorative plate 811 on which decorative figures and patterns are formed facing the front side.

The figures and patterns formed on the decorative plate 811 are formed in a manner related to the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, as shown in FIG. They are visually recognized integrally (among the radially extending linear shapes and the wave patterns formed on the left and right outer sides, the linear shapes are also visually recognized as being formed on the rotating member 810).

That is, since the figure or pattern formed on the decorative plate 811 can be designed as a part of the figure that is visible integrally with the bottom wall portion 511, the size of the rotating member 810 can be adjusted depending on the size of the rotating member 810. It is possible to avoid limiting the shapes and patterns that can be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the extended state, the light emitting action producing unit 700 is tilted in the forward rotation direction, and the figures and patterns formed on the main body member 710 of the light emitting action producing unit 700 are Visible from the front.

These figures and patterns are also formed in a manner related to the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510, and are integrally recognized when the internal operation unit 600 is extended (radially extending straight lines). Among the shapes and wave patterns formed on the left and right outer sides, the linear shape is formed only on the bottom wall portion 511, and the wave pattern is visually recognized on the main body member 710).

That is, since the figure or pattern formed on the main body member 710 can be designed as a part of the figure that is visible integrally with the bottom wall portion 511, the size of the main body member 710 can be It is possible to avoid limiting the shapes and patterns that can be displayed.

Since the light emitting operation production unit 700 is vertically displaced from the retracted state to the extended state, in relation to the fixed bottom wall portion 511, the figure or pattern changes from the state in which the figure or pattern is seen integrally in the retracted state to the bottom The figures and patterns formed on the wall portion 511 and the figures and patterns formed on the rotating member 810 begin to deviate from each other.

This shift becomes more noticeable as the amount of displacement in the vertical direction increases. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the light emitting action production unit 700 is tilted and displaced in the extended state to switch the surface visible to the player, and new figures and patterns that are visible integrally with the bottom wall portion 511 are created. It can be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall part 511 and the figures and patterns formed on the light emitting operation production unit 700 (main body member 710, rotating member 810) that is displaced in the vertical direction can be changed to the retracted state and the extended state. It can be configured so that it can be visually recognized in an integrated manner.

During the vertical displacement of the light emitting action producing unit 700 described here, the outer shape of the light emitting action producing unit 700 when viewed from the front changes. Thereby, a single performance unit can be made to appear as if it were a plurality of different performance units, and the degree of freedom in designing motion performance can be improved.

40 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 500, and FIG. 41 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating unit 500. Note that in FIGS. 40 and 41, illustration of the liquid crystal display device (third symbol display device 81) disposed in the opening 511a of the back case 510 is omitted, and the rear side is shown visible through the opening 511a.

The operation unit 500 includes a back case 510 formed in a box shape with an open front side from a bottom wall portion 511 and an outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511 . The back case 510 is formed into a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 511a in the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, capable of dividing the display region of the third symbol display device 81 in a front view).

The back case 510 extends as a flat plate along the back side of the game board 13 (for example, arranged parallel to it) at the front end of the outer wall part 512, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 2), the back case 510 extends from the front end of the outer wall part 512 as a flat plate. A support plate portion 513 for support is provided.

The support plate portion 513 has a plurality of positioning convex portions 513a that protrude in an annular shape toward the front side and have a shape that can be fitted into a fitting recess (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13. and a plurality of insertion holes 513b formed in the center of the positioning convex portion 513a through which a fastening screw fastened to the base plate 60 can be inserted.

The rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning convex part 513a into the fitting part 60c (see FIG. 21) of the base plate 60, and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 513b, and the fitting part By screwing into the female screw 60c, the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 can be integrally fixed, so that the overall rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 can be improved.

Note that the shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, it may be an annular convex portion with a slightly smaller outer shape than the outer shape (circular in this embodiment) of the fitting portion 60c of the base plate 60, or the fitting gap may be increased in consideration of workability during assembly. The protrusion may have a shape like this (large diameter ring shape). Moreover, when the outer shape of the fitting part 60c is formed into a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex part 513a is also made into a rectangular shape correspondingly.

The operation unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and a light emitting means and an operation unit are arranged inside. That is, the operation unit 500 includes a rear case 510, a decorative fixing member 520 that is inserted into the rear case 510 from the front side and fastened and fixed, and an internal operation unit 600 disposed on the inside upper part of the rear case 510. A light emitting production unit 518 disposed at the inner lower part of the back case 510 is provided.

The light emitting production unit 518 is a unit that irradiates light from behind to the front of the distribution unit 300 and the winning hole component 400 (see FIG. 29), and is formed by the distribution unit 300 and the winning hole component 400. It functions to brightly illuminate the path of the ball.

The decorative fixing member 520 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is composed of a plurality of thin plate-like members that are arranged symmetrically on both the left and right positions and can be divided into vertical parts, and is arranged on the upper left side. a first fixing member 530 disposed on the lower left side, a third fixing member 550 disposed on the upper right side, a fourth fixing member 560 disposed on the lower right side, and a second fixing member 540 disposed on the lower left side; A left illumination board 570 disposed on the back side of the fixing member 530 and the second fixing member 540, a right illumination board 580 disposed on the back side of the third fixing member 550 and the fourth fixing member 560, Equipped with. The configuration and role of each part will be explained with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43.

42 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 500, and FIG. 43 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating unit 500. 42 and 43, the decorative fixing member 520 is disassembled from the back case 510 and placed at the front, and the internal operation unit 600 is disassembled from the back case 510 and placed between the back case 510 and the decorative fixing member 520. The state shown in FIG.

The first fixing member 530 includes a thin plate-shaped insertion plate portion 531 extending in the front-rear direction, a front plate portion 534 extending rightward from the front side of the insertion plate portion 531, and a front plate portion 534 extending from the front side of the insertion plate portion 531. An outer plate portion 537 extending to the left.

The insertion plate portion 531 includes a plurality of insertion protrusions 532 that protrude from the extending tip toward the back side and have a shape and arrangement that allow insertion into the receiving hole 623 of the internal operation unit 600. It has the role of preventing outward tilting displacement of 610. The relative functions of the insertion plate portion 531 and the outer member 610 will be described later.

The front plate part 534 is a plate-shaped part arranged in front of the left side illumination board 570 and formed from a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the left side illumination board 570 (formed to cover the left side illumination board 570). A light diffusion process is formed on the back side of the left illumination board 570 in order to diffuse light from a light emitting means such as an LED disposed on the front side. Additionally, an insertion hole 535 is provided through which a fastening screw fastened and fixed to the outer member 610 of the internal operation unit 600 can be inserted.

The outer plate part 537 is a part that can come into contact with the front part of the outer wall part 512 of the rear case 510, and is bored through so that a fastening screw screwed into the fastening part 512a formed on the outer wall part 512 can be inserted therein. An insertion hole 538 is provided.

That is, the first fixing member 530 connects and fixes the outer wall portion 512 of the rear case 510 and the outer member 610 of the internal operating unit 600 when the operating unit 500 is assembled (see FIG. 36).

The second fixing member 540 is a plate-shaped part disposed at the same front-back position as the front plate part 534 of the first fixing member 530, and is a front plate part disposed at a slight distance from the lower end of the front plate part 534. 541, a fastening extension part 544 extending rightward from the lower right side part of the front plate part 541, and an outer plate part 547 extending leftward from the left end part of the front plate part 541. Be prepared.

The front plate part 541 is a plate-shaped part arranged in front of the left side illumination board 570 and formed from a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the left side illumination board 570 (formed to cover the left side illumination board 570). A light diffusion process is formed on the back side of the left illumination board 570 in order to diffuse light from a light emitting means such as an LED disposed on the front side.

Furthermore, the insertion hole 542 is formed so that a fastening screw fastened and fixed to the outer member 610 of the internal operation unit 600 can be inserted therethrough, and the fastening screw fastened and fixed to the inner member 670 of the internal movement unit 600 can be inserted therethrough. An insertion hole 543 is provided. That is, by fastening and fixing via the front plate part 541, the outer member 610 and the inner member 670 of the internal operation unit 600 can be coupled and fixed.

The connecting extension part 544 includes an insertion hole 545 through which a fastening screw screwed into the fastening part 518a of the light emitting production unit 518 can be inserted. The outer plate part 547 is a part that can come into contact with the front part of the outer wall part 512 of the rear case 510, and is bored through so that a fastening screw screwed into the fastening part 512b formed on the outer wall part 512 can be inserted therein. An insertion hole 548 is provided.

That is, when the operating unit 500 is assembled (see FIG. 36), the second fixing member 540 connects the outer wall 512 of the back case 510, the outer member 610 and inner member 670 of the internal operating unit 600, and the light emitting unit 518. , are connected and fixed.

The third fixing member 550, the fourth fixing member 560, and the right side illumination board 580 are arranged on the back side and are covered by the inner member 670 of the internal operation unit 600. 530, the shape is slightly different from the second fixing member 540 and the left side illumination board 570, but basically they are formed laterally symmetrically with the first fixing member 530 and the second fixing member 540. are the same, so the description of the overlapping parts will be omitted, and the reference numerals mentioned above in the description of the first fixing member 530 and the second fixing member 540 will be illustrated for convenience.

The order of assembling the internal operation unit 600 and the decorative fixing member 520 to the back case 510 will be explained. When assembling to the rear case 510, the internal operation unit 600 is first assembled to the rear case 510 (see FIG. 40), and then the decorative fixing member 520 is assembled to the rear case 510.

As an overview, the process of assembling the internal operation unit 600 to the rear case 510 is to first fasten and fix the left and right outer members 610 and inner members 670 to the rear case 510, and then to perform a light emitting operation inside the rear case 510 from the front side. Insert the unit 700 and place it between the left and right outer members 610 and the inner member 670, place the light emitting action production unit 700 at the assembly position with the displacement member 680, and install members (screws, collars, etc.) to prevent it from falling off. Work is performed in the order of assembling to the fastening portion 682 from the front side.

In the present embodiment, it is not necessary to assemble the decorative fixing member 520 to the back case 510 when assembling the light emitting operation production unit 700, so the front side of the back case 510 can be left wide open, and the decorative fixing member 520 can be left open. It is possible to avoid obstructing the flow line of the worker's hands. Thereby, work efficiency can be improved.

Furthermore, since the work of inserting the fastening screws into the insertion holes 535, 538, 542, 543, 545, and 548 of the decorative fixing member 520 and fastening and fixing them can be performed from the front side of the back case 510, the light emitting operation can be produced. After completing the work of assembling the unit 700 to the displacement member 680, the work of fastening and fixing the decorative fixing member 520 can be continued without changing the posture of the back case 510. Thereby, work efficiency can be further improved. Next, details of the assembly work will be explained.

44 is a sectional view of the operating unit 500 taken along the line XLIV-XLIV in FIG. 36, FIG. 45 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the operating unit 500 in the range XLV in FIG. - XLIV is a cross-sectional view of the operating unit 500.

In FIGS. 44 and 45, the light emitting action production unit 700 is disassembled from the back case 510, and illustration of the decoration fixing member 520 is omitted because it shows a state before the decoration fixing member 520 is assembled. On the other hand, FIG. 46 shows a state in which the light emitting action producing unit 700 and the decorative fixing member 520 are assembled to the back case 510 (see FIG. 36).

In this embodiment, the fastening positions are designed so that sufficient rigidity cannot be achieved only by fixing the internal operation unit 600 and the back case 510 (for example, the fastening positions are arranged only at one of the upper and lower ends). (see the imaginary line in FIG. 45), the internal operation unit 600 is configured to be flexibly deformable (changeable in posture) to the left and right outward with respect to the back case 510.

Utilizing this bending deformation, it is possible to quickly assemble the light emitting action producing unit 700. That is, the assembly of the light emitting action producing unit 700 is performed by inserting the fastening part 682 into the connected hole 764 of the light emitting action producing unit 700 and then screwing a fastening screw into the fastening part 682. By bending and deforming the light-emitting motion production unit 700 to the left and right outward, the dimensions of the path through which the light-emitting action production unit 700 enters toward the fastening portion 682 can be expanded from the fixed width W1 to the deflected width W2, making it easier to assemble. Work efficiency can be improved.

At this time, as the internal operation unit 600 is deflected and deformed to the left and right sides, the direction of entry of the fastening screws into the fastening part 682 is in an inclined direction (the front side spreads outward to the left and right) as it goes toward the back side. direction).

In this case, compared to the case where the fastening screw is inserted in the front-back direction, the driver for screwing in the fastening screw is separated (avoided) from the decorative member 750 of the light-emitting operation production unit 700 (with respect to the front-back direction). The fastening screw can be inserted into the rear case 510 in an inclined direction).

Therefore, the fastening work can be facilitated, and the degree of freedom in designing the decorative member 750 of the light-emitting operation production unit 700, whose shape is designed with one purpose of avoiding contact with the driver, can be improved. . That is, it is possible to improve the working efficiency of the work of assembling the light emitting action production unit 700, and to improve the degree of freedom in designing the decorative member 750.

In order to achieve this effect, in the present embodiment, the horizontal dimension of the elongated hole 764a of the connected hole 764 through which the fastening screw is inserted is adjusted to accommodate the displacement of the fastening portion 682 due to the bending deformation of the internal operation unit 600. Designed with compatible dimensions (sufficient left and right length).

Note that the bending deformation of the internal operation unit 600 inward to the left and right is less likely to occur compared to the bending deformation to the left and right, since the cylindrical member 695 comes into contact with the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510 and resistance is generated. It is composed of

In this embodiment, by assembling the decorative fixing member 520, the internal operation unit 600 is configured to be restrained from being deflected outwardly to the left and right. This is because the internal operation unit 600 and the decorative There are more fastening positions between the fixing member 520 and the back case 510 (fastening positions arranged on the outer wall 512 of the back case 510 or the front side of the internal operation unit 600, fastening positions arranged closer to the front side); The effect can be achieved by devising the shape of the decorative fixing member 520.

First, the decorative fixing member 520 includes an outer plate portion 547 that is fastened and fixed to the outer wall portion 512 or the support plate portion 513, and the support plate portion 513, which is integrally configured with the outer wall portion 512, is attached to the base plate 60. It is fastened and fixed (see Figure 42). That is, the decorative fixing member 520 is restricted from being displaced by the base plate 60 via the support plate portion 513. Thereby, the rigidity of the decorative fixing member 520 and the internal operation unit 600 can be improved by using the rigidity of the base plate 60, so that the deflection deformation of the internal operation unit 600 to the left and right sides can be suppressed.

Second, the insertion plate portions 531 of the decorative fixing member 520 are placed in contact with the left and right outer sides of the internal operation unit 600 . That is, the insertion plate portion 531 can suppress the deflection deformation of the internal operation unit 600 to the left and right sides.

These first and second configurations can prevent the internal operation unit 600 from being bent and deformed to the left and right in a state where the decorative fixing member 520 is assembled.

In addition, the decoration fixing member 520 is configured to be assembled to the rear case 510 from the front side, and the light emitting operation production unit 700 is configured to be assembled to the rear case 510 from the front side, so that the posture of the rear case 510 is fixed. The assembly work can be performed in a series of steps, such as assembling the light emitting action producing unit 700 and then assembling the decorative fixing member 520, without changing the process. Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the assembly work.

On the other hand, if the work of removing the light emitting operation producing unit 700 from the fastening part 682 for maintenance or the like can be performed without removing the decorative fixing member 520, the number of maintenance work can be reduced and efficiency is improved.

Here, the illumination boards 570 and 580 are disposed on the back side of the decorative fixing member 520 (see FIG. 42), and it is better to configure the illumination boards 570 and 580 to protrude inward from the left and right for better light emission. The range of performance can be expanded and the performance effect can be improved.

On the other hand, if the illumination boards 570 and 580 are arranged so as to protrude to the left and right inside as in this embodiment, when the maintenance worker moves the light emitting action producing unit 700 to the front side, the light emitting action producing unit 700 There is a possibility that the connecting plate portions 765 formed at the left and right end portions of 700 collide with the illumination substrates 570, 580, and the illumination substrates 570, 580 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the extension wall 677 of the inner member 670 (to be described later) has a shape that extends from the front side edge toward the left and right inward with a shape sufficient to cover the back surfaces of the illumination boards 570 and 580. The installation portion 677b is extended (see FIG. 42).

The left and right inner ends of the protective extension portion 677b are formed in the same shape as the shape line S51 (see FIG. 42) corresponding to the shape of the left and right inner edges of the upper side parts of the illumination boards 570 and 580, and the shape line It is extended to the position corresponding to S51.

As a result, the area for supporting the illumination boards 570, 580 from the back side can be increased, and the back surfaces of the upper parts of the illumination boards 570, 580 can be protected by the protective extension part 677b, so maintenance work can be carried out. It is possible to avoid contact between the illumination boards 570, 580 and the light emitting operation producing unit 700 at times.

On the other hand, below the lower end of the shape line S51, regardless of the shape of the illumination boards 570, 580, the formation of the extending portions inward to the left and right is omitted. Therefore, when removing the light emitting action production unit 700 at this position, there remains a possibility that the light emitting action production unit 700 and the illumination boards 570, 580 will come into contact with each other.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the light emitting action production unit 700 is configured to change its posture as it moves downward (see FIGS. 37 and 38), and the direction of the fastening portion 682 changes from the front-back direction to the vertical direction due to the change in posture. , and it becomes impossible to insert a screwdriver into the fastening screw. Therefore, the work for removing the light emitting action producing unit 700 is configured to be executed before the attitude of the light emitting action producing unit 700 changes. Therefore, it is sufficient to form the protective extension portion 677b at a position before the attitude of the light emitting action production unit 700 changes, and this embodiment is designed in this way (see FIG. 37). .

In this way, the protective extension portion 677b is not formed over the entire upper and lower range, but is formed within the minimum necessary range to avoid contact between the light emitting operation production unit 700 and the illumination boards 570 and 580. Accordingly, the formation range of the protective extension portion 677b can be narrowed.

In other words, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the light emitting action producing unit 700 from which the work of removing the light emitting action producing unit 700 can be performed is limited to the arrangement between the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 and the intermediate state. By configuring this, the formation range of the protective extension portion 677b is reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is of course possible to remove the light emitting operation production unit 700 after removing the decoration fixing member 520 from the back case 510. In this case, as in the assembly work, by bending and deforming the internal operation unit 600 to the left and right outward, it is possible to widen the horizontal width of the path for taking out the light emitting action producing unit 700. can be prevented from coming into contact with the protective extension portion 677b.

47 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 500, and FIG. 48 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating unit 500. 47 and 48 mainly show the internal operation unit 600 in an exploded state, and illustration of the decorative fixing member 520 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the internal operation unit 600 includes an outer member 610 that is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate portion 511 of the back case 510, and is supported by the outer member 610 so as to be movable in the vertical direction and in the left and right directions. An elevating plate member 630 disposed inside, a drive motor 648 that is a device that generates a driving force for elevating and lowering the elevating plate member 630 and is fastened and fixed to the outer member 610, and a drive shaft of the drive motor 648. A transmission gear 649 that is fixed to and transmits a driving force to the elevating plate member 630, and a coil spring SP1 that applies an upward biasing force (load in a tensile direction) to the elevating plate member 630 are provided.

Further, the internal operation unit 600 is arranged inside in the left-right direction so that the elevating plate member 630 is disposed between the outer member 610 and a resistance generating device 650 that is configured to be able to generate a resistance force for the movement of the elevating plate member 630. an inner member 670 that is fastened and fixed to the outer member 610 by a fastening screw that is inserted through the outer member 610 in the left-right direction; and a displacement member 680 that is movably supported by the inner member 670 and disposed inside the left-right direction. , a rotational posture assisting member 690 that is fastened and fixed from the left and right sides on the rear side of the upper end of the inner member 670, and a light emitting operation production unit 700 that is connected at both ends to the displacement member 680.

The internal operation unit 600 is a unit that is configured approximately laterally symmetrically, and the light emitting action producing unit 700 is arranged at the center of the left and right sides, and is fixedly arranged on the rear case 510 side on both left and right sides of the light emitting action producing unit 700. With this configuration, the light emitting action production unit 700 is operably supported.

Details of each configuration of the internal operation unit 600 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50, which are enlarged views of each range of FIG. 47. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 49 and 50, FIGS. 47 and 48 will be referred to as appropriate.

49(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the outer member 610, the elevating plate member 630, and the resistance generator 650 in the range XLIXa of FIG. 47, and FIG. 49(b) is an exploded front perspective view of the outer member 610 in the range XLIXb of FIG. 47. 50(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating plate member 630, the inner member 670, the displacement member 680, and the rotational posture auxiliary member 690 in the range La of FIG. 47, and FIG. 50(b) ) is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement member 680 and the rotational posture auxiliary member 690 in the range Lb of FIG. 47.

As shown in FIGS. 49(a) and 49(b), the outer member 610 includes a plate-shaped portion 611 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and the left and right outer sides of the plate-shaped portion 611 (back case 510, which is adjacent to the outer wall portion 512 in the assembled state), and an extended wall portion 621 that extends in a wall shape and is formed so as to partition the left and right outer regions of the plate portion 611. , is provided.

The plate-shaped portion 611 has a pair of upper and lower elongated holes 612 that are elongated in the vertical direction and is elongated and wide (wider than the elongated hole 612) at the rear of the upper elongated hole 612. It includes a wiring through hole 613 formed in an oval shape, and a pair of upper and lower guide protrusions 614 that protrude outward from the left and right in a cylindrical shape at the rear of the lower elongated hole 612.

The elongated holes 612 are elongated holes for restricting the displacement direction of the elevating plate member 630, and a pair of elongated holes 612 are arranged on the upper side and the lower side. The longitudinal width of the elongated hole 612 is formed to be slightly wider than the diameters of the upper fastening part 632 and the lower fastening part 633 of the elevating plate member 630 to be inserted, so that the displacement of the elevating plate member 630 in the longitudinal direction is small. . These pair of elongated holes 612 are intentionally formed with the front and back arrangement shifted. In other words, the lower elongated hole 612 is located closer to the front than the upper elongated hole 612.

As a result, the support position of the upper side of the elevating plate member 630 is on the rear side compared to the supporting position of the lower side of the elevating plate member 630, so that the elevating plate is suspended from the upper side of the elevating plate member 630. The lower portion of member 630 is biased rearward by gravity.

As a result, the rack gear portion 634 of the elevating plate member 630 can be brought closer to the transmission gear 649 side, so that it is possible to avoid the rack gear portion 634 from falling off from the transmission gear 649, and to optimize the meshing relationship. Can be done.

The wiring through hole 613 is an electrical wiring that is connected inside the light emitting operation production unit 700, and is passed through the irregularly shaped opening 685a of the fall prevention collar member 685 and located on the left and right outer sides of the inner member 670, and is connected to the outside. This is an opening for discharging the member 610 to the left and right outside.

The guide protrusion 614 functions as a portion that guides the displacement of the longitudinal displacement member 653 of the resistance generating device 650. That is, it functions to guide the longitudinally displacing member 653 so that it can be displaced in the longitudinal direction and to prevent the longitudinally displacing member 653 from tilting back and forth and changing its posture, but the details will be described later.

The extension wall portion 621 has a plurality of fastening portions 622 arranged at the front end and configured to be able to receive fastening screws inserted into the decorative fixing member 520, and a plurality of fastening portions 622 arranged at the back end into which the decorative fixing member 520 can be inserted. A pair of upper and lower receiving holes 623 are provided into which the insertion protrusion 532 (see FIG. 43) of the plate portion 531 can be inserted. Note that the fastening parts other than the fastening part 622 arranged at the front end are mainly fastening parts for fastening and fixing the illumination boards 570 and 580 (see FIG. 40).

The elevating plate member 630 includes an elongated main body portion 631 whose elongated direction is oriented in the up-down direction, and is formed to protrude from the elongated main body portion 631 to the left and right outside, and is inserted into and fastened to the elongated hole 612 on the upper side of the outer member 610. A pair of upper fastening parts 632 are formed into which a screw can be screwed, and a pair of upper fastening parts 632 are formed to protrude left and right outward from the elongated main body part 631 and are inserted into the elongated hole 612 on the lower side of the outer member 610 and into which a fastening screw can be screwed. A rack gear portion 634 is provided on the rear side of the elongated main body portion 631 and is formed in a gear tooth shape and meshed with a transmission gear 649.

Further, the elevating plate member 630 is configured to be able to detect the position of the elongated main body 631 by extending from the lower end of the elongated main body 631 to the back side and disposed in a detection groove of a position detection device (not shown). a detected portion 635 that is located between the pair of upper fastening portions 632; A drop-off prevention plate 637 is fastened and fixed to the upper fastening part 632 by fastening screws arranged and inserted therein, and a fall prevention plate 637 is fastened and fixed to the lower fastening part 633 by fastening screws arranged on the left and right outer sides of the plate-like part 611 and passed through. The ring member C1 is assembled to the upper fastening part 632 and the lower fastening part 633 in order to reduce frictional resistance during operation.

The upper fastening portion 632 and the lower fastening portion 633 are arranged corresponding to the front-back arrangement of the elongated hole 612 of the outer member 610. Therefore, the lower fastening section 633 is arranged on the front side of the upper fastening section 632.

The longitudinal elongated hole 636 is a elongated hole that guides the longitudinal movement of the metal rod-shaped member 686 inserted through the second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674 of the inner member 670. It is formed with a front-to-back length that is greater than the front-to-back width of the area to be formed.

The fall prevention plate 637 is fastened and fixed to the tip side of the upper fastening part 632 with the upper fastening part 632 of the elevating plate member 630 inserted into the upper long hole 612, and the lower fastening part 633 is inserted into the lower long hole 612. 612 and the abutted plate 638 is fastened and fixed to the distal end side of the lower fastening part 633, so that the elevating plate member 630, which is supported by the outer member 610 so as to be movable up and down, can fall off from the outer member 610. can be easily prevented.

The abutted plate 638 includes locking portions on the left and right outer sides for locking the lower end portion of the coil spring SP1. The upper end portion of the coil spring SP1 is locked to locking portions 638a formed on the left and right outer sides of the plate-like portion 611 of the outer member 610. That is, the coil spring SP1 generates a biasing force (pulling force) that biases the abutted plate 638 upward.

While the drop-off prevention plate 637 is formed in an oval shape, the abutted plate 638 is formed in a rectangular shape. As a result, the area of contact with the resistance generating device 650 can be increased, and the magnitude of the load per unit area that occurs during a collision can be reduced, but details will be described later.

The resistance generating device 650 includes a solenoid 651 whose plunger extends and retracts in the front-rear direction, a fixed cover 652 for accommodating the solenoid 651 and fixing it to the left and right outer sides of the outer member 610, and a plunger of the solenoid 651 that is engaged with the solenoid 651. and a longitudinally displacing member 653 configured to be movable in the longitudinal direction by being guided by the guide protrusion 614 of the outer member 610.

The fixed cover 652 has a plurality of insertion holes 652a formed at both upper and lower positions of the solenoid 651 as insertion holes through which fastening screws screwed into the outer member 610 can be inserted, and a plurality of insertion holes 652a formed at both upper and lower positions of the solenoid 651, and a guide protrusion 614 of the outer member 610. It is provided with a pair of upper and lower fitting portions 652b that are recessed with dimensions that allow the tip portions to fit.

The longitudinally displacing member 653 includes a pair of guided elongated holes 653a, which are elongated in the front and back, and are formed on both upper and lower sides as elongated holes through which the guide projections 614 are inserted. With the guided elongated hole 653a inserted into the guide protrusion 614, the fitting part 652b of the fixed cover 652 is fitted to the tip of the guide protrusion 614, so that the guide protrusion of the longitudinal displacement member 653 is fitted. Falling off from the installation portion 614 can be prevented.

As shown in FIGS. 50(a) and 50(b), the inner member 670 includes a plate-shaped portion 671 arranged to face the plate-shaped portion 611 of the outer member 610 in the left-right direction, and It includes an extending wall portion 677 that extends outward in the form of a wall, and a rectangular projecting portion 678 that projects rectangularly inward from the left and right at the rear portion of the upper end of the plate portion 671 .

The plate-like portion 671 has a first elongated hole 672 formed as a long elongated hole in the vertical direction on the back side of the elevating plate member 630 than the front-back position, and a first elongated hole on the front side of the first elongated hole 672. A second elongated hole 673 is bored as an elongated hole that extends parallel to the first elongated hole 672 from an upper end that is shifted above the upper end of the first elongated hole 672; A curved long hole 674 bored as a connected curved long hole is provided.

In FIG. 48, a fastening part is shown only on the back side of the upper end of the left inner member 670 as a connecting part of the plate-shaped part 671 with the back case 510. There is no. As can be seen from this, the position of the plate portion 671 is not primarily fixed by direct fastening to the back case 510, but by the outer member 610 or the decorative fixing member 520 (see FIG. 40)). In other words, the plate-shaped portion 671 is indirectly fastened and fixed to the back case 510, thereby generating a fixing force to the back case 510.

The plate-like portion 671 includes a plurality of fastening portions 671a into which fastening screws are inserted into the plate-like portion 611 of the outer member 610 in the left-right direction from the left and right outer sides, and the inner member 670 is screwed into the plate-like portion 671 of the outer member 610. It is fastened and fixed to the outer member 610.

The first elongated hole 672 is formed to have a wider width than the second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674. As a result, in this embodiment, the first elongated hole 672 can be used as a through hole for electrical wiring, and the electrical wiring connected to the light emitting operation production unit 700 is exposed to the left and right inner areas of the pair of left and right inner members 670. This can be prevented, but the details will be described later.

The second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674 are formed with the same width. The curved shape of the curved elongated hole 674 is an arc with the center of the cylindrical portion 684 as an axis when the cylindrical portion 684 of the displacement member 680 guided to the first elongated hole 672 is located at the lower end of the first elongated hole 672. formed as a shape.

The extending wall portion 677 includes a partition wall portion 677a formed to surround the first elongated hole 672 from the plate portion 671 to the left and right sides, and a partition wall portion 677a formed to surround the first elongated hole 672 from the plate portion 671 to the left and right sides, and a partition wall portion 677a formed to surround the first elongated hole 672 from the front side edge to the left and right sides of the illumination boards 570, 580. A protective extension part 677b extending in a shape sufficient to cover the back surface is provided.

The displacement member 680 includes a box-shaped main body 681 formed in a substantially rectangular box shape with left and right inner sides open, and a pair of fasteners formed to protrude outward from the lateral side walls of the box-shaped main body 681. part 682, an extension part 683 extending along the left and right outer side surfaces of the box-like main body part 681, and a cylindrical part 684 projecting in a cylindrical shape from the corner of the box-like main body part 681 in the left-right outer direction, A fall prevention collar member 685 is fastened and fixed to the distal end side of the cylindrical portion 684, and a metal rod-shaped member 686 is fitted and fixed to a fitting recess 683a formed as a circular recess at the proximal end side of the extension portion 683. , a plurality of ring members 687 arranged in the gaps between the relatively displaced members and into which the metal rod-shaped members 686 are inserted, a large-diameter ring member 688 into which the cylindrical portion 684 is inserted, and the light-emitting operation production unit 700 in the front and back. The front and rear ring members 689 are inserted into the fastening portion 682 in a sandwiching state (see FIG. 46).

The fastening portion 682 has a female thread into which a fastening screw inserted into the connected hole 764 of the light emitting action production unit 700 is screwed, and the light emitting action production unit 700 is connected to the displacement member 680 by this fastening screw. Concatenated.

The extending portion 683 functions as a portion that protects the light emitting action producing unit 700 from coming into contact with the inner member 670 when the light emitting action producing unit 700 is assembled to the displacement member 680 (the extending portion 683 and the light emitting action producing unit (See FIGS. 45 and 46 for the arrangement relationship of 700).

The cylindrical part 684 has an irregularly shaped opening 684b formed to pass through the box-shaped single part 681 in the left-right direction on the inner circumferential side, and drop-off prevention collars at both positions sandwiching the central axis passing through the irregularly shaped opening 684a. A fastening portion 684a is provided into which a fastening screw inserted into the member 685 can be screwed.

The cylindrical portion 684 is inserted into the first elongated hole 672 of the inner member 670, and a fall prevention collar member 685 is fastened and fixed thereto. An irregularly shaped opening 685a is formed in the center of the fall-off prevention collar member 685 and is approximately the same size as the irregularly shaped opening 684b of the cylindrical portion 684.

That is, in a state where the fall-off prevention collar member 685 is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical portion 684, an opening is formed in the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 684 and the fall-off prevention collar member 685, passing through in the left-right direction. This opening has a function as a through hole for electrical wiring connected to the light emitting operation producing unit 700. This will be explained here.

The other end of the electric wire, one end of which is connected to the light emitting action production unit 700, is brought out through the wiring through hole 762 (see FIG. 48) of the light emitting action production unit 700, and is connected to the cylindrical portion 684 of the displacement member 680. It passes through the irregularly shaped opening 684b and the irregularly shaped opening 685a of the fall prevention collar member 685 to the left and right outer side than the first elongated hole 672 of the inner member 670, and further passes through the wiring through hole 613 of the outer member 610 to the plate-shaped wire. It is brought out to the left and right outside of the portion 611.

The irregularly shaped opening 685a is not a simple circular opening, but has a protruding part (a part through which the fastening screw is inserted) that projects inward from the diameter position of the circular shape, and the irregularly shaped opening 685a is not a simple circular opening. When rotated, the protruding portion catches the electrical wiring, thereby displacing the electrical wiring in the circumferential direction.
Thereby, it is possible to suppress the friction occurring between the irregularly shaped opening 685a and the electrical wiring, and thus it is possible to easily prevent the electrical wiring from breaking.

The other end of the electrical wiring is routed to the back side of the back case 510 from the left and right outside of the plate-shaped portion 611, and is connected to an individual relay board. The regions on the left and right sides of the plate-shaped portion 611 are at least hidden by the decoration fixing member 520 (see FIG. 40).

At one end of the electrical wiring, there is a possibility that the electrical wiring will be exposed at a position between the light emitting action production unit 700 and the displacement member 680, but in this embodiment, the box-shaped main body 681 covers the electrical wiring. The extension plate part 763 of the light emitting operation production unit 700 extends in front of the wiring through hole 762 so as to cover the electrical wiring in a front view (see FIG. 48). ). Thereby, it is possible to easily prevent the electrical wiring from being exposed at a position between the light emitting operation production unit 700 and the displacement member 680.

By passing the electrical wiring in this manner, it is possible to avoid a situation where the electrical wiring is exposed in the left and right inner areas of the pair of left and right inner members 670. Therefore, problems that tend to occur when the electrical wiring is visible to the player include the problem that the electrical wiring is placed in front of the third symbol display device 81 and hides the display, reducing visibility; It is possible to solve the problem that electrical wiring is disposed in a disorganized manner, making it look dirty and reducing the performance effect. That is, the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved and the electrical wiring can be hidden from the player.

At this time, the partition wall 677a can restrict the arrangement of electrical wiring in the gap between the outer member 610 and the inner member 670, so the elevating plate member 630 is disposed on the front side of the partition wall 677a. It is possible to avoid a situation where the electrical wiring and the electrical wiring come into contact with each other.

The metal rod-shaped member 686 has a flanged rod shape by fitting E-rings into the left and right outer ends, thereby preventing the member from falling off from the left and right outer ends. The insertion order of the metal rod member 686 is such that the left and right inner ends are the ring member 687, the front and rear elongated holes 636 of the elevating plate member 630, the ring member 687, and the second elongated hole 673 (curved elongated hole 674) of the inner member 670. , the ring member 687, and the fitting recess 683a of the displacement member 680 in this order, and are fitted and fixed into the fitting recess 683a of the extension portion 683.

In this way, the metal rod-shaped member 686 is a member that is inserted through the elevating plate member 630 and the inner member 670, and the vertical arrangement depends on the change in arrangement due to the elevating and lowering movement of the elevating plate member 630, and the longitudinal arrangement is as follows. It depends on the arrangement of the two long holes 673 and the curved long holes 674. Due to the change in the arrangement of the metal bar-shaped member 686, the arrangement and posture of the displacement member 680 and the light-emitting operation production unit 700 to which the metal rod-shaped member 686 is fitted and fixed are changed. Changes in the arrangement and posture of the production unit 700 will be described later.

The front and rear ring members 689 include a plate-shaped ring member 689a disposed on the box-shaped main body 681 side, and a flange-equipped ring member 689b having a cylindrical end formed with a flange that spreads outward.

The plate-like ring member 689a and the flanged ring member 689b are configured so that the light emitting operation production unit 700 is sandwiched between the respective plate-like parts arranged in front and back, and the cylindrical part 689b1 of the flanged ring member 689b serves as an intermediate connection described later. It is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the connected hole 764 of the member 760.

The rotational posture auxiliary member 690 is arranged on the left and right inner sides of the rectangular projecting portion 678 of the inner member 670, and the fastening screws inserted from the left and right insides are screwed into the fastening portions of the rectangular projecting portion 678, thereby forming a rectangular projecting portion. It is fastened and fixed to the portion 678.

The rotational posture auxiliary member 690 includes a box-shaped main body part 691 that is formed in a box shape with left and right inner sides open and fastened and fixed to the rectangular projecting part 678, and a box-shaped main body that is arranged on the left and right inner sides of the box-shaped main body part 691. A cylindrical member 695 rotatably supported by the portion 691 is provided.

The box-shaped main body part 691 includes an extension part 692 extending downward from the left and right inner ends of the back side, and a cylindrical member 695 is supported by a rotating shaft extending in the left and right direction on the left and right inner sides of the extension part 692. has been done. That is, the cylindrical member 695 is placed at the rear end and lower side of the box-like main body 691, and is placed away from the player, so that the cylindrical member 695 is prevented from being excessively conspicuous. be able to.

The light emitting operation production unit 700 is a unit connected to the fastening portions 682 of the displacement members 680 arranged on both the left and right sides, and its arrangement and attitude change as the arrangement and attitude of the displacement members 680 on both the left and right sides change.

51 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting action producing unit 700, FIG. 52 is an exploded rear perspective view of the light emitting action producing unit 700, and FIG. 53 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting action producing unit 700. . Note that FIG. 53 shows an exploded view of the light emitting action producing unit 700 when viewed in a direction looking up. Further, in FIG. 53, in addition to the light emitting action producing unit 700, a displacement member 680 is shown in a corresponding arrangement.

The light emitting action production unit 700 includes a main body member 710 on which a rotation production device 800 is disposed, a lower plate member 730 arranged below the main body member 710 and fastened to the main body member 710, and a lower plate member 730 that is connected to the main body member 710 and the lower part. An intermediate plate member 740 disposed between the plate member 730 and closing the front side of the space, a plurality of decorative members 750 fixed to the front side of the intermediate plate member 740, and a plurality of decorative members 750 disposed on the left and right sides of the main body member 710, It includes a pair of left and right intermediate connecting members 760 that are fastened and fixed to the main body member 710 by fastening screws inserted from the outside.

The main body member 710 is formed in a box shape with open bottom and front sides, and includes a plurality of fastening portions 711 into which fastening screws inserted into the lower plate member 730 from below can be screwed, and a front side of the top plate. a front edge portion 712 extending downward from the side edge; a plurality of clamping portions 713 disposed opposite to the front edge portion 712 with dimensions that allow the intermediate plate member 740 to be clamped between the front edge portions 712; A pair of left and right fixed plate parts 720 are provided to connect the top plate and the back side wall part on both the left and right sides.

The plate portion 720 to be fixed is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane intersecting the left-right axis so as to be able to support the intermediate connecting member 760 on its surface. It includes a plurality of fastening parts 721 that are formed so that the intermediate member 760 can be inserted and used for fastening and fixing the intermediate member 760, and a recessed part 722 that is recessed in a substantially semicircular shape at the lower end on the back side.

The recessed portion 722 is formed such that the central axis of the semicircular shape is aligned with the central axis of the wiring through hole 762 formed in the intermediate connecting member 760. As a result, the opening formed by the recessed portion 722 and the lower plate member 730 and the wiring through hole 762 can be aligned in a straight line from side to side, making it easier to pass the electrical wiring through the wiring through hole 762. .

The lower plate member 730 has a plurality of insertion holes 731 for inserting fastening screws that are screwed into the fastening portion 711 of the main body member 710, and a plurality of protrusions 732 that are arranged opposite to each other in the front and back near the front edge. and.

The lower plate member 730 has a light diffusion process applied to the left and right outer portions of the lower surface, and is formed so as to reduce visibility when looking at the back side through the member. As a result, even when the light emitting operation production unit 700 is viewed from the lower plate member 730 side when looking upward (see FIG. 53), it is difficult to see the electric wiring, drive device, etc. arranged inside the light emitting operation production unit 700. be able to.

Furthermore, a pattern, figure, etc. may be drawn on the left and right inner sides of the lower surface of the lower plate member 730 (the approximately circular white painted portions in FIG. 53). As a result, even in a situation where the light-emitting operation production unit 700 is placed above the front of the third symbol display device 81 when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state (see FIG. 36), the lower surface is visible to the player. By allowing the player to visually recognize the patterns and figures of the light emitting action production unit 700, the production effect can be maintained.

The protruding portion 732 is formed to have the same function as the front edge portion 712 and the clamping portion 713 of the main body member 710. That is, the intermediate plate members 740 are arranged side by side in a size that allows them to be sandwiched between them.

The intermediate plate member 740 is formed into a thin plate shape whose left and right center portions are curved toward the front side along the shape of the front edge of the lower plate member 730, and a plurality of illumination boards 741 are fastened and fixed to the back side. be done.

The intermediate plate member 740 is held by being sandwiched between the main body member 710 and the lower plate member 730. That is, the upper edge of the intermediate plate member 740 is held between the front edge 712 and the holding part 713 of the main body member 710, and the lower edge of the intermediate plate member 740 is held between the ridges 732 of the lower plate member 730. It is maintained by this. Therefore, compared to the case where the intermediate plate member 740 is fastened and fixed to the main body member 710 or the lower plate member 730, the number of fastening screws for assembly can be reduced.

The illumination board 741 is arranged at the left and right center and on both left and right sides, and is configured to be able to emit light to the front side from a light emitting means such as an LED arranged at the front side. Thereby, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect in which the decorative member 750 emits light.

The light emitting means disposed on the illumination board 741 only emits light toward the front side, and there is no light emitting means disposed downward (on the lower plate member 730 side), but the lower plate member 730, the light emitting action production unit 700 is placed diagonally above and in front of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 36), so that the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81 is directed toward the lower board. The member 730 will be irradiated. That is, since the brightness of the lower plate member 730 can be ensured by the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81, the possibility that the presentation effect of the lower plate member 730 will be reduced can be reduced.

The decorative member 750 is a decorative member disposed at the left-right center position of the intermediate plate member 740, and includes a central decorative member 751 having a three-dimensional shape made of a thin resin material, and a central decorative member 751 disposed on both left and right sides of the central decorative member 751. A pair of left and right fastened members 755 are fastened and fixed to the intermediate plate member 740 by screwing a fastening screw inserted into the intermediate plate member 740 from the back side.

The member to be fastened 755 includes a plurality of fastening parts 756 into which fastening screws are screwed, and the central decorative member 751 has a hole at a position corresponding to the fastening part 756 with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the fastening part 756. A plurality of position holding holes 752 are provided.

The central decorative member 751 is fixed to the intermediate plate member 740 not by a fixing means dedicated to the central decorative member 751, but by inserting a fastening portion 756 for fastening and fixing the fastened member 755 to the intermediate plate member 740. It is being done. Therefore, the number of work steps for assembling the central decorative member 751 to the intermediate plate member 740 can be reduced, and the number of fastening screws can be reduced.

Further, in this embodiment, the plurality of fastening portions 756 are connected by a plate-like portion 757 having a curved cross section. The plate-like portion 757 has a shape corresponding to the proximal contact surface portion 753 that is the edge of the central decorative member 751 and abuts the front surface of the intermediate plate member 740.

As a result, in a state where the fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion 756 and the fastened member 755 is fastened and fixed to the intermediate plate member 740, the proximal contact surface portion 753 is connected to the plate-like portion 757 and the intermediate plate member. Since the center decorative member 751 can be supported by being sandwiched between the central decorative member 740 and the central decorative member 740, the arrangement of the central decorative member 751 can be stabilized.

The intermediate connecting member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54(a) to 54(d). In addition, in the description of FIGS. 54(a) to 54(d), FIGS. 51 to 53 will be referred to as appropriate.

54(a) is a front view of the right intermediate connecting member 760, and FIG. 54(b) is a side view of the intermediate connecting member 760 as viewed in the direction of arrow LIVb in FIG. 54(a). c) is a side view of the intermediate connecting member 760 as viewed in the direction of arrow LIVc in FIG. 54(a), and FIG. 54(d) is a sectional view of the intermediate connecting member 760 taken along the line LIVd-LIVd in FIG. 54(a). It is.

The intermediate connecting member 760 is a portion of the main body member 710 that is disposed opposite to the fixed plate portion 720, and includes a plate-like portion 761 having a plurality of insertion holes 761a through which fastening screws to be screwed into the fastening portion 721 are inserted. , a wiring through hole 762 bored in the left-right direction at the lower part of the back side of the plate-like part 761, an extension plate part 763 extending in the left-right direction from the plate-like part 761 in the form of a flat plate, and the extension plate part 763. A connected hole 764 bored at the outer side in the width direction of the plate portion 763, and a pair of connecting plate portions 765 extended to connect with the plate portion 761 at the center portion in the width direction of the extended plate portion 763. , a shielding extension plate 766 extending from one end in the width direction (end on the lower plate member 730 side) of the extension plate portion 763 toward the front side (on the intermediate plate member 740 side).

The angle between the straight line connecting the two insertion holes 761a arranged in the front and rear in the substantially central part of the intermediate connecting member 760 in the vertical direction and the horizontal straight line HL71 facing horizontally is designed as an inclination angle θ71. Although the angle of the inclination angle θ71 is not limited at all, in this embodiment, the inclination angle θ71 is approximately 5 degrees.

The plane on which the extended plate portion 763 is formed is arranged on the vertical line VL71 (facing in the direction perpendicular to the horizontal line HL71) facing the direction of gravity (the angle is 0). By arranging the extension plate portion 763 on the vertical straight line VL71, it is possible to facilitate the work when assembling the light emitting operation production unit 700 to the displacement member 680 from the front side, as described above.

The inclination angle θ71 of the insertion hole 761a corresponds to the inclination angle of the rotation member 810 of the rotation performance device 800 in a state where the light emitting action production unit 700 is assembled to the displacement member 680. Therefore, it is possible to realize a design (see FIG. 55) in which the initial posture of the rotation production device 800 of the light emitting action production unit 700 is tilted while maintaining the workability of assembling the intermediate connection member 760 to the displacement member 680. .

In this case, even when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state or the intermediate state, the optical axis of the light emitted from the rotating member 810 of the rotating effect device 800 can be directed diagonally forward.
As a result, the light emitted from the rotating member 810 can illuminate the vicinity of the periphery of the game board 13 (for example, a place where the light from the third symbol display device 81 is difficult to reach), so that the entire game board 13 can be illuminated. It can be made brighter and easier to see.

The connected holes 764 are formed in two locations in the extension plate portion 763, and are formed to have different shapes on the left and right sides. That is, in the left intermediate connecting member 760, elongated holes 764a are formed on both sides of the extension plate portion 763 in the width direction. On the other hand, in the right intermediate connecting member 760, an elongated hole 764a is formed on one side in the width direction (upper side in FIG. 36) of the extension plate portion 763, and a substantially circular hole is formed in the opposite side in the width direction (lower side in FIG. 36). A support hole 764b is formed (see FIG. 36).

The connecting plate portion 765 is a portion for reinforcing the plate portion 761 and the extended plate portion 763 so that the angular relationship (positional relationship) can be maintained. In the posture shown in FIG. 53, the width direction of the extended plate part 763 supporting the plate part 761 is along the vertical direction (direction of gravity), so the weight of the light emitting operation production unit 700 causes the extended plate part 763 to move against the plate part 761. The portion 763 is hard to break.

On the other hand, as will be described later, the intermediate connecting member 760 is configured to be able to be tilted, and when it is tilted forward approximately 90 degrees, the width direction of the extension plate portion 763 is in the front-rear direction (direction perpendicular to the direction of gravity). , the extension plate portion 763 is likely to break with respect to the plate portion 761 due to the weight of the light emitting production unit 700.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since reinforcement is provided by the connecting plate portion 765, it is possible to easily prevent the extension plate portion 763 from breaking with respect to the plate portion 761. That is, it is possible to easily avoid problems (occurrence of breakage) caused by a change in the posture of the intermediate connecting member 760.

The shielding extension plate 766 has the function of blocking the view to the connected hole 764 when viewed in the upward direction (see FIG. 53), and has a decorative pattern formed on the outer surface (lower surface of FIG. 53) to reduce the area for decoration. Equipped with the ability to expand.

As shown in FIG. 53, in the same way that a decorative pattern is formed on the lower side of the shielding extension plate 766 of the intermediate connecting member 760, a striped pattern is also formed on the lower side of the box-shaped main body 681 of the displacement member 680. It is formed. Therefore, the lower surface of the shielding extension plate 766 and the lower surface of the box-shaped main body 681 can be easily seen as one unit, so the area where the decorative pattern (decorative pattern, striped pattern) is formed can be easily seen. You can spread it out and make it visible.

Thereby, in the assembled state of the operation unit 500 (see FIG. 36), it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the intermediate connecting member 760 and the displacement member 680 when viewed in the direction looking up at the light emitting operation presentation unit 700.

Therefore, when looking upward, the production effect using the light emitting action production unit 700 can be improved not only when the left and right center portions of the light emitting action production unit 700 are viewed, but also when the left and right ends are visible. Can be done.

The rotation production device 800 includes a rotation member 810, a drive motor 820 that generates a driving force for rotationally displacing the rotation member 810, and an attitude detection means 830 that rotates in synchronization with the rotation member 810 and detects the attitude of the rotation member 810. and.

The rotating member 810 is rotatably supported by the main body member 710 of the light emitting action production unit 700, and a low-friction bearing is used for the support. As a result, even when the rotating member 810 is rotationally driven, the amount of the load accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 810 that is transmitted to the light emitting operation producing unit 700 can be reduced.

The rotating member 810 includes a decorative plate 811 on which a decoration is formed, a heat sink 812 formed with an external shape corresponding to the decorative plate 811 and disposed opposite the decorative plate 811, and a decorative plate 811 and the heat sink 812 fastened and fixed. A rotary base member 813 formed with a circular cross-section and supported by the main body member 710 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction at the center position of the circular cross-section, and a decorative plate 811 and a heat sink 812. an arch-shaped transparent member 814.

The decorative plate 811 and the heat sink 812 are members of similar shapes made of colored (black in this embodiment) resin material, and the decorative plate 811 mainly has decorations such as figures and patterns formed thereon. The heat dissipation plate 812 is provided with air intake openings 812a arranged in a row from the rotating base member 813 side as the rotating base end toward the rotating tip side (the longitudinal end side of the rotating member 810).

The arch-shaped transparent member 814 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material and has an arch shape that follows the curved surfaces of the decorative plate 811 and the heat sink 812. Fixed. Light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on an illumination board (not shown) arranged between the decorative plate 811 and the heat sink 812 passes through the arch-shaped transparent member 814 and illuminates the rotating member 810. Proceeds in a direction parallel to the axis of rotation.

The light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the illumination board are arranged in rows along the curved shape of the rotating member 810 similarly to the intake opening 812a, and the interval between the rows is set narrower than that of the intake opening 812a. Ru. By turning on and off the plurality of LEDs in accordance with the rotation of the rotating member 810 (rotational light emitting effect), it is possible to perform an afterimage display (afterimage display using an afterimage effect) that makes a specific display visible through an afterimage of light. Become.

The light emitted from each LED is configured to travel through each passage that is partitioned into adjacent passages in the rotational radial direction inside the rotating member 810 and extends in a direction parallel to the rotation axis, and does not enter other passages. It is formed so that it is not. As a result, the traveling path of the light emitted from each LED (the diameter of the displacement locus of the LED light in the rotating light emission effect) can be made clear, so that the afterimage display can be visually recognized as a clear display.

A roughening process (diffusion process) is formed on the concave side surface of the arch-shaped transparent member 814. This allows the LED light to be diffusely reflected and diffused, so that glare can be suppressed compared to when the LED light is directly viewed.

The intake opening 812a of the heat sink 812 will be explained. The air intake opening 812a is formed in a tangential direction to the rotational circumferential direction of the rotating member 810, and acts to draw air between the decorative plate 811 and the heat sink plate 812 when the rotating member 810 is rotated.

Among the positions between the decorative plate 811 and the heat sink 812, the opposite side of the arch-shaped transparent member 814 (lower side in FIG. 51) is open, allowing air to be discharged. Further, between the decorative plate 811 and the heat dissipation plate 812, a concave portion that continuously extends along an arch shape extending in the rotational radial direction is formed as an air passage.

That is, when the rotating member 810 rotates, the air taken in from the intake opening 812a flows outward in the rotational radial direction through the concave portion along the arch shape of the arch-shaped transparent member 814, and is discharged to the back side. , the air can be exhausted to the atmosphere. Due to this air flow, the heat inside the rotating member 810 can be dissipated (radiated) to the outside, so that problems caused by the illumination board becoming high temperature can be easily avoided.

The arch shape of the arch-shaped transmission member 814 allows air to be sent smoothly to the back side, and generation of vortices can be avoided. Thereby, air can be smoothly taken in from the back side of the rotating base member 813 side, so that cooling can be performed in the vicinity of the rotating shaft.

In other words, when air is allowed to flow outward in the radial direction, the air pressure on the inner side in the radial direction decreases, so that air can be taken in from the back side, and the air flow can be circulated during rotation. Thereby, the heat dissipation effect can be continuously produced.

The cooling effect due to air flow is not expected only when performing a rotating light emission effect, but various aspects are exemplified. For example, even when the rotating member 810 is oscillated and reciprocated in the retracted state or intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, air circulation through the intake opening 812a occurs, and the illumination board can be cooled. can.

In this embodiment, an intake opening 812a is not formed in the decorative plate 811 in consideration of decorativeness (see FIG. 37). The intake of air through the intake opening 812a acts to take in air in the direction of movement of the intake opening 812a, so if the rotational direction is fixed in one direction, the side that takes in the air is the rotating member. 810 will be biased toward one side in the longitudinal direction, and there is a possibility that the cooling effect of the illumination board will be halved.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the rotation direction of the rotating member 810 is not fixed in one direction, but rotates in one rotation direction in the first presentation mode, and rotates in another rotation direction in a different second presentation mode. controlled to do so. Thereby, it is possible to avoid biasing the side where air is taken in to one side in the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810, and a sufficient cooling effect of the illumination board can be expected.

The attitude detection means 830 includes a detection gear 831 that rotates synchronously with the rotation member 810 by meshing with a gear portion supported by the rotation shaft of the rotation member 810, and a detection gear 831 that rotates synchronously with the rotation member 810, and a detection gear 831 that rotates in the axial direction from the radially outer side of the detection gear 831. A detection groove is disposed at a position where an extending portion extending in parallel can enter, and a detection sensor 832 is capable of detecting the phase of the detection gear 831 by detecting that the extending portion has entered the detection groove. , is provided.

The attitude detection means 830 can be designed to detect which attitude the rotating member 810 is in, but in this embodiment, the rotating member 810 has a decorative plate 811 on the decorative member 750 side. At least detecting that in the arranged state, the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810 is in a posture along the left-right direction, and the decorative plate 811 is placed on the front side (appropriate posture, see FIG. 51). The position at which the extending portion of the detection gear 831 is formed is designed so that the detection gear 831 can be formed at a position where the extension portion of the detection gear 831 is formed.

55 to 57 are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 taken along the line LV-LV in FIG. 36. Although the game board 13 is not shown in FIG. 36, FIGS. 55 to 57 show cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in its assembled state. 55 to 57, the state in which the internal operation unit 600 changes from the retracted state to the extended state is illustrated in chronological order.

That is, in FIG. 55, the internal operating unit 600 is illustrated in the retracted state, in FIG. 56, the internal operating unit 600 is illustrated in the intermediate state, and in FIG. 57, the internal operating unit 600 is illustrated in the extended state.

As shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, the internal operation unit 600 is configured such that the light emitting action production unit 700 and the rotation production device 800 are displaced during the process of changing the state from the retracted state to the extended state. The displacement of the light emitting action production unit 700 and the rotation production device 800 is configured such that the displacement in the vertical direction and the displacement in the forward rotation direction occur in stages, the details of which will be described later.

In the configuration of this embodiment, the arrangement of the rotating effect device 800, which attracts particularly high attention, will be described. Since the light emitting action production unit 700 and the rotation production device 800 change their posture in the forward rotation direction, compared to the front and rear arrangement of the rotation production device 800 in the retracted state and the intermediate state, the rotation production device 800 in the extended state is arranged in the front and rear directions. The directional arrangement is located on the front side.

As a result, in the retracted state, by positioning the rotating effect device 800 on the back side, space can be secured on the front side of the rotating effect device 800, so that the decoration part 247 and the illumination board 251 can be placed closer to the front to create an effect. While the effect can be improved, the position of the rotating effect device 800 can be brought closer to the player when executing the rotating light emitting effect in which the rotating effect device 800 rotates in the extended state, so the rotating light emitting effect can be improved. can increase the power of Therefore, both the performance effect in the retracted state and the performance effect in the extended state can be improved.

In this embodiment, the irradiation direction LD81 of light from the rotation effect device 800 is set to the front side in the extended state. On the other hand, considering that the intermediate state and the retracted state are also used for light production, the light irradiation direction LD81 is set not directly above but diagonally forward. Thereby, it is possible to avoid an extreme decrease in the utility value of the rotating effect device 800 as a light effect means in the intermediate state and the retracted state. The details of the light effects will be described later.

With the light irradiation direction LD81 of the rotation effect device 800 set diagonally forward when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, the posture of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 changes from the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600 to the extended state. The posture change angle in the forward roll direction required for this is smaller than 90 degrees. As a result, the time and space required for changing the posture can be shortened compared to the case where the posture changing angle is 90 degrees.

In the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the light emitting operation production unit 700 supporting the rotation production device 800 is in a posture inclined in the forward rotation direction, so that the longitudinal width increases slightly.
Therefore, normally, the light emitting action producing unit 700 is placed closer to the back side, or the light emitting action producing unit 700 is designed so that its displacement is suppressed inside the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 when viewed from the front. , a collision between the light emitting operation producing unit 700 and the base plate 60 is avoided.

However, when the light emitting action production unit 700 is arranged closer to the back side, the power of the production may be halved because the light emitting action production unit 700 is far from the player. Furthermore, if the displacement of the light emitting action production unit 700 is suppressed inside the central opening 60b, the movement tends to become smaller and the impact of the production may be halved.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the space on the back side is secured by using the central component unit 240 which is thinner than the base plate 60. Furthermore, the arrangement of the illumination board 251 in the front-rear direction for improving the performance effect is kept within the thickness dimension of the base board 60, and furthermore, a concave portion 252a is formed in the board holding plate 252 so that the illumination board 251 is arranged between it and the light emitting operation performance unit 700. The aim is to create a gap. Thereby, the light emitting action producing unit 700 is prevented from colliding with the configuration of the game board 13 while improving the degree of freedom in the posture and arrangement of the light emitting action producing unit 700.

The posture change in the forward rotation direction of the light emitting action production unit 700 and the rotation production device 800 does not start in the retracted state, but descends while maintaining the same posture until the intermediate state, and the posture change starts from the intermediate state. The starting position of this posture change is defined by the shapes of the first elongated hole 672, the second elongated hole 673, and the curved elongated hole 674, as described later, and is determined by the shapes of the first elongated hole 672, the second elongated hole 673, and the curved elongated hole 674, and It is configured not to be changed depending on the control mode.

In the intermediate state, as can be seen from the fact that the rotation effect device 800 is located below the vertical position H1 (see FIG. 56) of the lower edge of the decorative portion 247 in the horizontal center cross section, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 The central opening 60b is located in front of the rotating performance device 800, and the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is not provided, so there is no possibility of collision.

By starting the posture change in the forward rotation direction of the light emitting action production unit 700 from a state where there is no possibility of collision, the possibility that the light emitting action production unit 700 and the rotation production device 800 will collide with the game board 13 is reduced. be able to.

Thereby, the space for arranging the illumination board 251 and the decoration part 247 can be avoided from being limited by overlapping with the displacement trajectory of the forward rotation direction displacement of the light emitting action production unit 700 and the rotation production device 800. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the arrangement positions of the illumination board 251 and the decorative portion 247 can be improved.

Next, a configuration for dividing the displacement mode of the light emitting action production unit 700 and the rotation production device 800 in stages will be described. In this embodiment, the displacement of the light emitting action producing unit 700 is configured to be guided by two elongated holes having different shapes.

58(a) to 58(c) schematically show the first elongated hole 672, the second elongated hole 673, and the curved elongated hole 674. FIG.

58(a) shows the arrangement of the internal operating unit 600 in the retracted state, FIG. 58(b) shows the arrangement of the internal operating unit 600 in the intermediate state, and FIG. 58(c) shows the arrangement of the internal operating unit 600 in the retracted state. , the arrangement of the components in the extended state of the internal working unit 600 is illustrated.

In FIGS. 58(a) to 58(c), for ease of understanding, the external shapes of the front and rear elongated holes 636 of the elevating plate member 630, the box-shaped main body portion 681 of the displacement member 680, and the extending portion 683 are shown as imaginary lines. The outlines of the cylindrical portion 684 of the displacement member 680 and the metal rod member 686 (the outlines of the portions surrounded by the first elongated hole 672, the second elongated hole 673, and the curved elongated hole 674) are shown as solid lines. Illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 58(a) to 58(c), in this embodiment, the first elongated hole 672, the second elongated hole 673, and the curved elongated hole 674 are formed from different shapes, and the light emitting operation is produced. The light emitting production unit 700 is configured to be displaced in stages by changing the way in which the cylindrical portion 684 and the metal bar-shaped member 686 are guided in accordance with the vertical position and posture of the unit 700 depending on the arrangement. The details will be explained below.

The driving force is transmitted to the displacement member 680 holding the light emitting production unit 700 via the elevating plate member 630. That is, in FIGS. 58(a) to 58(c), the front and rear elongated holes 636 are the most upstream side of the transmission path of the driving force generated by the drive motor 648 (see FIG. 47).

That is, as the elevating plate member 630 moves up and down in the vertical direction, the metal rod member 686 disposed inside the front and rear elongated holes 636 is displaced in a permissible direction, and the displacement of the metal rod member 686 causes other parts to move upward and downward. follows and is displaced.

First, the first elongated hole 672 and the second elongated hole 673 are arranged so that their elongated directions match the vertical direction and are parallel to each other. Therefore, while the metal rod member 686 is guided to the second elongated hole 673 and the cylindrical part 684 is guided to the first elongated hole 672 (between the retracted state and the intermediate state), the metal rod member 686 is connected to the displacement member 680. The forward displacement of the light emitting production unit 700 is suppressed, and the light emitting production unit 700 is displaced in parallel in the vertical direction.

Next, the metal rod member 686 is guided to the curved elongated hole 674, which is in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600 (the state in which the cylindrical portion 684 is in contact with the lower end of the first elongated hole 672). It is formed along an arc with the center of the cylindrical portion 684 as the central axis J1, and is connected to the lower end of the second elongated hole 673.

Therefore, while the metal rod member 686 is guided into the curved elongated hole 674 (between the intermediate state and the extended state), the vertical position of the cylindrical portion 684 is maintained, and the metal rod member 686 is centered about the central axis J1. By the rotational displacement, the light emitting production unit 700 is displaced in the forward rotation direction about the central axis J1.

When moving the elevating plate member 630 upward from the state shown in FIG. No direct drive force transmission from 630 occurs.

Therefore, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 684 is maintained in contact with the lower end of the first elongated hole 672 until the internal operation unit 600 reaches the intermediate state (see FIG. 58(b)). When the internal operation unit 600 moves from the intermediate state to the retracted state (see FIG. 58(a)), the cylindrical part 684 is moved through the box-shaped main body part 681 to which the metal rod-shaped member 686 is fixed. The cylindrical portion 684 moves upward while being lifted up by the elevating plate member 630.

That is, the displacement of the displacement member 680 due to the lowering of the elevating plate member 630 is designed as a displacement from the state of FIG. 58(a), through the state of FIG. 58(b), and then to the state of FIG. 58(c). The displacement of the displacement member 680 as the elevating plate member 630 rises is designed as a displacement from the state shown in FIG. 58(c), through the state shown in FIG. 58(b), and then to the state shown in FIG. 58(a). be done.

The driving force for these displacements is transmitted through the longitudinal elongated hole 636, whose direction of displacement is defined as the vertical direction (linear direction), and whose longitudinal length is determined by the length of the metal rod member 686 passing through the curved elongated hole 674. is set to be long enough to allow. That is, since there is no need to switch the displacement direction of the front and rear elongated holes 636 in accordance with changes in the displacement mode of the light emitting production unit 700, the design of the elevating plate member 630 can be simplified.

Note that the light irradiation direction LD81 of the rotational presentation device 800 in the retracted state is set diagonally forward, while the light irradiation direction LD81 of the rotational presentation device 800 in the extended state is set forward, so that the light emitting presentation unit The displacement angle of 700 in the forward rotation direction is designed to be slightly smaller than 90 degrees.

As shown in FIGS. 58(a) to 58(c), the first elongated hole 672 is formed wide at the irregularly shaped opening 684b of the cylindrical portion 684 (see FIG. 50(a)). One purpose is to form a gap large enough to pass the electrical wiring, since it functions as a wiring through-hole for the electrical wiring to pass through.

Moreover, as another purpose, if the shaft supported when the light emitting production unit 700 is displaced in the forward rotation direction has a larger diameter, the support area (area of the circumferential surface) can be increased. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load (frictional force) generated per unit area of the support portion (first elongated hole 672) during displacement accompanied by a change in posture, so local wear can be avoided and the cylinder The durability of the shaped portion 684 and the first elongated hole 672 can be improved. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the material of the member can be improved, and for example, even if the cylindrical portion 684 is formed of a resin material, sufficient durability can be provided.

The second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674 are elongated holes for guiding the displacement of the metal rod-shaped member 686, and are narrower than the first elongated hole 672. The driving force generated by the drive motor 648 is transmitted to the metal rod member 686 via the elevating plate member 630. Although the metal rod-shaped member 686 has a small diameter, it is made of metal, and it is not necessary to run electrical wiring therein, and since the inside is filled, it can exhibit sufficient strength.

By forming the second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674 to have narrow widths, the clearance between them and the metal rod-shaped member 686 can be reduced, so that the displacement of the light emitting operation production unit 700 can be stabilized. can.

Therefore, the displacement of the metal rod-shaped member 686 in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600 (a state in which displacement in the vertical direction and displacement in the forward rotation direction are switched) can be reduced. Thereby, stepwise switching of the displacement of the light emitting operation production unit 700 can be smoothly performed.

The direction in which the weight of the light emitting action production unit 700 acts during the displacement process will be explained. 58(a) to 58(c), the center of gravity position G1 of the light emitting action production unit 700 is illustrated.

Although the vertical displacement of the displacement member 680 is restricted by the elevating plate member 630, the cylindrical portion 684 is not directly supported by the elevating plate member 630. Therefore, the cylindrical part 684 is suspended from the elevating plate member 630 via the box-like main body part 681, the extension part 683, and the metal rod-like member 686, and its displacement is restricted by the first elongated hole 672. Placement is maintained.

Therefore, from the retracted state to the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, the load (metal rod Since a load in the backward rotation direction centering on the member 686 is generated, the cylindrical portion 684 is biased diagonally downward and forward by the weight of the light emitting operation production unit 700.

As a result, the cylindrical portion 684 can be brought into contact with the front side surface of the first elongated hole 672, and the large diameter ring member 688 (see FIG. 50(a)) can be configured to roll in one direction. Wear of the cylindrical portion 684, the large-diameter ring member 688, and the first elongated hole 672 can be suppressed compared to the case where the rotation direction is not determined and they slide.

On the other hand, from the intermediate state to the extended state of the internal operation unit 600, the cylindrical portion 684 is supported by the first elongated hole 672 (downward displacement is restricted). Therefore, due to the weight of the light emitting operation producing unit 700, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 684 is maintained at the lower end of the first elongated hole 672, and the metal rod-shaped member 686 is directed downward along the direction with the cylindrical portion 684 as the rotation axis. Since a load is generated to displace the cylindrical portion 684 (a load in the forward rotation direction centered on the cylindrical portion 684), the metal bar-shaped member 686 is biased in a direction along an arc centered on the central axis J1 due to the weight of the light emitting action production unit 700. be done.

Therefore, when the internal operation unit 600 starts changing its state from the intermediate state to the extended state, the load is generated by its own weight, so that displacement can occur smoothly. In addition, in this embodiment, since the center of gravity position G1 is arranged between the metal bar-shaped member 686 and the cylindrical part 684 in the front-back direction, from the metal bar-shaped member 686 and the cylindrical part 684 serving as the shaft to the center of gravity position G1 It is possible to avoid the distance from becoming excessively long.

Thereby, the load in the rotational direction around the metal rod member 686 and the load in the rotational direction around the cylindrical part 684 can be prevented from being excessive, and can be generated at appropriate magnitudes.

The metal bar-shaped member 686 is configured to overtake the cylindrical portion 684 while the displacement member 680 is displaced in the vertical direction. With this configuration, the cylindrical portion 684 can be stopped and only the metal bar-shaped member 686 can be displaced in the vertical direction.

The driving force required to start the upward displacement of the displacement member 680 is greater than that in the case where the cylindrical part 684 is also upwardly displaced when the metal rod member 686 starts upward displacement from the extended state of the internal operation unit 600. can be reduced. Thereby, the drive motor 648 can be made smaller.

Moreover, by shortening the vertical displacement width of the cylindrical portion 684, the vertical displacement width of the electrical wiring inserted through the cylindrical portion 684 can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the occurrence of disconnection of the electrical wiring.

The appearance of the light emitting action production unit 700 and the rotation production device 800 when viewed from the front will be explained. This embodiment is configured to perform different types of light emitting effects by displacing the light emitting action effect unit 700 in the forward rotation direction.

59 to 61 are front views of the operating unit 500. 59 to 61, for convenience of explanation, the external shapes of the outer rail 62, the decorative part 247 of the central component unit 240, and the illumination board 251 are schematically illustrated, and the inside of the decorative part 247 and the illumination board 251 are shown. Illustrated in white.

In FIGS. 59 to 61, the inside of the decorative portion 247 and the illumination board 251 are painted white to represent that the light transmittance is reduced. In reality, the illumination board 251 is made of an opaque material and blocks the player's view, but the decorative part 247 is made of a light-transparent material, so even though it has low light transparency, it , the player's field of vision passes through (the structure on the back side can be seen through the decoration part 247).

59 shows the retracted state of the internal operating unit 600, FIG. 60 shows the intermediate state of the internal operating unit 600, and FIG. 61 shows the extended state of the internal operating unit 600.

As shown in FIG. 59, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, the rotation effect device 800 is arranged behind the decoration part 247 and the illumination board 251, and most of it is hidden when viewed from the front.
Therefore, the visibility of the rotation performance device 800 itself becomes low. In this state, the detected portion 635 enters the detection groove of the detection device (not shown) and is detected by the detection device, thereby indicating that the elevating plate member 630 is disposed at the upper end of the vertical displacement. This is determined by the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4).

Furthermore, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, the light emitting operation production unit 700 and the rotation production device 800 are visually recognized as being separated by the decorative portion 247. Therefore, the light emitting operation unit 700 executes a front-facing light effect performed by applying light emitted from the illumination board 741 (see FIG. 51) to the decorative member 750, and the rotation effect device 800 When performing an upward light effect in which light is radiated toward the user, each light effect can be viewed separately, so each light effect can be highlighted.

In this embodiment, a surface that is curved in an arched manner as a part that irradiates light from the rotation effect device 800 (a surface that is vertically opposed to the outer rail 62 when viewed from the front) and the outer rail 62 have an upwardly convex surface. Designed with a similar shape as a curved shape.

Therefore, when the rotating effect device 800 is in a posture different from the posture in which the rotating light emitting effect described below is executed, the rotating effect device 800 is visually recognized as if it were a member for illuminating the outer rail 62. be able to. As a result, the utility value of the rotation performance device 800 when the internal operating unit 600 is in the retracted state can be increased, and the appearance of the game board 13 and the operating unit 500 when the internal operating unit 600 is in the retracted state can be improved.

As an effective effect performed by using the light irradiated from the rotation effect device 800 to the outer rail 62, it is assumed that a right-handed hit suggestion effect is created in which the light is visually recognized as if it were moving along the path of a ball.
For example, the order in which light is irradiated from the rotation effect device 800 is set such that the leftmost LED irradiates light onto a range E1 of the outer rail 62 arranged above, and the rightmost LED irradiates light onto a range E2 of the outer rail 62. By changing the ranges E3 and E4 in order, and setting the LED that has been irradiated with light to turn off after a certain period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the irradiation timing. , it is possible to make it appear as if the light is moving to the right along the outer rail 62, thereby informing the player that it is the timing to play right-handed.

In this case, in order to perform a right-handed playing suggestion, the game board 13 (see FIG. 18) may be dotted with illuminated boards, or the third symbol display device 81 may design figures and pictures to display the right-handed playing suggestion. You can save the effort of

Note that the right-handed hitting suggestion effect is not limited to the case where it is executed only by the light emission effect by the rotation effect device 800, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, in addition to the light-emitting effect by the rotating effect device 800, the light-emitting means arranged on the illumination boards scattered on the game board 13 may be made to emit light, or in addition to the light-emitting effect by the rotating effect device 800. , the third symbol display device 81 may display figures or pictures for suggesting right-handed hitting.

Since the arrangement position of the rotation performance device 800 in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 is set on the back side of the upper connecting member 270 made of transparent resin, no nails are arranged in front of the rotation performance device 800. As a result, the light emitted from the rotating performance device 800 can be easily seen by the player since it is not affected by reflection from the nails.

In addition, as will be described later, although the rotating effect device 800 is capable of performing a rotating light emitting effect when the internal operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the rotating effect device 800 is capable of performing a rotational light emitting effect when the internal operating unit 600 is in the extended state. In this state, it is used as a device that can perform a right-handed hitting suggestion effect by shining light on the outer rail 62. That is, the rotation performance device 800 can be used for performances for different purposes.

Note that the light effect executed by the rotation effect device 800 is not limited to the right-handed hitting suggestion effect. For example, as a preview performance in which the central light emitting means 251b of the illumination board 251 as a performance device executes a light emission performance, a light performance such as making an upward arrow visible to the player may be performed.

As shown in FIG. 60, in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, the rotation effect device 800 is arranged below the decoration part 247. As a result, compared to the retracted state, the visibility of the light emitting action production unit 700 and the rotation production device 800 is increased by the amount that is not covered by the decorative portion 247.

Furthermore, compared to the retracted state, it becomes easier to understand that the light emitting action production unit 700 and the rotation production device 800 are integrated, and the vertical distance between the outer rail 62 and the rotation production device 800 becomes wider.

Therefore, the role of the rotating effect device 800 can be easily recognized not as a member for illuminating the outer rail 62, but as a member that performs light effects integrally with the decorative member 750 of the light emitting action effect unit 700.

As a result, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, the center decoration member 751 is a small effect that is barely visible, but in the intermediate state, it becomes a large effect that includes not only the center decoration member 751 but also the rotating effect device 800. It is possible to give the player the illusion that something has changed.

As shown in FIG. 61, the rotation performance device 800 is in a posture in which the light irradiation direction LD81 faces the front side when the internal operation unit 600 is extended. In this state, when irradiating light from the rotation effect device 800 in the above-described first light emission control mode, the light can be visually recognized as moving to the right along the left-right direction. With this method as well, it is possible to make the player understand that it is a right-handed playing suggestion effect.

Note that, unlike the arrangement of the specific winning opening 65a in the gaming area in this embodiment (see FIG. 31), when the specific winning opening 65a is arranged on the lower right side of the gaming area, the longitudinal direction of the rotating performance device 800 The orientation of the rotation effect device 800 may be changed so that the rotation effect device 800 has a tilted orientation downward to the right, and light may be emitted in the above-described first light emission control mode in that orientation. In this case, since the specific winning hole 65a is arranged at the destination of the light movement, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the ball should be fired toward the specific winning hole 65a.

The rotation performance device 800 is arranged so as to be able to perform a rotation operation of one rotation or more when the internal operation unit 600 is extended. There is no particular limitation on the operating speed of the rotation operation, but for example, when rotating at high speed, by finely controlling the blinking of the light irradiated from the rotation production device 800 for each arrangement, figures and patterns can be displayed while rotating. It may be configured so that it can be visually recognized (it may be configured as a so-called versatile writer device).

In FIG. 61, it is detected by the detection device that the elevating plate member 630 is disposed at the lower end of the vertical displacement when the detected portion 635 enters the detection groove of the detection device (not shown), and the rotation is detected by the detection device. The sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the rotation axis RJ1 of the member 810 is oriented in the front-rear direction.

This detection may be used as a flag to control the rotating member 810 so that a rotational light emitting effect can be executed. That is, the detection device that detects the end of movement of the elevating plate member 630 can also be used as a detection device that detects the timing at which the rotational light emission effect of the rotation member 810 can be started.

FIG. 62 is a front view of the operating unit 500. In addition, in FIG. 62, for convenience of explanation, the outer shapes of the outer rail 62, the decorative part 247 of the central component unit 240, and the illumination board 251 are schematically illustrated, and the inside of the decorative part 247 and the illumination board 251 are painted white. It is illustrated in a state in which
In FIG. 62, the outline of the afterimage in a state where the internal operation unit 600 is in the extended state and the rotary member 810 of the rotation effect device 800 is rotating at high speed is illustrated by imaginary lines.

Note that the high-speed rotation speed of the rotating member 810 is not limited in any way, and various modes may be exemplified. For example, the rotation speed may be such that the configuration on the back side becomes difficult to visually recognize due to an afterimage, or the rotation speed may be such that although an afterimage occurs, the configuration on the back side can be visually recognized through a position where the rotating member 810 is not arranged.

In FIG. 62, as a light effect (rotational light effect) of the rotating effect device 800, the rotating member 810 is rotated at such a rotational speed that the structure on the back side becomes difficult to see due to afterimage, and is controlled so that it can be visually recognized during rotation. A state in which an example of a figure (a large right-pointing arrow) is illustrated is illustrated.

In FIG. 62, the possible positions of the rotating member 810 are shown shifted by 45 degrees for easy understanding, but in reality, only an afterimage is visible, and the outer shape of the rotating member 810 is not clearly shown. It rotates at such a speed that it is difficult to visually recognize it. By making the graphics visible as shown in FIG. 62, it is possible to notify the player (it is possible to make the player understand that it is the timing to play right).

A specific method of implementing the rotating light emission effect will be explained. Inside the rotating member 810, a plurality of LEDs are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810, and are arranged so as to transmit light toward the front side through the arch-shaped transparent member 814. Therefore, the diameter of the trajectory (circular path) along which the LED moves when rotating the rotating member 810 around the rotation axis RJ1 varies depending on the distance from the rotation axis RJ1.

In FIG. 62, the arrangement of each LED that is moving as the rotating member 810 rotates at high speed is inside or outside of the figure to be displayed (the right-pointing arrow in FIG. 62). When the LED is turned on and off, the afterimage of the light seen through the arch-shaped transparent member 814 is seen as an integral part, allowing the player to see a specific figure (the right-pointing arrow in FIG. 62). .

The displayed figures can be varied in a variety of ways by switching the timing of on/off control of each LED in response to the rotation of the rotating member 810, which improves the degree of freedom in producing light emitting effects using the rotating member 810. be able to.

In this manner, according to the present embodiment, the rotation presentation device 800 can be used to perform notification presentations (right-handed hitting suggestion presentations) for the same purpose in various ways. That is, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, it can be executed in a manner in which the outer rail 62 is irradiated with light, and when the internal operation unit 600 is in the extended state, it can be executed in both a manner in which the rotation effect device 800 is not rotated or in a manner in which it is rotated. can do.

Therefore, compared to a case where there are only a few variations in the notification performance (for example, only one), it is possible to make it difficult to predict the performance. Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

In addition, although the present embodiment has been described as an example of a notification effect suggesting a right-handed hit, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and various effects may be exemplified. For example, it may be possible to create a notification that suggests switching the direction of the light or the direction of the arrow alternately between left and right, or to switch the direction of the ball to the left or right. It is also possible to perform a notification effect suggesting a return.

Further, for example, by performing a light emitting effect so as to display an arc shape concentric with the outer rail 62 during high speed rotation in the rotating light emitting effect in the extended state, the outer rail 62 can be The light emitting effect that matches the shape of the can be continued even in the extended state. This makes it possible to provide consistency in the light emission effect.

As shown in FIG. 62, the rotating effect device 800 can rotate at high speed when the internal operation unit 600 is extended, but the rotating light emitting effect is performed on the premise that the rotation axis of the rotating effect device 800 is maintained. Because of the design, this embodiment employs a configuration that supports the rotation production device 800 so that it is not displaced by a load generated in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis due to high-speed rotation.

First, regulation of displacement of the rotation performance device 800 in the left-right direction will be explained. The light emitting operation production unit 700 is held by connecting the connecting holes 764 of the intermediate connecting member 760 to the fastening portion 682 of the displacement member 680. Among the pairs of connecting holes 764 on the left and right, the lower right Only one is formed as a substantially circular support hole 764b instead of a long hole, and the others are formed as long holes 764a.

Here, by making the connected hole 764 to which the fastening portion 682 is connected an elongated hole 764a, it is possible to allow vertical displacement of the displacement members 680 on both the left and right sides when displacing the light emitting operation producing unit 700 in the vertical direction. (See Figure 39). On the other hand, if it is configured with only the elongated hole 764a, there is a possibility that the rotation effect device 800 will be displaced in the left-right direction when the rotation effect device 800 rotates at high speed.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by using at least one hole as the support hole 764b, the support hole 764b can restrict the movement of the fastening part 682 in the left and right direction. Even if the device 800 rotates at high speed, it is possible to suppress displacement of the rotation performance device 800 in the left-right direction.

63(a) to 63(c) are schematic front views of the fastening portion 682 of the displacement member 680, the long hole 764a of the connected hole 764, and the support hole 764b. In FIGS. 63(a) to 63(c), the longitudinal direction (left and right width direction) of the light emitting operation production unit 700 is schematically illustrated as a schematic straight line 700L.

That is, FIG. 63(a) shows a state in which the light emitting operation production unit 700 is maintained in a horizontal position because the schematic straight line 700L is arranged along the left-right direction, and FIG. 63(b) shows a schematic Since the straight line 700L is tilted upward to the left, the state in which the light emitting operation production unit 700 is tilted is illustrated at the maximum allowable tilt angle, and in FIG. 63(c), the schematic straight line 700L is tilted upward to the right. Therefore, the tilted state of the light emitting operation production unit 700 is illustrated at the maximum allowable tilt angle. Note that the state shown in FIG. 63(a) corresponds to the states shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, and the state shown in FIG. 63(c) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 39.

As illustrated in FIGS. 63(a) to 63(c), the inclination of the schematic straight line 700L is caused by rotational displacement about the support hole 764b as a fulcrum. In FIG. 63(b), the position where the cylindrical portion 689b1 of the front and rear ring member 689 comes into contact with the left end of the elongated hole 764a located at the upper left of the drawing is illustrated, and until this state the schematic straight line 700L (light emitting operation production unit Rotation (corresponding to 700) (rotation in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front) is permitted.

In FIG. 63(c), the position where the cylindrical portion 689b1 of the front and rear ring members 689 comes into contact with the right end of the elongated hole 764a located at the upper right of the figure is shown, and until this state the schematic straight line 700L (light emitting operation production unit Rotation (corresponding to 700) (rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front) is permitted.

In this way, in this embodiment, unlike the case where the support holes 764b are employed at a plurality of positions, it is possible to allow the positional deviation of the fastening portions 682 arranged on the left and right sides in the direction of the straight line UD71 along the up-down direction. Therefore, in a configuration in which the elevating and lowering operations of the light-emitting operation production unit 700 are performed by simultaneously driving the drive motors 648 arranged on the left and right sides, a shift in the operation timing of the drive motors 648 and variations in rotational speed occur. can be tolerated.

The rotation of the schematic straight line 700L with the support hole 764b as the starting point is limited to the vertical movement when the opening direction of the support hole 764b is in the front-back direction (in the retracted state or intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600) as shown in FIG. Displacement in the moving direction of the plate member 630 (direction along the straight line UD71, vertical direction) is allowed.

On the other hand, when the light emitting operation production unit 700 is tilted and the opening direction of the support hole 764b is set to be approximately vertical (in this embodiment, the angle with respect to the vertical direction is 5 degrees), that is, when the internal operation In the case of the extended state of the unit 600 (see FIG. 62), the rotation direction of the schematic straight line 700L starting from the support hole 764b is a direction along a plane substantially perpendicular to the straight line UD71 (in this embodiment, the angle with respect to the front-rear direction is 5 degrees), and intersects the straight line UD71 at a substantially right angle.

The elevating plate member 630 is guided by the elongated hole 612 (see FIG. 49) to be displaced in the direction of the straight line UD71, but since the longitudinal displacement is regulated, the longitudinal displacement of the light emitting operation production unit 700 is suppressed. has been done. Therefore, when the rotation direction of the schematic straight line 700L starting from the support hole 764b is a direction along a plane substantially perpendicular to the straight line UD71, the allowable range of rotation of the schematic straight line 700L is suppressed.

That is, even under the condition that the elongated hole 764a is formed, it is possible to suppress the positional shift of the light emitting operation production unit 700 with respect to the elevating plate member 630 when the internal operation unit 600 is extended.

In this case, as described above, by controlling the rotating member 810 to perform the rotating light emitting effect in which the rotating member 810 rotates at high speed while the internal operation unit 600 is in the extended state, the arrangement of the rotating shaft RJ1 of the rotating member 810 is changed to the rotating light emitting effect. It is possible to prevent it from shifting during the performance. Thereby, it is possible to omit the provision of a separate member for fixing the arrangement of the rotation axis RJ1 of the rotation member 810.

Further, in this embodiment, the support hole 764b is arranged on the opposite side of the rotating member 810 (the rear side in the state of FIG. 62), so compared to the case where the support hole 764b is arranged on the side closer to the rotating member 810 As a result, it is possible to easily limit the displacement caused by the rotation of the rotating member 810 (the displacement generated on the front side of the light emitting operation production unit 700).

When the light emitting action production unit 700 is tilted and displaced, a load in the rotational direction causes a load on the intermediate connecting member 760 in the direction away from the displacement member 680 (in the direction in which the fastening portion 682 (see FIG. 50) extends) (see FIG. 53). Therefore, without countermeasures, there is a possibility that the fastening portion 682 will be overloaded and damaged.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, by setting the light emitting operation production unit 700 to a slightly tilted position (see FIG. 55) as the initial position, the intermediate connecting member 760 is moved to the lower edge side of the displacement member 680 before the tilting displacement. It is urged in the direction of approaching. That is, since the intermediate connecting member 760 is disposed close to the displacement member 680 on the side closer to the cylindrical portion 684 (see FIG. 50(a)) serving as the rotation axis of the displacement member 680, the displacement member A load generated in a direction away from 680 can be easily generated as a load in the rotational direction of displacement member 680, and the load applied to fastening portion 682 can be reduced.

Next, regulation of displacement of the rotation performance device 800 in the vertical direction will be explained. In this embodiment, the vertical displacement of the abutted plate 638 of the elevating plate member 630 can be regulated by the resistance generating device 650, and the regulation can be executed in the extended state of the internal operation unit 600. be done.

64 to 66 are cross-sectional views of the operating unit 500 taken along the line LXIV-LXIV in FIG. 36. The LXIV-LXIV line is set as a line passing through the center of the plate thickness of the abutted plate 638 (see FIG. 49) of the elevating plate member 630. Although the game board 13 is not shown in FIG. 36, FIGS. 64 to 66 show cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in its assembled state.

64 shows a retracted state of the internal operating unit 600, FIG. 65 shows an intermediate state of the internal operating unit 600, and FIG. 66 shows an extended state of the internal operating unit 600.

Further, in FIGS. 64 to 66, the solenoid 651 is not energized, and the state in which the solenoid 651 is de-energized is illustrated. In addition, in FIG. 65, a state in which the solenoid 651 is energized and excited is partially cut out and illustrated for reference.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 66, when the solenoid 651 is de-energized, the longitudinal displacement member 653 of the resistance generator 650 is located on the front side and enters the moving path of the abutted plate 638 of the elevating plate member 630. .

Both upper and lower side surfaces of the abutted plate 638 and both upper and lower side surfaces of the longitudinal displacement member 653 are formed into a planar shape orthogonal to the up-down direction. Thereby, the moving direction (vertical direction) of the abutted plate 638 can be matched with the direction of the load that the abutted plate 638 receives from both the upper and lower side surfaces of the longitudinal displacement member 653 in the moving direction.

Therefore, since the load applied from the abutted plate 638 to the longitudinally displacing member 653 does not have a component directed toward the rear, it is possible to avoid pushing the longitudinally displacing member 653 toward the back side. Therefore, the state in which the longitudinal displacement member 653 is located on the front side is maintained.

In the state shown in FIG. 64, the longitudinal displacement member 653 abuts the abutted plate 638 in the vertical direction and functions to prevent the abutted plate 638 from moving downward. That is, even if the drive motor 648 is not energized, the longitudinal displacement member 653 can prevent the elevating plate member 630 from moving downward due to its own weight, so the internal operation unit 600 can be maintained in the retracted state.

Note that in this embodiment, since an upward biasing force is generated against the lifting plate member 630 from the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 47), the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 is applied when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state. By designing the internal operation unit 600 to be large enough to maintain the internal operation unit 600, it is possible to maintain the internal operation unit 600 in the retracted state without making the longitudinal displacement member 653 function.

On the other hand, in this case, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 increases, and the driving force generated by the drive motor 648 to move the elevating plate member 630 downward increases, so it is not possible to increase the size of the drive motor 648. It may be necessary. On the other hand, by adopting a configuration in which the internal operation unit 600 is maintained in the retracted state by the longitudinal displacement member 653 as in the present embodiment, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 can be reduced as only an auxiliary force. Therefore, the drive motor 648 can be made smaller.

In the state shown in FIG. 66, the longitudinal displacement member 653 abuts the abutted plate 638 in the vertical direction and functions to prevent upward displacement of the abutted plate 638. That is, even if the drive motor 648 is not energized, the vertical displacement member 653 can prevent the elevating plate member 630 from moving upward, so that the internal operating unit 600 can be maintained in the extended state.

The load that causes the elevating plate member 630 to move upward is assumed to be a load due to the inertia of the rotating effect device 800 (see FIG. 62) during the rotating light emission effect. That is, when the rotation performance device 800 rotates at high speed, there is a possibility that the rotation performance device 800 is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis, but displacement in the vertical direction can be prevented by the longitudinal displacement member 653.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the longitudinal displacement member 653 not only allows the downward displacement of the elevating plate member 630 when the internal operating unit 600 is in the retracted state, but also the upward displacement of the elevating plate member 630 when the internal operating unit 600 is in the extended state. can also be prevented.

The state shown in FIG. 65 is a state in which the solenoid 651 is energized and excited (see the cutout area in FIG. 65), the elevating plate member 630 is displaced downward, and then the solenoid 651 is de-energized. corresponds to the state of

That is, in the present embodiment, when the solenoid 651 is energized, the longitudinal displacement member 653 retreats from the displacement locus of the abutted plate 638, allowing the vertical displacement of the elevating plate member 630; Even if the solenoid 651 becomes de-energized during the vertical displacement of the plate member 630, the vertical displacement of the elevating plate member 630 is not immediately regulated, and the abutted plate 638 is moved in front of the longitudinally displacing member 653. Vertical displacement can be continued while sliding on the side.

In other words, the modes of the load that the elevating plate member 630 receives during vertical displacement include two modes in which the front-rear displacement member 653 does not come into contact with the abutted plate 638, so it does not receive any load from the front-rear displacement member 653, and a front-rear displacement member 630 that receives no load from the front-rear displacement member 653. It is possible to configure a mode in which the solenoid 653 receives a frictional force by contacting the solenoid 653, and these modes can be switched depending on whether or not the solenoid 651 is energized.

Although the shape of the front side surface of the front-rear displacement member 653 that contacts the abutted plate 638 is not limited in any way, in this embodiment, the shape is a planar shape that is perpendicular to the front-rear direction across the pair of upper and lower guide protrusions 614. It has a curved surface shape that curves away from the abutted plate 638 at upper and lower outer sides than the guide protrusion 614 .

This makes it possible to widen the vertical width of the contact surface with the abutted plate 638, whose back side surface has a planar shape perpendicular to the front-rear direction, and to secure the contact area, so that the front-rear displacement member 653 can The frictional force that the elevating plate member 630 receives can be increased, and the degree to which the elevating plate member 630 is braked can be increased in both the up and down directions.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the elevating plate member 630 that is being vertically displaced can be braked (or stopped) by the longitudinal displacement member 653. That is, the longitudinal displacement member 653 includes a member for maintaining the arrangement of the elevating plate member 630 at the upper and lower ends (in the retracted state and extended state of the internal operation unit 600), and a member for braking the elevating plate member 630 during displacement. It can also be used as a member.

The driving force is transmitted to the rack gear portion 634 of the elevating plate member 630 via the transmission gear 649 that meshes with the rack gear portion 634 of the elevating plate member 630, and as described above, the rack gear portion 634 of the elevating plate member 630 is urged rearward by its own weight. As a result, the meshing state between the rack gear 634 and the transmission gear 649 is optimized, and the transmission efficiency of driving force is improved.

On the other hand, when braking the elevating plate member 630, the load applied from the longitudinal displacement member 653 to the abutted plate 638 is a load directed toward the front side, and acts to separate the rack gear 634 from the transmission gear 649.

Therefore, when the longitudinal displacement member 653 comes into contact with the abutted plate 638, not only the effect of deceleration due to braking due to the frictional force generated at the abutment position but also the meshing state of the rack gear 634 and the transmission gear 649 are achieved. It is possible to produce a deceleration effect by reducing the degree of meshing (lowering the degree of meshing and reducing the transmission efficiency of driving force). Thereby, the elevating plate member 630 can be efficiently braked (decelerated).

An example of switching control of energization of the solenoid 651 will be described. The description will be made based on the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600. First, before starting to drive the drive motor 648, the solenoid 651 is energized to retreat the longitudinal displacement member 653 from the displacement locus of the abutted plate 638.

As a result, the elevating plate member 630 becomes movable in the vertical direction, so the drive motor 648 is started to be driven, and the internal operating unit 600 is moved downward toward the extended state. By de-energizing the solenoid 651 in a state before the extended state (for example, an intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600), the longitudinal displacement member 653 is pressed against the abutted plate 638 (see FIG. 65). ), the lifting plate member 630 can be braked by frictional force.

When the internal operation unit 600 reaches the extended state in this state, the abutted plate 638 is placed below the displacement locus of the longitudinal displacement member 653, so that the longitudinal displacement member 653 is moved forward by the return spring of the solenoid 651. (See Figure 66).

Therefore, the action applied from the longitudinal displacement member 653 to the abutted plate 638 can be smoothly changed from braking to position regulation without switching between energization and non-energization of the solenoid 651.

On the other hand, when the internal operation unit 600 is displaced upward from the extended state, the solenoid 651 is energized while the elevating plate member 630 is displaced in the vertical direction, so that the longitudinally displacing member 653 is moved to the abutted plate. 638 can be maintained without contact. As a result, it is possible to prevent the generation of frictional resistance between the longitudinal displacement member 653 and the abutted plate 638, so that the driving force required for upward displacement of the elevating plate member 630 can be reduced, and the driving force can be reduced. The motor 648 can be made smaller.

A description will be given of how the mode of rotational operation of the rotational performance device 800 changes in response to a change in the state of the internal operation unit 600. In this embodiment, the attitude of the rotation effect device 800 changes as the attitude of the light emitting action effect unit 700 changes to the forward rotation direction or the backward rotation direction, but the permissible rotation movement (rotation angle) for each attitude changes. Change.

67 to 69 are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 taken along the line LXVII-LXVII in FIG. 36. The LXVII-LXVII line corresponds to a line passing through the center of the width of the cylindrical member 695 (see FIG. 37) of the rotational posture auxiliary member 690. Although the game board 13 is not shown in FIG. 36, FIGS. 67 to 69 show cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in its assembled state.

67 shows an extended state of the internal operating unit 600, FIGS. 68(a) and 68(b) show an intermediate state of the internal operating unit 600, and FIGS. 69(a) and 69(b) ), the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 is illustrated. That is, FIGS. 67 to 69 illustrate in chronological order how the internal operation unit 600 changes from the extended state to the intermediate state and then to the retracted state.

Note that in FIGS. 68(a) and 69(a), the rotating member 810 is shown in a proper posture in which the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810 is along the left-right direction, and in FIGS. 68(b) and 69(b), the rotating member 810 is The state in which the near end of the member 810 in the figure has reached the end of the permissible movement toward the rear side is shown.

That is, FIG. 68(b) shows a state in which the end of the rotating member 810 is in contact with the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510 (although it is shown in non-contact in FIG. 68(b)). In FIG. 69(b), the end of the rotating member 810 is in contact with the cylindrical member 695 of the rotating posture auxiliary member 690. A state in which they are in contact is illustrated (although they are shown in non-contact in FIG. 69(b), they are in contact on the right side of the illustrated cross section (the front side of the paper in FIG. 69(b)) .

In the extended state of the internal operation unit 600 shown in FIG. 67, the rotating member 810 of the rotating effect device 800 rotates more than once (360 degrees or more) in the rotational direction RD1 about the rotation axis RJ1, for example, a rotating light emission effect. The rotational movement is possible. That is, the decorative portion 247 and the like disposed on the center frame 86 are disposed at a position that does not enter the movement locus of the rotating member 810 of the rotation effect device 800.

In FIG. 68, since the bottom wall part 511 of the back case 510 is arranged on the back side of the rotating member 810 of the rotating effect device 800, the rotatable angle of the rotating member 810 of the rotating effect device 800 is The angle is limited to the angle until it is displaced in the rotational direction RD1 and comes into contact with the back case 510 (see FIG. 68(b)).

Basically, before the state of the internal operation unit 600 changes from the extended state to the intermediate state, the attitude of the rotating member 810 of the rotation effect device 800 is controlled so that the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810 is along the left-right direction. Since the rotating member 810 and the bottom wall portion 511 are unlikely to collide with each other because the rotating member 810 and the bottom wall portion 511 are controlled to have a proper posture and then change the state toward an intermediate state.

In the present embodiment, even if the rotating member 810 of the rotating effect device 800 collides with the bottom wall 511 due to erroneous control, the rotating member 810 will not be able to reach the bottom of the bottom wall 511 above the upper edge of the opening 511a. Since it is arranged so as to collide with the wall portion 511, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the rotating member 810 collides with the third symbol display device 81.

In FIG. 69, since the cylindrical member 695 of the rotation posture auxiliary member 690 is arranged on the back side of the rotation member 810 of the rotation production device 800, the rotatable angle of the rotation member 810 of the rotation production device 800 is 810 is displaced in the rotational direction RD1 and is limited to an angle until it comes into contact with the cylindrical member 695. That is, the rotatable angle of the rotating member 810 of the rotation performance device 800 is smaller in the retracted state (see FIG. 69(b)) than in the intermediate state (see FIG. 68(b)).

In this embodiment, when the rotating member 810 is rotationally displaced until it comes into contact with the bottom wall part 511 in the intermediate state of the internal operating unit 600, the state change continues until the internal operating unit 600 is in the retracted state. However, in the process of the state change (ascending displacement of the light emitting action production unit 700), the rotating member 810 comes into contact with the cylindrical member 695 and is pushed forward, thereby reducing the attitude difference between the rotating member 810 and its proper attitude. The attitude of the rotating member 810 is corrected so that the rotating member 810 becomes smaller.

Since the rotating member 810 has a symmetrical shape in its proper posture (see FIG. 61), and the cylindrical member 695 is arranged in a symmetrical position, it is possible to determine whether a difference in posture of the rotating member 810 occurs on the left or right side. The attitude of the rotating member 810 is corrected so that the attitude difference from the proper attitude of the rotating member 810 becomes small (regardless of which direction of rotation about the rotation axis RJ1 occurs).

Since the rotating member 810 rotates around the rotation axis RJ1, the rotating member 810 is displaced to the back side and contacts the cylindrical member 695 (left and right sides, see FIG. 69) and the opposite side (left and right sides, see FIG. 69). side), the rotating member 810 will be close to the base plate 60. If the posture deviation from the proper posture is large, the rotating member 810 may be worn out due to rubbing between the rotating member 810 and the base plate 60, or may be damaged due to a collision.

On the other hand, as the cylindrical member 695 functions as described above, the attitude of the rotating member 810 changes to return to the proper attitude in the process of the state change of the internal operation unit 600 toward the retracted state. The rotation members 810 on the other left and right sides can be displaced in a direction away from the base plate 60. Thereby, contact between the rotating member 810 and the base plate 60 can be avoided.

As described above, the cylindrical member 695 is a member that functions to come into contact with the rotating member 810 and push the rotating member 810 to the front side, and has a perfect circular shape that can roll to avoid wear of the rotating member 810. It is formed into a cylindrical shape. That is, the cylindrical member 695 rotates when it comes into contact with the rotating member 810, so that no scratches are left on the rotating member 810.

In order to maintain this function, it is preferable to omit the decorative shape as much as possible, but when the cylindrical member 695 is visually recognized by the player, the shape is too simple and gives a sense of discomfort when viewed at the same time as other decorative parts. there is a possibility.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical member 695 is disposed closer to the retracted position (upper side and rear side) than the rotation member 810 is disposed in the extended state of the internal operation unit 600, so the cylindrical member 695 It is possible to reduce the attention paid to

Furthermore, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, the cylindrical member 695 is designed to be placed on the back side of the rotating member 810 (see FIG. 36), so the visibility of the cylindrical member 695 is reduced by the rotating member 810. can be lowered.

Therefore, while the shape of the cylindrical member 695 is designed to be an optimal shape to avoid wear of the rotating member 810, by lowering the visibility of the cylindrical member 695, it is possible for the cylindrical member 695 to be seen by the player. This allows the user to continue playing the game without feeling uncomfortable.

A description will be given of the light production that is possible due to the change in attitude of the rotating member 810 when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state. As described above, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, the outer rail 62 is irradiated with light from the rotation effect device 800, making it possible to cause the outer rail 62 to emit light.

In addition, by changing the attitude of the rotating member 810 around the rotation axis RJ1, one of the rotational ends of the rotating member 810 can be displaced forward. For example, in FIG. 69(b), since the rotating tip on the back side (left side) of the paper can be moved toward the front side, the left side of the outer rail 62 can be made to emit brighter light, and the right side can be made to emit light slightly darker. Furthermore, by reversing the direction of attitude change of the rotating member 810, the difference in brightness between the left and right sides can be reversed.

Thereby, it is possible to perform an effect in which the light emission intensity of the outer rail 62 is changed for each part. For example, by repeatedly changing the attitude of the rotating member 810 so as to reciprocate in the rotational direction about the rotation axis RJ1 without changing the intensity of the light irradiated from the rotating member 810, the light irradiated to the left and right of the outer rail 62 can be irradiated to the left and right of the outer rail 62. The apparent brightness of the light can be switched alternately between the left and right sides.

A description will be given of the light production that is possible due to the change in attitude of the rotating member 810 in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600. As described above, in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, the rotating member 810 can change its attitude at a larger angle than the attitude change angle in the retracted state. Therefore, the light radiated from the rotation effect device 800 is irradiated onto the outer rail 62, and the arrival position of the light in the effect of causing the outer rail 62 to emit light can be positioned closer to the front side.

As a result, even if the rotating member 810 equipped with a light emitting device such as an LED moves away from the outer rail 62, the position where the light is reflected on the outer rail 62 is changed to the front side (the player's side). Changes in the intensity of irradiated and reflected light can be made unnoticeable to the player.

Furthermore, the reachable range of the light is not limited to the outer rail 62, and the light can also be applied to portions located away from the outer rail 62, such as the sixth projecting portion 277 of the upper connecting member 270 (see FIG. 26). can be reached.

By swinging the rotating member 810 around the rotating shaft RJ1 disposed at the center position in the left and right positions, the longitudinal ends disposed on the left and right sides can be moved toward the front one side at a time, so that the base plate 60 In terms of strength, it is possible to assist the light production in a range (left and right outer positions) that is difficult to cover with the illumination board 251 designed to be arranged at the left and right center positions.

As a result, even if the arrangement of the illumination board 251 is limited, the performance of the light performance in areas where the illumination board 251 is not arranged can be improved by the rotation performance device 800 disposed in the operation unit 500. This can be improved by lighting effects.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the recesses 982e, 982f, 982g for discharging game balls from the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 are arranged on the left and right sides of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2. However, in the distribution unit 3980 of the third embodiment, the ball discharge path is formed in front of the bulge 3982 that forms the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 70(a) is a front view of the distribution unit 3980 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 70(b) is a rear view of the distribution unit 3980. As shown in FIGS. 70(a) and 70(b), the distribution unit 3980 is configured to be able to discharge the balls to the front side on the upstream side of the openings 985e and 985f.

That is, the front base 3981 of the sorting unit 3980 has a pair of openings 3982k formed through the bulging part 982, and the balls passed through the openings 3982k and discharged to the front side of the bulging part 982, to the left. It is equipped with a discharge gutter 3982l for discharging water to the rear side.

The opening 3982k is disposed on the front side of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, and is formed in a rectangular shape that is sized to allow the ball flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 to pass therethrough. .

In the discharge gutter 3982l, the left and right long portions are inclined downwardly toward the left, and the longitudinally long portions formed at the left end thereof are downwardly inclined toward the rear. Therefore, the ball that passes through the opening 3982k from the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 and rides on the discharge gutter 3982l is flown to the left along the discharge gutter 3982l, and the flowing direction is switched to the rear side at the left end position, being swept backwards.

In this embodiment, the discharge gutter 3982l is configured to receive the balls on both sides of the pair of openings 3982k, thereby reducing the number of parts and reducing component cost. A gutter 3982l may be provided. In this case, the discharge gutter 3982l disposed on the front side of the left opening 3982k slopes downward toward the left, and the discharge gutter 3982l disposed on the front side of the right opening 3982k descends toward the right. By configuring it to be inclined, the length of the discharge gutter 3982l alone can be shortened.

The appearance of the ball that has passed through the inlet 982d will be explained. The front base 3981 is made of a colored semi-transparent (in this embodiment, blue) resin material, and allows the ball passing through the inlet 982d and flowing down the back side of the bulge 982 to be visually recognized through the bulge 982. can do.

On the other hand, since the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 through which the balls flow down are formed to extend to the rear of the electric accessory 140a, the electric accessory 140a acts as a shield in the range behind the electric accessory 140a. As a result, visibility of the ball deteriorates.

If the difference between whether or not the ball is detected by the detection device SE3 is caused by the direction in which the ball flows in the range behind the electric accessory 140a, it is necessary to pay attention to the ball in the range with poor visibility, and the player may cause a feeling of fatigue.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the ball that deviates from the path toward the detection device SE3 passes through the opening 3982k and flows toward the front, so that not only does the ball approach from the player's perspective, but the ball that deviates from the path toward the detection device SE3 flows toward the front. Since this occurs above the range hidden by the accessory 140a, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the balls that flow in the direction away from the detection device SE3 among the balls that have passed through the inlet 982d.

Thereby, when a special symbol is not drawn even though the ball passes through the inlet 982d, it can be easily understood that the result is due to the ball deviating from the detection device SE3.

Other improvements to the shape of the distribution unit 3980 will be explained. In this embodiment, instead of forming an opening 3982k to ensure a ball ejection path, in the rear base 3985, the formation of openings 985b and 985c (see FIG. 8) from the rear base 985 in the first embodiment is omitted. Correspondingly, the lateral width near the lower end of the bulging portion 982 is shortened.

As a result, the left and right width of the distribution unit 3980 can be shortened, and the shape of the through hole 60a (see FIG. 5) of the base plate 60 can be made smaller. It is possible to secure a sufficient area for planting. Thereby, the degree of freedom in nail arrangement can be improved.

Moreover, since the nail can be placed near the electric accessory 140a, the degree of freedom in arranging the nail for guiding the ball to the electric accessory 140a can be improved.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 71. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the recesses 982e, 982f, 982g for discharging game balls from the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 are arranged on the left and right sides of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2. However, in the distribution unit 4980 of the fourth embodiment, the ball discharge path is formed on the rear side of the back base 4985 that forms the back side of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 71(a) is a front view of the sorting unit 4980 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 71(b) is a rear view of the sorting unit 4980. As shown in FIGS. 71(a) and 71(b), the distribution unit 4980 is configured to be able to discharge the balls to the back side on the upstream side of the openings 985e and 985f.

In other words, the rear base 4985 of the sorting unit 4980 has a pair of left and right openings 4985k formed through it, and the balls that have passed through the openings 4985k and are discharged to the rear side of the rear base 4985 flow down to the left to the rear side. It is equipped with a discharge gutter of 4985 liters.

The opening 4985k is disposed on the back side of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, and is formed in a rectangular shape that is sized to allow the ball flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 to pass therethrough. .

In the discharge gutter 4985l, the long left and right portions slope downwardly toward the left, and the long portion formed at the left end of the drain gutter 4985l slopes downwardly toward the rear. Therefore, the ball that passes through the opening 4985k from the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 and rides on the discharge gutter 4985l is flown to the left along the discharge gutter 4985l, and at the left end position, the flowing direction is switched to the rear side, being swept backwards.

The discharge gutter 4985l is placed on the back side of the back base 4985, and is placed away from the player, but the front base 981 and the back base 4985, which are placed on the near side thereof, are made of a translucent resin material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the discharge gutter 4985l and the balls rolling in the discharge gutter 4985l through the front base 981 and the rear base 4985.

In this embodiment, the discharge gutter 4985l is configured to receive the balls on both sides of the pair of openings 4985k, thereby reducing the number of parts and reducing component cost. A gutter 4985l may be provided. In this case, the balls can be discharged by flowing them at least to the rear side from each opening 4985l, so it is not necessary to form the discharge gutter 4985l long from side to side. Thereby, the shape of the discharge gutter 4985l can be simplified.

According to the configuration of this embodiment in which the discharge gutter 4985l is formed on the back side, the discharge gutter 4985l can be avoided from being conspicuous, so that the design of the base plate 60 near the through hole 60a of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 5) can be improved. It is possible to avoid the influence of the discharge gutter 4985L on the Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the decorative pattern of the base plate 60 can be improved.

Other improvements to the shape of the distribution unit 4980 will be explained. In this embodiment, instead of forming an opening 4985k to ensure a ball ejection path, in the rear base 4985, the formation of openings 985b and 985c (see FIG. 8) from the rear base 985 in the first embodiment is omitted. Correspondingly, the lateral width near the lower end of the bulging portion 982 is shortened.

As a result, the left and right width of the distribution unit 4980 can be shortened, and the shape of the through hole 60a (see FIG. 5) of the base plate 60 can be made smaller. It is possible to secure a sufficient area for planting. Thereby, the degree of freedom in nail arrangement can be improved.

Moreover, since the nail can be placed near the electric accessory 140a, the degree of freedom in arranging the nail for guiding the ball to the electric accessory 140a can be improved.

According to the configuration where the opening 4985k is formed on the back side, compared to the configuration where the opening is formed on the front side (see FIG. 70), the vertical arrangement of the opening 4985k can be arbitrarily designed without depending on the arrangement of the electric accessory 140a. It becomes possible. Therefore, the probability that a ball flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 will be detected by the detection device SE3 (pass through the detection hole SE1a) without deviating can be adjusted from the shape.

For example, if the vertical width of the opening 4985k is designed to be equal to the diameter of the sphere, most of the spheres flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 will not pass through the opening 4985k and will be detected by the detection device SE3. It will pass through hole SE1a.

On the other hand, if the vertical width of the opening 4985k is designed to be 1.5 times the diameter of the sphere, about 20% of the spheres flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 will pass through the opening 4985k, and the remaining About 80% of the amount of light passes through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3. That is, by arbitrarily designing the vertical width of the opening 4985k, the probability of detection by the detection device SE3 can be adjusted.

Next, the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball that reaches the upper connecting member 270 is smoothly guided left and right, but in the upper connecting member 5270 of the fifth embodiment, smooth guidance of the ball in the left and right direction is suppressed. Various improvements have been made. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 72 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 73 is a partial sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line LXXIII-LXXIII in FIG. 72.

As shown in FIG. 72, the upper structural member 5241 constituting the center frame 86 includes left and right protrusions 5246 that protrude from the band-shaped frame portion 245 toward the second projecting portion 5273. The second projecting portion 5273 includes a deceleration protrusion 5273a that protrudes from the lower end toward the left and right positions of the deceleration protrusion 5246.

According to this embodiment, the ball flowing down between the pair of left and right first projecting parts 272 or between the first projecting part 272 and the second projecting part 5273 reaches the band-shaped frame part 245, and When rolling, it flows down from the left and right protrusions 5246 to the left and right outside, collides with the deceleration protrusion 5273a, and is decelerated.

In other words, the momentum of the ball is so great that it reaches between the pair of left and right first projecting parts 272 or between the first projecting part 272 and the second projecting part 5273, and the ball has a large kinetic energy. The speed can be reduced by collision with the reduction protrusion 5273a.

The overlapping width (vertical dimension) of the ball in contact with the deceleration protrusion 5273a varies depending on the speed of the ball when passing through the left and right protrusions 5246. That is, a ball passing through the left and right protrusions 5246 at a high speed will come into contact with the deceleration protrusion 5273a at a higher position over a wide range, while a ball passing at a slow speed when passing through the left and right protrusions 5246 will contact the deceleration protrusion 5273a at a higher position. It is displaced to a lower position before coming into contact with the portion 5273a, and is kept in contact with the deceleration protrusion 5273a to the extent that it rubs against it.

Therefore, when the speed when passing through the left and right protrusions 5246 is high, a large deceleration effect can be expected, while when the speed when passing through the left and right protrusions 5246 is slow, the deceleration effect is suppressed. It is possible to avoid the ball from stopping.

According to the present embodiment, a ball that is fired along the firing path HL51 with a strong firing force and reaches the band frame part 245 on the upstream side (left and right inner side) of the left and right protruding parts 5246 is While a deceleration effect occurs due to contact with the deceleration protrusion 5273a, the ball is launched along the launch path HL52 with a weak launch force and reaches the band-shaped frame portion 245 on the downstream side (left and right outside) of the left and right protrusions 5246. The configuration is such that the deceleration effect by the deceleration protrusion 5273a does not occur.

In other words, the ball is fired with a strong firing force that reaches the center of the left and right sides of the game area, and a deceleration effect is generated by the deceleration protrusion 5273a, and the ball is fired with a weak firing force that reaches the left and right outside (left side) of the game area. The decelerating effect of the decelerating protrusion 5273a does not occur on the ball. Thereby, the difference in speed of the ball flowing down (flowing down when passing the lower end side of the band-shaped frame portion 245) due to the magnitude of the firing force (the magnitude of the kinetic energy) can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 73, an opening 5274a is formed through the upper surface of the third projecting portion 5274 and is large enough to allow a ball to pass through. The opening 5274a is formed with a horizontal width approximately equal to the diameter of the ball, and forms a passage for the ball in conjunction with the recessed portion 5271a formed by cutting out the plate-like portion 271. The recessed portion 5271a allows the ball to be easily guided toward the opening 5274a.

A through passage 5060d is formed through the base plate 60 in the front-rear direction as a passage for the ball that has entered the opening 5274a. A flow path forming member 5295 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the base plate 60, and includes a guide flow path 5295a that receives the ball that has passed through the through path 5060d and guides the ball toward the right and left outer sides and downward.

The guide flow path 5295a is connected to the flow path rear structure portion 266 (see FIG. 25), which serves as a member for sending the ball to the upper surface of the strip-shaped extension portion 263, so that the inner path is communicated with the guide flow path 5295a. Thereby, the path of the ball can be configured so that the ball that has flowed toward the back side of the base plate 60 appears again on the upper surface of the strip-shaped extension portion 263.

The ball rolling on the strip-shaped extension part 263 (see FIG. 24) passes through the central rear inclined part 263a and is discharged from the ball discharge hole 263c, and then falls toward the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 18). Due to this arrangement, the possibility that the ball rolling on the strip-shaped extension portion 263 will enter the first prize opening 64 is significantly increased.

Therefore, attention to the ball that has passed through the opening 5274a and flowed to the back side of the base plate 60 can be improved. In addition, the player's motivation to adjust the firing force so that the ball passes through the opening 5274a can be increased.

Note that the subsequent path of the ball flowing toward the back side is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, through-holes may be formed in the base plate 60 so as to return to the front side of the base plate 60 at the left and right outer positions of the channel front component 265 (see FIG. 18), or the left component 450 and the right A flow path may extend downward so as to flow behind the component member 470.

When the flow path extends downward behind the left component 450 and the right component 470, the flow path is at least partially connected to the outer falling path FL2 (see FIG. 31) when viewed from the front. By arranging the balls so that they overlap, the balls flowing down the back side of the base plate 60 can appear as if they are flowing down toward the first ball guide portion 457. Thereby, attention to the ball flowing down the back side of the base plate 60 can be improved.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the light emitting action production unit 700 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, but in the sixth embodiment, the light emitting action production unit 6700 is arranged on the front side of the game board 13. .
Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

74 and 75 are partial cross-sectional views of a pachinko machine 6010 in the sixth embodiment along a line corresponding to the LV-LV line in FIG. 36. FIG. 74 shows a state in which the light emitting action production unit 6700 is arranged at the upper end position, and FIG. 75 shows a state in which the light emitting action production unit 6700 is arranged at the lower end position.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the pachinko machine 6010 includes a front frame 6014 on the front side of the game board 13, and when the front frame 6014 is locked to the outer frame 11, the first glass unit 6016a is closed. It is configured to close the front side of the gaming area.

The front frame 6014 includes the above-described first glass unit 6016a and a second glass unit 6016b that is arranged closer to the front side and has an inclined posture that increases and tilts toward the front side.

The first glass unit 6016a has a sheet glass portion formed on the game area side with the center frame 86 as a reference, and an opening 6016c formed therethrough on the opposite side. That is, since the front of the center frame 86 is open in the first glass unit 6016a, the glass unit 6016a does not block the field of view when viewed from the front, so that the center frame 86 and the third symbol display device disposed inside the center frame 86 can be easily viewed from the front. The visibility of the display of 81 can be improved.

The second glass unit 6016b is fitted and fixed inside the support portion 6014a that forms the periphery of the front frame 6014. Since the second glass unit 6016b isolates the player from the operating unit 500, even if the opening 6016c is formed in the first glass unit 6016a, the player is prevented from touching the operating unit 500. be able to.

The support portion 6014a is formed from an impermeable resin material and a metal material, and functions to hide the configuration arranged on the back side thereof.

The light emitting action production unit 6700 is the same as the light emitting action production unit 700 described in the second embodiment, except that the arrangement is different. That is, in the light emitting action production unit 6700, the rotation production device 800 is rotatably disposed.

Inside the front frame 6014, there are a first elongated hole 6672, a second elongated hole 6673, and a curved elongated hole having the same shapes as the first elongated hole 672, second elongated hole 673, and curved elongated hole 674 described in the second embodiment. 6674 is formed in a state inclined by about 25 degrees in the forward rotation direction with respect to the posture in the second embodiment.

A change in appearance of the light emitting operation production unit 6700 due to a change in arrangement will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 74, when the light emitting action producing unit 6700 is placed at the upper end position, the central decorative member 751 is barely visible, and the entire view of the rotating member 810 is hidden by the support portion 6014a of the front frame 6014. That is, when the light emitting action producing unit 6700 is placed at the upper end position, the visibility of the light emitting action producing unit 6700 decreases.

On the other hand, when the light emitting operation production unit 6700 is displaced diagonally backward and downward, the portion hidden by the support portion 6014a is placed behind the second glass unit 6016b, and the entire view of the rotating member 810 becomes visible. Furthermore, even when the rotating member 810 rotates at high speed around the rotating shaft RJ1 to perform a rotating light emission effect, the player can visually recognize the rotating tip side of the rotating member 810. That is, when the light emitting action producing unit 6700 is arranged at the lower end position, the visibility of the light emitting action producing unit 6700 is improved.

Note that, as shown by the imaginary line in FIG. 75, the rotation locus of the rotating member 810 enters into the thickness dimension of the first glass unit 6014a, and an opening 6016c is formed at the entry position. , contact between the first glass unit 6014a and the rotating member 810 is avoided. In other words, the opening 6016c functions to improve the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the rotating member 810 by avoiding contact with the rotating member 810.

In this embodiment, a light emitting action producing unit 6700 is arranged on the front side of the game board 13, while a light emitting action producing unit 700 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13. The operation mode of the light emitting operation production unit 700 is as described above in the second embodiment.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the light emitting action producing unit 6700 may be moved toward the lower end position as a producing motion in which the movable unit protrudes to the front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, or the light emitting operation producing unit 6700 may be moved toward the lower end position, The motion production unit 700 may be in an extended state of the internal motion unit 600.

Furthermore, the rotating light emitting effect of the rotating effect device 800 may be performed by the rotating member 810 of the light emitting action producing unit 700 or may be performed by the rotating member 810 of the light emitting action producing unit 6700. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in setting the execution position of the rotating light emitting effect, and also to vary the execution (performing the rotating light emitting effect with one of the light emitting action producing unit 700 or the light emitting action producing unit 6700, or rotating alternately). It is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing (variations such as whether to execute a light emission effect or simultaneously execute a rotating light emission effect, etc.).

Although a case has been described in which the light emitting operation production unit 700 is also disposed inside the back case 510, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the light emitting operation production unit 700 is not arranged inside the back case 510.

In this case, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, the field of view is not obstructed by the light-emitting operation production unit 700, so the upper edge of the third symbol display device 81 is pulled upward to display the third symbol display device 81. The area of the region can be increased. In addition, since the front and back width of the back case 510 that was necessary to accommodate the light emitting action production unit 700 can be shortened, the front and back distance between the center frame 86 and the third symbol display device 81 can be shortened. The visibility of the display by the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 76. In the second embodiment, the metal rod-shaped member 686 is guided by the linear second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674, so that the light emitting operation production unit 700 moves in parallel; Although the case has been described in which the state in which the light emitting operation producing unit 700 rotates around the central axis J1 of the cylindrical part 684 is switched, the guide part 7673 of the seventh embodiment extends linearly along the vertical direction. It is formed in the shape of a protrusion. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

76(a) to 76(c) are schematic side views of the guide portion 7673 and the L-shaped elongated hole 7674, schematically showing the guide portion 7673 and the L-shaped elongated hole 7674 in the seventh embodiment.
76(a) illustrates the arrangement of the configuration at the height in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, and FIG. 76(b) illustrates the arrangement of the configuration at the height in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, In FIG. 76(c), the arrangement of the structures at the height in the extended state of the internal operating unit 600 is illustrated.

Note that the arrangement of the light emitting operation production unit 700 in the extended state is different from the arrangement of the internal operation unit 600 described in the second embodiment, as can be seen from the fact that the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 684 is shifted backward. The light emitting operation production unit 700 is shifted rearward from the arrangement in the state.

The guide portion 7673 is formed along the extending direction of the second elongated hole 673 described in the second embodiment, and is formed on the left and right inner surfaces of the outer member 610 as a plate-shaped portion that extends downward. , are arranged so as to restrict displacement of the metal rod-shaped member 686 in the front-rear direction. In the L-shaped elongated hole 7674, a recessed portion 7674a having a width capable of receiving the cylindrical portion 684 is formed rearward from the lower end of the curved elongated hole 674 described in the second embodiment.

The downward displacement of the displacement member 680 will be explained. The displacement from FIG. 76(a) to FIG. 76(b) is a parallel movement performed while maintaining the posture of the displacement member 680. In the displacement from FIG. 76(b) to FIG. 76(c), the metal rod-shaped member 686 is rotationally displaced about the cylindrical portion 684, so that the displacement member 680 is tilted in the forward rotation direction.

At this time, the cylindrical portion 684 is displaced in the front-rear direction in such a manner that it enters and retreats into the recessed portion 7674a in order to maintain a distance from the metal bar-shaped member 686. That is, while the displacement member 680 is changing its posture, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 684 is not maintained, and the displacement member 680 is tilted and displaced while the cylindrical portion 684 remains displaced in the front-rear direction. be able to.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 77. In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the second elongated hole 673 for guiding the metal rod member 686 extends in the vertical direction, but the second elongated hole 8673 in the eighth embodiment extends in the vertical direction. It extends along an inclined direction. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

77(a) to 77(c) schematically show a second elongated hole 8673, a curved elongated hole 8674, a third elongated hole 8675, a first elongated hole upper part 8672a, and a first elongated hole lower part 8672b in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic side view of a second elongated hole 8673, a curved elongated hole 8674, a third elongated hole 8675, a first elongated hole upper part 8672a, and a first elongated hole lower part 8672b shown in FIG.

77(a) shows a state in which the metal rod-shaped member 686 and the cylindrical portion 684 are arranged at the upper end position of the displacement range, and in FIG. 77(b), the metal rod-shaped member 686 is curved with the second elongated hole 8673. 77(c) shows a state in which the metal rod-shaped member 686 is arranged at a connecting position with the curved long hole 8674 and the third long hole 8675. Ru.

The first elongated hole upper part 8672a and the second elongated hole 8673 extend in a downwardly inclined direction toward the rear at an inclination angle of about 70 degrees with respect to the front-rear direction. A curved elongated hole 8674 is connected to the lower end of the second elongated hole 8673.

The curved elongated hole 8674 is curved along an arc centered on the central axis J81 of the cylindrical portion 684 in a state where the cylindrical portion 684 is arranged at a connecting position between the first elongated hole upper portion 8672a and the first elongated hole lower portion 8672b. Extended in shape.

The upper end of the third elongated hole 8675 is connected to the lower end of the curved elongated hole 8674. The first elongated hole lower part 8672b and the third elongated hole 8675, which are connected to the lower end of the first elongated hole upper part 8672a, extend forward in a downwardly inclined direction at an inclination angle of about 70 degrees with respect to the front-rear direction. be done.

The metal rod-shaped member 686 is inserted into the longitudinal hole 636 of the elevating plate member 630, and its vertical position changes as the elevating plate member 630 moves in the vertical direction. The displacement of the displacement member 680 due to the change in the arrangement of the metal rod-shaped member 686 will be explained.

The displacement from FIG. 77(a) to FIG. 77(b) is a parallel movement performed while maintaining the posture of the displacement member 680. At this time, the displacement direction of the displacement member 680 is not a vertical direction, but a direction having a longitudinal component. From the perspective of the player, the displacement member 680 appears to be retreating backwards while being lowered, so as the light emitting action producing unit 700 descends and appears, the size of the light emitting action producing unit 700 becomes smaller. You can make it look like you are (far away).

In the displacement from FIG. 77(b) to FIG. 77(c), the metal rod-shaped member 686 is rotationally displaced about the cylindrical portion 684, so that the displacement member 680 is tilted in the forward rotation direction. Accordingly, the visible surface of the light emitting operation production unit 700 can be switched. In this embodiment, since the tilt angle is larger than that in the second embodiment, the player can see the back side of the rotating member 810 (see FIG. 51).

At this time, the cylindrical portion 684 is displaced in the front-rear direction in such a manner that it enters and retreats into the recessed portion 7674a in order to maintain a distance from the metal bar-shaped member 686. That is, while the displacement member 680 is changing its posture, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 684 is not maintained, and the displacement member 680 is tilted and displaced while the cylindrical portion 684 remains displaced in the front-rear direction. be able to.

When the metal rod member 686 is further displaced downward from the state shown in FIG. 77(c), the displacement member 680 is displaced forward along the third elongated hole 8675. Therefore, it can appear to the player that the displacement member 680 is lowering and protruding forward.
At this time, since it is once displaced backward along the second elongated hole 8673, the forward protrusion can be emphasized.

In this embodiment, the displacement resistance of the cylindrical portion 684 is configured to increase when the cylindrical portion 684 is disposed at the connection position between the first elongated hole upper portion 8672a and the first elongated hole lower portion 8672b. . That is, in FIG. 77(b), the inner surface of the first elongated hole lower part 8672b that comes into contact with the rear side part of the cylindrical part 684 is caused by the friction of other parts of the first elongated hole lower part 8672b and the inner surface of the first elongated hole upper part 8672a. It is made of a material with a large coefficient of friction compared to the coefficient of friction.

This makes it possible to easily maintain the cylindrical portion 684 at the connecting position between the first elongated hole upper portion 8672a and the first elongated hole lower portion 8672b until the metal rod member 686 reaches the terminal position of the curved elongated hole 8674. .

Note that the method for maintaining the cylindrical portion 684 at the connecting position between the first elongated hole upper portion 8672a and the first elongated hole lower portion 8672b is not limited to using a material with a large coefficient of friction, and various methods may be used. Illustrated. For example, the shape of the inner surface of the first elongated hole upper portion 8672a or the first elongated hole lower portion 8672b may be formed from a shape with a large friction coefficient (for example, a textured shape).

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 78. In the second embodiment, the long hole 764a through which the fastening portion 682 is inserted is long in the left-right direction and short in the vertical direction. However, the large-diameter hole 9764a in the ninth embodiment has a cylindrical shape It is a circular hole having an inner diameter sufficiently larger than the outer diameter of the portion 689b1. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

78(a) and 78(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the displacement member 9680 and the light emitting operation producing unit 9700 in the ninth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the LXXVIIIa-LXXVIIIa line in FIG. 37.

In FIG. 78(a), the fastening portion 682 faces approximately in the front-rear direction (a direction that is tilted upward by 3 degrees toward the front), and the upper edge of the large diameter hole 9764a abuts and is supported by the cylindrical portion 689b1. The condition is illustrated. In FIG. 78(b), the posture of the displacement member 9680 is switched to a posture in which the fastening portion 682 faces downward, and a ring member 9689b with a flange and a light emitting operation producing unit 9700 are attached to the head of the fastening screw B91 fastened to the fastening portion 682. The state in which it is supported is shown in the figure.

In this embodiment, the plate-shaped ring member 689a sandwiching the large-diameter hole 9764a from both sides and the flanged ring member 9689b differ in the manner of contact with the light emitting operation production unit 9700.
That is, the plate-like ring member 689a contacts the light emitting operation production unit 9700 at the plate plane part. On the other hand, the flange ring member 9689b has an inclined surface portion 9689b2 formed over 360 degrees from the tip of the flange portion toward the cylindrical portion 689b1 side, and is formed over 360 degrees at the end of the large diameter hole 9764a. The surface contacts the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1.

In the state shown in FIG. 78(a) (corresponding to the retracted state or intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600), the fastening portion 682 is tilted backward, so the light emitting operation production unit 9700 cannot move toward the rear. and comes into contact with the plate-shaped ring member 989a.

Since this contact is on a plane, the sliding friction force against the rotational displacement of the light emitting operation production unit 9700 about the fastening portion 682 is reduced, and at least between the large diameter hole 9764a and the cylindrical portion 689b1. The light emitting operation production unit 9700 can be displaced by the gap. Therefore, rotational displacement of the light emitting operation producing unit 9700 can be allowed.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 78(b) (corresponding to the extended state of the internal operation unit 600), the tip of the fastening portion 682 is directed downward, so that the light emitting operation production unit 9700 sinks downward, and the flange is attached. It comes into contact with the ring member 9689b.

This contact is between the inclined surface portion 9689b2 formed over 360 degrees and the chamfered slope portion 9764a1 formed over 360 degrees, so the center of the large diameter hole 9764a aligns with the center of the fastening portion 682. The light emitting operation production unit 9700 is arranged as shown in FIG. By filling the space, the displacement of the light emitting operation production unit 9700 can be restricted (regulated).

Since the weight of the light emitting action production unit 9700 acts in the direction in which the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1 is pressed against the inclined surface portion 9689b2, the degree of restriction on the displacement of the light emitting action production unit 9700 can be strengthened by utilizing gravity.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the degree of permissible (limited) displacement of the light emitting operation production unit 9700 can be switched in accordance with a change in the posture of the displacement member 9680. Therefore, even if the large-diameter hole 9764a, which is a through-hole with a simple circular cross section, is adopted, the light emitting operation production unit 9700 will move forward and backward when the displacement member 9680 is tilted and displaced (see FIG. 78(b)). It is possible to prevent positional displacement in both the direction and the left and right directions.

Thereby, it is possible to prevent the position of the light emitting action production unit 9700 from shifting when the rotating member 810 (see FIG. 62) rotates at high speed, so that afterimage display by the rotating member 810 can be advantageously performed.

Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 79. In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the detection sensor 832 detects that the rotation member 810 is in the proper posture, thereby facilitating the tilting displacement of the rotation performance device 800 in the front and rear direction. The rotating member 810 is urged to a proper posture by the posture detection means 10830. Incidentally, the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

79(a) and 79(b) are front views of the rotating member 810 and the attitude detecting means 10830 in the tenth embodiment. 79(a) and 79(b), the internal operating unit 600 is shown in an extended position, the outer diameter of the rotating member 810 is shown in imaginary lines, and a fixed Gear 10815 is illustrated in solid lines. Further, in FIG. 79(b), the proper posture of the rotating member 810 is illustrated, and in FIG. 79(a), the rotating member 810 is angularly shifted from the proper posture (displaced in the rotational direction by about 15 degrees around the rotation axis RJ1). 79(b), and the direction of rotation of each gear 10815, 10821, 10831 toward the state shown in FIG. 79(b) is shown by an arrow.

As shown in FIGS. 79(a) and 79(b), in the rotating member 810, the driving force of a drive gear 10821 fixed to the drive shaft of a drive motor 820 is transmitted to a fixed gear 10815 through meshing of the gears. The fixed gear 10815 is in mesh with the detection gear 10831 of the attitude detection means 10830.

The detection gear 10831 includes a weight portion 10831a formed in a compressed manner over an angular range of 180 degrees around the rotation axis. In this embodiment, the weight portion 10831a is a metal member that is fitted into the detection gear 10831, but it may be integrally formed from a resin material.

According to this configuration, the center of gravity of the detection gear 10831 is arranged on the center side of the weight portion 10831a (on the line connecting the rotation axis and the center of the arc), so that the rotation of the rotating member 810 is in a different posture from the proper posture. Even if the rotation member 810 is stopped in the state shown in FIG. 79(a), the detection gear 10831 is biased by gravity, so that the rotary member 810 can be rotated until the rotation member 810 assumes a proper posture and returned to its proper posture.

Therefore, even if it is not possible to accurately stop the rotating member 810 in the proper posture as the stopping posture of the drive motor 820 after performing the rotational light emitting effect in the extended state of the internal operation unit 600 (see FIG. 61), Since the rotating member 810 can then be returned to its proper attitude, the accuracy of detecting the attitude of the rotating member 810 can be reduced. Thereby, product costs can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the rotation axis RJ1 of the internal operation unit 600 in the intermediate state and the extended state does not face in the vertical direction but in the forward tilting direction (see FIGS. 68 and 69). Therefore, the force due to gravity using the weight portion 10831a can be generated regardless of the posture of the rotating member 810 in the forward tilt direction.

As a result, not only the movement mode in which the rotation member 810 is set in the proper posture in the extended state of the internal operation unit 600 and then the rotation direction device 800 changes its posture in the rising direction, but also the movement mode in which the rotation direction device 800 changes its posture in the rising direction, as well as during the rising operation of the rotation direction device 800, It is possible to realize a movement mode in which the rotating member 810 is moved while returning it to its proper posture.

In addition, when the rotation performance device 800 rises from the posture shown in FIG. 79(a) (see the time series of FIGS. 67 to 69), the rotation member 810 receives air resistance on the back side and returns to the proper posture. can be done. That is, in this embodiment, since the rotating member 810 is shaped to be susceptible to air resistance from the lateral side surface, it is possible to easily return the rotating member 810 to the proper posture when standing up.

Note that the lateral side surface of the rotating member 810 may be formed into a narrow shape that is less susceptible to air resistance. In this case, the operational resistance of the rotational light emitting effect of the rotating member 810 can be reduced.
The action of returning the rotating member 810 to the proper posture can be produced by the weight portion 10831a.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is readily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred.

In each of the embodiments described above, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the upper connecting member 270 connecting the center frame 86 and the base plate 60 is provided with the projecting parts 272 to 277 that distribute the flow paths of the balls. It is not limited to this.

For example, the portion that distributes the flow paths of the balls may be formed as a recessed portion instead of protruding. Further, a channel for guiding the ball may be formed through the recess so that the ball can be guided to another location in the gaming area.

For example, a member connecting the center frame 86 and the base plate 60 is disposed below the center frame 86, and a receiving portion guides the ball to any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 140. It may be configured to include. Further, for example, the member connecting the center frame 86 and the base plate 60 may be configured so that the through gate 67 is disposed therein.

Further, although the upper connecting member 270 is extended along the surface side of the base plate 60 and forms a game area between it and the glass unit 16, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front frame 14 may be extended along the back side of the glass unit 16 in the closed state, and a gaming area may be formed between it and the base plate 60. In this case, a projecting portion may be formed that projects toward the base plate 60 to distribute the falling paths of the balls.

In this case, the fastening position with the base plate 60 is important, but for example, if the fastening position is placed near the inner rail 61 in a place where it is unlikely to affect the flow of the ball (lower left of the return ball prevention member 68, etc.) , it is possible to secure a sufficiently large gaming area.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the upper connecting member 270 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape of the center frame 86 is such that the left side is separated from the inner rail 61 to form a large space between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 in order to ensure a downward flow path for the ball, while the right side is spaced apart from the inner rail 61 to ensure a flow path for the ball. (in the case of a typical right-handed game machine), it is fully assumed that the upper connecting member 270 will be formed only on the left side of the gaming area. It is also possible to design the left and right sides inverted.

Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which at least one of the base plate 60 or the center frame 86 is disposed on the back surface of the upper connecting member 270, and if the upper connecting member 270 has sufficient rigidity, the upper connecting member It is fully assumed that 270 has a portion on the back side where neither the base plate 60 nor the center frame 86 are arranged.

Further, the position where the center frame 86 constitutes the thin plate portion 242 and extends does not need to be at the center of the left and right sides. For example, they may be formed on both the left and right sides, or may be configured to protrude as thin plate portions 242 at multiple positions and engage with the base plate 60 (enter alternately with gaps).

Further, the thin plate portion 242 may be formed to a size that occupies most of the left and right width of the upper connecting member 270. In this case, the horizontal width in which the illumination board 251 can be arranged can be expanded.

Further, in the configuration in which the illumination board 251 is arranged on the back side of the thin plate portion 242 and is within the thickness dimension of the base plate 60, the arrangement of the illumination board 251 is not limited to the upper side of the center frame 86. For example, if a thin plate member such as the upper connecting member 270 that is connected to the front surface of the base board 60 and forms one side of the game area is formed on the left and right sides of the center frame 86, the illumination board is placed on the left and right sides of the center frame 86. 251 can be placed within the thickness of the base plate 60 by incorporating the illumination board 251 into the distribution unit 300 and the winning slot component 400 disposed below the base plate 60. It may be configured as follows.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the illumination board 251 is disposed on the back side of the upper connecting member 270 in a manner fixed to the base plate 60, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a structure similar to that of the light emitting unit 518 disposed in the back case 510 (a structure in which a logo corresponding to the model is formed and a light emitting effect is produced using the LEDs of the illumination board disposed inside) is provided on the upper part. It may be arranged behind the connecting member 270 to illuminate the upper connecting member 270 side, or the illumination board 251 may be omitted so that the light from the rotation effect device 800 passes through the upper connecting member 270. It may be possible to make it easier for players to pass through.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the light from the LED of the surrounding light emitting means 251c is irradiated onto the lower edge 272a of the first projecting portion 272, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the LED may be placed inside the first projecting portion 272 when viewed from the front. In this case, by providing a light diffusion process on the concave side of the first protruding part 272 or by providing a concave shape that tapers as it gets deeper in the concave direction, the inside of the first protruding part 272 is irradiated. It is possible to diffuse the light, reduce the visibility of the external shape of the LED, and improve the visibility of the light emitted from the LED.

In the second embodiment, the thin plate member 290 has a pattern, a figure, a character, or a character drawn in rich colors on the front surface of the plate, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least a portion of the thin plate member 290 may be subjected to light diffusion processing or texture processing, or may be shaped to fit into the recess of the first overhang 272 or the second overhang 273 (for example, a convex lens shape, etc.). , three-dimensional shape) may be formed on the surface of the thin plate member 290.

In the second embodiment, the holes 291a and 291b formed in the thin plate member 290 connect the protruding portion 244b protruding from the center frame 86 side and the protruding portion 279 protruding from the upper connecting member 270. Although a case has been described in which the displacement of the thin plate member 290 is suppressed by accepting the thin plate member 290, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the protruding portions inserted into the holes 291a and 291b of the thin plate member 290 may be configured to protrude from either the center frame 86 or the upper connecting member 270.
Further, the protruding portion 244b and the protruding portion 279 may not be inserted into different holes 291a and 291b, but may be inserted into a single hole formed in the thin plate member 290. This allows the thin plate member 290 to be positioned, and can also be used to connect the center frame 86 and the upper connecting member 270.

In the second embodiment, the protruding portion 244b protruding from the center frame 86 side is formed inside the recess on the back side of the second projecting portion 273, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protruding portion 244b may be provided on the back side of the plate-like portion 271 (so as to be opposed to the plate-like portion 271 in the front-rear direction). Note that when the protrusion 244b is formed inside the recess on the back side of the second protrusion 273, the second protrusion 273 functions as a cover for the protrusion 244b.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which a ball flowing down between the side wall portion 453a and the extension plate portion 455a flows into the first ball guide portion 457 with probability, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by leaving a space between the side wall portion 453a and the extended plate portion 455a and the ball guide portion 457, and disposing the distribution portion 983 in between, one of the two portions can be reliably guided by the ball. The liquid may flow into the portion 457. That is, the configuration may be such that the rate of balls entering the ball guide section 457 changes depending on which of the two postures of the distribution section 983 the ball is guided.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the inclined guide part 458 is inclined in one direction (lower right direction) and guides the ball directly to the second ball guide part 459, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. isn't it. For example, the inclined guide part 458 may extend from both the right and left sides of the ball guide part 457 in the opposite left and right directions, or, for example, the inclined guide part 458 may be configured to guide the ball in a meandering manner to the left and right. The ball may be configured to deviate from the second ball guide portion 459 with a certain probability at the turning position.

Furthermore, for example, the slope guide section 458 may be configured to change the probability of a ball reaching the second ball guide section 459 depending on whether it guides a single ball or when it guides a plurality of balls at the same time. good. For example, by displacing the arrangement of the second ball guide part 459 in a direction closer to the inclined guide part 458 in the left-right direction than the current position, the ball that has reached the second ball guide part 459 first may be able to catch the following ball before the ball reaches the second ball guide part 459 first. When the ball reaches the second ball guide section 459, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the ball is blocked by the previous ball and easily deviates from the second ball guide section 459.

Conversely, for example, by displacing the second ball guide section 459 in a direction that is slightly farther away from the inclined guide section 458 in the left-right direction than the current position, the ball is likely to reach the second ball guide section 459 first. If a trailing ball reaches the second ball guide section 459 before the ball that is about to fall from between it and the inclined guide section 458 has completely fallen, it becomes easier for the ball to roll on top of the previous ball and reach the second ball guide section 459. This configuration can be realized.

If the probability of a ball reaching the second ball guide section 459 is lower when a single ball is guided, multiple balls will enter the second ball guide section 459 and the number of prize balls paid out at once will be excessive. This situation can be avoided. On the other hand, if the probability of the balls reaching the second ball guide section 459 is higher when guiding a plurality of balls, then the attention paid to the vicinity of the inclined guide section 458 when a plurality of balls reach the inclined guide section 458 is lower. can be improved.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the inclined guide portion 458 is fixed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclined guide portion 458 may be configured to be able to move forward and backward. In this case, in the protruding state, the ball can flow into the second ball guide part 459 as in the second embodiment, while in the retracted state, the ball flowing to the right upstream of the first ball guide part 457 The rate of reaching the second ball guide portion 459 is reduced. Further, the inclined guide portion 458 is not limited to the case where it moves in and out, but may be configured to be able to tilt at regular intervals around a rotation axis extending in the front-rear direction so that the inclination angle changes.

In the second embodiment, the number of prize balls when the ball enters the second ball guide section 459 is greater than the number of prize balls when the ball enters the first ball guide section 457. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of prize balls may be the same, or the quality of the profit obtained by the player depending on the ball entered may be different.

For example, as a profit, you may be able to get the profit from drawing the symbols instead of paying out the prize ball, or you may be able to select (fluctuate) the number of rounds of the jackpot game by inserting balls before the start of the jackpot game. Alternatively, by entering the ball during the jackpot game, it may be possible to obtain a profit by changing (increasing) the winning probability of the symbols after the jackpot game. These benefits can be arbitrarily set in the first ball guide section 457 and the second ball guide section 459.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the slope of the ceiling plate portion 455 is substantially constant, but the slope is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclination angle of the ceiling plate portion 455 may be a large angle with respect to the horizontal on the upstream side from an intermediate position, and may be a small angle with respect to the horizontal on the downstream side from the same intermediate position. In this case, the rolling speed of the ball tends to change depending on whether the ball lands on the ceiling plate section 455 upstream of the intermediate position or on the downstream side of the intermediate position. It is easy to predict the trajectory of the ball. That is, it is possible to improve attention to the midway position of the ceiling plate portion 455.

Further, a plurality of protrusions may be formed on the upper surface of the ceiling plate portion 455 to reduce the rolling speed of the ball. In this case, the protrusions do not need to be formed over the entire horizontal width of the ceiling plate portion 455, but may be formed over a partial range, similar to the change in inclination.

Further, the plurality of deceleration protrusions are not limited to the upper surface of the ceiling plate portion 455. For example, it may be provided protruding from the resin wall forming the guide channel that guides the ball downward toward the first ball guide section 457 toward the guide channel side, or it may be provided on the lower surface side of the bulge section 456 or from the inclined guide section 458. It may be provided so as to protrude from the upper surface side of the ball toward the downward flow path of the ball.

Further, the direction in which the protrusions are formed is not limited to the direction intersecting the front-rear direction. For example, a protrusion may be provided protruding from the main body plate part 451 to the front side, or a front plate member formed in a flat plate shape along a plane parallel to the main body plate part 451 is disposed on the front side of the main body plate part 451. When the ball is provided to form a downward flow path for the ball between the front plate member and the main body plate portion 451, a protrusion may be provided to protrude from the front plate member to the back side.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball that has fallen into the first ball guide section 457 is smoothly guided to the general winning hole 63, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the internal shape of the first ball guide part 457 is formed into a mortar shape and the opening at the lower end is formed with a size slightly larger than the diameter of the ball, the ball passes through the first ball guide part 457. You can extend the time it takes.

In this case, if a trailing ball reaches the first ball guide part 457 while the ball remains in the first ball guide part 457, the ball can be easily guided toward the inclined guide part 458, and the second ball guide part 457 The probability of the ball hitting the ball can be increased. Therefore, the configuration can be such that a situation in which a ball is guided to the second guide part 459 side occurs without waiting for the rare situation in which a plurality of balls reach the first ball guide part 457 in a row.

Moreover, as a method other than devising the shape of the first ball guide portion 457, a movable member that is displaced by the weight of the ball may be provided. The movable member is configured to block the ball from entering the first ball guide section 457 for a predetermined period after the ball enters the first ball guide section 457, and moves the ball that has reached the movable member to the inclined guide section 458 side. configured to guide you. Thereby, it is possible to improve the probability that the ball will reach the second ball guide section 459 within a predetermined period after the previous ball passes through the first ball guide section 457.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the left component 450 is formed from a fixed resin member, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the falling path of the ball may be changed by an electric movable accessory. In this case, the inclined guide portion 458 may be configured to be able to move forward and backward. That is, when the ball is projected forward, the ball is guided toward the second ball guide section 459, but when it is retracted backward, the ball may not be guided toward the second ball guide section 459, but may fall. .

Further, for example, a plate-like member disposed so as to close the first ball guide portion 457 may be disposed so as to be retractable in the front and back directions. In other words, when the plate-shaped member protrudes forward, the ball that reaches the plate-shaped member is guided toward the inclined guide part 458 and easily enters the second ball guide part 459, but if the plate-shaped member is pushed backward. In the retracted state, the ball can be configured to easily fall into the first ball guide section 457.

Further, for example, the inclined plate portion 434 may be configured to operate so that the inclined direction is reversed left and right in synchronization with the opening and closing of the opening/closing plate 65b. When the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state, by making the slope direction of the slope plate part 434 downward slope toward the left and right inwards, the ball that deviates from the second ball guide part 459 to the left and right inside, and the ceiling plate part 455 A configuration may be adopted in which the balls that have fallen between the curved protrusion 414 and the opening/closing plate 65b are caused to flow into the opening/closing plate 65b side. Thereby, the ball can be configured to be guided toward the opening/closing plate 65b from a wide range.

Incidentally, the slope of the slope plate portion 434 may be configured to slope downward to the left and right inside, regardless of the presence or absence of electric power. Even in this case, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the inclined plate part 434 when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state still ends up at the outlet 71, so that the gameplay can be maintained.

In the second embodiment, the ball can be ejected from the gaming area through the out port 415, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vertical plate portion 433 may be omitted and the out port 415 may be omitted so that the ball passing through the left component 450 flows down toward the opening/closing plate 65b. Thereby, variations in the flow path of the ball toward the opening/closing plate 65b can be increased.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the opening/closing plate 65b is formed of a plate member having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front and rotationally displaced by a rotation axis extending left and right along the lower edge, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, it may be configured to have a pentagonal shape (similar to a home base) when viewed from the front by forming the upper edge portion to be inclined upward toward the left and right center portions when viewed from the front. Thereby, when the ball contacts the upper edge, the ball can easily flow outward to the left and right along the shape of the upper edge.

Note that an adjustment means may be provided for adjusting the downward flow mode of the ball that is flown to the left and right outer sides at the upper edge of the opening/closing plate 65b. For example, an extending plate extending downward from the left and right inner tips of the inclined plate part 434 in parallel with the vertical plate part 433, and a ball passage hole formed in the extending plate to penetrate in the left and right direction and having a size that allows the ball to pass through. It is also possible to provide the following.

For example, the arrangement of the ball passage hole may be set at a position that is shifted from the position of the ball that has flown to the left and right outside on the upper edge 65b of the opening and closing plate 65b when the opening and closing plate 65b is open (shifted upward), and the opening and closing plate 65b may be designed at a position that allows the passage of a ball that has flown to the left and right outside of the upper edge 65b of the opening/closing plate 65b when the opening/closing plate 65b is in a state between the open state and the closed state.

In this case, when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state, the extension plate and the ball passing hole prevent the ball from leaking from side to side by keeping the ball above the opening/closing plate 65b, while in the middle of closing, the opening/closing plate 65b prevents the ball from flowing left or right. It can be configured so that it can be spilled.

In addition, in order to maintain the posture of the opening/closing plate 65b in the open state, a protruding portion that protrudes from the back side of the main body plate portion 431 of the covering member 430 toward the back side is provided on the covering member 430 at a position where it can be supported. It may be formed into Further, the protruding portion may abut the opening/closing plate 65b in the tilting direction at both ends of the opening/closing plate 65b in the left and right width direction. In this case, it becomes easier to maintain the open position of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In the second embodiment described above, when the distribution unit 300 passes through the discharge opening 325 after the ball guided forward by the direction switching unit 317 is switched in the left-right direction above the detection device SE3. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the winning opening 323 may be used as an ejection opening to eject the balls. In this case, a through-hole large enough to allow a ball to fall may be formed in the lower surface of the direction switching unit 317, and the configuration may be such that the ball that falls into the through-hole is detected by the detection device SE3. Moreover, as a similar configuration, the arrangement of the discharge opening and the detection device SE3 may be reversed.

Alternatively, a similar configuration may be adopted in which the flow path switching direction by the direction switching unit 317 is set to the rear side instead of the front side, or the ball passes forward from above the winning opening 323 to the base board. It may also be configured such that it is discharged to the front side of the device 60.

In this case, since it is not necessary to arrange the discharge opening 325 on the left and right sides of the detection device SE3, it is possible to narrow the distance between the left and right pair of detection devices SE3, and to reduce the space on the left and right sides of the detection device SE3. It can be effectively used for planting space, etc.

Further, these configurations do not need to be the same around the left and right detection devices SE3, and separate configurations for the left and right may be adopted. For example, during a jackpot game, a configuration may be adopted in which a ball passing forward from above the winning opening 323 is picked up by the opening/closing plate 65b on either side of the left or right side. In the case where the ball is guided to the side where the ball passes forward from above, and in the reverse case, the ball that enters the first prize opening 64 returns to the front side of the base plate 60 and enters the opening/closing plate 65b. The probability of being picked up changes. Therefore, it is possible to improve attention to the ball that has entered the first winning hole 64.

In the second embodiment, the light emitting action production unit 700 is retracted above the center frame 86, and in the extended state, the light emitting action production unit 700 is arranged in front of the third symbol display device 81. , but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emitting action producing unit 700 may be configured to be vertically long and may be configured to be retracted to the left and right sides of the center frame 86.

In addition, in imitation of the structure that projects forward from the upper edge of the front frame 14, a structure that projects forward from the left and right edges of the front frame 14 is adopted, and the projecting portion produces a light emitting action. The unit 700 may be configured to be evacuated. In this case, it can be configured such that it is retracted to the front side of both the left and right edges, and the light emitting operation production unit 700 is arranged in the front side of the third symbol display device 81 while being retracted in the extended state.

In the second embodiment, the cylindrical member 695 has been described as a member that comes into contact with the rotating member 810, but the material of the cylindrical member 695 is not limited at all. For example, it may be made of a hard resin material that does not deform in shape under the load applied by the rotating member 810. In this case, excessive displacement of the rotating member 810 can be suppressed.

Further, it may be formed from a soft resin material that can be deformed (deformed by being crushed in the radial direction) even under the load applied by the rotating member 810. In this case, the cylindrical member 695 functions as a buffer material, making it easier to avoid damage to the rotating member 810.

In the second embodiment, the figures and patterns formed on the decorative plate 811 are designed so that they can be seen integrally with the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall part 511 in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the light-emitting operation producing unit 700 is in a tilted position tilting to the left or right in a specific vertical arrangement, the decorative plate 811 is designed so that it is visible integrally with the figure or pattern formed on the bottom wall portion 511. The shapes and patterns to be formed may be designed. In this case, by designing the contents to be visually recognized differently depending on whether the light emitting operation production unit 700 is tilted to the left or the right, the production effects of the bottom wall portion 511 and the decorative plate 811 can be improved. can be improved.

In the second embodiment, by tilting the light emitting action producing unit 700 while moving up and down, the outer shape of the light emitting action producing unit 700 changes when viewed from the front, and the vertical position of the light emitting action producing unit 700 changes. Although the case where the two occur simultaneously has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the configuration may be such that the external shape of the light emitting action producing unit 700 when viewed from the front changes while the vertical arrangement of the light emitting action producing unit 700 is maintained. Also in the second embodiment, for example, when the light emitting action production unit 700 is in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, the rotating member 810 is rotated by a predetermined angle about the rotation axis RJ1, so that the projection direction of the rotating member 810 changes. Therefore, the outer shape of the rotating member 810 when viewed from the front can be changed.

In the second embodiment, the longitudinal displacement member 653 that creates resistance to the vertical displacement of the elevating plate member 630 is configured as a member that is displaced in the longitudinal direction by the solenoid 651, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a rotating arm that is displaced by the driving force of a drive motor can be moved toward or away from the abutting plate 638, and may generate a frictional force with the abutting plate 638 or cause the arm to move. Displacement resistance of the elevating plate member 630 may be generated by blocking the direction.

In the second embodiment, the case is explained in which the displacement direction of the longitudinal displacement member 653 is designed in a direction perpendicular to the displacement direction of the elevating plate member 630 (a direction on a plane perpendicular to the moving direction of the elevating plate member 630). However, it is not necessarily limited to this. That is, the angle formed by the displacement direction of the longitudinal displacement member 653 and the displacement direction (vertical direction) of the elevating plate member 630 does not have to be a right angle.

For example, if the displacement direction of the longitudinal displacement member 653 is designed to be upwardly inclined toward the front, when the longitudinal displacement member 653 is displaced forward, if the elevating plate member 630 is displaced downward, In addition to sliding friction, by applying an upward load, it is possible to shorten the time it takes for the elevating plate member 630 to stop. On the other hand, if the elevating plate member 630 is displaced upward, in addition to the sliding friction, by applying an upward load, the kinetic energy of the elevating plate member 630 can be reduced while avoiding sudden deceleration of the elevating plate member 630. Can be done.

In addition, if the displacement direction of the longitudinal displacement member 653 is designed to be inclined downward toward the front, when the longitudinal displacement member 653 is displaced forward, if the elevating plate member 630 is displaced upward, the sliding In addition to dynamic friction, applying a downward load can shorten the time it takes for the elevating plate member 630 to stop. On the other hand, if the elevating plate member 630 is displaced downward, in addition to the sliding friction, by applying a downward load, the kinetic energy of the elevating plate member 630 can be reduced while avoiding sudden deceleration of the elevating plate member 630. Can be done.

In the second embodiment, the overlapping width of the abutted plate 638 and the longitudinally displacing member 653 in the vertical direction is approximately the same whether the internal operating unit 600 is in the retracted state or in the extended state. However, it is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653 may be formed with an inclined surface that slopes backward as it goes upward. In this case, if the longitudinal displacement member 653 is displaced forward when the abutted plate 638 is displaced downward, a load is generated in a direction that picks up the abutted plate 638 from the front end surface of the longitudinal displacement member 653. Therefore, the effect of braking the elevating plate member 630 can be strengthened.

Further, for example, the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653 may be formed with an inclined surface that slopes rearward toward the bottom. In this case, if the longitudinal displacement member 653 is displaced forward when the abutted plate 638 is displaced upward, a load is applied in a direction that presses the abutted plate 638 downward from the front end surface of the longitudinal displacement member 653. Therefore, the effect of braking the elevating plate member 630 can be strengthened.

Further, for example, the shape of the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653 is such that an inclined surface that slopes backward as it goes upward from the lower end position and an inclined surface that slopes backward as it goes downward from the upper end position are arranged at a predetermined intermediate position. Correspondingly, a protruding portion extending rearward may be formed at an intermediate position on the rear end surface of the abutted plate 638.

In this case, when the longitudinally displacing member 653 is displaced forward with the abutted plate 638 disposed on the front side of the longitudinally displacing member 653, the abutted plate 638 comes into contact with a predetermined intermediate position on the front end surface of the longitudinally displacing member 653. The vertical position of the elevating plate member 630 can be stabilized in such a manner that the overhanging portion of the plate 638 is accommodated.

In this case, the number of portions where the downwardly inclined backwardly inclined surface and the upwardly inclined backwardly inclined surface are combined is not limited in the front end surface of the longitudinal displacement member 653. For example, the shape may include a plurality of parts to be combined (for example, a saw blade shape or a jagged shape). In this case, the vertical position of the elevating plate member 630 can be stabilized at a plurality of positions.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the pair of left and right elevating plate members 630 are configured to be able to be vertically shifted, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the left and right elevating plate members 630 are fastened and fixed to the light emitting operation production unit 700, and vertical positional deviation of the pair of left and right elevating plate members 630 is not allowed. In this case, it is sufficient to configure the resistance generating device 650 for generating displacement resistance of the elevating plate member 630 only on the left and right sides.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since vertical positional displacement of the pair of left and right lifting plate members 630 is allowed, it is preferable to arrange the resistance generating devices 650 on both the left and right sides. Using this configuration, control may be performed to shift the excitation timing of the left and right solenoids 651.

For example, when displacing the internal operation unit 600 downward from the retracted state to the intermediate state, the drive control of the drive motor 648 is performed with the pair of left and right solenoids 651 energized and the longitudinal displacement member 653 disposed at the rear. When the same drive control as above is executed with the left solenoid 651 energized and the right solenoid 651 de-energized, the light emitting operation production unit 700 is placed in an inclined position with the left side facing downward relative to the right side. It is possible to perform a performance movement like this.

This performance operation can be executed without applying a load to the internal operation unit 600 until the internal operation unit 600 reaches the operational error limit state. Furthermore, instead of increasing the number of drive patterns of the drive motor 648 for this production operation, the drive pattern of the drive motor 648 used for the downward displacement of the internal operation unit 600 is used, and the excitation of the solenoid 651 is changed to a different excitation pattern. By executing this, the performance action is executed. Therefore, the drive pattern required of the drive motor 648 can be reduced.

Further, the timing at which the right solenoid 651 is de-energized is not limited to when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state. For example, when the internal operating unit 600 is in the retracted state, the left and right solenoids 651 may be energized, and the right solenoid 651 may be de-energized while the internal operating unit 600 is in the intermediate state from the retracted state. In this case, the downward displacement of the right-side lifting plate member 630 can be delayed by the frictional force, and a performance operation is performed in which the light-emitting operation production unit 700 takes an inclined posture with the left side disposed downward relative to the right side. Can be done.

Although an example from the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 has been described as a production operation, it is naturally assumed that the vertical direction is reversed. That is, the excitation pattern of the pair of left and right solenoids 651 described above may be executed in accordance with the displacement of the internal operation unit 600 from the extended state.

In the second embodiment, in the extended state of the internal operation unit 600, the rotation of the rotation effect device 800 is controlled while the upward displacement of the abutted plate 638 of the elevating plate member 630 is regulated by the longitudinal displacement member 653. Although the case where the light emitting effect is executed has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, as a type of rotating light emitting effect executed with the internal operation unit 600 in an extended state, there is a lottery losing effect on both the left and right sides, which is different from the effect for announcing a jackpot that is executed with the rotating shaft RJ1 fixed. Alternatively, the rotational light emitting effect of the rotational effect device 800 may be executed while the left and right solenoids 651 are energized.

In this case, on the side where the solenoid 651 is energized, the longitudinal displacement member 653 is retracted from the moving path of the abutted plate 638, so the centrifugal force of the rotation of the rotating member 810 causes the light emitting operation producing unit 700 and the elevating plate member 638 to move. Even if there is an upward displacement, the longitudinal displacement member 653 does not have the effect of suppressing the upward displacement.

Therefore, the rotation axis RJ1 of the rotation member 810 is easily displaced. As a result, it is possible to perform a motion effect in which the rotating light emitting effect of the rotating member 810 is executed without the rotation axis RJ1 being fixed, so that the rotational speed of the rotating member 810 and the light emitted from the rotating member 810 in the rotating light emitting effect can be changed. Although the light emission pattern is the same, the visually recognized figure can be made different by the afterimage display of the rotating member 810.

Note that in order to create a state in which the rotating shaft RJ1 is not fixed, the solenoids 651 on both the left and right sides may be energized, or the solenoids 651 on one side of the left and right sides may be energized; By de-energizing the solenoid 651 on the other side, it is possible to restrict vertical displacement of the ascending plate member 630 on the de-energized side. It is possible to suppress upward displacement, and damage to the light emitting operation producing unit 700 and the elevating plate member 630 can be avoided.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the transmission efficiency changes as the rack gear portion 634 approaches and moves away from the transmission gear 649, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the drive motor 648 and the drive shaft may be configured to be movable back and forth, and the transmission gear 649 may be movable back and forth with respect to the rack gear portion 634.

Further, the transmission gear 649 may be formed such that the diameter length of the transmission gear 649 changes in the axial direction. In this case, the transmission efficiency can be changed by displacing the transmission gear 649 or the elevating plate member 630 in the drive shaft direction.

Although the displacement of the rack gear part 634 in a state where the meshing between the rack gear part 634 and the transmission gear 649 is maintained has been described, the displacement is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rack gear portion 634 may be configured to be separated from the transmission gear 649 to the extent that it disengages from the transmission gear 649. In this case, even if the drive motor 648 runs out of control, the rack gear part 634 is configured to separate from the transmission gear 649 before an overload occurs on the rack gear part 634, thereby causing damage to the rack gear part 634 and the transmission gear 649. can be avoided.

In the second embodiment, the rack gear section 634 is pressed against the transmission gear 649 by the weight of the elevating plate member 630, and the meshing state of the gears is optimized. Although the case where the user is pushed away from 649 has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, regardless of the direction of displacement of the rack gear portion 634, it may be configured to be displaced in both directions by the driving force of the solenoid 651. Further, the direction in which the driving force of the solenoid 651 is generated may be reversed. Further, the transmission gear 649 or the drive motor 648 may be configured to be displaceable in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the drive shaft.

In the second embodiment, regarding the thickness of the cylindrical portion 684 and the metal rod member 686 guided to the long holes 672 to 674, the cylindrical portion is Although the case where the metal rod member 684 is thicker than the metal rod member 686 has been described, the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, even if the interior is closed rather than hollow, the cylindrical portion 684 may be thicker than the metal bar member 686, or the metal rod member 686 may be thicker than the cylindrical portion 684. It may be formed thickly.

By forming the metal rod-shaped member 686 (front member) thick, a large area can withstand the load generated at a position far from the central axis J1 when the light emitting action production unit 700 is tilted. As a result, the durability of the metal rod-shaped member 686 can be improved, so that, for example, the durability when the same member is formed from a resin material can be improved.

Moreover, the cylindrical portion 684 and the metal rod-shaped member 686 may be formed with the same thickness. In this case, the clearances set for the long holes 672 to 674 can be designed with similar values, and the degree of wear of the long holes 672 to 674 can be made uniform.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the pair of upper and lower elongated holes 612 are designed to have the same clearance in the front and rear direction with the fastening parts 632 and 633 of the elevating plate member 630, but this is not necessarily the case. do not have. For example, the clearance between the lower elongated hole 612 and the lower fastening portion 633 of the elevating plate member 630 is formed to be larger than the clearance between the upper elongated hole 612 and the upper fastening portion 632 of the elevating plate member 630. It's okay. In this case, since the permissible width in which the lower part of the elevating plate member 630 is displaced in the longitudinal direction can be increased, the meshing state between the rack gear portion 634 and the transmission gear 649 can be changed by the longitudinal displacement of the elevating plate member 630. can be made easier.

In the second embodiment, the second elongated hole 673 is formed as a vertically extending elongated hole, but the second elongated hole 673 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second elongated hole 673 connected to the curved elongated hole 674 may be configured to extend downwardly and inclined toward the front so that the side closer to the curved elongated hole 674 is disposed further forward. good. In this case, while the metal rod member 686 is guided in the second elongated hole 673, the metal rod member 686 can be displaced in the front-rear direction.

That is, in a state before the internal operation unit 600 reaches the intermediate state from the retracted state, it is possible to realize an action of gradually changing the attitude of the light emitting action producing unit 700 in the tilting direction.

Note that the slope of the second elongated hole 673 does not need to be formed from the upper end, but may be formed as a long elongated hole in the vertical direction from the upper end to the middle, and then extend in a downwardly inclined direction from the middle. It may be configured. In this case, when the elevating plate member 630 is started from the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the posture of the light emitting action production unit 700 can be maintained, so that the base plate 60 and the light emitting action production unit 700 will not collide. can be avoided.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the center of gravity G1 of the light emitting action production unit 700 is disposed between the cylindrical portion 684 and the metal rod member 686, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the center of gravity G1 may be located on the opposite side of the cylindrical portion 684 with respect to the metal bar-shaped member 686, or may be located on the opposite side of the metal bar-shaped member 686 with respect to the cylindrical portion 684.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the shaped portion supporting the cylindrical portion 684 is formed of a long hole, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the cylindrical portion 684 may be configured to be rotatable about a fixed axis.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement members 680 supporting the light emitting action production unit 700 are disposed on both the left and right sides of the light emitting action production unit 700 and are displaced in the vertical direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, the light emitting action producing unit 700 may be configured to be displaced in the front-rear direction or in a direction that is a combination of the front-rear direction and the up-down direction, or the displacement member 680 may be disposed on either side of the light emitting action producing unit 700. Alternatively, the displacement members 680 may be arranged above and below the light emitting operation production unit 700 and may be configured to be displaced in the left-right direction or the front-back direction.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotating effect device 800 that rotates is employed as the movable member disposed in the light emitting action effect unit 700, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a movable member that reciprocates in a linear direction may be employed, or a movable member that vibrates may be employed.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the support hole 764b is disposed on the lower side of the two upper and lower connected holes 764, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the support hole 764b may be provided on the upper side, or the support hole 764b may be provided on both the upper and lower sides.

In the case where the upper and lower connected holes 764 on the right side are both support holes 764b and the upper and lower connected holes 764 on the left side are both elongated holes 764a, only the displacement in the horizontal direction of the light emitting operation production unit 700 with respect to the displacement member 680 is caused. This is allowed, and it is possible to suppress a change in posture in the direction of rotation of the light emitting operation production unit 700 about the fastening portion 682.

Further, the present invention is not limited to the elongated hole 764a, and a through hole having a larger clearance than the support hole 764b can be arbitrarily designed. For example, it may be formed as a perfectly circular through hole having an inner diameter sufficiently larger than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 684. Further, for example, as the support hole 764b, an elongated hole whose length in the longitudinal direction is shorter than the elongated hole 764a may be adopted. In this case, the light emitting action producing unit 700 can perform horizontal movements in the left and right directions.

In addition, in setting the shape of the left and right connected holes 764, if both the diagonally connected holes 764 are set as support holes 764b, the misalignment of the light emitting operation production unit 700 in the left and right direction can also be avoided with the fastening portion 682 as the axis. Posture changes in the rotational direction are also suppressed. Therefore, it is good if it is formed with sufficient strength and the operation is precisely controlled to prevent misalignment, but if this is not the case, a slight malfunction may lead to damage to the light emitting operation production unit 700. , caution is required.

In the third embodiment, an opening 3982k is formed on the front side of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, and in the fourth embodiment, the opening 4985k is formed on the rear side of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Although the case in which a is formed has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that both openings 3982k and 4985k are formed. In this case, resistance to ball clogging can be improved.

Further, for example, an opening may be formed on the front side of the first passage TR1, and an opening may be formed on the rear side of the second passage TR2. Furthermore, a merging channel may be formed in which the balls discharged from these openings merge on the downstream side. In this case, since it is possible to change the appearance of the ball flowing left and right, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the performance using the ball.

Further, for example, from the first passage TR1, an opening is formed on at least one of the front side or the rear side, and from the second passage TR2, an opening is formed on at least one of the left side or the right side, and the first passage is formed through each opening. The configuration may be such that the balls are discharged from TR1 or the second passage TR2.

In the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment described above, the case where there is the opening 985d has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the formation of the opening 985d is omitted, the distance between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 directly above the detection device SE3 is narrowed, the left-right distance of the detection device SE3 is accordingly narrowed, and the opening 985e, The left and right distance between 985f and 985f may be narrowed. In this case, the horizontal width at the lower end of the bulging portion 982 can be further reduced.

In the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which a space is formed between the standing wall 982a arranged between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, a 7-segment display device may be arranged and used as a 7-segment presentation range, or a small liquid crystal display device may be arranged.

In the fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which a path for guiding the game ball on the back side of the game area is formed in the base plate 60 and the upper connecting member 5270, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the passage for guiding the game ball may be formed in the upper connecting member 270 and the center frame 86, in the center frame 86 and the base plate 60, or in the base plate 60. , may be formed to pass through the center frame 86 and the upper connecting member 5270, or may be formed on any of the base plate 60, the center frame 86, and the upper connecting member 5270.

In the fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the opening 5274a is formed in the third projecting portion 5274, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed on any of the other overhangs 272, 5273, and 275 to 277. Further, the destination of the ball after falling may be made different for each opening.

For example, the ball that has passed through the first opening reaches the top surface of the strip-shaped extension part 263, and the ball that has passed through the second opening returns to the front side of the base plate 60 from directly above the nail KG2, and then returns to the front side of the base plate 60 from right above the nail KG2. The ball that has passed through may return to the front side of the base plate 60 from directly above the curved protrusion 414. In this case, if you aim at the first opening, it will be easier for the ball to enter the first winning opening 64, while if you aim at the second opening or the third opening, the ball will be difficult to enter the first winning opening 64. , it is possible to easily guide the ball to the ball guide portions 457, 459 and the specific winning hole 65a.

In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the light emitting action production unit 6700 moves back and forth on the front side of the game board 13, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emitting operation production unit 6700 may be configured to be movable to the position in which the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state (the position on the back side of the game board 13) described in the second embodiment.

In this case, the state where it is difficult to be seen by the player can be configured in two positions: a position in the retracted state disposed on the back side of the game board 13, and a position at the upper end of the light emitting operation production unit 6700. Therefore, a shutter, a light guide plate, etc. to block the player's view are arranged on the second glass unit 6016b, and the light emitting operation production unit 6700 is moved while blocking the player's view, making it difficult to see. This makes it possible to make it impossible to know which of the two positions the light emitting action production unit 6700 is placed. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the action performance by the light emitting action performance unit 6700.

In the seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the L-shaped long hole 7674 is formed as a long hole that extends halfway in the vertical direction, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be inclined or curved not in the vertical direction but in a direction toward the rear as it approaches the recessed portion 7674a. In this case, during the period in which the cylindrical portion 684 is displaced downward, it is also displaced rearward, so that the displacement member 680 can be configured to change its posture in the forward rotation direction at the same time as the displacement member 680 is displaced downward.

In the seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the L-shaped elongated hole 7674 is formed in an L-shape extending rearward at the lower end, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed to extend further downward from the upper and lower positions of the recessed portion 7674a. In this case, by entering the recessed portion 7674a, vertical displacement of the cylindrical portion 684 can be restricted at a midway position within the vertical displacement range of the cylindrical portion 684. Even if a load is generated due to regulations, the cylindrical portion 684 is formed thick, so that damage can be easily avoided.

In the eighth embodiment, the metal rod-shaped member 686 is placed in the middle of the curved elongated hole 8674, so that the rotation axis RJ1 of the rotation member 810 coincides with the front-rear direction. In this state, the rotating member 810 may be rotated at high speed to perform a rotating light emission effect. Even if the metal rod member 686 is placed in the middle of the curved elongated hole 8674, the posture of the light emitting operation production unit 700 can be maintained by regulating the vertical displacement of the elevating plate member 630 by the resistance generating device 650. , it is possible to suppress misalignment of the rotating shaft RJ1.

In the eighth embodiment, the displacement member 680 is tilted in the forward rolling direction before tilting, so after the tilting displacement, the back side (heat sink 812 side) of the rotary member 810 is directed toward the player. It is a posture. Even in this case, the back side of the rotating member 810 is covered with a heat sink 812, and the illumination board is also housed inside so that it is not exposed.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement member 680 is displaced in the front-rear direction while descending. It may be designed so that the position is the same after that. This makes it possible to reduce the difficulty in designing, for example, when a plurality of sets of the displacement member 680, the light emitting action production unit 700, and the rotation production device 800 are stacked in the front-rear direction.

Note that the shapes of the long holes 8672a, 8672b, 8673, 8674, and 8675 are not limited at all. For example, it may be wavy or a combination of linear holes and wavy (curved) holes.

In the ninth embodiment, the load between the inclined surface portion 9689b2 and the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1 changes depending on the attitude of the displacement member 9680, so that the ease with which the light emitting operation producing unit 9700 is displaced changes. Although the case where this is done has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, regardless of the design of the sloped surface portion 9689b2 and the chamfered sloped portion 9764a1, a high-friction resin material may be placed where they press against each other, or a high-viscosity sheet member may be placed where they press against each other. However, one or more recesses and protrusions that fit into each other may be formed at the pressed portions.

Note that the shape of the recessed portion and the convex portion may be unevenly formed around a point, or may be a protrusion or groove formed around a straight line or curve. In the case of protrusions or grooves, it is easy to tolerate misalignment of the light emitting action producing unit 9700 in the direction along the extending direction, while restricting misalignment of the light emitting action producing unit 9700 in the direction crossing the extending direction. It can be made easier.

In the tenth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the effect of setting the rotating member 810 in the proper posture is caused by the biasing force due to the detection gear 10831's own weight, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the attitude of the rotating member 810 may be strictly controlled.

Alternatively, the rotating member 810 may be prevented from rising and operating in the backward rotation direction until the rotating member 810 assumes a proper posture. For example, when the rotating member 810 is in the proper posture, the engaging portion is retracted to the left and right inwards, and when the rotating member 810 is out of the proper posture, the engaging portion protrudes to the left and right outward. can be fitted (inserted) into the inner member 670, and when fitted, the movement of the rotating member 810 in the rising direction may be restricted. In this case, since it is possible to mechanically prevent the rotating member 810 from rising and operating without being in the proper posture, it is possible to avoid unexpected damage to the rotating member 810.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the detection device SE3 disposed on the downstream side of the first winning a prize opening 64 is arranged on the left and right so that the front and rear positions are the same, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, the arrangement of the detection device SE3 may be shifted forward or backward.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. 80 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 81 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 82 is a front view of the distribution device 700 provided on the game board 13. FIG. 83 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 80, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and a frame 11 that is formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 80), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 81) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. Note that the inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 99) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a firing unit that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there are provided a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12, and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 80), and the front frame serves as an opening/closing axis on the side where the hinges 19 are provided. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes forward, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 80), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a. Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided above the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used, for example, to change the stage (background image) of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 81), which will be described later, or to change the content of the Super Reach performance. , operated by the player.

A stage is a performance mode that provides uniformity to various performances displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and this pachinko machine 10 has two stages, a "sandy beach stage" and a "deep sea stage". ing. Various performances such as variable performances and reach performances that are performed in conjunction with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), which will be described later, are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage. has been done. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the variation effect is not being performed or during high-speed variation, and each time the frame button 22 is operated, the stage changes from "sandy beach stage" to "deep sea stage". ” → “Sandy Beach Stage” → ... will be changed repeatedly in this order. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "sandy beach stage" is set as the initial stage.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is configured to be able to display various stages (background images) in addition to the above-mentioned stages (background images) depending on the gaming situation. . For example, when the timer reaches a predetermined time, a special performance (SP performance) can be executed for a predetermined period (3 minutes), and the SP performance is executed. During this period, a stage (background image) dedicated to the SP performance will be displayed. In addition, it is configured to be able to execute a preliminary effect (pre-reading effect) to inform the player in advance that the result of the special symbol lottery executed based on the starting winning will be a jackpot, and the pre-reading effect will be executed. During this period, a stage (background image) dedicated to the look-ahead effect will be displayed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has the function of changing the performance stage (background image) based on the player's operation of the frame button 22, and the function of changing the stage of the performance (background image) according to the situation of the game being executed. This function allows the player to change the stage regardless of the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. In addition to preventing players from becoming bored with the game early, the stage can also be changed even when the player does not intend to, so it is possible to prevent the player from becoming monotonous. A certain performance can be executed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the change conditions for changing the stage (background image) of the performance are the change conditions that can be established based on the player's operation, and the change conditions that can be established based on the clocked time. conditions and change conditions that can be established based on the results of the special symbol lottery, but are not limited to these, for example, the conditions can be established when the number of times the special symbol lottery has been executed reaches a predetermined number of times. The system is configured to be able to carry out change conditions that can be obtained, change conditions that can be established when the number of jackpot wins in the special symbol lottery reaches a predetermined number, and a change lottery to determine whether or not to change the stage. A change condition that is established based on the result of the change lottery may be provided.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the type of stage that can be changed by the player by operating the frame button 22 is different from the type of stage that can be changed depending on the game situation, so that the stage can be changed. is configured so that it is easy for the player to understand what the established change condition is when the change condition is changed, but the change is not limited to this, and the player can change it by operating the frame button 22. It may be configured such that all or part of the stage type and the stage type that changes depending on the game situation are the same type. With this configuration, when the stage is changed, it is difficult for the player to understand why the stage was changed, so the game content (special symbol It is possible to arouse interest in the variable presentation contents for showing the results of the lottery.

On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured such that when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach effect is to be developed from the normal reach effect to the super reach effect, a selection screen for the super reach effect mode is displayed during the normal reach effect. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the content of the performance at the time of super reach is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when a jackpot or a reach effect occurs. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 80), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination part 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 81) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and the rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly from a ball lending device etc. to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. An operating handle 51 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 50 and is operated by the player to drive a ball to the front of the game board 13. Inside the operating handle 51, a ball firing unit 112a is permitted to be driven. a touch sensor 51a for the operation, a push-button stop switch 51b that stops firing the ball while the button is pressed, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 based on a change in electrical resistance. (not shown) is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor which changes with the movement of the ball, and the ball is thereby hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at a lower portion of the lower tray 50 when viewed from the front, and is operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball naturally falls and is ejected from the bottom opening. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

FIG. 81 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 81, the game board 13 in the first embodiment has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. , 77, a general ball entrance 63, a second ball entrance 640, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, a sorting device 700, etc. are assembled, and its peripheral portion is connected to the inner frame 4 ( (see Figure 80). The base plate 60 is made of wood with thin plates pasted together, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general ball entry port 63, the second ball entry port 640, the variable prize winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the distribution device 700 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws, etc. Although details will be described later, the distribution device 700 is provided with a first ball entry port 64 and a second right ball entry port 640r into which a ball can enter. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 82, the ball that enters the opening 710a of the distribution device 700 is sorted by the distribution device 700 to either the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. (See Figure 82).

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 80). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 81.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 77 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is installed, and at the inside position of the outer rail 77, a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is installed. An arcuate inner rail 76 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and back sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 80), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is an area defined by the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 76 and 77 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 99) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (top left in FIG. 81) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 81) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37a and 37b each including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 81). The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 99), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In the first embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display whether the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64, the second ball entry port 640, or the right second ball entry port 640r. It is structured so that it can be used depending on the situation. Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the first symbol display device 37a is activated, while the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 or the right second ball entry port. When winning 640r, the first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode, and indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable mode mode by the lighting condition. In addition to indicating by the lighting state whether the stopped symbol is a symbol corresponding to a variable probability jackpot (jackpot A1 to D1), a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot (jackpot E1), or a missing symbol, and indicating the number of pending balls by a lighting state, A 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds during jackpots and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in any of the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the right second ball entrance 640r. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are: 10R probability variable jackpot (jackpot A1), 10R probability variable jackpot (jackpot B1), 5R probability variable jackpot (jackpot C1), 2R probability variable jackpot (jackpot D1), 10R time saving 100 times jackpot (jackpot E1) ) are available. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

"10R guaranteed strange jackpot" (jackpot A1) is after a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 10, after a jackpot is announced by stopping and displaying the third symbol in a row of the same symbol, This is a jackpot with variable probability. Here, the variable probability state is a state (high probability state of special symbols) in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is higher than the normal state (low probability state), and furthermore, the special symbol lottery is easier to execute than the normal state. It is a gaming state that becomes a state (high probability state of normal symbols). In other words, the variable probability state is a game state in which the special symbol lottery is likely to be executed and the special symbol lottery is easy to win a jackpot, and is the most advantageous gaming state for the player. “10R certain variable jackpot” (jackpot B1) is the same jackpot as the above-mentioned (jackpot A1), and “5R certain variable jackpot” (jackpot C1) is a jackpot game that is different from the above-mentioned (jackpot A1). It is a jackpot that differs only in that the maximum number of rounds is set to 5 rounds, and "2R guaranteed variable jackpot" (jackpot D1) is a jackpot game where the maximum number of rounds of the jackpot game is 2 compared to the above (jackpot A1). It is a jackpot that differs only in the points specified in the round. The "10R time-saving 100-time jackpot" (jackpot E1) is a jackpot in which a time-saving state is set after a jackpot game in which the maximum number of rounds is 10 rounds. Here, the time-saving state is a game in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is normal (low probability state), but the special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the normal state (high probability state of normal symbols). It refers to the state. In other words, the time saving state is a gaming state in which the special symbol lottery is more easily executed than the normal state, and is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state and disadvantageous than the variable probability state.

In the first embodiment, when the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the variable probability state is configured to continue until the next jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, and the time saving state is set. In this case, the special symbol lottery is configured to continue until the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed during the time saving state reaches 100 times (predetermined number of times). The period during which each gaming state lasts is not limited to this, for example, if a variable probability state is set, it may continue until the number of special symbol drawings executed during the variable probability state reaches 100 (predetermined number of times). It may be configured so that the variable probability state continues, or it may be configured so that the time saving state continues until the next special symbol lottery is won. In addition, when a variable probability state is set, the conditions for ending the high probability state of the special symbol and the conditions for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol may be different, for example, the high probability state of the special symbol. The condition for ending the special symbol lottery may be 50 times, and the condition for ending the high probability state of normal symbols may be the number of times the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times.

By configuring in this way, the game in the variable probability state is executed until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times after the variable probability state is set, and after that, until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times, A game during the time saving state is executed, and then a game during the normal state is executed. As a result, it is possible to have the player play the game in multiple gaming states so that the degree of advantage gradually decreases, so when a variable probability state is set, it is possible to make the player expect to win the jackpot as soon as possible. A player can be made to play a game.

Further, the game state may be configured to be changed in stages so that the degree of advantage to the player increases as the number of special symbol drawings executed after the end of the jackpot game increases. As a result, it is possible to prevent a period in which no jackpot is won from continuing for a long time, and the player's desire to play is reduced.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, each of the above-mentioned jackpot types (jackpot A1 to jackpot E1) is performed as a production (jackpot medium production) using the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during a jackpot game. It is configured to perform different effects depending on the situation. Specifically, when the jackpot type is one of jackpot B1, C1, and D1, as a jackpot performance, it is notified in advance that a variable probability state will be set after the end of the jackpot game, and then the jackpot game is played. A jackpot performance (rank-up performance) is performed to entertain the player as to how many rounds will continue. In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot A1 or E1, it is possible to inform the player in advance that the jackpot game will continue for 10 rounds, and then inform the player during the jackpot game of the gaming state that will be set after the jackpot game ends. A jackpot performance (definitely different promotion performance) is executed.

With this configuration, players can have various expectations for the jackpot performance performed during the jackpot game depending on the set jackpot type, so the performance of the jackpot performance The effect can be increased.

Here, the types of gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment will be explained. In this embodiment, the game states include a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), a time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), and a variable probability state (special symbol high probability state). A high probability state of a symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) can be set.

The "high probability state of special symbols" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot game. In other words, it is a state where it is easy to shift to a jackpot gaming state (special gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. Further, the "high probability state of normal symbols" refers to a state where the winning probability of the second symbol lottery is set high and the fluctuation time of the second symbol is also set short. If the second symbol lottery is won, the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 easily (the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is opened). A game per figure is executed. In other words, the "high probability state of normal symbols" is a state in which it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640, thereby making it easier for the special symbol lottery to be executed.

On the other hand, the "special symbol low probability state" refers to a state where the jackpot probability is lower than the normal state, that is, the "special symbol high probability state". Further, the "low probability state of normal symbols" refers to a state where the probability of winning in the second symbol lottery (normal symbol lottery) is lower than the normal state, that is, the "high probability state of normal symbols".

In the "high probability state of normal symbols", not only the winning probability of the second symbol lottery increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened is changed, A longer period of time is set compared to "low probability state". When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 more easily than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to do. Therefore, during the variable probability state or time saving state in which the "high probability state of normal symbols" is set, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640, and the number of times the special symbol lottery is held can be increased. .

In addition, as for the control content for the electric accessory 640a in the game per common symbol in the "high probability state of normal symbols", the second ball entrance 640 is It is sufficient if the control is made so that the ball can easily enter the ball, and for example, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640, the game can be performed per normal figure. The number of times the electric accessory 640a is released may be increased compared to the "low probability state of normal symbols", or the timing at which the electric accessory 640a is released during the normal symbol winning game may be changed. This may be configured so that the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 more easily than in a normal symbol winning game in the "low probability state of normal symbols". In addition, without changing the winning probability of the second symbol lottery, at least one of the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is released and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released in one win. may be changed. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol drawing is determined by "normal symbol The variation time of the second symbol lottery may be changed to be shortened compared to the "low probability state of normal symbols".

A plurality of general ball entrances 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters the prize. Further, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 has first symbol display devices 37a, 37b triggered by a winning (starting prize) in any one of the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the right second ball entrance 640r. A third symbol display device 81 is configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that displays a variable display of the third symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the third symbol, and the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is used as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of an LED that variably displays a second symbol is provided.

Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is made visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, the center frame 86 protrudes to the front side of the game board 13 and surrounds the third symbol display device 81, and prevents game balls from coming into contact with the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 99), so that the third symbol display device 81 can display three symbols, for example, upper, middle, and lower. Two symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled vertically for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37a, 37b that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 99). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37a and 37b. Note that, instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time as a display symbol (second symbol) each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. It is something. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so that it is shorter in the variable probability state or time saving state (high probability state with normal symbols) than in the normal state (low probability state with normal symbols). be done. As a result, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short period of time, so it is possible to perform more winning lottery drawings than in the normal state. Therefore, the chances of winning in the general lottery are increased, so that the player can be given more opportunities to have the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entrance 640 in the open state. Therefore, the variable probability state and the time saving state are gaming states that are advantageous to the player in terms of executing the special symbol lottery.

In addition, other methods can be used to increase the probability of hitting a common figure in a variable probability state or a time saving state, or increasing the opening time or number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per common symbol at a time. If the state is such that it is easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if you set the time required for the variable display of the second symbol to be shorter in the variable probability state or time saving state than in the normal state, the probability of hitting a normal symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or it may be The opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a in response to a hit may be made constant regardless of the game state.

The through gates 67 are assembled to the game board in areas on both sides of the variable display unit 80. The through gate 67 is configured so that a portion of the balls flowing down the game board 13 among the balls fired at the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b mentioned above, and is also displayed by lighting on the second symbol holding lamp 84. Ru. The second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided in four, which corresponds to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (for example, eight). Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A distribution device 700 in which balls can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters a prize (enters the ball) through the opening 710a in the distribution device 700, the entered ball is alternately distributed to the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. It will be done. When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64, a first ball entry switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. As a result, a jackpot lottery is performed in the main control device 110 (see FIG. 99), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a. Furthermore, when the ball enters the second ball entry port 640r, a second ball entry switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, as in the case of the second ball entry port 640. Due to the turning on of the second ball entrance switch, a jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 99), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37b.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter a prize is provided at the lower side of the sorting device 700 when viewed from the front. When a ball enters the second ball entry port 640, a second ball entry switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is activated due to the turning on of the second ball entry switch. A jackpot lottery is made in the device 110 (see FIG. 99), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37b. This second ball entry port 640 normally prevents game balls from entering the ball by regulating the entry of the game ball with the left and right electric accessory 640a configured in the shape of a feather standing upright (it is difficult to do so). ) configuration, and when the normal symbol (described later) hits, the electric accessory 640a rotates about 45 degrees outward in a certain movement pattern as an opening movement, forming an inverted figure eight. The game ball is guided to the second ball entry port 640 so that the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry port 640.

Furthermore, the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r each pay out five balls as prize balls when a ball enters the prize, and the second ball entrance 640 pays out two balls as prize balls. It is also one of the winning slots where balls are paid out. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640, Although the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640r is configured to be a different number, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 is different from the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the winning ball 640 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the right second ball entrance 640r may be the same number.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the prize ball is paid out when the ball that has flowed into the opening 710a of the sorting device 700 enters the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the same number of prize balls may be paid out when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and when a ball enters the right second ball entry port 640r. In this case, a detection switch is provided near the opening 710a to detect that a ball has entered the opening 710a, and when the detection switch detects a ball, the prize ball is paid out. It may be configured so that it is released. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the time lag from when a ball flows into the opening 710a of the sorting device 700 until the prize ball is actually paid out. Furthermore, by measuring the falling period from when the detection switch described above detects the ball until the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r, the ball inside the sorting device 700 is The configuration may be such that the state of the flow path can be determined.

Furthermore, it may be configured to perform a performance using the downstream period. In this case, the balls flowing into the distribution device 700 are distributed to the distribution device 700 rather than the configuration in which the balls flowing into the distribution device 700 are alternately distributed to the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r as in the present embodiment. A configuration may be adopted in which it is difficult for the player to grasp which entrance the ball enters into, or a ball that flows into the opening 710a of the sorting device 700 may enter the first ball entrance 64. The period required for winning a prize (first ball falling period) and the period required for the ball that has flowed into the opening 710a of the sorting device 700 to enter the right second ball entrance 640r (second ball falling period) ) and are configured differently. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the type of ball entrance into which the ball will enter next by using the period during which the ball flows into the sorting device 700. Further, in this case, the distribution device 700 may be configured such that the longer the falling period, the easier it is for the ball to enter the ball entrance, which is more advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball entering the sorting device 700 is configured such that it always enters either the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r, that is, the ball enters the sorting device 700. Although the system is configured such that a prize ball is paid out and a special symbol lottery is given as the balls flow in, the present invention is not limited to this, and the results of the falling balls in the sorting device 700 Depending on the situation, it may be configured such that a privilege other than the privilege of paying out a prize ball (for example, execution of a special symbol lottery) may be awarded or may not be awarded. With this configuration, it is possible to greatly vary the degree of advantageous benefits given to players when balls flow into the sorting device 700, so that the flow of balls flowing into the sorting device 700 is It is possible to make the player more interested in the situation.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second ball entrance 640. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for balls to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

As mentioned above, in the variable probability state and time saving state, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than in the normal state, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is also shorter, so in the variable display of the second symbol, "○" ” becomes easier to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is longer than in the normal state. Therefore, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, it is possible to create a state in which the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 more easily than in the normal state.

Therefore, in the normal state, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640, so basically it is difficult for the ball to enter the opening 710a. A jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery) is executed by entering the ball and sorting the entered ball to the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r.

On the other hand, in the variable probability state or the time saving state, by allowing the ball to pass through either the left or right through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is likely to be in the open state, and the second ball entry port 640 Since the state is such that it is easy to win a prize, the ball that enters the opening 710a is sorted to the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r, and is also distributed to the second ball entry port 640. A jackpot lottery associated with the entry of a ball also becomes easier to execute. Therefore, there are more opportunities to execute a jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery) than in the normal state, which is advantageous to the player compared to the normal state.

In this way, in the game area provided on the game board 13, the sorting device 700, the second ball entrance 640, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged below the variable display unit 80, and the game area on the left side Even when playing a game (left-handed game) in which a ball is fired toward the area (the game area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80), the game area on the right side (the game area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80) is played. Even when playing a game (right-handed game) in which balls are fired toward the target area), the proportion of balls reaching the distribution device 700, the second ball entrance 640, and the variable prize winning device 65 will be the same. It consists of Therefore, the same degree of advantage can be given to the player no matter what gaming method he uses, so the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81, in the game area provided on the game board 13, the distribution device 700, the second ball entrance 640, and the variable prize winning device 65 are located below the variable display unit 80. is arranged, and even when playing a game (left-handed game) in which a ball is fired toward the left side game area (the game area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80), the right side game area (the variable display unit 80) Even when playing a game (right-handed game) in which the ball is fired toward the game area formed on the right side of the display unit 80, the ball reaches the distribution device 700, the second ball entrance 640, and the variable winning device 65. Although the configuration is such that the proportion of balls sent to the player is the same, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when playing a left-handed game, more balls are sent to the distribution device 700 than when playing a right-handed game. The structure is configured so that it is easier for the ball to flow into the second ball entrance 640 and the variable prize winning device 65 when playing a right-handed game than when playing a left-handed game. Also good. In other words, it may be configured such that the gaming method (left-handed game, right-handed game) that is advantageous to the player is switched depending on the set gaming state. With this configuration, it is possible to bring about a change in the way the player hits the ball, thereby making the game more enjoyable.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the sorting device 700, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won in a jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery) that is held due to a winning at any of the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, or the right second ball entrance 640r, After a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first symbol display device 37a or the first symbol display device 37b is turned on so that the stop symbol for the jackpot is displayed, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device. 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 16 times (16 rounds) at the most. The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening/closing plate forward about the lower side of the opening/closing plate. It is equipped with Normally, the specific winning hole 65a is in a closed state in which a ball cannot enter a prize or it is difficult to enter a prize. In the event of a jackpot, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily enter the special winning hole 65a, and changing the open state and the normal closed state. It operates by alternating between states.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when the LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37a, 37b, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than one (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower side of the distribution device 700 when viewed from the front. , for example, to the left of the variable display unit 80.

A pasting space K1 for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. is provided in the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 80).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls flowing down the gaming area that do not land in any of the ball entry ports 63, 64, 65a, 640, and 640r are guided through the out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The out port 66 is arranged below the sorting device 700.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

Next, the sorting device 700 will be explained with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device 700. As shown in FIG. 81, the sorting device 700 is arranged below the variable display device unit 80 of the game board 13. A channel portion through which the game ball that has entered the opening 710a flows down into the through hole formed in the game board 13, and a flow path portion through which the game ball that has entered the second ball entry port 640 flows down are housed. The base member of the sorting device 700 is configured to be screwed onto the game board 13 from the front side.

The winning member 730 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes the above-mentioned opening 710a located at the upper center in the left-right direction, an electric accessory 640a located below the opening 710a, and an electric accessory 640a located below the opening 710a. A through-hole (not shown) located on both sides in the left-right direction and formed through the front-back direction, and a lower through-hole (not shown) located below the through-hole and formed through the front-back direction. Formed primarily in preparation.

The distribution member 760 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed into a box-like body with an open front side. Further, the distribution member 760 is bent at a substantially central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is formed to be inclined downward as it goes outward in the left-right direction from the substantially central position in the left-right direction. Further, both ends of the distribution member 760 in the left and right direction are set at positions facing the through holes of the winning member 730 described above.

The sorting member 760 includes a pair of inclined surfaces 761 that are inclined downward from the center position in the left and right direction in a front view toward both left and right sides, a sorting member 762 that is disposed at the center of each of the inclined surfaces 761, and a sorting member 762 that is arranged at the center of each of the inclined surfaces 761. It is mainly formed with a ball throwing opening formed above the ball.

The distribution member 762 is formed in an annular shape, and has three protrusions 762a that protrude outward from its outer edge at 90 degree intervals around the axis, and are inserted into the inner side of the annular shape. A shaft portion 762b.

The shaft portion 762b is a shaft support for rotating the distribution member 762 around the axis, is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is inserted into the inner side of the ring of the distribution member 762. In this state, the shaft portion 762b is held between the intervening member and the distribution member 760, so that the distribution member 762 is arranged to be rotatable about the shaft portion 762b.

The protrusion 762a is a protrusion for distributing the ball alternately to the left and right inclined surfaces 761 one by one when the ball is thrown after passing through the opening 710a, and is aligned with the direction in which the tip of the central protrusion 762a is located. The ball is thrown to the opposite side in the left and right direction. That is, the projection 762a in the center allows the ball thrown from the opening 710a to be thrown in the left-right direction. The projections 762a protruding from both ends restrict the displacement of the distribution member 762, and also displace the direction in which the tip of the central projection 762a is located due to the weight applied when the ball passes (the distribution member 762 The rotation of the distribution member 762 is regulated by the contact between the tip surface of the projection 762a and the inclined surface. On the other hand, when the ball is guided by the projection 762a at the center of the projection 762a that is not in contact with the inclined surface, the guided ball collides with the projection 762a and is pushed downward. As a result, the protrusion 762a on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the tip of the protrusion 762a that has been displaced downward comes into contact with the inclined surface to restrict its displacement.

The inclined surface is a rolling surface of the path on which the balls distributed left and right by the distribution member 762 roll and are thrown (hereinafter referred to as "third ball throwing path KR3"), and It is formed to slope downward from the center position in the left-right direction toward the outside. As a result, the balls distributed left and right by the distribution member 762 of the distribution member 760 are rolled on the slope 761 and are thrown (rolled) to the end of the slope 761 on the downward side.

The lower end of the inclined surface 761 is formed to be inclined in a direction approaching the intervening member so that the thickness of the rear side surface increases forward toward the end. As a result, the ball rolled on the inclined surface 761 and thrown to the end thereof is transferred to the first ball entry port 64 of the intervening member disposed in front of the distribution member 760 or the right second ball entry port 640r. You can throw the ball to More specifically, the ball that has been distributed to the left side in the front view by the distribution member 762 and rolled on the inclined surface 761 is thrown (entered) into the first ball entry port 64 . On the other hand, the ball that has been distributed to the right side in the front view by the distribution member 762 and rolled on the inclined surface 761 is thrown (enters) into the right second ball entrance 640r.

The first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r are formed on the front side of both left and right end portions of the distribution member 760, respectively, and are formed on the back side of the through hole of the winning member 730. Therefore, the space at both left and right ends of the distribution member 760 and the internal space of the through hole of the winning member 730 are connected via the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r. Therefore, the ball rolling on the upper part of the inclined surface 761 of the distribution member 760 described above passes through the first ball entry port 64 and is sent to the through hole of the winning member 730, and the right second ball entry port 640r. can be passed through and a path for throwing the ball to the through hole of the winning member 730 can be formed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the balls that have flowed into the opening 710a of the distribution device 700 are distributed in the left and right directions by the distribution member 462a, roll on either the left or right third ball throwing path KR3, The player is configured to be able to visually confirm the rolling state of the ball until it enters the ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. Specifically, a part of the sorting device 700 is made of a highly transparent material (for example, polycarbonate), so that the inside of the sorting device 700 can be visually recognized. This allows the player to easily understand the situation of the balls rolling inside the distribution device 700. In addition, by destroying the internal structure of the sorting device 700, a fraudulent act is carried out so that the balls that flow into the opening 710a of the sorting device 700 roll only in an area that is advantageous to the player. In this case, for example, if a fraudulent act is committed such as destroying the distribution member 762a and causing the ball to roll only on one third ball throwing path KR3, an employee at the game center can easily confirm the state of the destruction. This makes it easier to minimize damage that may occur due to fraudulent activity.

The distribution device 700 configured as described above throws a ball as follows. The ball entering from the opening 710a is thrown to the distribution member 760, and the distribution member 762 of the distribution member 760 throws the ball to the third ball throwing path KR3 in either the left or right direction. A ball thrown along the third ball throwing path KR3 in the left direction is thrown into the first ball entry port 64 when the ball is thrown to the end of the third ball throwing path KR3. Here, the game ball that has entered the first ball entry port 64 is detected by a detection switch (sensor), and the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 is detected.

On the other hand, the ball thrown along the third ball throwing path KR3 in the left direction is thrown to the right second ball entry port 640r when the ball is thrown to the end of the third ball throwing path KR3. Here, the game ball that has entered the second ball entry port 640 is detected by a detection switch (sensor), and it is detected that the game ball has entered the right second ball entry port 640r.

In this way, the game balls that have entered the opening 710a are distributed alternately to the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640 by the distribution member 762, so that they are evenly distributed to the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640. By allowing game balls to enter the right second ball entrance 640r, it becomes possible to uniformly generate reserved balls. Thereby, the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol can be generated equally, the number of reserved balls of one of them becomes the upper limit, and overflow that is not stored as reserved balls can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the balls flowing down a specific flow path (flowing from the opening 710a of the sorting device 700 to the sorting member 762a) are divided into two channels (left side) by the sorting means (distributing member 762a). Although a configuration is used in which balls are alternately distributed toward the third ball throwing path KR3 on the right side and the third ball throwing path KR3 on the right side, the configuration in which balls that have flown down a specific flow path are distributed is not limited to this, and for example, You may use the structure which can distribute to three or more flow paths. Furthermore, a configuration may be used in which the balls are not evenly distributed to each channel. For example, by using a configuration in which the distribution member 762a is driven by an electric drive source, the balls are transferred to the distribution means. It may be configured such that the distribution destination is switched depending on the timing at which the destination is reached.

As shown in FIG. 83, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 99). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 99). The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the main controller 110 is provided with a setting value display device 110a that can display setting values, and a state in which a setting change operation (and setting confirmation operation) is accepted and a state in which it is not accepted (normally A setting key 110b that can switch between the game mode and the game mode, and a setting key 110b that can switch between the pachinko machine and the pachinko machine according to an operation by an operator (for example, a clerk at the hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed) in a state where a setting change operation is accepted (setting change state). A setting change mechanism is provided that includes at least a setting switch 110c that can change the setting values of the machine 10. A method of changing settings and a method of confirming settings using this setting change mechanism will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 84.

First, with reference to FIGS. 84(a) to 84(d), a procedure for changing the settings of the pachinko machine 10 using the setting changing mechanism will be described. As shown in FIGS. 84(a) to (d), in order to change the settings of the pachinko machine 10, first turn the setting key 110b clockwise while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. As a result, it is rotated to the ON position (see FIG. 84(a)). That is, in order to change the settings, it is first necessary to turn off the power to the pachinko machine 10. Next, with the setting key 110b turned to the ON side, the RAM clear switch 122 is turned on to power on the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 84(b)). As a result, the state of the pachinko machine 10 after the power is turned on is set to a setting change state indicating that the settings are being changed. When the setting is changed, "-" is displayed for each digit of the setting value display device 110a, which is composed of a 4-digit 7-segment display. This display content allows the operator (for example, a hall clerk) to easily understand that the setting change state has been successfully entered.

When the setting change state is entered, the setting value changes by 1 each time the setting switch 110c is pressed (see FIG. 84(c)). In the first embodiment, three types of setting values, ie, settings 1 to 3, are provided, and the configuration is such that the larger the value, the higher the jackpot probability. That is, the jackpot probability of setting 1 is the lowest (for example, 1/262 in the low probability state and 1/65 in the high probability (variable probability) state), and the jackpot probability of setting 3 is the highest (for example, 1/262 in the low probability state). /218, 1/55 in high probability state). In the setting change state, each time the setting switch 110c is pressed, the setting is changed in the order of 1→2→3→1, and so on. Further, when the setting switch 110c is pressed while the setting value is 3, the setting value returns to 1. Furthermore, each time the setting switch 110c is pressed, a number indicating the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 110a. Note that FIG. 84(c) is a diagram showing a display mode in a state where the setting value is set to "3". As shown in FIG. 84(c), when the setting value is switched to 3 by pressing the setting switch 110c, the number "3" indicating setting 3 is displayed for the last digit on the setting value display device 110a. be done.

After the operator completes the switching operation to the desired setting value, the setting change state is ended by rotating the setting key 110b counterclockwise to place the setting key 110b in the OFF position (FIG. 84). (see (d)). Note that the setting key 110b is composed of a key-shaped key part and a keyhole-shaped keyhole part that matches the key part, and the key part can be removed. This allows the operator (for example, a hall clerk) to insert the key into the keyhole only when changing settings, and to remove and store the key when finished changing settings. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent players from illegally changing the settings of the pachinko machine 10 during business hours, thereby preventing the pachinko hall from incurring unexpected disadvantages. can.

Then, when the setting change operation is completed, the initial setting process of the main controller 110 is restarted. In the initial setting process after restarting, a process for transmitting a setting change completion command indicating that the setting change operation has been completed and a setting value command indicating the setting value determined by the setting change operation to the audio lamp control device 113 is performed. executed. Further, a process for transmitting a command (initialization command) for restarting the initial setting process of the audio lamp control device 113, which is on standby until the setting change operation is finished, is executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when changing the setting values of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to turn on the power with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on. That is, when changing the set value, various control devices (main control device 110, audio lamp control device 113, etc.) provided in pachinko machine 10 execute initialization processing. Since the setting change operation is performed by the operator manually pressing the setting switch 110c, the period required for the setting change operation varies greatly depending on the operating skill level of the operator and the setting value to be changed.

In such a situation, if the various control devices execute the initial setting process when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the various control devices may An event may occur in which the initialization processing ends in a different order. For example, if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without executing a setting change operation, the initial setting process of the main controller 110 is completed before the initial setting process of the audio lamp control device 113, and the setting change operation is performed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on to execute the above, an event may occur in which the initial setting process of the audio lamp control device 113 ends before the initial setting process of the main control device 110.

In recent years, pachinko machines 10 are configured to perform various monitoring processes to prevent attempts to obtain prize balls from the pachinko machine 10 in an inappropriate manner (cheating). In particular, the configuration is such that strict monitoring processing is executed for actions such as turning off or turning on the power. In other words, when attaching a special control means (illegal board) to the pachinko machine 10 as a fraudulent act, it is necessary to shut off the power to the pachinko machine 10 once, and in order to play a game using the fraudulent board, Since it is necessary to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 10, strict monitoring processing is executed for power-off and power-on of the pachinko machine 10.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, by fixing the contents of the initialization process (process flow) that is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is properly shut off and turned on, the pachinko machine It is possible to easily determine whether the contents (process flow) of the initialization process executed when the power is turned off or turned on in step 10 are appropriate. However, as mentioned above, if an event occurs in which the initial setting processing in various control devices ends in a different order depending on the presence or absence of a setting change operation or the length of time required for a setting change operation, the pachinko machine 10 cannot be properly Multiple patterns will occur in the content (process flow) of the initialization process that is executed when the power is turned off and then turned on. There is a problem in that it becomes difficult to determine whether or not the content (flow of processing) of the initialization processing performed is appropriate.

In addition, conventionally, the pachinko machine 10 performs main control processing that affects game results (determining whether or not to award prize balls to the player, setting a gaming state that makes it easier to award prize balls, etc.). The main control device 110, which is the main control means, executes various commands to indicate the results of various control processes executed by the main control means, and the voice commands, which are the slave control means. By executing effects based on various commands transmitted to the lamp control device 113 and received by the audio lamp control device 113, the results of various control processes executed by the main control means can be easily understood by the player. It is configured to notify.

In order to prevent the contents of various control processes executed by the main control means (main control device 110), that is, the contents of the main control processes, from being tampered with, the command transmission direction is changed from the main control means to the slave control means. unidirectionally configured to the control means. Therefore, the main control means cannot grasp the progress of the initial setting process on the slave control means. In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, if an event occurs in which the initial setting processing in the various control devices ends in a different order depending on the presence or absence of a setting change operation or the length of time required for the setting change operation, the main Even if a command for indicating the result of the main control processing is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 in a state where the initial setting processing of the control means (main controller 110) is completed, the slave control means (the audio lamp control device 113) ) if the initial setting process has not been completed, it will not be possible to perform appropriate processing on the sent command, and an effect that is different from the processing content of the main control process will be executed, causing confusion for the player. There was a problem with putting it away.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, whether the setting change operation is executed or not, the timing at which the initial setting process of the main controller 110 is completed and the initial setting process of the audio lamp control device 113 are determined. The configuration is such that the relationship with the timing at which the setting process is completed is constant. Specifically, the initial setting process of the main controller 110 is a process that is executed regardless of whether or not there is a setting change operation, and when a setting change operation is performed, it is executed after the setting change operation is completed. At the stage of executing the specific process, a specific command indicating that the specific process has been executed is sent to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 side executes the initial setting process based on the power on of the pachinko machine 10. The configuration is such that a portion of the initial setting process is executed, and then execution of the remaining initial setting process is made to wait until a specific command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received.

With this configuration, it is possible to fix the processing contents (process completion order) of the initial setting processing of various control devices that are executed when the pachinko machine 10 is properly powered on. Furthermore, even when a one-way communication form is used from the main control means (main control device 110) to the slave control means (audio lamp control device 113), it is possible to make various control devices execute appropriate processing. Can be done.

In this embodiment, the display control device 114 (see FIG. 99) is configured to execute display control of the third symbol display device 81 formed by a liquid crystal display, and when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In this case, the configuration is such that a boot process for starting up the liquid crystal display is executed based on the power-on. This third symbol display device 81 is configured such that the display control device 114 receives a display command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays an image based on the received display command. There is. The image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is, for example, when the audio lamp control device 113 determines that the frame button 22 (see FIG. 99) has been operated by the player, and based on the determination result, the stage ( A display command for changing the display mode of a background image) is sent to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 changes and displays the stage (background image) based on the received display command. .

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment has a function (setting function) that allows changing the setting value (jackpot probability), and determines whether or not a setting change operation is to be performed and the period required for the setting change operation. The length of the processing period of the initial setting process of the main control device 110 is configured to vary depending on the length of the initial setting process. Since the timing at which the initial setting process of the main control device 110 is completed and the timing at which the initial setting process of the audio lamp control device 113 is completed are configured to be the same, the main control device 110 Depending on the length of the processing period of the initial setting process, the length of the period from when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 until the initial setting process of the audio lamp control device 113 is completed, whether or not there is a setting change operation, and the setting This will vary depending on the length of time required for the change operation.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, it is possible to create a certain relationship between the timing when the initial setting process of the audio lamp control device 113 is completed and the timing when the boot process of the third symbol display device 81 is completed. For example, if the initial setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 is completed earlier than the boot process of the third symbol display device 81, or if the initial setting process of the third symbol display device 81 is completed earlier than the initial setting process of the voice lamp control device 113. There may be cases where the boot process completes faster.

Therefore, even if the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display command for changing the display mode of the stage (background image) to the display control device 114, the boot process of the third symbol display device 81 is If this is not completed, it will not be possible to display the stage (background image) according to the transmitted display command, and the audio lamp control device 113 will be able to display the stage currently being displayed as determined by the audio lamp control device 113. There was a problem that the stage information and the stage actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 were different.

In addition, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, a prohibition period is set to prohibit sending display commands from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. By configuring to execute for a specific period longer than the period until the boot process of the third symbol display device 81 is completed, a state where the third symbol display device 81 is not started (a state where the boot process is not completed) Although it is possible to prevent display commands from being sent from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, if configured in this way, for example, the initial setting process of the audio lamp control device 113 is completed. If it takes a long time to change the setting, that is, if the setting change operation is executed, the display from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 is displayed even though the third symbol display device 81 is activated. Since the prohibition period during which the transmission of commands for use is prohibited continues, there is a problem in that the production effect cannot be enhanced by using the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the timing is determined based on the completion timing of the initial setting process of the audio lamp control device 113 and the completion timing of the boot process for starting the third symbol display device 81. , it is configured to be able to determine whether or not to set a prohibition section for prohibiting display commands from being transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, and the length of the prohibition section.

With this configuration, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the performance executed by the third symbol display device 81, and also to increase the accuracy of the performance executed by the main control means (main control means). can be executed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, a procedure for confirming settings (setting confirmation operation) will be described with reference to FIGS. 84(e) to (g). In order to confirm the settings, first, similarly to the setting change operation, the setting key 110b is turned to the ON position while the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off (see FIG. 84(e)). Then, by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 without turning on the RAM clear switch 122 (that is, while it remains in the off state), the setting confirmation state is set (see FIG. 84(f)). When the setting confirmation state is entered, the currently set setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 110a. The example in FIG. 84(f) shows a state where "3" is set as the setting value. When the operator finishes confirming the settings, the setting confirmation state is ended by turning the setting key 110b to the ON side, and the state shifts to a state in which normal games can be played (see FIG. 82(g)).

Note that in the first embodiment, the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c are provided separately, but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the setting switch 110c is deleted and the settings can be changed according to the amount of rotation of the setting key 110b. More specifically, each time the setting key 110b is rotated 60 degrees, the setting changes from 1 to 2 to 3 to 1... By pulling out the key part of the setting key 110b from the keyhole part, the normal game is possible. It may be configured to return it. With this configuration, the configuration of the setting change mechanism can be simplified, and the number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 83, a setting change mechanism is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, that is, in a position that cannot be seen by the player playing the game. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the setting change mechanism from being operated during the game. In addition, when actually performing a setting change operation, it is necessary to open the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 in order to operate the setting key 110b and setting switch 110c provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. When these are in the open state, the inner frame 12 and the outer frame 14 are supported only by the opening/closing shaft and are in a relatively unstable state. If the pachinko machine 10 is turned on in such a situation and the decorative accessories installed in the pachinko machine 10 are reset, an excessive load will be applied to the opening/closing shaft, etc., resulting in damage. There is a possibility that you will be invited.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the restoration operation of the accessory is executed after the standby process in which the initial setting process of the audio lamp control device 113 is waited for is completed. In other words, the configuration is such that the restoration operation of the accessory is not executed during the setting change operation. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from being damaged due to the restoration operation of the accessory being executed during the setting change operation. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 can be made less likely to vibrate during the setting change operation compared to the case where the return operation of the accessory is executed while the operator is operating the setting switch 110c. This makes it possible to make it difficult for erroneous operation of 110c to occur.

In this embodiment, when executing a setting change operation, the RAM clear switch 122 is always set to ON, so that, for example, a probability change state advantageous to the player remains set. Unable to change settings. That is, the gaming state set after the setting change operation is executed becomes the initial state (normal state). Therefore, for games executed after a setting change operation is performed, it is possible to unify the game conditions other than the difference in jackpot probability based on the setting value, making it easier to provide fair games to players. can do.

Next, the effect display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 98. As shown in FIG. 85(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, with the upper 2/3 being the main display area Dm where the third symbol is mainly displayed in a variable manner; The lower 1/3 of the area is a sub-display area Ds that displays preview effects, characters, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3: left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in each of the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the third symbols described above are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending numerical order, and a variable display is performed by periodically scrolling from the top to the bottom for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The approximate center of this main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the active line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, the combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the active line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

In this embodiment, as described above, each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from top to bottom and displayed in a variable manner, and then stopped and displayed in a predetermined symbol combination (display mode). , provides the fun of allowing players to predict in which display mode the third symbol will be stopped and displayed during the period from when the special symbol lottery is executed until the special symbol lottery result is displayed (fluctuating display period). However, it is only necessary to dynamically display the third symbol (identification information) for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery until the third symbol (identification information) is stopped and displayed, for example, on the active line L1. A dynamic display mode may be used in which multiple pieces of identification information are switched and displayed, or a dynamic display mode may be used in which multiple (four or more) pieces of identification information are moved so as to float within the display area. .

Furthermore, according to the example shown in FIG. 85, a pattern in which a symbol imitating a number is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display) as the third symbol is used, but the result of the special symbol lottery is not displayed to the player. Other modes may be used as long as they can be displayed; for example, a plurality of images imitating characters instead of numbers may be dynamically displayed, or the main display area Dm It may be configured such that a moving image with a story is displayed and the result of the special symbol lottery is notified to the player based on the result of the story. In other words, any mode can provide players with the pleasure of predicting the results of the special symbol lottery using the period from when the special symbol lottery is executed until the lottery results are displayed. You may use the mode.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided in a horizontally elongated manner below the main display area Dm, and is further divided into two small areas Ds1 to Ds2 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an execution display area in which a holding symbol that is to be changed is moved and displayed when a holding ball that has been held in the main display area Dm is displayed in a changing manner (dynamic display). be. The pending symbol moved to the execution display area is displayed as a larger symbol than the pending symbol so that it can be identified that the variation of the corresponding special symbol is being executed. In addition, when a variation is executed, the lottery result of the special symbol being varied is indicated by changing the color of the symbol or the pattern of the symbol.

The small area Ds2 is the number of balls that have not been changed (pending balls) among the balls that entered the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640r, and the second ball entrance 640. This is an area for displaying the number of pitches and preview performance images. Furthermore, a character display area C is set in the small area Ds2 in which a character image for guiding the game content is displayed. In this character display area, the character's comments are displayed, and the character's facial expressions and gestures are displayed as a guide display mode to clearly guide the player about the content of the game that will be played in the future and the content of the performance that will be performed in the future. It is configured so that it can be displayed variably. In this way, by using the specific area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 as the guide area for the game (performance), the game can be easily understood even when multiple pieces of information are displayed overlapping periods. can be provided. Note that detailed guidance display modes using the character display area C will be described later with reference to FIGS. 86 to 98.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 85(b), a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, when displayed in a floating manner, in addition to the main symbol displayed in the center, the main symbols placed before and after it are also visibly displayed, so a maximum of 9 main symbols are displayed in total. In some cases. In the sub-display area Ds, the sub-area Ds1 displays an active symbol pedestal m0 indicating that the reserved ball corresponding to the special symbol being executed is moved and displayed, and is shown in FIG. As shown in (a), when the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed, a circle symbol is displayed. Furthermore, among the reserved symbols (circle symbols) displayed in the small area Ds2, the circle symbol displayed on the leftmost side, which indicates that the most reserved order is first, is hidden, and then the small area A circle pattern having a larger diameter than the reserved pattern is displayed on Ds1. In this case, the pending symbols that were displayed in the small area Ds2 are moved to the position where the hidden leftmost pending symbol was displayed, and the pending symbols that are displayed next to each other are moved and displayed. be done. When the pending symbol moves to the small area Ds1 and is displayed as an active symbol, a predetermined effect lottery is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol whose fluctuation is started, the selected fluctuation pattern, etc. The color and pattern of the symbol being executed are determined and displayed. With this configuration, the player can quickly determine the lottery result of the special symbol whose variation is started or the selected variation pattern based on the symbol being executed displayed in the small area Ds1, and the game You can improve your interest. Note that the symbol being executed displayed in the small area Ds1 is not limited to the effect of changing the color, pattern, etc. at the start of variation, but also the effect of changing the color, pattern, etc. during the period in which the special symbol is changing. For example, the timing when the third symbol changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, or the reach display mode (display mode where the left and right symbols are the same symbol and are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the middle symbol is scrolled). It is executed at different timings, or when a specific effect (for example, when a predetermined movie effect is executed) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 85(b), in the small area Ds2, there is a first reserved symbol pedestal m1 indicating that this is an area where a reserved symbol indicating that the highest variation order is the first reserved symbol is displayed. displayed on the left. On the right side of the first reserved symbol pedestal m1, there is a second reserved symbol pedestal m2 indicating that the reservation order is second, a third reserved symbol pedestal m3 indicating that the reservation order is third, and a reservation order. 4th reserved symbol pedestal m4 indicating that is the 4th, 5th reserved symbol pedestal m5 indicating that the pending order is 5th, 6th reserved symbol pedestal indicating that the pending order is 6th m6, the seventh reserved symbol pedestal m7 indicating that the pending order is seventh, and the eighth pending symbol pedestal m8 indicating that the pending order is eighth, are in a state where no pending symbol is displayed. is also displayed.

At the top of the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5 to the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8, if a predetermined number or more of reserved symbols are not displayed, a reserved number suggesting symbol P is displayed, respectively. The reserved number-suggesting pattern P has a variable lid shape in which the character "5" indicating that the reservation order is the fifth is displayed on the upper part of the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5. Similarly, the character "6" indicating that the reservation order is 6th is displayed on the upper part of the sixth reserved symbol pedestal m6, and the character "6" is displayed on the upper part of the seventh reserved symbol pedestal m7, which indicates that the reservation order is 7th. The variable lid shape is displayed with the character "7" indicating that it is the 8th reserved symbol, and the character "8" is displayed on the upper part of the 8th reserved symbol pedestal m8, indicating that the reserved symbol is 8th. It is made up of designs.

As shown in FIG. 85(b), when the number of pending symbols is 0, the pending number suggestion symbol P spans the area from the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5 to the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8. The display is configured so that the player can recognize that the maximum number of pending symbols is eight, including the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, a maximum of 4 pieces are set for the first special symbol, and a maximum of 4 pieces are set for the second special symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, the maximum number is set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the maximum number is not limited to that, and is the sum of the number of reservations for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The configuration may be such that overflow is suppressed from occurring.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85(b), the pedestals m1 to m8 for reserved symbols are displayed to inform the player that the maximum number of reserved symbols that can be displayed is eight. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the reserved symbol pedestals m1 to m8 are not displayed.

A character display pedestal C1 is displayed on the right side of the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8, indicating that this is an area where a preview character is displayed. With this configuration, even when the preview character is not displayed, the player can confirm in advance the area where the character will be displayed, and can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, a description will be given of the hold look-ahead effect, which is one of the effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. This pending look-ahead effect is a state in which a new special symbol variation cannot be started, for example, a state in which a special symbol variation is being executed or a state in which a jackpot game is being executed. Or, the content of the reserved ball (winning information) obtained based on the game ball entering the right second ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640 before the special symbol lottery is actually executed. This is an effect that uses the determination result (preread result) to suggest to the player in advance the result of a special symbol lottery to be executed in the future.

By executing this pending look-ahead effect, it is possible to suggest the result of the special symbol lottery to the player before the special symbol lottery is actually executed. In this case, it is possible to suggest to the player for a longer period that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot. As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation of winning a jackpot for players for a long period of time, and it is also longer than the period from when the special symbol lottery is actually executed until the lottery results are stopped and displayed (fluctuating period). Since the look-ahead effect can be executed using the look-ahead effect period, it is possible to easily increase the variations of the effect to be executed.

If it is determined based on the pre-reading result that a pending pre-read effect is to be executed, a pending symbol is displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds in order to notify the player of the pending symbol that is the target of the pending pre-read effect. Among them, the display mode of a specific pending symbol is changed. In the display screen shown in FIG. 86(a), the display mode of the pending symbol (the pending symbol with the number 4) displayed on the fourth pending symbol pedestal m4 is variably displayed.

Then, the display mode of the pending symbol that is the target of the pending pre-reading performance is changed at various timings, and the pending symbol that is the target of the pending pre-reading performance (the pending symbol with the number 4) is executed. When it moves to the middle symbol pedestal m0, as shown in FIG. 86(b), a variable performance corresponding to the pending symbol that is the target of the pending pre-reading performance is executed. In other words, in the example using FIG. 86, the period is from when the pending symbol that is the target of the pending look-ahead effect is displayed on the fourth pending symbol pedestal m4 until the special symbol lottery is actually executed. It is possible to execute the pending look-ahead performance using a period longer than the period from when the special symbol lottery is executed to when it is stopped and displayed.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the performance mode that changes the display mode of the pending symbol that is the target of the pending look-ahead performance is determined based on the result of the look-ahead process (previous judgment result) and the number of pending balls. For example, the timing at which the pending symbol that is the target of the pending look-ahead effect is displayed, the timing at which the display position of the pending symbol shifts (shifts), and the timing that is executed during the held look-ahead effect, etc. The display mode to be variably displayed is determined based on the timing when a specific performance is executed in the variable performance to show the special symbol lottery result or the timing when the player operates the frame button 22. In this way, in a pending look-ahead performance that is executed over a long period of time, by determining a performance mode that specifies which display mode is to be changed at which timing during the performance period, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort to the player. It is possible to easily execute a series of performances without giving any additional information.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a description will be given of the contents of the effect executed when the number of acquired reserved balls reaches the upper limit number (8). FIG. 87(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit (8), and FIG. 87(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit (8 balls), and FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen displayed in this case.

In this embodiment, when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit, it is determined whether the reserved balls that have been acquired include winning information indicating a jackpot win, and based on the determination result, the performance at the time of reservation upper limit is executed. It is configured to do so. Then, there is a performance mode (Fish Festival) that notifies you that winning information indicating a jackpot win is included (notifies you that you will win a jackpot), and a production mode that informs you that there is a high expectation of winning a jackpot (chance notification). ), it is configured to be able to execute the effect at the time of the hold upper limit.

More specifically, the number-of-held-balls command is output from the main controller 110 and is executed when the number-of-held-balls command indicating that the number of held balls has been acquired is received by the audio lamp control device 113. In the reception process (see S2208 in FIG. 145), it is determined whether the number of balls on hold has reached the upper limit based on the command for the number of balls on hold that was received this time (S2304), and if the number of balls on hold has reached the upper limit, the effect selection at the time of holding upper limit is selected. The performance mode (performance pattern) to be executed is determined with reference to the table 222e (see FIG. 110(b)). Then, it is determined whether the situation is such that the suspension upper limit performance can be performed in the determined performance mode, and if the suspension upper limit performance is executable, the suspension upper limit performance is executed.

Here, in this embodiment, in addition to various effects executed based on the special symbol lottery, the elapsed time after the power is turned on is determined based on time information, and different effects are performed based on the elapsed time. It is configured to be able to perform a mode presentation (period presentation). With this configuration, it is possible to cause multiple pachinko machines 10 to perform period effects at the same timing, so by performing integrated effects using multiple pachinko machines 10, The performance effect can be enhanced more than when the performance is executed by only one pachinko machine 10.

However, if the period in which this period effect is executed overlaps with the period in which the above-mentioned suspension upper limit effect is executed, the display modes of each effect will be mixed, and an effect that is difficult for the player to understand will be executed. There was a problem with being exposed. In addition, as mentioned above, the period effect is to cause multiple pachinko machines 10 to execute the same effect at the same timing, so whether or not to execute the period effect is determined depending on the playing status of each pachinko machine 10. If the execution timing of the period effect is delayed, there is a problem in that the effect of the period effect is significantly reduced.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the conditions for executing the pre-reading effect (pending pre-reading effect, pending upper limit effect) are established, a presentation mode of the pre-reading effect that can be executed is determined, and after that, the effect mode of the pre-reading effect that can be executed is determined. It is configured to determine whether or not the situation is the same based on time information, and to prohibit the execution of the look-ahead effect if the situation is such that it cannot be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the execution period of the period performance and the execution period of the look-ahead performance from overlapping and execution of a performance that is difficult for the player to understand.

Furthermore, the upper limit period of the look-ahead performance that can be executed is calculated based on the number of reserved balls that are subject to the look-ahead performance and the results of the special symbol lottery that will be executed until the end of the look-ahead performance. It is configured to determine whether or not the upper limit period and the period during which the period effect is executed overlap. Thereby, it is possible to make it easier to execute the pre-read effect compared to the case where the prohibition period for prohibiting the execution of the pre-read effect is uniquely defined based on the execution timing of the period effect.

In other words, the look-ahead effect is to execute a look-ahead process on the acquired reserved balls, and to notify (suggestion) the effect based on the look-ahead result to the player before the special symbol lottery is actually executed. ), and the execution period varies greatly depending on the number of reserved pitches that are the target of the look-ahead performance. Therefore, when specifying a prohibition period for prohibiting the execution of a look-ahead performance without specifying the content (performance period) of the look-ahead performance that will actually be executed, the look-ahead performance with the longest performance period, that is, the held ball. This is a look-ahead effect that is executed over the period in which special symbol drawings for the upper limit number (eight in this embodiment) are executed, and the period until the results of each special symbol drawing are displayed (special symbol drawings). Even if the longest period (for example, 60 seconds) is set as the symbol fluctuation display period, the period in which the look-ahead effect is executed and the period in which the period effect is executed are prohibited from overlapping. It was necessary to specify a period.

By specifying the prohibition period in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent the pre-reading effect and the period effect from being executed at the same time, but the prohibition period becomes unnecessarily long and the pre-reading effect is There was a problem in that the execution frequency decreased significantly.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the performance period of the look-ahead performance that can actually be executed is specified, it is determined whether or not the specified performance period overlaps with the period performance, and only when it is determined that it overlaps, the look-ahead performance is executed. It is configured to prohibit execution of the performance. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to execute a look-ahead effect in which a short effect period is set, compared to the case where a specific prohibition period is defined.

Here, the relationship between the type of prefetch effect and the prefetch prohibition period will be explained with reference to FIG. 89(b). FIG. 89(b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of prefetch effect and the prefetch prohibition period. As shown in FIG. 89(b), a prohibition period for prohibiting the execution of the look-ahead effect can be set for the period in which the period effect (SP time effect) is executed, and it is determined that the look-ahead effect is executed. If the timing falls within the above-mentioned prohibition period, execution of the pre-read effect is prohibited. The types of look-ahead performances include normal look-ahead play that does not involve a jackpot game period (look-ahead play that has a relatively short look-ahead play period), and jackpot look-ahead play that involves a jackpot game period (look-ahead play that has a relatively long look-ahead play period). The length of the prefetching prohibition period is varied depending on the type of prefetching effect that can be set as the prefetching effect to be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to execute a look-ahead effect in which a short effect period is set, compared to the case where a specific prohibition period is defined.

In addition, three or more types of look-ahead performances may be provided, and in this case, as an element for roughly specifying the performance period of the look-ahead performance, in addition to the presence or absence of a jackpot game, special symbol fluctuations executed during the look-ahead performance are used. The number of times and special symbol variation time may be used as elements.

Returning to FIG. 87(b), the explanation will be continued. When "Fish Festival" is determined as the performance at the upper limit of holding, 8 holding symbols (8 holding symbols with numbers 1 to 8 displayed in the small area Ds2 of FIG. 87(a)) ) is consumed as a series of performances, a fish festival performance is performed. As shown in FIG. 87(b), when the fish festival performance is executed, a display area HR1 is formed above the main display area Dm, and the text "Fish festival enters" is displayed as a telop. A display mode in which a school of fish is waiting is displayed on the right side of the main display area Dm. Further, in the central part of the main display area Dm, a pseudo symbol variation is continuously displayed in a variable manner until the fish school festival performance ends (until the special symbol winning the jackpot is stopped and displayed).

Furthermore, during the period when the fish school festival effect is being executed, the pending symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds2, and is continuously displayed on the running symbol pedestal m0 of the small area Ds1 until the fish school festival effect ends. A pseudo pending symbol tm0 is displayed. In other words, during the fish festival presentation, it is configured to make it difficult for the player to grasp how many times the special symbol lottery has been executed. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to understand how long the fish festival performance will continue. Further, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which pending symbol has won the jackpot.

In the diagram shown in FIG. 87(b), a display area HR2 and a display area HR3 are formed in the main display area Dm, and the third symbol that is variably displayed in synchronization with the actual special symbol variation is actually displayed in the display area HR3. Information indicating the number of pending symbols is displayed in the display area HR2. Thereby, the actual game situation can be reported even during the fish festival performance in which the pseudo-variable display and the pseudo-in-progress symbol display are executed. In addition, when forming the display area HR2 and the display area HR3, the information displayed in each display area (the actual number of pending symbols and the fluctuation status of the third symbol) is difficult for the player to visually recognize. It's good to display it. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the performance effect of the fish school festival performance in which the pseudo fluctuation display and the pseudo running symbol display are performed from decreasing.

In addition, if the actual number of pending symbols and the fluctuation status of the third symbol can be notified during the fish festival performance, an area different from the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, for example, the game board 13, may be displayed. The actual number of pending symbols and the fluctuation status of the third symbol may be notified by the lighting mode of the provided LED. This reliably prevents the player who is watching the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the fish festival performance from grasping the actual change in the number of pending symbols or the fluctuation status of the third symbol. can do. Furthermore, the actual number of pending symbols and the fluctuation status of the third symbol may be configured not to be reported during the period when the fish festival performance is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 87(b), during the fish school festival production, the pseudo pending symbol tm0 displayed on the running symbol pedestal m0 of the small area Ds1 is displayed in a display format with multiple stars. There is. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the display mode of this pseudo-holding symbol tm0 is determined based on the information (the number of jackpots included in the hold) that is referred to when determining the presentation mode of the hold upper limit effect. The system is configured such that the larger the number of stars, the higher the possibility that there are many jackpots in the hold. In addition, the display mode of the pseudo-holding pattern tm0 may be configured to be displayed variably during the performance period of the fish school festival performance, and in this case, the number of stars may increase during the performance period of the fish school festival performance. It would be good to have a variable display. Thereby, even after the fish school festival performance is executed, that is, even after it is announced that a jackpot will be won soon, the player can be made interested in the fish school festival performance to be executed. Furthermore, a variable display pattern in which the number of stars decreases may be provided as a display mode of the pseudo-reserved symbol tm0 during the performance period of the fish school festival performance. In this case, a new gameplay feature can be provided in which the player expects the fish festival performance to end with a large number of stars. Furthermore, like the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, when a variable pattern in which the number of stars increases or decreases is provided as the display mode of the pseudo-holding symbol tm0 in a configuration that makes it difficult to understand the end timing of the fish festival performance, Since it is difficult to predict the end timing of the fish school festival performance or the change in the number of stars, it is important to always keep people interested in the change in the number of stars until the fish school festival performance ends. Can be done.

Note that the display mode of the pseudo pending symbol tm0 displayed during the fish festival performance may be determined based on information other than the number of jackpots in the hold. For example, if the first jackpot is won after the fish festival performance is executed, It may be determined based on the number of reserved symbols that are consumed until the game is completed, or it may be determined based on the setting values ("1" to "3") set in the pachinko machine 10. Further, the above-mentioned requirements may be combined and determined. Here, when determining the display mode of the pseudo pending symbol tm0 by combining multiple requirements, there are cases where one requirement is advantageous to the player and the other requirements are disadvantageous to the player, and one case where the other requirement is disadvantageous to the player. It is preferable that the same display mode is easily determined in cases where one requirement is disadvantageous to the player and another requirement is advantageous to the player.

Specifically, the display mode in which the number of asterisks is "3" is likely to be determined as the display mode of the pseudo pending symbol tm0 is the situation where the number of jackpots in the pending is 1 and it is set in the pachinko machine 10. In other words, if the setting value indicating the number of jackpots in the hold is 3, that is, the condition indicating the number of jackpots in the hold is disadvantageous to the player, and the condition indicating the setting value is in a situation advantageous to the player. If the number of jackpots is 3 and the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 is 1, that is, the condition indicating the number of jackpots in the hold is advantageous to the player, and the setting value is 1. It is preferable to configure the system to specify cases where the requirements shown are disadvantageous to the player. By configuring this way, when a display mode in which the number of stars is 3 is displayed as the display mode of the pseudo-retention symbol tm0 during the fish school festival performance, the player can receive many jackpots even though the set value is low. The fish school festival performance will be watched carefully until the player actually wins the jackpot while assuming that the number of jackpots is on hold, or that the number of jackpots on hold is small but the set value is high.

Therefore, the longer the period from when the fish festival effect is executed until the jackpot is won, the smaller the number of jackpots in the hold is predicted, and the higher the set value is expected. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the progress of the performance while predicting the degree of advantage of a plurality of requirements in a complex manner, thereby increasing the performance effect.

Note that the display mode of the pseudo reserved symbol tm0 displayed during the fish festival performance may be determined based on other conditions, such as a specific display mode that is displayed only when multiple requirements are advantageous (e.g. , the number of asterisks is 7). With this configuration, it is possible for the player to whom the specific display mode is displayed to enjoy the fish festival performance with peace of mind.

Although detailed illustrations have been omitted, when the fish school festival effect progresses after the display screen shown in FIG. A school of fish effect is executed in which the school of fish that has been waiting moves to the left so as to cover the entire surface of the main display area Dm, and then the symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates that the jackpot has been won. An effect is performed to inform the player that he has won.

In addition, in this embodiment, a pseudo pattern fluctuation display is executed until the pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that a jackpot has been won during the fish school festival performance, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the object displayed in the main display area Dm may be changed from a pseudo symbol to a third symbol in accordance with the timing at which a jackpot variation of the special symbol is executed. With this configuration, it is no longer necessary to provide performance data corresponding to the manner in which the symbols are stopped and displayed as the performance data for displaying the pseudo symbols in a variable manner, and the amount of performance data can be reduced. can.

In other words, when the fish school festival performance is executed, the performance data corresponding to the fluctuating display of pseudo symbols performed in the main display area Dm is set at a speed that makes it difficult for the player to identify each symbol that is being fluctuated. Only performance data corresponding to a mode of variable display (at high speed) is facilitated, and pseudo symbols are varied at high speed until a jackpot variation of a special symbol is executed. When a jackpot variation of the special symbol is executed, a variation display of the third symbol undergoing high-speed variation is executed instead of the pseudo-symbol undergoing high-speed variation. In this case, even in the normal state, the fluctuating display of the third symbol uses a fluctuating display that starts high-speed fluctuating at the same time as the start of the special symbol fluctuating. ) is applied. Thereby, it is possible to stop and display a symbol indicating a jackpot win in the fish school festival performance without using special performance data. Furthermore, since the timing of switching from the pseudo symbol to the third symbol is during the high-speed fluctuation of the symbol, even if the type of symbol displayed in the main display area Dm differs at the moment of switching, the player will not be aware of the situation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress execution of performances that give players a sense of discomfort.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, an example was shown in which the structure was configured so as not to give the player a sense of discomfort when switching between the variable display of the pseudo symbols and the variable display of the third symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to switch between the fluctuating display of the pseudo symbol and the fluctuating display of the third symbol so as to intentionally create a sense of discomfort.For example, the fluctuating display speed may be lower than the above-mentioned high speed, In a situation where the symbols are being displayed slowly enough to allow the player to identify each symbol being displayed, or in a situation where at least one symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the display of the pseudo symbols may be stopped. It may be configured to switch to a variable display of three symbols. With this configuration, it becomes possible for the player to understand that the variable display of the third symbol has been executed (that the jackpot variation of the special symbol has started). A player who wants to know the timing of winning a jackpot as soon as possible can be made to pay close attention to the changing display contents of symbols executed during a fish festival performance in order to find the timing of switching symbols.

In this embodiment, the fish school festival effect is executed only in a situation where at least one pending symbol that wins a jackpot is included, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to be executable only when there are two or more pending symbols. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the added value of performing the fish festival performance. Further, the fish school festival performance may be configured to be performed even in a part (for example, 1%) of cases where there is no jackpot pending in the pending. Thereby, when the fish festival performance is executed, there is a slight possibility that the jackpot won't be won, so the player can play a game with a sense of tension until the jackpot is won.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, the contents of the period effect that is executed when the elapsed time after the power is turned on to the Pachinko machine 10 reaches a predetermined period will be explained. The pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment has an RTC (real-time clock) for measuring the current time, and based on the time information measured by the RTC, the elapsed time since the pachinko machine 10 was powered on. When a predetermined time (approximately 2 hours) has elapsed, a period effect (SP time) of approximately 3 minutes is executed. Normally, in pachinko halls, power is turned on to multiple pachinko machines 10 all at once, so in pachinko halls where multiple pachinko machines 10 of the same type are installed, power is turned on at a specific timing. A period effect (SP time) is executed all at once. By configuring a plurality of pachinko machines 10 to perform performances for the same period at the same timing in this way, the performance effect in pachinko halls can be significantly improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the period effect is configured to be executed based on the elapsed time after the power is turned on, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the time measured by the RTC reaches a predetermined time. Additionally, it may be configured to execute a period effect. With this configuration, even if the timing of turning on the power to the pachinko machines 10 is different, or if a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 10 and it is necessary to temporarily shut off the power, multiple pachinko machines can be connected. By configuring the machines 10 to perform performances during the same period at the same timing, the performance effect in the pachinko hall can be significantly improved.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 108, but in this embodiment, the performance period in the pachinko machine 10 is divided into a normal performance period, an SP time period, and a SP time period based on the time information measured by the RTC. It is configured to be switchable with the SP time preparation period indicating that it will arrive soon. If the normal presentation period is set as the presentation period, the normal presentation is performed regardless of the time information measured by the RTC. In addition, if the SP time preparation period is set, the same performance as the normal performance period will be performed, and the display will display the message "SP time will start soon" to indicate that the SP time period will soon arrive. ” is displayed as a caption in the display area HR1 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and when the remaining time until the SP time period arrives is 30 seconds, the SP time period arrives. A countdown display will be displayed to show the number of seconds until the end.

When the SP time period is set, a dedicated stage (background image) is displayed and a dedicated music piece is output from the audio output device 226. In this embodiment, the normal performance period, the SP time preparation period, and the switching timing of the SP time period are predefined, and after the normal performance period of 90 to 120 minutes, the SP time preparation period of about 2 minutes is set. , then an SP time period of about 3 minutes is set. In other words, the SP time period is specified to be shorter than the normal performance period. With this configuration, it is possible to add value to various effects performed during the SP time period, so players who are playing on the pachinko machine 10 can be informed of the next SP time. It is possible to make the player want to continue playing the game until the period is set.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable performance executed during the SP time period is more effective than the variable performance performed during the normal performance period (the performance performed based on the special symbol lottery). The system is configured such that advantageous benefits can be given to players regardless of the result of the lottery. Specifically, when the variable effect is executed during the SP time period, the setting suggestion effect for suggesting the current setting value is executed more than when the variable effect is executed during the normal effect period. It is designed to be easy. With this configuration, it is possible to further increase the player's desire to play during the SP time period.

Furthermore, as described above, the present embodiment is configured so that the setting suggestion effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect executed during the SP time period. Therefore, in a state where the SP time period is set, a player who has not shot a ball (a player who has not executed a special symbol lottery) is configured to be unable to execute the setting suggestion performance. With this configuration, it is possible to further increase the player's desire to play during the SP time period.

In the gaming machine configured in this way, by executing many special symbol drawings during the SP time period, it is possible to execute many setting suggestion performances, so that it is possible to make the player play the game with enthusiasm. However, for example, if a jackpot was won immediately after the SP time period was set, it would not be possible to perform many special symbol drawings during the SP time period, and the current setting value would be There was a problem that it became difficult to provide information for estimating. In other words, when a situation favorable to the player occurs in which the player wins a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, a situation disadvantageous to the player (a situation in which it is difficult to collect information for estimating the set value) is created, and the player wins the jackpot. There was a problem in that the player's desire to play decreased depending on the timing of the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the performance period (normal performance period, SP time preparation period, SP time period) set in the pachinko machine 10 at the execution timing (start timing) of the jackpot game, and the end of the jackpot game. Based on the performance period (normal performance period, SP time preparation period, SP time period) set in the pachinko machine 10 at the timing, the performance mode of the jackpot game performance executed during the jackpot game and the end screen of the jackpot game It is configured to determine the display mode displayed on the screen.

Specifically, in a situation where it is difficult to execute a setting suggestion performance using a variable performance due to the execution of a jackpot game, the setting suggestion performance is configured to be more likely to be executed as a jackpot game performance. There is. With this configuration, even if a jackpot game is executed during a period including at least the SP time period, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing.

Here, with reference to FIG. 88(a), the content of the performance (period performance) performed during the SP time period (SP time) will be explained. FIG. 88(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen at the time when about 50 seconds have passed since the SP time was set. As shown in FIG. 88(a), when the SP time is set, a more glittering background image (stage) than in the normal performance period is displayed as a background image (stage) in the main display area Dm as a period performance, and the display In the area HR1, a comment "SP time in progress" is displayed as a telop as a notification mode to notify the player that the current time is in the SP time period. Furthermore, in the display area HR4 formed at the upper left of the main display area Dm, a remaining time display mode for indicating the remaining time of the SP time period is displayed, and in FIG. 88(a), the remaining time is 2. A display mode indicating that the time is minutes and 10 seconds is displayed.

In addition, display areas HR5 and HR6 are formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, and display the contents of commands (mission contents) to be executed during the SP time period and the current degree of achievement of the mission contents. Ru. Here, in this embodiment, as an added value that can be given to the player during the SP time period, a setting suggestion effect that can suggest the current setting value can be executed. Further, when the mission contents displayed in the display areas HR5 and HR6 are cleared, the setting suggestion effect can be executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the mission contents set during the SP time period include mission contents that are easy to accomplish (first mission contents) and mission contents that are more difficult to accomplish than the first mission contents (second mission contents). It is configured such that one mission content can be selected from among a plurality of mission content including . The selection ratio of each mission content is configured to vary depending on the setting value of the pachinko machine 10.

In other words, the mission content set during the SP time period itself includes elements for estimating the setting value, and by completing the set mission, new information for estimating the setting value is obtained. It is configured so that it can be acquired. With this configuration, it is possible to provide added value (setting estimation elements) during the SP time period even for players who were not able to complete the mission, so it is possible to give added value (setting estimation element) even to players who were unable to complete the mission. It is possible to make the player play the game with enthusiasm. In addition, additional value (setting estimation element) can be added by completing a mission, so that the player can be more motivated to play the game.

On the display screen shown in FIG. 88(a), the mission content is when the number of special symbol fluctuations executed during the SP time period reaches 30, or when the number of reach effects executed during the SP time period is displayed. This shows that a mission has been set to be achieved when the number of special symbol changes reaches 5 times, and the characters "number of changes" are displayed in the display area HR5, indicating that the number of special symbol changes is the target, and the mission is completed. "30" is displayed in the number of achievements Pb indicating the number of times to achieve , and "5" is displayed in the current number Pa indicating the number of times executed at the present time (number of special symbol variations). Then, in the display area HR6, the characters "Number of reach" are displayed indicating that the number of reach effects is the target, and "5" is displayed in the number of achievements Pd indicating the number of times to accomplish the mission, and the current “0” is displayed in the current number of times Pc indicating the number of times the game has been executed (the number of times the reach effect has been performed).

In other words, the display screen shown in FIG. 88(a) is in a state where the fifth special symbol variation is being executed after the SP time period is set, and the reach effect has not been executed even once during the SP time period. This is a display screen that shows that the computer is not in use.

An example of a state in which 1 minute and 5 seconds have passed since the display screen shown in FIG. 88(a) was displayed will be described with reference to FIG. 88(b). FIG. 88(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when 2 minutes and 55 seconds have passed since the SP time period was set. The state shown in FIG. 88(b) is a state in which the number of special symbol variations executed during the SP time period is 30 and the mission has been achieved, as shown in the display area HR5. In the center of the main display area Dm, a treasure chest 801 and a button icon 802 for guiding the player to press the frame button 22 are provided as an added value effect provided when the mission is accomplished. is displayed. When the player presses the frame button 22 in this state, an effect in which the treasure box 801 is opened is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the content of the effect when the frame button 22 is pressed while the display screen shown in FIG. 88(b) is displayed will be explained. FIG. 89(a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen that is displayed when a privilege (setting estimation element) is granted based on achieving a mission during the SP time period. FIG. 89(a) shows a state in which the frame button 22 is pressed while the display screen of FIG. 88(b) is displayed and two seconds have elapsed, and the display area HR4 is A remaining time display mode indicating that the remaining time is 2 seconds is displayed.

Then, the treasure box 801 is opened, and "A" is displayed as the setting guess element 801a. Further, the word "CLEAR" is displayed indicating that the mission for the number of special symbol variations shown in the display area HR5 has been accomplished.

When a mission is achieved during the SP time period and a setting inferred element 801a is given (displayed), a display area HR7 is formed and the already acquired setting inferred element 801a is displayed as a history. are doing. With this configuration, when multiple setting estimation elements 801a are acquired during one SP time period, the actual setting values can be determined by viewing the history display displayed in the display area HR7. can be easily predicted.

Here, the contents of the setting guessing element given to the player when the setting suggestion effect is executed will be explained. In this embodiment, the mode of the setting guessing factor that can be given to the player is "A", which has a low setting guessing effect and is selected at almost the same rate regardless of the setting value, and "A", which has a low setting guessing effect, and Aspect "B" indicates that the current setting value is not the most disadvantageous setting value for the player (setting 1), and a slightly higher possibility that the currently set setting value is a high setting (setting 3). The mode “C” indicates that the currently set value is likely to be the high setting (setting 3), and the mode “D” indicates that the currently set value is likely to be the high setting (setting 3). 3) is configured to be able to be determined.

In addition, display modes corresponding to setting inference elements "A" to "E" are defined for each of various presentation modes executed as setting suggestion presentation. Therefore, when a setting suggestion effect is executed, first, the setting inference element to be given by the current setting suggestion effect is determined, and then the presentation mode of the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the determined setting inference element is determined. It is configured so that In addition, in the case where a plurality of setting inference elements can be provided in one setting suggestion effect, it is preferable to predefine the presentation mode of the setting suggestion effect in correspondence with the combination of the plurality of setting inference elements. . By configuring in this way, for example, if two aspects "D" are determined as multiple setting inference elements, the result will be higher than when one aspect "D" and one aspect "C" are determined. , it becomes possible to execute a setting suggestion effect in a composite effect mode that indicates that there is a high possibility that a high setting is set. Therefore, a performance that makes it easier for the player to understand the setting value is created when multiple setting guessing elements are added to a single setting suggestion performance, rather than when a single setting guessing element is given. can be executed.

Note that the mode type of the setting estimation element is not limited to the above-mentioned modes "A" to "E", and may include, for example, a mode type indicating that the setting value is an odd number, or a mode type indicating that the setting value is an even number. A storage means is provided that can store the mode type that indicates that a setting change operation has been performed, the mode type that indicates that a setting change operation has been executed, and the previously set setting value, and the current set value is higher than the previously set setting value. It may also be possible to determine the mode type indicating that the current setting value is lower than the previously set setting value, or the like. Further, although three types of setting values are provided as setting values for the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that four or more types of setting values can be set. In this way, by configuring the system so that four or more types of setting values can be set, and by increasing the types of settings estimation elements, it is possible to have variations in the presentation form of the setting suggestion effect, and the obtained setting estimation It is possible to provide the user with the pleasure of estimating the current setting value from various viewpoints based on the aspect type of the element.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 89(a), setting estimation elements acquired within a predetermined period (SP time period) can be displayed in history. When an element is acquired, each setting guessing element may be offset based on a predetermined rule, and only the remaining setting guessing element may be displayed. The configuration may be such that the analyzed setting value prediction information is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent players from becoming confused due to acquiring too many setting guessing elements, and the more setting guessing elements they acquire, the more accurate the setting guessing becomes. Since it is possible to make it easier to execute, it is possible to make the player play the game with enthusiasm in order to obtain the setting guessing element.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 that has a function that can display the history of setting guessing elements acquired in the past is equipped with an erasing means that can erase the history information of the setting guessing elements acquired in the past when the player ends the game. It's good to have one. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to reliably prevent other players from knowing the acquired setting estimation element.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the content of the effect executed when the SP time period, which is the period effect, ends will be explained. As described above, the SP time period is set based on time information measured by the RTC. Therefore, depending on the fluctuation status of the special symbol fluctuation, if the SP time period ends with the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation in execution being short, the SP time period may end with the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation in execution being long. When the SP time period ends, there are cases where the SP time period ends without any special symbol variation being executed.

Here, as mentioned above, during the SP time period, it is configured to execute a different effect (period effect) from other periods, and the start timing and end timing of the period effect are at a specific time (specific time ), the performance effect can be enhanced by synchronizing and executing the same performance on a plurality of pachinko machines 10.

Therefore, for example, if the period effect is configured to continue until the special symbol variation that is being executed ends at the end timing of the SP time period, the end timing of the period effect in each pachinko machine 10 will be different, and the effect of the effect will be different. There was a problem that the Therefore, regardless of the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation being executed at the end timing of the SP time period, at the timing when the SP time period ends, the period effect is executed in an end mode that indicates that the SP time period has ended. , a technique is conceivable in which the ending mode continues until the special symbol variation being executed ends.

By using the above-mentioned technology, it becomes possible to synchronize the timing at which the period performance of the end mode is executed at each pachinko machine 10, and it becomes possible to have a plurality of pachinko machines 10 execute a performance with a sense of unity. However, for example, if the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation that is being executed at the end timing of the SP time period is long, the period of time for which the period effect of the end mode continues will simply become longer, and this will cause problems for the player. There is a problem in that the monotonous performance deteriorates and the game becomes boring quickly.

In contrast, in this embodiment, if the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation being executed at the end timing of the SP time period is longer than the predetermined time (20 seconds), a special effect (special residual variation effect) is performed. It is configured to be executable. In this way, by configuring a special performance to be executed when a predetermined condition is met at the end timing of the period performance, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the period performance, while also improving the performance after the period performance ends. It is also possible to enhance the performance effect for games.

Further, in this embodiment, the special residual variation effect is executed depending on the length of the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation being executed at the end timing of the SP time period. In other words, if a player who senses that the SP time period is about to end stops the game just before the end of the SP time period, it becomes difficult for the player to perform special symbol fluctuations that straddle the end timing of the SP time period. Therefore, the configuration is such that the special variation effect is difficult to execute.

With this configuration, it is possible to motivate the player to continue playing the game until the SP time period in which the period effect is executed ends.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a setting suggestion performance for suggesting the currently set setting value, that is, a performance including information advantageous to the player, is configured to be executable as a special residual fluctuation performance. Therefore, when the SP time period ends, players who are eager to obtain advantageous information are made interested in the variation time of the special symbol variation that is executed across the end timing of the SP time period. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Here, with reference to FIG. 90(a), the display screen when the special residual variation effect is executed will be described. FIG. 90(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the time when the period presentation (SP time) ends. It is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a residual variation effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 90(a), the text "SP time ends" is displayed as a caption in the display area HR1 as an end guide to indicate that the SP time period has ended, and the remaining time is displayed in the display area HR4. A remaining time display mode indicating that the time is 0 seconds (end) is displayed. Then, the period until the currently running special symbol fluctuation ends (until the remaining fluctuation time becomes 0 seconds) is a period in which the setting suggestion performance is executed with high probability (higher probability than other periods). As a guidance notification mode to indicate that the time is up, a comment "Chance to get a large amount of suggestive effects" is displayed in a manner as if the character J0 displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is speaking.

Further, on the right side of the main display area Dm, a display area HR7 is formed as a history display area for displaying the history of performance results (performance modes) executed as setting suggestion performance. The display screen shown in FIG. 90(a) is a display screen that is displayed immediately after reaching the suggestive performance high certainty period, so although the history of the performance results is not displayed in the display area HR7, It is possible to display the history of a plurality of setting suggestion performances executed during the confirmation period.

With this configuration, when multiple setting suggestion performances are executed in a short period of time, in particular, at least the execution period of one setting suggestion performance and another setting suggestion performance different from that one setting suggestion performance Even if the player is unable to grasp all of the multiple setting suggestion effects being executed in the case where some of them are executed overlappingly, the player can still understand the contents (effect results) displayed in the history display area. It is possible to easily grasp the contents of the setting suggestion performance that has already been executed.

Note that the display mode displayed in this history display area may be a display mode for showing the presentation mode of the setting suggestion presentation that was actually executed, or the setting suggestion contents included in the setting suggestion presentation that was actually executed. It may also be a display mode for indicating. Here, as a production mode of the setting suggestion production that was actually executed, for example, one character from among a plurality of characters can be displayed as the setting suggestion production, and the setting suggestion content ( For example, if the suggestions (suggesting that the set value is an even number, suggesting that it is an odd number, suggesting that it is not a specific setting value) are different, It is preferable that the history display area is configured to display a display mode (for example, an icon mode imitating a character image) that allows the player to identify the type of character displayed as the setting suggestion effect.

When performing such a setting suggestion effect, since there are multiple types of presentation modes to indicate the same setting suggestion content, the settings for the player are determined based on the multiple display modes displayed in the history display area. It is possible to provide the fun of predicting values.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode displayed in the display area HR7 (history display area) is configured to be displayed until a predetermined period has elapsed (until the suggestion performance high accuracy period ends). However, the configuration is such that all or part of the display mode displayed in the display area HR7 (history display mode) can be arbitrarily deleted (hidden) by the player operating the operating means (operation button 22). You may do so. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the history display corresponding to the setting suggestion effect that the player has already grasped from being continuously displayed in the display area HR7. , when a setting suggestion performance is executed in a performance mode most advantageous to the player (a performance mode that notifies the player that the setting is the highest), a display mode indicating the performance mode is continuously displayed in the history display area. By storing the settings, it is possible to prevent players who are not playing the game from easily understanding the setting values.

Further, in this embodiment, the display area HR7 is formed at a specific location in the main display area Dm, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display area HR7 may be formed so that the player can select any position. It's okay. With this configuration, it is possible for the player himself to easily understand the display mode, and to form the history display area in a location that is difficult for other players to understand.

Note that in this embodiment, the history display area is configured to display a display mode based on the performance mode of the executed setting suggestion performance, but the present invention is not limited to this; If a plurality of display modes satisfy a predetermined condition, a new display mode based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition may be displayed. For example, a new display mode may be displayed as a display mode displayed in the history display area. , when a predetermined number (for example, 3) of display modes that make it difficult to grasp the actual setting value (weak suggestion mode) are displayed, a display mode that makes it easier to grasp the actual setting value (strong suggestion mode) is displayed. The configuration may be such that the mode) is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is easier to understand the setting value if many setting suggestion performances are executed during the suggestion performance high accuracy period, so it is easier for the player to understand the setting value during the suggestion performance high accuracy period. It is possible to make the player play the game while making the player expect that many setting suggestion effects will be executed during the game.

In addition, an upper limit (for example, 5) is set on the number of display modes that can be displayed in the history display area, and the display modes are displayed up to the upper limit in accordance with the execution order of the setting suggestion effects during the high-accuracy suggestion effect period. If a strong suggestion mode is displayed based on multiple weak suggestion modes being displayed, the multiple weak suggestion modes are deleted and a new display mode is displayed in the history display area. It may be configured so that it can be displayed.

Furthermore, in this case, it may be configured such that a deletion condition different from the display condition of the strong suggestion mode can be set, so that the weak suggestion mode is erased when the deletion condition is satisfied. It is preferable to configure such that the erasing condition is satisfied when a specific performance is executed during the guarantee period or when the player executes a specific operation on the frame button 22. This allows more display modes to be displayed in the history display area based on the fulfillment of the deletion condition, making it easier for the player to predict the set value.

The display modes that are deleted from the history display area based on the fulfillment of the deletion condition are erased in the order of the longest display period displayed in the history display area, that is, the display modes that were displayed first. It is good to configure. As a result, the display mode displayed in the long-term history display area, that is, the display mode that the player is likely to have already grasped, is erased in order, and a new display mode can be displayed, so the history display It is possible to prevent the display mode from disappearing immediately after being displayed in the area, making it difficult for the player to grasp the setting suggestion contents of the setting suggestion performance.

Alternatively, the type of display mode displayed in the history display area may be determined, and the type of display mode in which it is difficult to grasp the actual setting value (for example, weakly suggestive mode) may be deleted in order. By configuring in this way, as the suggestion performance high certainty period progresses, a display mode in which it is easy to predict the setting value becomes easier to be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while making the player expect that the suggestive performance high accuracy period continues for a long time and that many setting suggestive performances will be executed during the period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90(b), the content of the effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the suggestive effect high certainty period will be explained. FIG. 90(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the suggestive performance high certainty period.

As shown in FIG. 90(b), during the suggestion performance high certainty period, setting suggestion performance is executed using various performances. Specifically, the setting suggestion effects 801a and 801b corresponding to the variable effects executed in the main display area Dm, and the pedestal m0 for the currently executed symbol displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds are displayed. It is configured so that a setting suggestion effect 801c corresponding to the reserved symbol and a setting suggestion effect 801d corresponding to the character J0 are executed.

Then, setting suggestion contents (A to D) included in various setting suggestion performances executed during the suggestion performance high accuracy period are displayed in the history display area of the display area HR7. In addition, in the upper center of the main display area Dm, the characters "5 seconds left until the end of the specialization zone" are displayed as a remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the suggestive performance high certainty period. That is, FIG. 90(b) is a display screen in a state where the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation being executed is 5 seconds.

Here, the setting suggestion content included in each presentation mode of the setting suggestion presentation in this embodiment will be explained. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is configured to be able to set three settings (settings 1 to 3) that vary the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery. By turning on the power in a state in which the power is not turned on and a specific operating condition is satisfied, it is possible to shift to a setting change state in which the set value can be changed. Then, by determining the setting value by performing a decision operation to determine an arbitrary setting value in the setting change state, the game can be played with the game specifications (jackpot probability of special symbols) corresponding to the determined setting value. executed.

As mentioned above, since the jackpot probability of special symbols is different depending on the setting value, the operation to change the setting value performed in the setting change state is a game degree that changes the degree of advantage to the player. This is a variable operation. In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is configured to vary depending on the setting value, but the jackpot probability of the special symbol is an element (setting difference element) for varying the degree of advantage to the player. For example, the rate at which an advantageous gaming state (for example, variable probability state) that is advantageous to the player is set as a gaming state after the end of a jackpot game may be used as a setting difference factor, or a special setting difference factor may be used. The probability that the result of the symbol lottery will be a small win in which a winning game different from the jackpot game is executed (small win probability) other than the jackpot may be used as a setting difference factor, or an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player ( For example, the winning probability of the ending lottery (fall lottery) for ending the variable probability state (the probability of ending the variable probability state and moving to another gaming state) may be used as the setting difference element. Furthermore, the ease of execution of the special symbol lottery may be used as a setting difference factor, for example, setting a difference in the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery, or the opening operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a during the normal symbol lottery game. The ease with which the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 to which the electric accessory 640a is attached may be varied by changing the number for each setting.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the set value is configured to be changeable based on the technical idea that the degree of advantage of the player varies depending on the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the degree of advantage of the player is the same. A setting difference element may be provided so that the types of benefits that are likely to be given to players can be varied, although only to a certain degree.For example, when the first setting value is set, the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery may be changed. If the configuration is such that the rate at which the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game (probability change transition rate) is the first value, and a second setting value different from the first setting value is set. In this case, the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery is a second value lower than the first value (hard to hit), and the rate at which the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game (probability variable transition ratio) is higher than the first ratio. It is preferable to configure the ratio to be the second ratio (in which a variable probability state is likely to be set).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide different gameplay characteristics with game specifications that can give players the same degree of advantage, thereby suppressing players from getting bored with the game early. be able to.

Returning to FIG. 91, the explanation will be continued. This embodiment is configured to be able to execute a setting suggestion effect that includes a suggestion mode for suggesting a setting value using some or all of various effects. ), the setting suggestion effects 801a and 801b corresponding to the variable effects executed in the main display area Dm and the pedestal m0 for the currently running symbol displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds are displayed. The configuration is such that a setting suggestion effect 801c corresponding to the reserved symbol and a setting suggestion effect 801d corresponding to the character J0 are executed.

Each setting suggestion production has a production mode predefined according to the mode of the base production. For example, the setting suggestion production 801a, 801b that corresponds to the fluctuating production is based on the third symbol that is changing. This is an effect in which a suggestion icon for suggesting a setting value pops out from the third symbol that is stopped and displayed, and different types of suggestion icons (displayed by alphabetical type in the figure) are displayed depending on the content of the setting suggestion.

The setting suggestion effect 801c corresponding to the running symbol pedestal m0 is such that the suggestion icon is displayed in the process of changing the display mode of the running symbol (displayed as a round symbol in the figure) displayed on the running symbol pedestal m0. This is an effect that is displayed, and different types of suggestion icons (displayed by alphabetical type in the figure) are displayed depending on the setting suggestion content. Further, the setting suggestion effect 801d corresponding to the character J0 is an effect in which the character J0 issues a comment, and different comments (indicated by alphabetical type in the figure) are displayed depending on the content of the setting suggestion.

That is, the performance mode of the setting suggestion performance to be executed is predefined according to the content of the setting suggestion and the type of the corresponding performance. By configuring in this way, the setting suggestion presentation that corresponds to each presentation (a presentation for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery) is more effective than when the same setting suggestion presentation is executed regardless of the type of the corresponding presentation. It is possible to make it easier to relate to each other, and it is possible to enhance the production effect.

In addition, in this way, if the performance for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery and the corresponding setting suggestion performance are related to each other, if the performance corresponding to the current performance is executed. In addition, it is preferable to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the performance is a setting suggestion performance or a part of a performance to indicate the result of the special symbol lottery. With this configuration, when an additional performance is executed for the currently executed performance, it is possible to enjoy predicting the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 based on the performance mode of the additional performance, and to predict the set value of the pachinko machine 10 based on the performance mode of the additional performance, and to predict the set value of the pachinko machine 10 based on the performance mode of the additional performance. Since the player can be provided with the pleasure of predicting the result of the lottery, the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in this case, as the production mode of the additional production, it is likely to be selected (execution It is preferable to make it possible to set the special presentation mode. With this configuration, when an additional performance is executed in the special performance mode, there is a possibility that a jackpot has been won in the special symbol lottery that is being executed, or the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 is There is a high possibility that the setting value is advantageous to the player (high setting).

Therefore, if the additional performance of the special performance mode is executed in a state where it is difficult for the next jackpot game to be executed (there is a high possibility that the special symbol lottery won and won) (for example, a low probability state of the special symbol), the game The player is expected to win a jackpot, and the state (for example, variable probability state) in which the next jackpot game is likely to be executed (high possibility of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery) is maintained until the next jackpot game is executed (jackpot Until the conditions for executing the game are met), the jackpot game ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the contents of the setting suggestion effect will be explained. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing the types of suggestion modes included in the setting suggestion rendering. As shown in FIG. 91, in this embodiment, five types (A to D) of production patterns (suggestion modes) can be set as production patterns (suggestion modes) for setting suggestion production. A production pattern (suggestion mode) is determined by referring to a setting suggestion production selection table 222c to be described later based on the set value.

The setting suggestion effect selection table 222c is defined so that the selection ratio of each effect pattern (suggestion mode) differs depending on the setting value. This allows for production patterns (suggestion mode) in which only specific setting values have a high selection rate, production patterns (suggestion mode) in which multiple setting values that meet predetermined conditions have a higher selection rate than other setting values, etc. It is possible to create a performance pattern such as a performance pattern (suggestion mode) that has a high selection rate even if the set value is .

As shown in FIG. 91, presentation pattern A (suggestion mode A) is a presentation pattern (suggestion mode) in which the selection rate is high regardless of the setting value, in other words, the setting value is difficult to predict. When a setting suggestion performance including the mode of performance pattern A is executed, it is difficult for the player to predict the setting value, so this suggestion mode is a suggestion mode (weak suggestion mode) that is disadvantageous to the player. ). Note that this weak suggestion mode is not only a suggestion mode that is defined so that the selection ratio is the same for each setting value, but also a mode that is defined with a certain degree of error that makes it difficult for the player to discern the difference. This suggestion mode also falls under the weak suggestion mode because it is more difficult for the player to predict the setting value when the suggestion mode is displayed than when other suggestion modes are displayed.

Production pattern B (suggestion mode B) is a production pattern (suggestion mode) in which a selection ratio is defined so that only a specific setting value (setting 1) is not selected. When the setting suggestion performance including the aspect of performance pattern B is executed, it can be understood that the setting value is not setting 1, that is, the setting value that is most disadvantageous to the player. In this way, even when indicating to the player that the setting value is not a specific one, by eliminating one candidate from among multiple candidates (setting value), the player can easily understand the setting value that has been set. can be easily predicted.

In this embodiment, by executing the setting suggestion performance of suggestion mode B, the setting value (setting 1) that is most disadvantageous to the player is denied, so that the setting value that is most disadvantageous to the player is It can make you realize what's not there. Therefore, when suggestion mode B is first displayed as a setting suggestion effect, it is possible to make the player predict the setting value while continuing to play the game. In addition, if suggestion mode B is displayed after the setting suggestion effect of another suggestion mode (for example, a suggestion mode that notifies that the setting value is an odd number) is executed, the content of the displayed suggestion mode By combining these, it is possible to improve the prediction accuracy of the setting value.

Note that in this embodiment, the performance pattern (suggestion mode) B is configured to deny the setting value (setting 1) that is most disadvantageous to the player, but a specific setting value (intermediate setting or most advantageous setting) ), or a specific range (for example, settings 1 to 2) may be denied, or there may be multiple types of suggestion mode B (for example, suggestion mode B1 that negates setting 1, and setting 2). For example, if a setting suggestion effect is executed in a suggestion mode that negates the setting that is most advantageous to the player (Setting 3, etc.), the player who grasps it can easily be quickly moved to another pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game for a long time unnecessarily.

Production pattern C (suggestion mode C) and production pattern D (suggestion mode D) are production patterns (suggestion mode) in which the selection ratio is defined such that the higher the setting value, the more selections are made. It is specified that the setting difference in the selection ratio is larger in suggestion mode D than in suggestion mode D. In other words, it is specified that the setting suggestion effect of suggestion mode C and the setting suggestion effect of suggestion mode D are more likely to be executed with a high setting value (setting 3) than with a low setting value (setting 1).

Furthermore, since it is specified that the setting difference in the selection ratio is larger in suggestion mode D than in suggestion mode C, the setting suggestion effect of suggestion mode D is executed for the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect of suggestion mode C. The greater the number of times, the higher the possibility that a high setting value is set.

In this way, by varying the selection ratio for each setting as multiple suggestion modes that can be selected regardless of which setting value is set, the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect for each suggestion mode can be compounded. It is possible to have the player predict the setting value by making a specific determination.

In addition, when a plurality of suggestion modes are provided such as suggestion mode C and suggestion mode D mentioned above, in which the higher the setting value is set, the higher the selection rate is, the selection rate of suggestion mode C at each setting value is It is preferable to define each selection ratio so that the difference between the selection ratio and the selection ratio of suggestion mode D becomes larger as the setting value becomes higher. As a result, the higher the set value is set, the more likely it is that a difference will occur between the number of executions between suggestion mode C and suggestion mode D, making it easier for the player to predict the set value.

On the other hand, each selection ratio may be defined so that the difference between the selection ratio of suggestion mode C and the selection ratio of suggestion mode D in each set value is equal. With this configuration, the total number of executions of the setting suggestion performance of suggestion mode C and the setting suggestion performance of suggestion mode D is greater when the setting value is high than when the setting value is low. Therefore, for the player, the setting value is predicted by referring only to the number of executions of the setting suggestion performance of suggestion mode D, or the total number of executions of the setting suggestion performance of suggestion mode C and the setting suggestion performance of suggestion mode D. The player can choose whether to predict the set value by referring to the number of times of the set value or to predict the set value by compositely determining the number of times of both, thereby increasing the variation for predicting the set value. This makes it possible to prevent players from getting bored with the game early.

Production pattern E (suggestion mode E) can be selected only when setting 3, which is the most advantageous setting value for the player, is set in this pachinko machine 10 (it is very rarely selected in cases other than setting 3). (a concept that also includes cases) is a production pattern (suggestion mode). In other words, when the setting suggestion performance of suggestion mode E is executed, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the most advantageous setting value (setting 3) has been set.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, this suggestion mode E is specified so that the selection rate is extremely low compared to other suggestion modes, and if the pachinko machine 10 with setting 3 is played all day long. Even so, the selection ratio is defined so that the probability that the setting suggestion effect of suggestion mode E will be executed is about 50%. By setting the selection ratio low in this way, the player who has executed the setting suggestion performance of suggestion mode E is informed that the setting value (setting 3) that is most advantageous to the player is set ( At the same time, it is possible to provide a sense of superiority for executing a performance with a low probability of execution.

Furthermore, by lowering the rate at which the setting suggestion effect of suggestion mode E is executed, it is possible to leave open the possibility that setting 3 is set even in pachinko machines 10 where the setting suggestion effect of suggestion mode E is not executed. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 92, a description will be given of the elapse of time from power-on in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment and the flow of the period effect to be executed. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the elapse of time from power-on and the flow of fluctuation effects, and FIG. 92(a) is a transition diagram showing the elapse of time from power-on, and FIG. 92(b) 92(c) is a diagram showing the production period at each time, and FIG. 92(c) is a diagram showing variation pattern A as an example showing the relationship between the period in which special symbol variation is executed and the production period. Yes, and FIG. 92(d) is a diagram showing a variation pattern B as an example showing the relationship between the period in which the special symbol variation is executed and the performance period.

The pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is configured to set different presentation periods based on the elapsed time since the power is turned on. The performance period (SP time period) during which the performance (performance) is executed can be set. This period performance (SP time performance) is a performance executed based on the elapsed time from power-on regardless of the presence or absence of special symbol changes, so multiple pachinko machines 10 execute the period performance at the same time. Become. By having the plurality of pachinko machines 10 perform a performance with a sense of unity in this way, it is possible to perform a performance that has an impact on the players, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the performance mode executed as a period performance is a performance mode that is completed by a single pachinko machine 10, when a period performance is executed on multiple pachinko machines 10 at the same time, each pachinko machine 10, the same performance mode is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a performance mode for a period performance, a plurality of (3 types) production mode types can be set, and adjacent pachinko machines 10 are executed in three It may also be configured such that one period effect is executed using the machine. In this case, the performance mode types of the period performance are a first performance mode type corresponding to the left pachinko machine 10 among the three machines, a second performance mode type corresponding to the center pachinko machine 10 among the three machines, and three. It is preferable that a third performance mode type corresponding to the right side Pachinko machine 10 among the machines is prepared in advance, and the performance mode type can be determined individually according to the installation situation of the Pachinko machine 10 to be installed.

This makes it possible to set the performance mode type for the installed pachinko machines 10, and when performing a performance for one period using three pachinko machines 10, the performance mode types can be set in an orderly manner. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the performance effect of the period performance is deteriorated due to the lack of performance.

In this case, the production mode types for the period production include a production mode type that corresponds to a period production that can be completed with one machine, a production mode type that corresponds to a period production that can be completed with a small number of machines (for example, three machines), and a production mode type that corresponds to a period production that can be completed with a small number of machines (for example, three machines). It is preferable that the type of performance mode corresponding to a period performance that can be completed with a number of machines (for example, 20 machines) can be selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the performance mode of the period performance according to the installation situation of the plurality of pachinko machines 10, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect according to the installation situation.

Further, in this embodiment, the SP time preparation period is set as a performance period for notifying the player in advance that the SP time period described above will arrive. Specifically, the SP time preparation period is set in the period from when the elapsed time from power-on becomes 2 minutes before the start timing of the SP time period until the SP time period is set. This SP time preparation period is used to notify players in advance that the SP time period will be set soon in an easy-to-understand manner.

During this SP time preparation period, in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a performance similar to the normal performance performed during the normal performance period is performed, and the normal performance is The remaining period (remaining time) until the SP time period is set is displayed on the performance execution screen. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily grasp the remaining time until the period effect is executed, and for example, it is possible to let the player take a break within the remaining time until the period effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide player-friendly gameplay.

As shown in FIG. 92(a), when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the elapsed time is measured based on the clock device (RTC) 292. Then, when the elapsed time exceeds 88 minutes, the SP time preparation period for indicating to the player that the performance period (SP time period) set between 90 and 93 minutes has arrived will begin. It is set within the range of 88 minutes to 90 minutes of elapsed time. Then, when the first performance period (SP time period) ends, a performance period in which the normal performance is performed is set again. Thereafter, the SP preparation period, SP time period, and normal period are set in order based on the elapsed time.

It should be noted that each starring appearance period is set based on the elapsed time, and is configured to be set based on the production switching table 222b (see FIG. 108), which will be described later. That is, the performance switching table 222b has a plurality of performance modes defined in correspondence with information timed by the clock device 292, and is configured to execute a performance based on the selected performance mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 92(b), various performance periods that are set based on the elapsed time from power-on and the contents of the performance executed during the performance periods will be explained. As described above with reference to FIG. 92(a), in this embodiment, the presentation period is repeatedly set in the order of normal period, SP time preparation period, and SP time period based on the elapsed time from power-on. If the normal period is set as the presentation period, the normal presentation (see FIGS. 86 and 87) is executed to show the result of the special symbol lottery executed in each pachinko machine 10. Ru.

During the SP time preparation period, the same normal performance as during the normal period is performed, but a part of the display screen is used to inform the player that the SP time period will soon arrive. The comment "SP time will soon begin" is displayed as a guidance mode. In addition, when the remaining time of the SP time preparation period reaches 30 seconds, in addition to the above-mentioned guidance mode, a remaining time notification that more specifically indicates the remaining time until the SP time period arrives than the guidance mode will be provided. A countdown display is executed.

This countdown display is a display to show the remaining time in seconds until the SP time period is actually set, and the SP time period is set based on the time information measured by the clock device 292. A countdown display for 30 seconds is executed so that the countdown display becomes 0 seconds at the timing when the countdown display occurs.

By executing the countdown display in this way, it is possible to miss the timing at which the period performance (SP time performance) during the SP time period starts, and it is possible to suitably experience the performance with a sense of unity using multiple pachinko machines 10. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations in which it is impossible to do so.

Also, during the SP time preparation period, the words "SP time preparation" are displayed on a part of the display screen (for example, the upper part) of the third symbol display device 81 as a caption, indicating that the current SP time preparation period is in progress. Ru. This telop display is configured to be displayed both on the special symbol variation screen where the special symbol variation is being executed and on the demonstration standby screen where the special symbol variation is not being executed. As a result, it is possible to notify that an SP time period will soon be set (a period effect will be executed) even on a pachinko machine 10 where a player is not playing a game, so that a player who wants to play a game during a period effect can be notified. However, it is possible to easily find the pachinko machine 10 where the period performance is executed.

Then, when the SP time period is set, a period effect (SP time effect) is executed. In this embodiment, as the SP time effect, a special background (see FIG. 88) is displayed, and a setting suggestion effect for suggesting setting values is executed more easily than in other effect periods. It consists of During this SP time period, the words "SP time in progress" are displayed on a part of the display screen (for example, at the top) of the third symbol display device 81 as a caption (FIG. 88). (See display area HR1 in (a)).

Next, refer to FIGS. 92(c) and (d) for the relationship between the end timing of the SP time period, the end timing of the variable performance for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, and the content of the performance to be executed. I will explain. As mentioned above, the SP time period is set based on the elapsed time from power-on, and the period does not vary depending on whether or not special symbol variation is executed or the remaining time. Therefore, there is a possibility that the SP time period ends while the special symbol variation is being executed. In this case, if the normal performance is started at the timing when the SP time period ends (the timing at which the normal period is set), the player may notice that the variable performance corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed suddenly switches. The problem was that it confused people. It is also possible to continue (extend) the period performance (SP time performance) until the end of the special symbol variation being executed at the end of the SP time period, but in this case, it is possible to continue (extend) the period performance (SP time performance). There is a problem in that the end timing of the period performance executed as a unified performance in the pachinko machines 10 differs depending on the special symbol fluctuation status of each pachinko machine 10, resulting in a decrease in performance effect.

In contrast, in this embodiment, in a state where a special symbol variation is being executed at the end timing of the SP time period, the remaining time (residual variation time) of the special symbol variation is determined, and the length of the remaining variation time is determined. The configuration is such that different performance modes are determined depending on the situation. Specifically, if the remaining fluctuation time at the end timing of the SP time period is less than a predetermined time (for example, less than 5 seconds), the display mode indicating the end of the SP time period is continuously displayed, and the remaining fluctuation time is If the time is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds or more), the period until the remaining variation time elapses becomes a specialization zone (see FIG. 90(b)), and the setting suggestion effect is more likely to be executed. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the variation performance corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed is suddenly switched. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the period performance (SP time performance) from continuing (extending) for a long time and reducing the performance effect of the period performance, which is executed as a unified performance on multiple pachinko machines 10. be able to.

Furthermore, if the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation being executed at the end timing of the SP time period is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), the setting suggestion effect will be set using the remaining variation time compared to other periods. Since it is possible to set a specialized mode that is easy to execute, the timing at which the SP time period in which the period effect (SP time effect) is executed, that is, the specific period in which benefits that are advantageous to the player are given, can be set. Even if the timing of the end of the game is a timing that would normally reduce the player's desire to play, a special mode is introduced in which benefits that are advantageous to the player are given depending on the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation. Since this is set, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from decreasing.

In this case, it is preferable that the end information indicating the timing at which the SP time period ends and the remaining variation time information indicating the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation being executed can be configured to be able to be notified to the player. . With this configuration, the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation at the end of the SP time period can be easily predicted during the SP time period, so the content of the performance that will be executed later for the player can be easily predicted. It is possible to make it easier to predict, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game. In addition, if the player realizes that the special symbol variation being executed will be stopped and displayed immediately before the end timing of the SP time period, the SP time period will end during the period of the next special symbol variation. Since the player can recognize in advance that there is a high possibility that the special symbol fluctuation will occur, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of expecting a long fluctuation time to be set as the fluctuation time of the next special symbol fluctuation.

Furthermore, in order to make it easier to set the special mode, the game is interrupted during the SP time period, and the player is made to play a game adjusted so that the special symbol fluctuation starts just before the end of the SP time period. becomes possible. Therefore, by executing many special symbol drawings during the SP time period, there is a game that executes many setting suggestion effects, and a game where the number of special symbol fluctuations that are executed during the SP time period is reduced to make it easier for the special mode to be set. This makes it possible for the player to select a game with fewer setting suggestions (difficult for setting suggestion effects to be executed during the SP time period) and a game with many setting suggestion effects during the special mode period, which improves the interest of the game. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95, a description will be given of the production contents during the high-speed variation mode in which a short variation time (for example, 1.5 seconds) is likely to be selected as the variation time of the special symbol variation. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a shorter variation time is selected as the variation time of the special symbol variation in the high probability state (time saving state, variable probability state) of the normal symbol than in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol. It is configured to be easy.

To explain more specifically, in a game state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, the electric accessory 640 is opened more than in a game state in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set, and the second ball enters the game state. It is configured so that the ball can easily enter the mouth 640. In other words, the high probability state of normal symbols is configured so that it is easier to acquire the right to execute the special symbol lottery than the low probability state of normal symbols. The right to execute the special symbol lottery is configured such that a predetermined number of execution rights can be stored (suspended storage is possible).

Therefore, while the high probability state of normal symbols is set, there is a situation where a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 with the number of reserved memories reaching the upper limit, that is, a special symbol lottery is executed. In order to prevent players from experiencing discomfort due to a situation in which they are unable to memorize new execution rights even though an opportunity to acquire the right has been established, a short period of time is required. By making it easier for special symbol variations to be selected, the system is configured to increase the number of special symbol drawings that can be executed per unit time.

In addition, even in a state where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, that is, a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball into the second ball entry port 640, a short variation time is easily selected as the variation time of the special symbol variation. If this happens, it is likely that the special symbol variation will end before the right to execute the special symbol lottery has been acquired (not stored in storage), and the player's desire to play will decrease. In this embodiment, a special symbol variation with a shorter variation time is more likely to be executed in a state where a high probability state of a normal symbol is set than a state where a low probability state of a normal symbol is set. With this configuration, it is possible to easily increase the number of special symbol drawings that can be executed per unit time, and the period in which special symbol variations are not executed becomes unnecessarily long, which reduces the player's desire to play. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a state in which the high probability state of normal symbols is set, when a predetermined period of time (a period during which special symbol fluctuations are executed 80 times) has passed after the end of the jackpot game, the predetermined The configuration is such that a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected than when the period has not elapsed. With this configuration, when a high probability state (time saving state, variable probability state) of a normal symbol is set after the end of a jackpot game, a short period of special symbol variation is executed immediately after the end of the jackpot game. It is possible to prevent players from being excessively given benefits (prize balls) due to a plurality of jackpot games being executed in a short period of time.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is configured with a gaming specification in which when a gaming state (variable probability state) advantageous to the player is set, the variable probability state continues until the next jackpot game is executed. Therefore, when the variable probability state is set, it is certain that the high probability state of the special symbol will continue until the jackpot is won. In this state, if there is a long period of time without winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, there is a problem in that the player is forced to play a game that wastes time, reducing the player's desire to play. .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if the special symbol lottery is executed 80 times after the variable probability state is set, that is, if the special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state does not result in a jackpot and the predetermined period of time has passed. If the period has passed, the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is shorter than the period before the predetermined period (the period from when the probability change state is set until the special symbol lottery is executed 80 times). The configuration is such that variable time is easily selected. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the variable probability state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, from continuing unnecessarily for a long time.

FIG. 93(a) shows an example of a display screen that is displayed during a high-speed fluctuation period that is set when a predetermined period of time (period in which special symbol lottery is executed 80 times) has elapsed since the probability change state was set. This is a diagram. As shown in FIG. 93(a), in the display area HR1, "high-speed fluctuation" is displayed as a guidance mode to indicate that the short fluctuation time is likely to be selected as the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation during the high-speed fluctuation period. The text is displayed as a caption. In the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds, a display mode in which the character J0 utters the words "Speed up" is displayed as a mode for indicating that the special symbol variation is a short variation. By informing the player that the high-speed fluctuation period has been set in this manner, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the sudden shortening of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation.

In the diagram shown in FIG. 93(a), in the state where the high-speed fluctuation period is set (the state where the 81st special symbol fluctuation is started after setting the probability change state), it is shown that the high-speed fluctuation period is set. However, the timing for notifying the player of information regarding the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period is not limited to this, and for example, the 75th special symbol fluctuation after the probability fluctuation state is set. In other words, at a timing a predetermined period before the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period (the high-speed fluctuation period is set), the player is notified in advance that the high-speed fluctuation period will soon begin. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, the player can know in advance that the high-speed fluctuation period will begin, thereby preventing the situation where the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation suddenly becomes short and the player is confused. can be suppressed.

In addition, when using an advance notification configuration that can notify the player in advance that the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period will occur, for example, the special drawing reservation will be read in advance and the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period will be based on the result of that pre-reading. It is preferable to configure the system so that advance notification is executed when it is determined that the Specifically, it is determined that the conditions for transition to the high-speed fluctuation period (execution of 80 special symbol drawings) are met based on the pre-reading results of special symbol reservation, and when the conditions for transition to the high-speed fluctuation period are satisfied. If it is determined in advance (if it is determined in advance that all the results of the special symbol lottery executed until the transition condition is met are winners), the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period may be notified.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a high-speed fluctuation period is not set (a situation where a jackpot is won) even though the player has been informed (advance notification) that a transition to a high-speed fluctuation period is possible. Can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, a shorter fluctuation time (for example, 1.5 seconds to 12 seconds) can be set during the high-speed fluctuation period than in other periods, and the results of the corresponding special symbol lottery and the acquired The configuration is such that different variation times are selected depending on the type of variation pattern. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a variation performance (a variation performance corresponding to the variation time) with different winning expectations even for the special symbol variation executed during the high-speed variation period.

Here, for example, as the first special symbol variation executed after a high-speed variation period is set in which a short-time variation pattern (for example, variation time of 1.5 seconds) is likely to be selected as a special symbol variation, a non-short-time variation pattern is selected. When a variation pattern (for example, variation time of 6 seconds) is selected, a state in which the display screen shown in FIG. 93(a) is displayed, that is, a state in which the player is notified that the transition to a high-speed variation period has begun. A situation occurs in which high-speed fluctuation (1.5 second fluctuation) is not executed.

In other words, in this embodiment, even during the high-speed fluctuation period, in order to execute a fluctuation effect that makes the player expect a big hit according to the selected fluctuation pattern, fluctuation times of different lengths (e.g. , 6 seconds, or 12 seconds), the above-mentioned situation (a situation where the high-speed fluctuation (1.5 seconds fluctuation) is not executed even when the player is notified that the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period has started) ) may occur. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 may be malfunctioning because the special symbol high-speed fluctuation is not executed even though it has been notified that the special symbol high-speed fluctuation will be performed. This creates a sense of distrust among players and reduces their desire to play.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol fluctuation is executed after the high-speed fluctuation period is set, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation is configured to be distinguishable, and based on the determination result. The timing of notifying that the high-speed fluctuation period has been set (transition to the high-speed fluctuation period) is configured to be different. Specifically, if the first special symbol fluctuation after the high-speed fluctuation period is set is not a high-speed fluctuation (1.5 seconds fluctuation), it is configured not to notify that the high-speed fluctuation period has been set. ing.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a problem that occurs when the high-speed fluctuation of the special symbol is not executed even though it has been notified that the high-speed fluctuation period has been set.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery after the high-speed fluctuation period is set, that is, if the first special symbol fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation, the fluctuation of the jackpot fluctuation It is configured to simulate a plurality of special symbol fluctuations (fluctuation performance) using time (for example, 12 seconds). Specifically, for the 12-second special symbol variation, the pseudo high-speed variation (1.5 seconds) is executed four times, and then the 6-second jackpot variation is executed.

With this configuration, even if a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery after the high-speed fluctuation period is set, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 will be displayed multiple times (four times). After the pseudo high-speed variation is executed, the pseudo jackpot variation (6 seconds) will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the high-speed fluctuation period has been set in an easy-to-understand manner, and also to make the player think that the high-speed fluctuation of the special symbol has been executed during the high-speed fluctuation period.

Here, with reference to FIG. 93(b), we will explain the display contents that will be displayed when the first special symbol fluctuation after the high-speed fluctuation period is set is other than high-speed fluctuation (1.5 seconds). do. Figure 93(b) shows that a variation time (6 seconds) other than high-speed variation (1.5 seconds) is selected in the 81st special symbol variation (special symbol variation in which a high-speed variation period is set) during the probability variation state. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the screen is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 93(b), if the first special symbol variation executed after the high-speed variation period is set is not a high-speed variation (1.5 seconds variation), it is determined that the high-speed variation period has been set. Instead of the display mode that notifies the player (see FIG. 93(a)), "Preparing for high-speed variation" is displayed in the display area HR1 as a guidance mode to inform the player that a high-speed variation period will soon be set. The text will be displayed as a ticker.

In this way, even if the high-speed fluctuation period is actually in progress, the high-speed fluctuation period is set by displaying "Preparing for high-speed fluctuation" until the first high-speed fluctuation is executed. It is possible to suppress a problem that occurs due to the high-speed variation of the special symbol not being executed despite the fact that the special symbol has been notified. Note that the guidance mode shown in FIG. 93(b) may be configured to be displayed from a time point before the high-speed fluctuation period is actually set.

Furthermore, the situation shown in Figure 93(b) occurs only when a fluctuation pattern other than high-speed fluctuation is set in the first special symbol fluctuation after the high-speed fluctuation period is set. When a situation occurs (when a telop display of "Preparing for high-speed fluctuation" is being displayed), the configuration may be such that the setting suggestion effect is more likely to be executed than during other high-speed fluctuation periods. In this way, when a variation pattern other than the specific variation pattern is selected during a specific period in which a specific variation pattern is likely to be selected, benefits are more likely to be granted to the player than when a specific variation pattern is selected. By providing this, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable no matter which variation pattern is selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, a description will be given of the contents of the performance executed when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery after the high-speed fluctuation period is set. Figure 94(a) shows a pseudo high-speed variation that is executed when a jackpot variation (12 seconds) is selected in the 81st special symbol variation (special symbol variation in which a high-speed variation period is set) during the probability variation state. It is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the effect (1.5 seconds), and FIG. 94(b) shows an example of the display screen of the pseudo winning variation effect (6 seconds) executed after the pseudo high-speed variation ends. It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 94(a), when the first special symbol fluctuation after the high-speed fluctuation period is set is a jackpot fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 12 seconds, the pseudo high-speed fluctuation performance of 1.5 seconds is 4. After the game has been executed twice, a 6-second pseudo winning variation effect is executed. In other words, for a period in which a 12-second special symbol variation is executed once, the pseudo-variations are made to make the player think that 1.5-second pseudo-variations have been executed four times and 6-second pseudo-variations have been executed once. It is configured so that the performance is executed.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 94(a), in the display area HR1 of the main display area Dm, the words "High-speed fluctuation in progress" are displayed as a telop, similar to FIG. 93(a). Then, after 1.5 seconds have elapsed, the third symbol variation is pseudo-stopped (in the figure, the third symbol is displayed with wavy lines on the left and right sides). In other words, it is the same except that the stop display mode of the third symbol is slightly different (to the extent that it is difficult for the player to easily identify it) compared to when a high-speed fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is actually executed. A variation effect is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the third symbol is completely stopped and displayed during a period when the actual special symbol fluctuation is not displayed, there is a risk that the player will be confused, so a pseudo-stop display is used. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and it may be configured to display a stop display mode in which the third symbol is completely stopped at the stop timing of the pseudo high-speed fluctuation effect, and in this case, the main display area Instead of the third symbol (a symbol that is displayed variably in response to the fluctuation situation of the special symbol) as the symbol that is changing near the center of Dm, a production symbol for production is used, and the actual third symbol is used. The symbols may be configured to be displayed variably in different areas (for example, areas other than the display surface of the third symbol display device 81).

Then, when the pseudo high-speed variation performance (4 times) is completed, next, as shown in FIG. 94(b), a 6-second pseudo winning variation performance is executed. Therefore, a high-speed fluctuation period is set for the player because it becomes possible to perform five pseudo fluctuation effects, whereas in reality only one special symbol fluctuation is performed. In this case, a high-speed fluctuation performance (pseudo high-speed fluctuation performance) can be executed reliably. Furthermore, since the pseudo high-speed fluctuation is executed four times over 6 seconds, it is possible to secure time for the player to recognize the characters "high-speed fluctuation in progress" displayed in the display area HR1.

As shown in FIG. 94, in this embodiment, the pseudo high-speed variation effect is executed four times, but the number of times the pseudo high-speed variation effect is executed is not limited to this. The pseudo high-speed fluctuation effect may be executed three times or less or more than four times. In addition, if multiple fluctuation times (for example, 15 seconds, 20 seconds) are configured to be selectable as fluctuation patterns other than high-speed fluctuation, depending on the length of the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern. It is preferable to configure the system to determine the number of times the pseudo high-speed fluctuation performance is executed and the content of the performance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the flow of the effect executed when the high-speed fluctuation period is set in this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 95(a-1) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of special symbol fluctuations (the number of special symbol drawings) and the selected fluctuation time in the case where a variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, This is a diagram showing a case where a high-speed fluctuation (1.5 seconds) is executed during a high-speed fluctuation period, and FIG. 95(a-2) is an effect set in the situation shown in FIG. 95(a-1). FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the transition of modes. FIG. 95 (b-1) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of special symbol fluctuations (the number of special symbol drawings) and the selected fluctuation time in the case where a variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, This is a diagram showing a case where a non-high-speed fluctuation (6 seconds) is executed for the first time in a high-speed fluctuation period, and FIG. 95(b-2) is set in the situation shown in FIG. 95(b-1). It is a diagram showing the transition of production modes. FIG. 95 (c-1) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of special symbol fluctuations (the number of special symbol drawings) and the selected fluctuation time in the case where the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game, This is a diagram showing a case where a jackpot fluctuation (12 seconds) is executed for the first time in a high-speed fluctuation period, and FIG. 95(c-2) is an effect set in the situation shown in FIG. 95(c-1). FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the transition of modes.

As shown in FIG. 95(a-1), in this embodiment, the period from when the probability variation state is set until the special symbol variation is executed 80 times (probability variation first period), and the special symbol variation after the 81st It is configured so that the period in which it is executed (the second period of probability variation) and the variation pattern table that is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation are different, and in the first period of probability variation, the normal state is set, but a variation pattern table in which a relatively longer variation time is likely to be selected than during the second probability variation period, which will be described later, is referred to. The variation pattern table is configured so that a variation pattern table in which a shorter variation time than during the period is more likely to be selected is referred to. Note that details of the fluctuation pattern table referred to in each period will be described later with reference to FIG. 104.

In other words, during the first period of variable probability from when the variable probability state is set until a predetermined period has elapsed, the special symbol fluctuation is executed with a relatively longer variation time than the second period of variable probability after the predetermined period has elapsed. It consists of With this configuration, the interval between jackpot games can be made longer than when a variable time similar to the probability variable second period is selected immediately after the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, by executing the jackpot game a plurality of times in a short period of time, it is possible to prevent excessive bonuses (prize balls) from being given to the player in a short period of time. In other words, it is possible to prevent a gaming situation (probability change state) advantageous to the player from ending in a short time.

As shown in FIG. 95 (a-2), when a high-speed fluctuation (1.5 seconds) is executed in the second probability variation period (the 81st special symbol fluctuation period), the 81st special symbol fluctuation A guidance mode (see FIG. 93(a)) is displayed to notify the player that the high-speed fluctuation period will be set at the start timing of . Since this high-speed fluctuation period is set until the special symbol fluctuation is executed 1000 times, the special symbol fluctuation will essentially fluctuate at high speed until the next jackpot is won. Therefore, for players who have executed 80 or more special symbol drawings without winning a jackpot in the special symbol drawing, even though the variable probability state, which is a high probability state of the special symbol, has been set, Since the number of special symbol drawings can be increased, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from decreasing.

In addition, FIG. 95 (b-1) shows that the first special symbol variation in the second period of probability variation (the first special symbol variation in the high-speed variation period), that is, the variation pattern of the special symbol variation of the 81st rotation is the variation time 6. This is an off-second variation, and shows a pattern in which a high-speed variation (1.5 seconds) is executed at the 82nd revolution.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 95(b-2), a guidance mode is provided to notify the player that a high-speed fluctuation period will be set at the special symbol fluctuation start timing of the 81st rotation (see FIG. 93(a)). ) is displayed, there is a risk that the high-speed fluctuation will be performed even though the high-speed fluctuation period has entered, giving a sense of discomfort to the player. Preparation to inform the player that a high-speed fluctuation period will soon be set (transition to a high-speed fluctuation period) until the 82nd special symbol fluctuation is executed (period until the 82nd special symbol fluctuation is performed) The advance guidance mode (see FIG. 93(b)) is displayed as the notification. A guidance mode for notifying the player that the high-speed fluctuation period will be set at the 82nd special symbol fluctuation start timing, that is, at the timing when the high-speed fluctuation is executed for the first time after the high-speed fluctuation period is set. (See FIG. 93(a)) is displayed.

As a result, the entry into the high-speed fluctuation period is notified in accordance with the timing at which the high-speed fluctuation is actually executed, so that it is possible to provide information that is easy for the player to understand. In addition, in this embodiment, the preparation notification is performed using the period from when the high-speed fluctuation period is set until the high-speed fluctuation is actually executed, so that the player is not informed of the preparation when the high-speed fluctuation is suddenly executed. This suppresses the occurrence of situations where it becomes difficult to grasp the results of special symbol drawings, but this is not limited to the period from when the high-speed fluctuation period is set until the high-speed fluctuation is actually executed. , it may be configured to execute the same variation effect as in the probability variation first period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand from which timing the entry notification into the high-speed fluctuation period is executed.

Next, FIG. 95 (C-1) shows that the first special symbol fluctuation in the second period of probability variation (the first special symbol fluctuation in the high-speed fluctuation period), that is, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation of the 81st rotation is the fluctuation time. It shows a pattern that is a jackpot fluctuation of 12 seconds.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 95(c-2), a guidance mode is provided to inform the player that a high-speed fluctuation period will be set at the special symbol fluctuation start timing of the 81st rotation (see FIG. 93(a)). ) is displayed, and a pseudo fluctuation performance is executed using the special symbol fluctuation period (12 seconds) of the 81st rotation. Specifically, the first 6 seconds are used to perform a pseudo high-speed fluctuation effect (see Figure 94(a)) four times, and the latter 6 seconds are used to simulate a jackpot fluctuation effect (see Figure 94(b)). )). In other words, during the fluctuation period of one special symbol fluctuation of 12 seconds, a pseudo fluctuation effect is executed as if four high-speed fluctuations (1.5 seconds) and one jackpot fluctuation (6 seconds) were executed. , the jackpot game is executed when the special symbol variation (jackpot variation) for 12 seconds is stopped and displayed.

With this configuration, even if the first special symbol variation in the second period of probability variation is a jackpot variation, the player can experience the variation performance (high-speed variation production) in the second period of probability variation, so the production The effect can be increased.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the start notification timing of the high-speed fluctuation period is configured to be different based on the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol fluctuation of the second period of probability fluctuation, but other configurations may be used. For example, in addition to the first special symbol variation (81st special symbol variation) in the second period of probability variation, the 82nd special symbol variation is also an outlier variation with a variation time of 6 seconds as a result of preliminary determination. If it is determined that the special symbol fluctuation is It may be configured to perform a guidance notification (see FIG. 93(a)) to inform the player that the high-speed fluctuation period has entered at the start timing of symbol fluctuation.

Further, the guidance notification may be configured to be executed at a specific timing during the variation period of the first special symbol variation (81st special symbol variation) of the second probability variation period, for example, the 81st special symbol variation. If the fluctuation time is long (for example, 30 seconds), for the first 24 seconds, perform the same fluctuation effect as in the first fixed period, and in the remaining 6 seconds, perform a pseudo high-speed fluctuation effect four times. It may also be configured such that the guide notification is executed 24 seconds after the 81st special symbol variation is started. In this way, by configuring the guidance notification to be executed at a specific timing during special symbol fluctuations, the number of pseudo high-speed fluctuation effects can be arbitrarily set, so that many pseudo-high-speed movement effects are executed unnecessarily. It is possible to prevent it from being put away.

In the present embodiment, a configuration is used in which when the second probability variation period is set, a guidance notification is executed to inform the player that the high speed variation period has entered, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, If a short fluctuation time is selected at the end of the first variable period (79th or 80th special symbol fluctuation), a guide to notify that the high speed fluctuation period has entered at the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation. It may be configured to perform notification.

In this way, it is not the timing when the fluctuation pattern table that is referred to when actually selecting a fluctuation pattern changes, but the first fluctuation time that is different from the first fluctuation time because the first fluctuation time is likely to be selected as the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation. In a state where the condition that makes it easier to select the second variable time is likely to be satisfied, or in a state where the condition is established, the second variable time or a variable time that is closer to the second variable time than the first variable time is selected. By notifying the player that the second variation time has entered a period in which it is easy to select based on the second variation time, the content of the notification matches the actual special symbol variation time, and it is possible to execute a performance that does not make the player feel strange. can.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, if the timing of executing the guidance notification to inform the player that the high-speed fluctuation mode has entered is delayed while the high-speed fluctuation mode is set, the high-speed fluctuation mode will be set soon. However, the present invention is configured to execute a preparation notification to indicate that the high-speed fluctuation mode has entered the high-speed fluctuation mode at the timing when the high-speed fluctuation mode is set. When the notification is executed, the preparation notification may be configured to be executed before the high-speed fluctuation mode is set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98, the contents of the performance during the jackpot game executed in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment will be explained. In this embodiment, as the jackpot game performance executed during the jackpot game, a basic performance for showing the player the degree of progress of the jackpot game is executed. The contents of this basic effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 96(a). Furthermore, if the number of prize balls paid out during an advantageous period in which conditions favorable to the player (time saving condition, variable probability condition, jackpot game) continue reaches a predetermined number (in units of 200 balls), , executes a predetermined number acquisition performance as a performance to congratulate the player. The details of this predetermined number acquisition performance will be described later with reference to FIG. 96(b). Further, when this predetermined number acquisition performance is executed, an additional benefit performance is executed to provide an additional benefit under a predetermined condition (when the relationship between the number of rounds and the number of prize balls satisfies a specific condition). The details of this additional benefit performance will be described later with reference to FIG. 97. In addition, on the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game, an end screen effect that suggests the game state and set value that will be set after the jackpot game ends is executed. This end screen effect is configured to vary in appearance depending on the timing at which the jackpot game is executed (whether it overlaps with the period effect or not). For details, see FIG. 98. will be described later.

First, with reference to FIG. 96(a), the contents of the basic effect during the jackpot game will be explained. FIG. 96(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 96(a), during the jackpot game, a display area HR11 and a display area HR12 are formed on the upper left side of the main display area Dm. The display area HR11 is a display area for indicating the current number of rounds, and the current number of rounds ("2" is displayed in the figure) is displayed as a round number notification mode. That is, the display screen shown in FIG. 96(a) is a display screen in a state where the second round of the jackpot game is being executed. In this embodiment, only the current round number is displayed as the round number notification mode.

Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many rounds the current jackpot game will continue, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the maximum number of rounds, that is, the maximum number of rounds executed in the current jackpot game, can be displayed in the display area HR11. The number of rounds (number of round games) to be played may also be configured to be able to be notified. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how long the jackpot game will continue, so that the player can play the jackpot game with peace of mind. In this case, a part (for example, 5 rounds) of the maximum number of rounds executed in the current jackpot game (for example, 10 rounds) is displayed as the maximum number of rounds, and the update condition ( For example, the maximum number of rounds may be updated and displayed to 10 rounds based on the fact that an update condition (which is satisfied when the fourth round ends) is satisfied. With this configuration, it is possible to perform a surprising performance for the player.

The display area HR12 is a display area for showing the number of prize balls acquired during the current jackpot game, and as a notification mode of the number of prize balls during the jackpot game, the number of prize balls obtained during the current jackpot game (in the figure) is displayed. "255 GET") is displayed. In other words, the display screen shown in FIG. 96(a) is a display screen in the middle of the second round, when 255 prize balls have been paid out during the current jackpot game. This display area HR12 also shows the expected total number of prize balls expected in this jackpot game, that is, the maximum number of rounds to be executed in this jackpot game, and the number of balls that can be won in one round game. The total number of prize balls calculated based on the number of prize balls may be displayed on the display screen in advance. With this configuration, it is possible to know in advance the number of prize balls that can be won in this jackpot game, and it is also possible to know in advance whether the number of prize balls actually won is greater or less than the expected number of prize balls. It becomes possible for the player to analyze whether the Therefore, if the number of actually won prize balls is greater than the expected number of prize balls, it is considered that the pachinko machine 10 is more advantageous to the player, and the player can be motivated to play the game. . Further, if the expected number of prize balls is greater than the number of prize balls actually won, the player can be asked to consider future games while considering moving to another pachinko machine 10.

A display area HR13 is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, and displays a third symbol combination that is stopped and displayed when a jackpot is won. That is, the history of jackpot symbols ("666" is displayed in the figure) is displayed in the display area HR13. Below the display area HR13, a display area HR14 and a display area HR15 are formed, and "960" is displayed in the display area HR14 as a total award ball notification mode indicating the total amount of prize balls paid out during the advantageous period. Displayed. This total number of prize balls acquired indicates the total number of prize balls paid out from the payout control device 111 during an advantageous period in which a state advantageous to the player (time saving state, variable probability state, jackpot game) continues. For example, if a variable probability state is set after the end of a jackpot game (first time), a jackpot is won during that variable probability state, and a jackpot game (second time) is executed again, the second jackpot game The total number of prize balls paid out in the first jackpot game, the number of prize balls paid out during the probability change state, and the number of prize balls paid out during the second jackpot game are displayed as the total prize ball notification mode displayed inside. Information indicating the total value with the number of prize balls received is displayed.

With this configuration, if a jackpot game is executed multiple times during the advantageous period, the number of prize balls paid out in the multiple jackpot games will be totaled and displayed, so It becomes possible to display the number of prize balls that cannot be obtained in a jackpot game. Therefore, a feeling of superiority can be provided to the player who has continued the advantageous period for a long time by displaying a large number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, all the number of prize balls paid out during the advantageous period, that is, the number of balls paid out during the probability change state or the time saving state, are determined by The system is configured so that the total number of prize balls won is displayed by adding the number of prize balls paid out based on the number of balls entered, so if the state of variable probability has passed for a long time without winning a jackpot. Since the total number of prize balls acquired can be increased, it is possible to suppress the decline in the desire of players who have not won a jackpot for a long time in the special symbol lottery executed during a variable probability state. be able to.

Note that the number of prize balls to be added to the total number of prize balls acquired may be configured to be only the number of prize balls paid out during the jackpot game executed during the advantageous period. This allows the player to easily grasp the total number of prize balls paid out during the jackpot game.

Further, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls actually paid out by the payout control device 111 is configured to be displayable, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the number of prize balls actually paid out by the payout control device 111 is displayed. The number of prize balls may be added based on the number of prize balls, that is, the output of a payout instruction (payout command) for paying out prize balls from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111. good. In this case, compared to the case where the number of prize balls is added and displayed after the prize balls are actually paid out, the condition for paying out the prize balls is satisfied (it is detected that the ball has entered the ball entrance). In order to reduce the time lag until the number of prize balls is added and displayed, pay close attention to the falling status of the balls on the game board 13 (the status of balls entering (winning) balls into each ball entrance (winning opening)). To add and display the total number of prize balls won without giving a sense of discomfort to a player who is playing a game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display is configured to be executable based on the number of prize balls; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of balls that the player has The configuration may be such that the number of pitches corresponding to the increase can be displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the actual increased amount of balls in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the display area HR15, "2nd time" is displayed as a display mode for the number of consecutive games to indicate the number of times the jackpot game has been executed (number of consecutive games) during the advantageous period. That is, FIG. 96(a) shows the display screen during the second (second consecutive chance) jackpot game during the advantageous period.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of jackpot games executed during the advantageous period is configured to be added and displayed as the number of consecutive wins, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, multiple types of jackpot games In a pachinko machine 10 that can be used, only the number of executions of jackpot games (jackpot games of 5 rounds or more) in which the amount of benefits that can be given to the player is greater than or equal to a predetermined amount may be added and displayed. Furthermore, information indicating the details of the jackpot games that have been executed may be added to and displayed in the display mode of the number of consecutive games.

The contents of the basic performance (basic display) displayed on the display screen during the jackpot game have been explained above with reference to FIG. During a period other than during a jackpot game, for example, during an advantageous period and during a period when a jackpot game is not being executed (a period in which special symbol fluctuations can be executed), the total amount of prize balls acquired among each element of the basic performance described above. It may be configured to display a display mode related to information indicating a number.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96(b), the content of the performance of the predetermined number acquisition performance executed during the jackpot game will be explained. In this embodiment, the jackpot game performances executed during the jackpot game include an opening performance executed corresponding to the opening period of the jackpot game, a round performance executed corresponding to the round game period of the jackpot game, and a jackpot game performance executed corresponding to the round game period of the jackpot game. The game is configured to be able to execute at least an ending performance that is executed corresponding to an ending period of a game.

The round game period, which is a period during which the round effect is executed, is a period during which a ball can be won into the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. In this embodiment, as part of the round performance executed during this round game period, a predetermined number acquisition performance is executed to celebrate that the total number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous period has reached a predetermined number. It is configured as possible. Specifically, at the timing when a round game is started, the total number of prize balls that have already been acquired is read out, and it is determined whether the total number of prize balls that have been acquired can reach a predetermined number during the round game that is currently being executed. . When it is determined that the predetermined number can be reached, a performance mode of the round performance corresponding to the predetermined number acquisition performance is determined. In this way, by determining the timing when the total number of prize balls acquired can reach a predetermined number before the total number of prize balls actually acquired reaches a predetermined number, it is possible to determine the timing during the next round game. It becomes possible to specify whether or not it is necessary to execute a predetermined number of acquisition effects.

Therefore, when determining the performance mode of the round performance, it is possible to easily determine the performance mode that corresponds to the presence or absence of the predetermined number of acquisition performances.

As shown in FIG. 96(b), when the predetermined number acquisition performance is executed, a performance mode in which a character 810 resembling a rabbit appears holding a placard 811 is displayed approximately at the center of the main display area Dm. . Then, when the total number of prize balls acquired reaches a predetermined number (1000 in the figure), the placard 811 is held up and a display screen displaying "1000" is displayed.

In other words, in a round performance corresponding to a round game in which a predetermined number of acquisition performance can be executed, a performance in which the character 810 appears is executed in advance, so that the predetermined number of acquisition performance ("1000") is performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort. An effect of holding up a placard 811 with the characters 811 written on it can be performed. In addition, since it is possible to specify a round game in which a predetermined number of acquisition effects cannot be executed, for example, the character 810 appears as a presentation mode of a round effect corresponding to a round game in which a predetermined number of acquisition effect cannot be executed. Since it is possible to determine the performance mode that will not be used, the performance effect can be enhanced by increasing the variation of the round performance.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an additional benefit performance is executed in which an additional benefit is given according to the combination of the total number of awarded balls displayed in the predetermined number acquisition performance and the number of rounds in which the predetermined number acquisition performance is executed. According to the example shown in FIG. 96(b), the combination of the number of rounds being “3” and the total number of prize balls acquired being “1000” satisfies the execution conditions for the additional benefit presentation. , a treasure bag 811a is displayed connected to a placard 811 to indicate that an additional benefit presentation will be performed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97(a), an additional benefit effect is performed in which a ball 812 with the word "certain" appears as an additional benefit mode for indicating an additional benefit as the contents of the treasure bag 811a. The additional benefit aspect indicated by the ball 812 with the word "certain" indicates that a variable probability state, which is an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player, will be set after the end of the current jackpot game. Note that this embodiment is configured so that various types of benefits can be given to the player as additional benefit modes, the details of which will be described later with reference to FIG. 97(b).

In this way, by determining whether or not to grant an additional benefit to the player according to the combination of the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the total number of prize balls acquired, the additional benefit game is executed for the player. Since it is possible to make the timing difficult to understand, it is possible to make the player expect that an additional bonus performance will be executed for each round performance during the jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the additional bonus performance is configured to be executable at least during the round performance in which a predetermined number of acquisition performances are executed, it is possible to make the player win many balls during the jackpot game. It is possible to make the player play the game with enthusiasm. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the total number of prize balls to be won is configured to include the number of prize balls that are paid out when a ball enters each ball entry hole in a state where a variable probability state or a time saving state is set. Therefore, for example, it is possible to adjust the total number of prize balls acquired until the jackpot game is executed (until the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery).

Therefore, conventionally, the player would not be able to play the game (balls) while a variable performance is being executed where the result of the special symbol lottery is likely to be a jackpot, or while the number of reserved special symbols is at the upper limit. Even during a period when the firing of balls (emission of balls) is likely to be temporarily interrupted, it is possible to make it easier to continue playing the game for the purpose of adjusting the total number of prize balls acquired, and the operation of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this case, it is preferable to configure a guidance performance that can guide the player before the jackpot game is executed to understand the situation in which the additional bonus performance is likely to be executed during the jackpot game, such as a situation where the probability is variable or It is configured to display the total number of prize balls acquired during the special symbol fluctuation period in the time saving state, and when the total number of prize balls acquired at the timing when the jackpot game starts is within a specific range, additional benefit effects are likely to be executed. It is preferable to configure the system so that the player is informed of the change. More specifically, in the case where it is specified that the additional bonus performance is to be executed when the total number of acquired prize balls reaches 1000 in the first round of the jackpot game, the jackpot game is not executed. During the special symbol fluctuation period, which is before the event, by executing a jackpot game with the total number of prize balls acquired in the range of ``910 to 990'', the additional bonus effect will be more likely to be executed. It is good to configure it as follows. With this configuration, the player can use the period until the start of the jackpot game to play a game to increase the total number of prize balls acquired.

Note that guidance notification for facilitating the execution of the above-mentioned additional benefit performance may be performed during the jackpot game. By configuring in this way, balls are sent to the specific prize opening 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 during a round game so that a combination of the number of rounds in which the additional benefit performance is executed and the total number of prize balls acquired is created. It is possible to provide a novel gaming experience in which the game is played in such a way that no prize balls are won (no more prize balls are paid out). Furthermore, by having the player perform a game to increase the number of prize balls during the interval period set between round games, it is possible to improve the performance of the game.

Here, the types of benefits given to the player during the additional benefit performance will be explained with reference to FIG. 97(b). On the display screen shown in FIG. 97(a) described above, a ball 812 with the word "sure" attached is displayed as an additional benefit mode, and a mode ( However, if the ball 812 with the character "10" is also displayed, the number of round games to be executed during the current jackpot game is displayed. If a mode indicating that "10 rounds" is the most advantageous number of rounds is displayed (round promotion mode) or a ball 812 with the word "high" is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 is set. If a mode (high setting notification mode) indicating that the current setting value is a setting value (high setting) that is advantageous to the player or a ball 812 with the character "Ren" is displayed, , A mode (retention linked mode) indicating that information indicating that the lottery result is a jackpot is included in the retention memory (special figure retention) of acquired special symbols can be set.

By configuring the system so that multiple types can be set as additional benefit modes, it is possible to prevent the situation from occurring where there is no benefit to be given to the player even though the execution conditions for the additional benefit presentation have been met. can do. In addition, in this embodiment, as the additional benefit given to the player when the additional benefit performance is executed, only the benefit for indicating a gaming situation advantageous to the player is targeted, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the system may be configured to be able to provide a bonus image that can be provided to the player only when an additional bonus presentation is executed, or be configured to be able to provide a right to switch the presentation mode of the pachinko machine 10. It may be configured. Further, the configuration may be such that information indicating a gaming situation that is disadvantageous to the player can be given as an additional benefit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the contents of the end screen effect displayed on the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game will be explained. FIG. 98(a) is a diagram showing an example of an end screen effect when the end screen of a jackpot game is displayed during SP time (SP time period), and FIG. 98(b) is a diagram showing an example of an end screen effect during a jackpot game. It is a figure showing an example of an end screen effect when SP time (SP time period) ends.

In this embodiment, as described above, the more the special symbol lottery (special symbol variation) is executed during the SP time period, the more likely the setting suggestion performance is to be executed. In other words, if a jackpot game is executed during the SP time period, it will be more difficult for the special symbol lottery (special symbol fluctuation) to be executed than when a jackpot game is not executed during the SP time period. It becomes difficult to execute setting suggestion effects during the period.

In this case, even if a jackpot game is executed in a gaming situation that is advantageous to the player, if the execution period of the jackpot game overlaps with the SP time period, a situation that is disadvantageous to the player (setting suggestion effect There is a problem in that the player's desire to play decreases because a situation in which it is difficult for the player to execute the game occurs. In particular, when a jackpot game with a large number of rounds that would normally be advantageous to the player is executed, the possibility that the SP time period and the jackpot game period will overlap increases as the jackpot game period becomes longer. Therefore, the above-mentioned problem is more likely to occur, so when a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player (a jackpot game with a large number of rounds) is executed, it is more likely that other jackpot games (with a comparative number of rounds) will be executed. There is a possibility that a new problem that has not existed in the past may occur, in which the player's desire to play is lower than if a jackpot game with a small number of targets was executed.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the setting suggestion effect can be executed as an end screen effect executed at the end of the jackpot game, and the end screen effect can be executed depending on the overlapping situation between the jackpot game period and the SP time period. The configuration is such that the presentation mode of the setting suggestion presentation executed as the presentation can be varied.

Specifically, if the situation is such that it is difficult to execute the setting suggestion performance during the SP time period due to the execution of the jackpot game (the situation where the number of executions of special symbol fluctuations has decreased), then there are other situations. The configuration is such that the performance mode of the setting suggestion performance (end screen setting suggestion performance) executed as the end screen performance is more likely to be advantageous to the player than in the case of the end screen performance. More specifically, the presentation mode of the end screen setting suggestion presentation is configured to facilitate the execution of a plurality of setting suggestion presentations in an overlapping manner.

With this configuration, even if a jackpot game is executed at a timing when the setting suggestion effect is difficult to be executed during the SP time period, the setting suggestion effect can be supplemented with the end screen effect of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem in which the player's desire to play decreases based on the execution of a jackpot game.

When the end screen effect of the jackpot game is executed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 suggests the game state notification mode and setting value for notifying the player of the game state that will be set after the end of the winning game. In the figure shown in FIG. 98(a), the game state notification mode indicates to the player that the probability change state will be set after the end of the jackpot game. A comment of "one more time" is displayed as a mode of notification. That is, a game state notification mode is displayed to notify the player that a high probability state of special symbols will be set until the jackpot game is executed again.

In addition, when indicating that the time saving state (time saving 100 times) is set after the end of the jackpot game as the game state notification mode, a comment of "100 chances" is displayed. In other words, it is a gaming state (time saving state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, and furthermore, to notify the player that the period that this gaming state will last is 100 times (100 special symbol fluctuations). This mode is displayed. In this way, by notifying the degree of advantage when comparing the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game with the most disadvantageous gaming state (normal state) for the player, the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game can be adjusted. It is possible to make predictions in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

Here, even if "100 chances" is displayed as the game state notification mode displayed in the end screen effect, that is, the notification mode corresponding to the time saving state is displayed, the notification target is It is preferable to configure the system so that there is a possibility that a gaming state (probability variable state) that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state that is set is set. By configuring in this way, for a player for whom "100 chances" is displayed as the game state notification mode, until the end (the end condition of the time saving state (satisfied when the special symbol fluctuation reaches 100 times) It is possible to have the player play the game while having expectations that the variable probability state (until the termination condition) is satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to inform the player that the actually set gaming state is not a time saving state but a variable probability state at a stage where the end condition for the time saving state can be satisfied. This allows the player to play the game while having expectations that the variable probability state will be set until the time saving state ends. In addition, in the case where a variable probability state is set after the end of a jackpot game, if a notification mode corresponding to the time saving state is displayed as the gaming state notification mode, a notification mode corresponding to the time saving state is displayed to indicate that the actual gaming state is a variable probability state. It is preferable to configure the suggestive performance to be executable within a period until the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied. As a result, the player who is playing the game will watch the performance executed while expecting that the probability change state is set, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

Note that the frequency at which a notification mode corresponding to a gaming state different from the actually set gaming state is displayed may be configured to vary depending on the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10, for example, Setting a setting value that is advantageous to the player (for example, setting 3) is better than setting a setting value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, setting 1), as the actual gaming state is It is preferable to configure the system so that notification modes corresponding to different gaming states are displayed less frequently. With this configuration, when the notification mode corresponding to the time saving state is displayed as the game state notification mode, the possibility that the time saving state is actually set is set to a setting value that is advantageous to the player (for example, setting 3). ) is set.

Therefore, after the notification mode corresponding to the time-saving state is displayed as the game state notification mode, the time-saving end condition is satisfied and the gaming state shifts to the normal state more often. (For example, setting 3) can be more likely to be set. In this way, when a condition disadvantageous to the player (for example, the end of a time-saving state) is established as a game executed in the pachinko machine 10, information advantageous to the player (for example, high setting notification (suggestion)) is provided. By configuring the game so that it is easy to provide the game, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from being significantly reduced due to the repeated occurrence of disadvantageous situations for the player.

Note that, without being limited to this, a setting value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, setting 1) is set more favorably than a setting value that is advantageous to the player (for example, setting 3). It is better to configure the system so that the notification mode corresponding to a gaming state different from the actually set gaming state is displayed less frequently. With this configuration, conditions advantageous to the player (for example, conditions for notifying that a variable probability state is set, conditions for executing high setting notification (suggestion)) can be executed redundantly. Therefore, for example, a more advantageous benefit can be given to a player for whom a high setting value is set. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the players to play the game while making them expect that they will be given many advantageous benefits.

Returning to FIG. 98(b), the explanation will be continued. If it is determined that the end period of the jackpot game has passed the SP time period, that is, the jackpot game is in progress, or the SP time period is set before the jackpot game, and the timing to end the SP period is during the jackpot game. In some cases, it is impossible (difficult) to execute special symbol variations during the SP time period after the end of the jackpot game, so multiple setting suggestion effects are set during the end screen effect (Fig. 98 ( b)).

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 99 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 138) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 135). Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 134) as power outage processing is immediately executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 100, the counter etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be explained. These counters etc. are used for special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37, display settings on the second symbol display device 83, and display settings on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the following operations.

To set the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a special hit random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and a jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. Special hit type counter C2 to be used, stop type selection counter C3 for determining the stop type of the special symbol (reach type, out of reach (out of reach length A, out of short A), out of reach type), variation pattern selection A variation type counter CS1 used for this, and an initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1 are used. Further, a normal winning random number counter C4 is used for drawing the normal symbols, and a normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see Figure 124), and some counters are updated irregularly during main processing (see Figure 138). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of four reserved areas (1st to 4th reserved areas) for storing reserved balls of the 1st special symbol, and a reserved ball of the 2nd special symbol. A special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of four reserved areas (1st to 4th reserved area) for the purpose of A ball execution area is provided. Each area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has a special winning random number counter C1, a special winning type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter according to the timing of ball entry into the first ball entrance 64. Each value of CS1 is stored. Similarly, similar values are stored in each area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in accordance with the timing of ball entry into the second right ball entry port 640r.

In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding areas 1 to 4). The value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing when the ball passes through any of the second entrance ports (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be explained in detail. The special winning random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535), and becomes 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 65535 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 65535). It is configured to return. In particular, when the special winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1.

Further, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the special winning random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the special winning random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 65,535, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 65,535. This initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 124) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 138).

The value of the special winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), for example, and is updated at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. The ball is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The random number value for the special symbol jackpot is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 102(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the special symbol jackpot random number counter C1. is determined to be a special symbol jackpot when it matches the value of the random number that is a jackpot set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is used for times when the probability of the special symbol is low (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and when the probability is high that the probability of the special symbol becoming a jackpot is higher than when the probability is low (for the special symbol). It is divided into two types: one for the period when the symbol is in a high probability state, and the number of random numbers that will be a jackpot included in each type is set to be different. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. Furthermore, what are the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 102(a)) for when the probability of special symbols is high and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 102(a)) for when the probability of special symbols is low? , is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

The special hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits the jackpot, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). , is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). For example, the value of the special winning type counter C2 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the value of the special winning type counter C2 is updated when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the appropriate timing.

Here, if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that results in a special symbol jackpot, that is, the special symbol is missed. If it is a random number, the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol comes off.

On the other hand, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that results in a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in is the one when the special symbol is a jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot will be the display mode indicated by the value of the special win type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. . In this embodiment, five jackpot types are set: "jackpot A1", "jackpot B1", "jackpot C1", "jackpot D1", and "jackpot E1", and the special jackpot type counter C2 One of "jackpot A1", "jackpot B1", "jackpot C1", "jackpot D1", and "jackpot E1" is determined. Then, a display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol. The details of the jackpot winning probability in the special symbol lottery of this embodiment will be described later with reference to the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (FIG. 102(a)).

Further, the value of the special winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. As shown in FIG. 103, in the jackpot type selection table 202d for determining the jackpot type, the same (common) contents are defined for the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. There is. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a special symbol lottery with the same degree of advantage to the player is executed when the first special symbol lottery is executed and when the second special symbol lottery is executed. It is configured so that With this configuration, no matter which special symbol lottery is executed, there will be no difference in the benefits given to the player (providing a jackpot game), so the player can play the game with peace of mind. be able to.

Note that, without being limited to this, the special symbol 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 is referred to as the jackpot type selection table 202d in response to the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol is referred to. By defining the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2 and making the jackpot types that can be selected different between the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, or by making the selection ratio different, the first special symbol The lottery and the second special symbol lottery may be configured to have different degrees of advantage. In this case, when the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the initial state as the gaming state, the second special symbol lottery, in which the trigger for execution is relatively difficult to establish, is better. , it is preferable to configure it so that the degree of advantage is higher than that of the first special symbol lottery. As a result, we aim to set a different gaming state (a gaming state in which the trigger for executing the second special symbol lottery is more likely to occur than in the normal state) for players who are playing the game in the initial state. can be made to play games.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 198). The above-mentioned stop type selection counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1 determine rough display modes such as so-called short time off, long time off, normal reach, super reach, etc. Determining the display mode is specifically determining the variation time of symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and detailed information of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. The pattern variation mode is determined. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 138) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the main process. Note that the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 104) that stores random values for determining the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations from the values (random values) of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 104). It is provided in the ROM 202.

The normal winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 239). Further, when the normal winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every time a timer interrupt process is performed, and when it is detected that the ball has passed through the second ball entry opening (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side. It is acquired when the ball is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The random number value for the normal symbol win is set by the normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 102(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is If it matches the value of the random number that is a win set by the normal win random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol has won. In addition, this normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 102(b)) is used for the low probability of the normal symbol (the period when the normal symbol is in the normal state), and for the probability of the normal symbol winning from the low probability period. It is divided into two types: one for high probability times (periods in which the normal symbols are in a time-saving state), and the number of random numbers that will be a jackpot included in each type is set to be different. Furthermore, the types of winnings for the normal symbols are set as normal winnings and long-term winnings, and the values of the normal winning random number counter C4 are set for each.

Here, in the normal game state (low probability game state) for a normal win with a normal symbol, and in the jackpot game state, the operation in which the electric accessory 640a is activated to the open state with an open time of 0.2 seconds is executed once. It's a win. In addition, during the time saving period and the probability variable period, the action of operating the electric accessory 640a in the open state with an open time of 2 seconds is repeated twice to win. On the other hand, a long-time win is a win in which the action of operating the electric accessory 640a to the open state in a 2-second open time is repeated twice, regardless of the gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a that is executed during the short time period for normal winnings and the variable probability period and the opening operation for long winnings are set to be the same, but the opening operation for long winnings is not limited to this. It may also be an opening operation. Specifically, for example, the opening operation may be performed once for 3 seconds. With this configuration, it is possible to make the ball enter the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r more easily when winning for a long time, and the fluctuation in the second special symbol during the normal game. The display can be easily executed, and the player can enjoy the changes in the game performance by the fluctuating display of the second special symbol in which a fresh preview display or the like is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 102(b), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C4 is between 5 and 6, the normal symbol is a hit. It is determined that there is. On the other hand, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, if the value of the acquired normal win random number counter C4 is between 5 and 204, it is determined that the normal symbol is a win. In addition, in this embodiment, when a normal symbol lottery is won, a different normal symbol winning game is executed depending on the set gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, A game (short win) in which it is difficult to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640 when a normal symbol is won in a state where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, and a game with a short win It may also be configured to be able to execute a game (long hit) in which it is easy to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640.

When the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the fluctuating display of the normal symbols is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5, 6", it is determined that the win is won, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. The symbol "○" is displayed as a lighted symbol. Then, if the value of the random number counter C4 is "5, 6", the electric accessory 640a is opened (opening operation) for "0.2 seconds x once" as a win. In addition, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, if the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a is released for "0.2 seconds x once"; The time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, there are 200 random numbers that result in a jackpot for the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204." These random numbers are stored in the normal winning random number table 202c for high probability times (see FIG. 102(b)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability that the special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/1.2".

When the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 displays a variable display of the normal symbols. Executes for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the win is won, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. The "○" symbol is displayed as a flashing light, and the electric accessory 640a is released "twice for 2 seconds". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display is extremely shortened from 30 seconds to 3 seconds compared to when the probability of the normal symbol is low, and furthermore, the second ball entry port 640 is opened. Since the period is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the right second ball entry port 640. In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, if the normal symbol hits, the second ball entry port 640 is opened for "2 seconds x 2 times"; The time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for "3 seconds x 3 times".

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 124). , are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 138).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters, etc., and the main controller 110 controls the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters, etc. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 99, the explanation will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening/closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. Send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

Furthermore, a setting switch 110c and a setting key 110b are connected to the input/output port 205, and the MPU 201 performs processing for changing setting values based on signals output in response to operations on the setting key 110b and setting switch 110c. Execute the process to display the setting value. Note that the contents of various operations using the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c have been described above with reference to FIG. 84, so a description thereof will be omitted.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, includes a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, when the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball launch is turned off (not operated), the operation handle is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview effects. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, includes a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, touch sensor 290, firing sensor 293, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 83). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply section 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can successfully execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 83) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111 when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input. It is transmitted to the device 111.

<About the electrical configuration of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment>
Next, details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 101(a). FIG. 101(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 101(a), the ROM 202 in the first embodiment includes a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, a fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, a normal symbol random number table 202c, a jackpot type selection table 202d, and a fluctuation pattern selection table 202b. The pattern scenario table 202e includes at least a pattern scenario table 202e.

First, details of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a will be explained with reference to FIG. 102(a). This special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is a data table that is referred to when executing a special symbol lottery. Specified for each value. FIG. 102(a) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of this special symbol jackpot random number table 202a.

As shown in Figure 102(a), in the low probability state of the special symbol, 250 random numbers (counter value) from "0 to 249" are determined as a jackpot for the special symbol with respect to the set value "1". 275 items from 0 to 274 are set for the setting value 2, and 300 items from 0 to 299 are set for the setting value 3. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 102(a), the random value (counter value) for determining a special symbol jackpot in the variable probability gaming state (special gaming state) is "0 to 999" for the set value "1". ” are set, 1100 pieces of “0 to 1099” are set for the setting value “2”, and 1200 pieces of “0 to 1199” are set for the setting value “3”.

In this embodiment, since the possible values of the first winning random number counter are 65,536 from "0 to 65,535", if the setting is "1" and the special symbol is in a low probability state, it will be a jackpot. The probability of winning (jackpot probability) is about 1/262, and in the high probability state of the special symbol, the jackpot probability is about 1/65. Further, when setting "2" is set, the jackpot probability is about 1/238 in the special symbol's low probability state, and the jackpot probability is about 1/60 in the special symbol's high probability state. Further, when setting "3" is set, the jackpot probability is about 1/218 in the special symbol's low probability state, and the jackpot probability is about 1/55 in the special symbol's high probability state.

Therefore, the setting "1" is the setting value where it is most difficult to win a jackpot (disadvantageous setting value), and the setting "3" is the setting value where it is most likely to win the jackpot (advantageous setting value). As described above, in this embodiment, no matter which setting value is set, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is four times the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol. It is configured so that In other words, no matter what setting value is set, the same benefits (benefits to make it easier to win the jackpot) when moving from a special symbol low probability state to a special symbol high probability state The system is configured to provide players with the following information. By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to set multiple levels of setting values, the benefits that are given when the probability state of the special symbol changes can be made uniform regardless of the setting value. , it is possible to prevent the game contents from being excessively different depending on the set values.

In addition, depending on the setting value, the content of the benefit given when moving from the low probability state of the special symbol to the high probability state of the special symbol may be changed, for example, setting "3" rather than setting "1". '' may be configured so that the degree of change in the jackpot probability is greater when transitioning from the special symbol's low probability state to the special symbol's high probability state, and in the case of setting "1", the special symbol's The jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is 4 times the jackpot probability in the low probability state, and in the case of setting "3", the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is higher than the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol. It may be configured so that the jackpot probability is six times higher. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage of setting "3", which is an advantageous setting, relative to setting "1", which is a disadvantageous setting, so that an advantageous setting value is set for the player. The player can be made to play a game with the pachinko machine 10 that is currently available.

In this embodiment, the setting value provided in the pachinko machine 10 is set to three levels, but the setting value is not limited to this, and may be set to two levels, or may be set to four or more levels (for example, six levels). good. Furthermore, in this embodiment, setting differences are provided for the jackpot probabilities of the special symbols, but this is not limited to, for example, the jackpot probability, the small win probability, the setting probability of the variable probability state, the period during which the variable probability state continues, It may be configured such that setting differences are provided for various elements that can vary the degree of advantage of the game, such as the game content of the jackpot game. Even in such a case, it is possible to provide different degrees of advantage to the player depending on the setting values that are set, so it is possible to provide players with different degrees of advantage depending on the setting values that are set. It is possible to make the player play the game with the intention of playing the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102(b), details of the above-mentioned normal symbol per random number table 202c will be explained. FIG. 102(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the random number table 202c per normal symbol. As shown in FIG. 102(b), when the normal symbol is in a low probability state, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is defined as "5, 6" as the random value (counter value) corresponding to the normal symbol win. has been done. On the other hand, when the normal symbol is in a high probability state, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is defined as a random value (counter value) in the range of "5 to 204" corresponding to the winning of the normal symbol.

That is, in this embodiment, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol is set to a low probability (1/120). On the other hand, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol is set to a high probability (1/1.2). Thereby, it is possible to easily execute a normal symbol winning game based on a winning of a normal symbol during the time saving state.

Next, details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be explained with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of this jackpot type selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 103, the jackpot A1 (10R probability variable jackpot) is defined in association with the value of the special winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 39", and the value of the special winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "40, 41". , jackpot B1 (10R guaranteed variable jackpot) is defined in association with the range of "42 to 47", jackpot C1 (5R probability variable jackpot) is defined in association with the range of "48 to 59". , jackpot D1 (2R probability variable jackpot) is defined in association with the range of "60 to 99", and jackpot E1 (10R normal jackpot, time saving 100 times) is defined in correspondence. Therefore, at a rate of 60%, the game state is set to a variable probability jackpot and the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the variable probability gaming state that is most advantageous to the player, and at a rate of 40%, it becomes a regular jackpot and the gaming state after the jackpot ends is fixed. The time-saving gaming state is set to be less advantageous than the gaming state.

Here, as shown in FIG. 103 and described above, jackpot A1 and jackpot B1 are defined as jackpot types in which jackpot games with the same content (10R probability variable jackpot) are executed. In other words, the same jackpot game is executed whether jackpot A1 or jackpot B1 is selected as the jackpot type. By specifying different jackpot types for the same jackpot game in this way, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (winning command, win-related command, etc.) to indicate the jackpot type, the jackpot type It becomes possible to execute different jackpot game performances depending on the situation.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this embodiment, when jackpot A1 is selected as the jackpot type and when jackpot E1 is selected, it is announced that it is a 10-round jackpot game as a jackpot game performance. After that, a jackpot game performance is executed in which a performance (probable variable promotion performance) for suggesting a gaming state to be set after the end of the jackpot game can be executed.

On the other hand, when jackpot B1, jackpot C1, or jackpot D1 is selected as the jackpot type, after notifying that the probability change state will be set after the jackpot game ends, it is suggested how many rounds the current jackpot game will continue. It is configured so that a jackpot game performance that can execute a performance (round promotion performance) for the purpose of the game is executed.

In this way, when configured to execute multiple types of jackpot game performances (probability promotion performance, round promotion performance) with different meanings as jackpot game performances, any jackpot game performance that can be executed ( If the 10R certain variable jackpot) is defined as one jackpot type, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (winning command, winning related command, etc.) to indicate the jackpot type corresponding to the 10R certain variable jackpot, Since which jackpot game performance is to be executed is determined at random, there is a problem in that it is difficult to fix the proportion of the 10R probability variable jackpot in each jackpot game performance.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, two types of jackpots (jackpot A1, jackpot B1) indicating a 10R probability variable jackpot are provided, and when jackpot A1 is selected, a jackpot game performance in which a probability variable promotion performance is executed, Processing rules on the audio lamp control device 113 side are defined so that when jackpot B1 is selected, a round promotion effect is executed.

With this configuration, the ratio of each jackpot game in each jackpot game production can be matched to the selection ratio of each jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d. Specifically, when the variable probability promotion performance is executed (when jackpot A1 and jackpot E1 are selected), the rate at which the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game is 50%. Also, when the round promotion effect is executed (when jackpot B1, jackpot C1, jackpot D1 is selected), a 10R jackpot will be executed at a rate of 10%, and a 5R jackpot will be executed at a 30% rate. 2R jackpot will be executed at a rate of 60%.

Next, details of the variation pattern selection table 202b in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 104(a). FIG. 104(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern table 202b in the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 104(a), the variation pattern selection table 202b in the first embodiment is used to select a variation pattern according to the lottery result when a special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state. The normal variation pattern selection table 202b1 that is referred to, and the time saving/probability variation variation that is referred to in order to select a variation pattern according to the lottery result when a special symbol lottery is executed in the probability variation state and time saving state. The pattern table 202b2 is referred to when a special symbol lottery is executed in a variable probability state, and is defined so that a shorter variation time is easily selected than the time saving/probability variation variation pattern table 202b2. It is composed of at least a variation pattern table 202b3.

First, details of the above-mentioned normal variation pattern table 202b1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 104(b). FIG. 104(b) is a data table schematically showing the contents of this normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. In the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the special symbol lottery results, and the value range of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the variation patterns. stipulated.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 104(b), if the judgment result is a win, the variation time is 20 seconds for the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 49". A winning variation A with a variation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with the range of "50 to 99", and a variation B with a variation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with the range of "100 to 198". A winning variation C with a time of 90 seconds is defined in association with the winning variation C. Therefore, if you win a jackpot in the normal gaming state, the fluctuation time will be set to 20 seconds at a rate of approximately 25% (50/199), and the fluctuation time will be set to 60 seconds at a rate of approximately 25% (50/199). , and the variation time is set to 90 seconds at a rate of about 50% (99/199).

On the other hand, if the result of the validity judgment is incorrect, an incorrect variation A with a variation time of 5 seconds is defined in association with the range in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 149", and An outlier variation B with a variation time of 20 seconds is defined in association with the range of "194", and an outlier variation C with a variation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with the range of "195 to 198". ing. For this reason, if you lose in the special symbol lottery in the normal gaming state, the variable time will be set to 5 seconds at a rate of approximately 75% (150/199), and at a rate of approximately 23% (45/199). The fluctuation time is set to 20 seconds, and the fluctuation time is set to 60 seconds at a rate of about 2% (4/199).

In this way, when the judgment result is a hit, the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than when it is a loss, so the first symbol and the third symbol The longer the variable display is performed, the higher the expectation for a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104(c), details of the above-mentioned time saving/probability variation variation pattern table 202b2 will be explained. FIG. 104(c) is a data table schematically showing the contents of this time saving/probability variation variation pattern table 202b2. As shown in FIG. 104(c), if the judgment result is a win, the winning variation A with a variation time of 20 seconds is A win variation B having a variation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with the range "50 to 198". Therefore, if you win a jackpot in the normal gaming state, the fluctuation time will be set to 20 seconds at a rate of approximately 25% (50/199), and the fluctuation time will be set to 60 seconds at a rate of approximately 75% (149/199). is set to

On the other hand, if the result of the validity judgment is incorrect, an incorrect variation D with a variation time of 3 seconds is defined in association with the range in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 179", and An out-of-range variation B with a variation time of 20 seconds is defined in association with the range of "197", and an out-of-range variation C with a variation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with "198". For this reason, if you lose in the special symbol lottery in the normal gaming state, the variable time will be set to 3 seconds at a rate of approximately 90% (150/199), and at a rate of approximately 9% (18/199). The fluctuation time is set to 20 seconds, and the fluctuation time is set to 60 seconds at a rate of about 0.5% (1/199).

In this way, when the time saving/probability variation variation pattern table 202b2 is referred to, a short variation time is more likely to be selected than when the normal variation pattern table 202b1 is referenced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the gaming efficiency in the high probability game state and the time-saving game state which are set to the time-saving state with normal symbols. Therefore, it is possible to add variety to the game.

Next, details of the above-mentioned high-speed fluctuation variation pattern table 202b3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the high-speed fluctuation variation pattern table 202b3 in the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 105, if the judgment result is a win, a short winning variation A with a variation time of 6 seconds is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 99". A short winning variation B with a variation time of 12 seconds is defined in association with the range of "100 to 198". Therefore, in a state where the high-speed fluctuation fluctuation pattern table 202b3 is referred to, if a special symbol lottery results in a hit (jackpot), the fluctuation time will be changed at a rate of approximately 50% (100/199). is set to 6 seconds, and the variation time is set to 12 seconds at a rate of about 50% (99/199).

On the other hand, if the result of the validity judgment is incorrect, a short deviation variation A with a variation time of 1.5 seconds is defined in association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 189", A short variation B with a variation time of 6 seconds is defined in association with the range "190 to 198". Therefore, if the special symbol is out of the lottery in a state where the high-speed fluctuation fluctuation pattern table 202b3 is referenced in a variable probability state, the fluctuation time will be 6 seconds at a rate of approximately 50% (100/199). , and the variation time is set to 12 seconds at a rate of about 50% (99/199).

In this embodiment, in a state where a probability variation state is set, a variation pattern of special symbol variation is selected according to the jackpot type that triggers the probability variation state to be set, and the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (variation). The fluctuation pattern table to be referred to at the time is configured to be switched between the time-saving/reliable fluctuation fluctuation pattern table 202b2 or the high-speed fluctuation fluctuation pattern table 202b3, and the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f (see FIG. 106) to be described later. ) is configured to switch the fluctuation pattern table in accordance with the specified contents.

As a result, the period in which the variable probability state is set is a variable first period in which a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time is likely to be selected, and a variation pattern with a comparatively shorter variation time than the variable first period is likely to be selected. It becomes possible to set a variable second period. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern table is designed to suppress the situation in which the number of executions of the jackpot game per unit time increases excessively due to the successive selection of fluctuation patterns with short fluctuation times after the jackpot game ends. It is possible to change the variation pattern so as to increase the number of special symbol drawings per unit time when the variable probability state continues for a long time without winning a jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable probability state is set, the above-mentioned two types of variation pattern tables are configured to be referenced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of variation pattern tables can be referenced. It may be configured as possible. Further, the gaming state in which a plurality of types of variable pattern tables can be referenced is not limited to the probability variable state, and may be configured to be able to refer to a plurality of types of variable pattern tables in other gaming states.

Next, details of the variation pattern scenario table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. 106. This variation pattern scenario table 202f defines a variation pattern table that is referred to according to the number of executions of the special symbol lottery executed after the end of the jackpot game, and corresponds to the previously executed jackpot game. Different scenarios are defined depending on the jackpot type and the gaming state that was set at the time of the previous jackpot win.

Specifically, when the probability variable state is set based on the jackpot A1, the number of special symbol drawings to be executed after the jackpot game ends is in the range of "1 to 80 times", regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. The variable pattern table 202b2 for time-saving/reliable variation is referred to, the variation pattern table 202b3 for high-speed variation is referred to for the range "81 times to 999 times", and the variation pattern table 202b3 for high-speed variation is referred to for the range "1000 times and above". A variation pattern scenario that refers to the pattern table 202b2 is defined.

In addition, if the variable probability state is set based on the jackpot B1, C1, and D1, and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state, the number of special symbol drawings executed after the jackpot game is "1". The variation pattern table 202b2 for time saving/reliable variation is referenced in the range of "81 times to 80 times", the variation pattern table 202b3 for high speed variation is referenced in the range of "81 times to 999 times", and the variation pattern table 202b3 for high speed variation is referenced in the range of "1000 times". , a variable pattern scenario is defined in which the time saving/probability variable variation pattern table 202b2 is referred to, and if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a time saving state or a variable probability state, a special symbol is executed after the end of the jackpot game. A variation pattern scenario is defined in which the high-speed variation variation pattern table 202b3 is referenced in the range of "1 to 999" lottery numbers, and the time-saving/probability variation variation pattern table 202b2 is referenced in the range of "1000 to 999". has been done.

Furthermore, if the time-saving state is set based on the jackpot E1, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the time-saving / A variation pattern scenario is defined in which the probability variation pattern table 202b2 is referred to and the normal variation pattern table 202b1 is referenced in a range of "101 times or more".

Although not shown in the figure, when the RAM clear switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, that is, when the initialization process of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, a dedicated fluctuation pattern scenario ( The normal variation pattern table 202b1 is referenced within the range of the number of special symbol drawings "1 to 100 times" to be executed after the initialization process. A variation pattern scenario is defined in which the high-speed variation variation pattern table 202b3 is referenced in the range of "101 times to 110 times" and the normal variation pattern table 202b1 is referenced in the range of "111 times to". In other words, when the RAM clear switch 122 is operated, such as when a setting change operation is executed, the normal state which is the initial state is set as the gaming state, and the number of special symbol drawings executed in the normal state is 100. The configuration is such that when the period exceeds the period, the high-speed fluctuation fluctuation pattern table 202b3 is referred to and the transition is made to a specific period in which a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is selected.

With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 after the settings have been changed, if the number of special symbol drawings executed without winning a jackpot exceeds 100, high-speed fluctuation will be executed. . Therefore, when a variation pattern in which a high-speed variation is executed is set as a variation pattern of special symbol variation in a pachinko machine 10 that is set to the normal state, the setting value may have been changed for the player. can be predicted.

Note that there are multiple fluctuation pattern scenarios (initial fluctuation pattern scenarios) that can be selected after the initialization process, and for example, one case where the setting value "1" is set and the other case where the setting value "3" is set. , a different initial time variation pattern scenario may be selected (selected more easily). With this configuration, it is possible to predict that a setting change has been made by knowing that an initial time variation pattern scenario has been set, and also to predict that a setting change has been made based on the type of the initial time variation pattern scenario that has been set. It becomes possible to predict the setting value.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the initial time fluctuation pattern scenario is configured to be set when the RAM clear switch 122 is operated at power-on (when initialization processing is executed); however, this is not limited to this. Alternatively, the initial time variation pattern scenario may be set when a setting change operation is performed. As a result, if the RAM clear switch 122 is operated without performing a setting change operation, a different variation pattern scenario will be set than when the setting change operation is performed, so By understanding the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, it is possible to more easily predict the presence or absence of a setting change.

Next, details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 101(b). FIG. 101(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 101(b), the RAM 203 in the first embodiment has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, set value storage area 203g, winning state storage area 203h, fluctuation number counter 203i, time saving It has a counter 203j, a variation execution flag 203k, a probability variation flag 203m, a jackpot flag 203n, a variation order storage area 203p, and an other memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the first special symbol and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), and each of these areas includes: Each value of a special win random number counter C1, a special win type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding area). Among the vacant areas (1 area to 4th reserved area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th area). That is, the area with the smaller area number stores data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time, and the data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time is stored in the first pending area. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed.

Note that when data is shifted from the first pending area to the execution area, the first pending area becomes vacant. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other holding areas (holding area 2 to holding area 4) to holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 3) with one lower area number. It will be done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored. Further, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, like the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). A normal win random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, and the acquired data is distributed to four holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 4). ) are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas. That is, similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to the winnings are stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a winning lottery of normal symbols is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination is made as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not.

In addition, when data is shifted from the first holding area to the execution area, the first holding area becomes vacant, so as in the case of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, winnings stored in other holding areas Shift processing is performed to shift the data to a reservation area with an area number one smaller. Further, data shifting is also performed only for the reservation area in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d displays a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning). This is a counter that counts the number of pending pitches (the number of times of waiting) up to four times (fluctuating display performed on the display device 81). The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, it reaches the maximum value of 4. 1 is added. On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed.

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of pending balls N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command. The held ball number command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d is changed.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts reserved balls based on the winning of the right second ball entrance 640r, and the other configuration is the same as the special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 203d. Therefore, detailed explanation will be omitted.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the main control device by a pending ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 every time the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are changed. It is possible to obtain the value of the number of balls held in the variable display held in 110. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if the number of held pitches deviates from the actual fluctuation display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received command for the number of held pitches.

The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls on hold based on the number of balls on hold command, and displays the number of balls on display for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of balls on hold each time the number of balls on hold changes. Send pitch count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved pitches notified by this display number of reserved pitches command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 to a maximum of four times. This is a counter that counts up to The initial value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time a new normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed in a variable manner.

When the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. On the other hand, when the ball passes through the right or left through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing new is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c.

The setting value storage area 203g is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the setting values of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, if "00H" is stored as data in the setting value storage area 203g, it indicates that the setting value "1" is set, and if "01H" is stored as data, This indicates that the set value "2" is set, and if "02H" is stored as data, it indicates that the set value "3" is set. When executing a special symbol lottery, the data in this setting value storage area 203g is read out, and a special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is executed with a lottery probability corresponding to the setting value indicated by the read data. That is, in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 102(a)), the range of random numbers corresponding to the setting value indicated by the data in the setting value storage area 203g and the first winning random number stored in the execution area. A special symbol lottery is executed by comparing the value with the value of the counter C1. The initial value of the setting value storage area 203g is set to "00H", and each time the setting switch 110c is pressed (operated) in the setting change state, the values change from "01H" to "02H" and "01H". ”, and when the setting switch 110c is further pressed while the data is “02H”, the data is updated to “01H”. Note that when the power is turned on with pressing of the RAM clear switch 122, all data in the RAM 203 is reset (cleared) to initial values. Therefore, when only the RAM clearing operation is performed, the value in the setting value storage area 203g is also reset to the initial value "00H". That is, the setting can be changed to 1 even if only the RAM clearing operation is performed without executing the setting changing operation. Thereby, the convenience of the hall can be improved.

The winning state storage area 203h is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 0 and the probability change flag 203m is off), the normal state is stored in the winning state storage area 203h. "00H" is stored as information indicating the state. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time saving state (if the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 1 or more and the probability change flag 203m is off), the time saving state is stored in the winning state storage area 203h. "01H" is stored as the information indicating. In addition, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a variable probability state (if the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 1 or more and the probability variable flag 203m is on), the variable probability state is stored in the winning state storage area 203h. "02H" is stored as the information indicating. The information stored in this winning state storage area 203h is held until the end of the jackpot, and is referenced when setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

The variation counter 203i is a counter for measuring the number of variations in special symbol variations, and the counter value is updated based on the execution of the special symbol variation.

The time-saving counter 203j is a counter that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state with normal symbols, and if the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state with normal symbols. If the value of the time saving counter 203j is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with normal symbols. The initial value of this short-time counter 203j is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn in the main controller 110 and a special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. be done. That is, when a special symbol becomes a jackpot, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is newly set regardless of the value of the time saving counter 203j.

The variation execution flag 203k is a flag for identifying whether to execute variation of the first special symbol or variation of the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation is started according to the order in which the balls enter the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r (the order in which the balls are held and stored). Here, when the variation of the special symbol stops and the variation of the next special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball starts, the variation execution determination process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 stores the variation order as described below. Based on the order data of the pending storage stored in the area 203p, it is determined whether the fluctuation stored next corresponds to the pending data of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the determination result is Accordingly, the corresponding variation execution flag 203k is set on.

The probability variable flag 203m is a flag for determining whether the current gaming state is a probability variable state. This variable probability flag 203m is set to ON when a variable probability state is set. This probability change flag 203m is set when it is determined that the jackpot game being executed is other than jackpot E (S1113 :No) is set to on. In addition, in the process of S220 in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 125) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is set to OFF when stopping the variable display of the special symbol that becomes a jackpot.

The jackpot flag 203n is a flag indicating that the gaming state is a jackpot game. This jackpot flag 203n is set to ON when the start of the jackpot game is set in the process of S221 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 125) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In addition, in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is set to off in the process of S1117 that is executed when the jackpot ends timing (S1110: Yes). .

The fluctuation order storage area 203p stores the game ball when it enters the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640r, or the second ball entrance 640 and is stored as a reserved ball (reserved storage). This is an area where the suspended order is stored. In this embodiment, the variation of the special symbols is configured to be executed in the order in which they are stored, and one of the special symbols is not executed preferentially. Further, in this embodiment, since the distribution device 700 is configured to alternately distribute the balls to the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r, the variation starts in the order in which the balls are held and stored. Therefore, even in the variation of special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol will be executed alternately, and when only one of the reserved balls is consumed, the reserved ball of that special symbol will be It is possible to suppress the problem of overflow.

In the other memory area 203z, necessary flags, counters, storage data, etc. for other control processing executed by the MPU of the main control device 110 are set, but details thereof will be omitted.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol holding lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening/closing the front side and a solenoid for driving electric accessories is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. Send.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208 consisting of a switch group, a sensor group, etc. (not shown), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 receives output from the various switches 208. and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 134) is immediately executed as power outage processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, when the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball launch is turned off (not operated), the operation handle is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and continuous preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the background mode displayed at the time of super reach. It controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227, and also instructs the display control device 114 to change the content of the presentation.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines errors according to commands from the main controller 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and controls the display of error commands including the type of error. to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

As shown in FIG. 101(a), the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a variation pattern selection table 222a, a production switching table 222b, a setting suggestion production selection table 222c, a look-ahead prohibition period selection table 222d, and a suspension upper limit production selection table. At least a table 222e, a performance execution number selection table 222f, a mission selection table 222g, a promotion point selection table 222h, and a promotion performance selection table 222i are stored.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining a variation pattern based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. A plurality of variation patterns are set corresponding to the variation time and variation pattern type corresponding to the variation pattern command, and one variation pattern is determined by acquiring a counter value for selection (not shown).

The variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 includes, for example, information indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, and the variation pattern of the special symbol (variation time, stop symbol, presence or absence of reach effect, based on the lottery result). Information for indicating the winning game type to be executed is included. Then, in the audio lamp control device 113, when receiving a variation pattern command, in order to execute a variation effect of the third symbol with a variation pattern corresponding to the corresponding special symbol variation, the audio lamp control device 113 refers to the variation pattern selection table 222a. Determine a variation pattern (variation pattern for performance).

The performance switching table 222b is a data table that is referred to when switching the performance period based on the time information (clock information) of the clock device 292. This embodiment is configured to be able to perform different effects depending on the set effect period. The performance switching table 222b is used to select a performance period for executing the performance (performance mode) performed by the third symbol display device 81, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227.

The determination of this performance mode is performed during the elapsed time confirmation process (see S2111 in FIG. 158) of the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and is based on the determination value of the performance switching table 222b shown in FIG. 108. , and the elapsed time T (see S3602 in FIG. 158) determined based on the time information (timekeeping information) of the clock device 292 (see S3603 in FIG. 158).

FIG. 108 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the effect switching table 222b stored in the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 108, in the performance switching table 222b, the type of performance period is defined in association with the value of the elapsed time T after the gaming machine is powered on.

In this embodiment, the normal performance period, the SP time preparation period, and the SP time period can be set as the performance period. The SP time period is a performance period in which a special performance mode is determined based on the clocked time, and is a period in which a performance with a sense of unity (period performance) is executed in a plurality of pachinko machines 10. The normal performance period is a period during which independent performances are performed in each pachinko machine 10 according to the results of the special symbol lottery. Further, the SP time preparation period is a period in which a performance similar to the normal performance period is performed, and is also a preparation period for notifying the player that the SP time period will be set soon. Therefore, during the SP time preparation period, on a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 where the same production as in the normal production period is performed, a guidance mode for guiding that the SP time period is approaching is displayed. Is displayed.

In the elapsed time confirmation process (see S2111) in FIG. 158, if the value of the elapsed time T indicates the normal performance period, the period performance flag 223p provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, which will be described later, is set. It is turned off, and information indicating that the SP time period is in progress, which is stored in a storage area provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, is cleared. Based on these processing results, the production performed by the third symbol display device 81, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 is in the normal production mode (the production mode of the production performed during the normal production period). It will be done. On the other hand, if the value of the elapsed time T indicates the SP time period, the period presentation flag 223p provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is set to ON, and the display control device 114 is further set to ON. Information indicating that the SP time period is in progress is stored in a storage area provided in the work RAM 233. Based on these processing results, the performance performed by the third symbol display device 81, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 is performed in a special performance mode.

As shown in FIG. 108, in this embodiment, the normal performance period is set for most of the time measured by the clock device 292, and the period in which the SP time period is set is short. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for players to experience the period effect (SP time effect) that is executed during the SP time period. You can make it happen. Further, although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that different effects are executed during the SP time period depending on the number of times the SP time period is set after the timing device 292 starts measuring time. In the first SP time period after the timing device 292 starts timing, the song A is played, and a period effect (SP time effect) is performed in a presentation mode according to the song A. Then, in the second SP time period after the timing device 292 starts timing, music B, which is different from music A, is played, and a period performance (SP time performance) is performed in a performance mode corresponding to music B. Ru.

Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to execute the SP time performance at various timings.

To explain in detail the contents stipulated in the effect switching table 222b, the effect switching table 222b includes an elapsed time T (elapsed time since the power was turned on) calculated based on the time measurement contents of the timing device 292. The production period is defined according to the elapsed time T, the normal production period is defined in the range where the elapsed time T is within 88 minutes, the SP time preparation period is defined in the range from 88 minutes to 90 minutes, and the period from 90 minutes to 93 minutes. The SP time period (for song A) is defined in the range of minutes. Then, the normal performance period is defined again in the range of 93 minutes to 213 minutes, the SP time preparation period is defined in the range of 213 minutes to 215 minutes, and the SP time period is defined in the range of 215 minutes to 219 minutes. (for song B) is specified.

Thereafter, a normal performance period, a SP time preparation period, and a SP time period are each defined for the elapsed time.

As described above, in this embodiment, the length of the SP time period is defined to vary depending on the mode of performance to be performed. In other words, if the SP time period for song A is set, the SP time period is 3 minutes, and if the SP time period is set for song B, the SP time period is 4 minutes. There is. With this configuration, it is possible to easily set the SP time period corresponding to the length of the music being played.

On the other hand, the length of the SP time preparation period is the same length (2 minutes) no matter which SP time period is set. With this configuration, it is possible to share performance data for setting performance modes exclusive to the SP time preparation period (for example, a telop display of "SP period will soon begin", etc.).

In addition, during the SP time preparation period, in addition to the guidance mode to inform the player that the period in which the SP time period will be set is approaching, the SP time period that will be set next will be It may also be configured such that a prediction mode for notifying the player of the performance mode of the time performance is also set. In this case, the preview mode may be a mode in which the player can grasp a part of the performance (music to be played) that will be performed during the next SP time period, such as "Next time, song B starts." It will be done.

In this embodiment, the SP time preparation period can be set to a predetermined period (2 minutes) before the SP time period is set, but the SP time preparation period is not limited to this. It may be configured such that a notification mode for notifying the player of the remaining time until the SP time period is set is always displayed during the normal performance period without setting the SP time period. In this case, it is possible for the player to understand that there is a long time remaining until the next SP time period is set, so players who wish to play during the SP time period can be informed of the SP time period. It is possible to secure a long preparation period for playing games during the period. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the player from being unable to play a game during the SP time period and losing his desire to play.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, during the normal production period, the remaining time until the SP time period is set is not displayed, but during the SP time preparation period, the remaining time until the SP time period is set is displayed. By configuring it to do so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the SP time period is set. Therefore, a player who is playing a game during the normal performance period can be made to continue playing the game while expecting that the SP time period will be set.

In addition, in this embodiment, a period in which a unified effect (period effect) is performed in a plurality of pachinko machines 10 and a period in which an independent effect (normal effect) is performed in each pachinko machine 10 is defined. It is configured so that it can be set, and furthermore, it is configured so that multiple types of performance modes can be set as the performance mode for the period performance, but it is not limited to this, and it is also possible to set multiple types of performance modes for the regular performance. It may be configured.

In this case, a predetermined performance lottery may be executed when the normal performance period is set, and the performance content may be determined based on the performance result. With this configuration, it is possible to perform a different performance based on the information timed by the timing device 292 even in the case of the normal performance, thereby increasing the player's desire to play.

In addition, in this embodiment, in order to execute a period performance with a sense of unity in a plurality of pachinko machines 10, the same performance period is set for every pachinko machine 10 according to the elapsed time T from power-on. Although the contents of the production switching table 222b are specified so that It may also be configured such that the timing of the two events is different.

More specifically, when the setting value is set high, the timing of the guidance mode (telop display) being displayed and the announcement sound during the SP time preparation period is better than when the setting value is set low. The stipulated contents of the effect switching table 222b may be configured to vary depending on the set value so that the output timing of the effect is likely to be delayed.

With this configuration, it is assumed that multiple pachinko machines 10 execute a period performance with a sense of unity, and by intentionally performing a performance without a sense of unity (delayed performance), it is possible for the players to It is possible to give some sense of discomfort to the user. In addition, in the above example, the delay effect is more likely to be executed when the setting is high than when the setting is low, so the player will be notified from the timing when the SP time preparation period is set. You can watch the performance being performed.

In addition, it is difficult to understand that the period effect has been executed with a delay from only one pachinko machine 10, but by comparing the period effect executed at multiple adjacent pachinko machines 10, the period effect can be determined. This makes it easier to understand that the execution timing of the process has been delayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the period effects executed on the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

In addition, when executing the delayed effect described above, instead of delaying all the effects to be executed, the normal effect timing is set as the execution timing of the effect, and some effects (for example, audio) are delayed. It may be configured to shift (delay) the execution timing only, or it may be configured such that the execution timing of some effects is accelerated.

In addition, in FIG. 108, the correspondence between the elapsed time T and the performance period when the elapsed time T is 339 minutes or later is omitted, but in reality, even after 339 minutes, there is a special performance period of 2 minutes and a special performance period of 50 minutes. It is set so that the normal performance period of 1 minute is repeated alternately. The range of the elapsed time T in this effect switching table 222b only needs to be set for at least one day's business hours of the hall. For example, if the elapsed time T is less than 1440 minutes (24 hours), the elapsed time T and the effect A correspondence relationship with a period may be set in advance, or a correspondence relationship for several days may be set in advance. Furthermore, the types of performance periods are not necessarily limited to the three types of normal performance period, SP time preparation period, and SP time period, and four or more types of performance periods with different modes of performance may be provided. good.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a table is defined that defines the type of performance period for each value of elapsed time T, but it is not necessary to prepare a table that corresponds to all T values. For example, one value range of the elapsed time T that is the normal performance period and one type of value range of the elapsed time T that is the SP time period are defined, and the value of the elapsed time T is the specified value. When the value is outside the range, a predetermined value may be added to the specified range of elapsed time T values. As a specific example, for example, the value range of the elapsed time T which is the normal performance period is 0 minutes 00 seconds to 50 minutes 00 seconds, and the value range of the elapsed time T which is the SP time period is 50 minutes 00 seconds to 60 minutes. 00 seconds, and when the value of elapsed time T reaches 60 minutes 00 seconds, the range of values of elapsed time T that becomes the normal performance period and the range of values of elapsed time T that becomes the SP time period. Control may be performed such that 60 minutes 00 seconds are added to each of them, and the type of presentation period is reset within the value range of the elapsed time T from 60 minutes 00 seconds to 120 minutes 00 seconds.

To be more specific, in the effect switching table 222b, the value range of the elapsed time T which is the normal effect period is 0 minutes 00 seconds to 50 minutes 00 seconds, and the value range of the elapsed time T which is the SP time period is Only the information that the time is from 50 minutes 00 seconds to 60 minutes 00 seconds is specified. Then, when the power is turned on, the information specified in the effect switching table 222b is copied to a predetermined area of the RAM 223, and the type of effect period is determined based on the copied information. If the elapsed time T reaches 60 minutes 00 seconds, which is the maximum value of the elapsed time T specified in the duplicated information, 60 minutes 00 seconds is added to the duplicated information and a new one is created. Update information. That is, the value range of the elapsed time T that becomes the normal performance period is 60 minutes 00 seconds to 110 minutes 00 seconds, and the value range of the elapsed time T that becomes the special performance period is 110 minutes 00 seconds to 120 minutes 00 seconds. Updated with information that there is. From then on, every time 60 minutes and 00 seconds elapse, 60 minutes and 00 seconds are added to the duplicated information to update it to new information, and the production period is changed based on the updated information and the elapsed time T. Determine the type of.

In this case, since the amount of data in the effect switching table 222b is reduced, the capacity of the ROM 222 can be reduced. Therefore, the price of the ROM 222 can be reduced.

The setting suggestion performance selection table 222c is a data table that is referred to in order to select a performance mode (performance pattern) when executing a setting suggestion performance, and includes set setting values and acquired performance counters. Different performance patterns (performance modes) are defined depending on the value of 223g.

This setting suggestion performance selection table 222c only defines performance patterns, and the performance mode of the setting suggestion performance that is actually executed is determined based on the type of setting suggestion performance and the selected performance pattern. It is determined. In this embodiment, the settings suggestion performance is executed by various performances (see FIG. 90(b)), and the settings suggestion performance can be executed in a manner corresponding to each performance. Therefore, if even a specific presentation mode is specified in the setting suggestion presentation selection table 222c, there is a problem in that the amount of presentation to be specified increases and the amount of data in the RAM 222 increases. Furthermore, once the specific presentation mode, that is, which presentation is used to execute the setting suggestion presentation in which manner is determined in the setting suggestion presentation selection table 222c, the setting suggestion presentation may be switched to another presentation. This poses a problem in that it is difficult to implement and it is difficult to increase variations in performance.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, only the performance pattern (setting suggestion content) of the setting suggestion performance is selected. With this configuration, it is possible to set a performance mode according to the determined performance pattern of the setting suggestion performance for the performance in which the setting suggestion performance is executed. The player can use the acquired execution right for any performance. Therefore, when increasing variations in presentation, the processing load can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is executed using the effect pattern selected in the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c, but the present invention is not limited to this. A storage means capable of storing a plurality of performance patterns selected by the storage means, and a generation means capable of generating a new performance pattern by summing the plurality of performance patterns stored in the storage means. It may be configured to be able to execute a setting suggestion performance based on a performance pattern generated by the means.

In this case, the performance pattern generated by the generation means is preferably configured to be a performance pattern that can suggest the setting value more specifically than the performance pattern defined in the setting suggestion performance selection table 222c. In the case where the machine 10 is configured to be able to set six levels of setting values, the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c includes effect patterns that can narrow down the setting values to at most two types (for example, A performance pattern indicating setting 1 or 6, a performance pattern indicating setting 2 or 6, etc.) is defined, and a performance pattern that can specifically notify the setting value (for example, setting 6, etc.) is generated as a performance pattern. It is best to configure it so that With this configuration, the generation means generates a new performance pattern, making it easier for the player to grasp the set value, so while expecting that the generation means will generate a new performance pattern, The player can be made to play a game (a game for acquiring the right to execute a setting suggestion performance) with enthusiasm.

Further, in this case, the player is configured to be able to select whether or not to execute the setting suggestion performance using the performance pattern selected in the setting suggestion performance selection table 222c using the execution right stored in the storage means. It's okay. With this configuration, by executing many setting suggestion performances that cannot specifically notify the setting value (difficult setting suggestion performances), the current setting value can be determined in a complex way, or the setting By reducing the number of executions of the suggestion performance, the player can select whether to aim for execution of a setting suggestion performance (an easy-to-understand setting suggestion performance) that can specifically notify a setting value.

Furthermore, it is preferable to set an upper limit on the period during which the execution right of the setting suggestion performance can be stored in the storage means. For example, by providing an erasing means that can erase the information (execution right) stored in the storage means, winning the erasure lottery. If the execution right is erased by an erasing means, or a determining means is provided that can determine the elapsed period of time since it was memorized, the determining means determines whether a predetermined elapsed period (for example, one hour has elapsed or the execution of a special symbol lottery has been executed). The execution right may be deleted by the deletion means when it is determined that the execution right has reached 100 times. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give a game effect to the selection of whether or not to generate a new performance pattern by the generation means. In other words, by creating a possibility that the execution right may be erased by the erasing means, it is possible to make it difficult to execute a setting suggestion effect that can specifically notify the setting value (an easy-to-understand setting suggestion effect). It is possible to give a great meaning to the selection result of which setting suggestion effect the person executes.

As shown in FIG. 109, the setting suggested effect selection table 222c defines five types of effect patterns, effect pattern A to effect pattern E, and when setting 1 is set, the obtained effect counter When the value of 223g is in the range of 35 to 79, ``effect pattern A'' is selected, when it is in the range of 80 to 94, ``selection pattern C'' is selected, and when the value is in the range of 95 to 99, ``effect pattern D'' is selected. It is stipulated that Note that if the value of the acquired performance counter 223g is in the range of "0 to 34", it is stipulated that the setting suggestion performance is not executed.

In addition, when setting 2 is set, "effect pattern A" is used when the value of the acquired effect counter 223g is in the range of "5 to 49", and "effect pattern B" is used when the value of the obtained effect counter 223g is in the range of "50 to 74". , "Rendering pattern C" is selected in the range of "75 to 89", and "Rendering pattern D" is selected in the range of "90 to 99". Note that if the value of the acquired performance counter 223g is "0 to 4", it is specified that the setting suggestion performance is not executed.

Furthermore, when setting 3 is set, "effect pattern A" is used when the value of the obtained effect counter 223g is in the range of "0 to 44", and "effect pattern B" is selected when it is in the range of "45 to 64". , "Production pattern C" is selected in the range of "65 to 84", "Production pattern D" is selected in the range of "85 to 96", and "Production pattern E" is selected in the range of "99 to 99". stipulated.

In other words, the performance pattern A is a performance pattern (default performance pattern) that is selected at the same selection rate (45%) no matter which setting value is set. When a performance based on this default performance pattern is executed, settings cannot be suggested from the performance mode, but it is possible to understand that the setting suggestion performance has been executed. Therefore, by determining the number of times the setting suggestion effect has been executed, for example, the setting value can be predicted based on the number of times the setting suggestion effect has been executed within a predetermined period, or the setting value can be predicted based on the total number of times the setting suggestion effect has been executed. By analyzing the number of setting suggestion effects executed in a specific effect pattern, it provides information that can be used as a reference when predicting setting values.

Furthermore, the effect pattern B is an effect pattern that cannot be selected under the setting 1, that is, an effect pattern in which the setting 1 is negated when executed. This performance pattern B is a performance pattern for notifying the player of setting values that have not been set. In other words, although the performance pattern B does not directly notify the setting value, it is a performance pattern that can improve the setting estimation by being combined with the information of other executed setting suggestion performances.

Performance pattern C is a performance pattern in which the high setting is more likely to be selected than the low setting, but since the difference in selection ratio is small, the setting value is difficult to predict. Similar to the effect pattern C described above, the effect pattern D is a effect pattern in which the high setting is more likely to be selected than the low setting, and is defined so that there is a larger difference in the selection ratio than the effect pattern C described above. There is. In other words, the setting pattern C and the effect pattern D become effects that can be expected to be set higher the more they are executed.

Finally, production pattern E is a production pattern that can be selected only when the high setting (setting 3) is set. When a performance based on this performance pattern is executed, the highest setting (setting "3") is determined, so the configuration is such that its appearance rate is lower than other performance patterns. This solves the problem of setting values being immediately grasped.

The pre-reading prohibition period selection table 222d is a data table that is referred to when selecting a period in which the execution of the pre-reading effect is prohibited, and the execution conditions of the pre-reading effect are determined based on the winning information command output from the main controller 110. It is referenced when it is determined that the condition has been established. If it is determined that the selected prefetch prohibition period and the SP time period overlap, execution of the prefetch effect is prohibited.

This look-ahead prohibition period selection table 222d includes different prohibition periods based on the holding position of the pending symbol (performance target reservation) that is the target of the look-ahead performance, whether or not there is a jackpot win within the look-ahead performance period, and the number of jackpot wins. is stipulated. By configuring in this way, the first look-ahead performance includes a jackpot win that tends to have a long look-ahead performance period, and the second look-ahead performance that does not include a jackpot win and therefore tends to have a shorter look-ahead performance period than the first look-ahead performance. The read-ahead prohibition period can be set differently.

Here, conventionally, there is a pachinko machine 10 that increases the variation of the performance to be executed and enhances the performance effect by executing various performances based on different execution opportunities. In such a pachinko machine 10, multiple performances are executed based on the establishment of different opportunities, so depending on the execution timing of each performance, multiple performances may be executed overlappingly, resulting in performances that are difficult for players to understand. There was a problem with this. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, when an execution opportunity for executing a specific effect is established, the execution status of other effects is determined, and based on the determination result, it is determined whether or not to execute the specific effect. By doing so, there is a method for suppressing performances that are difficult for players to understand.

However, in the conventional pachinko machine 10 described above, in order to prevent performances that are difficult for players to understand, execution of specific performances is prohibited more than necessary, and it is difficult to suitably enhance the performance effect. The problem was that it was not possible. In contrast, in the present embodiment, when an opportunity to execute a specific effect is established, the execution period of that specific effect is calculated, and based on the calculation result, an overlapping period with other effects is predicted, It is configured to determine whether or not to execute a specific performance based on the prediction result. Furthermore, when calculating the execution period of a specific performance, the presence or absence of a jackpot win and the suspension of the performance target are included as factors that will create a large difference in the performance period of a specific performance (pre-reading performance). It is composed of

Therefore, it is possible to increase the accuracy when calculating the execution period of a specific performance (pre-reading performance), and it is possible to execute a specific performance (pre-reading performance) even at a timing where execution of a specific performance would conventionally be prohibited. This makes it possible to suitably enhance the performance effect of the pachinko machine 10.

Referring to FIG. 110(a), the contents stipulated in the look-ahead prohibition period selection table 222d will be explained in detail.The performance target pending is "1", the jackpot during the look-ahead performance period is "yes", If the number of jackpots is 1, the prohibition period is 460 seconds, and if the performance target is 1 and there are no jackpots during the look-ahead performance period, the prohibition period is 110 seconds. is stipulated. In addition, if the performance target pending is "2", the jackpot during the look-ahead performance period is "yes", and the number of jackpots is "1", the prohibition period is "480 seconds", and the number of jackpots is "2". In this case, ``830 seconds'' is specified as the prohibition period, and if the performance target is ``2'' and there is no jackpot during the look-ahead performance period, ``130 seconds'' is specified as the prohibition period. There is.

Furthermore, if the performance target pending is "3", the jackpot during the look-ahead performance period is "yes", and the number of jackpots is "1", the prohibition period is "500 seconds", and the number of jackpots is "2 or more". In this case, execution of the look-ahead performance is unconditionally prohibited, and if the performance target is ``3'' and there is no jackpot during the look-ahead performance period, ``150 seconds'' is stipulated as the prohibition period. . If the performance target pending is "4", the jackpot during the look-ahead performance period is "yes", and the number of jackpots is "1", the prohibition period is "520 seconds", and the number of jackpots is "2 or more". In this case, execution of the look-ahead performance is unconditionally prohibited, and if the performance target is ``4'' and there is no jackpot during the look-ahead performance period, ``170 seconds'' is specified as the prohibition period. .

In other words, when an opportunity to execute a pre-reading effect is established based on the information included in the received winning command, the larger the holding position of the special figure reservation at which the execution opportunity is established, the more the pre-reading effect in which the pre-reading effect is executed. The longer the prohibition period is defined, because the more the number of special symbol drawings performed during the period, the longer the pre-read performance period tends to be. More specifically, the prohibition period is defined so that there is no problem even if the maximum variation time (20 seconds) of the special symbol variation that can be executed during the look-ahead performance period is set.

Furthermore, if a jackpot game can be executed during the look-ahead performance period, that is, if a look-ahead game is executed with a jackpot game in between, in addition to the special symbol variation period, the prohibition period will also be taken into consideration during the jackpot game period. is stipulated, and a longer prohibition period is stipulated when a jackpot game is executed than when a jackpot game is not executed. In this way, the length of the prohibition period of the look-ahead effect can be greatly varied depending on whether or not the jackpot game is executed. In addition, if multiple jackpot wins are included in the look-ahead performance period, the execution of the look-ahead performance is prohibited without determining the degree of overlap between the look-ahead performance prohibition period and the SP time period. ing. As a result, if a situation occurs where the pre-reading prohibition period may become long, it becomes possible to prohibit the execution of the pre-reading effect without determining the degree of overlap with the SP time period. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the control processing executed in the .

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, when the trigger for executing the prefetch effect is established, the maximum time of the prefetch effect that can be executed is calculated, and the SP time period is set until the maximum time elapses. In such a case, by prohibiting the execution of the look-ahead effect, a SP time period is set during the look-ahead effect, and a structure that can suppress the performance that is difficult for the player to understand is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a correction process for correcting the calculated maximum time of the look-ahead effect may be executed. In other words, compared to the execution period of the look-ahead effect calculated based on the maximum time, the maximum time of the look-ahead effect is calculated based on the information indicating the effect period of the look-ahead effect that was actually executed (partial period of the look-ahead effect). The configuration may be such that the correction is performed gradually. As a result, it is possible to increase the accuracy of calculating the maximum time for the look-ahead effect that can actually be executed, making it easier to specify the period during which the look-ahead effect can be executed without overlapping with other effects. .

The hold upper limit value performance selection table 222e is a data table that is referred to when determining the performance mode of the hold upper limit performance that is executed when the number of stored hold symbols reaches the upper limit number (8 pieces). Different performance patterns are created based on whether or not there is a pending symbol that wins a jackpot (hit pending) among the pending symbols stored in pending memory, the number of pending winnings, and the value of the obtained performance counter 223g. (performance mode) is specified.

Specifically, if there is a pending hit and the number of pending wins is 1, the performance pattern of "upper limit notification" is , the performance pattern of "Chance Announcement" is defined in the range of "45 to 69", and the performance pattern of "Fish Festival" is defined in the range of "70 to 99". In addition, if there is a pending hit and the number of pending wins is 2, if the value of the obtained performance counter 223g is in the range of "0 to 39", the performance pattern of "Chance Announcement" will be "40". -99'', the performance patterns of the ``Fish Festival'' are defined respectively. Furthermore, if there is a pending hit and the number of pending hits is 3 or more, the performance pattern of "Fish Festival" will be changed depending on the value of the obtained performance counter 223g in the range of "0 to 99". stipulated.

On the other hand, if there is no hit pending, if the value of the acquired performance counter 223g is in the range of "0 to 64", and the performance pattern of "upper limit notification" is in the range of "65 to 99", it will be "chance notification". Each performance pattern is defined.

The production execution number selection table 222f is a data table that is referred to when entering the specialization mode and determining the number of setting suggestion productions (the number of production executions) to be executed during the specialization mode period. Various numbers are defined based on the length of the special mode remaining period (special figure remaining variable time) at the time of entering the special mode, the set value, and the obtained value of the production counter 223g.

Here, with reference to FIG. 111, a detailed explanation will be given of the contents defined in the performance execution number selection table 222f. FIG. 111 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the performance execution number selection table 222f. As shown in FIG. 111, in the performance execution number selection table 222f, different numbers are defined as the number of performance executions based on the setting value, the remaining period of the specialized mode, and the obtained value of the performance counter 223g. There is.

The mission selection table 222g is a data table that is referred to when determining the mission content to be executed during the SP time period, and it selects different missions (effect patterns) depending on the set value and the obtained value of the effect counter 223g. is stipulated. In other words, it is possible for the player to predict the set value depending on the content of the mission executed during the SP time period. Further, in this embodiment, even when the content of the selected mission is achieved, a setting suggestion effect for suggesting setting values is executed.

Therefore, in a series of performances (mission performances), it is possible to perform setting suggestion performances at a plurality of timings, that is, at the time when the mission contents are displayed and at the time when the mission is accomplished.

Here, the contents of the mission selection table 222g will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 112. FIG. 112 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the mission selection table 222g. As shown in FIG. 112, four types of performance patterns (mission contents) are defined in the mission selection table 222g according to the set value and the acquired value of the performance counter 223g. The four types of defined mission contents have different selection rates depending on the set values and have different levels of mission achievement difficulty.

The promotion point selection table 222h is a data table that is referred to when selecting the performance mode of the round performance in the performance during the jackpot game, and as shown in FIG. Different numbers of points (number of points awarded) are defined in correspondence to the following. Based on the number of points awarded here, the performance mode of the round performance during the round performance is determined by referring to the promotion performance selection table 222i to be described later (see FIG. 114).

The promotion performance selection table 222i is a data table that is referred to when determining the performance content of the promotion performance to be executed based on the number of awarded points acquired by referring to the promotion point selection table 222h and the value of the performance counter 223g. The promotion performance is configured such that the larger the total value of the awarded points (total points), the greater the amount of benefits awarded to the player.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 107(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag 223e. , winning information storage area 223f, production counter 223g, production status storage area 223h, setting value storage area 223i, setting changing flag 223j, executed setting suggestion production storage area 223k, number of acquired pitches storage area 223n, period production flag 223p , mission information storage area 223q, time information storage area 223r, operation invalidation timer 223s, continuous notice execution flag 223t, continuous notice counter 223u, background mode storage area 223v, special mode flag 223w, round number counter 223x, character display flag At least a memory area 223y and another memory area 223z are provided.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is a variable display of the first special symbol performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is a display of the first special symbol reserved in the main controller 110. This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) for special symbol fluctuation effects up to 4 times for each type of special symbol, and the number of pending balls when receiving a prize information command or receiving a variable pattern command. Update according to the timing of increases and decreases.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable display of the second special symbol performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a. , when a winning information command is received by a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) of the variable performance of the second special symbol held in the main control device 110 up to four times for each type of special symbol, It is updated in accordance with the timing when the number of held pitches increases or decreases, such as when a fluctuation pattern command is received.

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and updates the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. Unable to get value. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and counts the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 1 reserved balls number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved balls number counter 223b. The number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when a starting winning is detected and the number of pending balls in the variable display is added, or in the main control device 110, a variable display in a special symbol is executed and the number of pending balls is subtracted. If so, a held ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 based on the held ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command, either the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the number of reserved balls command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved pitch number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved pitch number counter 223b, and , Sends a command for the number of reserved balls for display to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b after storage. .

When the display control device 114 receives this command for the number of reserved balls for display, the value of the number of reserved balls indicated by the command, that is, the value of the number of reserved balls indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 reserved pitch number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113, or the special symbol 2 reserved The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved pitch number symbols corresponding to the value of the pitch counter 223b are displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As mentioned above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Its value is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 also corresponds to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. It can be changed while being synchronized. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of pending balls whose variable display is pending.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when receiving the first special symbol fluctuation pattern command or the second special symbol fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, and starts the fluctuation display on the third symbol display device 81. Turned off when settings are made. When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output process of the main process executed by the MPU 221. be done. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 controls the display control device 114 so that the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type) extracted from the received stop type command.

The winning information storage area 223f includes one execution area, four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the first special symbol, and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the second special symbol. 4 areas), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In this pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects a starting winning for the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry opening 640, a special winning random number counter C1 is acquired according to the starting winning. From each value of the special winning type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1, various information (win or failure, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the starting prize is drawn is obtained. It is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is notified from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information notified by the winning information command (win/fail, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, fluctuation pattern) as winning information, and extracts the winning information. is stored in the winning information storage area 223f. More specifically, the extracted winning information is divided into four areas (first area to Among the vacant areas of the fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). In other words, the area with the smaller area number stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning in time, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning in time.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the main control device 110 performs a lottery based on various information (win/fail, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to a starting prize is drawn. Although a configuration is used in which a winning information command is set and notified to the audio lamp control device 113, other configurations may be used.

For example, when a starting winning occurs, the various information predicted corresponding to the starting winning includes various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. and a setting means for setting a winning information command by adding a winning information command, and when receiving a winning information command, various information (winning information) already stored in the winning information storage area 223f and information included in the received winning information command are provided. A configuration may also be provided in which a discriminating means for discriminating whether the various information (winning information) matches or not. This makes it possible to determine whether the various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223f is appropriately stored.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when a new starting winning occurs, a winning information command is set and the audio lamp control device 113 is notified. The timing of the notification is not limited to the above-mentioned timing (timing when the winning information command is set). For example, by providing a storage means to temporarily store the winning information command, in addition to the timing of starting a winning, the timing of notification is not limited to the timing mentioned above (the timing when the winning information command is set). (for example, at 5-second intervals), when the gaming conditions change (for example, when the gaming state shifts from the time-saving state to the normal state, when a jackpot game starts or ends, etc.), or when special symbols start changing (or A configuration may be used in which the winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 when the winning information command is stopped. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately perform an effect (so-called pre-read effect) using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f.

In this embodiment, based on each piece of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, settings of performance modes such as changing the display color of pending symbols are executed as pre-reading performance. In this way, by executing various performances (pre-reading performances) based on each piece of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, players can be informed about each reserved ball before the variable display starts. It can create a sense of expectation that it will be a big hit. It is also possible to perform long-term effects using multiple variable display periods.

The effect counter 223g is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, etc., and is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 98. Note that each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed, the value is incremented by 1 and updated.

In this embodiment, the counters used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, etc. are collectively referred to as the effect counter 223g, but this effect counter 223g is composed of a plurality of counters. , each counter is configured so that its value is periodically updated by the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, but the update of each counter is The content is configured so that it is not synchronized. In other words, it is composed of a plurality of counters whose values are updated under the same conditions, but whose updated values are not related. The system is configured to refer to the values of different counters when selecting various presentation modes. By configuring in this way, when determining multiple performance modes in the same process, the performance formats of multiple performances are determined based on the same counter value, which reduces the variation in performance. Can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, the performance counter 223g has a configuration in which a plurality of counters are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. Based on this, it may be configured to select various performance modes, and in this case, it may be configured to perform predetermined calculation processing when reading the value of the performance counter 223g. By configuring in this way, even if the performance modes of a plurality of performances are selected based on the value of the same counter included in the performance counter 223g, it is possible to suppress the variation of performances from decreasing.

The performance state storage area 223h is a storage area for temporarily storing the performance state (performance content) determined by various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The content (information) that was created is stored. Then, by reading out the information stored in the performance state storage area 223h, a performance mode corresponding to the determined performance state is set.

By storing the performance state (performance content) in the performance state storage area 223h, even if the timing for determining the performance state (performance content) and the timing for setting the performance mode are different, the determined performance can be maintained. It is possible to reliably set the performance mode corresponding to the state (performance content).

The setting value storage area 223i is a storage area for storing setting values based on the information when information regarding the setting values output from the main controller 110 is received. Specifically, when a status command including information regarding setting values is set in the start-up process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 135) (see S913 in FIG. 135), and that status command is received, the received The setting value is specified based on the information included in the status command, and information indicating the specified setting value is stored in the setting value storage area 223i.

The information stored in the setting value storage area 223i is referred to when determining the presentation mode of the setting suggestion presentation. Although detailed description will be given later, in this embodiment, when performing a setting change operation to change a setting value, it is configured such that an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 is always required, and The configuration is such that a status command including information regarding the setting value is set after the setting change operation is completed. Furthermore, each time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 (every time the start-up process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 135) is executed), a status command containing information regarding the setting values is sent by voice from the main controller 110. It is configured to be output to the lamp control device 113. With this configuration, even if the main controller 110 is configured to output information regarding the setting value to the audio lamp controller 113 only at a limited timing such as when the power is turned on, the audio lamp controller 113 side This allows you to reliably understand the current setting values.

Moreover, by minimizing the chances of outputting information regarding setting values, it is possible to suppress illegal acquisition of information regarding setting values. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the signal indicating the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 is not directly outputted to the outside, but is configured to output information regarding the setting value, so in the unlikely event that the signal is obtained illegally. Even if the information indicates the setting value, it becomes difficult to specify, so it is possible to prevent illegally acquiring information regarding the setting value. In addition, in this embodiment, information regarding the setting value is set using a part of the status command for indicating the gaming status (for example, the upper bits that are likely to be empty bits among the 8 bits for generating the status command). Because of this configuration, it is more difficult to identify the setting value indicated by the output information than when information about the setting value is output alone, which may lead to fraudulent acquisition of information about the setting value. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the configuration is such that the information indicating the setting value, rather than the value indicating the setting value, is stored in the setting value storage area 223i, the information stored in the setting value storage area 223i is illegally obtained. Even in the case where the setting value indicated by the output information is difficult to identify, it is possible to suppress illegally acquiring information regarding the setting value.

Note that in this embodiment, a dedicated storage area called the setting value storage area 223i is provided as a storage area for storing information regarding setting values (information for indicating setting values), but the present invention is not limited to this. A part of the other storage area (free space) is used to store information indicating the setting value, and the storage area in which information related to the setting value (information indicating the setting value) is stored. The configuration may be such that the address to indicate is stored in a specific area, and in this case, the area in which information regarding the setting value (information for indicating the setting value) is stored may be changed periodically or irregularly. That's good.

Further, it is preferable that the information regarding the setting values is processed in accordance with a predetermined rule corresponding to the specifications of the storage area for storing the information regarding the setting values (information for indicating the setting values). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a set value is fraudulently obtained based on information stored in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 to occur.

The setting changing flag 223j is a flag to indicate that the setting is currently being changed, and is set to on when a changing command indicating that the setting is being changed is output from the main controller 110. (See S2073 in FIG. 142). Then, it is referenced in the standby process (see S2012 in FIG. 142) (see S2071 in FIG. 142), and is set to off when it is determined that a change completion command indicating that the setting change is completed has been received (see S2071 in FIG. 142). (See S2077).

By providing this setting change flag 223j, it becomes possible for the audio lamp control device 113 side to grasp the operation status of the setting change operation executed by the main controller 110, so that the setting change operation is completed. The standby process (see S2012 in FIG. 142) that is executed during this time can be switched depending on the operating status of the setting change operation. Therefore, the processing load of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

The executed setting suggestion performance storage area 223k is a storage area for temporarily storing the contents of the setting suggestion performance executed during the jackpot game, and when the setting suggestion performance is set as part of the round performance. Information indicating the performance mode (performance content) is stored in . Then, the stored information is referred to when selecting the performance mode of the end screen performance to be executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. In this embodiment, in order to equalize the information given to players by the setting suggestion effect executed during the jackpot game, the end screen effect is based on the content of the setting suggestion effect executed during the jackpot game. The content of the setting suggestion effect to be executed is determined. With this configuration, it is possible to adjust the amount of setting suggestion effects (amount of information for predicting setting values) provided to the player in one jackpot game, and It is possible to prevent the setting suggestion performance from not being executed at all and reducing the player's desire to play, or from executing the setting suggestion performance excessively in one jackpot game.

After determining the performance mode of the end screen performance, the information stored in the executed setting suggested performance storage area 223k is cleared.

The acquired ball number storage area 223n is a storage area for cumulatively storing the paid out prize balls, and when a winning information command including information indicating the number of prize balls is received from the main control device 110, The number of prize balls is stored cumulatively based on the information included in the command. In this acquired ball number storage area 223n, the number of prize balls paid out during advantageous periods advantageous to the player, such as the time saving state, the probability changing state, and the jackpot game, is stored cumulatively. Then, when the advantageous period ends, that is, when the gaming state shifts to the normal state, the stored information is cleared.

The information stored in the number of acquired pitches storage area 223n is referred to when updating the manner of displaying the number of acquired pitches to notify the player of the number of pitches paid out to the player during the advantageous period. Although the present embodiment is configured such that the information stored in the acquired pitch count storage area 223n is cleared when the advantageous period ends, the information is not limited to this, and for example, when the advantageous period ends. After that, the information may be cleared based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (a condition that is satisfied when the special symbol lottery is executed 10 times). By configuring this way, if another advantageous period is set immediately after the first advantageous period ends, the number of balls won will be displayed based on the number of prize balls acquired during the previous advantageous period. (pull back display). Therefore, a player who wants to display a large number of balls as the number of balls won can be motivated to play the game aiming for the next jackpot game even after the advantageous period ends.

The period performance flag 223p is a flag to indicate that the SP time performance is being executed, and the elapsed time T calculated based on the time information measured by the clock device 292 is the SP time period. is set to on when Then, if the elapsed time exceeds the SP time period and the condition for ending the SP time performance is satisfied, it is set to OFF.

If the period performance flag 223p is set to ON, when setting the performance mode of the variable performance, a performance mode dedicated to the period performance (SP time performance) may be set, or the third symbol display device 81 The background image displayed on the display screen becomes a dedicated background image.

The mission information storage area 223q is a recording area for storing the presentation mode (mission content) of the mission presentation executed as the SP time presentation and the degree to which the mission has been achieved. The performance contents determined by referring to the selection table 222g are stored. Information indicating the degree of completion of the mission, which is updated each time a special symbol lottery is executed during the SP time period (every time a variable performance is executed), is updated and stored.

The time information storage area 223r is an area where time information (timekeeping information) of the timekeeping device 292 is stored when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. During the time acquisition process (see S2011 in FIG. 141) of the startup process executed by the MPU 221, current time information (timekeeping information) acquired from the timekeeping device 292 is stored. The stored time information is used to calculate the elapsed time T from power-on during the elapsed time confirmation process of the main process executed by the MPU 221 (see S2111 in FIG. 158), and determine whether it is the normal performance period or the SP period ( SP time period) (see S3604 in FIG. 158). Note that since the contents stored in the RAM 223 are not backed up, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f is cleared.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the type of production period is determined based on the time information acquired from the clock device 292 during startup processing and stored in the time information storage area 223r, so that multiple pachinko machines in the hall By synchronizing the timing at which the start-up process is performed in each pachinko machine 10, the timing at which time information is stored in the time information storage area 223r of each pachinko machine 10 can also be synchronized. If the timing at which the time information is stored in the time information storage area 223r is correct, the elapsed time T calculated in the elapsed time confirmation process (S2111) in each pachinko machine 10 can also be matched, so the elapsed time The timing of switching from the normal performance period to the SP time period can be adjusted based on T, and the timing of switching from the special performance period to the SP time period can be adjusted based on the elapsed time T. Thereby, the person concerned at the hall can align the performance period of each pachinko machine 10 by simply turning on the power to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 at the same time. Therefore, some of the pachinko machines 10 are in the normal performance period, and other pachinko machines 10 are in the SP time period, so that the player who is playing the game can perform the performance in a different performance mode from the other pachinko machines 10. You can prevent yourself from feeling uncomfortable about what you are doing. Note that as a method for turning on power to multiple pachinko machines 10 all at once, for example, an island consisting of a plurality of pachinko machines 10 is provided, and an external power supply that can turn on the power on an island basis is used. Just set it up.

In addition, in this embodiment, instead of determining the time from the time information of the clock device 292 and switching the type of performance period according to the time zone, the time information acquired during the startup process and the elapsed time confirmation process ( The elapsed time T is calculated from the time information acquired in step S2111), and the type of presentation period is determined based on the elapsed time T. As a result, even if the time information of the clock device 292 of each pachinko machine 10 deviates from each other due to deterioration over time, the deviated timing information is not directly used to determine the type of performance period, but rather Since it can be converted into a relative value of time T and used for determining the type of presentation period, the influence of deviation can be reduced. Therefore, in a plurality of pachinko machines 10, the timing of switching from the normal performance period to the SP time period based on the elapsed time T and the timing of switching from the SP time period to the normal performance period can be adjusted based on the elapsed time T. Therefore, since the performance periods of each pachinko machine 10 can be aligned, some pachinko machines 10 will be in the normal performance period, and other pachinko machines 10 will be in the SP time period, so that the players who are playing the game can It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the performance being executed in a performance mode different from that of other pachinko machines 10.

The operation invalidation timer 223s is a counter for setting a period in which the operation on the frame button 22 is not determined to be valid, and the operation on the frame button 22 is valid during the period when the value is set in the operation invalidation timer 223s. Not determined (invalid). This operation invalidation timer 223s is set to a value indicating a predetermined period (5 seconds) when the end timing of the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 is earlier than the end timing of the boot process of the third symbol display device 81. .

With this configuration, an operation on the frame button 22 can be effectively determined in a state where the boot process is not completed, that is, in a state where necessary information cannot be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The result of the operation on the frame button 22 specified on the voice lamp control device 113 side is different from the operation result on the frame button 22 specified on the display control device 114 side (third symbol display device 81 side). It is possible to prevent this from happening.

The continuous notice execution flag 223t is a flag for indicating that a pre-read effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the pre-read effect is executed. Then, it is set to off by executing the special symbol variation that is the target of the look-ahead effect.

The other memory area 223z is an area where various data, flags, counters, etc. in the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are set or stored.

The RAM 223 also includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. Note that the command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 144) of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, and the command determination process reads The command is analyzed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and displays a variable display (fluctuation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. It controls the performance (direction). Details of this display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 117.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 83). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can successfully execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 134).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 83) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

The clock device 292 is connected to the main controller 110 and includes a real-time clock (RTC) that can clock the current time. Here, the configuration of the clock device 292 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 115 and 116. FIG. 115 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the clock device 292. The clock device 292 has an input/output port 350, a device control section 351, and a register 352. Further, the timekeeping device 292 is connected to a timekeeping device power source 293 . This timekeeping device power supply 293 is a power supply dedicated to the timekeeping device 292, which is different from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10, and can supply power to the timekeeping device 292 even in a power outage state when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. A button type battery is used as the power source 293 for the timekeeping device.

An input/output port 350 and a register 352 are connected to the device control section 351 of the clock device 292 . The input/output port 350 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 so that they can communicate with each other. The device control unit 351 uses (controls) the register 352 to perform various controls such as measuring the current time and issuing an alarm at a set time. Here, the register 352 has a register table consisting of a plurality of registers, as shown in FIG. 116. This register table includes a time register 352a and an input time storage area 352b. That is, as shown in FIG. 115, the register 352 of the timer 292 is provided with at least a timer register 352a and an input time storage area 352b.

The time register 352a is a register for measuring the current time, and the register value is updated every second. The input time storage area 352b is a storage area in which various information such as timekeeping information can be written and the stored information can be overwritten. The power-on time storage area 352b is an area where the clock information stored in the time information storage area 223ba of the RAM 203 is written when there is information on the occurrence of power outage during the main processing executed by the MPU 221.

Here, the register table included in the register 352 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 is a diagram schematically showing a part of the register table of the register 352. As shown in FIG. 116, the register 352 can hold up to 8 bits of data in each of the 15 addresses 0H to EH of the register table. Among these addresses, addresses 0H to 6H correspond to the time register 352a, and each address represents seconds, minutes, hours, days of the week, days, months, and years, respectively.

Details of the time register 352b will be explained by taking an address 0H representing seconds as an example. Bit 7 of address 0H is a fixed L bit that cannot be rewritten, and the current number of seconds is expressed using bits 0 to 6. Note that the symbol "○" attached to bit 7 in FIG. 116 is a symbol indicating that it is a non-rewritable bit, and has the same meaning at other addresses. Also, bit0 to bit6 correspond to 1 second, 2 seconds, 4 seconds, 8 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, and 40 seconds, respectively, and depending on whether each bit is H or L, the number of seconds in the current time is determined. It will show if there is.

For example, when the number of seconds at the current time is 5 seconds, both bit 0 representing 1 second and bit 2 representing 4 seconds are H, and bits 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are all L. Thereby, it is possible to express that 5 seconds, which is the sum of the seconds represented by the bits of H, is the number of seconds at the current time. Also, if the number of seconds at the current time is 29 seconds, bit 0 representing 1 second, bit 3 representing 8 seconds, and bit 5 representing 20 seconds are H, and bits 1, 2, 4, and 6 are all L. Become. As a result, 29 seconds, which is the sum of the seconds represented by the bits of H, can be expressed as the number of seconds at the current time.

The address 1H representing the minute, the address 2H representing the hour, the address 4H representing the day, the address 5H representing the month, and the address 6H representing the year also correspond to the bit that is H, similar to the address 0H representing the second. The current time is expressed by the sum of the numbers. Note that the address 6H representing the year represents the last two digits of the Western calendar, and the first two digits of the Western calendar are fixed at 20. In other words, the address 6H representing the year can represent only the years 2000 to 2099.

Regarding address 3H representing the day of the week, bits 0 to 6 correspond to Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, and Saturday, respectively, with one bit being H and the other bits being L. You can express a specific day of the week by For example, if the current day is Wednesday, bit 3 becomes H, and bits 0, 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6 become L.

Addresses 7H to 9H correspond to input time storage area 352b, and can store up to 3 bytes of data. In the input time storage area 352b, one byte each is allocated to a register for storing seconds (corresponding to address 7H), a register for storing minutes (corresponding to address 8H), and a register for storing time (corresponding to address 9H). ing. Furthermore, the correspondence between each bit and seconds, minutes, and hours is similar to that of addresses 0H to 2H.

That is, bits 0 to 6 of the register that stores seconds correspond to 1 second, 2 seconds, 4 seconds, 8 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, and 40 seconds, respectively, and bits 0 to 6 of the register that stores minutes correspond to 1 second, 2 seconds, 4 seconds, 8 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, and 40 seconds, respectively. , corresponding to 1 minute, 2 minutes, 4 minutes, 8 minutes, 10 minutes, 20 minutes, and 40 minutes, respectively, and bits 0 to 5 of the register that stores the time are 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, and 3 hours, respectively. It corresponds to time, 10 hours, and 20 hours. In addition, in FIG. 116, all bits are marked with a "●" symbol, which indicates that the information can be rewritten and read. also have the same meaning.

The correspondence between each bit of the time register 352a and input time storage area 352b and the number of seconds, minutes, etc. is not limited to that of this embodiment. For example, a power of 2 may be associated with each bit value. Further, in this embodiment, the input time storage area 352b is configured of 3 bytes, but the number of bytes may be reduced by storing only hour and minute values, for example, as the time information to be stored. Furthermore, the number of bytes may be increased by adding a register that can store milliseconds in addition to seconds, minutes, and hours. Furthermore, instead of storing the clock information in the input time storage area 352b, a storage means such as a RAM may be provided outside the clock device 292. In this case, power may be supplied to the storage means by the clock device power supply 293, or a separate power supply exclusively for the storage means may be provided.

Addresses AH to CH are registers used to output alarm signals at set times, and addresses DH and EH are registers that can output interrupt signals at each set period. Note that if the alarm function or interrupt function is not used, addresses AH to EH can be used as the input time storage area 352b instead of addresses 7H to 9H. In this case, 3 bytes of addresses 7H to 9H can be omitted, so the number of registers can be reduced, and the cost of the timekeeping device 262 can be reduced.

Although only the registers assigned to addresses 0H to EH are shown in FIG. 116, there are registers assigned to addresses other than 0H to EH, such as alarm functions and registers. Registers and the like are provided for changing settings of interrupt functions and the like.

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 262, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via a bus line 240. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to an output port 262 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 262.

Note that even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since there are models with exactly the same configuration and specifications, the display control device 114 is made into a common component and costs are reduced.

Below, the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be explained first, and then the work RAM 233 will be explained.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured so that a system reset can be applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power restoration from a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. Instead of being stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. This makes it possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs and the like. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory has a problem in that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is consecutively arranged in multiple pages, it is possible to read the data from the second page onward at high speed, but when reading the data from the first page, an address is specified. It takes a long time until the data is output. Furthermore, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the read speed of the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it will take time to read the instructions that make up the control program. Such a case may occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. and store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so the MPU 231 can read instructions forming the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is canceled via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

This character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as the main storage part in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing data, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the player's interest, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a lot of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the third symbol display device 81 is provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without having to provide a dedicated program ROM to store control programs and fixed value data as in conventional gaming machines. Since the number of parts can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data is written) occur when data is written, and defective data blocks in which data cannot be written occur. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and performs known error correction so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Perform data address translation.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read out from the NAND flash memory 234a that includes error bits, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the It is possible to suppress the MPU 231 from performing processing or the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the defective data block, so the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. The ROM controller 234b then performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can, for example, output the data in the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while setting data in one bank, or output data from the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside as specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. A process of transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank, and a process of transferring data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 to the other bank. The processing of reading data from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a nonvolatile memory provided as a sub-storage section in the character ROM 234, and is designed to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, this NOR type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided that stores a part of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and can be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 uses hardware to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. is set, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set from the NOR ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , reads the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing it in is as follows. That is, as mentioned above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from specifying the address to outputting the data when reading data from the first page. There's a problem.

When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then issues an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. can be set to output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the program storage area of the work RAM 233. 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after canceling the system reset. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c currently used.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. The first predetermined location is programmed to be set to a first predetermined location. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various types of processing can be executed. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the rest of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is included in the control program that is transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a.

Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a. Execute the remaining boot programs contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) are stored in the second program storage area. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from area 234a1 to program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b is executed. Furthermore, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location within the program storage area 233a. Specifically, this second predetermined location is the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 160) that is executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 161) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. This allows the MPU 231 to read control programs from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

Furthermore, as described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 123), which will be described later, and which is sent from the MPU 231, and draws a frame in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by developing the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame that was previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame within the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. Parallel processing within.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 162(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the process of drawing the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed by drawing first.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs the drawing processing and display of the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Note that image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). In response, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer some of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. is configured to do so. As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so that it remains resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on is completed, the image controller 237 can draw the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image. The time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the main controller 110 or display controller 114 decides to display them. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until the third symbol display device 81 displays any image.

In addition, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 transfers necessary data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing; There is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the character ROM 234, and the time required for reading out can be omitted, so it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 in accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the memory is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source first address to the storage source final address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the image data transfer. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing, and as a result, it is not possible to draw the image by the required time. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

Also, since the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. It is possible to easily determine the period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and the processing can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is used as the power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In addition, the power-on variation image area 235b detects that the player starts playing the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 in a variation effect when the lottery result is selected by the main controller 110.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see FIG. 160).

Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be explained. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While this remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (see FIG. 118). It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, upon receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power-on. On the display screen, a power-on fluctuation image with an "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen, and a power-on fluctuation image with an "x" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol, are displayed during the fluctuation period. In the middle, the display is repeated alternately. Then, based on the display variation pattern command and display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery held in the main control device 110 is determined. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", an image showing it will be displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuating effect has stopped, and if it is a "missing special symbol", an image showing it will be displayed after the fluctuating effect has stopped. It will then be displayed for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 causes the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on until all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. In addition, since the player or the like can recognize that some kind of processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on, the image that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can be done.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, if the player starts playing the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected, the power-on variation image A power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the area 235b, and images indicating "○" and "x" are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to do so. With this, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

In addition, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. When a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a corresponding variable effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 117, the explanation will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 120, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram illustrating four types of back images and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 120(b) shows the back surface A corresponding to the "sandy beach stage" and the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage", respectively.

As shown in FIG. 120, the back images corresponding to each back surface A and B are prepared in the character ROM 234, and are images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each of the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scroll images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at position a and position c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area. is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a connected manner.

When it is decided to change the back type and the stage is changed to "sandy beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 first sets the area between position a and position a' of the corresponding back image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as time passes, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scrolling image, and the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches an image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, images between positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be explained. As shown in FIG. 120(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage which is the initial stage has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to positions a to d are stored in the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is often played without changing the stage with the initial stage "Sandy Beach Stage" displayed, so the image data of the back A corresponding to the "Sandy Beach Stage" that is frequently displayed. By making all the data reside permanently in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load placed on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 120(b), on the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage", only the image data corresponding to a partial area of the back surface, that is, the image between position a and position b, is for permanent use. It is stored in the back image area 235c of the video RAM 235.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to have the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235; Therefore, it is necessary to use a RAM with a very large capacity, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is set in the range from position a to position a' (or in the range shown in FIGS. 120(a) to 120(b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 120(a) and 120(b)) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, when a stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the back side of the resident video RAM 235 By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the initial position of the back surface B can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the image data can be displayed while scrolling or changing the color tone as time passes. It can be displayed. Furthermore, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored on the rear surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In addition, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the back side B, the range from position a to position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. During this time, the range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from character ROM 234 to normal RAM 236. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Note that on the back side B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to back side images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 117) of the normal video RAM 236. Thereby, the back image data stored in the subarea dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so the back image can be displayed reliably.

In addition, on the back side B, the image data stored in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between position b' and position b. Data is stored duplicated. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from position b' on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image can be scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection. ing.

Furthermore, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, then, The MPU 231 uses the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display images between positions a to c that are scrolled repeatedly in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 117, the explanation will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable production displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is permanently resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 85), numbered from "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, there is no need to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Variable effects can be started quickly. Therefore, even though the variable production has started on the first symbol display device 37 after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the right second ball entry port 640r, or the second ball entry port 640. First, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the variable performance is not immediately started on the third symbol display device 81.

The character pattern area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character patterns used in various effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" and "girl" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is permanently resident in the character pattern area 235e. Therefore, when changing the character design based on the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but changes the character design from the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading image data resident in the symbol area 235e in advance. Thereby, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error along with the error type using an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, upon receiving an error command, cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error, from the viewpoint of preventing players from cheating and protecting players from errors. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is stored in the error message image area 235f in advance, so the display control device 114 displays error messages in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is not read out after receiving the error command. It can be displayed instantly.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

The MPU 231 transfers image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing subsequent images from the character ROM 234 to a subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of image data to a predetermined subarea where it is to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

Note that the image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list, which will be described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. Thereby, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame's worth of image drawn according to instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame's worth of image into that frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame developed earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third symbol display device 81 along with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, a process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop one frame's worth of images drawn in one frame buffer. , it is possible to read out one frame's worth of image developed earlier from the other frame buffer and display the read out one frame's worth of image on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that develops one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read out in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for rendering processing of one frame's worth of images. Every 20 milliseconds, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's image and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform display processing for one frame of images in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for one frame of images.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. configured. This work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and a stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a background mode storage area 233k, an execution performance storage area 233l, a setting value storage area 233m, a display update flag 233n, a back image change flag 233w, and a back image discrimination flag 233x.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Using this, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complex performances.

The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area where transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one performance displayed by the table is stored.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored in accordance with the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated performances.

Here, details of various data tables will be explained. First, one display data table is prepared for each presentation mode of each presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110, such as variable presentation, round presentation, etc. Display data tables corresponding to , ending effects, and demo effects are prepared.

The fluctuation performance is a performance that is started on the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. Note that when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when a fluctuating performance is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating performance is a miss, the stop symbol indicating the miss will finally be displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating performance is jackpot A or jackpot B. In either case, the stop symbols indicating each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the type of jackpot by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable performance, and can easily determine the gaming value given according to the type of jackpot.

In addition, the first ball entry hole 64 is a winning hole from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, so the electric accessory is released as a jackpot with a normal symbol, and the ball enters the second ball. If it becomes easier for the ball to enter the ball opening 640, the number of prize balls will increase. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the number of balls it has is difficult to reduce or the number of balls it has does not decrease even if it plays a game, so the player is in a state where the number of balls it has is difficult to decrease or the number of balls it has is You can get a feeling of expectation that you can get a jackpot with a special symbol even if you don't have one. Therefore, the player's desire to participate in the game can be increased, so that the player can continue to have a desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as mentioned above, the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with the starting winning is not started even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first variable performance stopped. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols numbered from "0" to "9" is displayed in a stopped state, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall personnel can recognize that no game is being played on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to a round performance, an ending performance, and a demo performance. Further, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for variable effects, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for each variable effect pattern, 32 tables in total are prepared.

Here, details of the display data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) for one frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This specifies the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame in detail.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that makes up one frame of image, and also specifies display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency depending on the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification rate is information for specifying the magnification rate for a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnification rate. If the magnification rate is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than its standard size, and if the magnification rate is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than its standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying a sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more transparent the image is displayed on the back side of the sprite. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient that is used when performing overlapping processing with other sprites. The color information is information for specifying the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when the specified sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address include one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and the light Drawing information for each sprite, such as effects expressing the insertion of images, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined depending on the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information are changed over time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is defined in the variable display data table.

If it is specified that any of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (undersea, beach, background of the preparation period, background dedicated to time production) is to be displayed based on the background type, the MPU 231 determines which of the backgrounds is selected by the player. The back image corresponding to the designated stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame is specified as time passes.

In this embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. It may also be possible to specify location information indicating whether the information should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Moreover, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the display database at the stage when image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) started, which is indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information includes, depending on the back surface type, information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and image drawing based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 Display) may indicate any information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) may be displayed along with the back type and position information. The information indicates the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or the information indicates the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating elapsed time but may be information indicating an address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

For the third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ), symbol type offset information is written as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the 3rd symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the 3rd symbol in the fluctuating performance is based on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance and the current fluctuating performance. This is because it changes depending on the stopped symbol, and the symbol offset information from the start of variation until a predetermined time has elapsed describes the offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variation performance. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol is set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variable performance can be stopped with a stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be used as the third symbol. By managing the offset information using the numbers attached to each third symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

In addition, in the symbol offset information, during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuating performance that is being performed this time, the third symbol changes rapidly. It is set to match the displayed time. While the third symbol is displayed in a high-speed fluctuating manner, the third symbol is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current variable performance, even if the continuity of the numbers in the third symbol is interrupted, the player will not be made aware of the interruption in the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

The start address of the display data table, "0000H", indicates the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table (in the example of FIG. 121, "02F0H") contains the data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is written. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is written and the address where the "End" information is written, the drawing content is made to correspond to the presentation mode that should be specified in the display data table. is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and based on the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the next The image contents to be drawn are specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 123), which will be described later, is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw the image is given. Thereby, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to commands (for example, display variation pattern commands) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. .

Here, if a conventional pachinko machine is configured to start a program executed by the MPU 231 every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as the effect images become more diverse, Since the processing of starting and executing programs that are becoming increasingly complex and enormous in size places a heavy burden on the processing, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 becomes limited, and there is a risk that there will be a limit to the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode in this way, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This is possible because, in the pachinko machine 10, the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of a lottery performed based on the starting winnings. On the other hand, with game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on user operations, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore the various It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of a lottery performed based on a starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 122. FIG. 122 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each production, and as mentioned above, among the image data of sprites used in the production specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

Note that if all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that is to be transferred at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. are written (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 122). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data meaning ``0002H'' in FIG. 122 is defined.

The transfer data information includes the first address (storage source first address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the first address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

Note that "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written in "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, similar to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 122, "02F0H") contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is described and the address where the "End" information is described, transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is provided. is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the MPU 231 selects the display data table to be used. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to , the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 123), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 123, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, if the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the generated The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, if transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 transmits display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When a table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so the sprite image data used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers the image data to be transferred that should be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, it is ensured that the image data of a predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before it is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Since the transfer start timing can be instructed as shown in FIG. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on images (the power-on main image and the power-on variable image) shown in FIG. 118 on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image at power-on area 235a or the variable image at power-on area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON during the main processing (see FIG. 160) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 160). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 172(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 162(b)), and the simple image display flag 233c is When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 162(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 162(b), S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command judgment is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Processing (see FIGS. 163 to 168) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 169 to 171) are executed.

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S6305 in FIG. 172(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on, Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 172(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 173) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to a performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the production mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the commands etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the production mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 233 to the image controller 233 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 123), which will be described later, is generated that describes the contents of the image drawing instructions for the image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1 and displays the image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 123), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instruction contents are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for storing. In addition to storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. Note that if all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no image data to be transferred.

Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. If so (that is, if Null data is not written), the transfer data information is added to the drawing list (see FIG. 123), which will be described later, which describes the contents of the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 that are generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, if transfer data information is written in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite is transferred. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f indicates an address at which to obtain the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is for specifying. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Display setting processing for the V interrupt processing (S6303 in FIG. 169 (see S7205 in FIG. 171), the pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 171) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and creates a drawing list to be described later. (see FIG. 123), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and acquires the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

Furthermore, if a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the sprite is Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw one frame worth of images generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list to be instructed to 237.

Here, details of the drawing list will be explained with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Pattern 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Pending ball number pattern 1, Pending ball number pattern 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite (design) is described for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored, and its The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and made translucent according to the translucency value. , performs compositing processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, performs tone correction processing according to the color information, and performs filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, various processes are applied to the display position indicated by the display position coordinates, and the resulting image is drawn. The drawn image is then developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a pending image that displays a pending pitch number pattern). image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image, and also generates detailed information for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (displayed object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from other image contents. generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 adjusts the image data according to the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 determines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite as specified in the display data table. Copy the information as is.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites that should be placed closest to the back to the sprites that should be placed closest to the front among the images for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third design (design 1, design 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), and the character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (Character 1, Character 2, . . . , Pending pitch number symbol 1, Pending pitch number symbol 2, . . . , Error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing for each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites by overwriting them in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

Furthermore, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 controls the transfer data information (the character in which the image data to be transferred is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 transfers an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source first address and the storage source final address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined subarea (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the performance time of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. At the same time as storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the performance time of the performance to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the production time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, the V interrupt processing (FIG. 162(b ) Each time the display setting process (see ) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 169). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Execute various processing that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 160) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage status of all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction for transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 173) executed by the MPU 231. be exposed. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Furthermore, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in an unstored state when the image data of that one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the storage status corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Furthermore, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and selects the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S7713 in FIG. 173). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for that image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 173). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j indicates a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") that develops the image drawn by the image controller 237 from among the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Information on the designated drawing target buffer is then sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 174).

Thereby, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process to expand the image drawn based on the drawing list onto the specified drawing target buffer. Further, in parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and sends the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, if the value is "0", it is set to "1", and if it is "1", it is set to "0". carried out by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted. Furthermore, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 162(b)) is executed (see S7802 in FIG. 174).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating the designations, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When this back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and when it is off, it means that no change is made. The back image change flag 233w is set to ON when a back image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 168(a)). The back image change flag 233w is referenced in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 173), and is set to off when the back image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 173). Thereby, it is possible to display a back image corresponding to the back image change command or production mode change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, one byte, and each bit is associated with each back surface type. If any bit of this back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the turned on bit is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface A is set. In this rear image discrimination flag 233x, when a rear image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 168(a) ), see S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to OFF. This back image discrimination flag 233x allows the currently set back type to be easily specified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the display contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when a setting change operation for changing the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 is being executed will be explained. In this embodiment, as described above, one set value can be set from among a plurality of set values that have different jackpot winning probabilities by special symbol lottery, and a specific operation ( By turning on the power while executing the rotation operation of the setting key 110b, a setting change operation for changing the set value can be executed during the start-up process of the main controller 110.

When power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, power is supplied from the power supply device 115 (see FIG. 99) to various control devices, and each control device executes startup processing. There is. Here, in a conventional pachinko machine 10, that is, a pachinko machine 10 in which a setting change operation is not executed when the power is turned on, processing based on the operator's operation (setting change operation) is performed during the start-up process of each control device. Since the process to be executed) is never executed, if the startup process of each control device is executed normally, the required time is approximately constant. Therefore, since the start-up order (the order in which the start-up processing ends) of each control device can be defined, it is sufficient to simply execute the processing in accordance with the defined order. However, in this embodiment, the main control device 110 Since the setting change operation can be executed during the start-up process of the main controller 110, the start-up process of the display control device 114 (the third symbol display device There may be cases where the process ends before or after the boot process (boot process 81).

Therefore, the present embodiment is configured to be able to display different display screens depending on the processing status of other control devices at the time when the boot processing by the display control device 114 is completed. With this configuration, by viewing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to notify the current processing status in an easy-to-understand manner.

FIG. 119(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the boot process of the display control device 114 is being executed, and FIG. 119(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the boot process of the display control device 114 119(c) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the setting change operation is in progress and the boot process of the display control device 114 has been completed. 119(d) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen that is displayed when the setting change operation is completed but the startup process of the main controller 110 is being executed. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen that is displayed when the boot processing of the control device 114 has been completed and the startup processing of the main control device 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 has been completed.

As shown in FIG. 119(a), when the boot process by the display control device 114 is executed, a display image in which color bars are displayed is displayed over the entire display area of the third symbol display device 81. The color bar is displayed to correctly adjust the color tone displayed on the liquid crystal display.For example, the color bar is displayed in order of white, yellow, cyan, magenta, red, blue, and black, that is, in order of highest brightness. A SMPTE color bar etc. consisting of the three primary colors RGB and their complementary colors is displayed.

The display contents displayed on the display screen are used to check the linearity of the transmission system and the amplitude and phase characteristics of the color signal frequency band. Thereby, the boot process of the display control device 114 can be properly executed. In the example shown in FIG. 119(a), the test color bar is displayed as a still image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to display a moving image in which the display position of the color bar changes periodically. It may be configured. With this configuration, by visually checking the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the operator can easily determine whether the image information that changes regularly is being displayed normally (whether it is frozen). be able to.

When the display control device 114 finishes the boot process, it outputs a command (boot completion command) to the audio lamp control device 113 to indicate that the boot process is finished. The audio lamp control device 113 determines the current setting change status by receiving a command indicating that the setting is being changed and a command indicating the completion of the setting change output from the main control device 110. Based on the reception of the boot completion command output from the display control device 114, information for indicating a display image to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

Note that in a state where the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 is not completed, information for showing a display image (display command) cannot be output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Therefore, after the boot process of the display control device 114 is completed, if no display command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image shown in FIG. 119(b) is displayed. That is, the display control device 114 stores initial display image data to which the words "Settings are being changed" are attached as an initial display image to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 after the completion of the boot process. After determining that the boot process is completed, it is determined whether a display command has been received from the audio lamp control device 113. If it is determined that the display command has not been received, this means that the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 has not been completed, so as shown in FIG. The initial display image data with the characters .

Here, for example, if the setting change operation is not executed when the power is turned on to the Pachinko machine 10, the main control device 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 will use each MPU to initialize each RAM, and to change A start-up process will be executed to execute the initial control process based on the information in the display control unit 114. However, the time spent in executing this initial control process will be spent on the boot process of the display control device 114, that is, on the liquid crystal display. The time is much shorter than the time spent on processing for activating the third symbol display device 81 configured.

Therefore, when the boot process is completed in the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 sends a display command (a display command indicating that initial settings are in progress (start-up processing is in progress), initial settings are completed (start-up processing is complete), etc.) If the display command (indicating display command) is not output, it means that a setting change operation is being executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, the display image shown in FIG. 119(b) is configured to be the initial display image.

With this configuration, when the display control device 114 has completed the boot process and the display command has not been output from the audio lamp control device 113, a notification mode for indicating the current situation can be displayed. be able to.

Furthermore, if a display command indicating that the setting change has been completed is output from the audio lamp control device 113 at the time when the boot process is completed in the display control device 114, the display image shown in FIG. 119(c) is If the display command indicating that the initial setting is completed is output from the audio lamp control device 113 when the boot process is completed on the display control device 114, the normal state shown in FIG. 119(d) is displayed. A standby screen (demo screen) is displayed.

<About control processing of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts in FIGS. 124 to 139. The processing of the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment). There are two types of interrupt processing: interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting the power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.For convenience of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing, and then explain the startup processing. and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, determines the states of the switches, and stores detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the RAM 203. Store it in the corresponding buffer area.

Furthermore, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the special win random number counter C1, the special win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal win random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are set to the maximum value (in this embodiment, each is 299 , 99, 239), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process is executed to perform display on the first symbol display device 37 and to set a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 (S104), and then, A starting winning process associated with winning a winning ball into the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 125 to 130.

After executing the starting winning process, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and a through gate passing process is executed as the ball passes through the through gate 67. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 131 and 133. After executing the through gate passage process, a firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process is performed under the condition that the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 124), and is used to display the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol, etc. performed in step 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting the jackpot (S201). Here, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203n is on, and if it is on, it is determined that the jackpot is in progress. During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and a special symbol jackpot is being displayed. This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S201: Yes), the process is immediately ended.

If the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. Otherwise (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reservations N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are acquired (S203). . After acquiring the value of each counter, a variation execution determination process is executed (S204). The details of the variation execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126, but in this variation execution determination process (S204), a process is executed to determine the special symbol that will be changed next.

Next, it is determined whether the next variation order determined in the variation execution determination process (S204) is special symbol 1 (first special symbol) (S205), and variation execution is performed on special symbol 1 (first special symbol). If so, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S206), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set ( S207). The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 138) to be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the number of reserved balls command through the process of S207, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S208). In the process of S208, the data stored in the holding areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3. After shifting the data, special symbol 1 variation start processing is executed to start variable display on the first symbol display device (S209). The special symbol 1 variation start process (S209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 127. In the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209), processing such as selection of a variation pattern (variation period) necessary for starting variation of the first special symbol is executed.

In the process of S205, if it is determined that the next variation order determined in the variation execution determination process (S204) is not variation execution on special figure 1 (S205: No), special figure 2 (second special It is determined whether or not variation is to be executed in (Symbol) (S210). Incidentally, if the variation of the special symbol 2 is not executed (S210: No), that is, since the reserved ball is not stored in either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation is executed in the special symbol 2 (S210: Yes), the same process as the above-described process for the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 is performed for the reserved ball of the special symbol 2.

Specifically, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S211), and the reserved ball that indicates the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is calculated. A number command is set (S212). The held pitch count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 138) to be described later. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S212, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S213). In the process of S213, the data stored in the holding areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, data in each area is shifted in the following order: holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3. After shifting the data, special symbol 2 variation start processing is executed to start variable display on the first symbol display device (S214). The special symbol 2 variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 128.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether the variation time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S215). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If the time has not passed (S215: No), the display on the first symbol display device is updated (S216), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S215, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S215: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The setting of the stop symbols is performed in advance by special symbol 1 variation start processing (S209), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 127, or special symbol 2 variation start processing (S214), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 128. When this special symbol fluctuation start process is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , a special design lottery will be held. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot according to the value of the special win random number counter C1, and if it is a jackpot for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the special win type counter Depending on the value of C2, it is determined whether there will be a jackpot A1, a jackpot B1, a jackpot C1, a jackpot D1, or a jackpot E1.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that the color of the LED lighted on the 1st symbol display device 37 may be changed based on a lottery result. For example, when a jackpot A occurs, a blue LED is lit in the first symbol display device 37, and when a jackpot B occurs, a red LED is lit. In case of jackpot C, the red LED and blue LED are turned on. In addition, if it is off, a red LED and a green LED are turned on. Note that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuating display starts, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

After the process of S217 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S218). If the lottery result this time is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the jackpot start is set (S219), the probability change flag 203m is turned off, and the values of the time saving medium counter 203j and the number of changes counter 203i are set to 0. (S220). Thereafter, the jackpot flag 203n is set to ON (S221), a stop command is set (S225), and this process ends. That is, during the jackpot game, a low probability game state is set, the electric support game state (time-saving game state) is also canceled, and a non-electric support game state is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S218, if the current lottery result is outside the special symbol (S218: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 1 or more (S222), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is determined. If is 1 or more (S222: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203j is subtracted by 1 (S223), and the value of the fluctuation number counter 203i is incremented by 1 (S224). Next, the process of S225 described above is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203j is 0 (S222: No), the process of S223 is skipped, the process of S225 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the variation execution determination process (S204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the variation execution determination process (S204). This variation execution determination process (S204) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 125) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 124), and is performed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. The production pattern (variation production pattern) of the variable production performed by the device 81 is based on the values of various counters stored in either the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a process for determining whether to execute the process.

In the variation execution determination process (S204), first, the variation execution flag 203k is set to off (the value is "0") to initialize (S241), and the variation order storage area 203p stored in the RAM 203 is Data is acquired (S242). Next, the data in the variation order storage area 203p is shifted (S243). Next, it is determined whether the data in the execution area is special figure 1 (S244). If the data in the execution area is the special figure 1 (S244: Yes), the variable execution flag 203k is set to variable execution in the special figure 1 (S245), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S244, if it is determined that the data in the execution area is not a variation execution on special figure 1 (S244: No), it is determined whether the data in the execution area is a variation execution on special figure 2. (S246), If it is determined that the variation execution is to be performed on the special figure 2 (S246: Yes), the variation execution flag 203k is set to the variation execution on the special figure 2 (S247), and this process is ended. Incidentally, in the process of S246, if it is determined that the data in the execution area is not a variation execution in the special figure 2 (S246: No), this process is ended as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209). This special symbol 1 variation start process (S209) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 125) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 124), and is a process that is executed in the special symbol 1 variation process (see FIG. 125) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 124). Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol miss" is performed (judgment), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 This is a process for determining a performance pattern (variable performance pattern) for a fluctuating performance to be performed.

In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S209), first, each value of the special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2, and fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S251). Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is currently in a variable probability period (high probability gaming state) (S252). Note that the determination as to whether or not it is a variable probability period is executed by determining whether the variable probability flag 203m is on. This probability change flag 203m is set to ON based on the completion of the jackpot game based on jackpot A1, jackpot B1, jackpot C1, and jackpot D1 (S1113: see FIG. 139). On the other hand, it is set to off based on the start of the jackpot game (S220: see FIG. 125).

In the process of S252, if it is determined that the current gaming state is changing probability (S252: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in a changing probability state of special symbols, so the process moves to S253. In the process of S253, based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 102(a)), the lottery result to determine whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is determined. Acquire (S253). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 65536 random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. As mentioned above, if the current setting value is set to "1", the random number that becomes the jackpot for the special symbol in the variable probability gaming state (special gaming state) is 1000 numbers from "0 to 999". is set, and when the current setting value is set to "2", 1100 values from "0 to 1099" are set. When the current setting value is set to "3", 1200 numbers from "0 to 1199" are set as the random number value for the special symbol jackpot. If the value of the special hit random number counter C1 matches these random numbers that result in a win, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S255.

On the other hand, in the process of S252, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal game state (low probability game state) with special symbols (S252: No), the process of S254 is executed. In the process of S254, based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S254). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 65535 random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. If the current setting value is set to "1", 250 numbers from "0 to 249" are set as the random number for the special symbol jackpot in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state). If the current setting value is set to "2", 275 values from "0 to 274" are set. When the current setting value is set to "3", 300 numbers from "0 to 299" are set as random numbers for the special symbol jackpot. If the value of the special hit random number counter C1 matches these random numbers that result in a win, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S255.

In the process of S255, whether the lottery result of the special symbol obtained by the process of S253 or S254 is a special symbol jackpot (that is, it is determined whether the obtained special symbol jackpot random number counter C1 value and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a are (S255), and if it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (S255: Yes), the value of the special hit type counter C2 obtained in the process of S251 Based on this, the display mode at the time of jackpot is set (S256). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S251 is compared with the random value stored in the jackpot type selection table 202d, and the jackpots of five types of special symbols (jackpot A1, jackpot B1, jackpot C1, jackpot D1, jackpot E1), the jackpot type is determined. As mentioned above, if the value of the special win type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (10R probability variable jackpot), and if it is "40, 41", it is judged as a jackpot B1 (10R If it is in the range of "42 to 47", it is determined to be a jackpot C1 (5R probability variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of "48 to 59", it is determined to be a jackpot D1 (2R probability variable jackpot). ), and if it is in the range of "60 to 99", it is determined that it is a jackpot E1 (10R normal jackpot, time saving 100 times) (see FIG. 103).

In the process of S256, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A1, jackpot B1, jackpot C1, jackpot D1, jackpot E1). . In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A1, jackpot B1, jackpot C1, jackpot D1, jackpot E1) are set as stop types in order to stop and display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S255, if it is determined that the special symbol is out of order (S255: No), a display mode when the special symbol is out is set (S257). In the process of S257, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, the variation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

After executing the process of S256 or S257, next, the value of the variation number counter 203i is obtained (S258), and reference is made based on the obtained value of the variation number counter 203i and the variation pattern scenario table 202e. A fluctuation pattern table is determined (S259). In this embodiment, as described above, the variation pattern table to be referred to in the variation pattern selection table 202b is determined based on the value of the variation frequency counter 203i and the variation pattern scenario table 202e. In the process of S259, when the variation pattern is set, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and at the same time, in the process of S253 or S254 in the third symbol display device 81. A variable time period until the third symbol stops is determined in the display mode for showing the obtained lottery result.

For example, the previous jackpot type was one of jackpot B1 (10R probability variable jackpot), jackpot C1 (5R probability variable jackpot), or jackpot D1 (2R probability variable jackpot), and the gaming state at the time of the jackpot was the normal gaming state. , if the value of the fluctuation number counter 203i acquired in the process of S258 is in the range of 1 to 80 times, a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined with reference to the time saving/probability variation table 202b2. Then, the variation time (variation pattern) is determined based on the validity determination result obtained in the process of S253 and the variation type counter CS1. For example, in the process of S259, when the time-saving/probability change variation pattern table 202b2 is determined as the variation pattern table to be referred to, the validity judgment result obtained in the process of S253 is a hit, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is " If the value is in the range of 0 to 49, "win variation A" is set as the variation pattern, and "20 seconds" is set as the variation time. (See Figure 104(c)).

In addition, in the variation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for notifying the result of the determination of validity, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation time. The audio lamp control device 113 determines the contents of the variable display mode (variation pattern) to be actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the variation time and the validity determination result. The main control device 110 is configured to be able to switch to the out-of-reach display mode in the audio lamp control device 113 for the same variable time even if the out-of-reach display mode is displayed. Thereby, various display modes can be displayed, and the effects can be diversified.

Next, a variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern table determined in the process of S259 (S260). Next, a variation pattern command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S260 (S261). Next, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S261 (S262). When the process of S262 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (S104).

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the special symbol 2 variation start process (S214) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 variation start process (S214). This special symbol 2 variation start process (S214) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 125) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 124), and is a process that is executed in the special symbol 2 variation process (see FIG. 125) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 124). Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol miss" lottery (judgment) is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 This is a process for determining a performance pattern (variable performance pattern) for a fluctuating performance to be performed.

In this special symbol 2 variation start process (S214), similar to the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209), firstly, the special symbol 2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b obtained by the process of S271 is The respective values of the winning random number counter C1 and the special winning type counter C2 are acquired (S271).

Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is currently in a variable probability period (high probability gaming state) (S272). If it is determined that the gaming state is currently in a variable probability period (S272: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 has a special symbol. Since it is in a variable probability state, the process moves to S273. In the process of S273, based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S271 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S273). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 65536 random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. As mentioned above, when the gaming state is in the variable probability period (high probability gaming state), the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set to "1" as the current setting value. , 1000 numbers from "0 to 999" are set, and when "2" is set, 1100 numbers from "0 to 1099" are set. When "3" is set as the current setting value, 1200 numbers from "0 to 1199" are set as the random number value for the special symbol jackpot. When the value of the special hit random number counter C1 matches these random numbers that result in a win, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S275.

On the other hand, in the process of S272, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a variable probability state (S272: No), the process of S274 is executed. In the process of S274, based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S271 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability times, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired ( S274). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 65536 random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. When the gaming state is in the normal period (low probability gaming state), the random number for the special symbol jackpot is "0 to 249" if the current setting value is "1". 250 values are set, and when "2" is set, 275 values from "0 to 274" are set. When the current setting value is "3", 300 numbers from "0 to 299" are set as the random number value for the special symbol jackpot. When the value of the special hit random number counter C1 matches these random numbers that result in a win, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S275.

In the process of S275, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result obtained by the process of S273 or S274 is a special symbol jackpot (S275), and if it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (S275: Yes), the display mode at the time of a jackpot is set based on the value of the special win type counter C2 acquired in the process of S271 (S276). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S271 is compared with the random value stored in the jackpot type selection table 202d, and the jackpots of five types of special symbols (jackpot A1, jackpot B1, jackpot C1, jackpot D1, jackpot E1), the jackpot type is determined. As mentioned above, if the value of the special win type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined that it is a jackpot A1 (10R probability variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of "40, 41", it is judged as a jackpot B1. (10R probability variable jackpot), if it is in the range of "42 to 47", it is judged to be jackpot C1 (5R probability variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of "48 to 59", jackpot D1 (2R If it is in the range of "60 to 99", it is determined that it is a jackpot E1 (10R normal jackpot, 100 time saving) (see FIG. 103).

On the other hand, in the process of S275, if it is determined that the special symbol is out of order (S275: No), a display mode when the special symbol is out is set (S277). In the process of S277, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, the variation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

After executing the process of S276 or S277, next, the value of the variation number counter 203i is acquired (S278), and based on the value of the variation number counter 203i acquired in the process of S278 and the variation pattern scenario table 202e. Then, a fluctuation pattern table to be referred to is determined (S279). In this embodiment, as described above, the variation pattern table to be referred to in the variation pattern selection table 202b is determined based on the value of the variation frequency counter 203i and the variation pattern scenario table 202e. In the process of S279, when the variation pattern is set, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and at the same time, in the process of S273 or S274 in the third symbol display device 81. A variable time period until the third symbol stops is determined in the display mode for showing the obtained lottery result.

For example, the previous jackpot type was either jackpot B1 (10R probability variable jackpot), jackpot C1 (5R probability variable jackpot), or jackpot D1 (2R probability variable jackpot), and the gaming state at the time of the jackpot was the normal gaming state, If the value of the variation counter 203i acquired in the process of S258 is in the range of 1 to 80, a variation pattern (variation time) is determined with reference to the time saving/probability variation table 202b2. Then, the variation time (variation pattern) is determined based on the validity determination result obtained in the process of S253 and the variation type counter CS1. For example, in the process of S259, when the time saving/probability change variation pattern table 202b2 is determined as the variation pattern table to be referred to, the validity judgment result obtained in the process of S253 is a hit, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is " If the value is in the range of 0 to 49, "win variation A" is set as the variation pattern, and "20 seconds" is set as the variation time.

In addition, in the variation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for notifying the result of the determination of validity, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation time. The audio lamp control device 113 determines the contents of the variable display mode (variation pattern) to be actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the variation time and the validity determination result. The main control device 110 is configured to be able to switch to the out-of-reach display mode in the audio lamp control device 113 for the same variable time even if the out-of-reach display mode is displayed. Thereby, various display modes can be displayed, and the effects can be diversified.

Next, in the process of S279, a variation pattern is determined based on the determined variation pattern table (S280), and a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S280 is set ( S281). Next, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S281 (S282). When the process of S282 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (S104).

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 124), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning ball in the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), and if there is a starting winning, This is a process for suspending the values indicated by various random number counters and pre-reading the lottery results in special symbols from the values indicated by the various random number counters.

When the starting winning process (S105: see FIG. 129) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S301). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (S301: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S302 ). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S303). On the other hand, in the process of S301, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the first ball entry port 64 (S301: No), the processes of S302 to S308 and S320 are skipped, and the process moves to the process of S309. do.

In the process of S303, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is not less than 4 (S303: No), an over winning information command is set (S304), and the process moves to S309. On the other hand, in the process of S303, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S303: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d ( S305). Then, a first special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S306).

The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 138) to be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball count command through the process of S306, the special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and fluctuation type updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 124) described above are set. Each value of the counter CS1 is stored in the first area among the empty holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 4) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S307). In addition, in the process of S307, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, reservation area 2 is set as the first area, if the value is 2, reservation area 3 is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, reservation area 4 is set as the first area. Next, the special figure 1 is set at the bottom of the variation order storage area 203p (S308), and a pre-reading process (S320) is executed. The prefetch process (S320) will be described later with reference to FIG. 130.

Next, regarding S309 to S316, for each process of S301 to S308 and S320 described above, the process for winning a prize in the first ball entrance 64 is performed in the right second ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640. Since the same process is executed except that the process is changed to the process for winning a prize, a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. In addition, when a game ball enters the right second ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640 and is stored as a reserved ball, the values of the special winning random number counter C1 and the special winning type counter C2 are It is acquired and stored in the free holding area of the corresponding special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b.

In this way, for the second special symbol based on the ball entering the right second ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640, the same special winning random number counter C1 and special winning type counter as for the first special symbol are used. By acquiring the values of C2, stop type selection counter C3, and fluctuation type selection counter CS1, it is possible to perform a lottery using the same random number for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The winning probability can be made constant even with the second special symbol.

After executing the process of S308 or the process of S316, a prefetch process (S320) is executed. The details of the pre-reading process (S320) will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 130 as described above. Based on the values of various counters acquired for the ball entering, processing is executed to determine in advance each lottery result executed at the start of fluctuation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the value of each counter is configured to be selected based on the entry of the ball, but it may be configured to be selected at the start of variation. With this configuration, there is no need for a storage area to store the values of each counter until the fluctuation starts, and the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 can be suppressed. Alternatively, some of the counters (for example, only the variation type counter CS1) may be configured to be acquired at the start of variation. With this configuration, the counters related to the judgment of success or failure can be acquired at the time of entering the ball, and the counters that are not related to the judgment of success or failure can be acquired later, and the amount of data to be stored can be reduced while maintaining the fairness of the game. Can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the pre-reading process (S320), which is one process in the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S320).

In the pre-reading process (S320), first, based on the value of the acquired special winning random number counter C1, it is determined whether the variation is correct or not at the start of the variation (S351). In this validity determination, the same process as the process of S255 in the above-mentioned special symbol 1 variation start process (S209: see FIG. 127) and the process of S275 in the special symbol 2 variation start process (S214: see FIG. 128) is executed. . In addition, this validity judgment (discrimination) at the start of variation (the process of S255 in the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209: see FIG. 127), and the process of S275 in the special symbol 2 variation start process (S214: see FIG. 128) This corresponds to the prior judgment (pre-judgment) that is executed before the above process. Next, it is determined whether the determination result executed in the process of S351 is a hit (also referred to as a specific determination result) (S352). If it is determined that the determination result is a hit (S352: Yes), the fluctuation pattern type is acquired (discriminated) from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1 ( S353). Next, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a winning prize information command is set (selected or generated) from the winning command table 202e (S354), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S352, if it is determined that the validity determination result is incorrect (S352: No), the fluctuation pattern type is selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1. Acquire (S355). Next, based on the acquired variation pattern type, an out-of-win information command is set from the winning command table 202e (S356), and this process ends.

In this way, before the fluctuation starts, the result of the validity judgment in advance is output as a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113 every time a held ball is established, so the voice lamp control device 113 The result of the judgment and the type of winning can be recognized in advance. Therefore, based on the winning command, the audio lamp control device 113 performs a preview effect that notifies the player of the result of the judgment on the held ball in advance (for example, changing the color of the held symbol to a color that notifies the result of the judgment on the held ball). It is possible to perform an effect such as outputting a notification sound to notify the result of the determination of the validity of the held balls. Moreover, since one winning command is output for each held ball every time a held ball is established, the audio lamp control device 113 can also recognize the formation of a held ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol fluctuation processing (S106) is executed during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 124), and is performed during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 124), and is performed during the fluctuation display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device 83 and associated with the second ball entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a.

In this normal symbol variation process (S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S401). When the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting, the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is controlled to open and close. This includes during the process. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit (S401: Yes), this process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S401: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S402), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S402: No), the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 203f (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S404). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S405), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S405: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S405: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S406).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S407). In the process of S407, the data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S408).

Next, a normal symbol variation start process is executed (S409), and this process ends. The normal symbol fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. dynamic display time), and if the result of the judgment is a win, a process of setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a (operation pattern of the normal figure winning game) corresponding to the winning type, etc. Execute.

In the process of S402, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S402: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S410). Note that the variable time here is a time that is preset by the process of S432 or S433 in FIG. 132 before the variable display starts on the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S410, if the variable time has not elapsed (S410: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S410, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S410: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S411). In the process of S411, if the normal symbol lottery is a win and the display mode has been set in the process of S426 in FIG. It is set to be displayed (lit display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a loss and the display mode has been set by the process of S434 in FIG. display). When the stop display is set by the process of S411, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 138) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S426 or S434 in FIG. 132. In addition, in this embodiment, one type of winning type is set as the normal symbol winning type, but it may be configured to set one or more types of winning types such as long time winning and short time winning. In this case, the second symbol display device 83 lights up the "○" symbol indicating a win, and the symbol corresponding to the winning type of the normal symbol lights up (for example, if it is a long win, It is best to configure it so that it will be "◎", "○" if it is a normal win, and "△" if it is a short time win). With this configuration, the player can determine the winning type of the normal symbol based on the display format, and an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result of the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. (S412). If the lottery result this time is a normal symbol win (S412: Yes), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is set to start (S413), and this process ends. When the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S412, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 138) is executed next, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set. The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of S429 or the process of S430 in FIG. 132 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S412, if the current lottery result is outside the normal symbol (S412: No), the process of S413 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, the normal symbol variation start process (S408) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation start processing (S408). This normal symbol variation start process (S408) sets the settings at the start of the normal symbol variation that is executed in the normal symbol variation process (see Figure 132) that is executed in the timer interrupt process (see Figure 124). This is a process to be executed.

It is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting the jackpot (S421). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and a special symbol jackpot is being displayed. This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S421: Yes), the process moves to S424. In the process of S421, if the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (S421: No), it is determined whether the probability is changing or the time is being shortened (S422). If neither the probability is changing nor the time is being shortened (S422: No), the process moves to S424.

If the probability is changing or the time is being shortened (S422: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot state and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, so the normal symbol obtained in the process of S408 in FIG. Based on the value of the winning random number counter C4 and the normal symbol random number table 202c (see FIG. 102(b)), the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S423). Specifically, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 102(b)). As mentioned above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is outside the normal pattern (see FIG. 102(b)).

In the process of S424, since the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot with a special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with a normal symbol, the value of the normal win random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S408 in FIG. , and the normal symbol per random number table 202c (see FIG. 102(b)), the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is obtained (S424). Specifically, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 102(b)) for low probability times. As mentioned above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined that it is a normal win with a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 7 to 239". , it is determined that the symbol is outside the normal pattern (see FIG. 102(b)).

In this embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, it is configured such that the lottery of the normal symbol is less likely to become a win. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to enter the specific winning hole 65a, so the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entering hole 640 is opened. This is to suppress as much as possible the ball that was intended to enter the specific winning hole 65a from entering the second ball entering hole 640. In addition, since the specific winning hole 65a is provided directly below the second ball entry hole 640, even if the ball enters the second ball entry hole 640 during the jackpot of the special symbol, the second ball entry hole 65a Many balls enter the ball entrance 640. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state, the number of balls held in the second ball entrance 640 reaches the maximum (four times).

Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result obtained through the process of S423 or S424 is a normal symbol win (S425), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a win (S425: Yes) , sets the display mode at the time of winning (S426). In the process of S425, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "○" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is changing probability or reducing time (S427). If it is determined that the current gaming state is changing probability or reducing time (S427: Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S428). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S428: Yes), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of openings is set to 1. (S429), and the process moves to S431. In this embodiment, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second ball entry port 640 as much as possible during a special symbol jackpot, even if the normal symbol hits, it is the same as when the normal symbol misses. The number of opening times and opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set. In addition, in the process of S427, even if it is determined that the current gaming state is not fixed or time saving (S427: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is 0.2 seconds, and the number of openings is set to 1 (S429), and the process moves to S431.

On the other hand, in the process of S428, if there is no special symbol jackpot (S428: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of openings is set to 2 seconds. (S430), and the process moves to S431.

On the other hand, in the process of S425, if it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S425: No), a display mode when the symbol is out is set (S434). In the process of S434, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "x" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of failure is completed, the process moves to S431.

In the process of S431, it is determined whether the probability is changing (S431), and if the probability is changing (S431: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S432). , this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S431 that the probability is not changing (S431: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S433), and this processing ends. do. In this way, except during jackpots of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of the variable display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and furthermore, Since the opening period of the second ball entry port 640 becomes very long, ie, "0.2 seconds x 1 time -> 2 seconds x 2 times", the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 easily.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 124), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and if the ball has passed, a normal hit random number is This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the counter C4.

In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S501). Here, passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S501: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (number of times M of pending variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S502). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S503).

The ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S501: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not less than 4 (S503 :No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S501: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f. Add 1 to the value (M) (S504). Then, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is set to the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the area (S505), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of S505, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Through this NMI interrupt processing, power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

Note that the above NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed by the payout control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, a startup process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when power is turned on to main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). The initial setting process (S901) will be described later with reference to FIG. 136, but for example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, wait processing (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operational. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

Next, it is determined whether the setting key 110b is placed in the on position (S904). In the process of S904, if it is determined that the setting key 110b is placed in the on position (S904: Yes), this means that the setting key 110b is set to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Setting value control processing for performing the corresponding control is executed (S905), and the process proceeds to S912, which will be described later. Details of this set value control process (S905) will be described later with reference to FIG. 137. On the other hand, in the process of S904, if it is determined that the setting key 110b is not in the on position (S904: No), the process moves to S906.

In the process of S906, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 83) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S906), and if it is turned on (S906: Yes), the process moves to S915. do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S906: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S907). If (S907: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process moves to S915.

If power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S907: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S908), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S909: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so the process also moves to S915 in such a case. Note that, as will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 138, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S915, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S915). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S916, S917).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S916, S917) is executed. In addition, in the case where power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S916, S917) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S916, S917), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S916), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S917). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process moves to S912.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S906: No), the power-off occurrence information is stored (S907: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S909: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S910). Next, a payout return command upon power restoration is transmitted to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff (S911), and the process proceeds to S912. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes ready to start payout control of game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S912, an initialization command indicating permission for production is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various productions. Next, a status command indicating the current gaming status is set (S913), interrupt permission is set (S914), and the process moves to the main process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the initial setting process (S901), which is one process of the startup process (see FIG. 135) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the contents of this initial setting process (S901).

In the initial setting process (S901), first, a startup command to indicate that the power has been turned on is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 (S951). The audio lamp control device 113 does not execute the startup process until it determines that the startup command set here has been received. Next, other initial setting processing is executed (S952), and the present processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the contents of the set value control process (S905), which is one process of the startup process (see FIG. 135) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing detailed contents of the setting value control process (S905).

As shown in FIG. 137, in the set value control process (S905), it is first determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 83) is turned on (S971), and if it is turned on (S971: Yes). ), a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which serves as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S972). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S973, S974). In the RAM initialization process (S973, S974), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared (S973), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S974). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, a changing command indicating that settings are being changed is transmitted (S975), and the process moves to S976.

In the process of S976, it is determined whether the setting switch 110c is turned on (pressed down) or not (S976). In the process of S976, if it is determined that the setting switch 110c is turned on (pressed) (S976: Yes), the data in the setting value storage area 203g is updated by adding 1 (S977), and the process of S978 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, in the process of S976, if it is determined that the setting switch is off (S976: No), the process of S977 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S978.

In the process of S978, it is determined whether the setting key 110b is placed in the off position (S978). If it is determined that the setting key 110b is placed in the OFF position (S978: Yes), a change completion command indicating completion of setting change is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 (S979), and this process ends. That is, the setting change state is ended and the process returns to the start-up process (see FIG. 135). Thereby, it is possible to shift to a playable state in which normal games can be played.

On the other hand, in the process of S978, if it is determined that the setting key 110b is not placed in the off position (S978: No), the process returns to the process of S976. That is, each process of S976 to S978 is repeated until it is determined in the process of S978 that the setting key 110b is placed in the OFF position.

In addition, in the process of S971, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S971: No), first, a payout return command is sent to the payout control device 111 (S980), and then the set value storage area The data of 203g is read (S981). When the process of S981 is completed, the setting value corresponding to the read data is displayed on the setting value display device 110a (S982), a status command indicating the setting confirmation status is set (S983), and the setting key 110b is pressed. It is determined whether it is placed in the off position (S984). In the process of S984, if it is determined that the setting key 110b is placed in the OFF position (S984: Yes), this process is immediately ended. In other words, the state is shifted to a game ready state. On the other hand, in the process of S984, if it is determined that the setting key 110b is not placed in the off position (S984: No), the process of S984 is repeatedly executed. In other words, the setting confirmation state continues until the setting key 110b is placed in the OFF position.

By executing this set value control process (S905: see FIG. 137), the set value can be varied in accordance with the operation on the setting switch 110c in the setting change state. Furthermore, in the setting confirmation state, the setting value can continue to be displayed on the setting value display device 110a until the setting switch 110b is placed in the off position.

Next, with reference to FIG. 138, a description will be given of the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the startup processing described above. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main process, the main processes of the game are executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 and S1021 is executed as a periodic process of 4 msec period, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing, first, while executing the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 124), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral). (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 124) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, it is sent to the payout control device 111 to correspond to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command to In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 125) or the starting winning process (see FIG. 129) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the start winning process and the prefetch process (see FIG. 130) is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball count signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and a winning prize ball command indicating the read prize ball count is set (S1021). Next, when the special symbol is in a jackpot state, a jackpot effect is executed and a jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (big opening opening) 65a of the variable winning prize device 65 is executed (S1004). The details of the jackpot control process (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIG. 139.

Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process is executed to control opening and closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 (S1005). In the electric accessory opening/closing process (S1005), when the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S413 of the normal symbol variation process (S106: see FIG. 131), opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. do.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, a variation pattern is set by the process in S260 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209: see FIG. 127) or the process in S280 of the special symbol 2 variation start process (S214: see FIG. 128). In this case, a variable display corresponding to the variable pattern is started on the first symbol display device 37. In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is lit, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is lit, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, the red LED lights up.

Note that the main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the main processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is Change the lighting color. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process (S1006), the process in S260 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209: see FIG. 127) or the process in S280 of the special symbol 2 variation start process (S214: see FIG. 128) When the fluctuation time corresponding to the set fluctuation pattern has ended, the fluctuation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is ended, and the processing in S256 of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (S209: see FIG. 127) Or the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the process of S257, or the process of S276 or the process of S277 of the special symbol 2 variation start process (S214: see FIG. 128). Displays stoppage (lit display).

Next, a second symbol display update process is executed to update the display on the second symbol display device 83 (S1007). In the second symbol display update process (S1007), when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S432 or the process of S433 of the normal symbol variation start process (S408: see FIG. 132), the second symbol display device At 83, variable display is started. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. In addition, the second symbol display update process is executed in the second symbol display device 83 when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S411 of the normal symbol variation process (S106: see FIG. 131). The stopped symbol (second symbol) is displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S426 or the process of S434 of the normal symbol variation start process (S408: see FIG. 132). A stop display (lit display) is displayed at 83.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), a power outage signal is sent from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process moves to S1001, and the processes from S1001 described above are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the current main process (S1009: No), within the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, the next main process execution timing, The initial value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, 1 is added to the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process in S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process from S1001 to S1007 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special winning random number counter C1 (the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1008, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power is turned off, and the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 134 has been executed, so the processing at power-off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). and transmits it (S1013). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is saved (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

Note that the process in S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of a power outage is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from a power off state, the processing must be performed after the startup processing is completed. The process can be started from the process in S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process in S1001, as in the case where it is initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved during power-off processing, the stack pointer is saved during the initial setting process (S901). By setting it to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 139, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (FIG. 138), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, it executes various performances according to the jackpot, and controls the execution of a specific prize opening (jackpot). This is a process for opening or closing the opening (opening port) 65a.

In the jackpot control process (S1104: see FIG. 139), first, it is determined whether a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101). The process of S219 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 125) is executed, the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, and if the special symbol jackpot is to be started (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set. (S1116), this process ends.

The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing (see FIG. 138) executed by the MPU 201. sent towards. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the opening command, it transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1102). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and a special symbol jackpot is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81. This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1102, if the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (S1102: No), the process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1102, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S1102: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1103). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1103: Yes), the specific prize opening (large open opening) 65a is released (S1104), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1105). After setting the number of rounds command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio output during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113. When the audio ramp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1103, if it is not the timing to start a new number of rounds (S1103: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is satisfied (S1106). Specifically, if a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1106, if the conditions for closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a are satisfied (S1106: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is closed (S1107), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1106: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1108). Specifically, when a special game state (10 rounds, 5 rounds, or all 2 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out is completed, it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect.

In the process of S1108, if it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1108: Yes), an ending command is set (S1109), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 138) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it selects the display mode of the ending performance based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1108, if it is not the ending start timing (S1108: No), it is determined whether it is the jackpot end timing (S1110). The jackpot end timing is the timing when a predetermined ending period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. If it is determined that it is not the timing to end the jackpot (S1110: No), this process is ended as is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1110, when it is determined that it is the timing to end the jackpot (S1110: Yes), in the process of S1111, it is determined whether the current jackpot type is jackpot E1 (S1111). If the current jackpot type is jackpot E1 (10R time saving 100 jackpot) (S1111: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203j is set to 100 (S1112). Next, the jackpot flag 203n is set to OFF (S1115), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the current jackpot type is not jackpot E1 (S1111: No), the probability change flag 203m is set to ON (S1113), and the value of the time saving counter 203j is set to 65536 (S1114). Next, the jackpot flag 203n is set to OFF (S1115), and this process ends.

<Control processing executed by audio lamp control device 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 to 159. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started upon power-on, and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 140, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the startup process is executed, first, it is determined whether a startup command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2001). If it is determined that the startup command has not been received (S2001: No), the process of S2001 is repeated. That is, the startup process is not executed until a startup command is received from the main controller 110. On the other hand, if it is determined that a startup command has been received (S2001: Yes), initialization processing associated with power-on is executed (S2002). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current startup process may be interrupted by an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage"), resulting in the power-off processing in S2118 (see Figure 143). ) is started during execution (S2003). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 143, upon receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S2115 in FIG. 143), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S2118. Before executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S2118 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S2003: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing in S2118 was started. The process was started after the execution of the process was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2004).

Confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword "55AAh" has been written into a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2005. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed. If data destruction in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2004: Yes), the process moves to S2005 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2004: No), the process moves to S2009.

Note that if the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword "55AAh" will not be stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 will be lost due to the power shutoff). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2004: Yes), and the process moves to S2005. On the other hand, the current start-up process was started after a momentary power outage occurred and after the execution of the power-off process in S2118 was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset only due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2004: No), and the process moves to S2209.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S2003: Yes), the current startup process is performed after a momentary power outage has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process in S2118, the audio lamp control device 113 The process was started when the MPU 221 of the computer was reset. In such a case, the power-off process is in progress, so the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S2004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S2004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). The checking method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This write and check for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of the RAM 223 clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2006: Yes), a keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (S2007). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2006: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2008), and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. You may also do so.

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S2009). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S2118 is executed (see S2117 in FIG. 143). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S2118 is executed, so the reason why the process in S2008 is reached with the power-off flag on is because the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power outage has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2118 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2009: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S2010), and the process moves to S2011.

In the process of S2011, a time acquisition process (S2011) is executed. A detailed explanation of this time acquisition process (S2011) will be described later with reference to FIG. Period effects such as the SP time period are set based on the elapsed period. Next, standby processing is executed (S2012). A detailed explanation of the standby process (S2012) will be described later with reference to FIG. Permission is set (S2011) and the process moves to main processing. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process in S2009 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is because the current startup process was started after the power was completely shut off, so the process goes through the processes in S2005 to S2007 and then proceeds to S2009. This is a case where the process has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2009: No), S2010, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the above-mentioned processes of S2011 and S2012 are executed, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2013). Interrupt permission is set (S2014), and the process moves to main processing.

Note that the reason for skipping the clearing process in S2010 is that when the process reaches the process in S2009 from S2005 to S2007, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S2005. If only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and startup processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because it is possible to continue controlling the

Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the time acquisition process (S2011) executed by the MPU 221 during the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. This time acquisition process (S2011) is a process for storing the time when the power was turned on. The time information acquired through this process is used to determine the elapsed time since power-on in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S2111 in FIG. 158) performed in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113, which will be described later. It will be done.

FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing this time acquisition process (S1011). When the time acquisition process (S1011) is executed, first, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 83) is turned on (S2051), and if it is not turned on (S2051: No), the clock device The current time information is acquired from the clock register 352a of H.262 (S2054), and the process moves to S2055.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S2051: Yes), the time information stored in the input time storage area 352b provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262 is read (S2052), and the input time storage area 352b is read out (S2052). It is determined whether time information is stored in (S2053). As a result, if it is determined that time information is not stored (S2053: No), current time information is obtained from the time register 352a of the timer 262 (S2054), and the process proceeds to S2055. On the other hand, if it is determined that time information is stored in the input time storage area 352b of the clock device 262 (S2053: Yes), the process skips S2054 and moves to S2055.

In the process of S2055, the time information read in the process of S2052 or the process of S2054 is stored in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM 223 (S2055), and this process ends.

In this way, by this process, the time information for determining the type of production period is stored in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM 223, so the timing at which startup processing is performed in the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall can be adjusted. By matching, the timing at which time information is stored in the time information storage area 223r of each pachinko machine 10 can also be matched. If the timing at which the time information is stored in the time information storage area 223r is correct, the elapsed time T calculated in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S2111 in FIG. 158) in each pachinko machine 10 can also be matched. Based on the elapsed time T, the timing of switching from the normal performance period to the special performance period and the timing of switching from the special performance period to the normal performance period can be adjusted based on the elapsed time T. Thereby, the person concerned in the hall can align the performance period of each pachinko machine 10 by simply turning on the power to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall at the same time. Therefore, some of the pachinko machines 10 are in the normal performance period, and other pachinko machines 10 are in the special performance period, so that the player who is playing the game can perform the performance in a different performance mode from the other pachinko machines 10. You can prevent yourself from feeling uncomfortable about what you are doing.

In addition, in this embodiment, instead of determining the time from the time information of the clock device 262 and switching the type of presentation period depending on the time zone, the time information acquired during the startup process and the elapsed time confirmation process are used. The elapsed time T is calculated from the time information acquired in the display, and the type of presentation period is determined based on the elapsed time T. As a result, even if the time information of the timing device 262 of each pachinko machine 10 deviates from each other due to deterioration over time, the deviated timing information is not directly used to determine the type of performance period, but rather Since it can be converted into a relative value of time T and used for determining the type of presentation period, the influence of deviation can be reduced. Therefore, in a plurality of pachinko machines 10, the timing of switching from the normal performance period to the special performance period based on the elapsed time T and the timing of switching from the special performance period to the normal performance period can be matched based on the elapsed time T. Therefore, since the performance period of each pachinko machine 10 can be aligned, some pachinko machines 10 will be in the normal performance period, and other pachinko machines 10 will be in the special performance period, so that the players who are playing the game can It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the performance being executed in a performance mode different from that of other pachinko machines 10.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (that is, in the off state), the time information at the time of power-on is The time information stored in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM is stored in the time information storage area 223r when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off in the main process (FIG. 143) described later. The input time is stored in the input time storage area 352b of the clock device 262. Since the timing device 262 operates based on the power supply from the timing device power supply 263 even when the pachinko machine 10 is in a power-off state, the time information stored in the start time storage area 352b is Retained even during power outage. If the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on when the power is turned on, instead of the current time information, it is stored in the power-on time storage area 352b of the clock device 262, The time information held even during the power outage state is read out and stored in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM 223.

As a result, in the event that it becomes necessary to turn off the power to one of the pachinko machines 10 during business hours, for example, due to a malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 that requires board replacement or an on-site inspection, etc. Also, by simply turning on the power again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM 223 by the time acquisition process when the power was turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off last time is stored. The time information stored in the input time storage area 352b of the clock device 262 when the power is cut off can be stored again in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM 223. Therefore, by turning on the power to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 in a hall all at once with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off, even if one pachinko machine 10 is subsequently turned off, However, by simply turning on the RAM erase switch 122 when turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10 again, the time information when the power is turned on all at once can be stored in the time information storage area 223r. The elapsed time T can be determined based on the same time information before and after the power is turned on. Therefore, the timing of switching from the normal performance period to the special performance period and the timing of switching from the special performance period to the normal performance period can be matched based on the same elapsed time T as other gaming machines, so that the power is cut off. It is possible to suppress the timing at which the performance mode can be switched only in the pachinko machine 10 to be deviated, and the player who is playing the game does not feel uncomfortable when the performance is executed in a performance mode different from that of other pachinko machines 10. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the time acquisition process (see S1011 in FIG. 141), when it is detected that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, the time is stored in the input time storage area 352b of the timing device 262. Although control is performed to read out the time information (see S2052) and store it in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM 223 (see S2055), the present invention is not limited to this form. For example, a switch means used exclusively for time acquisition processing different from the RAM erasure switch 122 is provided, and when the switch means is on in the time acquisition processing (S1011), the input time storage area of the timekeeping device 262 is The time information stored in 352b may be read out.

As a result, the time information stored in the input time storage area 352b of the clock device 262 can be stored in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM 223 while retaining the information stored in the RAM 203 before the power was turned off. Can be done. Therefore, even if the power is cut off while there are still balls remaining, or even if the power is cut off during the high probability state of a special symbol, the remaining balls will be removed based on the power being turned on again. Since it is possible to prevent the retained balls from disappearing or from the special symbol to shift from a high probability state to a low probability state, it is possible to prevent disadvantages from occurring to the player.

Moreover, instead of using a switch means such as the RAM erase switch 122, when the time measured by the clock device 262 is within a predetermined time period, the time information stored in the input time storage area 352b of the clock device 262 is It may be configured so that it is read out. In this case, the predetermined time period may be set as the business hours of the hall, for example from 10:00 to 22:45.

As a result, an employee of the hall may accidentally turn on the power to a pachinko machine 10 that has been cut off during business hours without turning on the RAM erase switch 122, thereby restarting the power supply. It is possible to prevent the elapsed time T from being deviated from that of other pachinko machines 10 that have not been placed in a power-off state because the time when the machine was inserted is stored in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM 233. Therefore, it is possible to reliably synchronize the timing at which the presentation period is switched between the pachinko machine 10 that is in a power-off state during business hours and the pachinko machine 10 that is not in a power-off state. In addition, since the time information stored in the time information storage area 233f is selected according to the time information (clock information) measured by the clock device 262, the hall employee can perform special operations when turning on the power. There is no need to do this, and the labor of hall employees can be reduced.

Furthermore, although the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to store the time information read in the process of S2052 or the process of S2054 in the time information storage area 223r, instead of this, It may be configured such that the data is stored in unused bits of the register table (see FIG. 116). The unused bits mentioned here refer to, for example, bit 6 of address BH and bits 4 to 7 of address EH, and of the bits marked with "●" in FIG. 116, those other than the input time storage area 352b Refers to the bit. As described above, these bits are bits in which information can be rewritten and read, and even if the data is rewritten, the operation of the clock device 262 is not affected at all. Thereby, the register table provided in the register 352 can be used efficiently, so the number of addresses allocated to the input time storage area 352b can be reduced.

Specifically, for example, information representing seconds is stored in bits 0 to 6 of address 7H, information representing minutes is stored in bits 7 of address 7H and bits 0 to bit 5 of address 8H, and bits 6, 7 of address 8H, Information representing time may also be stored in bits 4 to 7 of address EH. As a result, the address 9H that is not used for storing data can be reduced, and the capacity of the register 352 can be reduced, so that the cost of the clock device 262 can be reduced.

Note that in the register table provided in the register 352 of this embodiment, the bits marked with "○" in FIG. 116 are fixed to L and cannot be rewritten; It is also possible to configure the bits marked with a mark to be rewritable, and to store the time information read out in the process of S2052 or the process of S2054 also in the bits marked with a "○". As a result, the register table can be used more efficiently than storing time information only in the bits marked with "●", so the capacity of the register 352 can be further reduced, and the timekeeping device This makes it possible to further reduce the price of H.262.

Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the standby process (S2012) executed by the MPU 221 during the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing detailed contents of the standby process (S2012). This standby process (S2012) is performed until a change completion command indicating that the setting change is completed is received from the main controller 110, when a change in progress command indicating that settings are being changed is received. This is a process to wait for the completion of the process.

In the standby process (S2012), first, it is determined whether the setting changing flag 223j is on (S2071). If it is determined that the setting changing flag 223j is not on (S2071: No), it is determined whether a changing command has been received (S2072). This changing command is a command sent from the main controller 110 when the setting key 110b is in the on position after the initial setting of the RAM is executed, and is a command to indicate that the setting is being changed. (S975: See Figure 137). In the process of S2072, if it is determined that the changing command has been received (S2072: Yes), the setting changing flag 223j is set to ON (S2073), and the process moves to S2074.

By setting the setting changing flag 223j to ON, the standby process (S2012) can be continued until it is determined that a change completion command has been received in the process of S2076, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2071 that the setting changing flag 223j is not on (S2071: No), or if it is determined that the changing command has not been received from the main controller 110 in the process of S2072. (S2072: No), the process moves to S2074.

In the process of S2074, it is determined whether an initialization command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2074). This initialization command is sent during startup processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 135), and is a command for indicating permission for production. If it is determined in the process of S2074 that the initialization command has not been received (S2074: No), the startup process of the main controller 110 has not been completed, so the process returns to the process of S2071 described above. On the other hand, in the process of S2074, if it is determined that the initialization command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2074: Yes), the process moves to the process of S2075.

In the process of S2075, it is determined whether the setting changing flag 223j is on (S2075). If it is determined that the setting changing flag 223j is on (S2075: Yes), it is determined whether a change completion command has been received (S2076). This change completion command is a command sent when it is determined that the setting key 110b is in the off position in the setting value control process (S508: see FIG. 137) of the main controller 110, and is a command to indicate a setting change. This is a command (S979: see FIG. 137).

In the process of S2076, if it is determined that the change completion command has been received (S2076: Yes), the setting changing flag 223j is set to OFF (S2077), and the process proceeds to S2078. On the other hand, in the process of S2076, if it is determined that the change completion command has not been received (S2076: No), the process of S2076 is repeatedly executed until it is determined that the change completion command has been received. By controlling in this way, the main process is not executed until the setting control process is completed and the setting key 110b is detected in the off position. On the other hand, in the process of S2075, if it is determined that the setting changing flag 223j is off (S2075: No), the process of S2076 and S2077 is skipped, and the process moves to the process of S2078. In the process of S2078, a value corresponding to 5 seconds is set in the operation invalidation timer 223s (S2078), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether 1 msec or more has passed since the main process was started or the current process of S2101 was executed (S2101), and it is determined whether 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current process of S2101 was executed. If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2113 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2112. In the process of S2101, determining whether 1 ms has elapsed is because S2102 to S2112 are mainly related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in short cycles (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S2113, the variable display setting processing in S2114, and the processing for updating various counter values (not shown) in short cycles. By executing the process in S2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent failure to receive commands sent from the main controller 110, and by executing the process in S2112 in a short cycle, commands received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on this, settings regarding variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S2103 to S2114 are sent to the display control device 114 (S2102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108, which will be described later (S2103), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S2104). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. be exposed. Further, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S2105 without providing notification through the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting production process, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, settings are made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is used as a command to control the display. device 114. In the reservation number display update process, a process is performed in which a reservation lamp (not shown) is lit according to the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223b.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is executed (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring/production process, in order to enhance the production effect, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed is monitored, and when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed, a corresponding response is performed. This is a process of setting to perform a performance. Details of the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 157.

When the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is completed, lamp editing processing is executed (S2108), and then sound editing/output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process in S2109, a liquid crystal presentation execution management process is executed (S2110), and the process moves to S2111. In the liquid crystal presentation execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing/output processing in S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the process of S2110 is finished, elapsed time confirmation process is executed (S2111). This elapsed time confirmation process (S2111) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 158. When the process of S2111 is finished, command determination process is executed (S2113). This command determination process (S2113) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 144. After executing the command determination process (S2113), a variable display setting process is executed (S2114). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display control device 114. Note that details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 152.

When the process of S2114 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2115 (S2115: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2117), and the power-off process is executed (S2118). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S2119), and the process is then looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information.

On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2115 (S2115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2116), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2116: No), the process returns to S2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2116: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and the process loops endlessly, the main process will not be executed, so the display by the third symbol display device 81 will not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the command determination process (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2113). This command determination process (S2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 143) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .

In the command determination process (S2113: FIG. 144), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the first command received from the main control device 110 is It is determined whether a variation pattern command has been received (S2201). When a variation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is set to ON (S2202), a variation pattern is extracted from the received command (S2203), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2201, if a variation pattern command is not received (S2201: No), it is determined whether a stop type command is received (S2204). If a stop type command is received (S2204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2205), the stop type is extracted from the received command (S2206), and this process ends. .

In the process of S2204, if the stop type command is not received (S2204: No), it is determined whether or not the held pitch count command is received (S2207). When the held pitch count command is received (S2207: Yes), the held pitch count command process is executed (S2208), and this process ends. A detailed explanation of the reserved pitch count command processing (S2208) will be described later with reference to FIG. 145.

On the other hand, in the process of S2207, if the reserved ball number command is not received (S2207: No), it is determined whether or not a special symbol winning command is received (S2209). When a special symbol winning command is received (S2209: Yes), winning command reception processing is started (S2210), and this processing is ended. Details of the winning command reception process (S2210) will be described later with reference to FIG. 147, but based on the winning command output from the main controller 110, the judgment result of the reserved special symbol, the variation type, etc. A pre-determination is performed to determine the pre-determination, and a setting process is executed for executing each of the pending effects determined to be executed based on the pre-determination result. On the other hand, in the process of S2208, if the special symbol winning command is not received (S2208: No), it is determined whether or not a jackpot related command has been received (S2211). If it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (S2211: Yes), jackpot-related processing is executed (S2212), and this processing ends. A detailed explanation of the jackpot related process (S2212) will be described later with reference to FIG. 148.

On the other hand, in the process of S2211, if it is determined that a jackpot related command has not been received (S2211: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received (S2213). If it is determined that a stop command has been received (S2213: Yes), a stop process is executed (S2214), and this process ends. A detailed explanation of the stop processing (S2214) will be described later with reference to FIG. 150.

On the other hand, in the process of S2213, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S2213: No), it is determined whether or not a boot completion command has been received (S2215). If it is determined that the boot completion command has been received (S2215: Yes), the boot completion process (S2216) is executed, and this process ends. A detailed explanation of the boot completion process (S2216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 151. On the other hand, if it is determined that the boot completion command has not been received (S2215: No), processing corresponding to other commands is executed (S2261), and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 145, details of the held pitch count command process (S2208), which is one process in the command determination process (S2113: FIG. 144) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reserved pitch count command process (S2208). In this held ball number command processing (S2208), based on the received held ball number command, the process of extracting the number of held balls and storing it in the special symbol held ball number counter, and the setting of a continuous notice effect to be executed when the holding limit is reached. etc. will be done.

In the reserved ball number command processing (S2208), first, the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command and stored in the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (S2301). Next, it is determined whether the continuous notice execution flag 223t is on, that is, whether the continuous notice performance is currently being executed (S2302). If it is determined that the continuous notice execution flag 223t is on (S2302: Yes), this process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the continuous notice execution flag 223j is not on (S2302: No), the period performance flag 223p is on, that is, the period during which the period performance is being executed as the current gaming situation. It is determined whether or not (S2303). If it is determined that the period presentation flag 223p is on (S2303: Yes), it is not the period in which continuous previews can be executed, and the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2302, if it is determined that the period presentation flag 223p is not on (S2303: No), it is determined whether the value of the special symbol reserved ball storage counter stored in the process of S2301 is the upper limit. (S2304).

In the process of S2304, if it is determined that the value of the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter is not the upper limit (S2304: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, if the value of the stored special symbol holding ball number counter is the upper limit value (S2304: Yes), the holding upper limit effect is selected with reference to the holding upper limit effect selection table 222e (see FIG. 110(b)). Determine (S2305). As described above, this hold upper limit performance selection table 222e defines the performance contents to be selected based on the number of jackpots in the hold and the performance counter 223g. Next, a pre-read effect execution determination process (S2306) is executed, and the process moves to S2307.

Here, with reference to FIG. 146, details of the look-ahead effect execution determination process (S2306), which is one process in the reserved ball number command process (S2208: FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be explained. . FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-read effect execution determination process (S2306). This look-ahead performance execution determination process (S2306) is a process for determining the period in which the SP time performance is executed and the period in which the continuous performance is performed, and prohibits the execution of the continuous preview performance if they overlap.

In the pre-read performance execution determination process (S2306), first, the information stored in the winning information storage area 223f is read out (S2401). Next, based on the information read in the process of S2401, the content of the winning information to be digested before the winning information that is the target of the pre-reading effect is extracted (S2402), and the extracted content and the pre-reading prohibition period selection table 222d (see FIG. 110(a)), a prefetching prohibition period is determined (S2403).

Next, the SP time period in which the SP time effect is executed is specified based on the time information stored in the time information storage area 223r (S2404). Next, it is determined whether the prefetch prohibition period determined in the process of S2403 and the SP time period specified in the process of S2404 overlap (S2405). If it is determined that the prefetch prohibition period and the SP time period do not overlap (S2405: No), it is decided to execute the prefetch effect (S2406), and the contents of the pending upper limit effect to be executed are stored in the effect state storage area 223h. (S2407), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2405, if it is determined that the prefetch prohibition period and the SP time period overlap (S2405), the prefetch effect cannot be executed, so the processes of S2406 and S2407 are skipped, and this process ends. do.

Returning to FIG. 145, the explanation will be continued. After executing the pre-read effect execution determination process (S2306), it is next determined whether to execute the effect at the time of suspension upper limit (S2307). The execution of the suspension upper limit effect is determined when it is determined in the above-mentioned prefetch effect execution determination process (S2306) that the prefetch prohibition period and the SP time period do not overlap. In the process of S2307, if it is determined that the suspension upper limit performance is to be executed (S2307: Yes), the content of the suspension upper limit performance to be executed is stored in the performance state storage area 223h (S2308).

After executing the process of S2308, next, the continuous notice execution flag 223t is set to ON (S2309), and the number of times until the special figure change corresponding to the target winning information is set in the continuous notice counter 223u (S2310), This process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2307, if it is determined that the hold upper limit effect is not to be executed (S2307: No), the processes of S2308 to S2310 are skipped and the present process is ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the start period of the SP time performance overlaps with the performance period of the continuous preview, execution of the continuous preview performance is prohibited, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to calculate the time until the start period of the period overlaps with the presentation period of the continuous notice, and execute the presentation of the continuous notice that does not overlap. With this configuration, it is possible to effectively utilize the period up to the start period of the SP time performance, and it is also possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

Furthermore, even if the look-ahead performance period and the SP time period overlap, each performance can be executed in a display format that is easy for the player to understand, such as by dividing the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. good.

Next, with reference to FIG. 147, details of the winning command reception process (S2210), which is one process in the command determination process (S2113: FIG. 144) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning command reception process (S2210).

In the winning command reception process (S2210), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is jackpot, variable probability, or time saving (S2501). If it is determined that the current gaming state is in jackpot, variable probability, or time saving (S2501: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a winning ball command has been received. (S2502). If it is determined that the winning ball command has been received (S2502: Yes), the winning ball information indicated by the received command is stored in the acquired ball number storage area 223n (S2503), and the process moves to S2504.

On the other hand, in the process of S2501, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not one of jackpot, variable probability, or time saving (that is, the normal state) (S2501: No), Alternatively, in the process of S2502, if it is determined that the prize ball command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S2502: No), the process of S2503 described above is skipped and the process proceeds to S2504.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, when the gaming state is in any of the gaming states of jackpot, variable probability, or time saving, the prize ball information is stored in the acquired balls stored in the RAM 223. Although the configuration is such that the winning ball information is stored in the winning ball number storage area 223n, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning ball information may be configured to be stored in the winning ball number storage area 223n based on the winning ball command received only during a jackpot. good. With this configuration, the processing load can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, only the number of prize balls is stored in the number of won balls storage area 223n, but the invention is not limited to this, and the number of balls that have been hit is counted, and the difference between the number of prize balls and the number of paid out prize balls is not limited to this. The number may be calculated and stored in the acquired pitch number storage area 223n. With this configuration, the value of the acquired ball count storage area 223n that is referred to when executing the promotion effect can be varied depending on the player's playing method, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the process of S2504, winning information indicated by the received command is set in the winning information storage area 223f (S2504). Next, it is determined whether the period presentation flag 223p is on (S2505). If it is determined that the period performance flag 223p is on (S2505: Yes), the process is ended because the SP time period performance is being executed. On the other hand, in the process of S2505, if it is determined that the period performance flag 223p is not on (S2505: No), it is determined whether the continuous preview performance execution flag 223t is on (S2506). If it is determined that the continuous notice execution flag 223t is on (S2506: Yes), this process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2506, if it is determined that the continuous notice execution flag 223t is not on (S2506: No), the winning information set in the winning information storage area 223f in the process of S2504 is extracted (S2507). Next, it is determined whether the winning information extracted in the process of S2507 includes information indicating a prefetch effect (S2508). If it is determined that the extracted winning information does not include information indicating a pre-read effect (S2508: No), the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S2508, if it is determined that the extracted winning information includes information indicating a prefetch effect (S2508: Yes), the above-mentioned prefetch effect execution determination process (S2306: see FIG. 146) is executed (S2509 (S2306)), the process moves to S2510. In the process of S2510, it is determined whether to execute a prefetch effect (S2510). If it is determined that the prefetch effect is not to be executed (S2510: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S2510, if it is determined that the pre-read effect is to be executed (S2510: Yes), it is determined whether the pre-read effect is to be executed in the variable effect to be executed this time (S2511). If it is determined that a look-ahead effect is to be executed in the variable effect to be executed this time (S2511: Yes), the continuous notice execution flag 223t is set to ON (S2512), and the process moves to S2514. On the other hand, if it is determined that the look-ahead effect is not executed in the variable effect to be executed this time (S2511: No), a display command for changing the display mode of the target pending symbol is set (S2513), and S2514 Shift to processing.

After executing the process of S2512 or S2513, next, the content of the determined prefetch effect is stored in the effect state storage area 223h (S2514), and the number of times until the special figure change corresponding to the target winning information is continuously stored. The value of the advance notice counter 223u is set (S2515), and this processing is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148, details of the jackpot related process (S2212), which is one process in the command determination process (S2113: FIG. 144) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S2212). This jackpot-related process (S2212) is a process that is executed when a win-related command is received from the main control device 110.

In the jackpot related process (S2212), first, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2601). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (S2601: Yes), an opening command for display is set (S2602), then the current period performance status is stored in the performance status storage area 223h (S2603), and the main Finish the process.

On the other hand, in the process of S2601, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2601: No), it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S2604). If it is determined that a round number command has been received (S2604: Yes), the round number counter 223x is incremented by 1 (S2605), and then a round effect setting process is executed (S2606). A detailed explanation of this round effect setting process (S2606) will be described later with reference to FIG. 149. After executing the round effect setting process (S2606), a display round number command is then set based on the round number counter 223x (S2607), and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 149, details of the round effect setting process (S2606), which is one process in the jackpot related process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device, will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round effect setting process (S2606).

In the round effect setting process (S2606), first, the acquired information stored in the acquired pitch number storage area 223n is read out (S2701). Next, an expected value is calculated by adding the number of balls that can be acquired during the currently executed round to the acquired information that has been read out (S2702). Then, based on the calculated expected value, the number of points to be awarded for the round to be executed this time is determined with reference to the promotion point selection table 222h (see FIG. 113) (S2703). Next, the performance mode during the round is determined based on the number of awarded points determined in the process of S2703 and the promotion performance selection table 222i (see FIG. 114) (S2704).

Next, it is determined whether the setting suggestion effect is to be executed in the effect mode determined in the process of S2704 (S2705). If it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed (S2705: Yes), the effect content to be executed is stored in the executed setting suggestion effect storage area 223k (S2706), and next, information indicating the determined effect content is stored. is stored in the performance state storage area 223h (S2707), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S2705, if it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is not to be executed (S2705: No), the process of S2706 is skipped, the process of S2707 described above is executed, and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 148, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S2604, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2604: No), it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received (S2608). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (S2608: Yes), the performance information executed during the jackpot stored in the performance state storage area 223h is read out (S2609), and then the execution setting suggestion is executed. The information stored in the effect storage area 223k is read out (S2610). Then, the period production status at the start of the jackpot is read from the production status storage area 223h (S2611), and then the display ending command corresponding to the current period production status and the information read in the processing of S2609 to S2611 is set. (S2612), clears the information in the executed settings suggested effect storage area 223k (S2614), sets the value of the round number counter 223x to 0 (S2615), and ends this process. On the other hand, in the process of S2608, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2608: No), this process is directly ended.

In this embodiment, as described above, the content of the setting suggestion performance to be executed at the ending of the jackpot is determined based on the start timing of the jackpot game and the progress of the period performance at the start of the jackpot. With this configuration, when a player knows that a jackpot game will be executed due to a look-ahead effect, etc., instead of just waiting for the time until the player wins the jackpot, the player can use the period effect. Since the user can be interested in the timing at which the jackpot game starts, the player can concentrate on the game even during the time until winning the jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, the content of the setting suggestion performance is determined based on the start of the jackpot game and the progress of the period performance at the start of the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. The contents of the setting suggestion presentation may be determined in a complex manner, including the start timing of the special figure fluctuation.

Further, instead of the start of the jackpot game, the content of the setting suggestion performance may be determined based on the start of a specific round and the progress of the period performance. With this configuration, it is possible to keep the player interested in the setting suggestion performance for a longer period of time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 150, details of the stop process (S2214), which is one process in the command determination process (S2113: FIG. 144) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop processing (S2214). This stop processing (S2214) is a process that is executed when a stop command is received from the main controller 110.

In the stop processing (S2214), first, it is determined whether the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is greater than 0 (S2801). If it is determined that the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is greater than 0 (S2801: Yes), the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is subtracted by 1 (S2802). Next, it is determined whether the subtracted value of the continuous notice counter 223u is 0 (S2803). If it is determined that the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is 0 (S2803: Yes), the continuous notice execution flag 223t is set to OFF (S2804), and the process proceeds to S2805. On the other hand, in the process of S2801, if it is determined that the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is not a value larger than 0 (S2801: No), or if it is determined that the value of the continuous notice counter 223u is not 0 in the process of S2803 (S2803 :No), the process moves to S2805.

In the process of S2805, it is determined whether the special mode flag 223w is on (S2805). If it is determined that the specialized mode flag 223w is on (S2805: Yes), the specialized mode flag 223w is set to off (S2806), and the process moves to S2807. On the other hand, in the process of S2805, if it is determined that the specialized mode flag 223w is not on (S2805: No), the process of S2806 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S2807.

In the process of S2807, it is determined whether the stop command received this time is a stop command indicating the stop of the final fluctuation of the time saving state (S2807). If it is determined that the stop command received this time is a stop command indicating the final change in the time saving state (S2807: Yes), a display end command for indicating the end of the time saving is set (S2808). Next, the information in the acquired pitch count storage area 223n is cleared (S2809), and the process moves to S2810. On the other hand, in the process of S2807, if it is determined that the current change in the special symbol is not the final time-saving change (S2807: No), the process of S2808 and S2809 is skipped, and the process moves to the process of S2810.

Note that in this embodiment, the value of the acquired pitch count storage area 223n is cleared when the time-saving final variation stop command is received, but the present invention is not limited to this, and certain conditions are satisfied. In this case, the value of the number of acquired balls storage area 223n may not be cleared, and the acquired information stored this time may also be referred to during the next jackpot game. In this way, by increasing the number of values that can be referenced, it is possible to have more flexibility in setting promotion effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

In the process of S2810, it is determined whether the character display flag 223y is on (S2810). If it is determined that the character display flag 223y is set to on (S2810: Yes), refer to the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c (see FIG. 109) defined in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device, The performance mode is determined (S2811). Next, a display command for showing a character corresponding to the performance mode determined in the process of S2811 is set (S2812), and the character display flag 223y is set to OFF (S2813). Then, the stop display of the third symbol corresponding to the stop command received this time is set (S2814), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2810, if it is determined that the character display flag 223y is not on (S2810: No), the process of S2811 to S2813 is skipped, the process of S2814 described above is executed, and this process ends. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 151, details of the boot completion process (S2216), which is one process in the command determination process (S2113: FIG. 144) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the contents of the boot completion process (S2216). This boot completion process (S2216) is a process in which the button operation invalidation period is canceled when a boot completion command is received from the display control device 114.

In the boot completion process (S2216), first, it is determined whether the value of the operation invalidation timer 223s is greater than 0 (S2901). If it is determined that the operation invalidation timer 223s has a value greater than 0 (S2901: Yes), the value of the operation invalidation timer 223s is reset to 0 (S2902), and a A display command is set (S2903), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2901, if it is determined that the value of the operation invalidation timer 223s is not a value greater than 0 (S2901: No), the processes of S2902 and S2903 are skipped, and the process is directly ended.

Note that the timing at which the button operation invalidation period is cleared is not limited to this, but when a process is executed in which a different operation period is set depending on the situation, such as the accessory operation process when the power is turned on, the button operation invalid period is cleared. The button operation invalid period may be canceled when the operation process and the boot process of the third symbol display device 81 are completed. In addition, the button operation invalidation period is not limited to being set by a timer, but can be set by using a flag, etc., and is configured to be canceled when the booting process of the third symbol display device 81 is completed and a boot completion command is received. You may.

Next, with reference to FIG. 152, the variable display setting process (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S2114). This variable display setting process (S2114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 143) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process (S2114: FIG. 152), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S3001). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S3001: No), this means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so step S3008 is executed. Move to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S3001: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is set to OFF (S3002), and the fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation performance extracted from the display fluctuation pattern command is set. , is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3003).

Next, it is determined whether the continuous notice execution flag 223t is on (S3004). If it is determined that the continuous notice execution flag 223t is not on (S3004: No), a performance mode setting process is executed (S3005), and the process moves to S3007. A detailed explanation of the performance mode setting process (S3005) will be described later with reference to FIG. 153. If it is determined that the continuous notice execution flag 223t is on (S3004: Yes), the presentation mode is determined based on the fluctuation pattern and the continuous notice presentation obtained in the process of S3003 (S3006).

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command to be notified to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3007). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process moves to S3008.

In the process of S3008, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (S3008). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S3008: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S3008: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S3009), and the stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is It is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3010). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is directly set as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 (S3011), and the stop type effect setting process is executed (S3012). ), the process moves to S3013. Details of the stop type effect setting process (S3012) will be described later with reference to FIG. 156.

In the process of S3013, a display stop type command is generated to notify the display control device 114 based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be sent to the display control device 114 (S3013). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the variable performance is controlled. After the process of S3013 is executed, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153, the production mode setting process (S3005) executed in the variable display setting process (S2114: see FIG. 152) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of the production mode setting process. This performance mode setting process (S3005) is a process for setting a high-speed fluctuating performance during time reduction or probability change, and a process for setting a performance during the SP time period.

In the performance mode setting process (S3005), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal state (S3101). If it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal state (S3101: No), a time-saving/probability variable effect setting process is executed (S3102), and this process is ended.

Here, with reference to FIG. 154, the time-saving/probability change effect setting process (S3102), which is one process in the effect mode setting process (S3005: see FIG. 153) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be explained. do. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing details of the time-saving/probability-changing effect setting process (S3102).

In the time-saving/probability variable production setting process (S3102), first, it is determined whether or not the current special symbol variation is the 81st rotation after the gaming state shifts to the time-saving state or the probability variable state (S3201). If it is determined that the current special figure variation is not the 81st rotation (S3201: No), the corresponding performance mode is determined (S3202), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S3201, if it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving state or the 81st rotation after shifting to the variable probability state (S3201: Yes), the number of seconds of fluctuation of the special symbol fluctuation to start this time is It is determined whether the time is 1.5 seconds (S3203). If it is determined that the variation seconds of the special figure variation to start this time is 1.5 seconds (S3203: Yes), the corresponding production mode is determined (S3204), and a display command indicating entering the high-speed variation mode is issued. settings (S3205), and ends this process. When a display command indicating entering the high-speed fluctuation mode is set to the display control device 113, the display screen shown in FIG. 93(a) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S3203, if it is determined that the number of fluctuation seconds for the special figure fluctuation to start this time is not 1.5 seconds (S3203: No), it is determined whether the number of fluctuation seconds is 12 seconds (S3206) . If it is determined that the variable number of seconds is not 12 seconds (S3206: No), the process of S3202 described above is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3206, if it is determined that the number of seconds of variation in the current special figure variation is 12 seconds (S3206: Yes), 1.5 seconds variation will occur four times, and 6 second variation will occur once. (12 seconds in total) is determined (S3207), the process of S3205 described above is executed, and this process ends.

In this embodiment, as described above, when the gaming state shifts to the variable probability state or the time saving state and the fluctuation in the shifted gaming state reaches 81 rotations, the system enters the high-speed fluctuation mode. However, there is a problem in that if a long variation such as a jackpot variation is executed immediately after the performance that enters the high-speed variation mode is executed, the player feels uncomfortable.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when a 12-second fluctuation is executed at the 81st rotation, a 12-second fluctuation of 1.5 seconds x 4 short fluctuations and a 6-second jackpot fluctuation effect are executed at high speed. Execute the variable mode entry effect. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a performance that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, when the 81st rotation is a long fluctuation, it is not limited to performing the fluctuation effect divided into short fluctuations as described above, but it is also possible to play different benefits such as special modes other than the high-speed fluctuation mode (for example, setting suggestion mode). It may also be configured to be granted to a person. By configuring the game in this way, it is possible to diversify the effects, and the player can also enjoy pleasure by receiving unexpected benefits, thereby increasing his desire to continue playing the game.

Furthermore, if the 81st point is a long fluctuation, the entry effect of the high-speed fluctuation mode may not be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a game that does not feel strange.

Returning to FIG. 153, the explanation will be continued. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3101 that the current gaming state is the normal state, it is determined whether the continuous notice execution flag 223t provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is on ( S3103). If it is determined that the continuous notice execution flag 223t is on (S3103: Yes), this process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3103, if it is determined that the continuous notice execution flag 223t is not on (S3103: No), it is determined whether or not the period presentation flag 223p is on (S3104). If it is determined that the period presentation flag 223p is on (S3104: Yes), a period presentation setting process is executed (S3105), a corresponding presentation mode is determined (S3106), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the period presentation flag 223p is not on (S3104: No), the process of S3106 described above is executed and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the period effect setting process (S3105), which is one process in the effect mode setting process (S3005: see FIG. 153) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the contents of the period effect setting process (S3105). In this period effect setting process (S3105), a process for setting the execution of the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the number of reach times executed during the SP time period and the number of changes in the special symbol.

In the period effect setting process (S3105), first, it is determined whether or not the variation to be executed this time is a jackpot variation (S3301). If it is determined that the special figure variation to be executed this time is a jackpot variation (S3301: Yes), a performance mode for indicating a jackpot win is determined (S3312), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S3301, if it is determined that the fluctuation to be executed this time is not a jackpot fluctuation (S3301: No), it is determined whether the current fluctuation pattern is a reach based on the acquired fluctuation pattern (S3302) . Next, it is determined whether the variation pattern identified in the process of S3302 is a reach variation (S3303). If it is determined that there is a reach variation (S3303: Yes), the value indicating the number of reach times in the mission information storage area 223q is updated (S3304).

Next, it is determined whether the updated reach count is the same value as the count set in the mission information storage area 223q (S3305). If it is determined that the updated number of reach times is the same as the set number of times (S3305: Yes), the performance mode is determined with reference to the setting suggestion performance selection table 222c (S3306). Next, a display command for indicating the determined presentation mode is set (S3307), and the process moves to S3308. On the other hand, in the process of S3305, if it is determined that the reach count and the set count are not the same value (S3305: No), the process of S3306 and S3307 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3308.

Next, a value indicating the number of changes in the mission information storage area 223q is updated (S3308). Then, it is determined whether the updated number of fluctuations and the set number of times are the same value (S3309). If it is determined that the updated number of changes and the set number of times are the same value (S3309: Yes), a performance mode is determined with reference to the setting suggestion performance selection table 222c (S3310), and the determined performance mode is indicated. A display command for this purpose is set (S3311), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3309, if it is determined that the number of fluctuations and the set number of times are not the same value (S3309: No), this process is directly ended.

As described above, the present embodiment is configured to be able to perform the setting suggestion performance based on the number of variations of the special symbol executed during the SP time period and the number of reach times. With this configuration, the player can play the game while wishing that more changes will be made during the SP time period, thereby increasing the player's desire to play.

Note that the execution condition for the setting suggestion performance to be executed during the SP time performance period may be based on the sum of the variable times executed during the SP time performance period. With this configuration, even if a special symbol lottery with a long fluctuation time is executed and the lottery result is a loss, it is possible to create expectations for future games.

In addition, the executed performance results are stored as points, the player decides whether or not to use the stored points, and based on the points, a highly reliable setting suggestion performance is executed. It may be configured as follows. In this way, by allowing the player himself to determine the timing for viewing the setting suggestion performance, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the stop type effect setting process (S3012), which is one process in the variable display setting process (S2114: see FIG. 152) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop type effect setting process (S3012). This stop type performance setting process (S3012) is a process for executing a specific setting suggestion performance when the stop type of the special symbol fluctuation is out of reach during the period performance.

When the stop type performance setting process (S3012) is executed, first, it is determined whether the period performance flag 223p provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is set to ON, that is, whether the period performance is currently being performed. (S3401). If it is determined that the period presentation flag 223p is not on (S3401: No), the process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3401 that the period presentation flag 223p is on (S3401: Yes), the process moves to S3402.

In the process of S3402, it is determined whether the stop type of the special symbol fluctuation currently being executed is out of reach (S3402). If it is determined that the stop type of the special figure fluctuation is not out of reach (S3402: No), this process is ended as is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type of the special figure fluctuation is out of reach (S3402: Yes), the character display flag 223y is set to ON (S3403), and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157, details of frame button input monitoring/presentation processing (S2107), which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 143) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing detailed contents of the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing (S2107). In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107), the pressing operation of the frame button 22 is determined, and based on the depression, execution of a preview effect, etc. is set.

In the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing (S2107), first, it is determined whether the value of the operation invalidation timer 223s is larger than 0, that is, whether a button operation invalidation period is set (S3501). If it is determined that the value of the operation invalidation timer 223s is greater than 0 (S3501: Yes), the operation of the frame button 22 is in an invalid period, so the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the operation invalidation timer is not larger than 0, that is, it is not the operation invalidation period of the frame button 22 (S3501: No), it is determined whether the press of the frame button 22 is detected ( S3502). If it is determined that the depression of the frame button 22 has not been detected (S3502: No), the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S3502, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S3502: No), it is determined whether a preview performance is being executed (S3503). If it is determined that the preview performance is in progress (S3503: Yes), a preview display command for display indicating the preview performance determined by lottery is set to the display control device 114 (S3504), and the process is immediately terminated. .

On the other hand, in the process of S3503, if it is determined that the preview effect is not being executed (S3503: No), the background mode is incremented by 1 and set in the background mode storage area 223v (S3505), and in the process of S3505 A display switching command to a variable pattern corresponding to the set background mode is set to the display control device 114 (S3506), and this processing ends.

Note that a counter or the like may be provided to store the number of times the frame button 22 has been pressed, and the setting suggestion effect may be executed based on the total number of times. Further, when the long-press effect of the frame button 22 is executed, the time period during which the player presses the frame button 22 for a long time is measured, and the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the total time. You can. With this configuration, it is possible to have the player actively participate in the performance of pressing the frame button 22, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 158, details of the elapsed time confirmation process (S2111), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 143) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing detailed contents of the elapsed time confirmation process (S2111). In this elapsed time confirmation process (S2111), a process for setting the current performance period is executed based on the current time information and the elapsed time since power-on.

In the elapsed time confirmation process (S2111), first, the current time information measured by the clock device 292 (see FIG. 99) is read out (S3601), and then the elapsed time T from power-on is calculated (S3602). ). Then, based on the elapsed time T calculated in the process of S3602, the current performance period is specified from the performance switching table 222b (see FIG. 108) (S3603).

Next, in the process of S3603, it is determined whether the performance period specified from the performance switching table 222b is an SP time period (S3604). If it is determined that the specified performance period is the SP time period (S3604: Yes), it is determined whether the period performance flag 223p is on, that is, whether the SP time period has already been set (S3605). . If it is determined that the period presentation flag 223p is on (S3605: Yes), there is no need to set the SP time period, so the process ends as is.

On the other hand, in the process of S3605, if it is determined that the period presentation flag 223p is not on (S3605: No), the period presentation flag 223p is set to on (S3606), and it is indicated that the period has shifted to the SP time period. A rear image change command for displaying the image is set in the display control device 114 (S3607), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3604, if it is determined that the specified performance period is not the SP time period (S3604: No), it is determined whether the special mode flag 223w is on (S3608).

In the process of S3608, if it is determined that the specialized mode flag 223w is on (S3608: Yes), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3608 that the special mode flag 223w is not on (S3608: No), the period performance flag 223p is on, that is, the current is the end of the SP time period. Determine if it is. (S3609). If it is determined that the flag 223p during period performance is on, that is, the end of the SP time period is not set (S3609: Yes), it is determined whether the special symbols are changing (S3610). If it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S3610: Yes), a special mode setting process (S3611) is executed, and this process ends. A detailed explanation of this specialized mode setting process (S3611) will be described later with reference to FIG. 159.

On the other hand, in the process of S3610, if it is determined that the special symbols are not changing (S3610: No), the period performance flag 223p is set to OFF (S3612), and then the current gaming state is changing. It is determined whether it is (S3613). If it is determined that the current gaming state is changing (S3613: Yes), a performance mode (see FIG. 91) that suggests a set value is determined by lottery (S3616), and the process moves to S3615. On the other hand, in the process of S3613, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not in a stable state (S3614), the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 is referred to, and the effect is changed. The mode is determined (S3614), and the process moves to S3615. In the process of S3615, a display command corresponding to the production mode determined in the process of S3614 or S3616 is set (S3615), a command for displaying the back image is set (S3617), and the process moves to S3618. .

In this embodiment, at the end of the SP time period, if the special symbol is not changing and the gaming state is changing, as a setting suggestion effect, the game state is not changing with certainty at the end of the SP time period. The setting suggestion performance is configured to be executed with higher reliability than in the case where there is no setting suggestion. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a new gaming experience in which the SP time period ends in a variable state and the game is played while desiring to see a highly reliable setting suggestion effect, thereby increasing the interest of the game. can be improved.

As described above, in this embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is displayed at the end of the SP time period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting suggestion effect may be executed at the start of the SP time period. You can. By configuring this way, players who are thinking of stopping the game before the start of the SP time period are encouraged to continue playing until the start of the SP time period and continue playing until they see the setting suggestion effect. It is possible to motivate the player to continue playing the game.

In addition, as described above, the configuration is configured to execute a highly reliable setting suggestion performance based on the gaming state at the end of the SP time period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game during the SP time period executed this time Based on the results, a highly reliable setting suggestion effect may be executed at the end of the SP time period.

If configured in this way, it is recommended to determine whether the gaming state has changed multiple times during the current SP time period, and to execute a highly reliable setting suggestion performance based on the result. . For example, during the current SP time period, if the gaming state changes twice (for example, from the normal state to the time saving state and then to the variable probability state), if the gaming state changes once, or if the gaming state changes once, A highly reliable suggestive performance is executed compared to the case where the transition is not made. With this configuration, the player plays the game while hoping to win as many jackpots as possible during the SP time period and change the gaming state more often, so the player is motivated during the SP time period. You can participate in games.

On the other hand, in the process of S3609, if it is determined that the period presentation flag 223p is not on (S3609: No), or after executing the process of S3617 described above, the remaining time until the SP time period is calculated. (S3618). Then, information indicating the remaining time until the SP time period calculated in the process of S3618 is stored in the time information storage area 223r (S3619), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the specialized mode setting process (S3610), which is one process in the elapsed time confirmation process (S2111: see FIG. 158) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the contents of the specialized mode setting process (S3610). This specialized mode setting process (S3610) is a process that is executed when the special symbol is changing at the end timing of the SP time period, and the setting suggestion effect is performed during the special pattern fluctuation period after the end of the SP time period. This is a process for setting a mode that is likely to be executed.

In the special mode setting process (S3610), it is determined whether the remaining variation time of the special symbol being executed is longer than 5 seconds (S3701). If it is determined that the remaining variation time of the special symbol being executed is shorter than 5 seconds (S3701: No), the special mode performance cannot be set in the remaining variation time, so this process is immediately terminated. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining variation time of the special symbol being executed is longer than 5 seconds (S3701: Yes), a display command is set to indicate entering the specialization mode (S3702). , sets the specialization mode flag 223w to ON (S3703), and proceeds to the process of S3704.

In the process of S3704, the number of executions of the suggested effects during the specialized mode is determined by referring to the effect execution number selection table 222f (see FIG. 111) provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 (S3704). Next, a display command for adding the execution of a suggestion effect to the special figure variation effect that is being executed is set (S3705), and the display command to be executed during this special mode is stored in the executed setting effect storage area 223k. The type of suggestion effect to be displayed is stored (S3506), and the present process ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a special symbol variation effect is being executed so as to straddle the end timing of the SP time period, it is possible to switch the effect to be executed based on the length of the remaining variation period. It is configured so that it can be done. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide a presentation that does not give an unnatural feeling, such as sudden switching of the end presentation of the SP time period.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is determined whether the special symbol is changing at the end timing of the SP time period, and it is determined whether or not to execute the special mode performance according to the remaining period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, but it is configured to determine whether the special symbol is to be executed across the end timing of the SP time period at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and to set the special mode at the start of the fluctuation based on the determination result. Good too. By configuring in this way, more time can be set as the specialized mode, so it is possible to provide players with a wider variety of performance modes.

<About the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 to 174. The processing of the MPU 231 can be roughly divided into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing that is executed for one frame from the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thereby, the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 160, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, this main processing is started according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is canceled, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" depending on its hardware configuration. , specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of processing according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs that are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 will not know that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can be used at high speed. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 executes various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be explained with reference to FIG. 161. FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81, instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of images to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a that can have a large capacity with a small area, so it can sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs, etc. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 114 will be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, the first program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled. A predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a through the process of S6101.

Furthermore, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a in the process of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs currently stored are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and among the fixed value data, the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the command to be executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 160) is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 160) (S6105), send a completion command to the audio lamp control device 113 to indicate the completion of the boot process (S6106), and start the boot program. is completed, and the main boot process ends.

As described above, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined location, and from then on, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. It is used to perform various processes.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read control programs and fixed value data from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated performances can be easily executed using the auxiliary performance section.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 161, all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are included in the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a in the process of S6101. The predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. It may be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further transfers the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6106 may be executed using all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then transfers a predetermined amount of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute a process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a. In addition, some of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a through this process are further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then a part of the remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a. Then, in step S6101, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a. After repeating the processes of S6102 and S6102 multiple times, the processes of S6103 to S6106 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount of the boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a using the boot program.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S6103 to S6106 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to either the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, it is possible to start controlling the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 more quickly, which becomes possible after the boot process.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 160. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I/O device, etc. are performed. Further, processing for clearing the memories in the work RAM 233, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. Note that the initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can be inspected to see whether an image of a color corresponding to the machine type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, resident video RAM 235), and information on the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image in the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can understand that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. Note that when the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. You may also write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237 to determine that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You can do it like this.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on variation image is then transferred. A transfer instruction is sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). This transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235). , and the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination.According to this transfer instruction, the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c is then set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 172(a)) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer (see S7502 in FIG. 172(a)).

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is terminated. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 162(b)), a simple Command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 162(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 162(b)) are executed.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer the data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying the image data on the third symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can display the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. On the other hand, the player etc. can recognize that some initialization process is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Until the desired image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user can wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. By using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on variation image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts playing the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the special drawing ball entrance 64 (starting prize winning), and the main controller 110 issues an instruction to start the variable performance by controlling the audio lamp. If the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, and since it takes time to transfer the data, the time during which the main image continues to be displayed after the power is turned on becomes long. However, in this pachinko machine 10, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. To allow a player to play a game with peace of mind even while the main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on.

After the process in S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process in S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 162(a). FIG. 162(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, upon receiving a command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

This command interrupt processing extracts the received command data, sequentially stores the extracted command data in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing according to the commands is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 162(b). FIG. 162(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing for the image.

As described above, execution of this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231 . Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be explained, and then details of each process will be explained with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 162(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so the normal effect image is used as the third symbol instead of the power-on image. In order to display the command on the display device 81, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the audio lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If a display variation pattern command is stored, a demonstration display data table or a variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processing is executed. This is because command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variable pattern command, a display stop type command, etc. are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode and stop type of the variable effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113, and create the effect image according to the mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so that it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Note that details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 163 to 168.

In the display setting process (S6303), one frame of image to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) etc. Specifically specify the content. Further, depending on the processing situation, etc., the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and a display data table corresponding to the determined performance mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Note that details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 169 to 171.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (displayed object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent to the image controller 237 from the character ROM 234 for normal use based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, when a continuous preview command or rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the preview effect and the image data of the changed rear image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 172 and 173.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, determined in the task process (S6304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305) are used. , generates a drawing list shown in FIG. 123, and transmits the drawing list together with the drawing target buffer information to the image controller 237. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Note that details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 174.

Next, updating processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. The counter updated by the process of S6307 includes, for example, a stopped symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stopped symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and updated every time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D, jackpot E, back and forth off reach, The stop type table corresponding to reach (other than front/back off, complete off) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variable performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then a simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process moves to S6304.

Next, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 163 to 168. First, FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 163, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that a new command has been processed is set to ON (S6402), and then the command The types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the variable pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 164(a). FIG. 164(a) is a flowchart showing the variable pattern command processing (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of a fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is not performed. When executing the command, it is unlikely that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly used for display. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variable pattern command. In preparation for such a case, in the process of S6501, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variable display data table corresponding to a variable pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a variable effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table will actually be displayed by the main controller. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying a variation effect according to the set variation display data table. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, by setting a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to actually display fluctuations that are longer than the set display data table. Even if a fluctuating performance with time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating performance according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 will issue a command for the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display on the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the changes in the 3 symbols.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variable pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501 is updated. , extracts the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. At the same time, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is extracted, and at the same time, the content is transferred to the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S6502. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

In addition, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h whose time data has been set in the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table is finished. If it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 163. In the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 164(b). FIG. 164(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of jackpot A to E, out of reach, completely out of reach) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S6601). , the change displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is compared with the stop type table and the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 162(b)) is executed. The stop symbols after the performance are finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned on. It is set to on (S6603) and returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation based on the data table, type information that specifies the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used as type information. , offset information from the stopped symbol (symbol offset information) set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of variation, the stopped symbol set in the process of S6602 is specified from the stopped symbol discrimination flag set in S6603, and the identified stopped symbol is The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Note that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, it will not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore executes the command determination process. Although it is unlikely that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly displayed as a display stop type command. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a type command. In preparation for such a case, in the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is changed assuming that the stop type is completely off. Decide on the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss is set by the process of S6602.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will display the "special symbol" even if it is actually a "miss of the special symbol". A stop pattern corresponding to a "jackpot of a special symbol" is displayed, causing a player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has won a "jackpot of a special symbol", and there is a risk of lowering the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss, in reality, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 displays a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 receives a "special symbol jackpot", so the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 163, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), opening command processing is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 165(a). FIG. 165(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 163, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 165(b). FIG. 165(b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6801, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 163, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no round number command for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display command is If there is an ending command (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 166. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6901, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 163, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether there is a display variation stop command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the display If there is a fluctuation stop command (S6414: Yes), the fluctuation stop command processing is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the fluctuation stop command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 167(a). FIG. 167(a) is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing. This fluctuation stop command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

This display variation stop command is the end timing of the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S2114 in FIG. 152), that is, the end timing of each special symbol in the main control device 110. A display stop command ( The normal stop command) and various display commands set in the stop processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S2214 in FIG. 150) are shown.

In the fluctuation stop command processing, first, the fluctuation stop data table indicated by the display fluctuation stop command is determined, and the determined fluctuation stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S6931). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6932).

Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6931, time data representing the presentation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6933). S6934). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6935), the fluctuation stop command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 163, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no fluctuation stop command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the display notification command is determined. If there is a command (S6416: Yes), notification command processing is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the notification command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 167(b). FIG. 167(b) is a flowchart showing notification command processing. This notification command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the notification command (for display) received from the audio lamp control device 113.

This notification command is one of the various notification commands that are set when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command for indicating various abnormal conditions set in the main control device 110 and is output to the display control device 114. This is a process executed when the display control device 114 receives a display notification command.

In the notification command processing, first, a display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, and the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer. 233d (S6951). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6952).

Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6951, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6955), the notification command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In addition, in this embodiment, among the various notification commands set by the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 discriminates only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third symbol display device 81 (display device). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and related commands such as light emitting commands other than display commands, voice output commands, and accessory drive commands are also received once, and the display control device 114 processes them. The configuration may be such that the related command is output to the corresponding control device with information added to indicate the data content (display mode) set in .

Returning to FIG. 163, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418), and the rear image is changed. If there is a change command (S6418: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the rear image change command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 168. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 233w is set to on (S7001), which notifies the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change in the back image caused by receiving the back image change command in the on state. ). Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back side A, B), the bit corresponding to the back side image type indicated by the back side image change command is set to ON, and the other bits are set to ON. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7002), this back image change command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the changed back image type is determined from the back image discrimination flag 233x set in the process of S7002. Identify.

In addition, in the task processing, if it is specified that either the back surface A or B should be displayed according to the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, based on the back surface image discrimination flag 233x set in S7002, The type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified over time, and the RAM type ( (Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

Note that since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously for less than 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise etc., and another command may accidentally change the rear image. There is a possibility that it may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the Pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the Pachinko machine 10.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 163. In the process of S6418, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420), and if there is an error command, it is determined that there is no command. If (S6420: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the error command processing (S6421) will be described with reference to FIG. 168(b). FIG. 168(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to an error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined based on the error determination flag set in the process of S7102, and a response is taken according to the error type. Processing is executed so that a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S7102, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that players and hall personnel can accurately grasp the error occurrence situation.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 163. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no error command (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6422), and the process returns to S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command process is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), the processes of S6402 to S6422 are executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6422 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command is determined. Finish the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 162(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are selected from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 164(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 164(b)), which are the processing corresponding to each command. Performs processing to discard the command without executing the processing corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 164(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e and the contents thereof are cleared.

Next, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be explained with reference to FIGS. 169 to 171. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 169, it is first determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S7201: No ), it is determined that no new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process skips steps S7202 to S7204, and proceeds to the process S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204 The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to on are Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7301).

In task processing (S6304), based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (displayed object) that makes up the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, magnification rate, rotation angle, etc. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing.

In the warning image setting process, after the process in S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 169. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7203: No), then the process moves to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 171. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the target address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in such a way that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. In addition, as mentioned above, in the various data tables, the Start information is written at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 when it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, that value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so each Substantive data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data table is The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing ends. and returns to display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7403, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S7406), this process ends and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is written is Since the drawing content of is always developed, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process is ended and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 169, the explanation will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In task processing (S6304), the types of sprites (displayed objects) that make up the image are specified based on the drawing content developed in the process of S7206, as well as the warning image developed earlier, and , determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the performance time of the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and stop display, so check whether the fixed display flag is on or not. (S7209).

As a result, if the final display flag is off (S7209: No), the final display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the final display, so first, the final display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. setting (S7210), and then writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S7211). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmed display flag indicating that the confirmed display performance is in progress in the on state (S7214), the contents of the stopped symbol discrimination flag are copied as they are to the previous stopped symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), returning to the V interrupt processing.

As a result, in a case where a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of that effect. You can set the drawing contents as follows. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. And, compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, there is no heavy load on the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable performance. In other words, as mentioned above, the display of the third symbol in a fluctuating performance changes depending on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance, and in the fluctuating display data table, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating performance changes based on the data table. Until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the previous variable performance is written. In task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S7215, and the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is identified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the confirmed display effect, so a certain period of time has elapsed since the end of the confirmed display effect. Later, processing for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration performance is in progress is set to ON (S7221), and this process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if a display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variable production is not received after the confirmed display production is finished, the demonstration production will be automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can set the content of the drawing.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and that the demo effect has ended, so the display setting process is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, the pointer update process executed in the next V-interrupt process makes various settings so that the demonstration effect is started again as described above, so the audio lamp control device 113 The demonstration performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S6309) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 162(b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image ends, one of the power-on fluctuation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is displayed for a predetermined period of time. A process is performed in which a display data table specifying that the image of is to be displayed in a stopped state is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 172 and 173, details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 172(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is set. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Note that details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 172(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, off (S7501: No), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 173.

Next, with reference to FIG. 172(b), the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 172(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S7601), and if the transfer instruction has been sent (S7601: Yes). ), and further determines whether the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7602). In the process of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not finished (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuing in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process moves to S7603. Also, as a result of the process in S7601, if no transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether all the resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (S7603: No), the untransferred resident target image data is transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process ends.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the image data to be transferred here). The start address of the area (provided in the resident video RAM 235) in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. Then, it is transferred to the designated address in the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

As a result of the process in S7603, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 162(b)), the command Since the determination process (see FIGS. 163 to 168) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 169 to 171) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 The normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 173) (see S7501: No in FIG. 172(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images that should reside in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred during the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is made to reside in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfers the image data to the image controller 237. Image drawing processing can be performed using . As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for reading the image can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third symbols, character symbols, and error messages, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by the above method, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it will not be affected by various operations performed by the player at any timing. , it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 173, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. The information written in the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored is determined based on the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703), the transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer should be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

Further, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not finished (S7706: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is not completed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process moves to S7707. Further, as a result of the process in S7705, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process was completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to start transferring, so the transfer start flag is set. is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the process moves to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709). Then, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and the normal image transfer setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed, so after setting the back image change flag 233w to off (S7710), the Among the back image discrimination flags 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7711). Furthermore, the start address (storage source first address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process moves to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is normal video data. If it is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "off," it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

As a result of the process in S7713, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , and then ends the normal image transfer setting process. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be achieved.

On the other hand, as a result of the process in S7713, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). This includes the start address of a subarea (provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers the image data to the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forwarded to the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

After the process of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, the storage image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on", and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command When it is determined that the displayed stop type information is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare performance can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, if the back image is changed based on the reception of a back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, among the image data used for that back image, the back side of the resident video RAM 235 is Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this embodiment, the display data table is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, etc. At the same time that the display data table is set, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends the image to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and necessary for drawing that sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 174, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (FIG. 123) is generated (S7801). That is, in the process of S7801, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of that sprite is stored are identified. Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, after sorting the sprites in the order of the sprite that should be placed at the backmost side of the image for one frame to the sprite that should be placed at the front side, the details for each sprite are A drawing list is generated by describing, as drawing information (detailed information), the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set in the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored (the storage source start address) is added as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As mentioned above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Once the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and develops the images by overwriting into the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

In addition, if the drawing list includes transfer data information, from the transfer data information, the first address (storage source first address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored are determined. ) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and sequentially reads the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 at a time when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is then used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231, and images are drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is being developed, the image developed from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

In the drawing process, after the process in S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". It will be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 162(b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and the image 20 milliseconds after the drawing process and display process for the image for one frame are completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the image for one frame is The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for 20 minutes is read. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By specifying alternately, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

<About the second embodiment>
Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 to 184. In contrast to the first embodiment described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that when a pre-reading effect is executed as a performance during a jackpot game, the pachinko machine 10 has a pre-reading effect period and an SP time. The difference is that the content of the performance executed is different based on the degree of overlap with the period, but other than that, they are the same. Note that detailed explanations of the same contents as in the first embodiment described above will be omitted.

Here, in the first embodiment described above, when setting the prohibition period of the look-ahead effect that is executed as part of the special figure fluctuation effect, the execution period of the look-ahead effect that can be executed is calculated, and the calculation result and SP The configuration was such that execution of the look-ahead effect was prohibited if the time periods overlapped. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a prohibition period is also set for the look-ahead effect executed during the jackpot game. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the look-ahead performance executed during the jackpot game from overlapping with the SP time period, and the performance that is difficult for the player to understand from being executed.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, when the look-ahead performance period and the SP time period overlap, by varying the performance mode of the look-ahead performance, execution of a performance that is difficult for the player to understand is suppressed. It is configured as follows.

<About the production content in the second embodiment>
First, with reference to FIGS. 175 to 177, the content of characteristic performances among the various performances executed in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 175(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen at the time when the lucky performance, which is one of the bonus performances performed during the jackpot game, is started. As shown in FIG. 175(a), in this embodiment, when the first round game (first round game) of the jackpot game is started, the words "Lucky effect lottery start" are displayed. This lucky performance is a bonus performance performed during a jackpot game, and is a performance to inform the player that there is a special figure reservation (win reservation) that will win a jackpot among the acquired special figure reservations. This is a performance for notifying the player whether or not the (suspended continuous performance) will be executed.

Further, although a detailed explanation will be given later, even if you win the lucky performance lottery, depending on the gaming situation after the end of the jackpot game (the setting situation of the SP time period), the suspended continuous performance may not be executed. In such a case, the configuration is such that a performance mode indicating that a performance other than the suspended continuous performance (alternative performance) is to be executed is set as the performance mode of the lucky performance.

FIG. 175(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when a performance mode for notifying the player that a pending continuous performance is to be executed is set as a performance mode of the lucky performance. . As shown in FIG. 175(b), when the suspended series performance is executed, a performance is performed in which the character 810 holds up a placard 1811 with the words "suspended series" attached. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the player will win the jackpot again after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in the diagram shown in FIG. 175(b), the lucky effect is started during the round game period of the first round, and the result of the lucky effect is displayed during the round game period. , without being limited to this, the lucky performance may be started at any timing during the jackpot game, or the lucky performance result may be displayed in a round different from the round in which the lucky performance was started. good. Furthermore, in this case, the round in which the lucky performance is likely to start may be configured to vary depending on the setting value, or may be configured to vary based on the performance result of the lucky performance.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player play the game while making him/her look forward to when the lucky effect will be executed. Furthermore, it may be configured to be able to perform a performance during a jackpot game in which a lucky performance is not performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 176(a), the presentation contents of the suspended continuous presentation will be explained. In this embodiment, the suspended continuous performance is started from the ending period of the jackpot game, and after the jackpot game ends, the suspended continuous performance is executed during the period until the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. Then, as a performance mode of the held series performance, a performance mode in which many fish (school of fish) move from right to left on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176(a), on the end screen of the jackpot game, the words "Fish Festival Entry" are displayed, indicating that the pending continuous performance will be executed, and at the same time, on the right side of the display screen, An image of a school of fish waiting is displayed.

Then, on the special symbol variation screen during the fish school festival, as shown in FIG. 176(b), after the performance in which the school of fish moves from right to left is executed, the third symbol is displayed in a stop display mode ( 777) is stopped and displayed.

In this way, by executing the pending continuous performance during the jackpot game, it is possible to notify the player that the jackpot game will be executed (to be held continuous) during the previous jackpot game period. This allows players to play games with peace of mind.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in a state in which it is determined that the look-ahead performance period in which the suspended continuous performance is executed and the SP time period overlap, if the overlapping period is less than a predetermined period (2 seconds), is configured so that the performance mode of the suspended continuous performance is switched from the normal performance mode (see FIG. 176(b)) to the shortened performance mode.

FIG. 177 is a display screen for showing a shortened performance mode of the suspended continuous performance. As shown in FIG. 177, when the shortened presentation mode is set, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, after executing the presentation in which the school of fish moves from right to left on the display screen, An effect is performed in which the third symbol is temporarily stopped in a stop display mode indicating a jackpot win. In other words, if the timing at which the SP time period is set and the period of the suspended continuous performance overlap slightly, the timing showing the performance result of the suspended continuous performance will be earlier (2 seconds) before the timing at which the SP time period is set. ). Thereby, it is possible to easily execute the suspended continuous effect without overlapping with the SP time period.

<About the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 180. First, the contents of the ROM 222 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained with reference to FIG. 178(a). FIG. 178(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

As shown in FIG. 178(a), the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that a look-ahead regulation period table 222aa and an alternative performance selection table 222ab are added. , otherwise the same. The same content will be designated by the same reference numeral and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The look-ahead regulation period table 222aa is a data table that is referred to when calculating the production period of the pending consecutive performance executed during the jackpot game, and an opportunity to execute the pending consecutive performance is established in the lottery of the lucky performance. It is referenced when calculating the performance period when it is determined that the performance period is the same.

In this embodiment, the game period of the jackpot game is determined based on the number of round games executed during the jackpot game and the maximum time (30 seconds) that can be spent in one round game. The system is configured to calculate the maximum time for which the playback will take place, and calculate the hold continuous performance period in consideration of the maximum time. Then, it is determined whether or not the SP time period is set within the maximum time, and if it is determined that the SP time period is not set, the system is configured to execute a suspended continuous effect. By configuring in this way, no matter how the game is played during the jackpot game, the SP time period and the suspended consecutive performance period will not overlap, making it difficult for the player to understand. It is possible to suppress the performance from being performed.

In addition, although this embodiment uses a configuration in which the maximum time of the jackpot game and the SP time period are compared, the present invention is not limited to this, and the correction that corrects the maximum time of the jackpot game according to the degree of progress of the jackpot game is also possible. It may be configured to execute processing. In this case, when a new round game is executed in a jackpot game, the performance period of the suspended continuous performance is corrected based on the remaining number of round games and the maximum time (30 seconds) that can be spent in each round game. Just do it. With this configuration, when one round game ends in less than 30 seconds, that is, before 30 seconds have passed, the round game can be completed by winning nine balls into the specific winning opening 65a. Since the maximum time of the jackpot game can be variably calculated in accordance with the case where the termination condition is satisfied, it is possible to make it easier to execute the suspended continuous performance.

Furthermore, in this case, at the start timing of the jackpot game, the SP time period and the suspended continuous performance period overlap, and the SP time period and the suspended continuous performance period are not overlapped depending on the progress of the jackpot game. There is a possibility of transition to. When such a situation occurs, it is better to configure the system to be able to execute a suspended continuous performance with benefits that are advantageous to the player, rather than when it is determined that the suspended continuous performance can be executed at the start timing of the jackpot game. For example, in addition to the pending performance, a setting suggestion performance for suggesting setting values may be added as a benefit. Furthermore, it is preferable to provide a condition notification means for notifying a player playing a jackpot game of a game condition for transitioning from a state in which the SP time period and the suspended continuous performance period overlap to a state in which they do not overlap. Thereby, the player can be made to play the game enthusiastically in order to obtain various benefits and to fulfill the game conditions notified by the condition notification means.

In addition, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is configured based on the technical concept of resolving the overlapping relationship with the SP time period by accelerating the period of the continuous performance on hold; however, unlike this, for example, It may be configured based on a technical idea that the suspended continuous performance is executed after the SP time period ends by delaying the period, for example, when the suspended continuous performance is configured to be executed from a specific timing (ending period) of a jackpot game. In this case, when the first game that makes the jackpot game that is currently being executed progresses faster, the execution timing of the pending continuous performance overlaps with the SP time period, and the second game that makes the jackpot game progress more slowly than the first game. When executing, if it is determined that the execution timing of the held continuous performance does not overlap with the SP time period, a guidance mode is displayed to prompt the player to play a second game (for example, a game that does not shoot a ball). It may be configured to do so.

Here, the contents of the look-ahead regulation period table 222aa will be explained with reference to FIG. 179. FIG. 179 is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the look-ahead regulation period table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 179, the look-ahead regulation period table 222aa includes a regulation target period (seconds) based on the position of the special symbol reservation that is the target of the look-ahead performance (hold continuous performance) and the number of jackpots within the look-ahead performance period. ) is specified.

Specifically, when the performance target reservation is "1", that is, when a look-ahead performance (suspended continuous performance) is executed that indicates that the jackpot will be won in the first special symbol lottery executed after the end of the jackpot game. , "440 seconds", which is the sum of the maximum period in one jackpot game and the maximum period in one special symbol change, is defined as the regulated period. If the SP time period is not set within this regulated period, even if a look-ahead effect is executed, the SP time period will not be set during the look-ahead effect period, making it easy for players to understand. We can provide performances.

Below, if the performance target is pending is "2" and the number of jackpots within the period is "1", the regulated period is "880 seconds", and if the performance target is pending is "3" and the number of jackpots within the period is "1", then In this case, the regulated period is ``900 seconds'', and if the number of jackpots within the period is ``2'', the regulated period is ``1250 seconds'', and the pending performance target is ``4'' and there is a jackpot within the period. If the number is ``1'', the regulated period is ``920 seconds'', and if the number of jackpots within the period is ``2'', the regulated period is ``1270 seconds'', and the number of jackpots within the period is regulated. In the case of "3", "1620 seconds" is defined as the restricted period.

In addition, if the performance target pending is "5" and the number of jackpots within the period is "1", the regulated period is "940 seconds", and if the number of jackpots within the period is "2", the regulated period is If "1290 seconds" is stipulated and the number of jackpots within the period is "3", "1640 seconds" is stipulated as the regulated period, and if the number of jackpots within the period is "4", the regulated period is "1990 seconds" is specified. If the performance target pending is "6" and the number of jackpots within the period is "1", the regulated period is "960 seconds", and if the number of jackpots within the period is "2", the regulated period is "1310 seconds". If the number of jackpots within the period is "3", "1660 seconds" is defined as the regulated period, and if the number of jackpots within the period is "4", the regulated period is "2010 seconds". If the number of jackpots within the period is "5", "2360 seconds" is defined as the regulated period.

If the performance target pending is "7" and the number of jackpots within the period is "1", the regulated period is "980 seconds", and if the number of jackpots within the period is "2", the regulated period is "1330 seconds". If the number of jackpots within the period is "3", "1680 seconds" is defined as the regulated period, and if the number of jackpots within the period is "4", the regulated period is "2030 seconds". If the number of jackpots within the period is "5", "2380 seconds" is defined as the regulated period, and if the number of jackpots within the period is "6", the regulated period is "2730 seconds". seconds” is specified. If the performance target pending is ``8'' and the number of jackpots within the period is ``1'', the regulated period is 1000 seconds, and if the number of jackpots within the period is 2, the regulated period is ``1000 seconds''. If "1350 seconds" is defined and the number of jackpots within the period is "3", "1700 seconds" is defined as the regulated period, and if the number of jackpots within the period is "4", the regulated period is If "2050 seconds" is defined and the number of jackpots within the period is "5", "2400 seconds" is defined as the regulated period, and if the number of jackpots within the period is "6", the regulated period is If "2750 seconds" is defined and the number of jackpots within the period is "7", "3000 seconds" is defined as the regulated period.

By configuring in this way, in the case where it is configured to be able to execute a pending continuous performance for multiple jackpot games as a look-ahead performance (pending continuous performance) executed during a jackpot game, until the end of the pending continuous performance. By determining in advance whether or not the SP time period is set, it is possible to provide the player with a pending performance in an easy-to-understand manner.

The alternative performance selection table 222ab shows the performance mode of the lucky performance when it is determined that an opportunity to execute the suspended continuous performance is established in the lucky performance and the execution of the suspended continuous performance is prohibited, and the performance mode of the suspended continuous performance. This is a data table that is referred to when selecting an alternative performance mode to be executed instead of.

Here, the alternative effect selection table 222ab will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 180. FIG. 180 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the alternative performance selection table 222ab. As shown in FIG. 180, the alternative performance selection table 222ab includes the number of jackpot wins that can occur within the target period of the look-ahead performance (lucky performance) (the number of jackpots within the period), the look-ahead performance period, and the SP time period. Different performance modes are defined in correspondence with the length of the overlapping period and the value of the acquired performance counter 223g. The various performance modes defined in the alternative performance selection table 222ab are executable performance modes, and when the execution conditions of the determined performance mode are satisfied, the determined performance mode is selected as an alternative performance. It is configured to run.

More specifically, if the number of jackpots (the number of jackpots within the period) is "1 to 3" and the overlap period is "2 to 10 seconds", the range of the acquired performance counter 223g is "0 to 69". If "overlap mode" is defined in the range "70-89", "setting suggestion" is defined in the range "90-99", "no effect" is defined in the range "90-99", and the overlap period is "10-30 seconds" , the range of the obtained effect counter 223g is "0 to 69" for "setting suggestion", "70 to 89" for "no effect", and "90 to 99" for "duplicate mode". is defined and the overlapping period is "30 seconds or more", the range of the acquired performance counter 223g is "0 to 89" for "no performance", and for the range "90 to 99" to be "forced hold series". ” is stipulated.

In addition, if the number of jackpots (number of jackpots within the period) is "4~" and the overlapping period is "2~10 seconds", the range of the acquired performance counter 223g is "0~69". If the "mode" is defined in the range of "70 to 89", the "setting suggestion" is defined in the range of "90 to 99", and the overlapping period is "10 to", the obtained production counter The range of 223g is defined as "forced suspension" in the range "0 to 89", and "no effect" in the range "90 to 99".

Note that, as described above, if the overlapping period is within 2 seconds, the shortened and suspended performance described with reference to FIG. 177 is executed, so this is not specified in the alternative performance selection table 222ab.

Here, if "setting suggestion" is selected as the performance mode of the alternative performance, the suspended continuous performance will not be executed, and instead, the set value will be set using the period until the SP time period is set. When a setting suggestion mode for suggesting to the player is determined and "duplicate mode" is selected, a lucky effect (pre-read effect) and a display content shown in FIG. 185(b) described later , an effect mode is determined in which the display area is divided from the SP time effect (period effect) and both effects are executed overlappingly.

In addition, if "forced hold series" is selected, even if the SP time period is set, the performance mode for forcibly executing the hold series effect as a lucky effect without executing the SP time effect is set. It is determined. In other words, when "forced hold series" is selected, in a state where SP time effects are being executed in surrounding pachinko machines 10, the SP time effects are not executed and the hold series effects are continuously executed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a performance that gives a great sense of discomfort to the player. Note that if "no effect" is selected, no alternative effect is performed.

As explained above, the alternative performance selection table 222ab shows the number of jackpot wins (the number of jackpots within the period) that can occur within the target period of the look-ahead performance (lucky performance), the overlap between the look-ahead performance period and the SP time period. It is configured such that multiple performance modes can be selected in correspondence with the length of the period and the value of the acquired performance counter 223g, and the larger the number of jackpots within the period, that is, the number of times that the jackpot can be won, the "forced hold" It is configured so that the performance mode of "Ren" is easily selected. Therefore, if the "forced hold series" is selected and the SP time performance is executed in the surrounding pachinko machines 10, and the SP time performance is not executed and the hold series performance continues to be executed, It is possible to notify the player that he or she is in a state where he or she can win many jackpots.

Furthermore, the selection ratio of other presentation modes is varied depending on the length of the overlapping period between the look-ahead presentation period and the SP time period. Therefore, the performance mode selected (easily selected) as an alternative performance can be varied depending on the timing at which the look-ahead performance is executed, so that the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, the shorter the overlapping period between the look-ahead presentation period and the SP time period, the easier it is to select the "overlapping mode" as an alternative presentation. Also, since it is possible to make it difficult for each effect to be executed in an overlapping manner for a long time, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand effect to the player.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 181 to 184. In this embodiment, in contrast to the first embodiment described above, jackpot related processing 2 (see S2252 in FIG. 181) is performed in place of jackpot related processing (see S2212 in FIG. 148), and round effect setting processing (see S2606 in FIG. 149). The difference is that round effect setting processing 2 (see S2651 in FIG. 182) is executed instead of (see S2651 in FIG. 182), but otherwise the process is the same. The same content will be designated by the same reference numeral and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the processing contents of jackpot related processing 2 (S2252) will be explained with reference to FIG. 181. FIG. 181 is a flowchart for showing the processing contents of jackpot related processing 2 (S2252). This jackpot-related process 2 (S2252) is different from the jackpot-related process of the first embodiment described above (see S2212 in FIG. 148), and includes processing details to be executed when a round number command is received and an ending command is received. The difference is that some of the processing contents executed when The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When jackpot related processing 2 (S2252) is executed, the same processing as S2603 to S2605 as the above-mentioned jackpot related processing (see S2212 in FIG. 148) is executed, and when the processing of S2605 is finished, round effect setting processing 2 ( S2651) is executed, and then the process of S2607, which is the same as the jackpot related process described above (see S2212 in FIG. 148), is executed, and then this process ends. Note that detailed contents of the round effect setting process 2 executed in the process of S2651 will be described later with reference to FIG. 182.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2604 that the round number command has not been received (S2604: No), then it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S2608), and if it is determined that the ending command has been received (S2608: Yes), it is determined whether the suspended continuous performance execution flag 223aa is set to on, that is, whether the suspended continuous performance is executed as an end screen performance executed during the ending period (S2652), and If it is determined that the continuous effect execution flag 223aa is set to on (S2652: Yes), the background mode for the suspended continuous effect (the background mode for the fish festival) is stored in the background mode storage area 223v (S2653). , sets a display ending command (S2654), sets the value of the round number counter 223x to 0 (S2655), and ends this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 182, the processing contents of round effect setting processing 2 (S2651) will be explained. FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of round effect setting processing 2 (S2651). In this round effect setting process 2 (S2651), when the round game of the first round is started for the round effect setting process described above (see S2606 in FIG. 149), the execution condition of the suspended continuous effect is satisfied. The difference is that a process for determining whether the Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When round effect setting processing 2 (S2651) is executed, first, based on the value of the round number counter 223x, it is determined whether the round to be executed this time is the first round (S2751), and it is determined that it is not the first round. If it is determined that (S2751: No), the process of S2701 to S2707, which is the same as the round effect setting process of the first embodiment (see S2606 in FIG. 149), is executed, and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S2751, if it is determined that the current round is the first round (S2751: Yes), a pending continuous effect setting process is executed (S2752), and then, by the process of S2752, a pending continuous effect is set. It is determined whether execution has been decided (S2753). In the process of S2753, if it is determined that the execution of the suspended continuous performance is determined (S2753: Yes), the suspended continuous performance execution flag 223aa is set to ON (S2754), and the process moves to the process of S2701 described above.

Further, in the process of S2753, if it is determined that execution of the suspended continuous effect has not been determined (S2753: No), the process of S2754 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S2701.

In addition, in this embodiment, the process for determining the execution of the suspended continuous effect (suspended continuous effect setting process) is configured to be executable in the first round, but the process is not limited to this, and any arbitrary It may be configured to be executed in a number of rounds, for example, a suspended continuous performance is executed at the execution timing of the number of rounds (eighth round) in which only the jackpot game in which a specific jackpot type (jackpot A1, B1) is set is executed. It may be configured to execute setting processing. With this configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the pending continuous effect setting process according to the jackpot type, so if a jackpot game with a short number of rounds is executed, the pending continuous effect is executed. Even if the game is not played, it is possible to make the holding players look forward to playing the game after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, during one jackpot game, the pending continuous effect setting process is configured to be able to be executed multiple times (for example, in the 1st round and the 8th round), and the hold continuous effect setting process determined in the last executed continuous effect setting process. It may be configured such that the performance mode is finally determined based on the content. In this case, even if the special figure reservation newly acquired during the jackpot game includes information indicating a jackpot win, the reservation continuous performance can be executed and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 183, the processing contents of the suspended continuous effect setting process (S2752) will be explained. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the pending continuous effect setting process (S2752). In this suspended continuous performance setting process (S2752), there is a process for determining whether or not the execution conditions for the suspended continuous performance are met, and a process for determining whether or not the execution conditions for the suspended continuous performance are satisfied. Processing is executed to calculate the performance period and determine the performance mode of the performance to be actually executed based on the degree of overlap with the SP time period.

When the pending consecutive effect setting process (S2752) is executed, first, the information stored in the winning information storage area 223f is read out (S3801), and the jackpot winning information (that is, winning the jackpot) included in the read information is read out. information) is specified in association with the storage position stored in the winning information storage area 223f (S3802). That is, in the process of S3802, whether the acquired special symbol reservation is a hit reservation or not is specified in correspondence with the reservation storage order (execution order of special symbol lottery).

When the process of S3802 is finished, the execution period of the pending continuous effect is calculated with reference to the look-ahead regulation period selection table 222aa (S3803), and then the time measurement stored in the time information storage area (time information storage area) 223r is calculated. The SP period (SP time period) in which the SP time effect is executed is specified based on the information (S3804).

Next, it is determined whether the performance period of the suspended continuous performance calculated in the process of S3803 and the SP period specified in the process of S3804 overlap (S3805), and if it is determined that they do not overlap (S3805: No), It is decided to execute the suspended continuous effect (S3806), and this process ends. In other words, even if the suspended continuous performance is executed using the full duration of the calculated suspended continuous performance, if it is determined that the SP time performance will not be executed during the performance period of the suspended continuous performance, the suspended continuous performance will be executed. Execute the performance as is.

On the other hand, in the process of S3805, if it is determined that there is overlap (S3805: Yes), an alternative effect setting process is executed to set an alternative effect to be executed instead of the suspended continuous effect (S3807), and this process ends. .

Here, with reference to FIG. 184, the processing contents of the alternative effect setting process (S3807) will be explained. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the alternative effect setting process (S3807). In this alternative effect setting process (S3807), the number of jackpot wins that can occur within the target period of the look-ahead effect (lucky effect) (the number of jackpots within the period), the length of the overlapping period between the look-ahead effect period and the SP time period. , and the acquired value of the performance counter 223g, a process for determining an alternative performance of a different performance mode is executed.

When the alternative performance setting process (S3807) is executed, first, the overlapping situation (overlapping period) between the performance period of the suspended continuous performance and the SP period (SP time period) is determined (S3901), and based on the determination result of S3901. Then, it is determined whether the overlapping period is within 2 seconds (S3902). In the process of S3902, if it is determined that it is within 2 seconds (S3902: Yes), it is determined whether there is an overlapping relationship in which the suspended continuous effect is executed earlier than the SP time effect (S3903), and the suspended continuous effect is executed before the SP time effect. When it is determined that the effect is to be executed first (S3903: Yes), it is determined to execute the shortened and suspended continuous effect (S3904), and this process is ended.

Here, when the shortened suspended performance is executed, as shown in FIG. 177, the shortened performance mode in which the performance result of the suspended continuous performance is displayed is determined before the SP time period is set. In this way, when the overlapping period is short, by configuring the process to shorten the duration of one of the effects, multiple effects are executed overlappingly and an effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

On the other hand, in the process of S3902, if it is determined that the overlapping period is 2 seconds or more (S3902: No), the performance mode of the alternative performance is determined with reference to the alternative performance selection table 222ab (S3905), and the It is determined to execute various effects according to the effect mode (S3907, S3908), and this process ends.

<About the modification of the second embodiment>
Next, a modification using the technical concept of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 185. In the second embodiment described above, when the look-ahead presentation period and the SP time period overlap, a presentation mode (duplicate presentation mode) in which the player is not confused even if each presentation is executed overlappingly is provided. The technical ideas that would enable each performance to be executed were described.

This technical idea may be used for the look-ahead effect in the first embodiment described above, that is, the look-ahead effect that is executed in response to special symbol fluctuations.

Specifically, when the SP time preparation period begins during the execution period of the "Fish Festival" which is a look-ahead effect, the display screen shown in FIG. 185(a) is displayed. After that, when the SP time period is set, as shown in FIG. 185(b), the presentation mode of the fish school festival (fish school image) moves to the display area HR1, and the look-ahead presentation is executed within the display area HR1. The duplication effect mode to be displayed is set. That is, in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, by executing a period effect (SP time effect) that is executed synchronously in a plurality of pachinko machines 10, a plurality of pachinko machines 10 can be displayed. While performing the performance with a sense of unity, a pre-reading performance is continuously performed using a part of the main display area Dm (display area HR1).

In this way, by dividing the area in which each performance is performed, even if multiple performances are performed overlappingly for the player, the content of the performance will be confused and the performance will be difficult for the player to understand. can be prevented from being executed.

In addition, although this modification shows an example in which the display area of the SP time effect is larger than the display area of the look-ahead effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display area of the look-ahead effect may be configured to be larger than the SP time effect. Alternatively, the size of the performance area (display area HR1) for the look-ahead performance may be changed depending on the performance result of the look-ahead performance (whether or not there is a jackpot win). For example, if the performance result of the look-ahead performance is It is preferable that the performance area be configured to be larger when the result is advantageous to the player (winning an advantageous jackpot) than when the result is disadvantageous to the player (winning a disadvantageous jackpot). With this configuration, only when the SP time period and the look-ahead performance period overlap, the player can predict the performance result of the look-ahead performance based on the size of the performance area. It is possible to make the player interested in the execution timing of the game.

In addition, in this modification, both the SP time performance and the look-ahead performance are configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the execution periods of the performances overlap, may be configured to display any of the effects on the display screen of a display device other than the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device), or may be configured to display any of the effects on the display screen of a display device other than the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a sub-liquid crystal display device), or a decorative display provided in the pachinko machine 10. It may be configured to perform any of the performances using the following accessories. In this case, since the performance can be executed in a special performance mode that is set only when the SP time performance period and the look-ahead performance period overlap, each performance can be executed for players who want to experience various performances. It is possible to make the player interested in the timing.

<About the third embodiment>
Next, the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 186 to 194. In the first and second embodiments described above, by configuring the setting suggestion effect to be executable using various effects, it is made difficult for the player to understand at what timing the setting suggestion effect is to be executed. This makes it possible to keep players interested in the various performances presented, and to prevent players from becoming bored with the game early.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the execution conditions under which the setting suggestion effect can be executed can be notified to the player in advance, and the player can play the game so that the execution conditions are satisfied. This embodiment differs from the first and second embodiments described above in that a configuration that facilitates execution of setting suggestion effects is added. Note that the other contents are the same, and a detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

<About the production content in the third embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 186, the content of characteristic performances among the various performances executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be explained. In this embodiment, similar to the first embodiment described above, in a state where the normal state is set, the first special symbol is reserved (special symbol 1 reserved), and the second special symbol is reserved (special symbol 1 reserved). 2) can be stored in the order of acquisition, and a maximum of 8 reserved symbols can be displayed to indicate the number of reserved symbols.

Then, when a pending change effect, which is a presentation that changes the display mode of the pending symbols, is executed and the display mode of the first pending symbol becomes a specific display mode, during the period in which the specific display mode is displayed, By acquiring a predetermined number (for example, 6 or more) of pending memories, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance using the display mode of the pending symbols.

With this configuration, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to execute many setting suggestion effects and to acquire many pending memories.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, a variable scenario of the pending change effect can be set so as to change the pending symbols displayed in the specific display mode described above to a different display mode. The period until the special symbol change corresponding to the pending symbol displayed in is executed, or the period until the specific display mode switches to a different display mode, can be set as a period during which the setting suggestion performance is likely to be executed. It consists of This makes it difficult for the player to understand how long the period during which the setting suggestion effect is likely to be executed continues, so that the player is encouraged to play the game immediately after the pending symbol of the specific display mode is displayed. You can make it happen.

In addition, as a variable scenario for the hold change performance, it is now possible to set a variable scenario that changes the display form of the held symbols displayed in a specific display mode to a special display mode that is more advantageous to the player than the specific display mode. If the display mode of the pending symbol is changed to a special display mode, the range of the pending symbol in which the setting suggestion effect is executed will be wider than when the pending symbol of the specific display mode is displayed. It is configured to expand. With this configuration, when a variable effect that changes the display mode is executed for a reserved symbol in a specific display mode, the display mode is changed to a special display mode, and a state more advantageous to the player (setting suggestion effect) is executed. To draw attention to whether a situation in which the specific display mode is changed to a normal display mode (a state where it is easy for the setting suggestion performance to be executed) is created, or a situation disadvantageous to the player (a state where it is difficult to execute the setting suggestion performance) is created. Can be done.

Also, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the third embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, by using a hold change effect, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the hold is advantageous to the player. It is configured to be able to suggest that the result is a winning result (a jackpot win). In other words, when a pending change performance is executed, either a display mode that suggests the result of the special symbol lottery for the pending, or a display mode for varying the execution frequency of the setting suggestion performance is configured to be able to be displayed. are doing. Therefore, various benefits can be given to the player depending on the performance result of the pending change performance, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

Here, with reference to FIG. 186, the content of the hold change effect will be explained. FIG. 186(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the display mode of the pending symbol changes to a specific display mode due to the pending change effect, and FIG. FIG. 186(c) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when 8 pending symbols are displayed while the pending symbol is displayed, and FIG. Fig. 186(d) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the display mode changes from a specific display mode to a special display mode. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the screen.

As shown in FIG. 186(a), when a reserved symbol in a specific display mode (displayed in a display format with a "?" mark in the figure) is displayed on the reserved symbol pedestal m4, the area of the reserved pedestals m6 to m8 In other words, the area corresponding to the number of reserved special symbols from 6 to 8 is displayed as a "special symbol display zone" as a guidance mode to inform the player that the area corresponding to the number of reserved special symbols is 6 to 8 and is the area where the setting suggestion performance is executed. . The character J0 then displays a comment such as ``Save up your reservations while there is a ?'' as a guidance mode for encouraging the player to play a game that allows the player to acquire special symbol reservations.

During the period when this special symbol display zone is displayed, when the number of reserved special symbols reaches 6 or more, a setting suggestion effect using the display mode of the reserved symbols displayed in the area of the reserved pedestals m6 to m8 is executed. be done. Specifically, by varying the color and shape of the pending symbol, the pending symbol is displayed in a display mode that suggests the currently set setting value. In this case as well, similarly to the first embodiment described above, a production pattern (setting suggestion content) is determined with reference to the setting suggestion production selection table 222c, and the reserved symbols are displayed in a display mode corresponding to the production pattern. Ru.

As a result, when a specific display mode (display mode with a question mark) is displayed as a display mode of a pending symbol, the player can obtain a large number of pending memories and suggest settings using the display mode of the pending symbol. It is possible to make the player play the game with enthusiasm in order to execute the performance.

Here, if you acquire a predetermined number (6) or more of special symbol reservations during the period when the specific display mode is displayed, as shown in FIG. 186(b), a setting suggestion effect using the display mode of each pending symbol is executed. In the diagram shown in FIG. 186(b), the display mode of effect pattern A (displayed in the display format with "A" attached in the figure) for the reserved symbol of the sixth reserved pedestal m6 is different from that of the seventh reserved pedestal m6. The display mode of performance pattern B (displayed in the display mode with "B" attached in the figure) is displayed for m7 and the reserved symbols on the eighth pending pedestal.

Then, the character J0 issues the comment "A x 1, B x 2 GET!" as a comment to indicate the history information of each display mode (performance result of setting suggestion production) displayed in the special symbol display zone. The history display is executed. As a result, even when a new pending symbol is displayed in the special symbol display zone by moving (shifting) the display position of the pending symbol in the specific display mode based on the execution of special symbol fluctuation, the special symbol display zone It is possible to inform the player of the entire display mode of the reserved symbols displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the pending symbol for which the display mode of the setting suggestion effect is set in the area of the special symbol display zone moves (shifts) outside the special symbol display zone, the display mode of the setting suggestion effect is changed. is configured so that it is cleared. Therefore, up to three pending symbols can be displayed on the display screen in response to the setting suggestion performance. In this way, by configuring so that the display mode of the reserved symbols that are outside the special symbol display zone is no longer the display mode that corresponds to the setting suggestion effect, the display mode of the setting suggestion effect displayed within the special symbol display zone can be changed. It becomes necessary to memorize. Therefore, it is possible for players who have been playing games for a long time to more easily understand the production mode of many setting suggestion productions.

In addition, when the pending change effect is executed in the state shown in FIG. 186(b) and the pending symbols displayed in the specific display mode change to the normal display mode (displayed with black circles in the figure), the pending symbols are Since the execution conditions of the setting suggestion effect used are not satisfied (the specific display mode is not displayed), the display of the special symbol display zone is erased and the setting A mode is displayed in which the character J0 utters a comment of "end" as a comment to indicate that the period during which the suggestive effect is likely to be executed has ended.

On the other hand, when the pending change effect is executed in the state shown in FIG. 186(b) and the pending symbol displayed in the specific display mode changes to the special display mode (indicated by a star in the figure), As shown in d), the range of the reserved symbols (special symbol display zone) in which the setting suggestion performance is executed is displayed in an enlarged manner than when the reserved symbols of the specific display mode are displayed. With this configuration, when a variable effect that changes the display mode is executed for a reserved symbol in a specific display mode, the display mode is changed to a special display mode, and a state more advantageous to the player (setting suggestion effect) is executed. To draw attention to whether a situation in which the specific display mode is changed to a normal display mode (a state where it is easy for the setting suggestion performance to be executed) is created, or a situation disadvantageous to the player (a state where it is difficult to execute the setting suggestion performance) is created. Can be done.

<About the electrical configuration of the third embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 and 188. First, the contents of the ROM 222 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained with reference to FIG. 187(a). FIG. 187(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

As shown in FIG. 187(a), the third embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that a pending change effect selection table 222ba is added, and other than that, the third embodiment is the same. The same content will be designated by the same reference numeral and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The pending change performance selection table 222ba is a data table that is referred to when selecting a performance scenario for a pending change performance that is executed as one of the pre-read performances, and is a data table that is referred to when selecting a performance scenario for a pending change performance that is executed as one of the pre-read performances, and is a data table that is referred to when selecting a performance scenario for a pending change performance that is executed as one of the pre-read performances. When it is determined that the effect is to be executed (see S2508 in FIG. 191), it is referred to in the pending change effect setting process (see S2560 in FIG. 192) that is executed.

The change pattern of the pending change effect selected with reference to the pending change effect selection table 222ba is stored in the pending change pattern storage area 112bb, and it is determined that it is the change timing of the pending symbol based on the stored pending change pattern. In this case, the display mode of the pending symbols is changed to the display mode defined in the pending change pattern.

Here, with reference to FIG. 188, the contents of the pending change effect selection table 222ba will be explained in detail. FIG. 188 is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the pending change effect selection table 222ba. As shown in FIG. 188, the reservation change performance selection table 222ba has four types of reservations in correspondence with the validity judgment result indicated by the special figure reservation that is the target of the reservation change performance and the value of the acquired performance counter 223g. A pattern of change is defined.

Specifically, if the judgment result of the target reservation is a hit and the value of the acquired performance counter 223g is in the range of "0 to 59", "pattern 1" is the retention change pattern, and the acquired performance counter 223g When the value of 223g is in the range of "60 to 89", "Pattern 2" is used as a pending change pattern, and when the value of the obtained performance counter 223g is in the range of "90 to 98", "Pattern 3" is used as a pending variation pattern. , stipulated.

On the other hand, if the judgment result of the target suspension is incorrect and the value of the acquired performance counter 223g is in the range of "0 to 69", "pattern 4" is used as the suspension change pattern, and the value of the acquired performance counter 223g is in the range of "0 to 69". "Pattern 1" is specified as a pending change pattern in the range of "70 to 89", and "Pattern 2" is defined as a pending change pattern in the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223g is "90 to 98". ing.

Here, the contents of each pending change pattern will be explained. In "Pattern 1", the display mode changes to the first mode (specific display mode) two seconds after the pending symbol indicating that the target pending is acquired, and the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the target pending is This is a pending change pattern in which the first aspect is displayed continuously until it is executed.

In "Pattern 2", after the pending symbol indicating that the target pending has been obtained is displayed, the display mode changes to the first mode (specific display mode) at the timing when the next special symbol change starts, and then This is a hold change pattern in which the first mode is continuously displayed until the special symbol change corresponding to the target hold is executed.

In "Pattern 3", after the pending symbol indicating that the target pending has been obtained is displayed, the display mode changes to the first mode (specific display mode) at the timing when the next special symbol variation starts, and The display mode changes to the second mode (special display mode) at the timing when the first special symbol variation (one after another special symbol variation) starts, and continues until the special symbol variation corresponding to the target reservation is executed. This is a pending change pattern in which the second aspect is displayed.

In "Pattern 4", the display mode changes to the first mode (specific display mode) at the timing when the next special symbol variation starts, and the second special symbol variation (one after another special symbol variation) starts. This is a pending change pattern in which the display mode changes from the first mode (specific display mode) to the third mode (normal display mode) depending on the timing.

In this way, by configuring the period in which the special symbol display zone is displayed to be different depending on the selected pending change pattern, the period in which the special symbol display zone is displayed can be explained to the player. It is possible to make it difficult to understand how long the situation will last. Therefore, immediately after the special symbol display zone is displayed, the player can be made to play the game in an attempt to acquire the special symbol reservation.

<About control processing in the third embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 189 to 194. In this embodiment, in contrast to the first embodiment described above, the held pitch number command processing (see S2258 in FIG. 189) is replaced with the held pitch number command receiving processing (see S2208 in FIG. 145), and the prize winning command receiving processing (see S2258 in FIG. 189). Winning command reception processing 3 (see S2260 in FIG. 191) is executed instead of S2210 in FIG. , except that the liquid crystal presentation execution management process 3 (see S2160 in FIG. 194) is executed instead of the liquid crystal presentation execution management process (S2110 in FIG. 143), and the rest is the same. The same content will be designated by the same reference numeral and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 189, the content of the control process of the held pitch count command process 3 (S2258) will be explained. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the held pitch count command processing 3 (S2258). As shown in FIG. 189, in the held pitch number command processing 3 (S2258), a holding mode setting process (S2351) is added to the above-mentioned held ball number command reception process (see S2208 in FIG. 145). are different, and otherwise are the same. The same processing contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 190, the contents of the hold mode setting process (S2351) will be explained. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the hold mode setting process (S2351). In this reservation mode setting process (S2351), when displaying a new reservation symbol, it is determined whether the reservation symbol to be displayed this time is within the special symbol display zone (special display zone), and the display is performed based on the determination result. Processing for determining the mode (presentation mode) is executed.

When the hold mode setting process (S2351) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special hold effect execution flag 223ba is set to on (S4001), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S4001: Yes), then the stored value, that is, the value stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter in the process of S2301 executed in the reserved ball number command process 3 (see S2258 in FIG. 189) It is determined whether the information indicating whether the special symbol is on hold corresponds to the currently set special display zone (special symbol display zone) (S4002).

In the process of S4002, if it is determined that the area is within the special display zone (S4002: Yes), the setting suggestion effect selection table 222b is referred to to determine the display mode of the pending symbol as the setting suggestion effect. A performance pattern (performance mode) to be used for symbol display is determined (S4003), a display command for indicating a display mode of the reserved symbols corresponding to the determined performance mode is set (S4004), and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 191, the processing contents of winning command reception processing 3 (S2260) will be explained. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of winning command reception processing 3 (S2260). In this winning command reception process 3 (S2260), if it is determined that a pre-reading effect other than the variable effect is to be executed (S2508: No) in response to the above-mentioned winning command receiving process (see S2210 in FIG. 147), the pending change effect The difference is that the configuration is configured to execute the setting process (S2560 in FIG. 192), and the rest is the same. The same processing contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 192, the content of the pending change effect setting process (S2560) will be explained. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the pending change effect setting process (S2560). In this pending change effect setting process (S2560), when a pending change effect is to be executed, a process for determining a pending change pattern (change scenario) is executed.

When the pending change effect setting process (S2560) is executed, first, a pending change pattern is determined with reference to the pending change effect selection table 222ba (S4101), and the determined pending change pattern is stored in the pending change pattern storage area 223bb. (S4102), and determines whether the stored pending change pattern includes a special pending effect (a presentation in which a special symbol display zone is displayed) (S4103).

If it is determined that a special pending performance is included (S4103: Yes), the special pending performance execution flag 223ba is set to ON (S4104), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S4103, if it is determined that the special hold effect is not included (S4103: No), the process of S4104 is skipped and the present process ends.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 3 (S2164) will be explained with reference to FIG. 193. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of variable display setting processing 3 (S2164). This variable display setting process 3 (S2164) differs from the above-mentioned variable display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 152) in that processing related to special hold effects (see FIG. 186) is added, and other than that, are the same. The same processing contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the variable display setting process 3 (S2164) is executed, first, the same processes of S3001 to S3003 as the above-described variable display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 152) are executed. When the process of S3003 is finished, next, it is determined whether the special pending performance execution flag 223ba is set to on (S4201), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S4201: Yes), It is determined whether the current change is a change related to the target hold of the special hold effect (S4202), and if it is determined that it is a change related to the target hold (S4202: Yes), the special hold effect execution flag 223ba is set. It is set to OFF (S4203), and thereafter, the same processes of S3004 to S3013 as the above-described variable display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 152) are executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4201, if it is determined that the special hold effect execution flag 223ba is not set to ON, that is, the special hold effect is not being executed (S4201: No), or in the process of S4202, the special hold effect is not executed. If it is determined that a variation not related to the target reservation of the reservation performance, that is, a special symbol variation other than the special symbol variation corresponding to the reservation symbol targeted for the special reservation performance is executed (S4202: No), the process of S4203 is skipped, and the same processes as S3004 to S3013 as the above-described variable display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 152) are executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 194, the contents of the liquid crystal performance execution management process 3 (S2160) will be explained. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of liquid crystal performance execution management processing 3 (S2160). This liquid crystal performance execution management process 3 (S2160) is a process executed every millisecond in the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 143), and is a process that periodically updates the contents of the currently executed performance. Processing for updating is executed. For example, when determining a production scenario for varying the progress of the production based on the elapsed time and changing the production mode based on the production scenario, the LCD production execution management process 3 (S2160) The elapsed time is specified, and when it is determined that the specified elapsed time matches the variable timing of the presentation mode specified in the presentation scenario, a display command for varying the presentation mode is set.

<About the fourth embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, the variation pattern selection table 222a is defined to select different variation patterns depending on the set gaming state, and the rate at which out-of-reach performance is executed is set to be different depending on the gaming state. It was configured so that Then, when the out-of-reach performance is performed during the SP time period, the configuration is such that a setting suggestion performance is performed as a bonus. In a game state in which it is difficult to execute the out-of-reach performance, it becomes more difficult to execute the setting suggestion performance as a variable performance, so the setting suggestion performance is configured to be executed using another performance. In other words, no matter which gaming state is set, the number of setting suggestion effects executed during the SP time period is made equal.

In contrast, in the fourth embodiment, even when the same gaming state (for example, normal state) is set, it is possible to vary the rate at which out-of-reach effects are selected. . Specifically, the player is configured to be able to change the background mode by operating the frame button 22, and even if the same variation pattern is selected depending on the selected background mode, the reach It is configured to vary the execution frequency of the performance (out-of-reach performance).

In this way, by configuring the execution frequency of the out-of-reach effect to be varied depending on the background mode selected by the player, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot when the out-of-reach effect is executed. Therefore, a player who wants to see a reach effect regardless of whether or not there is a jackpot win should select a background mode in which the reach effect (out-of-reach effect) is executed more frequently, and a player who wants to increase the expectation of a jackpot in the reach effect should select a background mode that has a high frequency of execution of the reach effect (out-of-reach effect). By selecting a background mode in which the performance (out-of-reach performance) is executed less frequently, the game can be played with the desired performance.

In addition, similar to the first embodiment described above, when the out-of-reach effect is executed during the SP time period, the setting suggestion effect is executed, so the frequency of execution of the setting suggestion effect is can also be selected by the player. Therefore, a player who knows the setting values that have already been set may reduce the frequency of execution of the setting suggestion effect to make it difficult for other players (players playing next to him) to understand the setting values. A player who wants to quickly grasp the setting value by selecting a low background mode can select a background mode in which the setting suggestion effect is executed more frequently.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in a state in which the execution frequency of reach effects is low (a state in which out-of-reach effects are difficult to execute), a setting suggestion effect is created in which the player can easily predict the currently set setting value (strong suggestion effect). In a state where the reach effect is frequently executed (a state where the out-of-reach effect is likely to be executed), the player can predict the currently set setting value as a setting suggestion effect. It is configured so that difficult presentation modes (weakly suggestive modes) are more likely to be selected. With this configuration, the player is allowed to select between a game in which the setting suggestion performance is likely to be executed but the weak suggestion mode is likely to be selected, and a game in which the setting suggestion presentation is difficult to be executed but the strong suggestion mode is easy to be selected. becomes possible.

In other words, in this embodiment, the technical idea is not to equalize the number of executions of setting suggestion effects, but to equalize the amount of information for predicting the setting value that the player will obtain through the executed setting suggestion effects. It is an invention that has been made.

Furthermore, as an invention based on the present technical idea, it is preferable that the more a gaming situation occurs with a lower realization frequency, the more likely a strong suggestion mode is selected. For example, if a jackpot game is executed multiple times during one SP time period, In some cases, the strongly suggested mode may be configured to be more likely to be selected. With this configuration, it is possible to provide players with information that makes it easier to predict setting values by creating rarer gaming situations. The game can be played while trying to create different situations.

<About the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 195 and 196. The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. However, the other configurations, that is, the configurations of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the contents of each electrical configuration of the display control device 113 are the same. The same content will be designated by the same reference numeral and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 195(a) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 195(a), the ROM 222 of this embodiment provides a variation pattern selection 4 table 222ca in place of the variation pattern selection table 222a in the ROM 222 of the first embodiment described above, and newly The difference is that a mode selection table 222cb is added, and the rest is the same. Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The variation pattern selection 4 table 222ca, similar to the variation pattern selection table 222a described above, is a data table that is referred to when selecting a production pattern for a variation production to be executed based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. It is. In the first embodiment described above, detailed explanation thereof has been omitted, but performance patterns of various fluctuation performances are created in correspondence with the received information indicating the fluctuation pattern, the current gaming state, and the value of the acquired performance counter 223g. is stipulated.

Here, the detailed contents of the variation pattern selection 4 table 222ca will be explained with reference to FIG. 196. FIG. 196 is a diagram schematically showing characteristic prescribed contents among the contents prescribed in the variation pattern selection 4 table 222ca. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute multiple types of reach effects, and the variation pattern selection 4 table 222ca contains information that corresponds to the received variation pattern command. In addition, various types of reach effects are defined.

As shown in FIG. 196, the variable pattern selection 4 table 222ca includes the current gaming state (in addition to the probability state of special symbols and normal symbols, the gaming state according to the selected background mode) and the main controller Various variable effect patterns are defined in correspondence with the type of variable pattern received from 110 and the value of the obtained effect counter 223g.

Specifically, the game state is "Normal 1", that is, the game state is the normal state, the background mode is "Sandy Beach Stage", and the received variation pattern is "Various Wins", that is, the main controller If the variation pattern selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table 202b of 110 is a winning variation A to a winning variation C, regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223g (the entire range of the performance counter 223g that can be obtained) ), ``various hits'' are stipulated as variable effects.

Although detailed illustration is omitted in FIG. 196, in reality, multiple types of variable effects (reach effects) are created in correspondence with the length of the variation time indicated by the received variation pattern and the value of the obtained effect counter 223g. ), one of the variable effects (reach effects) is defined. In addition, when a variation pattern corresponding to a winning of a special symbol is received, the result of the variation performance is a result indicating a jackpot win, so the out-of-reach performance is not executed.

Next, the game state is "normal 1", that is, the game state is the normal state, the background mode is "sandy beach stage", and the received fluctuation pattern is "missing fluctuation A", that is, the main controller 110 If the variation pattern selected by referring to the normal variation pattern table 202b1 is the off variation A (variation time 5 seconds), regardless of the value of the obtained production counter 223g (the value of the production counter 223g that can be obtained) (for the entire range), "short miss" is specified as a variation effect. If this "short miss" is selected, the reach effect will not be executed, and the variable effect will be such that the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode to indicate that the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss. executed.

The game state is "Normal 1", that is, the game state is the normal state, the background mode is "Sandy Beach Stage", and the received fluctuation pattern is "Off fluctuation B", that is, the normal use of the main controller 110. If the variation pattern selected with reference to the variation pattern table 202b1 is a deviation variation B (variation time 20 seconds), the variation effect is applied to the value of the obtained effect counter 223g in the range of "0 to 49". ``Out of reach'' is defined as a range of ``50 to 98'', and ``Out of reach'' is defined as a variable effect. If “Mid-off” is selected, after the variable effect that incites whether or not the reach effect is executed, the reach effect will not be executed and the special symbol lottery result will be a miss. A variable effect is executed in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode to indicate that there is a certain thing.

Here, as a specific example of a fluctuating effect corresponding to a "miss-out", the third symbol is temporarily stopped in a display mode that indicates a miss (other than a display mode that indicates a jackpot win), and then the third symbol is varied again. By executing a pseudo-variation effect that makes the player expect that a reach effect will be executed, and by temporarily slowing down the variation speed of the third symbol during the variation display, the above-mentioned short miss can be avoided. There is a variable performance with a higher degree of expectation that a ready-to-win performance will be executed (a part of the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination that will result in a ready-to-win performance) than the corresponding variable performance.

The performance mode corresponding to such a variable performance of "missing in the middle" is configured such that the same performance mode is set up to the middle even in the out-of-reach performance and the reach-hit performance. With this configuration, when a fluctuating performance that misses the center is being executed, it is possible to determine whether the fluctuating performance performed for the player is "missing the middle," "missing the reach," or "hitting the reach." It is possible to make it difficult to tell whether the variation effect was executed based on the above.

In addition, as a specific example of a fluctuating effect corresponding to "out of reach", after temporarily stopping in a display mode in which the third symbol is out of reach (other than a display mode indicating jackpot winning), the third symbol is changed again. After making the player expect that a reach effect will be executed by executing the variation effect, temporarily slow down the variation speed of the variation effect in which the reach effect is executed or the third symbol during the variation display. By doing so, after increasing the expectation that the reach effect will be executed (a part of the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination that will cause the reach effect to be executed) than the variable effect corresponding to the short miss mentioned above. There is a variable performance that executes a reach performance.

Then, the game state is "normal 1", that is, the game state is the normal state, the background mode is "sandy beach stage", and the received fluctuation pattern is "missing fluctuation C", that is, the main controller 110 If the variation pattern selected by referring to the normal variation pattern table 202b1 is the out-of-reach variation C (variation time 60 seconds), the "out-of-reach" variation effect is selected as the variation effect, regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223g. stipulated. In other words, when the out-of-reach variation C is selected, the out-of-reach variation effect is always executed.

On the other hand, if the game state is "Normal 2", that is, the game state is the normal state, the background mode is "Deep sea stage", and the received variation pattern is "Various winnings", that is, the main controller If the variation pattern selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table 202b of 110 is a winning variation A to a winning variation C, regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223g (the entire range of the performance counter 223g that can be obtained) ), ``various hits'' are stipulated as variable effects. Note that the contents of the variable effect executed when "various winnings" is selected as the variable effect are the same as in the case of normal 1 described above, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The game state is "Normal 2", that is, the game state is the normal state, the background mode is "Deep sea stage", and the received fluctuation pattern is "Off fluctuation A", that is, the normal use of the main controller 110. If the variation pattern selected with reference to the variation pattern table 202b1 is a deviation variation A (variation time 5 seconds), the variation effect will be changed for the value of the acquired effect counter 223g in the range of "0 to 49". "Out of reach" is defined as a variable effect for the range of "50 to 98".

This out-of-reach effect that is executed for out-of-reach variation A is that the out-of-reach effect is executed immediately (2 seconds later) after the third symbol variation is executed, and two seconds after that, the out-of-reach effect is displayed in a display mode that indicates out of reach. A fluctuating effect in which the symbols are displayed in a static manner is executed. In other words, the variable performance is executed not for the purpose of increasing the performance effect by encouraging the player to predict whether or not he will win the jackpot, but for the purpose of increasing the frequency of execution of the out-of-reach performance. In addition, when performing a reach effect (out-of-reach effect) in a short time like this, for example, when a variable effect is executed, one third symbol among the three third symbols may be stopped and displayed. It is preferable that the other third symbol is immediately stopped and displayed in the same display mode as the third symbol that is still being stopped and displayed, so that the ready-to-win state is achieved in a short time. In this way, by configuring to create a ready-to-win state without displaying all the third symbols in a variable manner, it is possible to create a ready-to-win state in a short time in a manner that is easy for the player to understand. In this case, for example, the letters "LOCK" are attached to the third symbol that is not displayed in a variable manner as a notification mode to inform the player that the third symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (remains displayed in a stopped state). It would be good to add an icon. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that there is a third symbol that will not be displayed in a variable manner.

The game state is "Normal 2", that is, the game state is the normal state, the background mode is "Deep sea stage", and the received fluctuation pattern is "Off fluctuation B", that is, the normal use of the main controller 110. If the variation pattern selected by referring to the variation pattern table 202b1 is the off variation B (variation time 20 seconds), the variation effect is applied to the range where the value of the obtained effect counter 223g is "0 to 9". "Out of reach" is defined as "out of reach" and "out of reach" is defined as a variable effect for the range "10 to 98". When the received variation pattern is "out of reach variation C", that is, the variation time is 60 seconds, "out of reach" is defined as the variation performance regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223g. In other words, when the out-of-reach variation C is selected, the out-of-reach variation effect is always executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the normal state is set, the frequency at which the out-of-reach effect is performed is varied depending on the selected background mode. Specifically, the out-of-reach effect is better when the "deep sea stage" is selected (normally in 2) than when "sandy beach stage" is selected as the background mode (usually in 1). It is configured to be easy to execute. Therefore, even when the same gaming state (normal state) is set, the out-of-reach effects and the frequency of execution of the reach effects can be made different, thereby providing players with a game they will never get tired of. Can be done.

In this embodiment, the background mode is configured to be changeable by the player operating the frame button 22, and the execution frequency of the reach effect (out-of-reach effect) is varied depending on the set background mode. However, the configuration for varying the execution frequency of the reach effect (out-of-reach effect) is not limited to this. For example, the number of special symbol drawings that are executed without changing the gaming state is set to For example, the background mode may be configured to switch when the clock reaches a predetermined time (for example, 50 times), or the background mode may be switched when the time measured by the clock device 292 reaches a predetermined time (for example, 1 p.m.). Alternatively, if there are multiple jackpot types in which a specific gaming state (for example, variable probability state) is set after the jackpot game ends, there may be multiple jackpot types in which a specific gaming state is set after the jackpot game ends. Among the jackpot types, different background modes are set when a first jackpot type is set, when a second jackpot type is set, and when a specific gaming state is set. Also good.

In this way, even if the specification does not allow the player to arbitrarily select the background mode, it is possible to have the player play games with different execution frequencies of reach effects, which will reduce the player's boredom. It is possible to provide games that are not available.

Next, when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state, the variable performance is specified so that the same variable performance is executed regardless of the background mode, and the game state is "time saving/variable probability". That is, when the gaming state is a time-saving state or a variable-probability state, and the received variation pattern is "various winnings", the game is selected by referring to the time-saving/probability-variable variation pattern table 202b2 of the main controller 110. When the variation patterns are win variation A and win variation B, regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223g (with respect to the entire range of the performance counter 223g that can be obtained), "various wins" are the variable performance. stipulated. Note that the contents of the variable effect executed when "various winnings" is selected as the variable effect are the same as in the case of normal 1 described above, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In addition, when the received variation pattern is "deviation variation D", that is, the variation pattern selected by referring to the time saving/probability variation variation pattern table 202b2 of the main controller 110 is the variation variation D (variation time 3 seconds). In this case, regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223g (with respect to the entire range of the performance counter 223g that can be obtained), "short miss" is defined as the variable performance. That is, in a variation pattern with a short variation time of 3 seconds, the reach effect is not executed, and the variation effect in which the third symbol indicating a miss is stopped and displayed is executed.

If the received variation pattern is "deviant variation B, C", that is, the variation pattern selected by referring to the time saving/probability variation variation pattern table 202b2 of the main controller 110 is the variation pattern which is deviant variation B (variation time 20 seconds). Or, if it is out of reach variation C (variation time 60 seconds), regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223g (with respect to the entire range of the performance counter 223g that can be obtained), the fluctuation performance is "out of reach". is stipulated.

Furthermore, if the gaming state is a fixed variable state and the high speed variable mode is set, the variable effect is stipulated so that the same variable effect is executed regardless of the background mode, "variation period", that is, when the gaming state is a definite variation state and the high-speed variation mode, and the received variation pattern is "various types of wins", that is, refer to the high-speed variation variation pattern table 202b3 of the main controller 110. If the selected fluctuation pattern is short hit fluctuation A or short hit fluctuation B, the fluctuation performance is ``Various hits'' are defined. Note that the contents of the variable effect executed when "various winnings" is selected as the variable effect are the same as in the case of normal 1 described above, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Further, if the received variation pattern is "various types of deviations", that is, the variation pattern selected with reference to the high-speed variation variation pattern table 202b3 of the main controller 110 is the short deviation variation A (variation time 1.5 seconds). ), in the case of short deviation variation B (variation time 6 seconds), regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223g (with respect to the entire range of the effect counter 223g that can be obtained), the variable effect is "short deviation". is stipulated. In other words, during the high-speed fluctuation mode, the out-of-reach effect is not executed, and at the time the reach effect is executed, it is announced that the jackpot has been won.

As explained above, in this embodiment, when executing a variable effect corresponding to a variable pattern selected in the control process of the main control device 110, the gaming state (currently set gaming state and background mode) The present invention is configured such that different variable performances can be determined based on the game conditions, and the execution frequency of the reach performance (out-of-reach performance) is varied depending on the gaming state.

As for the gaming state, the normal state has the highest execution frequency of the reach effect (out-of-reach effect), that is, the reach effect as the performance mode of the variable effect to show the lottery result when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times. It is configured such that the frequency of performance is highest, and then the frequency of execution of ready-to-win performance decreases in the order of time saving state and variable probability state. Furthermore, when the probability variation state is set, the out-of-reach effect is not executed during the high-speed variation mode. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly define the frequency of execution of out-of-reach performance in each gaming state.

Returning to FIG. 195(a), the explanation will be continued. The ending mode selection table 222cb is a data table that is referred to when determining the presentation content (suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion presentation that is executed at the end of the period presentation (SP time presentation), and is a data table that is referred to when determining the presentation content (suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion presentation that is executed at the end of the period presentation (SP time presentation), and is a data table that is referred to when deciding the presentation content (suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion presentation that is executed at the end of the period presentation (SP time presentation). Different suggestion modes are defined in correspondence with the gaming state at and the gaming state at the end timing of the period performance.

In this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, when a period effect is being executed, the setting suggestion effect is more likely to be executed based on the variable effect than when the period effect is not being executed. It is configured as follows. More specifically, a setting suggestion performance is executed based on the number of executions of the special symbol lottery executed during the period production or the number of executions of the reach effect, or a setting suggestion effect is executed when an out of reach effect is executed. It is configured to do the following.

In other words, during the SP time period in which the period effect (SP time effect) is executed, a lot of information for predicting the setting value is provided to the player, so benefits (setting suggestion information) advantageous to the player are provided. This will be a benefit period where it will be easier to be granted. However, this SP time period is a period that is set based on the timing result by the timing device 292, and is set regardless of the actual game content, so for example, the SP time period is set during a jackpot game. In some cases, the SP time period may be set during a gaming state (high-speed fluctuation mode) in which it is difficult to perform an out-of-reach performance.

In this way, even if an SP time period is set, the frequency of execution of setting suggestion effects differs depending on the gaming situation during the SP time period, which reduces the player's desire to play. was there.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the performance (the performance at the end of the period performance) is configured to be able to be executed in a performance mode that suggests the set value at the end timing of the SP time period, and the performance mode of the performance at the end of the period performance is configured to be executed. , the gaming state at the time the SP time period is set (the probability state of special symbols, the probability state of normal symbols, the background mode, the gaming state specified by whether or not a jackpot game is being played) and the end of the SP time period. It is configured to be determined based on the gaming state at the time.

Specifically, during the SP time period, if the game state is such that it is difficult to execute the setting suggestion performance based on the variable performance, it will be easier for the period performance to end than if the game state is such that it is easier to execute the setting suggestion performance based on the variable performance. The configuration is such that setting suggestion performance is easily executed in a mode (strong suggestion mode) in which setting values are easily predicted during time production. In other words, if a game is executed during the SP time period in a situation where it is difficult to execute the setting suggestion performance, the setting suggestion performance in the strong suggestion mode is likely to be executed at the end timing of the SP time period. With this configuration, information for predicting setting values (setting estimation elements) can be equally provided to players who played games during the SP time period, regardless of their gaming status. Therefore, regardless of the gaming state in which the SP time period is set, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing.

Here, the contents of the termination mode selection table 222cb will be explained with reference to FIG. 197. FIG. 197 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the termination mode selection table 222cb. This end mode selection table 222cb is a data table that is referred to when selecting the suggestion mode of the setting suggestion effect that is executed on the end screen of the SP time period (SP time effect), and is a data table that is referred to when selecting the suggestion mode of the setting suggestion effect that is executed on the end screen of the SP time period (SP time effect). Five levels of suggestion mode (lowest suggestion mode, low suggestion mode, middle suggestion mode, high suggestion mode, highest suggestion mode) according to ease are the gaming state at the start of the SP period and the gaming state at the end of the SP time period. It is specified that the selection is made in accordance with the combination with.

Specifically, if the gaming state at the start of the SP time period is "Normal 1" and the gaming state at the end is "Normal 1", the setting suggestion performance that is executed at the end of the SP time period is suggested. If the mode (setting suggestion mode) is "low suggestion mode" and the gaming state at the start of the SP time period is "Normal 1" and the gaming state at the end is "Normal 2", the SP time period ends. "Low suggestion mode" is the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion performance that is executed at the time, and the gaming state at the start of the SP time period is "Normal 1" and the gaming state at the end is "Time saving/Probability change". In some cases, the "medium suggestion mode" is the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion performance executed at the end of the SP time period, and the gaming state at the start of the SP time period is "normal 1" and at the end If the gaming state is "high-speed fluctuation", "high suggestion mode" is the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion performance executed at the end of the SP time period, and the gaming state at the start of the SP time period is "Normal 1" and the gaming state at the end is "Jackpot", the "high suggestion mode" is the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion performance executed at the end of the SP time period. It stipulates that each of them be selected.

If the gaming state at the start of the SP time period is "Normal 2" and the gaming state at the end is "Normal 1", the suggestion mode of the setting suggestion performance executed at the end of the SP time period (setting suggestion mode ), if the gaming state at the start of the SP time period is "Normal 2" and the gaming state at the end is "Normal 2", the "low suggestion mode" is set to be executed at the end of the SP time period. If the "lowest suggestion mode" is the suggestion mode (set suggestion mode) of the suggestion performance, the gaming status at the start of the SP time period is "Normal 2", and the gaming status at the end is "time saving/probability change", "Medium suggestion mode" is the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion performance executed at the end of the SP time period, and the gaming state at the start of the SP time period is "Normal 2" and the gaming state at the end is " In the case of "high-speed fluctuation", the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion performance executed at the end of the SP time period is "high suggestion mode", and the gaming state at the start of the SP time period is "normal 2". If the gaming state at the end of the game is "Jackpot", "high suggestion mode" is selected as the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion performance executed at the end of the SP time period. It is stipulated in

In addition, if the gaming state at the start of the SP time period is "Time saving/variable" and the gaming state at the end is "Normal 1, Normal 2", the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period. If the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) is "medium suggestion mode", the gaming state at the start of the SP time period is "time saving/probability variable", and the gaming state at the end is "time saving/probability variable", then the SP time The suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion performance that is executed at the end of the period is "high suggestion mode", the gaming state at the start of the SP time period is "time saving / fixed change", and the gaming state at the end is "high speed". If it is "variation", the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion performance executed at the end of the SP time period is "highest suggestion mode", and the gaming state at the start of the SP time period is "time saving / definite change". If the gaming state at the end is "Jackpot", the "highest suggestion mode" is selected as the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion performance executed at the end of the SP time period. It is stipulated in

If the gaming state at the start of the SP time period is "high-speed fluctuation" and the gaming state at the end is "high-speed fluctuation", the suggestion mode of the setting suggestion performance executed at the end of the SP time period (setting suggestion mode ), if the gaming state at the start of the SP time period is "high-speed fluctuation" and the gaming state at the end is "jackpot", the "highest suggestion mode" is set to be executed at the end of the SP time period. If the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the suggestion performance is "highest suggestion mode", the gaming state at the start of the SP time period is "high-speed fluctuation", and the gaming state at the end is "high-speed fluctuation, other than jackpot" In this case, "high suggestion mode" is the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion performance executed at the end of the SP time period, and the gaming state at the start of the SP time period is "during jackpot" and the game at the end of the SP time period is If the status is "Jackpot", "Confirmed notification" is the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion performance executed at the end of the SP time period, and the gaming state at the start of the SP time period is "Jackpot". "Medium" and if the gaming state at the end is "other than jackpot", "high suggestion mode" is selected as the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion performance executed at the end of the SP time period. It is stipulated that the

<About control processing in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199, the content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be explained. The fourth embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that elapsed time confirmation processing 4 (see S2171 in FIG. 198) is executed instead of elapsed time confirmation processing (see S2111 in FIG. 158). However, everything else is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the elapsed time confirmation process 4 (S2171) will be explained with reference to FIG. 198. FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of elapsed time confirmation processing 4 (S2171). This elapsed time confirmation process 4 (S2171) is for setting the display mode of the end screen displayed at the end of the period effect (SP time effect) for the above-mentioned elapsed time confirmation process (see S2111 in FIG. 158). The difference is that the content of the processing is different, but other than that, they are the same. The same processing contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 198, when the elapsed time confirmation process 4 (S2171) is executed, the processes of S3601 to S3607, which are the same as the elapsed time confirmation process described above (see S2111 in FIG. 158), are executed, and the process of S3607 is executed. When finished, the current gaming state is then stored in the gaming state storage area 223ca (S3671), and this processing is ended. In the process of S3671, the current gaming state, that is, the gaming state set at the start timing of the SP period (SP time period) in which the period effect is executed, is the probability state of special symbols and the probability state of normal symbols. In addition to this, a game that includes information indicating the type of background mode being selected (sandy beach stage, deep sea stage), information indicating whether the high-speed fluctuation mode is in progress, and information indicating that a jackpot game is in progress. Status information is stored in the gaming status storage area 223ca. The game state information stored in the game state storage area 223ca is referred to when determining the display mode of the end screen displayed at the end of the period performance.

In addition, in the process of S3604, if it is determined that the current performance period is not the SP period (SP time period) (S3604: No), then it is determined whether the special mode flag 223w is set to on. (S3608), and if it is determined that the special mode flag 223w is not set on (S3608: No), it is determined whether the period presentation flag 223p is set on (S3609).

In the process of S3609, the period presentation flag 223p is set to ON, that is, the current period is the timing at which the SP period (SP time period) has ended and the SP time presentation is being executed. If it is determined that the medium flag 223p remains on (timing to set the end of the period production) (S3609: Yes), then it is determined whether the special symbol variation is being executed. (S3610) If it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S3610: Yes), the process of S3611, which is the same as the elapsed time confirmation process described above (see S2111 in FIG. 158), is executed, and this process ends. . Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the process of S3611, the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation being executed at the end timing of the SP time period (SP period) (the special symbol variation being executed from the end of the SP time period) is A process for determining the performance mode to be executed during the remaining variable time is executed depending on the period until the display is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3610 that the special figure is not changing (S3610: No), then the end screen setting process is executed (S3672), and the period production flag 223p is set to OFF (S3612). , a back image change command is set for switching the background image type of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 from the background image indicating the SP time period to the background image indicating the normal performance period (S3613), and then the above-mentioned The same processes of S3614 and S3615 as the elapsed time confirmation process (see S2111 in FIG. 158) are executed, and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the end screen setting process (S3672) will be explained with reference to FIG. 199. FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the end screen setting process (S3672). This end screen setting process (S3672) is performed in the above-mentioned elapsed time confirmation process 4 (see S2171 in FIG. 198). This is executed when the effect (the effect is stopped and displayed) is established, and the display mode displayed on the end screen of the SP time effect varies depending on the gaming status (playing situation) during the SP time period. Processing for determining the display mode is executed.

When the end screen setting process (S3672) is executed, first, the game status at the time of the start of the period production is stored in the game status storage area 223ca, that is, the game status in S3671 executed in the elapsed time confirmation process 4 (see S2171 in FIG. 198). The game state stored in the process and the current game state are read out (S4401), and each game state read out in the process of S4401 (the game state at the start of the period performance and the game state at the end of the period performance) Based on this, the setting suggestion mode to be displayed on the period effect end screen is determined with reference to the end mode selection table 222cb (S4402).

Then, a display command is set to indicate a display mode corresponding to the determined setting suggestion mode and the current gaming state (S4403), and the present process ends.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is varied by varying the execution frequency of the out-of-reach effect; however, the execution frequency of the out-of-reach effect is not limited to this. The frequency at which the setting suggestion performance is executed when the out-of-reach performance is selected may be configured to be variable without changing.

In this case, a suggestion preview performance is executed to incite the player as to whether or not the setting suggestion performance will be executed during the out-of-reach performance, and whether or not the setting suggestion performance will be executed based on the performance result of the suggestion notice performance. It is preferable to configure the system so that the player is informed of the situation. As a result, even if an out-of-reach performance is executed in which the setting suggestion performance is not executed, the suggestion preview performance is executed, making it possible to make people expect that the setting suggestion performance will be executed until the end. It is possible to create interest in the performance.

Furthermore, when executing the suggestion preview performance, it is preferable to configure the system so that a revival mode in which the out-of-reach performance switches to the hit-in-reach performance can be executed as a result of the performance. For example, as a result of the performance of the out-of-reach performance, After the 3 symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination different from the jackpot winning combination, a suggestion notice performance is executed, and if the first production is executed as the suggestion notice production, the setting suggestion production is executed and the second production is executed. In this case, the setting suggestion effect is not executed and the variation effect ends as it is, and when the third effect is executed, the third symbol that has stopped falling is changed again and the display mode shows that the jackpot has been won. It is preferable to configure the third symbol to be stopped and displayed.

By configuring in this way, when the suggestion preview performance is executed, it is possible to create expectations not only for the presence or absence of the setting suggestion performance, but also for winning a jackpot, thereby increasing the performance effect.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 to 202. The fifth embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that the contents of various processes (various startup processes) executed when power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 are different. Other than that, they are the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

In the first embodiment described above, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, various control devices such as the main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114 are activated and executed by the main control device 110. The start-up command set in the start-up process (see FIG. 135) is output to the audio lamp control device 113, and when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the startup command, the startup command is output to the audio lamp control device 113. The configuration was configured so that the startup process would start immediately.

In other words, the execution timing of the startup process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 was configured to be the timing at which the startup command was received from the main controller 110, rather than when the power was turned on. As a result, it is possible to have a certain relationship between the execution period of the start-up process of the main control device 110 and the execution period of the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113. If a situation occurs in which the startup process is not executed, it is possible to prevent only the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 from being executed.

Furthermore, unless a startup command output from the main control device 110 is received, the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 cannot proceed. In cases where a non-genuine main control device is installed in a pachinko machine and a fraudulent game is carried out, it is possible to make it difficult to engage in fraudulent gaming by increasing the number of information (commands) required to operate the pachinko machine 10. there were.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the power supply device 115 is configured to supply predetermined power to various control devices all at once. The startup process is configured to be executed when the various control devices receive the predetermined power. In other words, the configuration is such that, based on the timing of power supply from the power supply device 115 to the various control devices, a certain correlation can be given to the execution timing of the start-up processing executed by the various control devices.

With this configuration, the process for outputting the startup command from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 can be omitted, and the control process in the main controller 110 can be simplified. .

Note that from the time the power is turned on until the predetermined power is supplied by the power supply device 115, a startup period is required for the voltage to rise to a predetermined voltage (for example, 5 V in series) and stabilize after the power is turned on. There is. When a predetermined power is supplied, a reset signal is also output (the processing content is reset when the predetermined power is supplied for the first time after startup). As a result, even if a problem occurs in which a small amount of power is output to various control devices during the startup period until the specified power is supplied, and control processing such as startup processing is executed, This problem can be reliably resolved.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, in the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113, it is determined whether a boot completion command has been received from the display control device 114 to indicate that the boot process of the third symbol display device 81 has been completed. If the boot completion command is received during the start-up process, that is, before the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 is completed, the boot of the third symbol display device 81 will be executed. If the process has been completed, the process for setting the operation invalidation period for invalidating the operation on the frame button 22 (processing for setting the operation invalidation timer 223s) is configured to be skipped.

With this configuration, for example, the time taken to change the settings increases the time from when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 until the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 is completed. It is possible to reduce the load on the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in case (when the period becomes longer than the period until the boot processing of the third symbol display device 81 ends).

<About the control process of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment>
Here, with reference to FIG. 200, the contents of the process executed by the MPU 211 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be explained. In the fifth embodiment, processing is performed with some contents of the start-up processing changed from the first embodiment described above, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the start-up process of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 200, when the start-up process is executed, an initial setting process (S951) is executed, and other than that, the same processes (S902 to S917) as in the first embodiment described above are executed.

Here, the process of S951 is different from the above-described initial setting process (S901) in that a process for setting a startup command to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 is not executed. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, information indicating that startup processing of the main control device 110 has been executed is not output to the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, the processing load of the control processing executed by the main control device 110 can be reduced.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 201 and 202, the contents of the process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be explained. The fifth embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a startup process (see FIG. 201) is executed instead of the startup process (see FIG. 140), and the startup process (see FIG. 201) The difference is that a standby process 5 (see S2051 in FIG. 202) is executed instead of the standby process (see S2012 in FIG. 142) executed in . The other processing contents are the same, and the same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 201, when the start-up process is executed, standby process 5 is first executed (S2051), and then the processes of S2002 to S2014, which are the same as the above-mentioned start-up process (see FIG. 140), are executed. , this process ends.

Next, the processing contents of standby processing 5 (S2051) will be explained with reference to FIG. 202. FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of standby processing 5 (S2051). This standby process 5 (S2051) is different from the standby process of the first embodiment described above (see S2012 in FIG. 142) in that a process related to receiving a boot completion command is added, and other than that, it is the same. . The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When standby process 5 (S2051) is executed, first, the same processes as S2071 to S2077 as the standby process of the first embodiment described above (see S2012 in FIG. 142) are executed, and then the output from the display control device 114 is It is determined whether a boot completion command has been received (S2091). In the process of S2091, if it is determined that the boot completion command has been received (S2091: Yes), a display command is set to indicate that the button operation is valid (S2092), and the process moves to the main process. On the other hand, in the process of S2091, if it is determined that the boot completion command has not been received (S2091: No), the process of S2078, which is the same as the standby process of the first embodiment described above (see S2012 in FIG. 142), is executed. Then, move on to main processing.

As explained above, in the fifth embodiment, in the startup process (see FIG. 201) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, a process that can determine that a boot completion command has been received is executed. Therefore, if the boot process of the third symbol display device 81 is completed before the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 is completed, the operation invalidation timer 223s is set. processing can be eliminated. Therefore, the process for starting up the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified. Further, if the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 is completed before the boot process of the third symbol display device 81, the operation invalidation timer 223s is set as in the first embodiment described above. Therefore, it is possible to prohibit the operation on the operation means (frame button 22) from being effectively determined before the boot process of the third symbol display device 81 is completed.

Note that in this embodiment, by setting a value indicating a predetermined period (5 seconds) to the operation invalidation timer 223s, it is prohibited that the operation on the operation means (frame button 22) is determined to be valid. It is configured to set a period for The value set in the operation invalidation timer 223s is configured to be set to a longer period than the period required to complete the boot process of the third symbol display device 81.

With this configuration, control is performed so that the operation on the operating means (frame button 22) is unconditionally disabled until the value set in the operation invalidation timer 223s is updated to 0. The process for starting up the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified.

Note that, without being limited to this configuration, for example, if it is determined that the boot process of the third symbol display device 81 is not completed at the time when the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 is completed, it is possible to indicate the state. The standby flag is set to on, and when it is determined that the boot process of the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the standby flag is set to off, and while the standby flag is set to on, the frame The configuration may be such that operations on the button 22 are disabled. With this configuration, it becomes necessary to add processing to periodically determine the setting status of the standby flag, but it is necessary to add processing for periodically determining the setting status of the standby flag, but it is necessary to add processing for starting up the audio lamp control device 113 and booting processing for the third symbol display device 81. The operation on the frame button 22 is reliably disabled until the end of the operation, and the operation on the frame button 22 is reliably disabled at the timing when the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 and the boot process of the third symbol display device 81 are both completed. Operation can be effectively determined.

In the present embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to determine (specify) whether or not the operation means (frame button 22) is operated and the content of the operation; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, The display control device 114 may be configured to be able to determine whether or not the operation means (frame button 22) is operated and the content of the operation. In this case, when the booting process of the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 may or may not be completed, that is, the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. A first state in which it is possible to effectively determine the operation on the frame button 22 after the operation has been performed, but the start-up processing of all the control devices has not been completed, and a first state in which the start-up processing of all the control devices of the pachinko machine 10 is not completed. The processing content for the operation on the frame button 22 may be varied between the second state where the game is completed and the game can be played normally.

Specifically, during the first state (during a setting change operation), when the frame button 22 is operated, a process for adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, and during the second state (during the gaming state), a process is executed to adjust the volume of the pachinko machine 10. It is preferable that when the frame button 22 is operated, in addition to the process of adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10, the process of selecting a background mode and the process related to variable performance are executed. In this way, by switching the processing content to be executed when the frame button 22 is operated according to the activation status of the pachinko machine 10, it becomes possible to execute only the operation suitable for the activation status.

<About the sixth embodiment>
Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 to 207. In the first and second embodiments described above, when determining whether or not to execute a look-ahead effect, the effect period of the look-ahead effect that may be executed this time is calculated, and the calculated effect period and the SP time period are calculated. It is configured to determine the overlapping relationship, and determine whether or not to perform a look-ahead performance and the performance mode based on the result of the determination. In this case, when an opportunity to perform a look-ahead performance is established, the performance period of the look-ahead performance is calculated in detail and the overlapping relationship with the SP time period is determined, so that the look-ahead performance is executed as much as possible. However, regardless of the timing at which the opportunity to execute the look-ahead effect is established, it is necessary to execute processing to determine the overlap relationship with the SP time period, and the audio There is a problem in that the processing load of the control processing executed by the lamp control device 113 increases.

On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, the clocking period after the power is turned on is configured to be able to be specified based on the time information clocked by the clocking device 292, and the SP time period and the lookahead It is configured to define a prohibition period for prohibiting the execution of the look-ahead performance so that the performance period of the performance does not overlap (it is difficult to do so).

In other words, when entering a period in which the look-ahead performance is prohibited as a time measurement period, the execution of the look-ahead performance is prohibited without determining whether an opportunity to execute the look-ahead performance has been established. In this way, by predefining a period for prohibiting the execution of the look-ahead effect (a look-ahead prohibition period) for the time measurement period, it is possible for the player to understand that the look-ahead effect and the SP time effect may be executed overlappingly. Processing for prohibiting (suppressing) execution of difficult effects can be simplified.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, different look-ahead prohibition periods are defined based on the number of reserved special drawings and the presence or absence of a jackpot win within the reservation. In other words, pre-reading is prohibited until the pre-reading effect is executed, or when a jackpot game is executed during the pre-reading effect, and until the pre-reading effect is executed, or when the jackpot game is not executed during the pre-reading effect. The periods are configured to have different lengths.

In this way, as a look-ahead effect that will (can be) executed in the future, if the period until the look-ahead effect is executed is long, or a performance pattern in which the look-ahead effect period itself is long, and the period until the look-ahead effect is executed. is short, or performance patterns in which the look-ahead performance period itself is short, and by defining the look-ahead prohibition period corresponding to each pattern, it is possible to prevent the look-ahead prohibition period from becoming unnecessarily long. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of execution of the pre-reading effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the look-ahead performance period is set to the first pattern (when the period until the look-ahead performance is executed is long, or the performance pattern where the look-ahead performance period itself is long) depending on whether or not there is a jackpot win. It is configured to be divided into a second pattern (a case where the period until the pre-read effect is executed is short, or an effect pattern in which the pre-read effect period itself is short).

As a result, in situations where the look-ahead effect period is likely to become longer (the period until the look-ahead effect is executed becomes longer) due to the jackpot game period, the long look-ahead prohibited period is referenced, and the jackpot game Short look-ahead periods are referenced in situations where periods are not relevant. In this way, by using the long period of the jackpot game period as a criterion for identifying the look-ahead presentation period, it is possible to prevent the look-ahead prohibition period from becoming unnecessarily long. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of execution of the pre-reading effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, different from the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, the special prize that won this time is The configuration is such that it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect based on the position of the reserved figure (the number of reserved special figures) and the presence or absence of a jackpot win in the reserved special figure that has already been obtained. There is. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress execution of the process of determining whether or not to perform a prefetch effect when the prefetching prohibition period is in progress. The processing load of control processing can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the presence or absence of a jackpot winning (presence or absence of a jackpot game period) is used as an element for specifying the look-ahead prohibition period; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, The type of game (number of rounds) may be used as an element, and information indicating a variation pattern in which a variation time of a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) or more is set as a variation pattern of special symbol variation corresponding to each special symbol reservation. The element may be a determination result as to whether or not a predetermined number (for example, one) or more of stored special figures are reserved. In other words, when a look-ahead effect is executed based on the special map reservation acquired this time, it is possible to specify the corresponding look-ahead prohibition period using information that can roughly specify when the look-ahead effect period will be set. Just configure it.

<About the electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 203 to 205. The sixth embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed, and the rest is the same. Detailed description of the same configurations will be omitted. First, with reference to FIG. 203, the configuration of the ROM 202 included in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 203 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

As shown in FIG. 203, the ROM 202 included in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment includes a production switching table 222fa instead of the production switching table 222b in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that a pre-reading prohibited period selection table 6 table 222fb is provided in place of the pre-reading prohibited period selection table 222d, and the rest is the same. Identical components are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The effect switching table 222fa, like the effect switching table 222b (see FIG. 108) of the first embodiment described above, is referred to when switching the effect period based on the time information (timekeeping information) of the timing device 292. It is a data table. This embodiment is configured to be able to perform different effects depending on the set effect period. The performance switching table 222fa is used to select a performance period for executing the performance (performance mode) performed by the third symbol display device 81, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227. Furthermore, in addition to the performance period, the data table defines a prefetch prohibition period for prohibiting the execution of the process for determining whether or not to execute the prefetch performance (prefetch performance execution determination process (see S2509 in FIG. 207)). be.

This production switching table 222fa is referred to when a command is received to indicate that new winning information (special figure pending) has been obtained, and if it is determined that the pre-reading prohibition period falls, the pre-reading production is executed. The determination process (see S2509 in FIG. 207) is skipped. As a result, it is possible to prevent the prefetch performance execution determination process (see S2509 in FIG. 207) from being executed during the prefetch prohibition period, thereby simplifying the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. can do.

Here, the detailed contents of the production switching 6 table 222fa will be explained with reference to FIG. 204. FIG. 204 is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the production switching 6 table 222fa. As shown in FIG. 204, the effect switching table 222fa is different from the effect switching table 222b (see FIG. 108) in that, in addition to the effect period, the look-ahead prohibition period is defined in multiple types (prohibition levels). There is a difference. This prohibition level is determined by referring to the look-ahead prohibition period selection 6 table 222fb, which will be described later, and is a special level when a command indicating that new winning information (special drawing reservation) has been received is received. The configuration is such that different types are determined depending on the drawing reservation status.

More specifically, as the special figure pending status, the number of acquired special figure pending balls (1 to 8) and the jackpot game during the period until the special symbol change corresponding to the target special figure pending is executed. The prohibition level is determined based on the determination result of whether or not the special drawing reservation other than the special drawing reservation obtained this time includes information indicating a jackpot win. are doing. Then, based on the determined prohibition level and the current elapsed time T (time elapsed since the power was turned on), it is determined whether the read-ahead prohibition period falls, and if it is determined that the read-ahead prohibition period falls, the read-ahead The performance execution determination process (see S2509 in FIG. 207) is skipped.

Here, referring to FIG. 204, the contents stipulated in the production switching 6 table 222fa will be specifically explained. The performance period is defined according to the elapsed time T), and the normal performance period is defined in the range where the elapsed time T is 88 minutes or less.

Then, within the elapsed time T for which the normal performance period is specified, within the range where the elapsed time T is within 83 minutes, that is, within the range where the grace period until the SP time period is set is 7 minutes or more, the jackpot game Even if it is decided to execute a look-ahead performance that includes a period or a look-ahead performance that is executed after the jackpot game ends (even if a long look-ahead performance period is set), the SP time period and the look-ahead performance period cannot overlap. Since it is a range, it is stipulated that there are no prohibitions.

In addition, of the elapsed time T for which the normal performance period is specified, if the elapsed time T is in the range of 83 minutes to 85 minutes and 10 seconds, "Forbidden Level 5" is applied. If the elapsed time T is in the range of 30 seconds, "kinkoku level 4" is set. If the elapsed time T is in the range of 85 minutes 30 seconds to 85 minutes 50 seconds, "kinkoku level 3" is set, and if the elapsed time T is 85 minutes 50 seconds to 86 minutes. A "prohibition level 2" is defined for a range of 10 seconds, and a "prohibition level 1" is defined for a range of elapsed time T of 86 minutes and 10 seconds to 88 minutes.

Then, an SP time preparation period is defined when the elapsed time T is in the range of 88 minutes to 90 minutes, and during the SP time preparation period, "pre-reading prohibited" is defined, and the elapsed time T is in the range of 90 minutes to 93 minutes. The SP time period (for song A) is defined. Hereinafter, similarly to the production switching table 222b (see FIG. 108) of the first embodiment described above, a normal production period, a SP time preparation period, and a SP time period are respectively defined for the elapsed time. Different types of prohibition levels are defined depending on the length of the grace period until the period is set.

The look-ahead prohibition period selection 6 table 222fb is a data table that is referred to when determining the type (prohibition level) of the applicable look-ahead prohibition period, and includes the number of reserved special drawings to be determined (storage position of target reservation). , and information indicating whether or not there is a jackpot during the period (whether or not there is a jackpot in a special map reservation other than the target reservation), and different prohibited levels are defined. In other words, in this look-ahead prohibition period selection 6 table 222fb, the period (period in which the look-ahead effect can be executed) until the special symbol variation corresponding to the target hold is executed (until the look-ahead effect ends) is determined by the number of special figures pending. The game is roughly specified based on the presence or absence of a jackpot game, and it is determined whether or not a look-ahead effect can be executed during the specified period.

Therefore, the larger the value of the target reservation, the more special symbol reservations will be executed until the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the target reservation is executed, and the period during which the look-ahead effect can be executed becomes longer. A type with a long lookahead prohibition period (a high-level prohibition type) is more likely to be determined as the prohibition level. Similarly, if a jackpot game is executed before the special symbol variation corresponding to the target reservation is executed, the period until the special symbol variation corresponding to the target reservation is executed becomes longer (jackpot (after the end of the game), the period during which the pre-reading performance can be executed becomes longer, and therefore a type with a longer pre-reading prohibition period (a prohibited type with a high level) is more likely to be determined as the prohibited level.

On the other hand, the smaller the value of the target reservation, or if there is no information indicating a jackpot win in the special symbol reservation, the period until the special symbol change corresponding to the target reservation is executed becomes shorter, so the prohibited level As a result, a type with a short look-ahead prohibition period (a low-level prohibition type) is more likely to be determined.

Specifically, if the target pending is "1" and there is a jackpot win during the period, "level 5" is stipulated as the prohibition level, and there is no jackpot win during the period. In this case, the prohibition level "Level 1" is specified. In addition, if the target pending is "2" and there is a jackpot win during the period, "Level 5" is stipulated as the prohibition level, and if there is no jackpot win during the period. , a prohibition level "Level 2" is defined. If the target pending is "3" and there is a jackpot win during the period, "Level 5" is stipulated as the prohibition level, and if there is no jackpot win during the period, there is a prohibition. A level "Level 3" is defined. In addition, if the target pending is "4" and there is a jackpot win during the period, "Level 5" is stipulated as the prohibition level, and if there is no jackpot win during the period. , a prohibition level "Level 4" is defined.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 206 and 207. In the sixth embodiment, in contrast to the first embodiment described above, instead of the prefetch effect execution determination process (see S2306 in FIG. 146), a prefetch effect execution determination process 6 (see S2376 in FIG. 206) is performed when a winning command is received. The difference is that winning command reception processing 6 (see S2280 in FIG. 207) is executed instead of the process (see S2210 in FIG. 147), but other than that, the process is the same. The same processing contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 206, the contents of the prefetch effect execution determination process 6 (S2376) will be explained. FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the pre-read effect execution determination process 6 (S2376). In this look-ahead effect execution decision processing 6 (S2376), the information stored in the winning information storage area 223f (reservedly stored) is read out, and the number of pieces of stored information (the number of reserved special drawing balls) and the jackpot The system is configured to execute a process for identifying the presence or absence of information indicating winning, and based on the process result, execute a process for determining whether the current period is a pre-reading prohibited period.

In other words, as in the first and second embodiments described above, the performance mode (performance period) of the look-ahead performance that can actually be executed is determined, and the performance period of the determined look-ahead performance overlaps with the SP time period. Rather than determining whether or not the winning information storage area 223f will be played, the period in which the look-ahead effect can be executed is roughly specified, and the prohibition level corresponding to the specified period is determined. Based on the elapsed time T, it is determined whether the prohibited level is at a specified timing. Then, if the determined prohibition level is a specified timing, the process of determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect and the process of determining the production mode of the pre-read effect are skipped, and the determined prohibited level is specified. If the timing is such that the pre-reading effect is not executed, the process of determining whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect and the process of determining the presentation mode of the pre-reading effect are configured to be executable.

By configuring in this way, it is no longer necessary to execute in advance the process of determining the performance mode of the look-ahead performance that may not be executed. The processing load for determining the

When this look-ahead effect execution determination process 6 (S2376) is executed, first, the information stored in the winning information storage area 223f (information indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, information indicating the fluctuation pattern, The information corresponding to the counter value of the symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (information for indicating the number of reserved balls) is read out (S2401), and then based on the process of S2401 Then, the information corresponding to the winning information command received before the winning information command received this time, that is, the information corresponding to the winning information command where the special symbol change is executed before the winning information command received this time, is a jackpot. It is extracted whether information indicating winning is included (S2402).

That is, in the process of S2402, there is a possibility that the jackpot game will be executed before the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information command that is the target of the current pre-read effect execution determination process 6 (S2376) is executed. The information (pre-read jackpot information) that is referred to when determining whether or not the winning result is extracted is extracted.

When the process of S2402 is finished, the current Kinsoku level (No Kinsoku, Kinsoku (S2471), refers to the production switching 6 table 223fa, identifies the current Kinsoku level (S2472), and determines that the Kinsoku level determined in the process of S2471 is It is determined whether the level is stipulated as a prohibited level (S2473), and if it is determined that it is stipulated (S2473), a pre-reading effect can be executed for the special drawing reservation corresponding to the winning information command received this time. Since this is impossible (difficult), the process of determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect (S2475) and the process of determining the performance mode of the look-ahead effect (S2476 to S2479) are skipped and the process is continued directly. finish.

On the other hand, in the process of S2473, if it is determined that the prohibition level determined in the process of S2471 is not defined as the prohibition level at the present time (S2473: No), the special figure corresponding to the winning information command received this time It is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect for the hold (S2474), and if it is determined that the pre-reading effect is not to be executed (S2474: No), this process is directly ended. In addition, if it is determined that the pre-read effect is to be executed, that is, if it is determined that the received winning information command includes information for executing the pre-read effect (S2474: Yes), the pre-read effect to be executed this time is , determines whether it is a pre-reading effect (pre-reading effect using multiple variable effects) that uses a variable effect (a variable effect executed in response to a special symbol change) (S2475), and performs a pre-reading effect using a variable effect (S2475). If it is determined that it is (S2475: Yes), the continuous notice 223t is set to ON (S2476), the content of the determined pre-reading effect is stored in the effect state storage area 223h (S2478), and the target of the pre-reading effect is The number of times (number of fluctuations) until the special symbol fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation) corresponding to the winning information is set in the continuous notice counter 223u (S2479), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S2475, if it is determined that the prefetch effect is not executed in the variable effect (the pending prefetch effect is executed) (S2475; No), a display command is issued to change the display mode of the target pending symbol. is set, and this process ends.

Here, the presentation mode of the above-mentioned look-ahead presentation will be explained. Specifically, the look-ahead performance was executed in the first variation performance (first variation performance) as a look-ahead performance using the performance period of the fluctuation performance corresponding to three consecutive special symbol fluctuations. A look-ahead display mode to indicate (for example, a display mode that displays a countdown number each time a new variation effect (special symbol variation) is executed, or a display mode that displays a countdown number every time a new variation effect (special symbol variation) is executed) A display mode that displays a variable display mode in which the color is changed, and a display mode that shows the player that a look-ahead presentation is in progress (a display mode that stops and displays the third symbol at the so-called chance eye) is displayed. The player is then notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the pre-read performance has been executed. Then, in the next fluctuating performance (second variable performance), the prefetching effect is continued by variable display or continuous display of the prefetching display mode to indicate that the prefetching effect has been executed. To notify players in an easy-to-understand manner. Finally, in the final variation production (third variation production), it is confirmed that this variation production is a variation production that is the target of a look-ahead production (a special symbol variation that is an element that determines the content of the look-ahead production). A prefetch effect is executed to display a prefetch result display mode for displaying the prefetch results.

In this way, by executing a look-ahead effect using a variable effect, it is made difficult for the player to understand how long the look-ahead effect will continue, and the effect results for each variable effect executed during the look-ahead effect are made difficult for the player to understand. is displayed, so when the result of a fluctuating performance is displayed, the player expects that the current fluctuating performance is a fluctuating performance that indicates the look-ahead result, and that the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol is a jackpot. At the same time, it is possible to make the user expect that the look-ahead performance will continue, thereby increasing the performance effect.

Note that the timing for displaying the display mode for informing the player that it is a variable performance during the look-ahead performance may be the start timing or the end timing of the target variable performance. In other words, any time between the start of a fluctuating performance and the start of the next fluctuating performance is acceptable as long as it allows the player to understand that the fluctuating performance is a pre-reading performance. .

In addition, the period for displaying the display mode to clearly notify the player that it is a variable performance during a look-ahead performance may be set for the entire period in which the look-ahead performance is executed, or may be set at a specific timing. (For example, the configuration may be such that only the timing at which the third symbol starts to fluctuate or the timing at which the fluctuation stops) is displayed. Furthermore, the display may be configured to span a plurality of variable effects.

In this way, by varying the timing and display period for displaying the display format to inform players in an easy-to-understand manner that this is a fluctuating performance that is occurring during a look-ahead performance, players can be informed of the fluctuation that the look-ahead performance has started. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to understand the performance or the fluctuating performance where the pre-reading performance has ended, and it is possible to provide a surprising performance, for example, a pre-reading performance that makes people think that the pre-reading performance has ended but is actually continuing. It becomes possible. Therefore, the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the look-ahead performance using variable effects is configured so that the higher the number of variable effects (the number of special symbol changes) that are subject to the look-ahead effect, the higher the expectation of winning a jackpot. ing. With this configuration, the player will be able to pay close attention to the number of variable effects (the number of special symbol variations) executed during the look-ahead effect. Also, by making it difficult for the player to grasp the variable performance after the pre-read performance has been completed, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, as a prefetch effect executed without using a variable effect, a pending prefetch effect (see FIG. 86) using a pending symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. As shown in FIG. 86, this pending look-ahead performance is carried out with the player being informed of the pending symbol (special symbol variation) that is the target of the look-ahead performance (the result of the look-ahead performance is displayed) in an easy-to-understand manner. By varying the display mode of the symbols, a performance that increases the expectation that the result of the pre-reading performance is a jackpot is executed. In other words, in the look-ahead performance using the above-mentioned fluctuation performance, by making it difficult for the player to understand which pending symbol (special symbol fluctuation) is the target of the look-ahead performance, the look-ahead performance continues every time the fluctuation performance ends. On the other hand, with the pending look-ahead effect, the display mode of the pending symbol becomes a jackpot by the time the special symbol change corresponding to the pending symbol that is the target of the look-ahead effect is executed. This enhances the presentation effect by making people expect the display to be displayed in a display mode with a high expectation of winning.

In this way, by configuring the performance effect to be enhanced by different factors depending on the mode of the look-ahead performance to be executed, it is possible to prevent the performance to be executed from becoming monotonous and the player to quickly get bored with the game. Can be suppressed. In addition, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to perform different types of pre-read effects as described above, information regarding the forms of pre-read effects executed in the past (number of executions, execution details, effect results (appropriate judgment results)) It may be configured such that a storage means that can temporarily store the information is provided, and the mode of the newly executed prefetch effect is determined based on the information stored in the storage means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the aspect of the look-ahead performance from being biased and the contents of the performance to be executed from becoming monotonous.

Next, with reference to FIG. 207, the processing contents of winning command reception processing 6 (S2280) will be explained. FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of winning command reception processing 6 (S2280). As shown in FIG. 207, the winning command receiving process 6 (S2280) in this embodiment is different from the winning command receiving process (see S2210 in FIG. 147) in the first embodiment described above, to the pre-read effect execution determining process 6. (See S2276 in FIG. 206) is different in that it is configured to be executable.

When the winning command reception process 6 (S2280) is executed, first, the same processes of S2501 to S2506 as the winning command reception process of the first embodiment (see S2210 in FIG. 147) are executed, and then the prefetch effect is executed. Execution determination processing 6 (S2509 (S2376)) is executed, and this processing ends.

Note that the processes related to S2510 to S2515 executed in the winning command reception process (see S2210 in FIG. 147) of the first embodiment described above are the pre-read effect execution determination process 6 (see S2210 in FIG. 206) in the sixth embodiment. (See S2376), so it is omitted in this figure. In addition, in the first embodiment described above, the pre-read effect execution determination process (S2306 in FIG. 146) is configured to be executable based on the determination result at two timings, and the sixth embodiment also uses the same two timings. Although the pre-read effect execution determination process 6 (S2376 in FIG. 206) is configured to be executable based on the determination result in , the processing content on the side where the execution timing (the trigger required for execution) is the same A detailed explanation of (the processing contents shown in FIG. 145) is omitted.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 208 to 216. The seventh embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that the content of the pseudo fluctuation performance (see FIG. 15(a)) executed during the high-speed fluctuation mode is different; are the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

In the first embodiment described above, when the high-speed fluctuation mode is set, that is, by switching the type of the fluctuation pattern table that is referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation, fluctuations with a relatively short fluctuation time can be achieved. If a high-speed fluctuation pattern table from which a pattern is likely to be selected is referenced, and the player is notified that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set, the system will notify the player that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set. In order to solve the problem that special symbol fluctuations may be executed with fluctuation patterns other than high-speed fluctuations, and performances that feel strange to players are executed, we have added support for high-speed fluctuation mode. In addition to setting a high-speed fluctuation pattern table, the player is informed that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set on the condition that the fluctuation pattern actually determined is a high-speed fluctuation.

In other words, when the special symbol fluctuation actually changes at high speed, it is configured to notify the player that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set, and the content notified to the player matches the actual game content. It is configured to provide games that are easy to understand for players.

Furthermore, in a state where the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation is determined by referring to the high-speed fluctuation pattern table, an out-of-order fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 6 seconds is determined as a fluctuation pattern other than the high-speed fluctuation (fluctuation time 1.5 seconds). In this case, the system is configured to display the words "Preparing for high-speed fluctuation" in order to notify the player that the high-speed fluctuation mode will soon arrive, without notifying the player that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set. (See Figure 94(b)). In other words, internally, the system was configured to delay the timing at which the player is notified that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set, even though the game has entered a gaming state where the high-speed fluctuation pattern table is referenced. . The system is configured to delay the notification timing for notifying the player that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set until a high-speed fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds) is determined.

In addition, if a winning variation pattern with a variation time of 12 seconds is determined as a variation pattern other than high-speed variation (variation time 1.5 seconds), an announcement will be made to notify that the high-speed variation mode has been set as described above. If a process that delays the timing is executed, a jackpot game will start without the player knowing that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set, even though the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set. , as a notification mode to inform the player that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set, a notification mode that can give benefits to the player (setting suggestion mode, effect video with added value that cannot be seen elsewhere, etc.) ) In the pachinko machine 10 that is configured to be able to set the following, the player loses the opportunity to win the bonus due to winning a jackpot even though he or she could have won the bonus, and the player's desire to play decreases. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the first embodiment described above, the result of the special symbol lottery executed immediately after the high-speed fluctuation mode is set is a jackpot win, and the fluctuation pattern other than the high-speed fluctuation (for example, the fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 12 seconds) ) is determined, a notification mode is set to indicate that the high-speed fluctuation mode is set at the timing when the jackpot fluctuation (12 seconds fluctuation) starts, and during that 12 second fluctuation period, It was configured to execute a pseudo fluctuation effect (see FIG. 94). In other words, during one special symbol variation period, it was configured to be able to perform a variation effect as if a plurality of special symbol variations had been executed.

Here, in the pseudo fluctuation performance (12 seconds) executed in the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. It is configured to execute a pseudo fluctuation effect in which a pseudo winning variation effect of 1.5 seconds is executed 4 times, and the player receives 6. It was possible to make it seem as if the second special symbol fluctuation (win fluctuation) was executed once, but in reality, the fluctuation occurred multiple times (total of 5 times) during one special symbol fluctuation period. Since the effect is only executed, as shown in FIG. 15(a), the number of reserved symbols displayed to indicate the number of reserved special symbols does not change, and the player knows that a pseudo-variable effect will be executed. There was a problem with being exposed.

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, when a pseudo fluctuation performance is executed as a fluctuation performance, the display area of the reserved symbols for indicating the number of reserved special symbols is switched, and the reserved symbols before switching are displayed. The display area is configured to display a pseudo-pending symbol for effect. The number of pseudo-reserved symbols displayed is configured to be variable (reduced) each time the pseudo-fluctuation effect is executed. With this configuration, it becomes possible to execute a performance in which the number of pseudo pending symbols decreases by one each time a pseudo fluctuation performance is executed, and it is possible to perform a performance in which the number of pseudo pending symbols decreases by one each time a pseudo fluctuation performance is executed, and it is possible to notify the player that the fluctuation performance being executed is a pseudo fluctuation performance. It is possible to make it difficult to tell whether or not there is one.

In addition, since the actual number of reserved special drawings is displayed in a separate display area, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused because the actual number of reserved special drawings suddenly disappears. can.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the number of displayed pseudo-reserved symbols is reduced by executing the pseudo-fluctuation effect and there is an empty space in the display area for displaying the pseudo-reserved symbols, the empty display area is used to set the display area. It is configured to be able to carry out suggestive performances. A detailed explanation will be given later, but if a winning information command containing winning information of a new special symbol is received while an empty display area is available, a new pseudo-pending symbol will be displayed in the empty display area, The configuration is such that the setting suggestion performance is executed using the display mode of the new pseudo-reserved symbol.

In other words, if a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 during a period in which the display number of pseudo-reserved symbols is varied depending on the number of times the pseudo-variable display is executed. The system is configured to perform an effect in which the number of displayed pseudo-pending symbols increases. With this configuration, the variable situation of the pseudo performance performed using the pseudo fluctuation performance and the pseudo pending symbol can be changed to the variable situation of the performance performed using the actual fluctuation performance and the suspended symbol. It is possible to make the approximation easier, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the fluctuating performance being executed is a pseudo fluctuating performance or not.

In addition, a winning information command that includes winning information of a new special symbol is issued when a pseudo fluctuation effect is executed when the number of reserved special symbols has reached the upper limit, and an empty display area is generated during the pseudo fluctuation effect. In other words, if the winning information command received this time is winning information (overflow winning information) that cannot be stored as a new special drawing reservation, the winning information command that can be stored as a new special drawing reservation (overflow winning information) The configuration is such that a display mode corresponding to a mode that makes it easy for the player to predict the set value (strong suggestion mode) is more likely to be displayed than a case where the winning information is (normal winning information).

With this configuration, even if the actual number of reserved special drawings has reached the upper limit, the player is motivated to enter the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. This allows the player to play a game in which the ball enters the ball, thereby improving the performance of the game.

<About the content of the performance executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 208 and 209, a pseudo fluctuation performance executed during the high-speed fluctuation mode will be described as a characteristic performance content among various performances executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. Explain the content of the performance. Note that the notification mode for notifying that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set, the conditions for executing the pseudo-fluctuation performance during the high-speed fluctuation mode, and the basic content of the pseudo-fluctuation performance are as described in the first implementation described above. Since it is the same as the form, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 208(a), the display contents during the first pseudo variation effect (1.5 seconds off pseudo variation) among the pseudo variation effects executed during the high speed variation mode will be described. FIG. 208(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the first pseudo-fluctuation effect among the pseudo-variation effects executed during the high-speed variation mode. As shown in FIG. 208(a), the display screen displayed during the main performance is different from the display screen displayed during the pseudo fluctuation performance in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 94(a)). The difference is that the display content of the sub-display area Ds has been changed, and the display content of a partial area of the main display area Dm has been changed, and other than that, they are the same. The same display contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 208(a), when the pseudo fluctuation performance is executed, instead of the display of the reserved symbol for indicating the number of reserved special symbols that had been displayed in the sub display area Ds, the pseudo reserved symbol gm0 for the performance is displayed. ~gm4 is displayed. Then, as a guidance mode indicating that the high-speed variation mode has been set, the character J0 is displayed as if making a comment "Speed UP".

Further, a display area HR2 is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, and a value of "4" is displayed as a reservation number display mode for indicating the actual number of reserved special symbols. In other words, the diagram shown in FIG. 208(a) shows a state in which the number of reserved special symbols is four.

Then, from the state shown in FIG. 208(a) (the state in which the first pseudo-variation effect has been completed), when the second pseudo-variation effect (1.5 seconds off variation) is executed, the state shown in FIG. 208(b) The display screen shown in is displayed. FIG. 208(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the second pseudo-fluctuation effect among the pseudo-variation effects executed during the high-speed variation mode.

As shown in FIG. 208(b), when a new (second) pseudo fluctuation effect is executed, the pseudo pending symbol displayed in the sub display area Ds is displayed in a sliding manner. As a result, while the first pseudo-variation effect was being executed, the first pseudo-reserved symbol gm0 was displayed on the running symbol pedestal m0, but now it is compatible with the new (second) pseudo-variation effect. The second pseudo pending symbol gm1 is displayed on the running symbol pedestal m0. Then, the third pseudo-retention symbol gm2 to the fifth pseudo-retention symbol gm4 are also slide-displayed in order, and an empty display area is generated on the fourth reservation symbol pedestal m4.

Then, a flag icon with the words "special symbol display zone" is displayed as a notification mode to indicate that the empty display area generated on the fourth reserved symbol pedestal m4 will be the execution area for the setting suggestion effect, A display mode is displayed in which the character J0 appears to be making a comment of "zone appearance". It should be noted that the detailed presentation regarding the special symbol display zone is the same as that of the third embodiment (see FIG. 186) described above, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. Note that the state shown in FIG. 208(b) is a state in which the special symbol variation being executed in the state shown in FIG. 208(a) continues to fluctuate. The number of reserved special drawings displayed in the display area HR2 remains "4".

In the state shown in FIG. 208(b), when the player enters the ball into the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, a new pseudo-reserved symbol appears in the special symbol display zone, indicating the setting. It is displayed in a display mode including a mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 209, the contents of the pending symbol display during the high-speed fluctuation mode will be explained. FIG. 209(a) is a diagram showing the transition status of the game mode (gaming status) of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 209(b) is a diagram showing the transition status of the number of special symbol fluctuations. 209(c) is a diagram showing an overview of the performance executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 209(d) is a diagram showing the transition of the number of reserved balls of special symbols (number of reserved special symbols) FIG. 209(e) is a diagram showing the transition status of the display mode of the small display area (hold display area) Ds1 of the sub display area Ds on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. 209(f) is a diagram showing the display mode of the display area (switchable display area) HR2 of the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Note that the flow of transition from variable probability mode to high-speed variable mode is the same as in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 95), so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Until the high-speed fluctuation mode is set, as shown in FIG. 209(e), the number of pending symbols corresponding to the number of reserved special symbols is displayed in the pending display area Ds1. Even when the high-speed fluctuation mode is set, if the determined special figure fluctuation time is 1.5 seconds (high-speed fluctuation), the number of reservations corresponding to the number of reserved special symbols is displayed in the reservation display area Ds1. The symbol is displayed continuously (a special symbol pending display period is set).

On the other hand, if a non-high-speed fluctuation (a jackpot fluctuation of 12 seconds in the figure) is set while the high-speed fluctuation mode is set, a pseudo fluctuation effect is executed, and a pseudo-retention symbol is displayed in the reservation display area Ds1. is displayed, and the number of reserved special drawings is displayed in the switching display area HR2.

As shown in FIG. 209(e), when the pseudo pending symbols are displayed, the display number is subtracted and displayed each time the pseudo fluctuation effect is executed. In addition, since the pseudo fluctuation performance is executed 5 times during the fluctuation period of the 82nd special symbol fluctuation (12 seconds jackpot fluctuation), as shown in Figure 209 (d), the number of special symbols pending during the pseudo fluctuation performance is not displayed as a subtraction.

In this state, when a new winning (starting winning of special symbols) occurs, the number of reserved special symbols is added and displayed, and the pseudo reserved symbols are also added and displayed. Then, when the pseudo pending symbols are added and displayed, a new pseudo pending symbol is displayed in the special symbol display zone shown in FIG. 208(b), so the setting suggestion performance is executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 209, in this embodiment, the design of special figure reservation or pseudo reservation is always displayed in the reservation display area Ds1. Therefore, when displaying the pseudo-reserved symbols, the player does not feel uncomfortable. In addition, in order to make it difficult for the player to understand that the pseudo fluctuation effect is being executed, the reservation display area Ds1 is hidden when the pseudo fluctuation effect is executed (whether or not the number of reserved special drawings is displayed subtracted). Even when compared to the case where the special symbol reserved symbol is not displayed to make it difficult for the player to recognize the special symbol, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 209(e), the initial display mode when the pseudo-retention symbol is displayed corresponds to the number of special symbols reserved that was displayed in the immediately preceding reservation display area Ds1. It is configured to set the display mode. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when switching the symbols to be displayed.

<About the electrical configuration in the seventh embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the seventh embodiment will be explained. The seventh embodiment differs from the electrical configuration in the third embodiment described above in that a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed, and the rest is the same. . Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

FIG. 210 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 210, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment is different from the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 187(b)). ), the difference is that a pseudo-hold display flag 223ga and a pseudo-free space storage area 223gb are newly provided, and the rest is the same. Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The pseudo pending display flag 223ga is a flag for indicating that the pseudo pending symbol gm is displayed in accordance with the execution of the pseudo fluctuation performance, and is set on when displaying the pseudo pending symbol gm. Then, it is referred to when determining whether a pseudo effect using the pseudo pending symbol gm is being executed, and indicates that the special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed while the pseudo pending display flag 223ga is set to on. Set to off when a stop command is received.

The pseudo-free area storage area 223gb stores information indicating that the pseudo-reserved symbol gm slides (shifts) and a free display area is created in a state where a pseudo effect using the pseudo-reserved symbol gm is executed. In the storage area, the number of free display areas, that is, the number of new pseudo-reserved symbols gm that can be additionally displayed is stored.

The information stored in this pseudo free area storage area 223gb is stored in the case where a new free display area occurs, that is, when the pseudo reserved symbol gm slides (shifts) in response to the execution of the pseudo fluctuation effect. It is updated in accordance with the number of empty display areas that have occurred, and is updated when a new pseudo-pending symbol is displayed.

<About control processing content in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 211 to 216, the content of control processing in the seventh embodiment will be explained. The seventh embodiment differs from the third embodiment in part of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the other control processing is the same. . The content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment is the winning command reception process 3 (see S2260 in FIG. 191), which is different from the third embodiment described above. The reception process 7 (see S22690 in FIG. 211) is replaced with the stop process (see S2214 in FIG. 150), and the stop process 7 (see S2294 in FIG. 212) is replaced with the time-saving/probability change effect setting process (see S3102 in FIG. 154). In place of this, the time-saving/probability change effect setting process 7 (see S3192 in FIG. 214) is executed, and in place of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 3 (see S2160 in FIG. 194), the liquid crystal effect execution management process 7 (see S2190 in FIG. 215) is executed. , are different in terms of execution, but are otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 211, the processing contents of winning command reception processing 7 (S2290) will be explained. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of winning command reception processing 7 (S2290). This winning command receiving process 7 (S2290) is performed when it is determined that the period presentation flag 223p is set to ON in contrast to the winning command receiving process 3 of the third embodiment (see S2260 in FIG. 191). The difference is that the content of the processing executed when (S2502: Yes) is different, but other than that they are the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When winning command reception processing 7 (S2290) is executed, first, winning information indicated by the received command is stored (set) in the winning information storage area 223f (S2501), and it is determined whether the period production flag 223p is on or not. That is, it is determined whether SP time performance is currently being performed (S2502). If it is determined that the period performance flag 223p is not set to on (set to off) (S2502: No), the winning command reception process 3 of the third embodiment described above (S2260 in FIG. 191) The same processes as in S2503 to S2512 and S2560 are executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2502, if it is determined that the period presentation flag 223p is on (S2502: Yes), then it is determined whether the current period is changing at a high speed (S2591), and whether the current period is changing at a high speed is determined. If it is determined that (S2591: Yes), a winning performance setting process during high-speed display is executed to set the performance mode when a winning command is received during high-speed fluctuation (S2592), and this process ends. In the process of S2591, if it is determined that the current state is not high-speed fluctuation (S2591: No), the process of S2592 is skipped and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 212, the contents of the winning effect setting process during high-speed display (S2592) will be explained. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the winning effect setting process during high-speed display (S2592). This high-speed display winning effect setting process (S2592) is a winning command receiving process 7 (see S2290 in FIG. 211) that executes the winning command during high-speed fluctuation (during special symbol fluctuation in the state where the high-speed fluctuation mode is set). This is the process that is executed when it is determined that the message has been received.

In this high-speed display winning performance setting process (S2592), a process for setting a performance that displays a pseudo pending symbol in a pseudo empty area is executed. Here, when displaying a normal pending symbol, in the pending ball number command processing (see S2208 in FIG. 145) that is executed when the pending ball number command output from the main controller 110 is received, Extract the number of reserved balls included in the number of balls command, and update the value of the special symbol reserved pitch number counter (special symbol 1 reserved pitch number counter 223a or special symbol 2 reserved pitch number counter 223b) to the extracted number of reserved balls (S2301 in FIG. 145), a process is executed to display the reserved symbol in the small display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds so as to correspond to the updated value, but the pseudo reserved symbol has an increased number of special symbol reserved balls. The displayed number is not only displayed when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640, but the number of reserved balls on the special drawing does not increase (in the case of overflow winning). Since the configuration is such that the winning information command can be increased, it is executed when a winning information command output from the main control device 110 is received.

It should be noted that, without being limited to the configuration of this embodiment, it may be configured such that the number of pseudo pending symbols displayed increases only when a pending ball number command is received, similar to the normal pending symbol display. It may be configured such that when the user performs a specific operation on the frame button 22, the number of pseudo pending symbols displayed increases. In other words, the pseudo-retention symbol is not a display format to indicate the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, but is a display format that is subtracted according to the number of executions of the pseudo-variation effect, so each time a new pseudo-variation effect is executed. The display number may be varied (subtracted) based on other requirements, and the display number may be varied (added) based on other requirements.

When the high-speed display winning effect setting process (S2592) is executed, it is first determined whether the pseudo-pending display flag 223ga is set to on (S4501), and if it is determined that it is set to on, ( S4501: Yes), next, the winning information command received this time is used to enter the ball entrances (first ball entrance 64, second ball entrance 640, right second ball entrance, It is determined whether it is a winning information command set based on the ball entering the ball entrance 640r (S4502), and if it is determined that it is a special map winning (S4502: Yes), a pseudo empty area is stored. Based on the information stored in the area 223gb, it is determined whether there is a pseudo free area (S4503).

In the process of S4503, if it is determined that there is a pseudo free space (S4503: Yes), it is determined whether the special map prize received this time is an overflow prize (S4504), and if it is determined that it is an overflow prize ( S4504: Yes), a display mode corresponding to a suggestion mode in which the player can easily predict the setting value (high suggestion mode) is determined as a setting suggestion effect to be executed for the pseudo free area (S4505), and then, the process of S4505 is performed. The information on the pseudo free area stored in the pseudo free area storage area 223gb is updated in correspondence with the pseudo free area in which the setting suggestion effect is performed (S4507), and the present process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4504, if it is determined that it is not an overflow winning (S4504: No), the setting suggestion effect executed on the pseudo empty area is a suggestion mode in which it is difficult for the player to predict the setting value (low suggestion mode). (S4506), and then, in the process of S4505, information on the pseudo free area stored in the pseudo free area storage area 223gb is determined in correspondence with the pseudo free area in which the setting suggestion effect is executed. is updated (S4507), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 213, the processing contents of stop processing 7 (S2294) will be explained. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of stop processing 7 (S2294). This stop process 7 (S2294) is different from the above-described stop process (see S2214 in FIG. 150) in that a process for when the pseudo-hold display flag 223ga is set to on is added; are the same. The same content will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 213, for convenience of explanation, the processes in S2801 to S2804 executed in the stop process (see S2214 in FIG. 150) are shown replaced with the process in S2894, but the contents of the process actually executed are They are the same, and their explanation will be omitted.

When stop processing 7 (S2294) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pseudo hold display flag 223ga is set to on (S2891), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S2891: Yes). , sets the pseudo pending display flag 223ga to OFF (S2892), and clears (erases) the information stored in the pseudo free space storage area 223gb (S2893). Thereafter, the process of SP time period 2805 to S2813, which is the same as the stop process described above (see S2214 in FIG. 150), is executed, other processes are executed (S2894), and the stop display of the corresponding third symbol is set (S2814). ), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2891, if it is determined that the pseudo hold display flag 223ga is not set to ON (S2891: No), the process of S2892 and S2893 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2805.

Next, with reference to FIG. 214, the processing contents of time-saving/probability-changing effect setting processing 7 (S3192) will be explained. FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving/probability-changing effect setting process 7 (S3192). This time-saving/probability variable performance setting process 7 (S3192) is different from the time-saving/probability-variable performance setting process (see S3102 in FIG. 154) of the first embodiment described above, in which a performance mode corresponding to the pseudo-variable performance is determined. The difference is that a process for determining the performance mode for displaying the pseudo-reserved symbol in the case where the pseudo-reserved symbol is displayed is added, but other than that, the other features are the same. Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the time-saving/probability-changing effect setting process 7 (S3192) is executed, the same processes of S3201 to S3206 as the time-saving/probability-changing effect setting process (see S3102 in FIG. 154) of the first embodiment described above are executed. Then, when the process of S3206 is completed, that is, a process for determining a production mode that is a pseudo variation production for a variation pattern with a variation time of 12 seconds (non-high-speed variation pattern) in the high-speed variation mode (S3206) After finishing, next, the performance mode for displaying the pseudo pending symbol is determined (S3291), the pseudo pending display flag 223ga is set on (S3292), and the process moves to S3205.

In the process of S3291, the display area of the reserved symbol for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is switched to the display area exclusively for the pseudo fluctuation performance (see display area HR2 in FIG. 208(a)), and the display mode of the reserved symbol is changed. The display mode for switching to the display mode dedicated to the pseudo-fluctuation performance (the display mode indicated by the number displayed in the display area HR2 in FIG. 208(a)) and the display area where the pending symbols were displayed before switching ( The performance mode for displaying the pseudo pending symbol in the sub-display area Ds) of FIG. 208(a) is determined. In this way, by configuring the performance mode of the pseudo-reserved symbol display to be determined in conjunction with the process of determining the performance mode of the pseudo-fluctuation effect, the execution timing of the pseudo-variation effect and the execution timing of the pseudo-retention symbol display can be adjusted. Since the and can be synchronized, it is possible to perform a performance that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, when a pseudo fluctuation performance and a performance using pseudo pending symbols are executed, the background image displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to a dedicated background image, and the pseudo pending symbols It is preferable to configure the display mode to be different from the display mode for normal reserved symbols, and to display it in a display mode corresponding to a dedicated background image.

Next, with reference to FIG. 215, the contents of the liquid crystal performance execution management process 7 (S2190) will be explained. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of liquid crystal performance execution management processing 7 (S2190). This liquid crystal performance execution management process 7 (S2190) is performed in a state in which the pseudo hold display flag 223ga is set to on in contrast to the liquid crystal performance execution management process 3 (see S2160 in FIG. 194) of the third embodiment described above. The difference is that the processing executed in is added, but other than that, they are the same. Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the liquid crystal presentation execution management process 7 (S2190) is executed, first, the same processes from S4301 to S4312 as the liquid crystal presentation execution management process 3 (see S2160 in FIG. 194) of the third embodiment described above are executed, and then , determines whether the pseudo pending display flag 223ga is set to on (S4391), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S4391; Yes), the production content in the state where the pseudo pending symbol is displayed. A pseudo-hold effect setting process for determining is executed (S4392), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4391, if it is determined that the pseudo hold display flag 223ga is not set to ON (S4391: No), the process of S4392 is skipped and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 216, the processing contents of the pseudo hold effect setting process (S4392) executed in the liquid crystal effect execution management process 7 (S2190 in FIG. 215) will be explained. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the pseudo hold effect setting process (S4392). In this pseudo-hold effect setting process (S4392), a process for switching the effect mode of various effects being executed in accordance with the elapsed time is executed.

When the pseudo suspension effect setting process (S4392) is executed, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the pseudo fluctuation (pseudo fluctuation effect) (S4601), and if it is determined that it is the start timing (S4602), a new pseudo Since this is the timing when the fluctuation effect is executed, a slide display mode for sliding (shifting) the display position of the pseudo pending symbol is determined in accordance with the execution of the pseudo variation (pseudo variation effect) (S4602), and the pseudo variation effect is executed. It is determined whether there is a pseudo free display area in the reserved symbol display area (S4603), and if it is determined that there is a pseudo free display area (S4603: Yes), a pseudo free display area is displayed corresponding to the contents of the pseudo free area after the slide movement. The information stored in the free space storage area 223gb is updated (S4604), and this processing ends. Further, in the process of S4601, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the pseudo fluctuation (pseudo fluctuation effect) (S4601: No), or if it is determined in the process of S4603 that there is no pseudo free area (S4603: No) , this process ends.

As explained above, in the seventh embodiment, the pseudo pending symbol whose display number is subtracted in response to the execution of the pseudo fluctuation effect is displayed by switching it with the pending symbol for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. Because it is configured to It is possible to easily make a player think that a variable performance is being executed.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the display area in which the reserved symbol for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is displayed is configured to display the pseudo reserved symbol, and the pseudo fluctuation effect is executed. During this period, a reserved symbol for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is displayed in another display area. Thereby, the pseudo-reserved symbols can be displayed to the player without causing any discomfort.

Furthermore, during the pseudo fluctuation performance, the pseudo pending symbols are displayed in a display manner that is easier for the player to grasp than the reserved symbols for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. Thereby, it is possible to more easily attract the player's attention to the increase/decrease in the number of displayed pseudo-reserved symbols than to the reserved symbol for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, when a specific condition is satisfied for the pseudo empty display area that occurs when the number of displayed pseudo pending symbols decreases (when the slide moves) due to the execution of the pseudo fluctuation effect ( A new pseudo-reserved symbol is displayed when a ball enters the ball entrance, which triggers the execution of a special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player think that the pseudo pending symbol is a pending symbol for indicating the pending number of special symbols.

Furthermore, if the pseudo fluctuation effect is executed in a state where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit, that is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit, a pseudo empty area is displayed. In the event that a special symbol lottery is executed, a new pseudo-reserved symbol can be displayed based on the ball entering the ball entrance (overflow prize), which triggers the execution of the special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player think that the pseudo pending symbol is a pending symbol for indicating the pending number of special symbols.

In addition, it is configured to be able to execute a setting suggestion effect using the display mode of the pseudo-reserved symbol displayed in the pseudo-vacant area. Thereby, the player can be motivated to play the game.

As explained above, in the seventh embodiment, the number of displayed pending symbols (pseudo pending symbols) is reduced every time the pseudo fluctuation performance is executed, so that the pseudo fluctuation performance appears to be a special symbol fluctuation performance. However, in order to prevent players from easily understanding that a pseudo-fluctuation effect is being executed, other configurations may be used. For example, by varying the display mode of the reserved symbol to show the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, when a pseudo fluctuation effect is executed, the number of displayed reserved symbols to indicate the number of reserved balls of the special symbol can be changed. In this case, for example, when a pseudo fluctuation effect is executed with four reserved symbols to indicate the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, four By changing the display mode of the reserved symbols for eyes to a display mode that is more difficult for the player to grasp than usual, the player is configured to perform an effect that makes the player think that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has become three. Also good.

Here, the display mode that is difficult for the player to grasp is, for example, a display mode that is difficult for the player to grasp by making the display enlargement rate of the fourth pending symbol smaller than the display enlargement rate of the other pending symbols. Or, by making the transparency of the fourth pending symbol higher than the transparency of the other pending symbols, the display format may be such that it is difficult for the player to understand, or the display color of the fourth pending symbol may be set to be different from that of the other pending symbols. By making the color closer to that of the background image than the display color of , it is possible to create a display mode that is difficult for the player to understand. With this configuration, it is possible to easily make the player think that the pseudo fluctuation performance is a special symbol fluctuation performance without using pseudo pending symbols. It is possible to reduce the processing load and performance data capacity for smooth execution.

In addition, in this embodiment, a pending symbol (pseudo pending symbol) is used as a display target whose display number changes according to the execution of the pseudo fluctuation effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other display modes may be used. Also good. Further, in the seventh embodiment, the pseudo-pending symbol is continuously displayed while the pseudo-fluctuation effect is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and at least when the pseudo-variation effect is being executed. It is only necessary to perform an effect in which the number of displayed target display modes (pseudo pending symbols) is reduced in accordance with the timing of the display, and to temporarily hide the target display mode after the number of display modes has decreased. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, in this embodiment, by configuring the display number of pseudo pending symbols to be displayed when the pseudo fluctuation effect is executed to be the display number corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, the special symbol The present invention is configured to switch from a pending symbol indicating the number of pending balls to a pseudo pending symbol without giving the player a sense of discomfort, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the pseudo pending symbol is The initial display number of symbols may be determined.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a pseudo empty display area is formed, it is configured to become a special symbol display zone in which setting suggestion effects can be executed only within the range of the pseudo empty display area. Without limitation, a predetermined range or the entire range of the display area behind the display area where the pseudo empty area is formed may be used as the special symbol display zone.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the production contents of the pseudo-reserved symbol (variable content of the number of displays) in the case where the pseudo-variation production is performed multiple times using the entire period of one special symbol variation has been explained. The technical idea used in the seventh embodiment may be used in other techniques, for example, when performing three or more pseudo fluctuation effects using the fluctuation period of two or more consecutive special symbol fluctuations. Various technical ideas explained in the seventh embodiment may be applied.

Furthermore, when performing a pseudo fluctuation performance once for multiple special symbol fluctuations, the number of displayed pending symbols indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol during the pseudo fluctuation performance is reduced, so that the fluctuation during execution is As a technical concept for preventing players from easily understanding that the performance is a pseudo-variable performance, the technical concept of the seventh embodiment described above is adopted, that is, a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of a special symbol. Instead, a technique may be used in which a pseudo pending symbol is displayed and the number of displayed pseudo pending symbols is varied (reduced) based on the number of times the pseudo fluctuation performance is executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from easily understanding that the fluctuating performance being executed is a pseudo fluctuating performance.

<About the eighth embodiment>
Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 217. The eighth embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that the regulation contents during setting changes are different, and the display contents are also different, and other than that, the eighth embodiment is the same. Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment described above, while the process of changing the setting values of the gaming machine is being executed, that is, in the state where the startup process of the main control device 110 is not completed, the boot process of the display control device 114 is executed. Since the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 is never completed regardless of the progress of the process, the configuration is such that the operation of the operation means such as the frame button 22 is set to be disabled. In contrast, in the eighth embodiment, a first frame button 22a and a second frame button 22b are provided as operating means, and even during a setting change operation, operation on one of the operating means (second frame button 22b) is not possible. They are different in that they are configured to be effectively distinguishable.

Specifically, in the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 140), the main control device 110 waits for a command (initialization command) to indicate that the setting change operation is completed. The configuration is such that the first operation enable setting process for setting the operation of the second frame button 22b to be valid is performed before the standby process (see S2012 in FIG. 142). In this first operation validity setting process, a setting process for determining that only some of the operation means among the plurality of operation means included in the pachinko machine 10 are valid is executed.

Then, in a process executed after the standby process (see S2012 in FIG. 142), a second operation enable setting process for validating operations on all operation means is configured to be executable.

Here, the operation means whose operation is determined to be valid in the first operation validity setting process is an operation means that can execute an operation other than the operation of writing information into the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, that is, any It is not an operation means for determining change information (for example, information indicating the result of volume adjustment or brightness adjustment), but for performing an operation (change operation) for changing some information (for example, changing the volume or brightness). This corresponds to the operation means (frame button 22b).

In other words, even during a setting change operation, an operation to change the volume or brightness is effectively determined, but an operation to determine (write to the storage area of the RAM 223) the changed volume or brightness (determine) The operating means (frame button 22a) for performing the above operation is configured to become effective after the setting change operation is completed. With this configuration, it is possible to perform a change operation to change information even while a setting change operation is in progress, making it possible to perform multiple tasks redundantly, making it possible to Efficiency can be improved.

Here, while the setting change operation is being executed, there are cases where the boot process of the display control device 114 is completed and cases where it is not completed, and when the boot process is not completed, the Since information related to the changing operation is not displayed on the display screen of the 3-symbol display device 81, there is a problem in that when the changing operation is executed, it is difficult for the operator to grasp how much the changing operation has been executed. In addition, even if the boot process is completed, the operator is facing the back side of the pachinko machine 10 while the setting change operation is being performed, and the third symbol Since it is difficult to visually recognize the display screen of the display device 81, it becomes difficult to grasp the content of the change operation by visually recognizing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the volume output from the audio output device 226 during setting changes is varied according to the change operation, so that the operator can easily understand the degree of change operation. There is. With this configuration, the operator facing the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can understand the contents of the change operation by voice, so it is possible to perform multiple tasks at once. , it is possible to improve work efficiency.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, environmental status notification is provided that switches between the default environmental status (initial volume level) set in the initialization state and the environmental status changed by a change operation (changed volume level). (audio output) is configured to be executable. This allows you to relatively understand the environmental situation after the change, compared to the case where only the environmental situation changed by the change operation (the volume level after change) is notified, so you can visually understand the details of the change operation. In situations where it is difficult to understand, it is possible to make it easier for the operator to understand the details of the change operation.

Here, with reference to FIG. 217, the display contents displayed during the setting change operation in the eighth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 217(a) is a diagram schematically showing a display screen while changing settings, and FIG. 217(b) is a diagram schematically showing a display screen when changing the volume level while changing settings. It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 217(a), when the setting change operation is being executed after the boot process of the display control device 114 is completed, “Changing settings” is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. At the same time as the characters are displayed, information indicating operating means that can be operated by the worker and operating means that cannot be operated in the current situation is displayed in the display area HR31. In the diagram shown in FIG. 217(a), information is displayed indicating that the frame button 22b (indicated by a triangle mark in the figure) is valid and the frame button 22a (indicated by a circle mark in the figure) is invalid. ing. Thereby, it is possible to inform the operator of the operating means that can be operated at the present time in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the display area HR30, a display mode indicating the volume level is displayed as default environmental information set in the initial state, and in the figure, the second volume level among the three volume levels is the default one. A display mode indicating that the item is set as environmental information is displayed. This volume level indicates that the volume of the volume output from the audio output device 226 can be varied by varying the steps, and as the volume level is increased, the volume output from the audio output device 226 increases. growing. In FIG. 217(a), the number filled in black indicates the volume level, and the state in which all three are filled in black indicates volume level 3 at which the maximum volume is output.

Additionally, while the settings are being changed, the audio output device 226 outputs a message "Settings are being changed" at the default volume level as a notification mode for audibly notifying that the current status is being changed. It is configured as follows. As a result, an operator who is located in a position where the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 cannot be viewed (for example, an operator who is located on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 in order to perform a setting change operation) is informed of the current The situation can be reported in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, even if a setting change operation is performed illegally, the situation can be detected quickly.

In this embodiment, since the operation on the frame button 22b is effectively determined while changing the settings, it is possible to change the volume level even while changing the settings, so the frame is displayed on the display screen. A display mode is displayed to notify that the volume level can be changed by operating the button 22b.

Note that the display contents shown in FIG. 217(a) are all commands indicating the status output from the audio lamp control device 113 when the boot process of the display control device 114 is completed (for example, the boot process is completed). The image data is stored as a default image (initial image) that is displayed when a command indicating that the setting change process has been completed or a command indicating that the setting change process has been completed is not received. Note that the description of this initial image is the same as that in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the frame button 22b is operated in the state shown in FIG. 217(a), the text indicating that the volume is being adjusted is displayed, as shown in FIG. 217(b), and the volume level corresponding to the changing operation ( A display mode indicating volume level 3) is displayed in display area HR30. Then, the audio output device 226 alternately outputs the message "settings changing" by switching between the default volume level (volume level 2) and the changed volume level (volume level 3). As a result, an operator who is located in a position where the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 cannot be viewed (for example, an operator who is located on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 in order to perform a setting change operation) is informed of the current The situation can be reported in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, even if a setting change operation is performed illegally, the situation can be detected quickly.

As explained above, in the eighth embodiment, even when the settings are being changed, that is, even when the initialization processing (startup processing) of the pachinko machine 10 has not been completely completed, the operation means By configuring some of the operating means to be effectively distinguishable, it becomes possible to perform multiple tasks in duplicate, and it is possible to improve work efficiency.

Note that in the eighth embodiment, the operation invalidation period is configured to be different for multiple types of operation means while the settings of the pachinko machine 10 are being changed, but the timing for setting the operation invalidation period is different. , it is not limited to changing the settings of the pachinko machine 10, but may also be during the initialization process, or by the operator performing a specific operation after the initialization process of the pachinko machine 10 has been completed. It may be a period in which the setting state is changed to a setting state different from the game-enabled state, or it may be a period in which an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10 and the game is temporarily disabled. In addition, an operation invalidation period may be set for a period in which a performance that makes it appear as if the performance stopped midway through (freeze performance) is being executed in a normal game-enabled state. , it may be a period in which the time measured by the clock device 292 exceeds a specific time (for example, the closing time of a gaming hall).

<About another example of setting suggestion production>
In each of the embodiments described above, the frequency of execution of the setting suggestion effect is varied depending on the set period, and the configuration is such that the setting suggestion effect is executed within each period. That is, the configuration is such that execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined at an execution frequency corresponding to a set period, and the determined setting suggestion effect is executed within the period.

On the other hand, in this example, the period during which the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined and the period during which the setting suggestion effect is actually executed can be made different.

Specifically, certain conditions (for example, conditions that are met when a jackpot is won or conditions that are met when the number of reach reaches a predetermined number of times (3 times) during a specific period (for example, SP time period or during a variable probability state) If the condition for setting suggestion effect) is satisfied, a display mode that can be an element indicating the setting suggestion effect (for example, a display mode showing a puzzle with missing pieces) is displayed as the right to execute the setting suggestion effect.

Next, the configuration is such that additional information (for example, puzzle pieces) can be acquired in a state where the right to execute the setting suggestion effect is established. More specifically, there is a means for determining whether or not additional information is acquired based on the operation on the operation means, and a means for determining whether or not additional information is acquired based on the operation on the operation means, and a method for determining whether or not the number of prize balls acquired during the period after the execution right is established is determined in units of a predetermined number (for example, 1000). An acquisition means is provided to acquire additional information when the number of pieces of information is reached.

Then, in a state where the right to execute the setting suggestion effect has been established, each time additional information is acquired, it is added to the display mode that can be an element indicating the setting suggestion effect (for example, a display mode showing a puzzle with missing pieces). Executes an effect in which a display mode (element) corresponding to information is added. Then, when a sufficient amount of additional information is added, a display mode for suggesting a setting value is formed (a setting suggestion effect is executed).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for a player who has acquired the right to execute a setting suggestion performance within a specific period to continue playing the game until the setting suggestion performance is executed. The operation of the system can be improved.

In addition, when using the above-mentioned alternative configuration, it is preferable to set an upper limit on the period during which the right to execute the setting suggestion performance is held. Thereby, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to execute the setting suggestion performance within the period during which the player holds the right to execute the setting suggestion performance.

In addition, if an upper limit is set for the period during which the right to execute a setting suggestion effect is retained, extension conditions for extending the upper limit period (for example, conditions that are satisfied when a specific type of reach effect is executed, The system is configured to be able to set conditions (conditions that are met when a specific operation is performed on the operating means, conditions that are met when a jackpot of a specific jackpot type is won), and when it is determined that the extension condition has been met. , it is preferable that the configuration is configured to execute processing for extending the upper limit period. By configuring in this way, the player is motivated to play the game in order to execute the setting suggestion effect within the period during which he/she holds the right to execute the setting suggestion effect, and by extending the upper limit period, the setting suggestion effect can be executed. It is also possible to have the player play a game that aims to make it easier to execute the suggested performance, and it is possible to motivate the player to participate in the game.

In addition, if a special condition different from the extension condition (for example, suspension) is satisfied, the upper limit period may be abolished.

Furthermore, when the upper limit period is configured to be settable, the remaining period up to the upper limit period may be configured to be able to be notified. This makes it possible to provide games that are easy for players to understand.

In addition, as a display mode that can be an element indicating a definite suggestion effect (for example, a display mode showing a puzzle with missing pieces), it is recommended to set a display mode that allows the setting to be gradually guessed each time additional information is provided. . This allows the player to predict the set value even if it is not possible to obtain all the additional information.

<About the definition of setting suggestion effects>
Next, another example of the presentation mode of the setting suggestion presentation used in each of the above-described embodiments will be explained. Here, setting suggestion effects are not only effects that aim to provide information for indicating setting values to the player, but also all effects that are selected based on information regarding setting values. This falls under the category of suggestive performance.

In addition, execution of a presentation includes not only displaying a display mode that is visible to the player as explained in each of the above embodiments, but also a mode that does not display a display mode that is visible to the player. It is included in the concept of execution.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, an example is shown in which a specific display mode is displayed as a setting suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple types of display modes that are individually set may be displayed overlappingly. Therefore, a mode in which the player is made to guess the setting value is also included in the concept of setting suggestion performance.

<First modification example>
Next, a first modification regarding the process related to the operation on the operating means during the start-up process described in the first embodiment and the eighth embodiment will be described. In each of the embodiments described above, the operation invalidation period is set for the operation means (frame button 22, etc.) provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 81). The operating means may be provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 83). In this case, the operating means (management operating means) provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided in a position where it is impossible (difficult) for the player to operate the pachinko machine 10. It is better to use it as a management operation means that can set the environment.

Specifically, the adjustment range of the volume level and brightness that can be set by the player operating the operating means such as the frame button 22 may be limited by operating the management operating means operating means, or the player may limit the adjustment range of the volume level and brightness that can be set by operating the operating means such as the frame button 22. It is preferable that the type of performance mode that can be selected in a custom selection that changes the performance mode executed in the pachinko machine 10 by operation is limited by the operation of the management operating means operating means.

The operation means described above and the management operation means are configured to be able to set different operation invalidation periods during the start-up process of the pachinko machine 10, and the management operation means is more ineffective than the operation means. It is best to configure the configuration so that the period is short (no invalid period is set).

<Second modification example>
Next, a modification of the example described with reference to FIG. 96(b) of the first embodiment described above will be explained regarding the performance content during the round game executed during the jackpot game.

In the first embodiment described above, the number of rounds in which the number of acquired balls can reach a predetermined number unit (in units of 200) is specified as the presentation mode of the round presentation executed during the round game, and the presentation mode of the round presentation is specified. Accordingly, the mode of presentation of the round presentation is determined based on the correspondence between the number of rounds to be executed and the number of acquired pitches displayed.

On the other hand, in this second modification, a determining means is provided for determining in which round of the jackpot game the promotion performance is to be executed, and a storage means is provided which can store the determined number of rounds. Then, of the number of rounds specified by the specifying means for specifying the number of rounds in which the number of acquired balls can reach a predetermined number unit (in units of 200 balls), the promotion effect is performed in the number of rounds after the number of rounds stored in the storage means. An execution means is provided to execute the process.

With this configuration, the promotion performance can be executed in synchronization with the number of rounds in which the predetermined number acquisition performance is performed to celebrate the fact that the number of acquired balls has reached a predetermined number unit.

Here, in the second modified example, as the predetermined number acquisition performance, different performance modes (for example, a mode in which the type of character is different, a mode in which the type of comment uttered by the character (dialect, etc.) is varied depending on the number of balls acquired) When it is specified that a round game of the number of rounds in which a predetermined number of acquisition performances will be executed is determined, the production mode is determined and the production mode is adapted to the determined production mode. The system is configured to generate moving image data or still image data, execute it as a performance during a round game, and when the number of acquired balls actually reaches a predetermined number, an image to show the predetermined number of balls is additionally displayed. are doing.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, if the setting of the performance mode of the predetermined number acquisition performance and the determination of the promotion performance are performed independently, the promotion performance will be executed while the predetermined number acquisition performance is being executed. Therefore, there is a risk that an effect that is difficult for the player to understand may be executed.

More specifically, the performance mode used for the predetermined number acquisition performance is executed based on moving image data or still image data corresponding to the performance mode determined by the determining means, and is based on the performance mode to be executed. Corresponding audio data (lines, etc.) is also set, so if a promotion effect is executed during a round game in which a predetermined number of acquisition effects are executed, the effect of the predetermined number of acquisition effects will be significantly reduced. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in the second modified example, the processing for setting the performance mode of the predetermined number acquisition performance and the process for determining the promotion performance can be executed in combination, so that the player Easy-to-understand performances can be executed.

In each of the embodiments described above, a high-speed fluctuation mode in which a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is more likely to be selected can be set based on the number of executions of the special symbol lottery, but as a condition for transitioning to this high-speed fluctuation mode, A number other than the number of executions of the special symbol lottery may be set, and if the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result other than winning the jackpot, for example, the variable winning device 65a may be temporarily opened even though the jackpot has not been won. It is possible to configure a high-speed fluctuation mode to be set based on winning a small win in which a small winning game is executed, or to configure a high-speed fluctuation mode to be setable across jackpot games with a short jackpot game period, It may be configured such that a specific mode transition lottery can be executed separately from the symbol or normal symbol lottery, and a high-speed fluctuation mode can be set when the mode transition lottery is won.

Furthermore, termination conditions for terminating the high-speed fluctuation mode may be set using the same elements as various conditions used when setting the high-speed fluctuation mode; in this case, the conditions used when setting the high-speed fluctuation mode It is preferable to configure the end condition to be set by using different numerical values (parameters) for various conditions. Thereby, the setting condition and end condition of the high-speed fluctuation mode can be set by simply changing the values, so that the data capacity for storing information regarding the setting of the high-speed fluctuation mode can be reduced.

Furthermore, in each of the embodiments described above, the setting of the high-speed fluctuation mode is determined based on the contents of the special symbol lottery (special symbol variation), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal symbol lottery (special symbol variation) is not limited to this. It may be configured to determine whether or not to set the high-speed variation mode based on the contents of the normal symbol variation. In this case, for example, the electric accessory 640a is released for a long period of time as a normal symbol fluctuation, and the player is in the process of winning a long regular symbol, or is playing a long regular symbol. It is determined whether or not the situation is such that the player is forced to pay attention to the result of the lottery (normal symbol fluctuation), and the period during which the performance for making the player pay attention to the result of the regular symbol lottery (regular symbol fluctuation) is being executed, or the period during which it is executed. Regarding the period in which it is determined that the special symbol will be changed at high speed during the high speed change mode, even if the high speed change of the special symbol is executed, the performance mode for notifying the effect may not be set.

In this way, there is a period in which a performance that should make players pay more attention than a special symbol lottery (special symbol fluctuations), or a period in which a production that should make players pay more attention than a special symbol lottery (special symbol fluctuations) is performed. By configuring so that even if a high-speed variation of the special symbol is executed during the high-speed variation mode during a period in which it is determined that the content production will be executed, the production mode for notifying the effect is not set. It is possible to inform players of the performances that they should pay close attention to in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the above embodiment, a case will be described in which the image controller 236 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) of an image for one frame at which the drawing process ends. However, the image controller 236 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display one frame of image. The third symbol display device 81 is driven so that one frame of images is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), so a V interrupt signal is sent every time one frame of images is displayed. By sending , you can keep the time interval accurate without having to clock it.

In the embodiment described above, the demonstration effect may be one in which a third symbol consisting of a main symbol to which numbers "0" to "9" are not attached is displayed in a stopped state. Further, a third symbol consisting of a main symbol with numbers or a main symbol without numbers may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Furthermore, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third symbol or back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the embodiment described above, the continuous notice performance may be executed on the third symbol display device 81 where the variable performance is performed, or a fourth symbol display device separate from the third symbol display device 81 may be provided to display the third symbol. A continuous notice performance may be executed by displaying a fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device together with the variable performance executed on the display device 81. In this case, the fourth symbol display device may be controlled by the display control device 114 or the audio lamp control device 113. Furthermore, a continuous preview performance may be executed by providing the pachinko machine 10 with accessories that operate according to various performances, and operating the accessories in a predetermined manner together with the variable performances. Furthermore, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113, the continuous notice performance may be executed by outputting the sound for the continuous notice performance from the sound output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10. A continuous preview performance may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable performance.

As a result, each time a variable effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37), symbols are continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or accessories are operated in a predetermined manner. The player can be given a sense of expectation of a jackpot by playing the game, by outputting a sound from the sound output device 226, or by lighting up or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33. In addition, the player usually continues playing the game by watching the third symbol display device 81 where the variable performance is performed, but the symbols are displayed by a fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81. , a continuous notice effect is performed by the operation of the accessory, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting/blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33, and a different effect than usual is performed for the player. This can be easily recognized. In addition, continuous notice performances can be easily performed continuously by simple controls such as displaying symbols on the fourth symbol display device, operating accessories, outputting audio from the audio output device 226, or lighting/blinking the illumination sections 29 to 33. A preview performance can be performed.

Furthermore, if the continuous preview performance is performed by audio output from the audio output device 226 or lighting or flashing of the illumination parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous preview performance is performed by the audio lamp control device 113, so that when starting a winning prize, By having the main control device 110 perform the correctness judgment and the lottery processing at the start of the fluctuation, the audio lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous notice performance, and the display control device 114 to perform the fluctuation performance, the pachinko machine 10 continuously performs the lottery process. When performing a preview effect, each control device can be assigned to each process. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, the performance required of the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

In addition, the display of the symbols for the continuous preview performance on the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbols for the continuous preview performance on the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined manner, and the sound from the audio output device 226. A continuous preview performance may be performed by combining at least two or more of the output and lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33 and controlling each in conjunction with each other. Thereby, it is possible to execute more diverse continuous preview effects. In addition, the execution method of the continuous notice performance (display on the third symbol display device 81, display on the fourth symbol display device, operation of accessories, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33) , or a combination thereof), we have prepared multiple continuous preview performance modes that are selected depending on the gaming state (15R definite strange jackpot, 2R definite strange jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, miss) after the end of the continuous notice performance. Good too.

Furthermore, when a continuous notice performance is performed, an image for a continuous notice performance different from the fluctuating performance may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or the continuous notice performance may be displayed when the fluctuating performance ends. This may be done by displaying a so-called "chance eye" which is a combination of predetermined symbols as the displayed stop symbols. In this case, when it is determined that a continuous notice command has been received in the command determination process (S1602 in FIG. 395(c)) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance is turned on and , other stop symbol discrimination flags may be set to OFF. In the command judgment process, after the stop identification command process, the process corresponding to the continuous notice command is executed among other command processes, so the chance is stopped instead of the stop symbol set by the reception of the display stop identification command. Set as a pattern. Therefore, the chance number can be displayed as confirmed when the variation is stopped. In the third symbol display device 81, if chance symbols are continuously displayed as stop symbols for each variable performance, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that he or she will finally get a jackpot.

In the embodiment described above, when there is a winning (starting prize) to the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, the main control device 110 adds "1" to the number of reserved balls to the audio lamp control device 113. We have explained the case where each counter C1 to C3, CS1 acquired from the counter buffer due to the starting prize is included as is and sent to the audio lamp control device 113 in response to the pending ball count command to be notified to the pending ball count command. The types of counters included in the pitch count command may be part of counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include values of other counters. In addition, when the main control device 110 notifies the audio lamp control device 113 of the values of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning, the information indicating the values of each of these counters is included in the held ball count command and notified. Instead, information indicating the values of each counter may be included in a command other than the held pitch count command, and these values may be notified to the audio lamp control device 113. Another command may be a dedicated command that notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired in conjunction with a start-up winning, or a command that sends other information such as a fluctuation pattern command or a stop symbol command by voice. The command for notifying the lamp control device 113 may include the values of each counter acquired in conjunction with the winning start. As another command, when notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, the value of each counter to be notified is specified in the fluctuating performance corresponding to which number of holds. Information indicating whether this is the case may also be included. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 stores each of the commands included in the command in one of the first to fourth areas of the look-ahead information corresponding to the number of suspensions, based on the information regarding the number of suspensions included in the command. Counter values can be stored.

In the embodiment described above, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command for the number of held pitches, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the command for the number of held pitches may be stored in the RAM 223. , When a command for the number of reserved pitches (or a command in which the value of each counter is indicated) is received, based on the value of each counter indicated by the command, whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot, and the loss Determine part or all of the type of deviation in the case of , and use these determination results in place of the value of each counter indicated by the command, or in combination with part or all of the value of the counter, It may also be stored in the RAM 223.

In each of the embodiments described above, the number of reserved balls is counted by the main controller 110 using one reserved ball counter 203a, regardless of which of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b the ball has entered. The case of counting was explained. On the other hand, a held ball number counter for the first starting port corresponding to the first starting port 64a, a held ball number counter for the second starting port corresponding to the second starting port 64b, and the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 are stored in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. The number of reserved balls due to starting winnings to the first starting port 64a and the number of balls pending due to starting winnings to the second starting port 64b may be separately counted.

Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the maximum number of balls that can be held is set to "4" regardless of which of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b the ball has won. The maximum number of reserved balls that can be held due to starting winnings to the first starting port 64a and the maximum number of reserved balls that can be held due to starting winnings to the second starting port 64b are determined and managed separately. Good too. For example, the maximum number of balls that can be held in response to a winning start to the first starting port 64a is "4", and the maximum number of balls that can be held in response to a starting winning to the second starting port 64b is "4". Assuming that, at a certain point in time, the number of reserved balls held due to a winning start to the first starting port 64a is "4", and the number of held balls held due to a starting winning to the second starting port 64b. In the situation where is "2", even if there is a starting prize in the first starting hole 64a, that starting prize will not be suspended, but if there is a starting prize in the second starting hole 64b, it will be suspended. You can. This allows the player to recognize the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b as separate entities, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Further, for example, a variable performance based on a winning start at the second starting port 64b may be performed with priority over a variable performance based on a winning start at the first starting port 64a. Alternatively, a variable performance based on a winning start at the first starting port 64a may be performed with priority over a variable performance based on a winning start at the second starting port 64b. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the starting opening where the variable performance is given priority.

In the above embodiment, a case will be explained in which two starting ports, a first starting port 64a and a second starting port 64b, are provided on the game board 13 as starting ports for starting a jackpot lottery when a ball enters. However, the number of starting ports is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of starting ports may be one or three or more. In addition, when there are two or more starting holes, a corresponding held ball number counter is prepared in the RAM 203 for each starting hole, and for each starting hole, the number of held balls held as a result of winning the corresponding starting hole is displayed. The number may be counted. Further, for each starting hole, the maximum number of balls that can be held can be set in response to a winning start to the corresponding starting hole.

In addition, when there are two or more starting holes, the number of held balls command that the main controller 110 sends to the audio lamp control device 113 to notify that the ball is held due to winning in the starting hole includes the following: It may also include information indicating whether the reservation was made due to winning in the starting slot. Furthermore, the variation pattern command that the main control device 110 sends to the audio lamp control device 113 when starting the variation may also include information indicating which starting opening the variation effect was held on hold for. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a held ball number counter is prepared for each starting port, and when a held ball number command is received, a held ball number counter for the starting port indicated by the held ball number command is set. When the number of held balls is set to , and a variable pattern command is received, the number of held balls can be counted for each starting hole by decrementing the number of held balls counter for the starting hole indicated in the variable pattern command by 1.

Further, when a plurality of starting holes are arranged on the game board 13, the audio lamp control device 113 may be notified of the counter value acquired in response to a winning (starting prize) at each starting hole. In this case, the command for the main control device 110 to notify the audio lamp control device 113 of the counter value acquired in conjunction with the winning start is the one that was acquired in conjunction with the winning start in any of the starting openings. It may also include information indicating whether it exists. Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern command that the main control device 110 sends to the audio lamp control device 113 when starting the fluctuation may also include information indicating which starting opening the fluctuation effect is associated with winning a starting prize. . Furthermore, in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, a look-ahead information storage area is prepared for each starting hole, and each counter value transmitted from the main control device 110 in conjunction with a winning start to the corresponding starting hole is stored in a corresponding area. It may also be stored in the prefetch information storage area. As a result, each time a fluctuation pattern command is received, a shift process can be performed on the pre-read information storage area corresponding to the starting opening where the starting winning that triggered the execution of the fluctuation effect indicated by the fluctuation pattern command was detected. can. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the pending variation performance for each starting point can also be held in the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, in the case where the probability of a jackpot, the distribution probability of a jackpot type, the distribution probability of a loss type, etc. differ depending on the starting opening that won a starting prize, the pre-reading process determines whether or not it will be a jackpot for each variable performance. It is possible to correctly determine the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot, the type of loss in the case of a loss, etc., based on which starting opening the starting prize is entered into. In addition, if a variable performance based on a winning start at the first opening is given priority over a variable performance based on a winning start at the other starting opening, the fluctuation based on a winning start at the first opening Pre-reading processing can be performed in order from the value of the counter corresponding to the performance, and the number of times a fluctuating performance that will be the latest jackpot to be held can be correctly determined.

In addition, when a plurality of starting ports are provided, the audio lamp control device 113 provides a continuous notice when receiving the value of each counter acquired based on the starting prize to the starting port from the main control device 110 by command. When it is decided to start the performance, a continuous preview performance may be executed over all the variable performances (pending balls) that are on hold at that time, regardless of the starting opening where the starting prize has been won. In addition, in a pachinko machine that has multiple starting holes and performs a variable effect for a winning in one starting hole with priority over a variable effect for winning in any other starting hole, The start of the continuous notice performance may be determined only from the pre-read result of the counter value obtained in response to winnings in the starting opening where the variable performance is executed. As a result, it is not determined whether or not the execution of continuous notice performance is set for the variable performance corresponding to winning in the starting slot with low priority, and the continuous notice performance is not started for this variable performance. If a continuous preview performance is started for a fluctuating performance that corresponds to a prize winning in a starting slot with a low priority, and if the fluctuating performance is continuously suspended in a starting slot with a high priority, the continuous preview performance will take a long time to finish. There is a possibility that a situation may arise where this is not possible. On the other hand, in this modified example, it is not determined whether or not the execution of a continuous preview performance is set for the variable performance corresponding to winning in a starting slot with low priority, and the continuous preview performance is not determined for this variable performance. Since the process is not started, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the number of reserved balls stored in the RAM 223 is reduced by 1 (see S1107 in FIG. 394). However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the fluctuation processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 381), the number of reserved pitches of the main control device 110 is subtracted as the fluctuation pattern command is set by the fluctuation start processing (S307). A held pitch number command is set so that the value (N) of the counter 203a (see S305 in FIG. 381) is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, and the held pitch number command is set in a fluctuation pattern. The command may also be sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 together with the command. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the number of held balls held in the main control device 110. Note that in this case, S1107 in FIG. 394 is omitted. Further, the value (N) of the reserved pitch number counter 203a after subtraction may be included in the variation pattern command. In this case, the audio lamp control device 113 may extract the number of held balls (N) included in the variable pattern command when receiving the variable pattern command, and set it to the number of held balls stored in the RAM 223.

In the above embodiment, the winning balls to the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b and the passing through the through gate 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is four times. The number of times is not limited to three, or may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times). Furthermore, for winnings in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, the maximum number of balls to be held may be set separately depending on the starting port, and the maximum number of balls to be held in each starting port is "4". ” may be any number other than ”. Further, the maximum number of balls held at each starting port does not necessarily have to be the same value, and may be different values. In addition, the number of reserved balls, which is displayed in a variable manner based on winnings to the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, is displayed numerically or in four divided areas in a part of the third symbol display device 81. The display may be made in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern) for the number of reserved balls, and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light-emitting member allows the number of reserved balls to be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern). It may be configured to notify the number.

Furthermore, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbols as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, but also in the horizontal direction. The display may be performed by moving and displaying the symbols along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L-shape. Furthermore, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the display of fluctuating symbols; for example, one or more characters may be displayed in a wide variety of motions or changes with or without the symbol. This also includes the presentation and display that will be displayed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above embodiments, when performing a variation effect, a case has been described in which a high-speed variation is displayed in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to such an extent that the player cannot see them; however, instead of displaying this high-speed variation, All of the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size to the extent that they are not visible, or all of the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine from the above embodiment. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

In a slot machine, the accessory ratio is the ratio of the number of game media paid out as a bonus (accessory object) to the total number of gaming media (coins, medals) paid out during a predetermined period. Therefore, the number of gaming media to be paid out when each winning combination is established is stored in the ROM of the main control device instead of the prize ball number table 202e, and the number of game media paid out when each winning combination is established is stored in the ROM of the main controller, The control device that executes the function determines the number of winning hands (symbols aligned on the active line) during the non-bonus game period (normal period), the number of winning hands forming during the bonus game period, and the number of winning hands forming during the AT period. The number of winning combinations may be counted to manage the ratio of winning combinations and the ratio of consecutive winning combinations.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, a pachinko machine may be implemented in which a plurality of levels of probability combinations (commonly referred to as settings) are provided for the jackpot lottery, and the settings can be changed at the game parlor side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In addition, for pachinko machines that have multiple settings, the combination of jackpot probabilities (combination of jackpot probability in a low probability state and jackpot probability in a variable probability state) can be set in one of multiple stages (for example, 6 stages). A typical example is one that can be set to , but is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, the pachinko machine is capable of varying the proportion of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot depending on the settings. You can. That is, the rate at which jackpots of a type advantageous to the player are determined may be varied, or the rate at which jackpots of a type disadvantageous to the player are determined, may be varied depending on the settings. More specifically, for example, the rate at which jackpots are determined with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) may be varied depending on the settings, or the rate at which jackpots are determined with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) is determined. A configuration may also be adopted in which the degree of advantage for each setting is varied by varying the proportion of each setting. In addition, for example, after the jackpot ends, the ratio at which a jackpot is determined that will give a large number of time savings (for example, 100 times) can be varied depending on the setting, or a jackpot that will give a small number of time savings (for example, 0 times). The rate at which the is determined may be varied depending on the settings. Furthermore, the rate at which jackpots are determined to transition (or are likely to transition) to an advantageous gaming state (for example, variable probability state) after the end of the jackpot can be varied according to settings, or may be changed to a disadvantageous gaming state (for example, normal state). ) may be changed depending on the setting. Further, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type is provided which has a significantly higher probability of being determined only in a specific setting (almost never being determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the settings can be set in six stages from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set to 6. In setting 6, if there is a jackpot, a 6-round jackpot is determined 2% of the time, while in other settings, a 6-round jackpot is determined only 0.01% of the time. It may also be a configuration. With this configuration, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, there is an extremely high possibility that the most advantageous setting is 6, so the player is forced to pay attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot when playing the game. be able to. In addition, instead of this, or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the proportion of the jackpot type in which 66 time saving times are given after the jackpot ends is higher than in other settings. With this configuration, it is possible to have the player play the game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Alternatively or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or the accessory inside the jackpot) operates in a different operation pattern from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the jackpot type is more likely to be determined (the ratio of determination becomes higher) with a specific setting. In addition, when changing the combination of jackpot probabilities depending on the settings, in a low probability state, the more advantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability, while in the variable probability state, the more advantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability, while in the variable probability state, the setting is less favorable to the player. A configuration may be adopted in which the jackpot probability increases as the number increases. This configuration is particularly suitable for a type of game ball type in which the number of special symbol drawings increases as the number of drawings for special symbols increases (the number of prize balls paid out is easier to increase than the number of game balls fired). Effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, by applying this to a type of gaming machine where the variable probability state continues until the next jackpot is won, and where there is a high probability of a small win in the variable probability state, the advantage of high settings can be achieved. You can improve your sexuality. That is, when the probability of a jackpot is low in a variable probability state, the number of drawings until the next jackpot is likely to be increased, so there are more chances to win a small jackpot and win a prize ball. Therefore, when the probability changes, it becomes easier for the player to obtain more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

In addition, slot machines are well-known machines in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever with a coin inserted and the symbol active line determined, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Each of the embodiments described above may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown. In addition, each of the various inventive concepts shown below adds part or more of the configuration of other inventive concepts to the inventive concept, or adds part or more of the configuration of other inventive concepts. The concept of the invention may be modified by exchanging parts or the like.

<Resin components that can replace nails>
In a game machine that includes a game board main body, a fixed member whose arrangement is fixed to the game board main body, and a connecting member that connects the game board main body and the fixed member, the connecting member is A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it is configured to be able to guide a ball.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which a falling path of a game ball is randomly configured by nails driven into a gaming board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-325743). However, in the conventional game machines mentioned above, the falling path of the game ball is made up only of nails, so it is necessary to drive nails into almost the entire area of the game board, but it is necessary to ensure the strength of the part where the nails are driven. Therefore, it is necessary to make the game board thicker, so there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the game board is reduced, especially in the design of the thickness direction.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the game ball can be guided by the connecting member that connects the game board main body and the fixed member, so the range where the connecting member is arranged is limited to the game board main body. There is no need to drive nails into the Therefore, in the range where the connecting member is arranged, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the game board main body, particularly in the thickness direction, can be improved.

For example, by forming thinner parts where the thickness can be arbitrarily designed, material costs can be reduced by reducing the volume of parts required for the entire game board, and by making the thickness thinner, the empty space can be used to create production parts (electronic parts). Decorative substrates, etc.) can be arranged to make it possible to perform various light emitting effects.

Note that the arrangement of the connecting members is not limited in any way, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, the connecting member may be placed above the center frame of the game board so as to form the part that first collides with a game ball introduced into the game area, or the connecting member may be placed above the center frame of the game board so as to constitute the part that first collides with the game ball introduced into the game area, or the connecting member may be placed above the center frame of the game board as a member that holds the through gate inside. It may be arranged on the left and right sides of the frame, or it may be arranged on the lower side of the center frame as a member for guiding the game ball to the winning hole.

Further, the connecting member may be configured to have a left-right symmetrical shape, or may be configured to have a left-right asymmetrical shape. Basically, if the gaming area is bilaterally symmetrical, it is preferable that the connecting member is also configured in a bilaterally symmetrical shape, and if the gaming area is bilaterally asymmetrical (for example, in the case of a right-handed machine), It is preferable that the connecting member is also configured to have a left-right asymmetric shape.

A gaming machine A2 in the gaming machine A1, wherein the connecting member includes a guide section configured to be able to guide a game ball, and the guide section is configured to protrude toward the gaming area side.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the guide section can produce the same effect as the nails that were formed protruding from the gaming area side, and in addition, the connecting member is light-transmissive. If the nail is made of a transparent resin material, it can transmit light more easily than a nail. Therefore, even in the range where the guide section is arranged, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the visibility of the light emitted from behind the guide section to the player side.

Note that the shape of the guide part may be imitated to the shape of a nail, but if the narrow shape of the nail is made of resin material, the strength will be lower than that of a nail made of metal material, so multiple nails may be used. A single guide portion may surround the area where the guide portion is placed. This makes it possible to solve the problem of insufficient strength even when it is formed from a resin material.

In the gaming machine A2, the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the guide section includes a recessed section on the side opposite to the gaming area side.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, it is possible to reduce the weight of the connecting member. Furthermore, by making the wall thickness of the guide part thinner, the guide part can be easily bent, and when the game ball collides with the guide part, the guide part is deflected, which causes the difference between the game ball and the guide part. Since the generated load can be alleviated, it is possible to easily avoid damage to the guide section due to the load at the time of impact.

In the game machine A2 or A3, the guide section includes a first guide section disposed close to the game board main body, and a second guide section disposed close to the fixed member, and the first guide section A gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the width is narrower than that of the second guide portion.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A2 or A3, since the first guide part is narrow, the guide part itself is easily deflected, and the load can be relieved without having to bend the game board body. On the other hand, the second guide part can release the load by bending the fixed member formed as a thin plate even if the guide part itself does not bend.

Note that the aspect of the narrow width may be set such that the maximum width is small, or may be specified by the presence of a narrow portion such as when the shape is a triangle.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the guiding portion is characterized in that a portion where the angle at which the sides constituting the frame shape intersect with each other when viewed in the extending direction is the largest is located below the upper end position. A5 gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, it is possible to allow bending deformation around the part where the angle is maximum, thereby making it easier to withstand the collision of the gaming ball. can.

A gaming machine A6, which is any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, wherein the member to be fixed is formed in an annular shape and is fixed inside the gaming board main body.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the game machines A1 to A5, the shape of the fixed member can be easily held by the rigidity of the game board main body.

A gaming machine A7, in any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, is configured such that the connecting member and the gaming board main body or the fixed member overlap, and the object of the overlapping changes depending on the location.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines A1 to A6, the formation of the game board main body is omitted and the fixed member is used, which makes it possible to form the game board body without omitting it. In comparison, the material cost required for the game board body can be reduced.

In addition, in the area where the fixed member and the connecting member overlap, it is possible to make it easier for light emitted from the back to pass through, and by forming the fixed member with a thin wall, it is possible to secure space on the back side. , the degree of freedom in arranging the presentation device can be improved.

A gaming machine A8 in which a light emitting means is arranged behind a location where the fixed member and the connecting member overlap in the gaming machine A7.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects achieved by the game machine A7, the installation space for the light emitting means is reduced by forming the fixed member with a thinner wall compared to the case where the light emitting means is arranged at the rear of the game board main body. can be easily secured.

Any one of gaming machines A1 to A8 includes a thin decorative member disposed between the fixed member and the connecting member, and the thin decorative member has a first positioning member formed on the fixed member. and a second positioning portion formed on the connecting member.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines A1 to A8, the thin decorative member can be aligned without being limited by the shapes of the fixed member or the connecting member.

A gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the first positioning part and the second positioning part engage with each other in the gaming machine A9.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A9, the first positioning section and the second positioning section can align the fixed member and the connecting member.

<Nailless sorting>
A passing area through which a game ball can pass, a guide means configured to be able to guide the game ball to the passing area, and a downstream area through which the game ball that has passed through the passing area flows down, the guiding means comprising: The rate at which the game ball is guided to the passing area can be changed, and the downstream area includes a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance that are configured to allow the game ball to enter, and the first ball entrance A gaming machine B1 characterized in that it is configured to be able to maintain the rate at which game balls enter the ball opening and the rate at which game balls enter the second ball opening.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that allocate game balls to winning holes using nails driven into a gaming board (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-325743). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the nails used to distribute the falling paths of the game balls may change their state relative to the base board due to collision with the game balls, and due to the change in state, the nails used to distribute the falling paths of the game balls may change. There is a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the fairness of the game, since a situation where it is easy to hit the ball or a situation where it is difficult to hit the ball may be formed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, in a situation where the rate at which the guiding means guides the game ball to the passing area can be changed, the downstream area is determined by the rate at which the game ball enters the first ball entrance and the rate at which the game ball enters the first ball entrance. Since it is configured such that the ratio of game balls entering the second ball entry port can be maintained, it becomes easier or difficult for game balls to enter the first ball entry port or the second ball entry port. This can be avoided and the game can be improved from the viewpoint of fairness.

In gaming machine B1, gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the downstream region is formed of a resin material.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B1, since the flowing area is formed from a resin material, if a part of the resin member forming the flowing area is damaged, the resin member itself can be replaced. can be easily restored to its original state. Therefore, compared to the case where game balls are sorted using nails, improvements can be made in terms of ease of maintenance and extension of the operating period of the game machine.

In addition, in the case of nails, even if they are bent, it is difficult to visually determine, and the ball may be operated in a state where the distribution state (balance) of the game balls has changed from the time of shipment. If a bend is formed, it can be made difficult to create a state different from the state at the time of shipment by making the shape difficult to bend or by designing the product to be easily damaged if bend occurs. Thereby, it is possible to easily maintain the distribution state (balance) of the game balls as they were at the time of shipment.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the first ball entry port is arranged upstream of the second ball entry port, and the profit that the player obtains when a game ball enters the second ball entry port is , a gaming machine B3 characterized in that the profit is larger than the profit obtained by the player when a game ball enters the first ball entrance.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine B1 or B2, it is possible to draw attention to whether the game ball flows down to the second ball entrance side.

Note that the form of profits that the player can obtain is not limited in any way. For example, it may be the presence or absence of prize balls or the number of prize balls, it may be the presence or absence of a drawing of symbols, it may be a profit that changes the probability of drawing by passing a game ball, or it may be a combination of these.

Any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3 is provided with upstream means arranged upstream of the passing area and capable of guiding the game ball in a third direction different from the passing area, and the upstream means includes the above-mentioned upstream means. The game balls are configured to prevent the game balls from flowing down into the second ball entrance, and the game balls sorted in the third direction pass through a profit passage means by which the player can earn profits when the balls enter. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that it is configured to be able to flow down a path.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the gaming balls that do not go to the passing area side do not obstruct the flow of the balls heading toward the second ball entrance, and furthermore, , since there is a possibility that the ball may pass through the profit passing means, it is possible to improve attention to the game ball that has deviated from the passing area side.

In gaming machine B4, the game ball guided in the third direction by the upstream means has a higher possibility of entering the profit passing means when the point where guidance starts is on the upstream side. A gaming machine B5 characterized in that it is configured as follows.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4, the attention of the upstream means can be improved not only on the downstream side disposed on the profit passing means side but also on the upstream side. In other words, the game area can be configured so that even if the player is dissatisfied with the normal game, he will be comfortable with the jackpot game.

A gaming machine B6 is characterized in that a first member constituting the general winning opening side and a second member constituting the profit passing means side are positioned by engagement of resin component members in the gaming machine B5.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B5, the fastening screws can be omitted compared to the case where the first member and the second member are fixed with metal fastening screws, so the first Visibility at the overlapping position of the member and the second member can be improved.

A gaming machine B7, which is a gaming machine B6, is characterized in that the positioning method is sandwiching between the gaming board and the gaming board.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B6, it is possible to easily define the positional relationship between the first member and the second member in the portion facing the gaming area. Thereby, it is possible to avoid irregular disturbances in the flow of the game balls flowing down while contacting the first member and the second member. That is, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the front and back positions of the first member and the second member will be reversed, which tends to occur when the members are fixed to the game board body using fastening screws.

In any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, a gaming machine B8 is characterized in that it is provided with a deceleration protrusion that secures the momentum of the gaming machine until it comes directly above the profit passing means and decelerates the speed after it comes directly above the profit passing means. .

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, damage to the profit passing means due to the game ball colliding with the profit passing means at high speed can be avoided.

A gaming machine B9 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine B8, profit passing means for collecting profits from a wide range on the right and left are configured to be wide on the left and right.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine B8, even when game balls reach the profit passing means consecutively, the game balls that arrived first are allowed to flow left and right, making it easier to accept the following game balls. can do. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid defective ball entry when the game balls reach the profit passing means successively.

A gaming machine B10 characterized in that, in the gaming machine B8 or B9, an auxiliary means for assisting the falling of the gaming balls in a predetermined manner is disposed behind the falling path of the gaming balls to the profit passage means.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B8 or B9, the auxiliary means can assist the flow of the game balls to the profit passing means in a predetermined manner, so that the problems associated with the flow of the game balls can be solved. It can be improved in certain ways.

In the game machine B10, the auxiliary means is a game ball that enters a predetermined prize opening and flows down, and a flowing path of the game ball, a game machine B11.

According to the game machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine B10, it is possible to make the game ball that enters a predetermined winning hole and flows down look as if it is flowing down toward the profit passing means. As a result, the game balls that enter the predetermined prize opening during the execution of the jackpot game can be added up as the number of game balls that appear to enter the profit passing means, so most of the game balls fired are profitable. It is possible to create the illusion that the ball is entering the means of passage.

A gaming machine B12 in the gaming machine B10, wherein the auxiliary means is a decoration means for decorating the downstream path to the profit passing means from the rear.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B10, when the player's attention is focused on the flow path to the profit passing means, the decorative means makes the game more difficult to play than when no decoration is applied. It is possible to improve the interest of people.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B12, maintaining the rate at which game balls enter the first ball entry port and the rate at which game balls enter the second ball entry port in the downstream region are set to different ratios. A gaming machine B13 is characterized in that it can be executed in a plurality of states.

According to the game machine B13, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines B1 to B12, the state maintained in the downstream area can be changed in a plurality of states. For example, a device that appears and disappears at regular intervals in the downstream area may be provided, or a device that changes the angle of inclination of a slope plate provided between the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port may be used. It may be controlled.

<Make the device for distributing game balls left and right more compact>
In a game machine comprising a game board main body and a flowing means configured to allow game balls to flow down in a manner that distributes them to a plurality of ball entrances behind the front end surface of the game board main body, the game board main body includes: The flow means includes an arrangement area in which nails can be arranged to distribute the flow path of the game balls, and a non-arrangement area in which nails cannot be arranged, and the flow means is arranged so that the flow path of the game balls is arranged in the non-arrangement area. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that it is arranged in a range including the rear of the installation area.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a first ball entry port and a second ball entry port installed on the left and right sides, and a swing system configured to allow the game ball to flow down toward the first ball entry port or the second ball entry port. There is a gaming machine that includes a branch channel (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2015-144741, especially FIG. 4). The distribution channel is made of a resin material, and is formed so that the game balls can flow down inside it.In order to facilitate measures in the event of ball clogging, etc., the first ball entry port and On the upstream side of the second ball entry port (the position immediately before the ball enters), a gap portion large enough to allow the game ball to pass through is formed.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port are configured to protrude toward the front side of the game board, so it is not possible to configure the gaming area on the front side of the distribution channel. The problem was that it was difficult. In other words, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of ensuring a large range in which the game area can be formed.

In other words, because the area necessary for arranging the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port partially protrudes to the front side of the game board, the other area where the game ball can flow down is limited. There is a problem in that the range becomes narrower and the degree of freedom in designing the range in which the game balls are allowed to flow down may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, since the falling means is arranged behind the front end surface of the game board main body, other members for guiding the game balls are placed in front of the front end surface of the game board main body. Since it is possible to arrange the game area, it is possible to secure a large area in which the game area can be formed.

In the gaming machine C1, the plurality of ball entry ports include a first ball entry port, and the first ball entry port is arranged so as not to overlap a movable accessory provided in the gaming area in a front view. A gaming machine C2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C1, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the gaming ball entering the first ball entrance from being reduced due to the movable accessory.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, at least a portion of the downstream path of the gaming ball that deviates from the first ball entrance and flows downward is arranged at a position that overlaps a movable accessory arranged in the gaming area when viewed from the front. Gaming machine C3 is characterized by:

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C1 or C2, the game ball that deviates from the first ball entrance and flows down can be hidden with a movable accessory.

A game characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the flowing down means includes a direction switching section configured to cause the game balls to flow down toward the player on the upstream side of the plurality of ball entry ports. Machine C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the direction switching section allows the game balls flowing down the flowing means to flow toward the player in front of the plurality of ball entry openings, so that the game can be played. It is possible to improve the visibility of the balls and to improve the attention to the game balls flowing down toward the plurality of ball entrances.

The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the gaming machine C4 is provided with a distributing means for distributing the downward direction of the game balls at a front position of the direction switching section on the front side of the gaming board main body.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine C4, the game balls can be distributed by the distribution means even in the front position of the game board body where it is difficult to drive a nail. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the gaming area can be improved.

The game machine C5 is provided with a ball entry means configured to allow at least a portion of the game balls distributed by the distribution means to enter, and the game balls that have flown down the flow down means and down the direction switching section, A game machine C6 characterized in that game balls discharged to the back side and flowing down the flowing means are configured to be visible through the game board main body.

According to the game machine C6, the subsequent visibility of the game ball that has flown down the direction switching section is reduced, making it possible to create an illusion that the game ball has entered the ball entering means. As a result, the number of game balls flowing down the falling means can be added to the number of game balls flowing down toward the ball entering means, making it appear as if a large number of game balls are flowing down toward the ball entering means. Can be done.

In this case, the game ball flowing down the falling means and the game ball flowing down the front side of the game board body are separated by the game board body and cannot collide, so they actually flow down toward the ball entering means. It is possible to avoid that the flow of the game balls being played is obstructed by the game balls flowing down the flow down means. That is, while ensuring the entry efficiency of the game balls that are actually flowing down toward the ball entry means, an effect is performed that makes it appear to the player that even more game balls are flowing down toward the ball entry means. can do.

The gaming machine C1 includes a first ball entry port, a second ball entry port, and a first channel configured to allow a game ball to flow down toward the first ball entry port, the first channel. A gaming machine C7 is characterized in that, on the upstream side of the first ball entry port, a branch flow path through which the game ball flows in a direction deviating from the first ball entry port is provided.

According to the gaming machine C7, even if ball clogging occurs on the first ball entrance side in the first channel, the game ball can be discharged from the branched channel, so that the ball clogging can be easily resolved. Can be done.

In the gaming machine C7, the first flow path advances the game ball in a direction intersecting a predetermined straight line connecting the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port on the upstream side of the first ball entry port. A gaming machine C8 characterized in that the gaming machine C8 is configured to cause the gaming ball to deflect from the first ball entrance.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a first ball entry port and a second ball entry port installed on the left and right sides, and a swing system configured to allow the game ball to flow down toward the first ball entry port or the second ball entry port. There is a gaming machine that includes a branch channel (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2015-144741, especially FIG. 4). The distribution channel is made of a resin material, and is formed so that the game balls can flow down inside it.In order to facilitate measures in the event of ball clogging, etc., the first ball entry port and On the upstream side of the second ball entry port (the position immediately before the ball enters), a gap portion large enough to allow the game ball to pass through is formed.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the gap formed in the upstream side of the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port is large enough to allow the game ball to be ejected, and the game ball is ejected in the left-right direction. In order to ensure a passage area for game balls, there is a flow path for the game balls to flow down toward the first ball entry port, and a flow path for the game balls to flow down toward the second ball entry port. Since it is necessary to leave a space between the flow path for the ball and the left and right sides of the arrangement at least the diameter of the game ball, the width of the first ball entrance hole and the second ball entrance hole must be There was a problem in that the horizontal width for arranging the mouth and the second ball entrance hole was excessive.

In other words, the horizontal width (area) required for arranging the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port is excessive, making it possible to form a falling path for the game ball on the front or rear side of the game board. There was a problem in that the range narrowed, and the degree of freedom in designing the range in which the game balls were made to fall could be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C8, since the structure for deflecting the game ball from the first ball entrance is configured to advance the game ball in a direction intersecting a predetermined straight line, the first ball entrance Since it is not necessary to make the distance between the second ball entry port and the ball entry port larger than the diameter of the game ball, the left and right width (area) for arranging the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the range in which the game ball falls.

It should be noted that the design aspect of the range in which the game balls are made to fall is not limited in any way.
For example, the area between the game board and the glass plate of the door frame (the so-called game area) may be designed, or the area behind the front end surface of the game board (for example, the interior of the resin It may also be an aspect of the design of the flow path). In the former case, this also includes aspects of the design of the arrangement of nails driven into the game board as members for guiding game balls.

The gaming machine C8 is provided with a second flow path configured to allow a game ball to flow down toward the second ball entry port, and the second flow path is connected to the second ball entry port on the upstream side of the second ball entry port. A game machine characterized in that the game ball is configured to advance in a direction intersecting a predetermined straight line connecting the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port, thereby deflecting the game ball from the second ball entry port. C9.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C8, the horizontal width (area) for arranging the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port can be further suppressed.

In the gaming machine C8 or C9, a second flow path configured to allow a game ball to flow down toward the second ball entry port, and a game ball that flows down the first flow path and the first ball entry port. and a receiving means configured to be able to receive game balls that have deviated from the second ball entrance and game balls that have flowed down the second flow path and that have deviated from the second ball entry port. C10.

According to the game machine C10, in addition to the effects of the game machine C8 or C9, the means for receiving the game ball that has strayed from the first ball entry port and the means for receiving the game ball that has strayed from the second ball entry port are integrated. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced and the cost of parts can be reduced.

In the gaming machine C10, the gaming machine C11 is characterized in that the receiving means is arranged on the front side of the predetermined straight line.

According to the game machine C11, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine C10, it is possible to improve the visibility of the game ball received by the receiving means, so that the game ball that has entered the falling means is placed in the first ball entrance or It is possible to easily determine whether the ball has passed through the second ball entry port or whether the ball has deviated from the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port and been received by the receiving means.

In the gaming machine C10, the gaming machine C12 is characterized in that the receiving means is arranged on the back side of the predetermined straight line.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C10, the visibility of the downstream means can be improved compared to the case where the flow path for the game ball is formed on the front side of the downstream means. It is possible to easily determine that the game ball is passing through the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port provided on the downstream side of the flowing down means.

<Production is performed on the side that is easy to see, and evacuation is performed by moving to the side that is difficult to see>
A moving means is provided that can move between a first position where action is performed and a second position different from the first position, and the second position is a position where the visibility of the moving means is lower than the first position. A gaming machine D1 characterized by:

BACKGROUND ART Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a rotary member that is pivotally supported by a movable body that moves up and down inside an opening facing an image display device (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200914). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the rotary member is always visible inside the opening, so the player may not be able to see the rotary member's posture misaligned due to poor control, or the rotary member may be exposed to the player after it has over-rotated. This poses a problem in that it is easily visible and may reduce the performance effect.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the visibility of the moving means at the second position is lowered compared to the first position where the motion performance is executed, so that the position shift and over-rotation can be prevented at the second position. Even if this occurs, it can be made difficult for the player to visually recognize the situation, and it is possible to prevent the presentation effect from deteriorating.

Note that the mode of reducing the visibility of the transportation means is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, regardless of whether it is a transparent member or an opaque member, a member that obstructs the player's view may be placed between the moving means and the player, or the moving means may be displayed on a liquid crystal display that easily attracts the attention of the player. It may also be a mode in which it is displaced (evacuated) outward from the area on the front side of the device.

A gaming machine D2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine D1, the first position is located closer to the front side of the gaming machine than the second position.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D1, by moving the moving means from the second position to the first position, the visible size of the moving means itself can be expanded.

A gaming machine D3 in the gaming machine D2, wherein the moving means is rotatable about a predetermined rotation axis, and the front and rear arrangement changes according to the rotational motion.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D2, it is possible to change the front-rear arrangement of the moving means while eliminating the need to move the moving means back and forth in parallel. Therefore, the structure for changing the front and back arrangement of the moving means can be simplified.

A gaming machine D4, which is any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, and includes an auxiliary means for assisting in maintaining the state of the moving means disposed at the second position on the proper side.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the state of the moving means is made appropriate by the auxiliary means at the second position, so that the performance of the moving means at the first position is appropriately performed. can be executed.

Note that the mode of assistance is not limited at all. For example, the posture of the moving means may be corrected to the proper side by contact, or the moving means may be maintained on the proper side by an urging force.

A gaming machine D5 in the gaming machine D4, wherein the auxiliary means is arranged on the second position side with respect to the first position.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, by placing the auxiliary means on an inconspicuous side, the auxiliary means can be easily hidden. Therefore, a separate member for hiding the auxiliary means is not required, and the space in front of the auxiliary means can be secured as a performance space.

Note that the mode of arrangement on the second position side is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may simply be on an inconspicuous side, it may be on the rear side in the front-rear direction, or it may be on the outer side of the central opening of the game board that faces the liquid crystal device.

In the gaming machine D5, the second position is set closer to the back side of the gaming machine than the first position, and the auxiliary means is configured to move the player by the moving means when the moving means is placed in the second position. A gaming machine D6 characterized in that it is arranged so that the line of sight is blocked.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D5, the auxiliary means can be hidden using the moving means, so it is easy to avoid exposing the auxiliary means in the unlikely event that the moving means is evacuated. Looks good. This increases the degree of freedom in designing the auxiliary means.

In any of gaming machines D1 to D6, the movement of the moving means includes a first movement toward the first position and a second movement for placing the moving means in a state where the first movement is possible. A gaming machine D7 comprising: a movement, and is configured to bring the state of the moving means closer to a proper side during the second movement.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, it is possible to avoid a situation where the moving means is in an inappropriate state when moving toward the first position.

A gaming machine D8 in the gaming machine D7 is characterized in that the moving means is brought closer to a proper state by a biasing force.

According to the gaming machine D8, the moving means can be brought closer to the appropriate side without relying on the control.

A gaming machine D9 in the gaming machine D7 or D8, wherein the second movement is a rotational movement about a predetermined rotation axis.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D7 or D8, the state can be changed so that the moving means approaches the proper side while the attitude of the moving means is changing.

A gaming machine D10, which is any one of the gaming machines D7 to D9, wherein the front side and the back side of the moving means are formed in different manners during the first movement.

According to the game machine D10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines D7 to D9, the front side seen by the player is formed in a shape suitable for decoration, and the back side is formed in a shape suitable for functionality. be able to.

<Production that changes the appearance of the production device>
A first means capable of performing a predetermined performance is provided, and the first means is capable of changing into a first posture for performing the first performance and a second posture for performing a second performance as the predetermined performance. , A gaming machine E1 characterized in that the side facing the front changes between the first posture and the second posture.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine that includes an attitude changing member that is pivotally supported by a movable body that moves up and down inside an opening facing an image display device (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200914). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machines, the posture changing member always faces the same side toward the front, and there is no change in appearance beyond changing the posture, so it is difficult to improve the presentation effect using the posture changing member. There was a problem that there was room for improvement from this point of view.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the front-facing side of the first means is configured to change between the first attitude and the second attitude, each of the single movable means called the first means By designing the side surfaces in different ways, it is possible to change the viewed side (front side), so that the first means can be seen by the player as being completely different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance of the first means.

Note that the mode of the predetermined performance is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be an action effect in which at least a part of the first means operates, or a light emission effect using light emitted from a light emitting means included in the first means.

In the gaming machine E1, the first means includes predetermined light emitting means arranged along a predetermined shape so that the figures can be visually recognized by the emitted light, and the figures visually recognized by the predetermined light emitting means are A gaming machine E2 characterized in that it is configured to be changeable between a first attitude and the second attitude.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the presentation effect of the first means can be improved by changing the graphic visually recognized by the predetermined light emitting means.

Note that the mode of change in the figure visually recognized by the predetermined light emitting means is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the visible figure may be changed by controlling the light emitting pattern of each light emitting element of the predetermined light emitting means in a stopped state, or the light emitting state of each light emitting element of the predetermined light emitting means may be fixed and the light emitting state of each light emitting element of the predetermined light emitting means is fixed. It may be possible to change the visible figure (such as an afterimage) by operating the light emitting means, or it may be a combination of these.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the first means is movable between a first position and a second position, and the outer shape of the first means is visible at the first position and the outer shape is visible at the second position. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that the outer shape of the first means that is possible is different from that of the first means.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, since the first means is configured so that the visible external shape changes while moving, it can produce effects that are difficult to achieve with a single member. It can be visually recognized by the player. Thereby, the performance effect of the first means can be improved.

A gaming machine E4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine E3, an area in which the first means can perform a performance operation is set in accordance with a performance mode.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E3, by configuring the area necessary for the performance operation performed by the first means to change in size in accordance with the mode of performance, the first means Even if the area in which the first means can perform a performance change depending on the arrangement of can be improved.

A gaming machine E5, which is the gaming machine E3 or E4, further comprising a dividing means arranged to divide the first means arranged at the first position in a predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E3 or E4, the dividing means allows the first means to be seen in the first position and the first means to be seen in the second position (non-divided). can be made different.

In any of gaming machines E3 to E5, the predetermined light emitting means has a shape that is visually recognized in the first position and in the first attitude, and a shape of which corresponds to a shape of a movement assisting means that assists the movement of the game ball in the game area. A gaming machine E6 characterized by being configured as follows.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E3 to E5, it is possible to perform an effect that suggests the traveling direction of the gaming ball to the player by emitting light in the first posture. In addition to a stand-alone performance, it can also be used as a performance related to the direction of movement of the game ball.

Note that the mode of the advancement aid means is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a metal rail that includes a part that guides the ball to the game area, or it may be a guide means that is placed in the game area and guides the game ball to flow down, or it may be a metal rail that includes a part that guides the ball to the game area, or it may be a guide device that is placed in the game area and guides the game ball to flow down, or it may be a metal rail that includes a part that guides the game ball to the game area. It is also possible to use a ball passing state switching means that can be switched by.

A gaming machine E7 in the gaming machine E6, characterized in that the figure visually recognized in the second position and in the second attitude is a figure for drawing attention to a predetermined ball entry area into which a game ball can enter.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E6, another type of light production can be performed by a single first means as a light production executed for the same purpose. Thereby, it is possible to easily prevent the player from getting bored with the performance.

In any of the gaming machines E3 to E7, the movement of the first means includes a first movement toward the first position and a second movement for placing the moving means in a state where the first movement is possible. A gaming machine E8, characterized in that it is configured to bring the state of the first means closer to a proper side during the second movement.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines E3 to E7, it is possible to avoid a situation where the moving means is in an inappropriate state when moving toward the first position.

In the gaming machine E8, the first means is a gaming machine E9 characterized in that the state is brought closer to the proper side by a biasing force.

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E8, the first means can be brought closer to the proper side without relying on the control.

A gaming machine E10, in the gaming machine E8 or E9, wherein the second movement is a rotational movement about a predetermined rotation axis.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E8 or E9, the state can be changed so that the moving means approaches the proper side while the attitude of the displacement means is changing.

A gaming machine E11, which is any one of the gaming machines E8 to E10, characterized in that the front side and the back side of the displacement means are formed in different manners during the first movement.

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E8 to E10, the front side seen by the player is formed in a shape suitable for decoration, and the back side is formed in a shape suitable for functionality. be able to.

<Support structure of operated member>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable; support means for supporting the displacement means; A gaming machine F1 comprising: a restriction section;

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a movable unit that moves up and down by driving a pair of left and right drive devices has a rotary movement member that is rotationally driven by separate drive devices (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-000482 (see official bulletin). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the movable unit is supported by plate portions extending vertically on both the left and right sides in a manner that it can move directly in the vertical direction. If a load is applied in a direction that causes the movable unit to lose its posture (tilt), the smoothness of the movable unit's motion will be lost, and the possibility of damage to the power transmission system will increase due to increased motion resistance. was there. That is, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoints of performance and durability.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the support means that supports the displacement means includes a restriction section that restricts the displacement of the displacement means as well as an allowance section that allows the displacement of the displacement means. Even if a shift in drive timing occurs, the displacement of the displacement means with respect to the support means is allowed in advance, so the smoothness of the movement of the displacement means can be maintained within the permissible range, and the distance between the support means and the displacement means can be maintained. The load applied to the displacement means can be reduced. This makes it possible to improve performance and durability.

In addition, as the support mode of the displacement means, two types of support modes can be configured by making it possible to appropriately select whether to increase the proportion affected by the allowable section or to increase the proportion influenced by the restriction section. can.

Although the conventional gaming machine has been described as having a movable unit that is displaced in the vertical direction, the direction of displacement of the displacement means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be in an up-down direction, a left-right direction, a front-back direction, a rotation direction around a predetermined rotation axis, or a combination thereof.

Note that the configurations of the allowing portion and the restricting portion can be arbitrarily set in shape, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the permitting portion may be formed as a long hole extending in the first direction, and the restricting portion may be formed in a perfect circular shape with a diameter shorter than the longitudinal dimension of the permitting portion.

The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the allowing section is configured to allow displacement of the displacing means in a state where displacement of a restricted section of the displacing means is restricted by the restricting section. Game machine F2.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F1, displacement of the displacement means with the restricting portion as the base end can be allowed. As a result, compared to the case where the presence or absence of displacement restriction is switched by electrical control, smoothness of displacement of the displacement means can be easily ensured since no control is required.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the permissible section has a first permissible state in which displacement of the displacement means is permitted within a first permissible width, and a second permissible state in which the displacement means is permitted to be displaced within a second permissible width smaller than the first permissible width. A gaming machine F3 is configured to be able to change its state between a second permissible state and a second permissible state.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, even if the displacement widths corresponding to the types of displacement of the displacement means are different, the one allowable portion can accommodate the different displacement widths. can.

A gaming machine F4 in the gaming machine F3, wherein the state change is caused by a change in the attitude of the displacement means.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine F3, the change in the attitude of the displacement means causes a change in the allowable width allowed by the allowable section, so that the attitude of the displacement means subject to the allowable and restricted displacement and the displacement Since the size of the permissible width can be directly linked to the size of the allowable width, malfunctions of the displacement means can be avoided in advance. Furthermore, the number of structural members can be reduced compared to the case where a separate limiting member is used to hold down the displacement means and limit displacement.

In the game machine F4, the displacement means is supported by the support means so as to be displaced along a first direction, and the first permissible state is such that the direction of displacement of the displacement means permitted by the permissible portion is the same as the first direction. The gaming machine F5 is included on a predetermined plane parallel to the first direction, and the second permissible state is characterized in that a direction of displacement of the displacement means permitted by the permissible portion intersects with the predetermined plane.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F4, by switching the direction that the allowing section allows as the direction of displacement of the displacement means with respect to the first direction, the allowable range of displacement by the allowing section can be changed. can.

As a result, in relation to the control of the drive device that drives the displacement means, the attitude of the displacement means is maintained in the first permissible state in a range where positional deviation in the first direction between the displacement means and the support means is likely to occur; By setting the posture of the displacement means to the second permissible state within the range where it is possible to prevent positional displacement or where it is desired to prevent positional displacement, the displacement of the displacement means can be made sharp without being too soft or too hard. A certain displacement pattern can be provided.

In any of gaming machines F3 to F5, the displacement means supports an operating means configured to be operable, the operating means is configured to be able to operate at high speed, and the high-speed operation is controlled by the allowing portion A gaming machine F6 is characterized in that it can be executed in a state that is a 2-permissible state.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the game machines F3 to F5, it is possible to easily prevent the displacement means from being displaced due to the inertial load caused by the high-speed operation of the operation means.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, a gaming machine F7 is characterized in that the support means is comprised of a pair of members that support the displacement means from both sides.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines F1 to F6, the displacement means can be stably supported.

The gaming machine F7 is characterized in that the pair of members are configured to be rotatably displaceable coaxially about a first axis, and the allowable width of the allowable portion is formed to extend along the first axis direction. Gaming machine F8.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F7, it is possible to cause the displacement means to be displaced within the allowable width allowed by the allowing portion on the tangential plane of the cylinder centered on the first axis. can. In other words, the displacement permitted by the permissible portion can be caused as a displacement in which the displacement means is twisted with respect to the first axis.

As a result, it is possible to three-dimensionally deal with deviations in the amount of displacement that are difficult to avoid, such as backlash that may occur when using gears in the drive transmission mechanism on both the left and right sides, and the rotation of the displacement means about the first axis. Displacement can be caused smoothly.

A gaming machine F9 in the gaming machine F8, wherein one of the supporting means includes the limiting section.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F8, it is possible to tolerate misalignment when assembling the other supporting means and the moving means, and it is possible to facilitate the assembling.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F9, the permissible part is formed as a long hole, and the restricting part is formed as a long hole whose longitudinal direction is shorter than the longitudinal direction of the permissible part. F10.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F9, the moving means can be slid in the longitudinal direction of the restricting part and the allowing part. As a result, the load generated on the moving means can be relieved, and the load can be used to direct the movement of the moving means.

<Technical philosophy in which multiple types of fixing forces for transportation means are set>
It comprises a movable means of transportation and a load applying means capable of applying a load to the means of transportation, and the load applying means is capable of switching the load to be applied depending on the state of the means of transportation. A gaming machine G1 featuring:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are equipped with a regulating means (load applying means) configured to be movable to a position where the movement of a moving means that moves up and down can be regulated (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-54856 ). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, although the movement of the moving means can be regulated by the regulating means, no further effect can be expected, and the cost effectiveness with respect to the volume occupied by the regulating means is low. In other words, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement from the perspective of making effective use of regulatory means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the load applied from the load applying means to the moving means can be switched according to the state of the moving means, so that the load applied to the moving means can be changed by using a single load applying means. Multiple types of effects can be applied to movement. That is, the load applying means can be effectively utilized.

Note that the aspect of the state of the moving means that is adopted as a reference for switching the load of the load applying means is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the difference in the state of the moving means may be a difference in the arrangement of the moving means, or a difference in the mode of operation.

Examples of states in which the operating modes are different include, for example, a state in which the moving means actively operates, and a state in which the moving means is actively operated, and a state in which the moving means is in response to the operation of another moving means held by the moving means or another moving means disposed outside the moving means. A passively operating state is exemplified.

Note that the mode of switching the load to be applied is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the direction of the load based on the moving direction of the moving means may be switched (it may be switched between a direction opposite to the moving direction of the moving means and a direction intersecting the moving direction of the moving means). (b) The mode of the load applied by the load applying means may be switched depending on the elapsed time from the start of movement of the moving means.

Further, the mode of switching the load may be switching the magnitude of the load or switching the mode of load generation. The load may be generated, for example, as a frictional force (brake) due to friction with the moving means, or as a restrictive force (stopper) generated when the limit of the allowable range of movement is reached. .

In the gaming machine G1, the load applying means has a facing state in which it applies a load in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the moving means, and a crossing state in which it applies a load in a direction crossing the moving direction of the moving means. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that the applied load can be switched.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G1, by changing the arrangement of the load applying means with respect to the moving route of the moving means, it is possible to switch the load applied from the load applying means to the moving means. A complicated shape for switching the load is not required, and the load applying means can be easily configured.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the load applying means includes a load applying moving means movable in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the moving means, and the load applying moving means is configured to be able to come into contact with the moving means. A gaming machine G3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the load applying moving means can be configured to move in and out of the moving route of the moving means by linear motion (direct motion). In order to switch the mode of the load applied from the load applying means to the moving means, it is possible to reduce the movement width (the movement width taking into account variations in operation) required of the load applying moving means.

Therefore, the space for arranging the load applying moving means can be reduced. In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the space for arranging the moving means and the load-applying means is usually limited to a size (volume) determined by a predetermined standard. By suppressing the space required, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the moving means and the load applying means.

In the gaming machine G3, the load applying means is configured such that its moving direction intersects the moving direction of the moving means at right angles, and the movement of the moving means in the moving direction is restricted. Game machine G4.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G3, it is possible to increase the difference in the aspect of the load applied to the moving means with the minimum movement width of the load applying means.

A gaming machine G5 characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, switching of the load applied by the load applying means is performed in accordance with the position of the moving means.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, it is possible to cope with the case where the presentation operation of the moving means is configured to be different depending on the position.

For example, in a case where the moving means is equipped with a predetermined operating means, the operating means may operate at high speed when the moving means is stationary, but the operating means may stop or operate at low speed when the moving means is moving. When a performance is performed, there may be a demand for the moving means to be securely fixed when the moving means is at rest, while a demand is required for the moving means to be gently fixed (braked) when the moving means is moving. may occur.

By switching the load applied by the load applying means in accordance with the position of the moving means, different demands depending on the arrangement of the moving means can be satisfied.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G5, the load applying means applies a load when the moving means moves in the forward direction, and does not apply the load when the moving means moves in the opposite direction. A game machine G6 characterized by a release function.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, it is possible to respond to the difference in the forward and reverse directions of movement by depending on the presence or absence (size) of the load from the load applying means.

Any one of the gaming machines G1 to G6 is characterized in that it includes a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving means, and a separation load is generated in a direction that separates the moving means and the driving means. Game machine G7.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines G1 to G6, the generation of a separation load allows the moving means to be separated from the driving means, and the transmission efficiency of driving force can be reduced. .

In the gaming machine G7, the gaming machine G8 is characterized in that the separation load is generated from the load applying means.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G7, the load applying means can be configured with multiple functions.

In gaming machine G7, gaming machine G9 is characterized in that the separation load is generated in the driving means.

According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G7, it is possible to reduce the driving force transmission efficiency on the upstream side of the driving force transmission path.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G9, it is possible to configure a case in which a frictional force is applied from the load applying means to the moving means, and a case in which the load applying means restricts movement of the moving means. A gaming machine G10 featuring the following.

According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G9, variations in the movement mode of the moving means are increased even when the moving means is moved by generating the same driving force. be able to.

<The modes of the plurality of guide means for guiding the movement of the transportation means are different>
It is characterized by comprising a movable means of transportation, a first guide means for guiding the movement of the means of transportation, and a second guide means for guiding the movement of the means of transportation in a manner different from that of the first guide means. A gaming machine H1.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which movement of a moving means is guided by a pair of guiding means having the same aspect (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-157474). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the aspect of the load applied to the pair of parts of the moving means that are guided by the guide means is common, and in order to improve durability, the load applied to each part is the same. Since it is necessary to increase the strength of the moving means, there is a problem in that the degree of freedom in designing the moving means (the part of the moving means guided by the pair of guide means) is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, the first guide means and the second guide means for guiding the movement of the moving means are different in the guidance manner, so the manner of the applied load and the necessary for improving durability are different. The intensity values can be different. Therefore, since the portion of the transportation means that is guided by multiple guide means can be configured to have different shapes and strengths, the portion of the transportation means that is guided by multiple guide means ) can improve the degree of freedom in design.

Note that the difference in aspect between the first guide means and the second guide means is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the first guide means may be configured as a guide rail, while the second guide means may be configured as a guide hole, or the first guide means may be a rotation guide means supported by a predetermined rotation axis. The second guide means may be configured as a guide groove, or may be configured by changing the combination of each structure.

For example, when the first guide means and the second guide means are guide grooves, the extending direction of the grooves in the first guide means and the second guide means may be parallel, but the widths of the grooves may be different; An embodiment may also be adopted in which the extending directions of the grooves in the first guide means and the second guide means are non-parallel, but the grooves have a common width.

In the gaming machine H1, the gaming machine H2 is characterized in that the second guiding means is arranged such that at least a portion thereof runs along the first guiding means.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H1, since at least a portion of the second guiding means follows the first guiding means, the moving means can be operated in two stages.

In the gaming machine H2, the second guide means includes a part that is parallel to the first guide means, and an auxiliary part that guides the moving means in a direction different from that when guided by the part that is parallel to the first guide means. Features of gaming machine H3.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H2, the moving direction in which the moving means is guided can be changed at the boundary between the annexed section and the auxiliary section. Therefore, the movement mode of the moving means can be complicated.

Any of the gaming machines H1 to H3 includes a transmission means for transmitting a driving force for moving the moving means to the moving means, and the displacement direction of the transmitting means is one direction regardless of the moving direction of the moving means. A gaming machine H4 characterized in that it is fixed to.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the design of the driving force transmission system is made easier compared to the case where the displacement direction of the transmission means is changed while the moving means is moving. be able to.

A gaming machine H5 in the gaming machine H4, wherein the transmitting means is configured to transmit driving force via a guided portion guided by the second guiding means.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine H4, the driving force is transmitted via the guided part guided by the narrow second guide means, so that the guided part is not affected when the driving force is transmitted. Misalignment can be suppressed.

The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that the guided section is configured to overtake the auxiliary guide section guided by the first guide means in the moving direction of the transmission means.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H5, the entire weight of the auxiliary guide section is applied to the guided section, and compared to the case where the guided section is driven against the entire weight, the movement means is The driving force required at the start of movement can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines H2 to H6, when the moving means is guided by the annexed section, the first direction of the moving means is rotated in a rotational direction with the second guiding means side of the moving means as the rotation axis. When the guide means side is energized and the moving means is guided by the auxiliary part, the second guide means side of the moving means rotates in the rotational direction with the first guide means side of the moving means as the rotation axis. A game machine H7 characterized in that it is energized.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H2 to H6, when a roller guided by the guide means is adopted as a configuration, it becomes easier to rotate the roller, so that the roller as a guided member can be easily rotated. wear can be reduced.

In any of gaming machines H3 to H7, when the moving means is guided by the auxiliary part, the moving means is maintained at a predetermined part of the first guiding means, and the first guiding means is guided by the auxiliary part. 2. A gaming machine H8 characterized in that the width is wider than that of the two guiding means.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H3 to H7, the movement means guided by the auxiliary part can be maintained at a predetermined part by the wide first guide means. can stabilize the movement of Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the part of the moving means guided by the second guide means from becoming unstable when passing through the boundary between the annexed part and the auxiliary part. Thereby, the movement of the moving means can be stabilized, and when the movement is configured to change in stages, smooth stage switching can be performed.

Furthermore, since the support area of the first guide means at a predetermined portion can be increased, local wear between the moving means and the first guide means can be easily avoided.

A gaming machine H9 in the gaming machine H8, wherein the predetermined portion is configured to at least suppress vertical displacement of the moving means.

According to the game machine H9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine H8, it is possible to reduce the load required to move the moving means in the portion guided by the first guide means.

A gaming machine H10, which is the gaming machine H8 or H9, wherein the electric wiring connected to the moving means is arranged through the first guiding means.

According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H8 or H9, it is possible to secure a sufficient cross-sectional area for passing the electrical wiring, and to prevent the displacement of the electrical wiring when the moving means is guided by the auxiliary part. Since this can be suppressed, the durability of the electrical wiring can be improved.

<Characteristics A group> (invalid control)
A discriminating means capable of performing discrimination, a display means displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discriminating means, an operating means operable by the player, and a display means based on the operation of the operating means. a display control means capable of displaying on the display means a mode in which a particular determination is made, and a privilege capable of granting an advantageous benefit to a player when identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. a first processing execution means capable of executing the first processing when power supply is started; A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it has an invalidating control means capable of processing an operation of the means as invalid.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game is executed. A gaming machine has been proposed in which initial settings are executed as a power-on process when the gaming machine is powered on (prior art document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, when the initial setting is executed, it is necessary to restrict the execution of the game until the game can be started.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform initial settings.

According to the gaming machine A1, if the operating means is operated during the period in which the first process is being executed, the operation can be invalidated. This has the effect of suppressing problems that hinder operation control.

In the gaming machine A1, the gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the first process is a process necessary for displaying the mode on the display means.

According to the gaming machine A2, during the period in which the first process is executed in which the process necessary for displaying the aspect on the display unit is executed, the process in which the operation of the operating unit is invalidated is executed. This has the effect of suppressing defects.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the invalidation control means is configured to be able to set an invalidation period in which the operation of the operating means is invalidated if the first process is not completed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that it is a gaming machine that is

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, if the first process is completed within a period until the predetermined condition is satisfied, an invalid period is not set, and therefore a period in which the operating means cannot be operated. This has the effect of suppressing problems that occur over a long period of time.

Any of the gaming machines A1 to A3 has a setting process execution means capable of executing a setting process based on setting information, and the first process execution means also executes the first process during the period in which the setting process is being executed. A gaming machine A4 configured to be able to execute one process, and wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied when the setting process is completed by the setting process execution means.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, if the period in which the setting process is executed is long and the first process is completed, the operation means Since the operating means is not invalidated, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the operation means is invalidated for a long period of time.

<Characteristics Group B>
An information acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means in which information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored, a determination means capable of executing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the determination. A display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the means, and a benefit that can provide advantageous benefits to a player when the display means displays identification information for indicating a particular determination result. A gaming machine comprising: a prior determination means capable of performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means before the determination by the determination means; and a prior determination means by the prior determination means. The present invention includes a performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on the determination result, and a prohibition period setting means capable of setting a prohibition period during which execution of the determination by the preliminary determination means is prohibited. Characteristic game machine B1.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game is executed. When a game ball enters the starting slot, a random number etc. for executing a game lottery etc. is obtained and stored as a reserved ball until the lottery is executed. A gaming machine has been proposed in which judgments such as the validity judgment of the reserved ball are executed, and a preview performance is executed based on the preread result (prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there have been cases where there has been a problem with the performance of the game because the performance is executed based on the pre-read result.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine in which the problems are suppressed.

According to the gaming machine B1, a prohibition period is set in which execution of the determination by the advance determination means is prohibited, so a period in which the performance based on the new advance determination cannot be executed is set, and the performance based on the advance determination is suppressed. There is an effect that it can be done.

In the gaming machine B1, the prohibition period setting means can set a first prohibition period and a second prohibition period that is longer than the first prohibition period, and the advance determination means determines whether a specific condition is satisfied. If it is not within the second prohibition period, the preliminary determination is executed, and if the specific condition is not satisfied, the preliminary determination is executed unless it is within the first prohibition period. A gaming machine B2 is characterized in that it is configured to enable.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, by using the first prohibition period and the second prohibition period properly, it is possible to switch the period in which advance determination is not performed depending on the situation, and to adjust the period according to the situation. This has the effect that suitable control can be executed.

The gaming machine B1 or B2 has a specific effect execution means that can execute a specific effect based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the prohibition period setting means sets a prohibition period corresponding to a period in which the specific effect is executed. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that it is configured to be settable.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B1 or B2, a prohibition period is set corresponding to the period in which the specific performance is executed, so that when the specific performance is started, the performance determined in advance is executed. This has the effect of suppressing the problem of interruption.

<Feature C group>
An information acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means in which information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored, a determination means capable of executing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the determination. a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the means; and a bonus game that is advantageous for a player to be executed when the identification information for indicating a particular determination result is displayed on the display means. A gaming machine having a bonus game execution means, a pre-discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means before the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the pre-discrimination means. and a prohibition period setting means capable of setting a prohibition period during which execution of the discrimination by the preliminary discrimination means is prohibited, A gaming machine C1 characterized in that the prohibition period setting means is configured to be able to set a plurality of different prohibition periods.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game is executed. When a game ball enters the starting slot, a random number etc. for executing a game lottery etc. is obtained and stored as a reserved ball until the lottery is executed. A gaming machine has been proposed in which judgments such as the validity judgment of the reserved ball are executed, and a preview performance is executed based on the preread result (prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there have been cases where there has been a problem with the performance of the game because the performance is executed based on the pre-read result.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine in which the problems are suppressed.

According to the gaming machine C1, it is possible to set a plurality of different prohibition periods, so the length of the prohibition period can be varied depending on the state, and this has the effect of suppressing the problem of the prohibition period becoming unnecessarily long. be.

In the gaming machine C1, the prohibition period setting means is configured to be able to set a prohibition period corresponding to the number of information determined as the specific determination result stored in the storage means. Characteristic game machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, a prohibition period is set that corresponds to a specific determination result and the number stored in the storage means. Since the prohibition period is set, it is possible to suppress the problem of a long prohibition period.

The gaming machine C1 or C2 has a specific effect execution means that can execute a specific effect based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the prohibition period setting means sets a prohibition period corresponding to a period in which the specific effect is executed. A gaming machine C3 characterized in that it is configured to be settable.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, a prohibition period is set corresponding to the period in which the regular performance is executed, so that when the specific performance is started, the performance determined in advance is executed. This has the effect of suppressing the problem of interruption.

<Characteristic group D>
An information acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means in which information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored, a determination means capable of executing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the determination. a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the means; and a bonus game that is advantageous for a player to be executed when the identification information for indicating a particular determination result is displayed on the display means. A gaming machine having a bonus game execution means, wherein the bonus game is composed of a plurality of small bonus games, and the gaming machine has a suggestion corresponding to the bonus given to the player in the small bonus game. The present invention is characterized in that it has a suggestion mode execution means capable of executing the suggestion mode, and an imparting means capable of attaching specific information when the suggestion mode is executed by the suggestion mode execution means. Game machine D1.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game is executed. A gaming machine has been proposed in which a winning game is executed in which a lottery result such as a win is announced, and a notification is executed at a specific timing such as that the lottery result is a variable probability win that is advantageous to the player (Prior art document: JP-A No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a problem that the timing at which the notification was executed tended to be constant, making the game monotonous.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine in which the problems are suppressed.

According to the gaming machine D1, specific information can be announced at the timing when a bonus is given in a small bonus game and a suggestion mode is executed, so the timing at which specific information is announced can be varied. There is an effect that it can be done.

In the gaming machine D1, variable ball entry means is variable between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than in the first state; and the variable ball entry means. and a privilege awarding means capable of awarding the privilege based on a game ball entering the ball, and in the small privilege game, the variable ball entry means is variable from the second state to the first state. A gaming machine D2 is characterized in that it is configured to allow

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, by executing the small bonus game, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the variable ball entry means and obtain a privilege, so that it is possible to enjoy the game. It has the effect of giving a fresh taste.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 is characterized in that it has a determining means capable of determining the minor bonus game to which the specific information can be given, among the plurality of minor bonus games. Game machine D3.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the determining means determines a small bonus game to which specific information is given, so that it is possible to determine which small bonus game among the bonus games has the specific information. This has the effect of making it possible to vary the amount of money awarded and providing a variety of games.

<Characteristic group E>
Determining a discriminating means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means, and a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means. a dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a specific determination result; and a benefit granting means capable of granting an advantageous benefit to a player when identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. The gaming machine has a storage means storing a plurality of dynamic display period groups in which a plurality of different dynamic display periods are set as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means, In the dynamic period group, a determination probability determined by the dynamic display period determining means for the set dynamic display period is set in advance, and in the plurality of dynamic display period groups, A specific dynamic display period group is set in which the probability of the specific dynamic display period being determined is higher than other dynamic display periods, and the dynamic display period determining means determines that a predetermined condition is satisfied. The dynamic display period is determined from the specific dynamic display period group based on the above, and the gaming machine executes the specific performance when it is determined in advance that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that it has a specific performance execution means that allows for.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game is executed. A gaming machine has been proposed in which a winning game is executed in which a lottery result such as a win is announced, and a notification is executed at a specific timing such as that the lottery result is a variable probability win that is advantageous to the player (Prior art document: JP-A No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a problem that the game became monotonous. The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that suppresses the problem of monotonous play.

According to the gaming machine E1, it can be determined in advance by the specific effect that the dynamic display period is determined from the specific dynamic display period group, so that it can be made to expect that the dynamic display will be performed in the specific dynamic display period. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine E1, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the dynamic display period determining means is capable of determining the dynamic display period from the specific dynamic display period group until an end condition is satisfied. A gaming machine E2 characterized in that it is configured as follows.

According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the state in which the dynamic display period is determined from the specific dynamic display period group continues until the termination condition is satisfied, so that the specific dynamic display period This has the effect that the game can be easily executed continuously, and the special dynamic display period can give the game a fresh feel.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, when the dynamic display period determining means determines a dynamic display period from the group of specific dynamic display periods, a dynamic display period different from the specific dynamic display period is determined; A gaming machine E3 characterized in that it has a special performance execution means capable of executing a special performance.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E1 or E2, a special effect is executed by determining a dynamic display period with a low probability of being determined, so that the special effect is executed continuously. This has the effect of making it possible to determine that the specific dynamic display period group has been set continuously, and improving the player's interest.

<Characteristic group F>
Determining a discriminating means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means, and a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means. a dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a specific determination result; and a benefit granting means capable of granting an advantageous benefit to a player when identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. The gaming machine has a storage means storing a plurality of dynamic display period groups in which a plurality of different dynamic display periods are set as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means, In the dynamic period group, a determination probability determined by the dynamic display period determining means for the set dynamic display period is set in advance, and in the plurality of dynamic display period groups, A specific dynamic display period group is set in which the probability of the specific dynamic display period being determined is higher than other dynamic display periods, and the dynamic display period determining means determines that a predetermined condition is satisfied. A dynamic display period is determined from the specific dynamic display period group based on the specific dynamic display period group, and when the dynamic display period is determined from the specific dynamic display period group, a specific suggestion mode is given to the player. A gaming machine F1 is characterized in that it is a machine that notifies you.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game is executed. A gaming machine has been proposed in which a winning game is executed in which a lottery result such as a win is announced, and a notification is executed at a specific timing such as that the lottery result is a variable probability win that is advantageous to the player (Prior art document: JP-A No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a problem that the timing at which the notification was executed tended to be constant, making the game monotonous.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that suppresses the problem of monotonous play.

According to the gaming machine F1, there is an effect that the problem that the game becomes monotonous can be suppressed by making the player expect the dynamic display to be performed in the specific dynamic display period by notifying the suggestion mode.

<Feature G group>
A discriminating means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discriminating means, and identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result on the display means. In a gaming machine, the game machine has a benefit granting means capable of granting advantageous benefits to a player in a case, a performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on setting information, and a period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed. storage means for storing information based on the satisfaction of a specific condition that can be satisfied, and the performance execution means executes the performance based on the information stored in the storage means. A gaming machine G1 characterized by:

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game is executed. A configuration has been proposed in which players are informed of information related to games such as information regarding lottery results (prior art document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a problem that the game became monotonous and the player quickly became bored with the game.

The present invention was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that suppresses the problem of players getting bored with the game early.

According to the gaming machine G1, since the performance is executed based on the information stored in the storage means, the performance is executed by dynamically displaying the identification information, and the game is continuously executed. It has the effect of being easy to do.

The gaming machine G1 has a specific performance execution means that can execute a specific performance based on the fulfillment of the performance condition, and the predetermined condition is configured to be satisfied during a period in which the specific performance is executed. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, it is configured such that a predetermined condition is satisfied during the period when the specific effect is being executed, so that it is possible to expect that the specific effect will be executed. This has the effect of allowing the player to play the game and improving the interest of the game.

<Feature H group>
An information acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means in which information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored, a determination means capable of executing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the determination. a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the means; and a bonus game that is advantageous for a player to be executed when the identification information for indicating a particular determination result is displayed on the display means. A gaming machine having a bonus game execution means, an identification symbol display means capable of displaying an identification symbol corresponding to the information stored in the storage means on the display means, and an effect corresponding to the setting information. and a performance execution means capable of executing the following, wherein the performance execution means is configured to be able to execute the performance based on the display of the identification symbol. H1.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game is executed. A configuration has been proposed in which players are informed of information related to games such as information regarding lottery results (prior art document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a problem that the game became monotonous and the player quickly became bored with the game.

The present invention was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that suppresses the problem of players getting bored with the game early.

According to the gaming machine H1, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of getting bored with the game early.

<Characteristics GB1 group> (determining the period in which the setting suggestion effect is likely to be executed and the period in which it is difficult to be executed)
a discriminator capable of executing a discrimination; a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game when the discrimination result by the discriminator is the specific discrimination result; and a first probability that the probability of the specific discrimination result is Setting value setting means capable of setting one setting value from among a plurality of setting values including at least a first setting value set to a probability higher than the first setting value, and a second setting value set to a higher probability than the first probability. , a set value storage means capable of storing information regarding the set value set by the set value setting means, and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on the information stored in the set value storage means. In the gaming machine, a period setting means is capable of setting at least a first period in which the performance can be executed by the performance execution means and a second period in which the performance is more difficult to execute than in the first period. A gaming machine GB1 characterized by having the following.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery conducted based on a winning of a game ball in the starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winnings with different numbers of rounds, and some are designed to increase the interest of winning by varying the gaming value that can be acquired (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, although it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not a winning game will be executed, it is not possible to vary the game content depending on the period in which the game is executed, and the game becomes monotonous. There was a problem with it being put away.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine GB1, the ease with which the performance is performed can be varied depending on the period set by the period setting means, so that it is possible to make the player interested in the playing period. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine GB1 uses a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. It has a dynamic display performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance, and a performance mode determination means capable of determining a performance mode of the dynamic display performance, and the performance execution means is configured to perform the specified performance by the performance mode determination means. A gaming machine GB2 characterized in that the performance can be executed when a performance mode different from the performance mode for indicating that the result is a determination result.

According to the gaming machine GB2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine GB1, when an effect is executed that indicates that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is not the specific discrimination result, the effect execution means executes an effect related to the set value. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a player's desire to play decreases.

<Characteristic GC group> (The production content is determined according to the frequency with which setting suggestion production is executed)
a discriminator capable of executing a discrimination; a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game when the discrimination result by the discriminator is the specific discrimination result; and a first probability that the probability of the specific discrimination result is Setting value setting means capable of setting one setting value from among a plurality of setting values including at least a first setting value set to a probability higher than the first setting value, and a second setting value set to a higher probability than the first probability. , a set value storage means capable of storing information regarding the set value set by the set value setting means, and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on the information stored in the set value storage means. The gaming machine GC1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to determine the performance mode of the performance based on the frequency of execution of the performance by the performance execution means.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery conducted based on a winning of a game ball in the starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winnings with different numbers of rounds, and some are designed to increase the interest of winning by varying the gaming value that can be acquired (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, although it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not a winning game will be executed, it is not possible to vary the game content depending on the period in which the game is executed, and the game becomes monotonous. There was a problem with it being put away.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine GC1, the ease with which the performance is executed can be varied depending on the period set by the period setting means, so that it is possible to make the player interested in the gaming period. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine GC1, the performance mode of the performance can be determined based on the execution frequency of the performance related to the set value, so that the set value can be easily predicted by the player based on the performance to be executed. It is possible to prevent it from being put away. On the other hand, even if the performance is performed infrequently, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to predict the set value and decreasing his or her desire to play.

In the gaming machine GC1, production modes of the production executed by the production execution means include a first mode in which the information can be grasped, and a second mode in which it is more difficult to grasp the information than the first mode. It has an effect mode setting means that can set a predetermined mode from among a plurality of modes, and the effect mode setting means is configured to perform a performance mode setting means, when the number of executions of the effect within a predetermined period is less than a specific number of times, the effect mode is set to a predetermined mode from a plurality of modes. A gaming machine GC2 characterized in that it is easier to set the first aspect than in the case where the first mode is set.

According to gaming machine GC2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine GC1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the number of executions of a performance in a predetermined period is small, a performance with an easy-to-understand set value is more likely to be performed, so it is possible to provide a novel gameplay that makes the player expect that the performance will not be executed. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine GC1 or GC2, the operation means operable by the player and the frequency of execution of the performance by the performance execution means are different, including a first state in which the performance is difficult to be executed, and a state in which the performance is difficult to execute; a second state in which the performance is likely to be performed; and a state setting means that is capable of setting at least a second state in which the performance is likely to be executed; A gaming machine GC3 characterized in that it has a selection means capable of selecting a second state.

According to the gaming machine GC3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine GC1 or GC2, it becomes possible to select the first state and the second state by the selection means. Therefore, the player can choose between the gameplay of predicting the setting value by increasing the execution frequency of the performance, and the gameplay of predicting the setting value based on the content of the performance, thereby reducing the player's game performance. This has the effect of increasing the player's desire to participate in the game and increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Characteristics Group I>
an information acquisition means capable of acquiring information; a storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means; and an identification means for displaying an identification pattern in response to the storage of the information in the storage means. An identification symbol display means that can be displayed in the symbol display area, a discrimination means that can perform discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means, and identification information that indicates the discrimination result by the discrimination means are activated. a display means for dynamically displaying the identification information; a dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a dynamic display period of the identification information to be dynamically displayed on the display means; In the gaming machine, the identification symbol display means includes a benefit granting means capable of granting advantageous benefits to the player when identification information for displaying the identification symbol is displayed, and the identification symbol display means is arranged such that the information is stored in the storage means. The identification pattern is displayed at a position corresponding to the number of the information stored in the case, and the identification pattern corresponding to the case where the dynamic display of the identification information is started is not displayed in the identification pattern display area. , the display position of the displayed identification pattern can be updated and displayed, and based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the mode displayed on one identification pattern is changed to the identification pattern different from that identification pattern. A gaming machine I1 characterized in that it is configured such that symbols can be moved and displayed.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game is executed. When a game ball enters the starting hole and information such as a winning random number is acquired, up to a predetermined number can be stored as reserved balls, and a reserved symbol is displayed to indicate the stored number of reserved balls. A gaming machine that is displayed one by one in response to a reserved ball, is hidden when variable display of special symbols corresponding to the reserved balls starts, and is displayed with the order of the displayed reserved symbols updated. has been proposed (prior art document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a problem in that the performance based on the reserved symbols was monotonous and the player quickly got bored with it.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the problem of players becoming bored with the game early.

According to the gaming machine I1, by moving and displaying the mode of the identification symbol as the mode of other identification symbols, the identification information is dynamically displayed and the identification information is displayed even when the dynamic display of the identification information has not started. It is possible to make it seem as if the display position of the symbols has been updated, and by diversifying the gameplay, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine I1, when moving and displaying the mode of the identification symbol, the identification symbol display means moves and displays the identification symbol that is displayed before the currently displayed identification symbol. A gaming machine I2 characterized in that it is a gaming machine that allows players to play games.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, the dynamic display can be performed by making it seem as if the identification information has been newly dynamically displayed even when the dynamic display of the identification information has not started. This has the effect of making it seem like the number of times is higher than it actually is.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, as a dynamic display mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, a special dynamic display mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, temporarily stopped, and then the dynamic display is started again. is set, and the predetermined condition can be satisfied in the special dynamic display mode.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the special dynamic display mode is shown to the player by moving the mode of the identification symbol as if the dynamic display was actually executed multiple times. It has the effect of making it easier to think.

<Feature J group>
A processing execution means capable of executing a specific process necessary for a game when a specific condition is satisfied, and an audio output means capable of outputting a specific sound when the specific processing is executed by the processing execution means. The gaming machine has a volume setting means that can set the volume output by the sound output means, and the sound output means is set by the volume setting means when outputting the specific sound. The device is characterized in that it is configured to be able to output the specific audio by switching between outputting the specific audio at a volume that is set and outputting the specific audio at a volume that is different from the volume. A gaming machine J1.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game is executed. A gaming machine has been proposed that becomes ready for playing after initial processing necessary for playing is executed when the gaming machine is powered on. (Prior art document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-217766).

However, when a gaming machine is executing a specific process such as an initial process, there is a problem in that it is difficult for an external party to know what process is being executed.

The present invention was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the processing being executed is easy to understand.

According to the gaming machine J1, when a specific process is executed, a specific sound is output to make it easier to understand that the specific process is being executed, and a notification is made at a set volume; Since the notification may be made at different volumes, there is an effect that the notification can be easily noticed.

The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that the specific processing in the gaming machine J1 is configured such that game settings can be executed based on an operation from outside the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J1, there is an effect that unauthorized switching of settings can be suppressed.

The gaming machine J1 or J2 has an operating means that can be operated by a player, the gaming machine is configured to be able to vary and set the volume based on the operation of the operating means, and the specific processing is executed. A gaming machine J3, characterized in that the gaming machine J3 is configured to be able to output the specific sound at a newly set volume if the operating means is operated during the period in which the operating means is operated.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine J1 or J2, there is an effect that the volume setting by the operating means can be executed in an easy-to-understand manner even when a specific process is being executed.

<Feature K group> (Determines different setting suggestions depending on the start timing of the jackpot game)
a determining means capable of performing a determination; a bonus game executing means capable of executing a bonus game when a determination result by the determining means is the specific determination result; and a performance executing means capable of executing a predetermined performance; The game has a specific period setting means that can set a specific period, and the performance execution means is configured to determine whether the bonus game is executed during the specific period or when it is not during the specific period. A gaming machine K1 is characterized in that it is configured such that the ease of execution of predetermined specific effects is different.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery conducted based on a winning of a game ball in the starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winnings with different numbers of rounds, and some are designed to increase the interest of winning by varying the gaming value that can be acquired (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, although it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not a winning game will be executed, the degree of advantage to the player is constant regardless of when the winning game is executed. However, there was a problem in that it was not possible to make players interested in the execution timing of winning games, and the games became monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the ease of executing a specific performance can be varied depending on the timing at which the bonus game is executed, so that the player is made interested in the execution timing of the bonus game. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine K1, a plurality of game machines including at least a first setting value in which the probability of the specific determination result is set to a first probability, and a second setting value in which the probability of obtaining the specific determination result is set to a higher probability than the first probability. The effect execution means has a setting value setting means capable of setting one setting value from among the setting values, and a setting value storage means capable of storing information regarding the setting value set by the setting value setting means, and the effect execution means The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that a performance based on the information stored by the set value storage means can be executed as the specific performance.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, the performance execution means can execute a performance based on information regarding the set value as a specific performance, so that the player can be informed of the execution timing of the bonus game. This has the effect of making the game more interesting and increasing the player's interest in playing the game.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the performance execution means executes the above-mentioned effect when the timing at which the bonus game is executed is within the specific period, when the timing at which the bonus game ends is within the specific period. A gaming machine K3 characterized in that it is easier to execute the specific performance than when the specific performance is not within the specific period.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the ease with which a specific performance can be executed is varied based not only on the timing at which the bonus game is executed but also on the timing at which the bonus game ends. be able to. Furthermore, if the timing at which the bonus game is executed and the timing at which it ends are within the specific period, it is possible to make it easier to execute the specific performance. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game in an attempt to finish the bonus game within a specific period, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature L group>
An information acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means in which information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored, a determination means capable of executing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the determination. a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the means; and a bonus game that is advantageous for a player to be executed when the identification information for indicating a particular determination result is displayed on the display means. A gaming machine having a bonus game execution means, a suggestion aspect execution means capable of executing a suggestion aspect corresponding to a benefit given during the bonus game, and the suggestion aspect being executed by the suggestion aspect execution means. A gaming machine L1 is characterized in that it has a providing means capable of providing specific information when

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game is executed. A gaming machine has been proposed in which a winning game is executed in which a lottery result such as a win is announced, and a notification is executed at a specific timing such as that the lottery result is a variable probability win that is advantageous to the player (Prior art document: JP-A No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a problem that the timing at which the notification was executed tended to be constant, making the game monotonous.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine in which the problems are suppressed.

According to the gaming machine L1, it is possible to notify specific information at the timing when a suggestion mode corresponding to a benefit given during a bonus game is executed, so the timing at which specific information is reported can be varied. It has the effect of being able to

The gaming machine L1 includes a bonus amount determining means that can determine the amount of the bonus that is awarded during the bonus game, and a grant timing determining device that can determine the timing at which the predetermined amount of the bonus is awarded. The gaming machine L2 is characterized in that the granting means is capable of granting the specific information based on the determination result of the benefit amount determining means and the determination result of the granting timing determining means.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1, specific information is provided based on the amount of benefits and the timing of providing the benefits, so it is possible to make the players interested in the degree of awarding of the benefits. There is an effect that it can be done.

The gaming machine L2 has an advantageous period setting means capable of setting an advantageous period advantageous to the player, and the advantageous period setting means is capable of setting a period including at least a period during which the bonus game is executed as the advantageous period. A gaming machine L3, wherein the benefit amount determination means is capable of determining the benefit amount of the benefit granted during the advantageous period.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L2, specific information is provided based on the amount of benefits provided during the advantageous period, so that the specific information is provided to the player during periods other than the advantageous game. This has the effect of creating interest in benefits as well.

<Feature M group>
Determining a discriminating means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means, and a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means. a dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a specific determination result; and a benefit granting means capable of granting an advantageous benefit to a player when identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. The gaming machine has a storage means storing a plurality of dynamic display period groups in which a plurality of different dynamic display periods are set as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means, In the dynamic period group, a determination probability determined by the dynamic display period determining means for the set dynamic display period is set in advance, and in the plurality of dynamic display period groups, A specific dynamic display period group is set in which the probability of a specific dynamic display period being determined is higher than other dynamic display periods, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific dynamic display A gaming machine M1 characterized in that it has a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance when a period is determined.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game is executed. A gaming machine has been proposed in which a winning game is executed in which a lottery result such as a win is announced, and a notification is executed at a specific timing such as that the lottery result is a variable probability win that is advantageous to the player (Prior art document: JP-A No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a problem that the game became monotonous.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that suppresses the problem of monotonous play.

According to the gaming machine M1, since a specific effect can be executed when a specific dynamic display period is determined, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that a dynamic display will be performed in the specific dynamic display period. It has the effect of being able to.

The gaming machine M1 is characterized in that the dynamic display period determining means is configured to be able to determine the dynamic display period from the specific dynamic display period group until an end condition is satisfied. A gaming machine M2.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, the state in which the dynamic display period is determined from the specific dynamic display period group makes it easier for the specific dynamic display period to be executed continuously, and a special The dynamic display period has the effect of giving the game a fresh feel.

In the gaming machine M1 or M2, when the dynamic display period determining means determines a dynamic display period from the group of specific dynamic display periods, a dynamic display period different from the specific dynamic display period is determined; A gaming machine M3 characterized in that it has a special performance execution means capable of executing a special performance.

<Characteristics N group>
an information acquisition means capable of acquiring information; a storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means; and an identification means for displaying an identification pattern in response to the storage of the information in the storage means. An identification symbol display means that can be displayed in the symbol display area, a discrimination means that can perform discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means, and identification information that indicates the discrimination result by the discrimination means are activated. a display means for dynamically displaying the identification information; a dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a dynamic display period of the identification information to be dynamically displayed on the display means; In the gaming machine, the identification symbol display means includes a benefit granting means capable of granting advantageous benefits to the player when identification information for displaying the identification symbol is displayed, and the identification symbol display means is arranged such that the information is stored in the storage means. The identification pattern is displayed at a position corresponding to the number of the information stored in the case, and the identification pattern corresponding to the case where the dynamic display of the identification information is started is not displayed in the identification pattern display area. , the gaming machine is configured to be able to update and display the display position of the displayed identification symbol, and the gaming machine is configured to have a display capable of changing the display mode of the identification symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. A gaming machine N1 characterized by having a mode variable means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game is executed. When a game ball enters the starting hole and information such as a winning random number is acquired, up to a predetermined number can be stored as reserved balls, and a reserved symbol is displayed to indicate the stored number of reserved balls. A gaming machine that is displayed one by one in response to a reserved ball, is hidden when variable display of special symbols corresponding to the reserved balls starts, and is displayed with the order of the displayed reserved symbols updated. has been proposed (prior art document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a problem in that the performance based on the reserved symbols was monotonous and the player quickly got bored with it.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the problem of players becoming bored with the game early.

According to the gaming machine N1, by moving and displaying the mode of the identification symbol as the mode of another identification symbol, the identification information is dynamically displayed and the identification symbol is displayed even when the dynamic display of the identification information has not started. It is possible to make it seem as if the display position of has been updated, and by diversifying the gameplay, it is possible to suppress the problem of players getting bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine N1, when moving and displaying the mode of the identification pattern, the identification pattern display means moves and displays the identification pattern that is displayed before the currently displayed identification pattern. A gaming machine N2 is characterized in that it allows players to

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, the dynamic display can be performed by making it seem as if the identification information has been newly dynamically displayed even when the dynamic display of the identification information has not started. This has the effect of making it seem like the number of times is higher than it actually is.

In the gaming machine N1 or N2, as a dynamic display mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, a special dynamic display mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, temporarily stopped, and then the dynamic display is started again. is set, and the predetermined condition can be satisfied in the special dynamic display mode.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1 or N2, the special dynamic display mode can be presented to the player by moving the mode of the identification symbol as if the dynamic display was actually executed multiple times. It has the effect of making it easier to think.

<Characteristics Group O> (Determines different setting suggestions depending on the start timing of the jackpot game)
a determining means capable of performing a determination; a bonus game executing means capable of executing a bonus game when a determination result by the determining means is the specific determination result; and a performance executing means capable of executing a predetermined performance; The game has a specific period setting means that can set a specific period, and the performance execution means is configured to determine whether the bonus game is executed during the specific period or when it is not during the specific period. The gaming machine O1 is characterized in that it is configured such that the ease of execution of predetermined specific effects is different.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery conducted based on a winning of a game ball in the starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winnings with different numbers of rounds, and some are designed to increase the interest of winning by varying the gaming value that can be acquired (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, although it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not a winning game will be executed, the degree of advantage to the player is constant regardless of when the winning game is executed. However, there was a problem in that it was not possible to make players interested in the execution timing of winning games, and the games became monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the ease of executing a specific performance can be varied depending on the timing at which the bonus game is executed, so that the player is made interested in the execution timing of the bonus game. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine O1, a plurality of game machines including at least a first setting value in which the probability of obtaining the specific determination result is set to a first probability, and a second setting value in which the probability of obtaining the specific determination result is set to a higher probability than the first probability. The effect execution means has a setting value setting means capable of setting one setting value from among the setting values, and a setting value storage means capable of storing information regarding the setting value set by the setting value setting means, and the effect execution means The gaming machine O2 is characterized in that a performance based on the information stored by the set value storage means can be executed as the specific performance.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O1, the performance execution means can execute a performance based on information regarding the set value as a specific performance, so that the player is informed of the execution timing of the bonus game. This has the effect of making the game more interesting and increasing the player's interest in playing the game.

In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the performance execution means executes the above-mentioned effect when the timing at which the bonus game is executed is within the specific period, when the timing at which the bonus game ends is within the specific period. A gaming machine O3 characterized in that the specific performance is easier to execute than when the specific performance is not within the specific period.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O1 or O2, the ease of executing a specific performance is varied based not only on the timing at which the bonus game is executed but also on the timing at which the bonus game ends. be able to. Furthermore, if the timing at which the bonus game is executed and the timing at which it ends are within the specific period, it is possible to make it easier to execute the specific performance. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game in an attempt to finish the bonus game within a specific period, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

In any of the gaming machines described above, gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are games in which advantageous bonus games are executed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-217766).
However, there was a need to further improve the interest of the game.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.
<Means>
In order to achieve this objective, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 includes an information acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means in which information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored, and a game machine that stores information in the storage means. A discriminating means capable of performing discrimination based on the information, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means, and an identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result on the display means. and a privilege awarding means capable of awarding advantageous benefits to the player when displayed, and prior discrimination is made based on the information stored in the storage means before the discrimination by the discrimination means. a pre-discrimination means capable of performing the above-mentioned pre-discrimination, a production execution means capable of executing a production based on the result of the pre-discrimination by the pre-discrimination means, and a prohibition on execution of the pre-discrimination by the pre-discrimination means. and prohibition period setting means capable of setting a prohibition period.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, in which the prohibition period setting means can set a first prohibition period and a second prohibition period that is longer than the first prohibition period. If the specific condition is met, the prior discrimination means executes the prior discrimination if it is not within the second prohibition period, and if the specific condition is not met, the prior discrimination means executes the prior discrimination. The system is configured such that the preliminary determination can be executed unless it is within one prohibition period.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, which has a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the prohibition period setting means includes the above-mentioned prohibition period setting means. It is configured such that a prohibition period can be set corresponding to a period in which a specific performance is executed.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, there is an information acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means in which information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored, and a game machine based on the information stored in the storage means. a discriminating means capable of carrying out discrimination based on the determination, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discriminating means, and a case where the display means displays identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result; and a benefit granting means capable of granting advantageous benefits to the player, and is capable of performing preliminary determination based on the information stored in the storage means before the determination by the determination means. a pre-determination means; a performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means; and a prohibition period during which execution of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means is prohibited. and prohibition period setting means that can set a prohibition period.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the prohibition period setting means can set a first prohibition period and a second prohibition period that is longer than the first prohibition period; In this case, it is possible to perform the preliminary determination unless the second prohibition period is within the second prohibition period, and if the specific condition is not satisfied, execute the preliminary determination unless it is within the first prohibition period. It is composed of
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, it has a specific effect execution means that can execute a specific effect based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the prohibition period setting means is configured to be able to set a prohibition period corresponding to the period in which the specific effect is executed. It is something that
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

Claims (3)

an information acquisition means capable of acquiring information;
a storage means in which information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored;
Discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means;
a display means for displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means;
a gaming machine comprising: a benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit advantageous to a player when identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means;
Pre-discrimination means capable of performing pre-discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means before the discrimination by the discrimination means;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means;
A gaming machine comprising: prohibition period setting means capable of setting a prohibition period during which execution of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means is prohibited. The prohibition period setting means is capable of setting a first prohibition period and a second prohibition period that is longer than the first prohibition period,
The prior determination means executes the prior determination if the specific condition is not met if it is not within the second prohibition period, and if the specific condition is not met, the first prohibition period is executed. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute the advance determination unless it is within a period. It has a specific performance execution means that can execute a specific performance based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the prohibition period setting means is configured to be able to set a prohibition period corresponding to a period in which the specific performance is executed.

Images